THE Lighting Colomne OR SEA-MIRROUR, Containing The Seacoasts of the Northern, Eastern and Western Navigation; setting forth in divers necessary Sea-Cards all the Ports, Rivers, Bays, Roads, Depths and Sands; very curiously placed on its due Polus-heighth, furnished with the discoveries of the chief Countries, and on what course and distance they lay one from another: Never heretofore so clearly laid open, and here and there very diligently bettered and augmented, for the use of all Seamen.  
As also The Situation of the Northernly Countries, as Island, the Strate david's, the Isle of jan-mayen, Bear-Island, Old-Greenland, Spitsbergen and Nova Zembla: adorned with many Sea-cards and Discoveries.  
Gathered out of the experience and practice of divers Pilots and Lovers of the famous Art of Navigation, By JAN VAN LOON.  
Whereunto is added a brief Instruction of the Art of Navigation, together with new Tables of the Sun's Declination, also an Almanac extending until the year 1661.  
At AMSTERDAM, Printed by JOHN JOHNSON Bookseller, dwelling upon the Water, in the Passe-card. 1654.   

A shoRT Instruction in the Art of Navigation.  
THe art of Navigation is a Science by which through certain rules you may steer a Ship over the Seas from one place to another, and is not improperly divided into two parts, to wit, into ordinary and extraordinary Navigation. The ordinary Navigation useth no other Instruments, than the Compass and sounding Plummet, as principally consisting in experience and practice, in knowledge of Lands and Corners, how they are different in Points and distances and are known from the Sea, in depths, shoals qualities of grounds: the running and falling of Streams! upon what point the Moon maketh high water in every several place & such like which in part are learned from the information of experienced Pilots, but most out of our own experience.  
Extraordinary Navigation useth besides the foresaid ordinary practice divers other private Instruments and rules which must be taken out of Astronomy and Cosmography. It is therefore needful that every Pilot who will use and practice th●s extraordinary Navigation, must first of all be well instructed in the principales of the same Arts, that is, that he know and understand the proportions and devisions of the Sphere of the World, the motions of the Heavens, especially the eighth, fourth and first together with the Fabric of the Instruments, without which knowledge its impossible to accomplish happily, great and never before sought out Voyages over the Vast Seas. And seeing that such knowledge may be attained out of good Instruction we have here set down in this Tractate for the benefit of young seamen who are desiruns to be Pilots as clear and plain rules as the shortness hereof could suffer.  

The first Point. Of the Sphere and the divers motions thereof.  
A Sphere properly is called a Ball, wholly entire and round, whose superficies and outside is ever● where alike distant from its centre. By that World Sphoera Mundi, or Sphere of the World, we understand commonly the whole Ball of the Heavens with all that is therein contained! and it is divided into two parts Elementary & Celestial the Elementary part hath again 4 parts: the first is the earth, which with the water as the second maketh a complete Ball upon which we dwell. The third is the Air encompassing the earth and the fourth is the fire, which according to the opinion of Philosophers containeth the space which is between the Air and the Sphere of the Moon. From these Elements (which are the beginning of all things) which are always subject to changes, together with the Warmth of the Heavens arise and perish by a continual change and alteration of the one into the other, all things which we see and find upon Earth.  
The Celestial part (containing within in its Hollowness the Elementaryes) is pure shining, Separate and void of all changes, is divided into 8 Spears or round Hollow Balls, which are called Heavens whereof the greatest always containeth one the other in manner of a Ball, the seven lowest have, but every one one Star or Planet, whereof the first (next the Earth) is the Heaven of the Moon, the second of Mercury, the third of Venus, the fourth of the Son, the fifth of Mars, the sixth of jupiter, the seaventh of Saturn, and the vl of all the fixed stars. The number of these Heavens are known by their Courses which we see in them round about the Poles of the Zodiaque. The Moon runneth through her Heaven by her own natural course from West to East in 27 days, 8 hours, Mercury Venus and the Sun theirs in a year. Mars his in two years, jupiter his in 12, and Saturn in 30 years; The eighth heaven perfects its own course, according to the affirmation of Tycho Brahe in 25400 years; These Heavens are turned about all alike in four and twenty houwres on the Poles about the Axes of the World by the ninth Heaven, which is called the Primum Mobile, that is the first mover by which Motion in our sight is caused Day and Night, and the daily rising and falling of the heavenly lights.   

The Second Point, Of the Roundness of the Earth.  
THat the Earth with the Water together maketh a round Globe, appeareth not only out of experience very clearly, but also out part of the Shadow of Earth in the Eclipse of the Moon. In whatsoever part of the Heaven the moon is Eclipsed or touched by the Shadow of the earth, that Shadow seemeth always round. If the earth were four square, three corned, or of any other form, than the Shadow of the moon should be also four square, three cornered or some other form! For of what proportion any body is, such also must be the Shadow thereof. And seeing therefore that the Shadow of the earth is always and on all sides round, the earth itself must alsoo be necessarilly round.  
That the Heaven is round we mark from the eye, but is most clearly perceived from the Circular motions of the heavenly lights, as of the Son Moon and Stars.   

The Third Point that the Earth is in the middle of the World.  
 
THat the earth standeth in the middle of the World, may clearly be understood by what is hereafter spoken: for if so be that the Globe of the earth stood not in the middle of the World, but that the heaven was nearer it on one side, it would come to pass, that the stars in their daily courses should be nearer on one side of the earth then on the other, and by that means should appear to our sight to be greater on one side of the earth then on the other: likewise if that part of the heaven next to the earth were a boveus, we should then see less than half of the heaven according to instruction of the first Figure: and on the contrary when that part of the heaven farthest from us were above us we should then see more than half of the Heaven according to the Instruction of the second Figure. But standing upon the flat side of the Globe we see the Stars as well on the one side as on the other (in whatsoever part of the Heaven that it is) always of one greatness, and it is found by experience, that we always see the one half of the Heaven, and the other half is hidden from our eyes, from thence it appears plainly according to the expression in the third Figure. That the earth stands in the middle of the World: From thence is likewise to be marked that the Globe of the earth is no more to be likened by the Heavens than a point without thickness for if the earth had any thickness in respect of Heaven, we should (standing upon the earth) by that reason not see half of the Heaven according to Demonstration of the 4 Figure.   

The fourth Point, Of the greatness. of the Earth.  
ALthough the Globe of the Earth (as is said) in respect of the extraordinary wideness of the Heaven is no more than a point, nevertheless in respect of its self it is a great body, having in its Compass 5400 dutch Miles. And that is known by this means. If you divide the whole Circle of the Compass of the earth into 360 parts or degrees, and we find as well by Navigation as by measuring of Land that such a Degree or part containeth fifteen such Dutch Miles 360 such part being multiplied by fifteen make out 5400 Duth miles.   

The fifth Point, Of the Axis and Poles or Axepoints of the World.  
IN the Globe of the World is imagined to be a Line, going from one Point on the side of the Sphere (as a Diameter through the Centre) to another Point right against it on the other side. That Line is called the Axis and the outermost-ends thereof, or the foresaid Points, the Poles or Axepoints of the World, the one towards the North, and is called the Northern Pole and the other towards the South, called the Southern Pole. Upon whichs Poles it is imagined, that the Sphere is upon its Axletree daily turned.  

The Demonstrastion.  
 
THE Line A.G.B. in this Figure going from the Point A through the Centre G as a Diameter to the Point B right against it showeth the Axel of the World and the Points A and B the Poles, A to the North the Northern and B to the South the Southern Poles.    

The Sixth Point. Of the Equinoctial. Line.  
IN the midst of the Heavens every where equally distant from both the Poles, is imagined a great Circle, dividing the whole Sphere into two equal parts which is called the Aequinoctial, because when the Son cometh to or under that Circle which cometh to pass the 21 of March, and the 23 of September, the day and night are in all places of the Earth of an equal length. The knowledge of this Circle is profitable above all things in Navigation, to know thereby how far we go either to the Northwards or Southwards upon Earth; thereby also is reckoned the time and hour of the day, the Declination of the son and Stars, and more other profitable things.  

Demonstration.  
IN the foregoing Figure A and B, the Poles of the World C D E F, is the Equinoctial Line in the midst of the Heaven equally distant from both the Poles A and B, dividing the whole Sphere A C B E into two equal parts as C A E the Northern and C B E the Southern part from hence is to be noted: Seeing that the whole Compass of the Heavens is divided into 360 degrees that the Poles stand from one another 180 degrees and between the Poles and the Equinoctial remaineth every where on both sides 90 degrees, This Line is marked in the Sea-cards with a red Line from east to west through the beginning of the degrees according as they are reckoned as well towards the North as to the South.    

The Seventh Point, Of the Ecliptic Line.  
THE Ecliptic Line lieth awry over the Equinoctial deviding it in two points right over against one another in two equal parts, and is also divided by it in two equal parts, the one lieth between the Equinoctial and the North Pole, the other between the Equinoctial, and the South Pole! It's greatest Declination on both sides of the Equinoctaill towards both the Poles is 23 degree 31½ minutes, and is divided into twelve equal parts, and to each of them a several sign applied. The Son goeth alongst this Circle without ever going out of it and runneth through it with its own natural course every year once, and even as the Poles of the World stand every where alike distant from the Equinoctial even so hath the Ecliptic alsoo its two Poles every were alike distant from the same.  
 

Demonstration.  
IN this Figure as before is said A B are the Poles of the World C D E F, the Equinoctial G D H F, the Ecliptic Line cutting and dividing the Equinoctial, and its self alsoo into two equal parts, in the points D and F which we call the Equinoctial, the one at D the Spring Equinoctial, the other at F the Autumn Equinoctial, The one half D H F the northern part lieth between the Equinoctial D E F and A the North Pole at most declined towards F H 23 degrees and 31/2 minutes: The other half F G D the Southern part lieth between the Equinoctial F C D, and the South Pole B, likewise at most declined as C G 23 degrees 31½ minutes. The North part is divided into six signs which we call the Northerly beginning at D with the Kimbug signs towards the North. Aries, Taurus, Gemini unto H. the point of the farthest declination. From thence with the descending signs of the North, Cancer, Leo, Virgo, to the Equinoctial Line in F. the Autumn Equinoctial, the southern part is also divided into six signs which we call the Southerly beginning at F with the descending signs towards the South Libra, Virgo, Saggitarius until G the Point of the sartkest Declination towards the South from thence further with klimbing signs towards the North Capricornus, Aquarius, Pisces as far, as till you come to the Equinoctial line in the Spring Equinoctial D. The Sun runneth through the three first Northerly signs from the 21 of March new style to the 21 of June New still the other from the 21 of june to the 23 of September. The first 3 Southerly signs from the 23 of September to the 23 of December and the other from the 23 December till the 21 of March again. The Poles of the Ecliptic are M and N, both of them standing every where alike distant from the Ecliptic G H, and so fare from the Poles of the World A, and B as the Ecliptic is farthest declining from the Equinoctial at H E and C G.    

The eighth Point. Of the Coluri.  
THe Coluri are two Circkles, going Croswayes through both the Poles of the World, dividing each other into two parts in the Poles, and together with them the whole Globe Equinoctial Zodiac or Ecliptic and all the Parallels in 4 equal parts, the one going through the Points of the Equinoctial is called the Colurus of the Equinoctials the other through the Points of the Solstices the Colours of the Solstices. The Son moving these Circles (through its yearly course in the Zodiac, devideth the year into four parts) as the Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter.  

Demonstration.  
IN the foregoing Figure A F B D is the Colours of the Equinoctials, going trough D and F the points of the Equinoctial in the beginnings of Aries & Libra & through the Poles A and B, A C G B, M E H the Colurus of the Solstices in the beginnings of Cancer & Capricornus where the Ecliptic is farthest distant from the Equinoctial line through the Poles of the World A and B, and through the Poles of the Zodiac M and N cutting one another through crossewayes with right corners in the Poles A and B, and deviding the Zodiaque or Ecliptic in 4 parts, as D H H F F G, and G D, the first of which the Son wanders through in the Spring, the second in the Summer the third in the Autumn, and the fourth in the Winter.  
These foresaid Circles of the Sphere are all great Circles that is compassing the Sphere at the widest deviding the same into two equal parts, there follow now 4 small Circles which divide the Sphere into unequal parts.    

The ninth Point, Concerning the Tropickes and the Arctic and Antartique Circles.  
THe Tropiques are two Circles, the one northwards and the other southwards from the Equinoctial and alike wide with the same which through turning about of the Sphere from the Points of the Ecliptic are farthest distant from the Equinoctial, and are placed the one to the North and is called the Tropic of Cancer, and the other to the South and is called the Tropic of Capricornus.  
Circulus Articus the Northern Circle and Circulus Antarticus the Southern Circle are reckoned through the running about off the Sphere from the Poles off the Ecliptic.  

Demonstration.  
IN this Figure H I, is the Tropic of Cancer which through the turning about of the Sphere is written from the Point H the beginning of Cancer is also so called, because that the Son coming to that point, farthest from the Equinoctial towards the North, turneth then again through the Crabfish towards the Equinoctial G K is the Tropic of Capricornus, so caused through the running about of the Spear from the point G, the beginning of Capricornus of the Goat and is so called because the Son coming to that point in the farthest from the Equinoctial towards the South, then turneth again through the Goat towards the Equinoctial, N P, is the Arctic Circle and M O the Antartique Circle they are so called through the running about of the Spear from the Poles of the Zodiaque N and M. These are equally distant from the Poles of the World A and B as the Tropic are from the Equinoctial Line, to wit 23 Degrees and 31½ Minutes.    

The tenth point. Of the Sun's Declination.  
THe Sun's Declination is its distance from the Equinoctial Line, and that is two fold towards the North and South.  
 

Demonstration.  
THe Sun's Declination is caused through his course alongst the Ecliptic Line thus. Let A be the northern and B the southern Pole of the World C P E the Equinoctial G H G the Ecliptic Line. The Son coming in the beginning of Aries on the 21 of March to D, cometh also in the Equinoctial Line, hath besides no Declination neither northwards nor southwards, but going forwards alongst the Ecliptic from D to H, and coming to K in the beginning of Taurus, it shall be distant and declined from the Equinoctial Line towards the north from I to K. 11 degrees and 30 minutes. Going forwards to H, is then at most declined from P to H 23 Degrees 31½ minutes. From thence following its course from H to F, cometh in the beginning of Libra again to the Line without Declination. Going forwards from F towards G until M, in the beginning of Sagitarius, it shall be distant or declined from the Line F E towards the South from L to M, 20 Degrees 13 minutes. Coming to G it is then at its farthest declination from E to G towards the south, from thence it runneth again to D to the Equinoctial line, perfecting its course in a year.    

The Eleaventh Point. How to find the Son's Declination upon every day in the year.  
THe year of the Son (that is the time wherein the Son goeth out of a certain point in the Ecliptic, and turneth again into the same) and is not just 365 days, but about 5 hours and 49 minutes (that is little less than 6 hours more, wherefore it is that we always add after three years to the South 4 times 6 hours that is a day to the Month February thereby to count the year or Revolation of the Son into equal days, therefore every such fourth year is called the Leap-yeare. If therefore you will then set the Son's Declination by day tables it is needful to make four sundry tables of four such following years. The foresaid difference of four Revolutions of the Son come not equally alike with such four years, being with length of time so much difference in the Declination that it is needful to renew such Tables every twenty years.  
Now to find the Declination of the Son out of such Tables upon every day of the year it is needful to know two things, the first in what year you are, either the Leap-yeare, or in the first second or third year after. The second, when you know the year which of the Tables you must use thereto.  
For the first! divide the year of our Lord 1600 by 4 if the division cometh even out without remainders, such a year is then a Leap-year of 366 days, but if out of the division any number remaineth, such remainders show you how much that such a proposed year is after the Leap-year.  

The first Example.  
I Desire to know what for a year 1644, is leaving the 1600, take and divide the remaining 44 by 4, that cometh even out without remainders for 11 times 4 is 44, and from thence I find that the year 1644, to be a Leap-year.   

The Second Example.  
FOr to know what sort of year 1647. is, leaving the 1600. I divide the 47, by 4, and I find tha● there rest three for 11 times 4 is 44, take that from 47, and there remain 3, and from thence I find that the year of 47 is the third year after Leap year.  
To know the same without reckoning, consider this following little Table, the first Column is of the Leape-yeares the second, third, & sourth Column are the three years after the Leape-yeares.  
Leap year. 1 year. 2 year. 3 year. 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654. 1655  
The second for to know which Table you must use to every year that standeth demonstrated above each of the following Tables.   

The first Example.  
IN the second year following the Leap year upon the 20 of May, I desire to know the Son's Declination! I seek in the Tables the Month of May, in the second year and there under in the first Column of the figures the twentieth day, I find in the second Column 20, 4. That is 20 degrees and 4 minutes, to be the Son's Declination. And seeing that it is between the 20 of March, and the 23 of September (that the Son is by northwards of the Line) so comes it to pass that the Declination is Northerly.   

The second Example.  
UPon the 12 of February in the Leap year, I desire to know the Son's declination seek therefore in the Table of Leap years toe Month of February, and count in the first Column to the 12 day, and you find there by it 13 degrees and 14 minutes for the Declination of the Son on that day; seeing that it is between the 23 of September and 20 of March, that the Son goeth by South the Line, The Declination is then Southerly.  
Now follow the Tables of the Son's Declination reckoned properly, upon the length of the earth or Meridian of England's Landt-End, because that this length is used most by our netherlands seamen as well in running, upon the Channel of the Sea, as alongst the Coasts of France, Portugal and Spain.   

NOTA.  
LOok how many degrees and minutes the Line is raised above the Horizon; just so many degrees and minutes are there between the point right over your head, called the Zenith and the Pole, and thence it followeth, that as many degrees and minutes as there be between the Zenith and the line, just as many are there from the Horizon to the Pole; that is to say, so many degrees is the Pole elevated, therefore when we say we are in such a height, we understand that we are so many degrees on the north or the southside of the line. This rule and instruction is universal and common through out the whole World both ih the north and southside of the line.   

An Admonition to the Reader.  
IF a man would observe the height of the Sun, it is necessary that he know how many foot he stands above the water, for the higher a man stand the farther he is from the Horizon, because that from the eye to the Horizon, is 60 degrees, if we stand waterpas, as they call it; but if he stand higher than the water, as is said, it will be more than 60 degrees to the Horizon; And to mend this fault, I have here placed a table, thereby to know whether we stand high, than the water or no; and how many minute's difference it makes, and also how much nearer the eye the Cross standeth, then adding the min. to that which the Cross standeth below the Zenith, so shall you mend the fault, that is to say, that you see the cross so many minutes downward, look on the table following.   

Example.  
In this height above the earth. feet. minutes. 2 1 4 2 8 3 14 4 20 5 27 6 39 7 53 8 67 9 82 10 100 11 118 12 140 13 16● 14 180 15  
LEt your eye be above the water, suppose 27 feet, that the cross may stand 45 degrees from the Zenith (that is beginning to tell from that end where the eye is) these 27 feet, being sought in the first rank, or Column of the Table, and you shall find over against it 6 minutes, so much is the Horizon below, that which they call the waterpas or the surface of the water, and so many feet must the cross be thrust downward, so will it fall out 45 degrees 6 minutes, where the Cross ought to be.   

Of the vapours and exhalations which the Sun, Moon and Stars, as they are nearer the Horizon do seem to draw up more, as indeed and truth they are.  
EXperience teacheth, that the lights of heaven, by how much they are nearer the Horizon, by so much do they seem to be higher than indeed they are; and by reason of the fumes and damps, which continually arise & as they are nearer the Horizon, so much are they more thick, and rising by little and little; they lessen, and at the least are clean vanished, and as we come nearer the Pole, the vapoers do more and more increase, and for that cause do the lights seem to be higher than they are. Yea it is found about the height of 83 degrees towards the north, that the Sun seemeth to be 40 minutes higher than in truth it is, this hath that famous Astronomer Tycho Brahe searched out and written in Denmarck, as you may see in this table.  

A Table of the rising of the Sun.   Degrees. Minutes.  When the Sun is found to be high. 0 34 higher than indeed it is. 1 26 2 20 3 15 4 13 7 it seems 10 10 7 15 3 23 1 32   

A Table of rising of the Stars.   Degrees. Minutes.  When the stars are of the hight 0 30 higher ●han indeed they are. 1 22 2 15 4 they seem 11 7 8 11 5 15 3  
The use of this table will we declare by an example and whatsoever is said of the rising of the Sun, the same may be said of the Stars.   

Example.  
LEt the height of the Sun be measured; and found to be 7 degrees above the Horizon, and in the table of the Sun above written, there are 13 minutes which the Sun seemeth to be higher than it is, therefore subtract 13 minutes from the 7 degrees, there will remain 6 degrers 47 minutes for the true height of the Sun.  
But if we take the distance of the Sun from the Zenith according to this example, it would be found to be 83 degrees, and then the 13 min. added to the 83 degrees the product is 83 degr. 13 min. for the true distance of the Sun from the Zenith, then if we take 83 degr. 13 min. from 90 degrees there will remain 6 degr. 47 min. as before, and so will it be in all the other.  

The TABLE, Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile FOR THE LEAP-YEARE.  januar. Februar. March.  April. May. june. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. 1 23 5 1 17 8 1 7 13  1 4 55 1 15 22 1 22 13 2 23 0 2 16 51 2 6 50  2 5 18 2 15 40 2 22 21 3 22 54 3 16 33 3 6 27  3 5 41 3 15 57 3 22 28 4 22 48 4 16 16 4 6 4  4 6 4 4 16 14 4 22 35 5 22 41 5 15 57 5 5 41  5 6 27 5 16 31 5 22 42 6 22 34 6 15 39 6 5 17  6 6 50 6 16 48 6 22 48 7 22 27 7 15 20 7 4 54  7 7 12 7 17 5 7 22 54 8 22 19 8 15 1 8 4 30  8 7 34 8 17 21 8 22 59 9 22 10 9 14 42 9 4 7  9 7 57 9 17 37 9 23 4 10 22 2 10 14 22 10 3 43  10 8 19 10 17 52 10 23 8 11 21 52 11 14 3 11 3 19  11 8 1 11 18 8 11 23 13 12 21 43 12 13 43 12 2 56  12 9 2 12 18 23 12 23 16 13 21 33 13 13 23 13 2 32  13 9 28 13 18 37 13 23 20 14 21 22 14 13 2 14 2 9  14 9 46 14 18 52 14 23 23 15 21 11 15 12 41 15 1 45  15 10 7 15 19 6 15 23 25 16 21 0 16 12 21 16 1 21  16 10 28 16 19 19 16 23 27 17 20 48 17 12 0 17 0 58  17 10 49 17 19 33 17 23 29 18 20 36 18 11 39 18 0 34  18 11 10 18 19 46 18 23 30 19 20 24 19 11 28 19 0 10 Aequinoct. 19 11 31 19 19 59 19 23 31 20 20 11 20 10 56 20 0 13 20 11 51 20 20 11 20 23 31 21 19 57 21 10 35 21 0 37  21 12 11 21 20 23 21 23 31 22 19 44 22 10 13 22 1 1  22 12 31 22 20 35 22 23 31 23 19 30 23 9 51 23 1 25  23 12 5 23 20 47 23 23 30 24 19 15 24 9 29 24 1 49  24 13 11 24 20 58 24 23 29 25 19 1 25 9 6 25 1 12  25 13 31 25 21 8 25 23 28 26 18 45 26 8 44 26 2 36  26 13 50 26 21 19 26 23 26 27 18 30 27 8 21 27 3 0  27 14 9 27 21 29 27 23 23 28 18 14 28 7 59 28 3 23  28 14 28 28 21 39 28 23 20 29 17 58 29 7 36 29 3 46  29 14 46 29 21 48 29 23 17 30 17 42    30 4 9  30 15 4 30 21 56 30 23 13 31 17 25    31 4 32     31 22 5     

The TABLE, Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, FOR THE LEAP-YEARE.  july. August. Septemb.  October. Novemb. Decemb. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. 1 23 9 1 17 57 1 8 6  1 3 27 1 14 44 1 22 1 2 23 5 2 17 42 2 7 43  2 3 51 2 15 3 2 22 10 3 23 0 3 17 26 3 7 21  3 4 14 3 15 22 3 22 18 4 22 55 4 17 10 4 6 59  4 4 38 4 15 41 4 22 26 5 22 49 5 16 54 5 6 37  5 5 1 5 15 59 5 22 34 6 22 43 6 16 37 6 6 14  6 5 24 6 16 17 6 22 41 7 22 37 7 16 20 7 5 52  7 5 47 7 16 35 7 22 47 8 22 30 8 16 3 8 5 29  8 6 10 8 16 52 8 22 54 9 22 23 9 15 46 9 5 6  9 6 33 9 17 9 9 22 59 10 22 15 10 15 28 10 4 43  10 6 56 10 17 25 10 23 4 11 22 7 11 15 10 11 4 20  11 7 19 11 17 42 11 23 9 12 21 58 12 14 52 12 3 57  12 7 42 12 17 58 12 23 14 13 21 50 13 14 33 13 3 34  13 8 5 13 18 14 13 23 18 14 21 41 14 14 14 14 3 11  14 8 27 14 18 30 14 23 21 15 21 31 15 13 55 15 2 48  15 8 49 15 18 45 15 23 24 16 21 21 16 13 36 16 2 25  16 9 11 16 19 0 16 23 26 17 21 11 17 13 17 17 2 1  17 9 33 17 19 15 17 23 28 18 21 1 18 12 58 18 1 38  18 9 55 18 19 29 18 23 30 19 20 50 19 12 38 19 1 15  19 10 17 19 19 43 19 23 31 20 20 39 20 12 18 20 0 51  20 10 39 20 19 57 20 23 31 21 20 27 21 11 58 21 0 27  21 11 0 21 20 10 21 23 31 22 20 15 22 11 37 22 0 4 Aequinoct. 22 11 21 22 20 23 22 23 31 23 20 2 23 11 17 23 0 20 23 11 42 23 20 36 23 23 30 24 19 50 24 10 56 24 0 43  24 12 3 24 20 48 24 23 29 25 19 37 25 10 36 25 1 6  25 12 24 25 20 59 25 23 27 26 19 24 26 10 15 26 1 30  26 12 45 26 21 11 26 23 25 27 19 10 27 9 53 27 1 54  27 13 6 27 21 22 27 23 22 28 18 56 28 9 32 28 2 17  28 13 26 28 21 32 28 23 19 29 18 42 29 9 11 29 2 41  29 13 46 29 21 42 29 23 15 30 18 27 30 8 49 30 3 4  30 14 6 30 21 52 30 23 11 31 18 12 31 8 27     31 14 25    31 23 16  

THE TABLE Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, The first Year after the LEAP-IEARE.  januar. Februar. March.  April. May. june. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. 1 23 1 1 16 55 1 7 18  1 4 49 1 15 18 1 22 11 2 22 55 2 16 37 2 6 55  2 5 12 2 15 36 2 22 19 3 22 50 3 16 19 3 6 32  3 5 35 3 15 53 3 22 26 4 22 42 4 16 1 4 6 9  4 5 58 4 16 11 4 22 33 5 22 35 5 15 43 5 5 46  5 6 21 5 16 28 5 22 40 6 22 28 6 15 24 6 5 23  ● 6 43 6 16 44 6 22 46 7 22 20 7 15 5 7 4 59  7 7 5 7 17 1 7 22 52 8 22 12 8 14 46 8 4 36  8 7 28 8 17 17 8 22 57 9 22 3 9 14 27 9 4 12  9 7 59 9 17 33 9 23 3 10 21 54 10 14 7 10 3 49  10 8 13 10 17 49 10 23 7 11 21 44 11 13 48 11 3 25  11 8 35 11 18 4 11 23 11 12 21 35 12 13 28 12 3 2  12 8 56 12 18 19 12 23 15 13 21 24 13 13 7 13 2 38  13 9 18 13 18 34 13 23 19 14 21 13 14 12 47 14 2 15  14 9 40 14 18 49 14 23 22 15 21 2 15 12 26 15 1 51  15 10 1 15 19 3 15 23 24 16 20 51 16 12 5 16 1 27  16 10 22 16 19 17 16 23 27 17 20 39 17 11 44 17 1 3  17 10 44 17 19 31 17 23 29 18 20 26 18 11 23 18 0 40  18 11 4 18 19 44 18 23 30 19 20 13 19 11 1 19 0 16 Aequinoct. 19 11 25 19 19 57 19 23 31 20 20 1 20 10 40 20 0 24 20 11 46 20 20 9 20 23 31 21 19 47 21 10 18 21 0 31  21 12 6 21 20 21 21 23 31 22 19 33 22 9 56 22 0 55  22 12 27 22 20 33 22 23 31 23 19 18 23 9 35 23 1 19  23 12 46 23 20 45 23 23 30 24 19 4 24 9 12 24 1 42  24 13 6 24 20 56 24 23 29 25 18 49 25 8 49 25 2 6  25 13 25 25 21 6 25 23 28 26 18 34 26 8 27 26 2 29  26 13 45 26 21 17 26 23 26 27 18 18 27 8 4 27 2 53  27 14 4 27 21 27 27 23 24 28 18 2 28 7 41 28 3 16  28 14 23 28 21 37 28 23 21 29 17 46    29 3 40  29 14 41 29 21 46 29 23 18 30 17 29    30 4 3  30 15 0 30 21 55 30 23 14 31 17 12    31 4 26     31 22 4 ●    

The TABLE, Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, The first Year after the LEAP-YEARE.  july. August. Septemb.  October. Novemb. Decemb. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. 1 23 11 1 18 0 1 8 11  1 3 21 1 14 39 1 21 59 2 23 6 2 17 45 2 7 49  2 3 44 2 14 58 2 22 8 3 23 1 3 17 29 3 7 27  3 4 8 3 15 17 3 22 16 4 22 56 4 17 13 4 7 5  4 4 31 4 15 36 4 22 24 5 22 51 5 16 57 5 6 43  5 4 54 5 15 54 5 22 32 6 22 45 6 16 41 6 6 20  6 5 18 6 16 12 6 22 39 7 22 38 7 16 23 7 5 58  7 5 41 7 16 30 7 22 46 8 22 31 8 16 6 8 5 35  8 6 4 8 16 48 8 22 52 9 22 24 9 15 49 9 5 12  9 6 27 9 17 5 9 22 58 10 22 17 10 15 32 10 4 50  10 6 50 10 17 22 10 23 3 11 22 9 11 15 14 11 4 27  11 7 13 11 17 39 11 23 8 12 22 0 12 14 56 12 4 3  12 7 35 12 17 55 12 23 13 13 21 51 13 14 38 13 3 41  13 7 58 13 18 11 13 23 17 14 21 42 14 14 19 14 3 17  14 8 20 14 18 27 14 23 20 15 21 33 15 14 0 15 2 54  15 8 43 15 18 42 15 23 23 16 21 23 16 13 41 16 2 31  16 9 5 16 18 58 16 23 26 17 21 13 17 13 21 17 2 7  17 9 27 17 19 12 17 23 28 18 21 2 18 13 3 18 1 44  18 9 49 18 19 27 18 23 29 19 20 51 19 12 43 19 1 21  19 10 11 19 19 41 19 23 31 20 20 40 20 12 23 20 0 57  20 10 33 20 19 54 20 23 31 21 20 29 21 12 3 21 0 34  21 10 54 21 20 9 21 23 31 22 20 17 22 11 43 22 0 10 Aequinoct. 22 11 16 22 20 21 22 23 31 23 20 5 23 11 23 23 0 13 23 11 37 23 20 33 23 23 30 24 19 52 24 11 2 24 0 37  24 11 58 24 20 45 24 23 29 25 19 39 25 10 41 25 1 0  25 12 19 25 20 57 25 23 28 26 19 26 26 10 20 26 1 24  26 12 39 26 21 9 26 23 25 27 19 12 27 9 59 27 1 47  27 13 0 27 21 20 27 23 23 28 18 59 28 9 38 28 2 11  28 13 20 28 21 30 28 23 20 29 18 44 29 9 17 29 2 34  29 13 40 29 21 40 29 23 16 30 18 30 30 8 55 30 2 58  30 14 0 30 21 50 30 23 12 31 18 15 31 8 33     31 14 20    31 23 7  

THE TABLE Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, The second Year after the LEAP-YEARE.  januar. Februar. March.  April. May. june. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. 1 23 3 1 16 59 1 7 24  1 4 43 1 15 13 1 22 10 2 22 57 2 16 42 2 7 1  2 5 7 2 15 31 2 22 17 3 22 51 3 16 24 3 6 38  3 5 30 3 15 49 3 22 24 4 22 45 4 16 6 4 6 15  4 5 53 4 16 6 4 22 32 5 22 38 5 15 47 5 5 52  5 6 15 5 16 23 5 22 38 6 22 31 6 15 29 6 5 38  6 6 38 6 16 40 6 22 45 7 22 23 7 15 10 7 5 5  7 7 0 7 16 57 7 22 51 8 22 15 8 14 51 8 4 42  8 7 23 8 17 13 8 22 56 9 22 6 9 14 32 9 4 18  9 7 45 9 17 30 9 23 1 10 21 57 10 14 12 10 3 55  10 8 7 10 17 45 10 23 6 11 21 47 11 13 52 11 3 31  11 8 29 11 18 1 11 23 10 12 21 37 12 13 32 12 3 8  12 8 51 12 18 16 12 23 14 13 21 27 13 13 12 13 2 44  13 9 13 13 18 31 13 23 18 14 21 26 14 12 51 14 2 20  14 9 34 14 18 45 14 23 21 15 21 5 15 12 31 15 1 57  15 9 56 15 19 0 15 23 24 16 20 53 16 12 10 16 1 33  16 10 17 16 19 14 16 23 26 17 20 41 17 11 49 17 1 9  17 10 39 17 19 27 17 23 28 18 20 29 18 11 28 18 0 45  18 10 59 18 19 40 18 23 29 19 20 16 19 11 6 19 0 22 Aequinoct. 19 11 20 19 19 53 19 23 31 20 20 3 20 10 45 20 0 2 20 11 41 20 20 6 20 23 31½ 21 19 50 21 10 23 21 0 26  21 12 1 21 20 18 21 23 31½ 22 19 36 22 10 1 22 0 49  22 12 21 22 20 30 22 23 31 23 19 22 23 9 39 23 1 13  23 12 41 23 20 42 23 23 31 24 19 7 24 9 17 24 1 37  24 13 1 24 20 53 24 23 30 25 18 53 25 8 55 25 2 0  25 13 21 25 21 4 25 23 28 26 18 37 26 8 32 26 2 24  26 13 40 26 21 15 26 23 27 27 18 22 27 8 9 27 2 47  27 13 59 27 21 25 27 23 24 28 18 6 28 7 47 28 3 10  28 14 18 28 21 34 28 23 22 29 17 55    29 3 34  29 14 37 29 21 44 29 23 19 30 17 33    30 3 56  30 14 55 30 21 53 30 23 15 31 17 16    31 4 20     31 22 2     

The TABLE, Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, The second Year after the LEAP-YEARE.  july. August. Septemb.  October. Novemb. Decemb. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da de. mi. 1 23 11 1 18 4 1 8 17  1 3 16 1 14 35 1 21 57 2 23 7 2 17 49 2 7 55  2 3 39 2 14 54 2 22 6 3 23 3 3 17 33 3 7 33  3 4 2 3 15 13 3 22 14 4 22 57 4 17 17 4 7 11  4 4 24 4 15 31 4 22 22 5 22 52 5 17 1 5 6 48  5 4 49 5 15 50 5 22 30 6 22 46 6 16 44 6 6 26  6 5 13 6 16 8 6 22 37 7 22 40 7 16 27 7 6 3  7 5 35 7 16 26 7 22 44 8 22 33 8 16 11 8 5 40  8 5 58 8 16 44 8 22 50 9 22 26 9 15 53 9 5 18  9 6 21 9 17 1 9 22 56 10 22 19 10 15 36 10 4 55  10 6 44 10 17 18 10 23 2 11 22 11 11 15 18 11 4 32  11 7 7 11 17 35 11 23 6 12 22 2 12 15 0 12 4 9  12 7 30 12 17 51 12 23 11 13 21 53 13 14 42 13 3 46  13 7 53 13 18 7 13 23 15 14 21 44 14 14 24 14 3 23  14 8 15 14 18 23 14 23 19 15 21 35 15 14 4 15 3 0  15 8 37 15 18 39 15 23 22 16 21 25 16 13 46 16 2 36  16 9 0 16 18 54 16 23 25 17 21 15 17 13 27 17 2 13  17 9 22 17 19 9 17 23 27 18 21 5 18 13 7 18 1 50  18 9 44 18 19 23 18 23 29 19 20 54 19 12 48 19 1 26  19 10 6 19 19 37 19 23 30 20 20 43 20 12 28 20 1 3  20 10 27 20 19 51 20 23 31 21 20 32 21 12 8 21 0 39  21 10 49 21 20 4 21 23 31½ 22 20 20 22 11 48 22 0 17 Aequinoct. 22 11 10 22 20 17 22 23 31½ 23 20 8 23 11 27 23 0 7 23 11 32 23 20 30 23 23 31 24 19 55 24 11 7 24 0 31  24 11 53 24 20 43 24 23 29 25 19 42 25 10 46 25 0 54  25 12 14 25 20 54 25 23 28 26 19 29 26 10 25 26 1 18  26 12 35 26 21 6 26 23 26 27 19 16 27 10 4 27 1 41  27 12 55 27 21 17 27 23 23 28 19 2 28 9 43 28 2 5  28 13 15 28 21 28 28 23 20 29 18 48 29 9 22 29 2 29  29 13 35 29 21 38 29 23 17 30 18 34 30 9 0 30 2 52  30 13 55 30 21 48 30 23 13 31 18 19 31 8 39     31 14 15    31 23 9  

THE TABLE Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, The third Year after the LEAP-YEARE.  januar. Februar. March.  April. May. june. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. 1 23 4 1 17 3 1 7 30  1 4 38 1 15 9 1 22 7 2 22 58 2 16 46 2 7 7  2 5 1 2 15 27 2 22 15 3 22 52 3 16 28 3 6 43  3 5 24 3 15 45 3 22 23 4 22 46 4 16 10 4 6 21  4 5 47 4 16 2 4 22 30 5 22 40 5 15 52 5 5 57  5 6 10 5 16 19 5 22 37 6 22 33 6 15 33 6 5 34  6 6 32 6 16 36 6 22 44 7 22 25 7 15 14 7 5 11  7 6 55 7 16 53 7 22 50 8 22 17 8 14 56 8 4 47  8 7 18 8 17 10 8 22 55 9 22 8 9 14 36 9 4 23  9 7 40 9 17 26 9 23 0 10 21 59 10 14 17 10 4 0  10 8 2 10 17 41 10 23 5 11 21 49 11 13 57 11 3 37  11 8 24 11 17 57 11 23 9 12 21 39 12 13 37 12 3 13  12 8 46 12 18 12 12 23 13 13 21 29 13 13 17 13 ●2 49  13 9 8 13 18 27 13 23 17 14 21 19 14 12 57 14 2 26  14 9 29 14 18 42 14 23 20 15 21 7 15 12 36 15 2 3  15 9 51 15 19 56 15 23 23 16 20 56 16 12 15 16 1 39  16 10 12 16 19 10 16 23 26 17 20 44 17 11 54 17 1 15  17 10 33 17 19 24 17 23 28 18 20 32 18 11 33 18 0 51  18 10 54 18 19 37 18 23 29 19 20 20 19 11 12 19 0 27 Aequinoct. 19 11 15 19 19 50 19 23 30 20 20 7 20 10 50 20 0 4 20 11 36 20 20 3 20 23 31 21 19 53 21 10 28 21 0 20  21 11 56 21 20 15 21 23 31 22 19 40 22 10 7 22 0 44  22 12 16 22 20 27 22 23 31 23 19 26 23 9 45 23 1 7  23 12 36 23 20 39 23 23 31 24 19 11 24 9 22 24 1 31  24 12 56 24 20 50 24 23 30 25 18 56 25 9 0 25 1 54  25 13 16 25 21 1 25 23 29 26 18 41 26 8 37 26 2 18  26 13 35 26 21 12 26 23 27 27 18 25 27 8 15 27 2 42  27 13 55 27 21 22 27 23 25 28 18 10 28 7 52 28 3 5  28 14 13 28 21 32 28 23 22 29 17 53    29 3 28  29 14 32 29 21 42 29 23 19 30 17 37    30 3 50  30 14 51 30 21 51 30 23 16 31 17 21    31 4 14     31 22 0     

The TABLE, Of the Sun's Declination, after the new stile, The third Year after the LEAP-YEARE.  july. August. Septemb.  October. Novemb. Decemb. da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da. de. mi.  da. de. mi. da. de. mi. da de. mi. 1 23 13 1 18 7 1 8 22  1 3 10 1 14 30 1 21 54 2 23 9 2 17 52 2 8 0  2 3 33 2 14 49 2 22 3 3 23 4 3 17 37 3 7 38  3 3 57 3 15 8 3 22 12 4 22 59 4 17 21 4 7 16  4 4 20 4 15 27 4 22 20 5 22 53 5 17 5 5 6 54  5 4 43 5 15 45 5 22 28 6 22 48 6 16 49 6 6 31  6 5 6 6 16 4 6 22 35 7 22 41 7 16 31 7 6 9  7 5 29 7 16 22 7 22 42 8 22 35 8 16 15 8 5 46  8 5 53 8 16 39 8 22 49 9 22 28 9 15 58 9 5 23  9 6 16 9 16 57 9 22 55 10 22 20 10 15 40 10 5 0  10 6 39 10 17 14 10 23 1 11 22 12 11 15 23 11 4 38  11 7 2 11 17 31 11 23 6 12 22 4 12 15 5 12 4 16  12 7 24 12 17 47 12 23 10 13 21 55 13 14 46 13 3 52  13 7 47 13 18 3 13 23 15 14 21 47 14 14 28 14 3 29  14 8 9 14 18 19 14 23 18 15 21 38 15 14 9 15 3 5  15 8 32 15 18 35 15 23 21 16 21 28 16 13 51 16 2 42  16 8 55 16 18 50 16 23 24 17 21 18 17 13 31 17 2 19  17 9 17 17 19 5 17 23 27 18 21 7 18 13 12 18 1 55  18 9 39 18 19 20 18 23 29 19 20 57 19 12 52 19 1 22  19 10 0 19 19 34 19 23 30 20 20 46 20 12 33 20 1 9  20 10 22 20 19 48 20 23 31 21 20 35 21 12 13 21 0 45  21 10 44 21 20 2 21 23 31 22 20 23 22 11 53 22 0 22 Aequinoct. 22 11 5 22 20 16 22 23 31 23 20 11 23 11 33 23 0 2 23 11 27 23 20 27 23 23 31 24 19 59 24 11 12 24 0 25  24 11 48 24 20 40 24 23 30 25 19 46 25 10 51 25 0 49  25 12 9 25 20 52 25 23 29 26 19 32 26 10 30 26 1 12  26 12 30 26 21 3 26 23 27 27 19 19 27 10 9 27 1 36  27 12 50 27 21 14 27 23 24 28 19 6 28 9 48 28 1 59  28 13 10 28 21 25 28 23 21 29 18 51 29 9 27 29 2 23  29 13 31 29 21 36 29 23 18 30 18 37 30 9 5 30 2 46  30 13 52 30 21 45 30 23 14 31 18 22 31 8 44     31 14 11    31 23 10    

The 12. Chapter, Of the length and the breadth of the fixed Stars.  
THe Stars of the vl heaven are called Fixed Stars, because (unlike the Planets without motion) they stand always fast and fixed in one fashion and distance one from the other, and are carried about altogether one with the other by the Primum Mobile: they are marked according to length and breadth. Their length is a part of the Ecliptic, contained between two half circles, going both out of the Poles of the Ecliptic, the one through the spring Equinoctial, or the beginning of Aries, the other through the Stars themselves. Their breadth is a Bow of the like half Circle between the Ecliptic Line and the Stars: That is two fold Northerly & Southerly, the Northerly which are Northwards from the Ecliptic, and the Southerly which stand Southward from them.  
 

Demonstration.  
LEt the Ecliptic Line be G D H. Let N be the Northern, and M the Southern Pole thereof: F a certain Star. Let two half Circles be drawn out of the foresaid Poles, the one N D M through the spring Equinoctial to D. The other through the Star F deviding the Ecliptic in K: that part of the Ecliptic D K is the length of such a Star, and the Bow or part of the said half Circle K F is his breadth towards the North, because that it standeth by North of the Ecliptic.    

The 13. Chapter, Concerning the right Ascension and Declination of the fixed Stars.  
THe right Ascension of the Stars is a part of the Equinoctial, contained between two half circles, going both out of the Poles of the World, the one through the spring Equinoctial, the other through the Stars. Their declination, being a bow of the like half circle between the Equinoctial and the said stars. This is also two fold Northerly that which is by north the Line, and Southerly which stand by South from it.  

Demonstration.  
IN the foregoing Figure, let C D E be the Equinoctial line. A the North, and B the South Pole of the world, F a certain Star; draw two half Circles out of the foresaid Poles, the one A D B through the Equinoctial or beginning of Aries, the other through the Star marked with F which devideth the Equinoctial in L. The part of the Equinoctial L D is the right Ascension of such a Star and the Bow or part of the same Circle L F. his declination towards the North, or O I from the Star to I towards the South.    

The 14. Chapter, Concerning the change of the declination of the fixed Stars.  
EVen as the starry heaven in our sight is driven about every 24 Hours by the Primum Mobile upon the axepoints or Poles of the world from east to west: so are these also carried about upon the Poles of the Ecliptic Line once in 25400 years, on the contrary from west to east, even as the Sun once every year. By which the length of the Stars changeth every hundred years 1 degree, and 25 minutes, or else every 20 years 17 minutes: but their breadth that is the distance from the Ecliptic remaineth unchangeable always the same. Through the foresaid change of the length (by length of time) changeth also the declination of the one more and also sooner than of the other. Some are made less, and some grow bigger. Some of them having Northerly declination become souther, and some others having southerly declination become on the contrary northerly.  
 

Demonstration.  
LEt C D E be the Equinoctial, A the northern and B the southern Pole of the World G D H the Ecliptic line N M the Poles thereof G the beginning of Capricorn. D of Aries and H the end of Gemini or beginning of Cancer, let (as is before said the Star at F its length be in the Ecliptic to L. its breadth by north of it at L F its northerly declination is then V F. If then the foresaid star in many years runneth in length from F to L parallel with D H its breadth resteth K T even until the foregoing F L but its declination I T, is more than V F the first because that it being parallel with D H is more wended from the Equinoctial line. The star at O whose length let it be in the Ecliptic to Q and its breadth Q O. hath southerly declination P O: but running in length from O to R parallel with Q X its breadth remaineth X R even to Q O but its southerly declination R S is less than O P because that it being parallel with G D is come nearer the Equinoctial. But if the same star cometh to run in length unto Y its declination shall be Y Z by north the line. That is spoken of the 6 first signs ♑ ♒ ♓ ♈ ♉ ♊. In the same manner cometh to pass the contrary part in the other 6 signs ♋ ♌ ♍ ♎ ♏ and ♐ thus. In the same figure let H be the beginning of Cancer D Libra, and G the end of Sagitarius. If a Star at T having Northerly declination T I runneth in length until F, its declination F V is less than T I, because it is come nearer the Equinoctial, then if so be that it runneth in length until B, its deelination which was first northerly shall then be southerly from B to D. Through the foresaid motions of the vl Sphere changeth also the declination of the Northstarre, which is every year greater, that is, he departeth the longer the more from the Equinoctial, and cometh nearer the Pole, which shall endure to the year of our Lord 2091, then shall he be nearest and no more than 26 minutes, and a half distant from it and after that time by little and little shall wend from it, so that 12700 years afterwards it shall stand from the Pole 47 degrees and 56 minutes. How this cometh to pass may plainly be conceived out of this manner of Figure.  
Let A be the northern Pole of the world in the middle of the Equinoctial B. D. F. C: N the Pole of the Ecliptic in the middle of the Ecliptic E D G C, H the North-star, its breadth from the Ecliptic is Q H 66 degrees and 2 minutes, and its distance from the Pole of the Zodiaque N H 23 degrees and 58 minutes, they remain always alike even as the breadth and distance of all fixed Stars from the Pole of the Zodiaque N H 23 degrees and 58 minutes they remain always one and the same even as the breadth and distance of all fixed Stars is from the Zodiaque Pole, as heretofore is said. It's length from the Spring Equinoctial or beginning of Aries for the year 1625. is C Q 83 degrees and 24 minutes.  
Let there be drawn a Circle out of N the Pole of the Ecliptic, as I L K O H; whose half Diameter let be N H 23 degrees and 58 minutes even to the distance of the Northstarre from the Zodiaque Pole, therein is closed the Northpole of the world at A as being less different from the Zodiaque Pole then the Northstarre. Upon the like Circle the Northstarre taketh his compass about the Pole of the Zodiaque (even as all the fixed Stars in 25400 years, its distance from the world's Pole is for the year 1625 A H 2 degrees 42 minutes and shall in the year of our Lord 2091 be come from H to I being then nearest to the world's Pole, and stands no further of then 26 ½ minute. going forwards from I alongst to L until K it shall then be distant from the world's Pole marked with A K 27 degrees and 56 minutes.  
But because the Stars keep not always one kind of declination, we have for the furtherance of Mariners prepared these two following Tables. The one showeth their declination for the year 1645. And the second for the year 1654. Besides the declination there is adjoined the compliment of the declination that is, how wide they stand from the Pole.  

A Table of the Declination of the chief of the fixed Stars, with their distance from the Pole, in the year 1645, etc. and 1655.  
These Stars following are all of them placed in the Southside of the Equinoctial Line, and have southerly Declination.   Anno 1645. Anno 1655.  Southerly declination. degr. min. the distance from the S. Pole. degr. min. Southerly declination. degr. min. the distance from the S. Pole. degr. min. The Northermost in the whales tail. 10 46 79 14 10 43 79 17 The Southermost in the whales tail. 19 57 70 3 19 54 70 6 Regel, the left foot of Orion. 8 39 81 21 8 38 81 22 The first of the three in the Girdle of Orion, or the 3 Kings. 0 36 89 24 0 36 89 24 The second in the girdle, or 3 Kings. 1 27 88 33 1 27 88 33 The third. 2 10 87 50 2 10 87 50 The great dog, Syrius. 16 13 73 47 16 13 73 47 The heart of the watersnake. 7 8 82 52 7 10 82 50 Spica Virgins, or the corneare. 9 15 80 45 9 18 80 42 The South Balance. 14 30 75 30 14 33 75 27 The North Balance. 8 1 81 59 8 4 81 56 The Northermost and first at the lefthand of the snakebearer Ophiuchus.  87 14 2 48 87 12 2 46    The left knee of Ophiuchus. 9 46 80 14 9 48 80 12 The right knee of the snakebearer. 15 12 74 48 15 13 74 47 Antares the heart of the Scorpion. 25 33 64 27 25 35 64 25 The Northermost of the 2 in the horns of Capricorn. 13 33 76 27 13 32 76 28 The Southermost of the two. 15 50 74 10 15 49 74 11 The former or most westerly, of the 2 stars in the tail of Capricorn. 18 10 71 50 18 8 71 52 The Second most easterly. 17 39 72 21 17 37 72 23 The leftshoulder of Aquarius. 7 4 82 56 7 2 82 58 The right shoulder of Aquarius. 2 0 88 0 1 57 88 3 The uttermost of Aquarius named Famahand. 31 25 58 35 31 22 58 38  

These which follow are situate in the Northside of the Equinoctial Line, and Decline Northward.   Anno 1645. Anno 1655.  Northerly declination. degr. min. the distance from the N. Pole. degr. min. Northerly declination. degr. min. the distance from the N. Pole. degr. min. Alrucuba the northstar. 87 25 2 35 87 28 2 32 The midlmost or brightest of the Watchmen. 75 40 14 20 75 37 14 23 The breast of Cassiopeia. 54 37 35 23 54 40 35 20 The hip of Cassiopeia. 58 49 31 11 58 52 31 8 The knee of Cassiopeia. 58 22 31 38 58 25 31 35 The brightest in the clear of Cassio. 57 13 32 47 57 17 32 43 The head of Andromeda. 27 9 62 51 27 12 62 48 The Girdle of Andromeda. 33 47 56 13 33 50 56 10 The most Southerly foot of Andromeda. 40 36 49 24 40 39 49 21 The brightest in the head of the Ram. 21 46 68 14 21 49 68 11 The brightest in the mouth of the Whale. 2 40 87 20 2 42 87 18 The brightest in the head of Medusa. 39 33 50 27 39 35 87 25 The brightest in the side of Perseus, 48 31 41 29 48 33 41 27 Aldebaran the South eye of the Bull. 15 48 74 12 15 50 74 10 The North horn of the Bull. 28 16 61 44 28 17 16 43 The South horn of the Bull. 20 54 69 6 20 54 69 6 The left shoulder of the Giant Orion. 5 59 84 1 6 0 84 0 The right shoulder of Orion. 7 18 82 42 7 18 82 42 Hircus or Capella in the left shoulder of the carter Erichtonius. 45 35 44 25 45 36 44 24 The right shoulder of Erichtonius. 44 52 45 8 44 52 45 8 The brightest in the foot of the twins. 16 4 73 20 16 40 73 20 The head of the Northermost twin Castor. 32 36 57 24 32 35 57 25 The head of the souther most twin Pollux. 28 50 61 10 28 49 61 11 protion the little dog 6 7 83 53 6 6 83 54 Regulus, Basiliscus the heart of the Lyon. 13 40 76 20 13 37 76 23 The middlemost and clearest in the neck of the Lyon. 21 37 68 23 21 34 68 26 The brightest in the back of the Lyon. 22 28 67 32 22 24 67 36 The tail of the Lyon. 16 33 73 27 16 30 73 30 The Northermost hinderwheele of the great Wagon. 63 40 26 20 63 37 26 23 The Southermost hinderwheele of the great Wagon. 58 17 31 43 58 14 31 46 The Northmost forewhele of the Wagon. 59 0 31 0 58 57 31 3 The Souther forewheel of the Wagon. 55 41 34 19 55 37 34 22 The nearest Horse to the Wagon. 57 56 32 4 57 53 32 7 The middlemost Horse. 56 49 33 11 56 46 33 14 The uttermost Horse. 51 8 38 52 51 5 38 55 Vindemiatrix the north wing of Virgo. 12 54 77 6 12 51 77 9 The Girdle of the Virgin. 5 22 84 38 5 19 84 41 The left shoulder of Boötes. 39 50 50 10 39 47 50 13 The bright Star betwixt the thighs of Boötes Arcturus. 21 5 68 55 21 2 68 58 The brightest in the North Crown. 27 57 62 3 27 55 62 5 The brightest in the neck of the Serpent Ophiuchus. 7 37 82 23 7 35 82 25 The head of Hercules. 14 51 75 9 14 50 75 10 The head of the Serpentbearer. 12 52 77 8 12 51 77 9 The brightest in the Dragon's head. 51 37 38 23 51 37 38 23 Lyra. 38 30 51 30 38 30 51 30 The tail of the Eagle. 13 24 76 36 13 25 76 35 Vulture the middlemost and brightest in the Eagle. 8 0 82 0 8 1 81 50 The breast of the Swan. 39 9 50 51 39 11 50 49 The tail of the Swan. 44 3 45 57 44 5 45 55 The Girdle of Cephus. 69 1 20 59 69 3 20 57 That in the mouth of Pegasus. 88 16 81 44 8 18 81 42 Sheet the brightest in the leg of Pegasus 26 10 63 50 26 13 63 47 Marcab the foot of Pegasus. 13 19 76 41 13 21 76 39 The uttermost in the wing of Pegasus. 13 13 76 47 13 16 76 44  
By this table you may find the declination of any of these Stars, in the years between, provided, that you proportion the difference of the declination to the difference of the time.   

Example.  
I desire to know the Declination of the tail of the Lion in the year 1650. I find in the table of the year 1645. 16. gr. 33 min. and for the year 1655. 16. degrees, 30 min. the min. having as much taken from them as the years, I find 16 gr. 31 min. and a half, lessening declination.   

II. Example.  
I desire to know the declination of Aldebaran the eye of the Bull in the year 1650. I find in the year 1645, 15 gr. 48 min. and for the year 1655, 15 degr. 50 minute. the minute. having as much taken from them in proportion as the years, I find 15 gr. 49. min. increaseing declination.    

The 15. Chapter, how you may easily learn to know the fixed Stars and at what time every one of them cometh to the South.  
HOw needful and profitable it is for a Seafaring man to have knowledge of the fixed stars and their use, especially in strange voyages, and fare Navigations, that is more than well known to all experienced and understanding Steerman: moreover, because we have described in the foregoing chapter the declination of the fixed stairs and their distance from the Pole, we shall here show you a way and fitting means how you shall easily learn to know them and that perfectly at all times when as every one of them come in the south or at their height, and are fitting to be used.  
First you must know that the way of the son in the heaven is  with the fixed Stars with the which it is every day once turned about from east to west without change, but only that the Son doth contrary wise run this foresaid yearly course from west to east Whereby he in his daily course, cometh so far behind, that he in a whole year goeth one course less than the fixed Stars: and that the fixed Stars turn once more about in a year then the Sun, so that they every day come 4 min. sooner to the division, that cometh every week to about half an hour & every month 2 hours, which that it may the better be understood, we will make it evident by an example taken from the star called Syrius, or Canis Major the great dog, which always followeth a little after the Image of the Giant Orion and his Girdle, which is called the three Kings, which appear a little over the great Dog, it is the greatest and clearest of all the fixed Stars, which for the most part is known unto all Seafaring men, his declination is Southward from the Line 16 degrees, and 13 minutes.  
And it is south upon the 24 of january new stile, at ten of the clock at night. The 23 of Februaty at 8 of the clock at night. The 28 of March as six of the clock at night. The 30 of April at four of the clock in the evening. The 30 of May at two of the clock afternoon. The 28 of june at 12, of the clock at noon, even with the Sun. The 28 of july, at ten of the clock before noon. The 29 of August at eight of the clock before noon. The 1 of October at six of the clock in the morning. The 12 of November at four of the clock in the morning. The 1 of December at two of the clock in the morning. The 28 of December at 12 of the clock at night.  
Whereby every man may easily reckon at what hour and time this Star is south every day in the year, as well in the day time when you cannot see it, as in the night when we may see it. And if you desire to know the like touching all the rest of the fixed Stars upon every day in the year, then mark what was said before, upon what hour of the day before set down, the great Dog cometh into the South, and by the Tables hereafter following, touching the declination of the Stars, mark how long time the Start you seek for, cometh into the South before or after the great Dog, & by that means you shall find the just and perfect time that you desire.   

The 16 Point. The Table of the declination of the fixed Stars; and also an Instruction of the time in which each of them cometh into the south, also how you shall know them.  

The Twins.  
The south and lowest head thereof cometh 54 minutes after the great Dog into the south; and hath his declination towards the north, 28 degrees, 51 minutes.  
The clearest in the Foot cometh a quarter of an hour before the great Dog into the South, his declination is 16 degrees and 40 minutes towards the north.   

Canis Minor, or the little Dog, called Canicula, protion.  
This little Dog Canicula hath 3 stars, in this form, the clearest of them cometh 50 min. after the great Dog into the South: his declination is six degrees, 7 minutes in the northside of the Line.   

The Water Snake, Hydra.  
The Heart or the clearest in the Watersnake cometh after Syrius or the great Dog two hours, 40 minutes to the south, his declination is, in the Southside of the Line 7, degrees and 8 minutes, and showeth itself with such little stars as are here noted, whereby he is easily known.   

The Lyon.  
The Lion hath four beautiful stars, sit for use, & showeth itself with other, as is here set forth, the first and foremost of them is called Regulus or Basiliscus otherwise the Heart of the Lion, which cometh 3 hours and 30 minutes, after the great Dog into the south; his declination is 13 gr. forty min. in the northside of the line; the second called the neck of the Lion 3 hour. 30 min. after the great Dog into the south; and hath his declination from the line 21 gr. 37 m. the Back of the Lion comes into the south, 26 min. after the great Dog: his declination is in the Northside of the line 22 gr. 28 min. the tail of the Lion comes 5 hours after the great Dog into the south: his declination 16 gr. 33 min. in the Northside of the Line.   

Virgo, or the maid.  
That which is in the Wing called Vindemiatrix comes into the South, 6 hours 16 min. after the great Dog, her declination is in the Northside of the line 12 degrees, 54 minutes.  
The ear of corn or Spica Virgins cometh 6 hours and 36 min. after the great Dog into the South, her declination is 9 degrees, 15 minutes in the Southside of the Line.   

Boots the Waineman.  
Seven hours 30 minutes after the Star called Syrius, the clearest Star of Boötes comes into the South & standeth between his thighs, in this form, with some other Stars, and is called Arcturns, his declination is in the North-side of the line 21 degrees 5 minutes.   

The Northern Crown.  
After Boötes followeth the North Crown, bearing fashion of a Circle, as followeth, of the Mariners, it is called the Hospital, and when in clear whether, they behold some small Stars in it, they call them the sick; the greatest and clearest of them comes eight hours, 58 minutes after the great Dog in to the South, its declination is in the Northside of the Line 27 degrees, 57 minutes.   

The Weights, Libra.  
The balance or Weights, follow the sign of Virgo as followeth.  
The North Ballance comes 8, hours, 48 minutes after Syrius to the South, the declination thereof is 8 degrees, 58 minutes in the Southside of the Line.   

The Scorpion, Scorpio.  
Then followeth the Scorpion, as this figure showeth, the heart of Scorpion, Antores commonly called, comes 9 hours, 38 minutes after Syrius into the South, his declination is 25 degrees 33 minutes in the South side of the Line.   

The Snakebearer, and Hercules.  
The head of the Snakebearer comes 10 hours, 48 minutes after Syrius to the South, his declination 12 degrees, 52 minutes in the Northside of the Line.  
The head of Hercules standeth by the head of Serpentarius, and comes 20 minutes before it into the South, and hath his Declination Northward 14 degrees, 51 minutes.   

Lyra.  
Then follows Lyra, in this manner, the greatest with two little on's by it, which the Mariners call the three Castles, the lightest and clearest Star, come 11 hours, 55 minutes after the great Dog into the South, the declination thereof is 38 degrees, 30 minutes, on the Northside of the Line.   

The Eagle.  
Sheweth himself as this figure declareth, the clearest of these that is to say the middlemost of the three, comes 13 hours after the great Dog, or 11 hours before, into the South the declination thereof is 8 degrees on the Northside of the Line.   

The Swan.  
The Swan is shaped thus: the star that is the most North in the breast, cometh 13 hours, 40 minutes or after 10 hour. 20 minutes into the South before the great Dog, and hath his declination in the Northside of the Line 39 degrees, 9 minutes. That which stands most to the South of the two in the breast, is a new star, and hath showed itself first in the year 1600, the North wing comes 10 hours, 4 minutes after the Dog into the South, the Northern declination thereof is 44 degrees, 15 minutes.  
The S. Wing comes 14 hours after the great Dog into the South, the declination of it is 32 gr. and thirty minute. in the Northside of the line. The lightest and clearest of the Swan, which is placed in the tail of. it comes 14 hours after the great Dog, or 10 hours before into the South, the declination of it is 44 degrees, 3 minutes in the Northside of the Line.   

Capicorne.  
The most Southerly and clearest of the two lightest in the hour of Capricorn, as is here to be seen, cometh 13 hours, 30 minutes after the great Dog into the South; the declination is 15 degrees, 50 minutes in the Northside of the Line.   

The Flying Horse.  
The Flying Horse Pegasus, we may see in the heavens in this proportion, the Star in the mouth comes 14 hours, 56 minutes after, or 9 hours, 4 minutes before the great Dog into the South, his declination is 8 degrees, 15 minutes,  
The Northside of the line. That which standeth on the right hip or right leg called the Schaet, the same comes 16 hours, 16 minutes after the great Dog, or 7 hours, 44 minutes before it into the South, the declination of it is 26 degrees, 9 minutes in the Northside of the Line, at the same time comes the first and foremost into the South; placed in the Wing, which is called Marcab. The declination of it is 13 degrees, 18 minutes on the Northside of the Line.  
The last and utmost in the Wing of Pegasus, comes 16 hours, 44 minutes after the great Dog, or 7 hours 16 minutes before it into the South; the declination of it is 12 degrees, 3 minutes, in the Northside of the Line.  
The Head of Andromeda making with some Stars of Pegasus a great quadrangle (whereby it is easily known) comes after the great Dog into the South 17 hours, 24 minutes, or 6 hours, 36 minutes before it, the declination is 27 degrees, 39 minutes North from the Line.  
The Star named Fomahant is placed a good space in the Southside of the Flying horse, in the uttermost part of the flood running from Aquarius, it is a great and clear Star, and comes 16 hours, 16 minutes after Syrius or 7 hours, 44 minutes before it into the South, the declination thereof is 31 degrees, 26 minutes in the Southside of the Line.   

Cetus, or the Whalfish.  
After these follows the Whalefish, it hath two notable Stars in the tail of it, the more Northerly comes before the great Dog into the South 6 hours, 28 minutes, the declination of it is 10 degrees, 47 minutes in the southside of the Line, 24 minutes after comes the Southermost into the South, and it is in the Southside of the Line, 19 degrees 58 minutes.  
In the head of Aries there is a clear Star appeareing with that in the Horn, in form as is here described, and comes four hours, 43 minutes into the South, before the great Dog, standeth in the Northside of the Line 21 degrees, 44 minutes.  
Directly North follows Perseus a bright Star in form thus, and it comes before Syrius into the South three hours and a half, hath the declination in the Northside of the Line 48 degrees, 31 minutes.   

The Coachman, Ericthonius.  
The right shoulder goeth 57 minutes before the great Dog toward the South; his declination is in the Northward 44 degrees, 51 minute.  
Also that called the North Horn of Taurus, goes one hour, 22 minute. before the great Dog into the South, his declination is 28 degrees, 15 minutes Northward.   

The Giant.  
The first of the three in the Girdle, which are called the three Kings, go one hour 16 minutes before Syrius into the south; the declination of it is 36 minutes in the Southside of the Line.  
Four minutes after cometh the second or middlemost into the South; the declination is 1 degrees 27 min.  
Nine minutes after the first cometh the last or third of the three Kings into the South; and hath his declination in the Southside of the Line 2 degr. 10 minute.  
These three Kings stand always and appear a little above the great Dog, whereby they are easily known.   

Here do follow some Stars which show themselves in the North, and therefore by some men may are called Northstares.  
The Southermost of the forewheeles comes into the North to his highest right over the Pole 5 hours, 5 min. after the great Dog is passed the South; his declination 55 degr. 42. min. in the Northside of the Line, and is distant from the Pole 34 degrees, 18 minutes.  
The most Northern in the fore wheel followeth 23 minute. after, and then cometh to his highest; the declination of it is 59 degrees, 1 minute, and it standeth above the Pole 30 degrees, 59 minutes.  
The Horse the next to coach cometh to its highest in the North, 6 hours, 8 minutes, after the great Dog is gone through the South; it declineth to the North 57 degrees, 57 min. is distant from the Pole 32 degr. 3 min.  
The middlemost Horse comes half an hour after it to the highest; the declination of it is 56 degrees, 50 minutes, therefore it standeth distant from the Pole 33 degr. 10 minutes.  
The uttermost Horse of the coach cometh to the highest 7 hours, 4 minute. after Syrius is passed through the South the declination of it is 51 degr. 9, minute. it is distant from the Pole 21 degr. 51 minutes.  
The middlemost and brightest of the waiters declineth to the north 75 degr. 43 minute. is distant from the Pole 14 degr. 17 minutes.  

NOTA.  
Touching the north Star her declination, and how it is to be used, with the watchmen is decliniated in the difcourse following.  
Half an hour after followeth the Breast named Schedir, the declination is 54 degrees, 36 minutes, and thus it standeth from the pole 75 degrees, 24 minutes.  
Fifteen hours after that followeth the star that standeth in the Hipp, in declined 58 degree, 48 minutes, so that it standeth from the Pole 31 degr. 12 minutes.  
Yet 27 minutes later followeth that which is placed in the knee, hath its declination 58 degrees, 21 minute. it is distant from the Pole 31 degrees, 39 minute.     

The 17 Point. How to find the hour of the day or of the night.  
To find the hour of the day at any height, will be done most readily and certainly with such a water compass, as is described in the Chapter of the ebbing & flowing of the Sea; in the night one may find it by the nightdiall, as this Figure above describeth, which hath two rondels; the one movable, the other , in the lowest which is  are the 12 signs of heaven placed is also the months and days of the year. On the movable roundel are the hours, this turns with the gnomen, whose right side answereth to the middle point where there must be a nail with a hole; through which a man may see. The use of this night dial is this: We set first the foot to the twelfth hour on the movable roundel, and to the day of the year, on the undermost unmoveable roundel, and set the Instruments height, with the lowest corner of the foot A B, so that it stand waterpas, in such sort, that a man may see the North-star through the hole of the nail, turning the dial up and down, so long till the hinder wheels of the great Wagon come into the dial, which being so, the gnomen shall show the hour on the movable roundel. And if in place of the hinder wheels of the Wagon you take the brightest of the watchtmen, it will be 4 hour. 15 minute. later, as the dial will show, because the wheels aforesaid of the great cart go so much before the waiters.  
Men may find the hour by the ascension of the Sun and the Stars in this manner; when we see any Star in the South, whose just ascension is known, and that we know the true ascension that day, then draw the ascension of the Sun from the ascension of the Star, the remainder we divide into hours by 15, (for 15 degr. make 1 hour) and this will be the right hour of the time, but if the ascension of the Sun be more than the Stars, in that cause you shall add 360 degrees to the ascension of the Star, and then to as aforesaid.  

I. Example.  
On the 10 of April, in the evening, in the south, Ise the heart of the Lion, whose right ascension is 147 degr. the ascension of the Sun on that day is 19 degr. take those from the ascension of the Star, there remains 128 degrees, and these divided by 15, I find 8 hours, 8 degrees over plum, and for as much as 15 degrees make one hour, every degree will make 4 minutes, the 8 degrees over plum, make 32 minutes of an hour, it will be than at that time 8 hours, 32 minutes from the noon tide.   

TWO Exempel.  
ON the 5 of November in the night I find in the south the Star Aldebaran, the south eye of the Bull, whose right ascension is 64 degrees: the Sun's right ascension on that day 220 degr. which is more than that of Aldebaran, therefore I add to the ascension of the Srar 360 degrees, it makes 424 degrees, the Sun's right ascension being taken from this, there remains 204 degr. which is the difference between the ascension of the Sun and the Star aforesaid, which being divided by 15 you shall find 13 hours, 8 degrees, which make 36 minutes, it is then 13 hours 36 minutes from the noon tijde, that is 1 hour, 36 minute. after midnight.  
How to find the ascension on any day in the year of the Sun and the Stars, we have here adjoineth 2 tables, the one of the Sun, showing from 5 days to 5 days, the Sun's ascension, out of which you may easily find the same in other days. The other for thirty of the primest fixed Stars, both of them only by degrees, that being sufficient for this business.    

The 18 Point. A Table of the right ascensum of the Sun.  

The first number in the table shown the day of the month the second of degrees of the ascension, of the Sun on that day.  Ianu. Febr. Mart. April. May. juni. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. 5 287 5 319 5 346 5 14 5 42 5 73 10 292 10 324 10 351 10 19 10 47 10 78 15 297 15 329 15 355 15 24 15 52 15 83 20 303 20 334 20 360 20 28 20 57 20 88 25 308 25 339 25 4 25 33 15 62 25 94 31 314 28 342 31 10 30 38 31 68 31 99 julius Augu. Septe. Octo. Nove. Dece. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. da. deg. da. egg. 5 104 5 135 5 164 5 191 5 220 5 251 10 109 10 140 10 168 10 195 10 225 10 257 15 114 15 145 15 173 15 200 15 231 15 263 20 119 20 149 20 177 20 205 20 236 20 268 25 124 25 154 25 182 25 210 25 241 25 274 31 130 31 159 30 187 31 215 30 246 31 281   

A Table of the right ascension of the primest Stars.  

THe Girdle of Andromeda, 12 degrees  
The clearest in the head of the Ram. 27 degrees  
Menkar the brtghtest in the mouth of the Whale 41 degr.  
Aldebaran, the south eye of the Bull. 64 degrees  
Capella in the left shoulder of Erichtonius. 72 degrees  
Regel the left foot of Orion. 74 degrees  
The Star in the left shoulder of Orion. 84 degrees  
Syrius the great Dog. 97 degrees  
The North head of Gemini. 180 degrees  
The South head of Gemini. 111 degrees  
protion the little Dog. 110 degrees  
The brightest in the watersnake, CorHydrae. 137 degrees  
Regulns the Heart of the Lyon. 147 degrees  
The tail of the Lyon. 172 degrees  
Vendemiatrix the right wing of Virgo. 191 degrees  
Spica Virgins the ear of corn. 196 degrees  
Arcturus the brightest in Boötes. 210 degrees  
Arcturus the brightest in Boötes. 218 degrees  
The South Waight. 210 degrees  
The north Waight. 224 degrees  
The brightest in the North Crown. 230 degrees  
Antares, the Hart of the Scorpion 242 degrees  
The Head of Hercules. 254 degrees  
The Head of Serpentarius, 259 degrees  
The tail of the Eagle. 282 degrees  
Vultur the clearest in the Eagle. 293 degrees  
The Star in the mouth of the horse Pegasus. 521 degrees  
Formohant the brightest in the end of Aquarius. 339 degr.  
Marcab the sack or foot of Pegasus. 342 degrees  
The uttermost in the wing of Pegasus. 358 degrees  
The most Northerly in the Whale's tail. 360 degrees    

The 19 Point. Of the Horizon, or the Circle that boundeth the sight.  
WHere the heavens & the earth or the waters seem, in our sight to meet together, that is called the Horizon, or the Circle bounding the sight, because our sight endeth there, & can go no further by our netherlands Seafarers, it is also called the Kimmen. This circle devideth the heaven's just in two even parts; so that just the one half is seen by us here above, and the other half can not be seen by us, because it is hidden underneath us, which happeneth in this manner. The earth, (as in the first chapter is showed) standeth as a centre in the middle of the heavens, the which by reason of the unmeasurable quantity or largeness thereof, is so fare separated from the earth, that the whole thickness of the Earth in respect of the heavens, is no more than a point or prick. or at least so little that it cannot be perceived by our sight and that which by our sight, along upon the Earth or the Water we can comprehend, (which can not reach further than about three Dutch miles, that is 10 English miles) seemeth in our eyes by reason of the space so little, to be no other than an half Globe falling perpendicular upon a plain, so that our sight falleth in the heaven, as if we stood in the middle point of the world, and saw-right compass wise, whereby it falleth out, that just the half of the Heaven is seen by us, and the other half is not seen by us, in like manner as if a man should lay a line over the centre of a Circle, than the one half of the Circle is above, and the other half is just under. All the heavenly light, as the Sun, Moon, and Stars (by the turning of the heavens) coming above the Horizon, are seen by us, and going down under it, go out of our sight.  
The Zenith is the point of the heavens directly over our head, and is on all sides equally distant from the Horizon it is also called the Pole of the Horizon.  

An Explication.  
The Horizon is too be considered in The eye being elevated above the water. The visible Horizon is lower than ●he trues. foot. minutes. 2 1 4 2 8 3 14 4 20 5 27 6 37 7 39 8 53 9 66 10 82 11 100 12 140 13 163 14 186 15 a twofold manner: according to the true and the visible, the true goeth every way right waterpasse from our sight, that is passeth through the Centre of the Sphere, as is said, deviding it into equal parts, is every way from the Zenith 90 degrees the just fourth parts of a Circle.  
The Visible is the uttermost part of the Earth or Water, that our eye can reach or see, when our eye is just on the flat or surface of the even Water, than the true and Visible Horizon are one and the same, but our eye lifted up above the surface of the Water, the sight falleth (over the Globe of the earth) every where lower than waterpasse, and thence it followeth that the visible Horizon is lower than the true, although this be not much material in the Art of Navigation, for as much as it is recompensed by the refraction of the visible Horizon. We have added this table, for those that desire to be exact, where men may see how much the visible differs from the true that being changed or altered by feet.   

Example.  
THe sight being elevated above the surface of the waters 14 feet, in the 1 Column, in the 2 Column over against it, you find 4 min. which the visible Horizon is lower than the true. The sight being lifted 140 feetabout the Horizon, the visible will be 13 mi. lower then the true.    

The 20 Point. Of the Meridian or Middle Circle.  
THe Meridian is a Circle in the Heavens, which we must conceive to pass through both the Poles of the world, right over our heads, and cross wise through the Equinoctial, and to cut right through the Horizon North and South. The Sun touching this Circle is at the highest, and then it is just noon, or the middle time of the day, and likewise the stars when they come upon this Circle, they are like the Sun) at the highest of the Horizon, and right South and as soon as they have passed it they begin to go downward again.   

The 21 Point. Of the height of the Sun or Stars, and what it is.  
THe height of the sun or Stars is nothing else but the distance or space that is between the Horizon and the Sun or Star itself: which to understand perfectly, you must make, that we suppose a point or prick to be right above our heads in the Heavens, that is equally distant from the Horizon in all places, which point is called the Zenith, or the head point: now seeing that the whole circuit of the heavens containeth 360 degrees and that the just half thereof is seen above the Horizon, it is certain that this point called the Zenith in all places is above the Horizon 90 degr. whether you turn cast, west north or south or any other way: now when the Sun riseth above the Horizon, and ascendeth higher and higher from it, and cometh toward this point or Zenith: we say that as many degrees as it ascended, from the Horizon towards the aforesaid point or Zenith, that the same is the height thereof, as by example, when he is risen half up from the Horizon towards the Zenith, than he is 45 degrees and if he be risen a third part from the Horizon than he is 30 degr. high, and so forth, the like is also to be understood of the height of the Stars.   

The 22 Point. How to measure or find the height of the Sun or of the Stars.  
TO find the height the Mathematicians have devised divers fit Instruments, whereof there are two that are most used at sea, which are the Astrolabium, and the common cross-staff, the use of the Astrolabium is plain and well known unto all men: for holding the instrument by the ring, let the Sun shine through the holes of the ears, the uttermost part of the Dial (counting from below upwards showeth how many degrees the Sun is risen above the Horizon: as the former figure plainly showeth.  
The cross-staff is used thus, you must place the end of the Staff underneath the eye, than you must remove the Cross too and fro, until the upper end of the Cross standeth even upon half the Sun or Star, and the under end just with the Horizon, and then the Cross will show you upon the staff, how many degrees they are in height, so you account after those numbers whereof ninety stand that the end of the staff that is next to your eye, the computation going backward from the other end of the staff: for otherwise if you reckon by those numbers that proceed forward from the end next your eye, than it will show you how many degrees the Sun or Star standeth from the Zenith, or Head point of the Horizon, as you may see by the figure ensuing.   

The 23 Point. How you must make a perfect cross-staff, and how you shall mark it.  
THe Cross staves are oftentimes made the one after the other by imitation, or patterns, and that many times without judgement or knowledge whether the pattern be good or not, whereof notwithstanding a man ought to be very certain, for it is a matter of great importance and therefore I have here set down two several ways easy to be understood, how to make the same tightly and perfectly upon good reason & good ground.  
Make an even smooth board, and passed good paper upon it, then draw a straight line upon one edge or side thereof, as you see in this figure a ●ine marked C A D, then mark another line as you see it marked B C, that B C A be a right and just half square, then take a good pair of Compasses, and set one foot thereof in the angle marked C, and compass therewith as you see B E A, so that A E B may be a right quadrant, or fourth part of a Circle, then divide it into two parts, to E, and then divide the other half (which is A E) into 90 parts, or degrees as thus: first divide it into 3 parts, and then divide each 3 parts again into 3, and then it will be divided into 9 parts, which done, divide each of them into two parts, and those divisions or parts divide into 5 parts, and then it will be divided into 90 parts: then take a strait line? and lay the one end thereof upon the Centre C, and so forth upon every several point, which you have divided in the Quadrant and then draw lines from the Centre C through all the foresaid points, as long as the board will contain them, as you may see in this figure: which done then your instrument is fully made and prepared to mark your staves there upon. Which to do, with your compasses take just the half length of your Cross, and set the one foot thereof in the Centre, and put the other at F, and do the like from D right to G, which two points or pricks draw with a strait line unto each other as you see in the line F and G, and then mark where the line F G is cut through by the lines that come out of the Centre through the degrees or points of the quadrant: for those cuttings through, show upon the said line the right marking of your cross-staff: that is, you must mark your Staff just as you see that these lines in F G are marked, by the lines that come out of the centre and pass through it, whether the Cross be long or short, you must follow the same order that you are taught in the figure, the line H I is drawn for a shorter Cross than the former, and K L for one that is shorter than that, viz whose half is just so long as the Line C K.  
The second manner of Framing your cross-staff much excelleth the ftrst in perfection and curiosity, so you divide it perfectly with your Compasses, which is done in this manner. Upon an hard even board which is pasted with paper draw a strait line as long as your staff is, and with point compass take the just half or the length of your Cross, whereunto you mean to mark your staff, and prick it many times along in the said line as you can: & divide each of the said lengths into 11000 equal parts, then look upon the table here after ensuing, which shown you how many of those points or parts you shall mark for each degree, and that you must do in manner following, from the end of the staff, which you will make the eye-end prick just the half length of the Cross, and there make a Cross stroke, from whence prick for every degree so many of the aforesaid parts as the table ensuing showeth you. As for example, for the first degree prick 176 parts, for the second 355 parts, for the third 538 parts, for the fourth 724 parts, and so forth: Remembering that you must prick all the lengths of pricks or parts aforesaid, from the aforesaid cross stroke, which is marked upon the half length of the Cross into 11000 parts, then divide the whole Cross so, and then take for every degree half so many as the Table showeth unto you. And if you cannot do so, divide half the Cross into a 1000 parts, and then leave the hindermost letter of the table out, as where you should for the first degree take an 176 parts, take but 17 parts, leaving the last figure out: but if your crosses be so small that you can divide the half of them into no smaller than an hundred parts, then leave out the two last figures in the table. But you must understand that the more parts that you divide the crosses into, your marks will fall out so much the better & perfecter.  
de. parts de. parts de. parts. de. parts. de. parts. 1 176 19 4019 37 10057 55 21716 73 756612 2 355 20 4281 38 10503 56 22708 74 61154 3 538 21 4550 39 10965 57 23759 75 65958 4 72● 22 4826 40 11445 58 24874 76 71445 5 913 23 5108 41 11943 59 26059 77 77769 6 1106 24 5399 42 12460 60 27321 78 85144 7 1303 25 5697 43 12998 61 28667 79 93854 8 1504 26 6003 44 13558 62 30108 80 104301 9 1708 27 6318 45 14142 63 31663 81 117062 10 1918 28 6643 46 14751 64 33315 82 133007 11 2131 29 6976 47 15386 65 35107 83 153469 12 2349 30 7320 48 16051 66 37046 84 180811 13 2572 31 7675 49 16746 67 39152 85 219038 14 2799 32 8040 50 17475 68 41445 86 276362 15 3032 33 8418 51 18239 69 43955 87 371885 16 3270 34 8807 52 19042 70 46713 88 561810 17 3514 35 9210 53 19887 71 49758 89 1139891 18 3764 36 9626 54 20777 72 53137 90 infinite.   

The 24 Point. Of the cutting of the cross-staff, and how a man may help and prevent all the defects of the staff.  
Set the great Cross with the middlemost upon like degrees to wit, each upon such as for that purpose are marked upon the staff: then apply the staff (the Crosses so firmly remaining) unto your eye in such manner (whether it be on the innermost or outermost corner it is all one) as that you discern the ends of the Crosses both above and beneath, just over each other, in form as this figure specifieth. If then you draw straight lines by the ends of of the Crosses A B and D C they shall meet just in the middle point of your sight. And in as much as the Crosses are placed upon like degrees, the lines aforesaid shall meet just upon the end of the staff, seeing that the end of the staff representeth the centre of the quadrant whereby your staff is marked.  
So then the aforesaid lines or ends of the Crosses answer both just upon the end of the staff, & also upon the sight, so that it followeth necessarily, and appeareth evidently: that the end of the staff and the sight meet in one; or to speak properly, both of them stand just in the centre of the quadrant.  
Therefore whensoever with the Cross staff you will take the height of the Sun, or of any Star, then observe diligently: how many degrees it is elevated above the Horizon: and place the two Crosses upon so many degrees: then apply the staff to your eye in such manner as that you may see the ends of the Crosses just over each other, according as is taught before: in such form then as you find the staff to stand to your eye shall you place the staff (taking away one of the Crosses) when you desire to measure according to such height: this is a sure rule which will never fail, neither can you possibly miss if you follow it.  
Nᵒ 1   

The 25 Point. How to find the height of the Sun by the shadow.  
Nº 2  
That being done, the preparation is made; to mark the piece, take first the just wideness with a pair of Compasses, that is between EGLANTINE, the foremost edge of the long cross, and A B the outermost edge of the ear, in the little cross, as in the figure No. 2. and put that on the piece of the point D, on the left roundel inward toward C, on that point draw a thwart line, from thence you shall begin to mark, that the wideness between the middle line of the staff, and the under edge of the ear, which is in the uppermost cross, as in the foresaid figure No. 2. from F tot A, prick that on the quadrant from A toward F in H, and from C to G in I, and draw the line H I. Then observe how all the lines coming from A the centre of the quadrant, cutting through this line, even so must the piece be marked beginning at the point C with 90, 80, 70, etc. But if so doing, you cannot get so many degrees on the staff, as you desire to have (for your use) then set the little cross a third or fourth part lower toward the great cross at your pleasere, so that the under edge of the ear AB in the figure No. 2. may come to stand at MN, then in the place of the length F A take F M, and thrust it in the quadrant of A toward F into K, and from C unto L, and draw the line K L, that then will be marked as it ought, by cutting the lines, coming from the centre through the division of the quadrant, but you must take a certain mark in the long cross, for to set the little cross in such manner as you would use both marking. But if you would make more marks on the same piece, you must slide that little cross more netherward and then do as was said before, but you may not forget to make certain marks in the long cross; for to set the little cross well according to the marking, which you desire to use.  
To mark this cross staff from tables more perfectly, draw on an even board pasted with paper a right or strait line, as long or longer than the staff that you desire to mark. You shall with the compass take the wideness of the staff, between the middle line, and the nethermost edge of the ear at the little cross, as it is in the figure No. 2. F A or F M, or also F O, what marking soever you desire to follow set that wideness taken as often alongst that foresaid line as you can, and each of these lengths you shall divide in 10000 parts, this table in this place shows how many of these parts you shall appoint for a degree, or a fourth part of a degree, beginning, as is the figure a foresaid No. 2. from the point C. The first Column of the table showeth the degrees, the second the min. the third the parts, which you must take for the degrees, and mi. for the first half degree or 30 min. 87, for a degrees, 175. for 2 degr. 15 mi. 393, but for 6. degrees, 45. min. 1184. parts; but if you cannot divide so small a breadth as of F E, or F O, into 10000 parts, than you may divide it into half so many parts, and so you shall take so many parts for a degree, or part of a degree, if you cannot do that, you shall divide it into 1000 parts, at every time, leaving out one letter in the table, as when you should take for the first degree 175. take 17, and as near, as you can one half, for the 8, degrees in the place of 1405, take 140, and so forward.  
But if you mark this staff with the number inverted, so that in the place of 90 you set 0 for 80. 10 for 70 20. and so forth, as the common cross staff is marked ordinarily, which you use toward the Sun, you must then on the contrary use the northerly declination, and subtract the southerly and so at the first without further marking, you have the height as it is in the figure, if as in that which went before you to the height of the Sun being elevated at D 70 gr. you shall in place 70 find on the staff 20 that is not the height of the Sun from the Horizon B D, but the fulfilling of the height to 90 degrees as D Z, that is the distance of the Sun and Zenith, if then you join to it the northerly declination D E 10 gr. that makes together EZ 30 degrees, the distance of the Equinoctial and Zenith, and just at P A the elevation of the Pole. In the same manner if the Sun hath southerly declination, and is risen from the Horizon 50. gr. as in S. you shall not find on the staff 50 gr. for B S, but 40. gr. for S Z the distance of the Sun and the Zenith. Then if you take S E the southerly declination from S Z 40. there remains E Z 30 degrees, for the distance of the Equinoctial and the Zenith just at P A the height of the Pole.  
That the unsliding piece should be movable by the sight it is done for 2. causes; first that you may slide it netherward or outward as these and sliding of the great cross requireth, secondly, that in soul weather when the waves go high, you may set it inward (as occasion shall require) for your better measuring, for where the waves are high and troublesome long instruments, are not so fit for use as short. This foresaid cross staff is very fit, to take the height certainly on the firm land, without the use of the Horizon. That you may do this, you shall lay the staff on a table or any other flat place in a rightline with the water the eye end directly to the south, and with the other end, where the thwart sliding piece standeth to the north, on two smooth pieces of wood, so much lifted up that you may slide the long cross too and again without hindrance, then when the Sun comes directly south, (that is, when the Sun hath equal shadow on each side of the staff, then shall you slide the long cross too and fro, so long until the shadow of the ear at the little cross fall just between the two parrallell lines on the thwart cross; that being done, you shall find the height of the Sun in the staff at the long cross, which being sound, you shall by that know the height of the Pole or the distance of the place where you take the height according to the instructions before laid down.  
Here followeth the Table by which you must mark the foresaid cross staff.  

The first Column showeth the degrees, the second the minutes, which are above the degrees, the third the number of pricks, points, or parts belonging to such degrees and minutes.  gr mi. parts. 0 0 0  15 43  30 87  45 131 1 0 157  15 218  30 162  45 306 2 0 349  15 393  30 437  45 480 3 0 524  15 568  30 612  45 655 4 0 699  15 743  30 787  45 831 5 0 875  15 919  30 963  45 1007 6 0 1051  15 1095  30 1139  45 1184 7 0 1228  15 1272  30 1317  45 1361 8 0 1405  15 1450  30 1495  45 1539 9 0 1584.  15 1629  30 1673  45 1718 10 0 1763  15 1808  30 1853  45 1899 11 0 1984  15 1989  30 2034  45 2080 12 0 2126  15 2171  30 2217  45 2263 13 0 2309  15 2355  30 2401  45 2447 14 0 2493  15 2540  30 2506  45 2632 15 0 2680  15 2726  30 2773  45 2820 16 0 2867  15 2915  30 2962  45 3010 17 0 3057  15 3105  30 3153  45 3101 18 0 3250  15 3297  30 3346  45 3394 19 0 3443  15 3492  30 3541  45 3590 20 0 3640  15 3689  30 3739  45 3789 21 0 3839  15 3889  30 3939  45 3990 22 0 4040  15 4091  30 4142  45 4193 23 0 4245  15 4296  30 4348  45 4400 24 0 4452  15 4505  30 4557  45 4620 25 0 4663  15 4716  30 4770  45 4923 26 0 4877  15 4931  30 4986  45 5040 27 0 4095  15 5150  30 5206  45 5261 28 0 5317  15 5373  30 5429  45 5486 29 0 5543  15 5600  30 5657  45 5715 30 0 5773  15 5832  30 5890  45 5949 31 0 6009  15 6068  30 6128  45 6188 32 0 6249  15 6310  30 6371  45 6432 33 0 6494  15 6556  30 6619  45 6682 34 0 6745  15 6809  30 6873  45 6937 35 0 7002  15 7067  30 7133  45 7199 36 0 7265  15 7332  30 7400  45 7467 37 0 7535  15 7604  30 7672  45 7743 38 0 3815  15 7883  30 7954  45 8026 39 0 8098  15 8170  30 8243  45 8317 40 0 8391  15 8466  30 8541  45 8617 41 0 8693  15 8770  30 8847  45 8925 42 0 9004  15 9083  30 9163  45 9244 43 0 9325  15 9407  10 9490  30 9573 44 0 9657  15 9742  30 9827  45 9913 45 0 10000  15 10088  30 10179  45 10265 46 0 10355  15 10446  30 10538  45 10630 47 0 10724  15 10818  30 10913  45 11009 48 0 11106  15 11204  30 11303  45 11403 49 0 11504  15 11606  30 11708  45 11812 50 0 11917  15 12024  30 12131  45 12239 51 0 12349  15 12460  30 12578  45 12685 52 0 12799  15 12915  30 13032  45 13151 53 0 13270  15 13391  30 13514  45 13638 54 0 13764  15 13891  30 14020  45 14155 55 0 14281  15 14415  30 14550  45 14687 56 0 14826  15 14966  30 15108  45 15252 57 0 15398  15 15547  30 15697  45 15849 58 0 16003  15 16160  30 16318  45 16480 59 0 16643  15 16808  30 16977  45 17147 60 0 17320  15 17496  30 17675  45 17856 61 0 18040  15 18227  30 18418  45 18611 62 0 18807  15 19007  30 19210  45 19416 63 0 19626  15 19840  30 20057  45 20278 64 0 20503  15 20732  30 20965  45 21203 65 0 21445  15 21692  30 21943  45 22199 66 0 22460  15 22727  30 22998  45 23275 67 0 23548  15 23847  30 24442  45 24343 68 0 24751  15 25065  30 25386  45 25715 69 0 26051  15 26394  30 26746  45 27106 70 0 27475  15 27852  30 28239  45 28635 71 0 29042  15 29459  35 29887  45 30326 72 0 30777  15 31240  30 31716  45 32205 73 0 32708  15 33226  30 33759  45 34308 74 0 34874  15 33457  30 3●059  45 36680 75 0 37320  15 37983  30 38667  45 39375 76 0 40103  15 40866  30 41653  48 42468 77 0 43315  15 44194  30 45107  45 46057 78 0 47046  15 48087  30 49152  45 50273 79 0 51445  15 52671  30 53955  45 55300 80 0 56713  15 58196  30 59757  45 61402 81 0 63137  15 64971  30 66911  45 68969 82 0 71154  15 73478  30 75957  45 78606 83 0 81443  15 84489  30 87769  45 91309 84 0 95144  15 99310  30 103854  45 108829 85 0 114300  15 120346  30 127062  45 134566 86 0 143006  15 152570  30 163498  45 176105 87 0 190811  15 208188  30 229038  45 254518 88 0 286362  15 327302  30 381885  45 458293 89 0 572900  15 763900  30 114588  45 229181   

The 26. Point. Concerning the use of the searing.  
THe Astrolabiums which men now a days commonly use at Sea, I mean that with a D●optra, upon which stand two penullen, & are not very serviceable by reason of the continual motions of the ships to be used at sea unless the penullen upon the Dioptra are placed near by one another, for then the Shipmaisters some times use the Astrolabium in the measuring of the Son. Nevertheless the Astrolabium can have no such perfection in it, for the Dioptra in the said Astrolabiums are placed almost 2 or 3 inches at most the one from the other, and if so be, in a little time, a small fault or mistake happen in the observation of the shadows even as through motion of the ship it may easily happen, so also must the Dioptra upon the degrees of the Limbus make a greater mistake and fault.  
Therefore have I here set down this figured and drawn Ring which you may let be made ready or prepared by Messig about one foot or a foot & half wide and 2 or 3 inches broad. For in the use of it you have no need of a Dioptra but you let the Son shine through the little holes because the shadow may the more perfectly and narrowly be observed, so! then let the ring b● covered on both sides only that there may be some opening left that so the degrees which stand marked on the inside may be fitly seen and used.  
These degrees fall once more wider one from the other then in the Limbus of the Astrolabium, because in this the shadow falleth out of the circumference; or out of the sides and not (as it is in the Astrolabium) out of the Centre, and therefore is the whole circumference of the Ring according to the Art of Geometry divided into 180 degrees, whereas on the contrary in the Astrolabium the Limbus or round ring encompassing it containeth 360 degrees.  
The beginning of the degrees beginneth by the letter O, right even against the little hole over that which is placed next by the handle: there are 2 little holes or chinks made in the Ring through which you let the shadow fall, the one stands by the letter B, placed about 10 degr. from the pendel E, by which the ring is hung. The other little hole C. stands just 30 degrees distant from the little hole. B. Because: when the Sun is not very high above the Horizon, than we receive the shadow through the little hole C, and then we begin to count the degrees not fare from the letter O, as beforesaid, but from the letter F, standing right just over against C. just 3● degrees distant from O.  
This ring being thus made I should think it most fitting to signify the height of the Sun, notwithstanding the Shipmaisters now adays use the degree-bow, which nevertheless are greatly subject to faults and mistakes.   

The 27. Point. Of the breadth of the Lands.  
THe breadth of Lands or Countries is no other, than the distance or wideness that is between the said Lands and the Equinoctial Line, which is reckoned in a double manner, that is northerly and southerly, to the number of 90. Such Lands or Countries as lie right under the Equinoctial Line have no breadth: but such as lie northward from it, have northerly breadth, and they that lie southerly have southerly breadth.  

Example.  
The Island of S. Thomas, in the River Gaban in Guiena lieth right under the Line, and therefore hath no breadth neither northerly nor southerly.  
The Cape S. Vincent in Spain lieth northward from the Line 37 degrees, and therefore the northern breadth of Cape S. Vincent is 37 degrees.  
The point of Lizart in England lieth northward from the Line 50 degrees, therefore the north breadth of Lizart is 50 degrees.  
The Cape de Bona Esperance lieth southward from the Line 34 degrees and a half, therefore the southerly breadth of Capa de Bona Esperance is 34 degrees and a half. In like manner you must understand and reckon their Lands, Countries and Towns.    

The 28. Point. Of the height of Lands and Countries, and what it is.  
THe height and breadth of Lands and Countries although that in themselves they are divers things, yet they are always one like unto the other. Any Country being situated under the breadth of 30 degrees, lieth also in the height 30 degrees, which by Seafaring men is taken without difference, but what it is, or what it hath in it or signifieth few men understand, and yet it behooveth a seafaring man, that seeketh for the height of any Countries, to be expert therein, for that no man without it can well understand how many instruments (whether it be Astrolabium, or Cross staff, no nor the Sea-compasse itself) should well be used: for that these things are all built upon one foundation, and like a chain hang one upon the other. But it may be that some man will object and say, that there are many Pilots which do not well understand such things and yet are able to go directly unto divers places, whether they desire to sail: which I confess to be true: but tell me how many times are they deceived? How many times are they in great doubt & fear? and how seldom dare they trust unto the height which they have taken or reckoned, when they are to seek out any Country thereby? how oftentimes hath it heretofore happened, that for want of such knowledge, ships have sailed out of their way either, behind England, or upon France, which thought to pass through the channel between England and France, and that in so short and well known, and common sailed water, as to come out of Spain or France? what would such men do, if they should pass the Line, and were to seek or find out certain Lands? Or that after they had sailed up and down the Seas certain months together, should then seek out for Land? but I am of this opinion which I know every man will grant that it is much better and more assured to go away being guided by his own eyesight, then like a blind man to be led by another, and knoweth not whether that other seethe well or not: but to come again to our matter, touching the height of Countries, it is no other but the height of the Pole above the Horizon, that is to say, so many degrees as the Pole in any Land is lifted up above the Horizon; so much is the height of such a Country: & this height agreeth always with the breadth as aforesaid. In the 10 Chapter it is showed, that wheresoever a man goeth or turneth, always the one half of the Heavens showeth itself above the Horizon and the other half is hidden from us: in the first chapter it is said that the two Poles stand right one against the other, whereby it is evidently to be understood, that whensoever a man being upon the earth is right under the Equinoctial line, that then both the Poles of the World, lie right in the Horizon, one in the south, and the other in the north: and as much as a man travaileth northward from the Equinoctial line; and winneth breadth northerly, so much the north Pole riseth above the Horizon: and the south Pole contrariwise goeth so much under: and on the contrary, as many degrees as a man goeth from the Equinoctial line southward, and winneth breadth southward, so much the south Pole riseth above the Horizon, and the north Pole goeth so much under: which may easily be understood by the figure here after following.  
In this figure the innermost roundel that turneth about, signifieth the Heaven, N the north Pole, S the south Pole, A the Equinoctial, the uppermost edge of the half movable roundel, signifieth the Horizon, the one half off the Heavens is above it, and the other half just under it, the round ball in the middle signifieth the earth, where in you see a little man, that may be turned upon the earth southward and northward.  
Now perfectly to mark and perceive that which is before written, that is to know what height is, and that it always agreeth with the breadth, bring the little man upon the Earth Globe right under the Equinoctial, that is to say that it have no breadth, neither northward nor southward, than you shall see that both the Poles lie just with the Horizon, and that neither of them both are elevated above it, nor depressed under it, and withal, you shall see that they that dwell under the Equinoctial have no height or elevation of the Pole, nor yet any breadth. But if you remove the man so much northward that he goeth ten degrees upon the earth, that is, that he cometh ten degrees upon the north breadth, you shall see that the north Pole shall be raised or elevated ten degrees above the Horizon in the north, and the south Pole shall go ten degrees under the Horizon: and if you remove the man upon the earth more northerly, as thirty, forty, or fifty degrees, the north Pole will also be so much elevated, and the south Pole to the contrary so much depressed under the Horizon: so that if you turn the man upon the earth to ninety degrees, than the north Pole also will be elevated ninety degrees, that is the Pole will stand right above his head, and the Equinoctial will join with the Horizon in one circle: that which thus is ●●id of the elevating of the north Pole, is also in the same manner to be understood of the south Pole: for if you likewise move the man upon the earth in the figure toward the south, the south Pole will be elevated above the Horizon, as much as the man in breadth goeth southward, and the north P●le will go so much under the Horizon.  
One thing is herein to be noted, that as much as the Pole riseth above the Horizon just so much the Equinoctial goeth under it, and when the Pole goeth under, the Equinoctial riseth again in equal proportion.  
But above all you must mark, that the number of the Poles elevation added to the height of the Equinoctial always make even ninety degrees, so that when the Pole is elevated 30 degrees in the north, the Equinoctial is elevated sixty degrees in the south: but if the south Pole be elevated above your Horizon twenty degrees, the Equinoctial will be elevated in the north seventy degrees, which is clearly understood and showed in this manner: we always see half the Heavens above the Horizon, (as aforesaid) which is twice ninety degrees, from the south to the Zenith or the point just over our heads, and fro●●he Zenith to the Horizon in the north. Now seeing 〈◊〉 between the Equinoctial and the Pole there are always ninety degrees, (as is showed in the second chapter) it followeth that which is beneath the Pole and the Equinoctial, maketh also ninety degrees: therefore when we know the height of the Equinoctial, and take it out of ninety, that which resteth over is always the height of the pole, this also may be seen in the figure aforesaid.   

The 29. Point. Concerning the difference and agreement of the Declination in divers places of the earth.  
THese Tables of the Sun's declination are reckoned upon the Meridian or length of the earth from the westend of England. Those which are more easterly from thence, have the lesser declination, when the Sun departeth from the Line, and increaseth in declination either towards the North or South as well between the 20 of March, and the 22 of june, as between the 23 of September, and the 22 of December, and the greater declination, when the Sun returneth again towards the Line, whether it be by north or by south the Line as well between the 22 of December, and the 20 of March, as between the 22 of june, and the 23 of December.  
On the contrary, those which are more westerly from thence, have the waxing declination (that is when the Sun runneth from the Line either by North or by South the Line, the greater declination and the falling declination (that is when the Sun runneth again towards the Line, either by North or by South the Line, maketh the less. That cometh to pass by reason of time, thus. Those which are more easterly have the Sun sooner in the south or in their Meridian, and therefore is the waxing declination less, and the falling greater, on the contrary those which are more westerly have the Son later in the South, and therefore have they the increasing declination more, the decreasing less.  

The first Example.  
Concerning those which are more easterly with rising declination upon the 25 of March in the second year following the Leap-yeare I desire to know ●he Son's declination at noon at Bantam in the East-Indies. First I seek upon a Globe or any other Table, how much more Easterly Bantam lieth then the Lands end of England, and I find it to be about 120 degrees (herein we reckon not so near upon a degree or two, because such a difference is but little in this respect) whilst then the Son must have 24 hours to run about the heaven or the whole earth which is 360 degrees, I seek how much time he must have to run 120 degrees, and I say thus: 360 degrees ma●● 24 hours, what maketh then 120, facit 8 hours, 〈◊〉 thence I find that the Sun cometh 8 hours sooner to the South at Bantam then at the Lands end of England that is: That the Sun is fall South at Bantam, when it is but 4 a clock after midnight at England's Lands end. Then I look in these Tables upon the abovewritten 25 of March for the declination of the Sun, and I find it to be 1 degree 57 minutes, and (out of the declination on the day following 2 degrees 21 minutes) that the declination of the Sun at that time in 24 hours increaseth 24 minutes, therefore say I: if the declination increase 24 minutes in 24 hours how much in 8 hours? facit 8 minutes, from thence it is clear that seeing the Sun runneth from the Meridian over Bantam to the Meridian of England's end, and the declination riseth or increaseth 8 minutes, that it at Bantam is 8 minutes less as these Tables declare. The Sun's declination is that day at Bantam no more than 1 degree and 49 minutes by north the Line.   

The Second Example. With falling Declination.  
Upon the 16 of the same year I desire to know the Sun's declination at noon) at Bantam and I find in these Tables upon that day for the length of England Lands end 2 degrees 40 minutes, that it decreaseth every day at that time of the year 24 minutes. Seeing then the Sun (as is said in the first example) cometh 8 hours sooner to the South at Bantam then at England's end, I say doth the declination decrease 24 minutes in 24 hours, how much maketh it in 8 hours? it maketh 8 minutes from thence it is known, that seeing the Son runneth from the Meridian of Bantam to that of England's End, and the declination falleth 8 minutes, and therefore at Bantam is it 8 minutes more, even as these Tables declare. The declination of the Son on that day is at Bantam 2 degrees and 48 minutes.   

Observation.  
From hence it followeth: That one and the same Steer-man (sailing eastwards to the Indies, coming upon two such divers times before the Straight of Sunda, and would take the height of the Pole according to the Sun of one and the same corner of Land, and should use these Tables without such caution, he should (though he thought it well done) thereby (taking one time 8 minutes so much and the other time 8 minutes too little declination) he should find it to differ 16 minutes in his height, therefore in long voyages you must think well upon this.   

The third Example. Concerning those which are more Westerly with rising declination.  
A certain Ship coming upon the 9 of October in the third year after Leap-year upon the great South Sea, near the Coast of Peru, the Steerman desireth to know the Sun's declination there at noon, he findeth (out of a Globe or any other Table) that that Coast lieth full 80 degrees more Westerly than England's Lands End. The Sun must then run from the South over England's end to the South of the foresaid Coast of Peru full 80 degrees, to which he requireth about 5 hours and an half, so that when the Sun standeth there in the South, it is then from England's end half an hour past 5 in the afternone. He findeth in these Tables the declination of that day 6 degrees 13 minutes by South the Line, and (out of that of the following day which is 6 degrees 36 minutes) that at that time in 24 hours the declination riseth 23 min.) therefore shall he say: the declination riseth in 24 hours 33 minutes, how much then in 5 hours and a ½? facit full 5 minutes, and from thence we find, that seeing the Sun running from the Meridian of England's end to heart of the Coast of Peru riseth full 5 minutes, and thereupon the declination on that day is there 5 minutes more, even as the tables demonstrate. The declination then on that day on the Coast of Peru is 6 degrees 18 minutes.   

The fourth Example. Concerning the falling declination.  
Suppose that such cometh to pass on the foresaid Coast of Peru on the 8 of September the same year, these table's point at the declination of that day 5 degrees 46 minutes, and the day following 5 degrees 23 minutes, so as upon that time of the year in 24 hours' time the declination lesseneth 23 minutes. The Steerman shall then reckon thus, if in 24 hours the declination lesseneth 23 minutes, how much is that in 5 hours and a half, facit full 5 minutes; and shall from thence find that his declination is there 5 minutes less, as these Tables instruct, the Son's declination then upon that day is upon the Coast of Peru 5 degrees 42 minutes, from hence may be understood, what it is which before is said in the example of the more easterly, that a Steereman when would look after the Sun on the Coast of Peru upon such two divers times in the same place, and would use these Tables of declination without the foresaid care and caution, though he sail right and well should nevertheless find 10 minutes difference.   

The fifth Example.  
Suppose 2 Ships being together departed from these Lands, the one saileth eastwards, and cometh according to his reckoning upon the 26 of September in the first year following the Leap-yeare on the other side of the world, I suppose 180 degre●s, in longitude distant from England's end, and find in these Tables the declination of the Sun on that day 2 degrees 0 minutes. The other ship saileth westwards, and meeteth the first ship at the foresaid place according to this reckoning not upon the 26 of September but upon the 25, and findeth the declination in these Tables for that day 1 degree 24 minutes, and so differ as well in the time one day, and accordinglly in the declination 24 minutes, which cometh to pass from this, the first sailed towards the Sunrising 180 degrees, hath shortened his time 12 hours. The other sailed with the Son 180 degrees, hath lengthened his time 12 hours, & thereby hath had one night less than the other whilst then the declination at that time increaseth in one day 24 minutes, so must he that is sailed eastwards reckon 12 minutes declination less, and he that is sailed westwards must reckon 12 minutes more, as the Tables each and shall have one sort of declination to wit 1 deg. 12 m. haved.    

The 30. Point. How to find the height of the Pole by the Sun.  
TO find the height of the Pole by the Sun, one thing is specially to be marked, to wit, whether you are northward or southward from the Sun, whether the Sun standeth northward or southward from you is easily known, when you are in such a place upon the earth as is fare from the Line, or from the Sun, but when the Sun is near almost above your head, than you cannot well see it with your eye, therefore set a compass before you that you may see where north and south is, then take your Astrolabium, and set it so that the one edge thereof stand right south, and the other north, and then you shall see at a hair's breadth, whether the Sun being at the height, standeth northward or southward from the head point or Zenith: if then you will seek the height of the Pole, when you are on the north side of the Sun, that is, when the Sun is Southward from you, then take the just height first, and as much as the declination of the Sun is northward, take it out of your height and that which resteth is the height of the Equinoctial in the south, which substracted out of ninety (as in the former Point is declared) than you have the height of the north Pole.  
 

Example.  
In this figure let P be the north Pole, and G the South Pole, E H the Equinoctial, A B the Horizon, Z the Zenith, and D the Sun: let the height of the Sun B D bee sixty degrees above the Horizon: the northerly declination D E 8 degrees: if then you take D E 8 degrees from B D the height of the Sun, there will rest B E 52 degrees, which is the height of the Equinoctial, which taken out of 90 degrees, resteth 38 degrees, for the height of the north Pole A P, as in the 7 Point is showed.  
If the declination be Southerly, then add unto the height aforesaid taken: and then if the addition be less than 90, then look upon the height of the Line in the south which taken out of 90, as aforesaid, it leaveth you the height of the North Pole.   

Example.  
Let the height of the Sun be D B 40 degrees, the southerly declination of the Sun E D 20 degrees, then add E D 20 degrees, to D B 40 degrees, it maketh E B 60 degrees the height of the Equinoctial which substracted from 90, as E G the distance between the Equinoctial and the south Pole; then there will rest 30 for G B, that is, as much as the south Pole is gone under the Horizon: as before is showed, so much as the one Pole is under the Horizon, just so much is the other above it, the north Pole P shall here be elevated thirty degrees.  
But if the height of the Sun being added unto the declination maketh more than 90 degrees, than you must understand, that the Equinoctial is northward from your head just so much as the aforesaid addition is more than 90 and so consequently the South Pole also shall be so much elevated.   

Example.  
Look into the figure next following, wherein let the height be D B 80 degrees, and the southerly declination E D 18 degrees, then if you add E D 18 degrees to B D 80 degrees, the height of the Sun there will be 98 degrees, for B E, seeing then that from the Horizon B, to the Zenith Z (that is the point in Heaven right above our heads) is just 90 degr. as in the 22 point is taught) it followeth that E the Equinoctial is 8 degrees northwards from the Zenith Z, and so 82 degr. elevated in the north, above the Horizon: when E A is taken out of 90 there resteth 8 degrees for the height of the south Pole, G above the Horizon B, than you must understand, that you are between the Line and the Sun.   

How you shall find the height of the Pole, when you are southward from the Sun.  
WHen you perceive that you are southward from the Sun, that is when the Sun standeth northward from you, first (as aforesaid) take the height of the Sun: then if the declination be southwards, take it out of your height which you have found, and then you shall have the height of the Equinoctial, which substracted from 90, it showeth under what height you are, southward from the Line.  
  

Example.  
Behold the figure above standing, Let A D be the height of the Sun in 64 degrees: the southerly declination E D 16 degrees: which substracted from A D the height of the Sun, there remaineth for A E 48 degrees, the height of the Equinoctial in the north, which substracted out of 90 then the height of the South Pole G B will be 42 degrees.  
If the declination be northerly, then add it to the height found out, if then the addition be less than 19 it showeth you the height of the Equinoctial, which taken out from 90, you find the height of the south Pole.   

Example.  
Look on the figure with his circles as it followeth here after, let A D the height of the Sun in the North be 50 degrees, and D E, the northerly declination 15 degr. then add E D 15 to D A 50 degrees, t●en you have 65 degr. for A E is the height of the Equinoctial, then G B the height of the south Pole is 25 deg. for as in the 27 Point it is showed, the height of the Equinoctial E A with the height of the Pole G B always make 90 degrees.  
But if the height and the declination of the Sun added together make more than 90, you must note that the Line is southward from you Zenith, as much as that number is above 90.   

Example.  
Look on the following figure, let the height of the Sun A D in the north be 84 degrees, the declination E D 21 degr. add them together, than you have A E 105 degrees, which is the distance between the Equinoctial E, and the Horizon in the north: now mark that A E is 105. and P the Pole, and E the Equinoctial, are even 90 degr. from each other than it followeth that P from A is 15 degrees, that is the height of the n. Pole above the Horizon, and so much you must be northward from the Line, and you must also mark that you are between the Line and the Sun.   

How you shall find the height when you are right under the Sun.  
IF you understand well the rules before going, than this is easy to be found. If you be right under the Sun, that is when the Sun is elevated 90 degrees, than you are even as many degrees northward or southward from the Line, as the Sun hath northerly or southerly declination.   

The explication thereof.  
Suppose that you find the height off the Sun above the Horizon to be 90 degrees, and that it is declined toward the north 16 degrees, then are you also 16 degrees northward from the Line, and the north Pole shall be so much elevated.  
But if the Sun hath no declination, that is, when it standeth even in the Line, than you must understand, that you are also right under the line, and so both the Poles are on the Horizon without any elevation.   

How you shall find the height of the Sun northward in such places where as it goeth not down.  
THey that in Summer sail to Moscovia, in the months May, June and July, coming about the North Cape, find, that the Sun at that time goeth not down there, but is always above the Horizon, so that a man according to the rules aforesaid, may not only seek the height off the Pole by the Sun, when it is highest southward, but also when it is northward at the lowest. in this manner following. Take the height of the Sun with the cross staff, when it is lowest in the north, and add there to the filling of the declination, (which is such a number as together with the declination make ninety, or so much as the Sun standeth from the Pole) and you shall find the just height of the Pole: or if you subtract the height of the Sun from his declination than you shall find how deep the Equinoctial is depressed northward under the Horizon, or in the south elevated above the Horizon, which substracted from 90, will likewise leave the height of the Pole, both these ways I will declare apart.  
  

Example.  
Mark the figure aforegoing, where let B D be the height of the Sun about the Horizon, in the north 7 degr. H D the declination of the Sun 20 degrees, then shall D P the filling of the declination, or the distance of the Sun from the Pole be 70 degrees: now if you add P D the filling of the declination 70, to be B D 7, the height of the Sun, you shall find 77 degr. for B P the height of the Pole.   

Another Example.  
If you take the height of the Sun A D 7, from H D 20 the declination of the Sun, there will remain 13 for H B, & so much is the Equinoctial in the north depressed under the Horizon, which if you subtract from H P 90, there remaineth for A P, 77 the height of the Pole, as abovesaid.    

The 31. Point. How to find the height of the Pole by the Stars.  
TO find the height by the Stars which stand near the Equinoctial, you use them either substracting from or adding thereto their declination, as you do with the Son. And those which stand near the Poles you must either subtract from or add to their distances from the Pole to their measured height and so find out the height of the Pole.  
 

The First Example.  
Let A B be the Horizon, P the North Pole, E D the Equinoctial, S the northstarre standing under the Pole, I measure the height of the Northstarre S B, above the Horizon 46 degrees, and for it I find in the Table the distance of the Northstarre from the Pole P S, 2 degrees 42 minutes, adding this then to the height that I find B S and maketh together 48 degrees 42 minutes for P B the height of the Pole.   

The second Example.  
Let F be the clearest of the waiters above the Poles risen above the Horizon F B 58 degrees, than his distance from the Pole F B being substracted 14 degrees 14 minutes even as the foregoing table doth teach you there resteth for P B the height of the Pole 13 degrees 46 min. If you come by Southwards the Line, and will use the Stars near the Northpole, so may you subtract the height (which you find) from the distance of the Star from the Pole, and to find the depth of the North Pole under the Horizon, even to the height of the South Pole above it.   

The third Example.  
Let S be the northermost hinder wheel of the great waggon, his height above the Horizon in the North B S 20 degrees, which being substracted from S P, which is 26 degrees and 14 minutes being his distance from the Pole, here remaineth over B P 6 degrees 14 min. which the North Pole is sunk under the Horizon and to G A the height of the Southern Pole.  
Even as the southern Stars being full south are at the highest, so are likewise the Northern in the north rightabove the Pole at the highest, or under the Pole at the lowest, this you may well near see by your eye in many which stand some what fare distant from the Pole, too wit, when they stand either above or below the Northstarre, but not right against it, by reason that the Northstarre itself by it own turning about the Pole, wendeth either on one side or other some what from full North, so that when you draw nearer the North, you must still be measuring to find out the right highest or lowest.  
Now to know when the Northstarre is either at his highest or lowest pitch, still mark well the great waggon, when that cometh under the Northstarre, so that when you let a plummet line hang right against the northstarre, it may likewise come to hang in the middle between the Wagon and the horses, then is the Northstarre right at his highest, above the Pole. Or when the Wagon also cometh above the Northstarre, and when you let a plummet line hang through between the Wagon and the horses, that that also hangeth right against the North-star, then is the Northstarre right under the Pole at the lowest, even as standeth delineated in the following Figures.  
Thus is the Northstarre right above the Pole.  
Thus is the Northstarre right under the Pole.  
Or when the Star in the Breast of Cassiopeia cometh right above the Northstarre, then is the Northstarre above the Pole at its highest, & when it is right under the Northstarre, then is the Northstarre at the lowest under the Pole, according to the demonstration in these figures hereunder specified.  
The stars of the great waggon are known to every one. And of the Stars of Cassiopeia. There are 5 very clear the principal in form, as formerly standeth expressed the second of them that is which is farthest distant from the Northstarre, and is in the breast, and standeth near upon as fare from the Northstarre as the northermost fore wheel of the great Wagon, if you hold a straight stick upon the sight, mark on end through between the Wagon and the horses, and mark it in the midst over the Northstarre, and then the other end shall stretch over the foresaid star called Cassiopeia's breast.    

The 32. Point. The use of the North star when you take the height by the waiters which are on the northern hinderwheele of the great Wagon.  
FOr as much as many Pilots know not the names of many of the fixed stars, and therefore follow the use of the north star according to the points of the compass: we have for the use for these men, made two sorts of tables the one according to the waters (which we have mended,) the other according to the northern hinder wheel of the great Wagon, both of them on the four strokes north, south, east and west, and in as much as in this kind or work the north star hath a different standing in sundry heights of the Pole, we have calculated the tables agreeing to divers heights or latitudes from 10 degrees to 10 degrees as followeth.  

At the height of 10. degrees.  When the brightest of the waiters standeth in the East, then is the north star under the Pole 1 degr. 28 min. North, than it is 2 degr, 48 minutes under the Pole. West 1 degree 22 min. above the Pole. South 2 degrees, 18 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 20 degrees.  When the brightest of the waiters standeth in the East, the n. star is 1 degree, 31 min. under the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 18 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 19 min. above the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 19 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 30 degrees.  When the brighest of the waiters standeth in the East, the n. star is 1 degree, 35 min. above the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 18 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 14 min. above the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 19 min. higher than the Pole. 
At the height of 40 degrees.  The waiters in the East, the n. star 1 degree, 39 min. under the Pole. North, the n. star 2 degr. 17 min. below the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 10 m. above the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 19 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 50 degrees.  The waiters in the East, the n. star is 1 degree, 44 min. below the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 17 min. below the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 3 min. above the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 20 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 60 degrees.  The waiters in the East, the n. star is 1 degree, 52 min. under the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 16 min. below the Pole. West, the n. star is 53 min. higher than the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 20 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 70 degrees.  The waiters in the East, the n. star is 2 degr. 5 min. under the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 15 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 32 min. above the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 22 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 80. degrees.  The waiters in the East, the north star is 2 degr. 33 min. under the Pole. North, the north star is two degr. 12 min. under the Pole. West, the north star is 33 min. under the Pole. South, the north star is 2 degrees 44 min. higher than the Pole.  

The use of the North star, agreeing with the northermost hinder wheel of the Wagon.  

At the height of 10 degrees.  When the northermost Wheel of the waggon standeth in the East, then is the n. star higher than the Pole 1 degree, 1 min. North, the n. star is two degrees 27 min. above the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 13 min. lower than the Pole. South, the n. star is under the Horizon out of sight. 
At the height of 20 degrees.  The northern wheel of the Wagon. East, the n. star is 54 min. higher than the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 27 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 19 min. lower than the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 27 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 30 degrees.  The Northermost hinderwheele of the Wagon. East, the n. star is 47 min. higher than the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 27 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 2 degree, 26 m. above the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 27 min. under the Pole. 
At the height of 40 degrees.  The northermost hinder wheel. East, the n. star is 38 min. above the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 27 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degree, 34 min. below the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 28 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 50 degrees.  The Northermost Wheel. East, the n. star is 24 min. above the Pole. North, the n. star is 2 degr. 26 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 1 degr. 45 min. under the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 28 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 60 degrees.  The Northermost hinder Wheel. East, the n. star is 2 minutes above the Pole: North, the n. star is 2 degr. 26 min. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 2 degr. 1 min. under the Pole. South, the n. star is 2 degr. 28 min. above the Pole. 
At the height of 70 degrees.  The northern hinder Wheel. East, the n. star is 41 min. under the Pole, South, the n. star is two degr. 25 m. under the Pole. West, the n. star is 2 degr. 22 min. under the Pole. South, the n. star is two degr. 29 min. above the Pole.  
At the height of 10 degr. the n. hinder Wheel of the great Wagon cannot come from the Horizon at the same height with the northstarre.   

A Declaration of the East, West, South, and Northern Waiters, and of the great Wagon.  
The Waiters north, that is when the clearest standeth right above the northstarre, even as in the second figure.  
The waiter's west, that is when the middlemost of the waiters, standeth towards the west, and there withal one high above the Horizon, as in the third figure.  
The waiter's south, that is when the clearest of them standeth right under the northstarre, as in this fourth figure.  
The northermost hinder Wheel in the north, that is, when the same standeth right above the northstarre, according to explication in the first figure.  
The northermost hinder Wheel of the Wagon east, is when as the same standeth eastwards and high above the Horizon towards the northstarre, as in this second figure.  
The same hinder wheel of the Wagon in the south is when it stands right over the Northstarre even as in the third figure.  
And in the West, when it standeth Westwards and high towards the Northstarre above the Horizon as is seen in the fourth figure.   

The use of the aforesaid Tables.  
You must stay till you have the clearest of the waiters, or the northermost hinder wheel of the great Wagon, upon any of the foresaid Points, than you take the height of the North star above the Horizon. The height being found with the quessing together. You may then something nearly know the height of the Pole. Then you can sufficiently find out of the foresaid Tables how much the Northstarre is higher or lower than the Pole. Is it higher, than you must subtract from, but is it not lower you must add that to the measured height, and so come to find the right height of the Pole.  
These foresaid Tables are reckoned all from 10 degrees to 10, and when you are between such heights so shall you (coming upon other heights) take notice, how many degrees you are either above or under these reckoned Poles. And therewithal how great the difference is between such two, seeing we find, that have observed it, you take from the difference according to the reason of the height where you are, less or more from the foresaid numbers, adding that too or substracting from, even as the cause requireth.   

The first Example.  
In the height of 46 I desire to know how much the North star standeth lower than the waiters stand in the east, observing. How great the difference is between the height of 40 and 50 degrees, I find 5 minutes increasing, I say therefore 10 degrees difference in height giveth 5 minutes, what amounteth 6 degrees to, facit 2 minutes, that being added by the 1 degree 39 minutes which I find on the Table over against 40 degrees because the difference is increasing from 40 towards 50 degrees, and so I find it 1 degree 42 minutes.   

The second Example.  
In the height of 48 degrees, I desire to know, how fare the North Star standeth too high, when the most northerly hinder wheel of the Wagon standeth East, the difference in the Table between 40 and and 50 degrees height is 14 minutes lessening, I say therefore if 10 degrees differ in height 14 minutes, what shall 8 degrees do, facit full 11 minutes, these being substracted from 38 minutes standing right against 40 degrees height, now because that the difference of 40 to 50 degrees lesseneth, I find 27 minutes which the North-star standeth too high upon the aforesaid 48 degrees.    

The 32. Point. Concerning the elevation of the heavenly Lights through the Damps.  
'tIs known by experience that Son, Moon, and all the Stars approaching the Horizon, seem also to be more and more high then in truth, they are the cause whereof we suppose to be the damps, which continually, (through the warmth of the waters and the earthly moistures) rise from the earth, which how nearer they are to the Horizon are so much the thicker, and thereby the lights so much the more seem to be higher. The nearer you come to the Pole, so much the more damps, and thereby the elevation of the heavenly lights above their places are the greater. The famous Astronomer Tycho Brahe hath by correct observation found it in his Clime in the latitude of 55 degrees 56 minutes even as these following tables teach you.  

The Table of the Sun's Elevation.  The Sun high 0 degrees appeareth 34 minutes higher than it is really. 1 degrees 26 minutes 2 degrees 20 minutes 4 degrees 15 minutes 7 degrees 13 minutes 10 degrees 10 minutes 16 degrees 7 minutes 23 degrees 3 minutes 32 degrees 1 minutes 
The Table of the Stars Elevation.  The stars high 0 degrees appear 30 minutes higher than they are indeed. 1 degrees 22 minutes 2 degrees 15 minutes 4 degrees 11 minutes 7 degrees 8 minutes 11 degrees 5 minutes 15 degrees 3 minutes  

The use of the foresaid Tables of the Elevation.  
IF you measure the Son's height above the Horizon less than 32 degrees you must subtract so much as the Table teacheth you on the number of the height you have found: If you measure the distance of the Son from the Zenith more than 58. on the contrary you shall add as much too as the Table besides the supplement to 90 from the measured distance from the Zenith, teacheth. But the Sun being more than 40 degrees above the Horizon and 50 degrees from the Zenith, these exaltations and elevations come to nothing.  

The first Example.  
I measure the height of the Son above the Horizon 4 degrees, the Table of Elevations of the Son pointeth me the Son to appear 15 minutes higher than in truth it is, & draw then those 15 minutes off from my measured height, & I do keep for the true height of the Sun 3 degree 45 minutes.   

The Second Example.  
I measure the distance of the Sun from the Zenith 74 degrees, the supplement thereof to 90 is 16 degrees thereby in the Table of the Son, I find 7 minutes which I add to the distance I measured and so I find for the right distance 74 degrees 7 minutes.  
Even as it is said of the Son, according to the Table of the Son, so must you also do with the Stars according to the Table of Stars.   

The first Example.  
I measure in the North upon the lowness of the middlemost Horse on the great Wagon 7 degrees above the Horizon, besides that I find in the Table of Stars 8 minutes, which being substracted from the measured height, I detain for the true height 6 degrees 52 minutes.   

The Second Example:  
I measure the distance from the Zenith of the Constellation which we call the great Dog 86 degr. the supplement thereof to 90 is 4, even besides that I find in the Table 11 minutes, which being joined by the distance you found, I find it 86 degrees 11 minutes.     

The 33. Point. Of the CARD.  
IT is known to every man, especially to those that derstand the grounds of cosmography, that the earth with the waters make one complete round body, & therefore it cannot be, that you should set forth the same perfectly in a plane or Card (either in the hole or in part) but there will be some want, for it is impossible to make a plain agree with a round form in all the parts thereof. So that your common cards many times fail in truth, especial those that comprehend great and long voyages by sea, and far from the Equinoctial; but the Maps which are commonly used in this Country, of the Easterly and Westerly Navigation, are without fault, or at least the errors are so little that they hinder not.  
They are very fit instruments to be used at sea, and our forefathers, which have invented them, have brought no small profit and utility to Mariners. The fault of them consists in this, and thus it may be seen: If you would sail a triangle, the 2 first sides will be sailed on their strokes and distances; but from the 2 to the 3 place (that is the 3 side of the triangle) it will fail both on the strokes and distances.  

Example.  
I sail from the Lizard a strait course to the Lands of Canary, and from thence again to the Lands of Corvo and Flores, on which foresaid strokes and distances many Maps are very complete and perfect. But if I would sail again from Corvo to the Lizard, from whence I first sailed, the Card will show me an imperfect way, to wit, it will seem farther wide in the Card, than indeed it is, also it will differ on the points of the Compass: so that you must direct your course more northerly than that which your Card directeth.  
In so short a journey, as this above said, it is not much observed, neither is it worth the observation: but those that sail to the West-Indies, shall soon perceive it; when they set sail, they take their course far to the south, and there they find their Cards of a fit length, because the Cards are fitted to it; But in their return, when they take their course northward, they find the way much shorter than their Cards show them.  
This is the cause: All the lines in the Card from north and south are drawn every where at an equal distance each from other, from the Equinoctial to the Pole; but on a globe which is made round like the earth, they are not of an equal distance, but the more northerly they come, so much the nearer they come each to other. So that two strokes from north to south at the latitude of 60 degrees, are but half so wide from one another, as they are at the Equinoctial, and at the Pole they touch each other. Therefore two ships being under the Equinoctial distant from one another two hundred leagues, they may both sail directly north without hindrance, coming to the height of 60 gr. but being 100 leagues from each other, and that following the same course, they would in the end meet each other under the pole, but if you direct such two ships by a plain Card, they will be always at equal distance, by which it sufficiently appears, that all places lying far north, are much too wide, unless they be drawn in, which cannot be done, but you must make other places more faulty.    

The 34 Point. How many miles or leagues you must sail on every point of the compass before you shall get a degree in breadth of the land.  

WHen you sail right south or right north on any one point of the compass, as from A to B or C, you sail for a degree 15 leagues.  
And you stay under the same Meridian.  
On the point north and by east, or south and by east, as from A to D or L, you sail for a degr. 15 & a half deg.  
And then you are out of the Meridian whence you sailed, as it were from B to D 3 leagues.  
Northnortheast and southsoutheast, as from A to E or M, for a degree 16 leagues.  
You are from the Meridian whence you sail 6 leagues as from B to E.  
Northeast and by north, and southeast and by south you sail as from A to F or N 12 leagues.  
You shall be without the same line as from B. to F. 10 leag.  
Northeast and southeast, you sail for a degree as from A to G or O 21 leagues.  
You are then off the north and south line whence you sail as it were from B to G or C O 15 leagues.  
Northeast and by east and southeast and by east, as from A to H or P for a degree 27 leagues.  
You are then out of the first Meridian, as from B to H, or C P 22 leagues.  
Eastnortheast or eastsoutheast, you sail for a degree as from A to I or Q 39 and a half league.  
You shall be out of the Meridian, as from B to I or from C to Q 36 leagues.  
East and by north or east and by south, as it were from A to K or R you sail for a degree 77 leagues & a half  
Then are you out of the Meridian, as from B to K, or from C to R. 75 leagues.  
East or West, as from A to S, you remain between the Pole and Equinoctial on the self same breadth of the earth or land.    

The 35. Point. Of variation of the Compass, and how you shall find the turning aside of the needle or variation.  
THe needle or the stile under the Compass, touched with the Loadstone, draweth to divers places diversely, in some places directly to the north, in other places it wendeth to the east, and in other towards the west; As for Example, at the Lands of Corvo and Flores) the most western of the Flemish Lands. At Helmshuy a little on the west side of the north Cape. About 30 leagues westwards from the south corner of Spitsburg, on the east side of the Cape of good Hope, at Cabo das Aguilhas, and at other places, as well in the East as in the West-Indies, the needle directeth you just north. Westwards from the Flemish Lands on the east side of the Cape, at Nova Zembla, on the coast of Spitsburgh, and on the east side of Cape das Aguilhas on ●ll the Indian Sea, it standeth from the north Westwards, and in the east side of the Flemish Lands, on the west side of the Cabo de Bona Esperance and other places more, it standeth from the north eastwards. The variation of the needle is twofold, to wit, from the north to the west, and from the north to the east, and the south are again of two sorts, the increasing and decreasing westward, in like sort the increasing and decreasing eastwards: The increasing eastward and westward, is, as you sail from east to the west, increasing & diminishing, that which decreaseth, may he plainly understood by this Example.  

1 Example.  
If you sail from the Island Corvo and Flores, where the needle standeth right eastward on the coast of Spain, the needle beginneth by little and little so much the more) to wind toward the east, until you have sailed the Straight of Gibraltar, where it is at the highest (as they hold) 13 gr. that is increasing northeastering.  
From thence sailing alongst the Middle-lands Sea, it beginneth to decrease, until you come at the place, called the Mouth of the Venetian Gulf, where it vanisheth, and the needle again draweth directly north, this they call decreasing north eastering.   

2 Example.  
If you sail from the Cabo das Aguilhas (where the needle standeth directly north) eastwards to the Indies the needle beginneth to decline from the north towards the west, until you come a little on the east side of the Island S. Brandaon, where it is at the height of 22 gr. or two whole strokes that is increasing northwestering.  
Sailing from thence, you begin to decrease, till you are at the south point of Celebes, where again the needle draweth right, this is called decreasing northwestering.  
For the common navigation from this Country to the east, north, England, France, or Spain the styles (to direct the Lily right north) set fast under the rose, about two third parts from the stroke, from the north to the east. The stretching and course of the one Country towards the other in the common Cards, are drawn by such a Compass, so that you may sail it without altering of the Compass or shaking any other reckoning or account.  
In great journeys, when the needle declineth sometime to the west, and sometime to the east, a stroke or two, or more, it is necessary to observe it sharply, over what side, and how much it standeth from the north, that you may be certain, what course you shall hold in sailing.  
Lastly, make a ring of brass or wood as P Q R, that you may hang the box on it, that the uppermost flat A B C D may hang Water-compasse, the south side B C F G, and the edges B F C G, and the Line L O just in the lead, this being thus prepared, the use followeth.   

Of the Tides.  
IT is known to all experienced Mariners that the ebbing and flowing of the sea is governed by the Moon, so that every new and full Moon the waters are higher which they call spring-tidings, and at the quarter of the Moon the waters are lowest: so that you may know and that certainly by former observation, (although the true and real cause thereof is yet hidden from us) the hour of the tide, and on what point or struck the Moon maketh high water in any particular place, to the great profit and furtherance of navigation.  
If you set such a compass with the bottom water compass, the line H K just north and south, to wit, H to the north and K to the south, and the lower end of the gnomen by such a degree of the Quadrant F C, according to the height of the Pole where you are: there will the roundel A B C, stand even with the surface of the true Equinoctial, and the gnomen E D with the axletree of the world.  
The sight on such a Compass, and a common one, differeth very much, and by how much nearer the Equinoctial so much more will the difference be, as will appear by this example following.   

The first Example.  
On the height of 50 gr. or thereabout, the Sun being in the beginning of Cancer in the greatest northerly declination, it is on a common Compass east at half an hour past seven, and west at half an hour past four, that is: he goeth from the east to the west through the south in nine hours, but from the west through the north to the east in 15 hours.   

The Second Example.  
At the height of 30 degrees, he comes little before half an hour past nine at the east, and a little after half an hour past two to the west, and so it goeth in less than five hours and a half from the east through the south into the west, but from the west through the north to the east he goeth more than 18 hours.   

The third Example.  
The Dragonshead being in the beginning of Aries, and the Moon in the beginning of Cancer, they make 5 gr. more declination than the Sun, and go to the foresaid height of 30 gr, more than an hour sooner from the east to the west, than the Sun, to wit, about the space of 4 hours, and again from the west to the east about the space of 2 hours.  
Under the line, the Sun having no declination, riseth in the morning in the east, and rising remaineth east until he cometh to the Zenith and passeth that to the west, and abideth so descending west, till he approacheth the Horizon and is according to a flat driving compass, the one half of the day east, and the other west, without coming on any other stroke; but it is not so on such an Equinoctial compass. The Sun and Moon both going always in the same distance of time over every stroke, to wit, from the east to the south in six hours, and from the south to the west in six hours, and again from the west through the north in twice six hours.   

The first Example.  
Under the Line, the Sun being in the Equinoctial, I set the end of the gnomen E directly north, the other end D to the south at the upper-edge of the Quadrant at G on O, the gnomen E D shall lie water Compass, like the axletree of the world, and the roundel right in the lead upright like the true Equinoctial there. The Sun com●ing above the Horizon, the shadow of the gnomen ●●all direct you to the sixth hour in the east, for the rising, but if he rise beyond the edge of the roundel, and devideth that in the same time into equal parts with the shadow, being 45 gr. above the Horizon, the shadow of the gnomen will direct you to the 9 hour in the south, being ●ome into the Zenith, the shadow shall fall just on the ●ead at the twelfth hour in the south, again 45 gr. that is, descending half way the west, the shadow shall be at the ●●ird hour in the afternoon in the south-west, but co●ing to the Horizon the shadow shall fall on the sixth ●oure in the west.  
As this is spoken of the Sun, the same must be understood of the moon in as much as concerneth the points 〈◊〉 strokes of the Compass.  
To reckon by the age of the moon, we have set in the table following under every stroke two ranks of cyphers, the first are the days of the age of the moon, or the days past since the moon was new or at the full. The second the hours and minutes of those days, in the which the moon comes to such a stroke, & maketh at the place standing by high water.   

The Second Example.  
Eight days after the moon hath been new or at the full, I desire to know when the moon cometh to the south, at Embden, or Enckhuysen, and such like places, makes high water (for there a north and a south moon makes full sea) I seek under the north and south struck the 8 day in the 1 column, and by that in the second 6 hours, 24 minute. on that then shall the moon come to the north and south at 6 hour. 24 min. and make high water in that place.  
The tide 48 min. later every day, that is four or fiv● parts of an hour, then if you know at what hour the new or full moon make high water in any one place, you shall reckon from that first day every day four or five parts of an hour later, and so you shall find the just tim● of high water or full sea in that place.   

The third Example.  
When the moon is new or full, than it is at Amsterdam and Rotterdam (and wheresoever a south-west and north-east moon maketh full sea) high water at three of the clock, a day after the new or full moon at three of the clock 24 mi. two days after at four of the klocke and 36 min. and four days after the new or full moon at six of the clock 12 minutes.  

Here follow the Tables of the Water-tydes.  

South, and North.  da. ho. mi.   0 12 0 
At the juttish Lands  
Before the Hever, Eyder, and Elve, before Emden & Delfeziel. Before Enchuysen, Horn and Vrck, upon all the coasts of Vlanders, upon the foreland. At Dover in the Pier, at Bevesier on the sand, at Hanton on the Key, Before Schietenburch and the Ras of Blanckert.  
at Olfernes.  
In the conduit  
at jubleter in the Road.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 12 48 2 1 36 3 2 2 4 3 1 5 4 0  6 4 48  7 5 36  8 6 24  9 7 12 From the Nesse to Beunen. 10 8 0 11 8 48 12 9 36  13 10 24  14 11 12   15 12 0    

South Southwest, and North Northeast.  da. ho. mi.   0 12 45 
Within the Maze  
within the Veer  
at Flushing  
Near Bevisier in Sea  
In the Chamber  
In Charmsey.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 1 33 2 2 21 3 3 9 4 3 57 5 4 43  6 5 33   7 6 21   8 7 9  From Beunen to the Sont. Also from Estaple to Beunen. 9 7 57  10 8 45  11 9 33  12 10 21  13 11 9  14 11 57  15 12 45    

South and by West, and North and b●●●st.  da. ho. mi.   0 1 30 
Under the Holy Land.  
Before the Maze and Goeree,  
Before the Veer.  
at Armewe. Upon the slat before Rammekens. Before the Wielings. On the Sealand Coasts. Before the Thames of London.  
Before Yarmouth  
In Duyns on the Road  
Near the Cingle  
On the Wester end of Wight  
Without Calais and Swartenes. In Blavet  
Bunlline at the Land.  Fa●●●● of s●re●●●● upo● 〈◊〉 s●me st●o●● 1 2 18 2 3 6 3 3 54 4 4 42 5 5 30  6 6 18  7 7 6  8 7 54  9 8 42 From the Gravel ●●ghen to Beunen. 10 9 30 11 10 18 12 11 6 13 11 54  14 12 42  15 13 30    

Sout west by South, and North-east by North.  da. ho. mi.   0 2 15 
Without Fontenay  
Without Blavet  
Under Bulline  
Before the Wieling  
Before the Maze.  
Falling of streams upon the same stroke Amidst through the Heads From Duynckerck to Greveling From Staples to Fecam.  
From Dortmout to Exmouth.  1 3 3 2 ᵒ 3 51 3 4 39 4 5 27 5 6 15  6 7 3  7 7 51  8 8 39  9 9 27  10 10 15   11 11 3   12 11 51   13 12 39   14 1 27   15 2 15    

Southwest and Northeast.  da. ho. mi.   0 3 0 At Amsterdam, Rotterdam, Dort and Ziericksea. Before Newcastle, the These, & Harry pool. In Robinhoods' bay, without the Flemish banks. In the pas of Calais. Before Conquer at peymarques groy Armentiers, Heys, Kiliaets, Porthus, the river of Bordeaux On all the southcoasts of Britagne, Gascoigne, Poictu. On all coasts of biscay, Galissien Portugal and Spain. On the West coasts of Ireland at Bokenes or Orkenesse. In Hitland and Fairehill. 
Falling of streams upon the same shok From Ca de Hague to the Island of Ornay.  
From Garney to Caquet, from Mylford to Ramsey.  
At Fawike in the channel.  
At Portland in the Sack.  1 3 48 2 4 36 3 5 24 4 6 12 5 7 0 6 7 48 7 8 36 8 9 24 9 10 12 10 11 0 11 11 48 12 12 36  13 1 24  14 2 12  15 3 0   

Southwest by West, and North-east by East.  a. ho. mi.   0 3 45 between the pas of Calais & the Maze. at Rouen. In the Soths, before S. Matthews point. In Bristol and Crixdown. In the ford between Heysant. Before the Bos. at S. Marten. before Rochel, before Brouwage. at Rouen. In the river of Bourdeaux within the channels situated on the coasts of Spain, Galissien, the Southside of Bretaigne, Gascoigne, and the west coasts of Ireland. Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 4 33 2 5 21 3 6 9 4 6 57 5 7 45  6 8 33 
From Strusaert. to Deep From Lezart to Start.  
From Cale Clare to London.  7 9 21 8 10 9 9 10 57 10 11 45 11 12 33 12 1 21 13 2 9 14 2 57 15 3 45    

West Southwest, and East Northeast.  da. ho. mi.   0 4 30 
From Texel to the pas of Calais in the fareway. Before Humber, before Flambrough & Schetenborough Abruac.  
In Falmouth, in the Mouschole, Seven Lands, S. Paul's with out the haven, between garnsey and the seven Isles in the farewater. In the Breesand, without the four. All south coasts of Ireland, as Kinsael, Cork, jochel, Waterfood, and Cape de Clear.  
Falling of streams upon the same stroke.  
From Ostend to S. Catelines, from Berchfleur to Strusaert The Breesand out and in, From C. de Clear to the Island 〈◊〉 Saltees, between London & Holmes so far as Bristol, from Sorlings to England's end From Start point to Portlant.  1 5 18 2 6 6 3 6 54 4 7 42 5 8 30 6 9 18 7 10 6 8 10 54 9 11 42 10 12 30 11 1 18 12 2 6 13 2 54  14 3 42  15 4 30   

West by South, and East by North.  da. ho. mi.   0 5 15 
In Torbay and Dartmouth,  
In Plymouth and Fawyke,  
In the Sea of Galls.  
In Falmouth.  
In Milford.  
At Ramsey in Wales.  
Before Lin in England,  
Against London.  
In all havens on the South-coasts of Ireland.  
Falling of Streams upon the same stroke From Isle ●as to the Four.  
From Dorsey to Caep de Clear. From the Sotlis to Lizard. From Portland to Wight From Wight to Beach otbovesier,  1 6 3 2 6 51 3 7 39 4 8 27 5 9 15 6 10 3 7 10 51 8 11 39 9 12 27 10 1 15  11 2 3  12 2 51  13 3 39   14 4 27   15 5 15    

West and East.  da. ho. mi.   0 6 0 
Before Hamburgh.  
Before Bremen.  
Before the Maersdeep or Tessel.  
At Hull.  
At Blakney and Wels.  
Before Antwerp.  
Tergoes.  
Tergouwe.  
At Concallo and S. Malo.  
S. Paul's in the haven.  
Without the Sorlis in the channel.  Falling of Streams upon the same Stroke. 1 6 48 2 7 36 3 8 24 4 9 12 5 10 0  6 10 48 
From the Kilcasses to Berchs' fleur.  
From Englandsend to Lizard.  7 11 36 8 12 24 9 1 12 10 2 0 11 2 48 2 3 36 13 4 24   14 5 12   15 6 0    

West and by North, and East and by South,  da. ho. mi.   0 6 45 
Between Fawijck and Falmouth in the channel.  
Amidst in the channel.  
At Bristol at the Key.  
Before S. Nicolaes' and Podessemske.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 7 33 2 8 21 3 9 9 4 9 57 5 10 45  6 11 33   7 12 21   8 1 9  From the Island Bas to Marwanen along the land. 9 1 57  10 2 45  11 3 33  12 4 21  13 5 9  14 5 57   15 6 45    

West Northwest, and East Southeast.  da. ho. mi.   0 7 30 
At the Nesse by Wieringen, in Texel in the Coopvaerders Road.  
At Kilduyn.  
In the middle of the channel in the Fareway.  
Near Goutstert in the channel.  
And between Mouschole & Falmouth in the Sea.  
Near Plymmouth in the Sea At Lizart by the Land.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 8 18 2 9 6 3 9 54 4 10 42 5 11 30  6 12 18  7 1 6  8 1 54 
From the Island.  
Briack to S. Malo.  
From Bergfleur to Seynhead.  9 2 42 10 3 30 11 4 18 12 5 6  13 5 54  14 6 42  15 7 30   

Northwest by West, and Southeast by East.  da. ho. mi.   0 8 15 
Without the Kiscasses in the channel.  
By Wight in the channel.  
From Wight to Bevisier by the Land.  
Upon the West coast of the Foreland.  
Without the Fly.  falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 9 3 2 9 51 3 10 39 4 11 27 5 12 15 6 1 3  7 1 51  8 2 39   9 3 27  Behind Garnsey in the fare water. Within the seven Lands. 10 4 15  11 5 3  12 5 51  13 6 39  14 7 27  15 8 15   

Northwest, and Southeast.  da. ho. mi.   0 9 0 
Before the east & west Eemses.  
Before the Fly.  
Before the Scholbalgh.  
On all the Frieze coasts.  
Upon the Fraese and Wieringer Flack.  
Before Crammer winterduyn and Yarmouth.  
Within the Seyne.  
At the east end of Wight.  
In the Rasse of Portland.  
Between Garnsey and the Kiscasses.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 9 48 2 10 36 3 11 24 4 12 12 5 1 0  6 1 48  7 2 36  8 2 24 In the wyke of Benyte. Between Morliax and the Treacle pots. 9 4 12 10 5 0 11 5 48 12 6 36 13 7 24 14 8 12  15 9 0   

Northwest by North, and Southeast by South.  da. ho. mi.   0 9 45 
The Needles of wight.  
In the channel by wight.  
The Kiscasses.  
At Garnsey in the channel.  
Near Leystaff & Yarmouth without the banks.  
At Tergouwe.  
At the wolfs-horne.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 10 33 2 11 21 3 12 9 4 12 57 5 1 45  6 2 33 Before Concallo, before the Island of S. Michael in the Creek. 7 3 21 8 4 9  9 4 57  10 5 45  11 6 33  12 7 21  13 8 9   14 8 57   15 9 45    

Northwest and Southsoutheast.  da. ho. mi.   0 10 30 
At Olfersnes and Harwidge without the banks.  
At Leystaff in the Road.  
Yarmouth in the Road.  
Before the Thames of London.  
At Margat.  
At Wight within.  
At Beunen Deep and Seynhead.  
In the Fosse of Caen.  
At Struysaert, & all the coasts of Normandy & Picardy.  
At S. Helena and Calveroort.  falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 11 18 2 12 6 3 12 54 4 1 42 5 2 30  6 3 18 From Bergfleur to Alhonga. From C. Dorsi to the Island Dardan. 7 4 6 8 4 54 9 5 42 10 6 30 11 7 18 12 8 6 13 8 54 14 9 42   15 10 30    

North and by West, and South and by East.  da. ho. mi.   0 11 15 
Between Cripple-sand and the Kreyl.  
Within at Olfersnes.  
At Hampton.  
At Portsmouth, and at wolfers horn.  
At Calveroort in wight.  
Before the haven of Caen.  
Within the Thames of London.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 1 12 3 2 12 51 3 1 39 4 2 27 5 3 15  6 4 3 From S. Matthews point unto Backovens from fontevay to S. Matthewes point. 7 4 51 8 5 39 9 6 27 10 7 15  11 8 3  12 8 51  13 9 39  14 10 27  15 11 15      

The 37. Point. How to find the age of the Moon.  
TO do this without an Almanac, you must know the Epact or Key of the year, and that you shall find by the Golden number, and the Golden number thus: look how many years there are passed from the year of our Lord, 1500, and these divide by 19 and what remains is the Golden number of that year, if there remain nothing, the golden number is 19  

Example.  
I desire to know the Golden number of the year 1645, setting the 1500 a side, I divide the 145 years by 19, I find seven times, and the remainder is 12. Then the Golden number of the year 1645. is 12.  
The Golden number increaseth every year with the beginning of the year with one, as in the year 1640, it is 7, 1641 it is 8. and so forth to 19, after that again 1, 2, 3, etc. The Epact changeth every year on the first of March increasing with 11 to 30, but being more than 30, you must leave that 30 and the remainder is the Epact. You shall find it by the golden number thus: tell the golden number on the 3 joints of your thumme, beginning with one at the lower joints, unto the golden number of your year proposed, if it doth end this kind of telling at the lower joint, than the Epact and the golden number are all one: but if it end on the second joint, add 10, if on the third joint, add 20 by the same golden number, that number is the Epact of that year.   

Example.  
I desire to know the Epact of the year 1645, the Golden number is 12, telling on the joints of the thumme beginning with one at the lower joint, the telling endeth with 12 on the highest joint, adding 20 to 12, you shall have 32 subtract 30 there remains 2 for the Epact of that year.  
After the old stile, the Golden number is the self same with the new stile, but the Epact is 10 more, therefore if you add 10 to the Epact of the new stile, you shall have the Epact of the old stile, as for the year 1645, 10, to 12, (the Epact of the new stile) comes 22, this is the Epact of that year according to the old stile.  
But to find the Epact without telling, is the golden number to know both according to the old and new stile, look on this table following, where they are set the one by the other.  
Golden Number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 New Epact. 1 12 23 4 15 26 7 18 29 10 21 2 13 24 5 16 27 8 19 Old Epact. 11 22 3 14 25 6 17 28 9 20 1 12 23 4 15 26 7 18 29  
The Epact being known, you shall add it to the number of the months that are passed from March to the month you are in, the same month being reckoned with it, if this brings forth 30, then is it new moon the first day of the same month, but as much as is less than 30. so many days you have to the new moon.   

Example.  
In the year 1641. I desire to know when the Moon shall be new in the month of August, the Epact of that year is 18, adding to this 6. for the number of the months since March (the month of August being included) it makes 24, there want 6 to make it 30, therefore the Moon shall be new 6 days at this, that is the 6 of August.  
The Epact, the number of the month passed from March and the day of the month being added, such a number, (or whatsoever it brings forth, more than 30) it showeth the age of the Moon.   

The first Example.  
To know the age of the Moon on the 12 of August 1645. I add the Epact 2 to 6, the months past, and 12 for the 12 days, they make this 20, is the age of the Moon, but this is to be understood after the new stile.  
To find out easily without casting up the time of the new Moon, we have here adjoined an Almanac for 8. years' next ensuing, calculated by the meridian of Amsterdam, showing the day and hour of every new and full Moon, together with the quarters, the use of it is thus: by the Moon in every month there are two columns of cyphers, the first showeth the day of the month, the second the hours and minutes of the new and full Moon, to reckon from the noon of the same day, to the noon of the day following, according to the use and custom of Astronomers.   

Example.  
I would know in the year 1645, in the month of July, on what day and hour the moon will be new, and I find the new Moon on the 22 day, 14 hours telling from noon tied and this run to the next day in the morning at two of the clock.  
To know what day of the week that will be, you must first know the Dominical letter of that year, and with what letter each month beginneth, the Sundays letter you shall find under the Almanac of each year, the leap year hath two, the first you shall use to the 24 of February, the other to the end of the year, every month beginneth with such a letter as this table following showeth: Januarie gins with A February D March D July gins with G August C Septem. F April gins with G May B June E October gins with A November B December E  
For as much as July beginneth with a G, you shall begin to tell forward to 5, and that fall out in E, that is the third day after B, the Dominical letter of that year, and so it will be wednesday, and so in all the other. In the Leap year you must tell both the 24. and 25 on F, because the 25 day and 24 were added on F.  

Almanac for the year 1654. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
January  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  full moon 2 14 51 last quart. 10 2 50 new moon 18 4 0 first quart. 25 7 40 full moon 1 4 14 last quart. 9 0 17 new moon 16 18 40 first quart. 23 15 13 full moon 2 18 46 last quart. 10 20 28 new moon 18 6 20 first quart. 24 22 35 full moon 1 10 20 last quart. 9 14 18 new moon 16 15 44 first quart. 23 7 0 full moon 1 1 52 last quart. 9 4 35 new moon 15 23 24 first quart. 22 17 8 full moon 30 17 25 last quart. 7 15 23 new moon 14 6 38 first quart. 21 8 21 full moon 29 8 5 last quart. 6 23 27 new moon 13 13 50 first quart. 20 20 0 full moon 28 22 9 last quart. 5 5 19 new moon 11 22 11 first quart. 19 12 48 full moon 27 11 3 last quart. 3 10 29 new moon 10 9 17 first quart. 18 7 18 full moon. 25 22 28 last quart. 2 16 36 new moon 9 23 16 first quart. 18 2 30 full moon 25 9 19 last quart. 1 1 4 new moon 8 15 52 first quart. 16 20 49 full moon 23 19 48 last quart. 30 12 26 new moon 8 11 39 first quart. 16 12 45 full moon 23 6 12 last quart. 30 3 0  
The golden Number is 2, the Epact is 12, the Sundays letter is D, the Roman Indict 7, the afterwinter 7 weeks and 3 days, Lent the 22 of February, Easterday the 5 of April, Ascension the 14 of May, Whitsunday the 24 of May, Advent the 29 of November. 4 Eclipses will be this year; two in the Sun and two in the Moon: the first in the Sun on the 17 of Februar. at 7 a clock in the morning, beyond our Horizon: the second in the Moon on the 3 of March, about 6 a clock in the morning; shall be seen a little: the third in the Sun on the 12 of August at 11 a clock in the morning: and the fourth in the Moon on the 27 of August at 11 a clock at the evening; will both be seen of us.  

Almanac for the year 1655. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  new moon 7 8 16 first quart. 14 23 53 full moon 21 16 42 last quart. 28 22 31 new moon 6 0 40 first quart. 13 14 51 full moon 20 3 56 last quart. 27 16 2 new moon 7 16 45 first quart. 14 17 5 full moon 21 16 2 last quart. 28 12 14 new moon 6 5 39 first quart. 13 1 28 full moon 20 5 9 last quart. 27 7 17 new moon 5 16 0 first quart. 12 8 4 full moon 19 19 5 last quart. 27 23 22 new moon 6 3 44 first quart. 13 2 0 full moon 21 4 30 last quart. 28 22 34 new moon 3 6 49 first quart. 10 0 26 full moon 18 0 39 last quart. 25 21 54 new moon 1 13 44 first quart. 8 12 30 full moon 16 15 40 last quart. 24 6 36 new moon 30 21 39 first quart. 7 3 44 full moon 15 5 57 last quart. 22 11 49 new moon 29 3 18 first quart. 6 22 32 full moon 14 20 46 last quart. 21 20 48 new moon 28 20 15 first quart. 5 19 12 full moon 13 9 52 last quart. 20 4 36 new moon 27 11 36 first quart. 5 16 10 full moon 12 21 50 last quart. 19 14 6 new moon 27 5 38  
The golden Number is 3, the Epact is 23, the Sundays letter is C, the Roman Indict 8, the afterwinter 6 weeks 2 days, Quadrag. 14 of February, Easterday the 28 of March, Ascension the 6 of May, Whitsunday the 16 of May, Advent the 28 of November. Four Eclipses this year, two in the Sun and two in the Moon. The first in the Sun shall be seen of us the 6 of Febr. about one a clock after-midday; the second in the Moon, and the third in the Sun, fall out beyond our Horizon: the fourth in the Moon shall scarcely be discerned of any, being the obscurity will be but very little.  

Almanac for the year 1656. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August.  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  first quart. 4 10 44 full moon. 11 8 49 last quart. 18 1 47 new moon 26 1 0 first quart. 3 2 0 full moon. 9 20 22 last quart. 16 16 2 new moon 24 19 49 first quart. 3 13 38 full moon. 10 4 43 last quart. 17 8 33 new moon 25 11 37 first quart. 1 12 19 full moon. 8 15 4 last quart. 16 3 10 new moon 24 2 54 first quart. 1 4 44 full moon. 8 1 18 last quart. 15 21 41 new moon 23 14 8 first quart. 30 9 50 full moon. 6 13 6 last quart. 14 15 7 new moon 21 23 31 first quart. 28 15 20 full moon. 6 2 6 last quart. 14 5 52 new moon 21 11 0 first quart. 27 22 9 full moon. 4 16 36 last quart. 12 19 19 new moon 19 14 23 first quart. 26 7 16 full moon. 3 8 31 last quart. 11 6 35 new moon 17 21 38 first quart. 24 19 17 full moon. 3 1 1 last quart. 11 16 22 new moon 17 7 30 first quart. 24 14 51 full moon. 1 17 36 last quart. 9 1 0 new moon 15 19 0 first quart. 23 11 32 full moon. 1 9 8 last quart. 8 8 47 new moon 15 9 2 first quart. 22 9 15 full moon. 30 23 4  
The golden Number is 4, the Epact is 4, the Roman Indict 9, the Sundays letter B A, the afterwinter 9 weeks 1 day, Lent the 5 of March, Easterday the 16 of April, Ascension the 25 of May, Whitsunday the 4 of June, Advent the 3 of Decemb. This year there will be 5 Eclipses, 3 in the Moon and 2 in the Sun. The first in the Moon the 11 of Januarie, at 8 clock 49 min. at night: the second, in the Sun on the 26 of Januar. at 2 a clock afternoon; shall both be seen by us. The third in the Moon on the 6 of July. The fourth in the Sun on the 21 July, and the fifth in the Moon on the 31 Decemb. all three beyond or besides our Horizon.  

Almanac for the year 1657. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August.  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  last quart. 6 15 19 new moon 14 1 33 first quart. 22 5 34 full moon 29 10 54 last quart. 5 2 43 new moon 12 9 34 first quart. 20 23 51 full moon 27 21 3 last quart. 6 14 14 new moon 14 13 47 first quart. 22 14 2 full moon 29 5 56 last quart. 5 2 57 new moon 13 6 50 first quart. 21 0 10 full moon 27 15 40 last quart. 4 18 58 new moon 12 21 51 first quart. 20 6 56 full moon 26 13 0 last quart. 3 21 28 new moon 11 11 38 first quart. 18 12 11 full moon 25 9 1 last quart. 3 4 29 new moon 10 6 42 first quart. 17 16 54 full moon 24 20 1 last quart. 1 21 35 new moon 9 6 34 first quart. 15 22 12 full moon 23 9 35 last quart. 31 13 54 new moon 7 15 15 first quart. 14 6 34 full moon 22 1 39 last quart. 30 4 42 new moon 6 23 39 first quart. 13 18 9 full moon 21 19 10 last quart. 29 17 32 new moon 5 10 2 first quart. 12 9 23 full moon 20 13 35 last quart. 28 4 28 new moon 4 19 43 first quart. 12 3 58 full moon 20 6 59 last quart. 27 13 14  
The Golden Number is 5, the Epact is 15, the Roman Indict 10, the Sundays letter is G, the afterwinter is 6 Weeks 6 days, Lent the 18 of February, Easterday the 1 of April, Ascension the 10 of May, Whitsunday the 20 of May, Advent the 2 of December. There will be seen this year 4 Eclipses, two in the Sun and two in the Moon; the two in the Sun shall not be seen by us: but the two in the Moon will show themselves above our Horizon: the first on the 25 of June at 9 a clock in the evening, and the second on the 20 of December at 7 a clock at evening.  

Almanac for the year 1658. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Febru.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
Septe.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  new moon 3 9 3 first quart. 11 1 25 full moon 18 22 54 last quart. 25 21 21 new moon 1 22 54 first quart. 9 23 12 full moon 17 12 0 last quart. 24 5 40 new moon 3 14 39 first quart. 11 19 5 full moon 18 12 30 last quart. 25 14 28 new moon 2 6 48 first quart. 10 11 13 full moon 17 3 47 last quart. 24 15 34 new moon 1 23 35 first quart. 9 23 20 full moon 16 14 49 last quart. 23 11 15 new moon 31 15 1 first quart. 8 7 40 full moon 14 22 10 last quart. 22 1 58 new moon 30 5 0 first quart. 7 14 1 full moon 14 6 12 last quart. 21 17 59 new moon 29 17 26 first quart. 5 19 16 full moon 12 16 3 last quart. 20 9 44 new moon 28 4 58 first quart. 4 1 4 full moon 11 4 14 last quart. 19 6 37 new moon 26 15 28 first quart. 3 7 58 full moon 10 19 26 last quart. 19 0 38 new moon 26 1 22 first quart. 1 17 24 full moon 9 13 8 last quart. 17 13 20 new moon 24 11 19 first quart. 1 6 13 full moon 9 6 52 last quart. 17 4 12 new moon 23 21 23 first quart. 30 22 34  
The golden Number is 6, the Epact is 26, the Roman Indict 11, the Sundays letter F, the afterwinter 9 weeks 5 days, Lent the 10 of March, Easterday the 21 of April, Ascension the 30 of May, Whitsunday the 9 of June, Advent the 1 of December. This year 4 Eclipses shall be seen, two in the Sun and two in the Moon: The first in the Sun on the 1 of June, on 3 a clock in the morning: the second in the Moon on the 15 of June, on the morning at 10 a clock 10 min. the third in the Moon on the 10 of Novemb. the fourth in the Sun the 24 of Novemb. about 11 a clock at night: but none of these shall be seen of us.  

Almanac for the year 1659. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  full moon 8 3 23 last quart. 15 18 33 new moon 22 8 51 first quart. 29 18 31 full moon 6 20 46 last quart. 13 1 57 new moon 20 21 5 first quart. 28 15 20 full moon 8 11 20 last quart. 15 9 17 new moon 22 11 43 first quart. 30 9 38 full moon 6 22 55 last quart. 13 16 11 new moon 21 1 3 first quart. 29 5 9 full moon 6 7 0 last quart. 12 23 12 new moon 20 16 1 first quart. 28 19 26 full moon 4 16 36 last quart. 11 6 14 new moon 19 7 3 first quart. 27 4 18 full moon 3 22 10 last quart. 10 19 2 new moon 18 22 44 first quart. 26 15 20 full moon 2 5 24 last quart. 9 9 20 new moon 17 12 18 first quart. 24 21 26 full moon 31 17 1 last quart. 8 2 31 new moon 16 2 1 first quart. 23 4 0 full moon 30 1 2 last quart. 7 22 2 new moon 15 14 53 first quart. 22 10 58 full moon 29 14 57 last quart. 6 18 1 new moon 14 2 45 first quart. 20 19 1 full moon 28 8 0 last quart. 6 13 9 new moon 13 3 56 first quart. 20 5 52 full moon 28 2 3  
The golden Number is 7, the Epact is 7, the Roman Indict 12, the Sundays letter E, afterwinter 8 weeks 4 days, Lent the 2 of March, Easterday the 13 of April, Ascension the 22 of May, Whitsunday the 1 of June, the Advent the 30 of November. This year there will happen 4 Eclipses, 2 in the Sun and 2 in the Moon, the first in the Moon on the 6 of May at 7 a clock at evening, whereof we shall see but the end: the 2 in the Sun on the 21 of May, beyond our Horizon. The third in the Moon on the 30 of Octobr. on 2 a clock 57 min. in the morning, shall be seen by us. The 4 in the Sun on the 14 of Novemb. whose begin we shall perceive in the setting: but those of America shall see her completely.  

Almanac for the year 1660. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  last quart. 5 5 40 new moon 12 0 42 first quart. 18 19 45 full moon 26 22 53 last quart. 3 19 14 new moon 10 10 51 first quart. 17 12 36 full moon 25 17 10 last quart. 4 5 15 new moon 10 21 12 first quart. 18 7 12 full moon 26 8 36 last quart. 2 12 45 new moon 9 8 15 first quart. 17 2 6 full moon 24 21 30 last quart. 1 18 12 new moon 8 20 15 first quart. 16 20 6 full moon 24 7 42 last quart. 30 23 45 new moon 7 9 15 first quart. 15 18 45 full moon 22 15 46 last quart. 29 6 13 new moon 6 23 10 first quart. 15 2 8 full moon 21 22 45 last quart. 28 15 8 new moon 5 14 22 first quart. 13 13 50 full moon 20 5 53 last quart. 27 3 5 new moon 4 6 6 first quart. 11 23 20 full moon 18 14 5 last quart. 25 10 19 new moon 3 22 8 first quart. 11 6 10 full moon 18 0 20 last quart. 25 13 6 new moon 2 13 30 first quart. 9 14 36 full moon 16 13 15 last quart. 24 9 30 new moon 2 3 34 first quart. 8 22 30 full moon 16 4 40 last quart. 24 7 40 new moon 31 16 0  
The golden Number is 8, the Epact is 18, the Roman Indict 13, the Sundays letter D C, afterwinter 6 weeks 3 days, Quadrag. the 15 of February, Easterday the 28 of March, Ascension the 6 of May, Whitsunday the 16 of May, Advent the 28 of November. Three Eclipses will be this year; one in the Sun and two in the Moon. The first in the Moon on the 24 of April, beyond our Horizon: near under us shall be seen the second in the Sun, on the 6 of May, shall appear in the South, at the latitude of about 60 degrees. The third in the Moon on the 18 of Octob. beyond our Horizon.  

Almanac for the year 1661. New-stile.   Moon. da. ho. mi. 
Januar.  
Februa.  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
Septemb.  
Octob.  
Novēb.  
Decemb.  first quart. 7 8 25 full moon 14 22 41 last quart. 23 3 49 new moon 30 3 2● first quart. 5 19 51 full moon 13 17 21 last quart. 21 19 39 new moon 28 13 14 first quart. 7 9 11 full moon 15 11 47 last quart. 23 7 19 new moon 29 22 33 first quart. 6 0 10 full moon 14 4 39 last quart. 21 15 27 new moon 28 7 45 first quart. 5 16 52 full moon 13 18 37 last quart. 20 21 17 new moon 27 17 23 first quart. 4 10 5 full moon 12 5 54 last quart. 19 2 23 new moon 26 4 5 first quart. 4 4 0 full moon 11 15 11 last quart. 18 7 48 new moon 25 16 29 first quart. 2 20 56 full moon 9 23 16 last quart. 16 14 39 new moon 24 6 29 first quart. 1 10 52 full moon 8 7 16 last quart. 15 0 0 new moon 22 23 49 first quart. 30 23 16 full moon 7 15 48 last quart. 14 13 12 new moon 22 17 33 first quart. 30 9 49 full moon 6 1 45 last quart. 13 6 21 new moon 21 11 3 first quart. 28 19 8 full moon 5 13 21 last quart. 13 3 10 new moon 21 3 7 first quart 28 3 49  
The golden Number is 9, the Epact is 29, the Roman Indict 14, the Sundays letter B, afterwinter 9 weeks 6 days, Lent the 13 of February, Easterday the 17 of April, Ascension the 26 of May, Whitsunday the 5 of June, Advent the 27 of November. This year there will be 4 Eclipses, 2 in the Sun and 2 in the Moon: The first in the Sun on the 30 of March at two a clock 6. min. afternoon, and shall be seen of us: the second in the Moon on the 14 of April at 5 a clock 6 min. afternoon: the third in the Sun on the 23 Sept. at 3 a clock 24 min. afternoon; shall be seen of us: the fourth in the Moon on the 8 of Octob. at 3 a clock 38 minute. in the morning, shall likewise be seen by us.     

A TABLE For all Lovers of the Navigation, Of the Eastern-Water, whereby commodiously to find of each Folio all the Sea-Cards, Coasts, and the chiefest places, named in this Book.  

The first Book.  
No. 1. THe General Pascard of Europe 1  
No. 2 The General Pascard of the North-Sea. 1  
No. 3 The South-Sea, the Fall of Urk and the Vliestream. 1  
No. 4 The Vlie and Ameland-hole in grand form, as also the Eastern and Western Eemses. 6  
No. 5 The Wats, as also the Weser, Elf and Eyderstreams until Hever 6  
No. 6 The Jutland-Coast and the Belt 13  
No. 7 The Schager-Rack and the Sound, in grand form. 23  
No. 8 The Coast of Norway, from the Pater-nosters till Neus. 32  
No. 9 The Coast of Norway from the Neus till Bergen-lied. 37  
No. 10 The Bergen-liedt. 38  
No. 11 The Norway-Coast between Jeltefloert and the Point of Horrel. 41  
No. 12 The Dronten-Liedt. 43  
No. 13 The Coast of England from the river of London until Wales. 47  
No. 14 The Coast of England and Scotland from Wales until Coggen-Island. 53  
No. 15 The Coast of Scotland, betwixt Coggen-Island and the Orcadeses. 57  
No. 16 The Coast of Fayerhill, Hitland; as also of the Isles of Ferie, and other Islands behind the North-West Point of Scotland. 59   

The second Book.  
No. 17 The General Pascard of Dronten until the Isle of Jan Mayen, Spitsbergen, Archangel, as also Nova Zembla. 63  
No. 18 The Coast of Norway from Dronten until J. Tromsond. 63  
No. 19 The Coast of Finmarcken from J. Tromsond until Northkyn. 64  
No. 20 The Coast of Norway from Northkyn until the river of Kola. 67  
No. 21 The Coast of Lapland betwixt the river of Kola and the Island of Swetenoes'. 70  
No. 22 The Coasts of the Mouth of the White-Sea. 74  
No. 23 The Coasts of the White-Sea. 77  
No. XXIII. The River of the Archangel, in grand form. 77   

The third Book.  
No. 23¼. The general Pascard how men shall go from Hitland, the Isle of Jan May, Ysland, and the Strates of David 78¼  
No. 23½. Card or Map of the Isle of Jan May. 78½  
No. 23¼ Card of Spitsbergen. 78¼   

The fourth Book.  
No. 24 The general Pascard of the East-sea. 79  
No. 25 The Coast of Schonen between Valsterboen until Schenckenes, and from the Isle of Ruga until Rygs-head. 79  
No. 26 The Coast between Rygs-head and Der Winda. 86  
No. 27 The Coast between Der Winda and Revel, as also the Islands of Alands-Haff. 88  
No. 28 The Coast between the Wolff-Isle and the uttermost of the East-sea. 94  
No. 29 The Coast of Sweden, betwixt Oeland and Stockholm, as also the Islands of Oeland and Gotland. 98  
No. 30 The Lied of Stockholm and the hole of Uttoy, in grand form. 99    

A TABLE. Of the Western-Water.  

The first Book.  

No. 2. THe General Pascard of the North-Sea. 1  
No. 3 The South-Sea, the Fall of Urck and the Texel-stream. 1  
No. 31 The Coast of Holland from Texel to the Maze. 3  
No. 32 The Sea-Boesems of Texel and the Maze in grand form. 3  
No. 33 All the Sea-Boesems betwixt the Maze and the Wielingen. 8  
No. 34 The Coast of Flanders betwixt the Wielingen and the Heads. 13    

The second Book.  

No. 35. The general Pascard of England, Scotland and Yrland. 17  
No. 36. The Coast of France from Swartenes to Ornay, and from Dover to Bevezier. 17  
No. 37 The Brittan-Coast from Ornay to Heysant. 21  
No. 38 The Coast of England from Bevezier to Portland. 26  
No. 39 The Coast of England from Portland to Lezart. 29  
No. 40 The Coast of England from Lezart to the Cape of Cornwall and the Bristow-Canal. 33  
No. 41 The Southeast and Eastern Coast of Yrland from Corkbeg unto Hedenhoo or Dublin. 40  
No. 42 The North-East Coast of Yrland from Hout to Horn-head, as also Scotland right over. 48  
No. 43 The North-West Coast of Yrland, from Hornhead to Slynehead. 52  
No. 44 The West-point and South-Coast of Yrland from Slynehead unto Corck-haven. 55    

The third Book.  

No. 45 The general Pascard of the France-Coast, and the Coast of Spain, from Heysant unto the innermost of the Strates. 61  
No. 46 The France-coast from Heysant unto the Isle Boelin. 61  
No. 47 The Coast of France from Boelin and the river of Bourdeaux. 67  
No. 48 The Map of the river of Bourdeaux, as from thence also to S. Sebastian. 71  
No. 49 The Coast of Biscay from the Kings-road unto the Island of S. Cyprian. 75  
No. 50 The Coast of Gallicia and Portugal from the Isle of S. Cyprian and Camina. 80  
No. 51 The Coast of the Northern part of Portugal and Camina until Pissage. 86  
No. 52 The Coast of the Southerly part of Portugal from Pissage to S. Uves. 88  
No. 53 The Coast of Algarbe and Andaluzia from S. Uves unto Palos. 90  
No. 54 The Coast of Andaluzia from Palos until through the Strate of Gibraltar by Modril, and the Coast of Barbary from Cape de Spartel to old Mamora. 93    

The fourth Book.  

No. 55 The general Pascard of the Coasts of Barbary, Gualata, Arguyn, the Flamish and Canarian Coast, as also the South-Islands from the Strate to C. de Verde. 99  
No. 56 The Coast of Barbary from old Mamora unto C. de Geer, as also the Flamish Isles. 99  
No. 57 Map of the Canary Islands. 105     


Pascaart van EUROPA. Als meed e'en gedeelt vande cust van Africa.    

The first part THE FIRST BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN IS The Description of the whole NORTH-SEA.  
Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famous Seamen, and lovers of Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


Pas caarte van de NOORT SEE Vertonende van Calais tot Dronten. als oock tusschen Doeveren en Hitlandt.   

Pascaarte vande ZUYDER-ZEE, Texel, end ulie-stroom als meed it Amelander got.    

The first part of the New LIGHTNING SEA COLUMN, OR SEA MIRROR. THE FIRST BOOK, Of the EASTERN NAVIGATION Containing The description of the north Sea, the Coast of Holland, Friesland, Holstein, jutland, Meklenburgh, and Denemarck to Valsterboen, in the Island of Rugen, and with all the coast of Norway to Dronten, as also the east side of England and Scotland.  

The first Demonstration, Where in Are described the south Sea, the Vliestreame, the Vlie, and the channel of Ameland.  
WHen you sail from Amsterdam to the Fall of Vrck, you must keep the middle of the channel, in sailing to Tyoort, and from thence over Pampus, 
Pampus.  with a ship of great draught, that draweth ten foot or more; keep Marcken church without to the land of Udam, called Schyteldoecks-haven, so long until that the steeple of Zuyderwouw come past Kinnigherbuert, which are the houses half way betwixt Schyteldoecks-haven & Durgerdam, go then towards the land e. until that the New church of Amsterdam come about Durgerdam, keep that so standing, until that the church of Weesp be come past the House or Castle at Muyen, so that it do stand somewhat nearer to Muyen then to the House, keep Weesp standing so, until that Edam come without the east end of Marken. In this farewaye it is a foot deeper, then if you sailed right through.  
For to avoid Muyen sand: men were wont to bring the houses which were wont to stand upon Tyoort to the southwards of the Heyligher-stee at Amsterdam, thereby you may make some reckoning, they are good longest marks: when Monnickedam is about the west end of Schyteldoecks-haven, and the house at Muyen betwixt Weesp and the church at Muyen, then are you thwart of Muyen sand. For to sail right through over Pampus, then keep the steeple of Diemen over or about the point of Tyoort, so long as you can see Tyoort, that is a right longest mark for to sail over Pampus.  
When you are come thwart of the east end of Marken, go then on north-east, or somewhat more eastwardly towards the Fall of Urck, which is 7 leagues: when you are come with in a great league of Urck, you shall meet with a hard sand, 
The Houtribbe.  called the Houtribbe, lying southeast and northwest thwart over the Farewaye, there is no more water upon it, then upon the Flat of Wieringen, or of Freesland, you shall find alsoo no deeper water there then eight through. When Enckhuysen lieth northwest & northwest and by west from you, than you are upon the Houtribbe. Before that you come against the sand, you can by night see the fire upon Urck. When as Urck or the fire is more northerly than north-east from you, and that you get shoaling, then that is certainly of the Houtribbe: for so you cannot come too near the Enckhuysen sand. When you come from the southwards, you are not about the Enckhuysen sand before that the church upon Urck come without the little village of houses, which is then east and by south, and east southeast from you: if that than you go away northwest and by west or westnorthwest you shall run close alongst by the side of the sand. With a ship of great draught, bring the church a good way through the houses, until that it stand eastsoutheast from you, then go boldly on northwest and by west or keep Medenblick without the point of the Venus, and so you shall not come too near neither to sand nor shoal. Likewise if you come from the northwards, and bring Urck not more eastwardly than eastsoutheast from you, 
Marks of Enckhuysen sand.  than you cannot take hurt also of the Enckhuysen sand. From Urck to the buys upon the Cripple and Hofstede, the course is northwest and by west with that course you may run all alongst unto the souther buy upon Wieringhe● Flat: in turning to windwards, you may well bring Medenblick a little within the point of the Venus, but when as Medenblick is without it, than you are in the right fareway.  
Betwixt Urck and the buy upon the Hofstede north-east somewhat eastwardly from the steeple of Enckhuysen lieth a little plate of hard sand, lying towards the end of Enckhuysen sand, which is not deeper than the Frees Flat, about to the eastwards of it, is the deepest water, but about to the westwards of it (by some called the Katte-gar) you shall be sooner about the High horn, or the Enckhuysen sand, & it is good for ships that draw but little water.  
The thwart marks of the buys, 
Marks of the buys upon the Hofstede & Cripple  both upon the Cripple and Hosstede; are Grootebroeck and Hempskirke (two sharp steeples) right one in the other, and Warnis, a little sharp steeple in Freesland to the south side of the Cliff of Staverne, than you have the length of these buys, which lie each of them in three fathom, the one on the east shore, and the other on the west shore upon the tail of the Cripple. There is in the right fare way, two foot less than five fathom, and soft ground. When the steeple of Medenblick cometh to the northwards of the house of Medenblick, so far as the house is broad, than you are clear of Cripple sand, and past it; go then on northwest, and northwest and by north to the buy upon the Creyl, according as the wind and tide shall be, the right farewaie there, is deep 5 fathom scarce. Thwart of the Creyl, in sailing out or about the Cryel, in sailing in, that is a little within the Creyl 
The Cr●yl.  on the north shore, lieth alongst the reach (towards the buy upon the Hosstede, a hard sand or plate, called the south Creyl, 
South Creyl.  upon which there is no more than twelve foot water, at low water, betwixt that bank and the north shore, it is three fathom deep, and soft ground, and to the southwards, or the westwards of it, four fathom and an half. When Mirnes, a little flat steeple in Freesland, cometh over a long countriehouse to the southwards of the cliff of Staverne, than you come right thwart of that foresaid plate.  

Mark of the Creyl.  The marks of the buy upon the Creyl, are the sharp steeple of Twisck over the Cornemill to the westwards of Medenblick, and that little flat steeple of Mirnes to the south side or east side of the cliff. The right fareway there is four fathom and an half, & five fathom deep, soft ground, the buy lieth in four fathom, if need require, men may run well a cables length about to the eastwards of it.  
From the buy upon the Creyl, to the buy upon the Frieze plate, 
Frieze plate.  the course is north and by east: When the steeple of Twisck cometh a little to the northwards of Medenblick, then keep them so standing, so long as you can see it; & than you shall not sail within any shoals betwixt that plate and the Creyl.  
Betwixt the buy upon the Creyl, and the Frieze plate, on the west shore, alongst the Reach, lieth a hard sand, called Monick-sand, 
Monick-sand.  which men may be foul of, if they run somewhat too fare over to the westwards.  
When you are come about the Creyl, you may go on north and by east (with a ship that draweth but little water) over the tail of Broad-sand, right to the buy upon the sand, called Westworckum, but with ships of great draughts, you must keep the right farewaye. For to find the deepest water upon the flat: bring Pendragen, a little flat steeple (standing to the westwards of Worckum) to the westwards of a little village, which standeth alsoo to the westwards of Worckum, and sail so right with it, that is a good longest mark of the buy upon the Frieze plate, and so you shall run right with the buy, when as that Warns and Mirnes come one in the other, to the northwards of Staverens, than you have the length of the buy, which lieth on the west side of the Plate, you must run alongst to the westwards of it, there is the deepest water: when you come from the northwards, you might sail within the Freese-plate on the east shore.  
Being past the foresaid buy upon the plate, go on northnortheast, until that Pendragen come betwixt the little village and Voorwolde. If that you have then the cliff through Staveren, than you have the deepest water upon the shoalest of the slatt, than men run commonly a little more norherly unto the buy in the Bite, 
Buy in the Bite  and alongst to the westwards of it, which lieth right in the farewaye, in sixteen foot, but alongst to the eastwards of the buy is the deepest water, the farther into the Bite towards Freesland the deeper. The mark of this buy, is the little flat steeple of Mirnes on to the southwards of Molqueren. Bring that foresaid little slat steeple in Molqueren, & keep it so standing, & then you come in the farewaye of the buy of Westworckum, that is a very good mark, when the buys are taken away.  
The old thwart marks of the buy in the Bite, are Mirnes▪ Molqueren, Hemelum, and a little long village, when they stand in four parts. Betwixt the buys upon the Frieze plate, and in the Bite, is the shoalest of the flat. When the buy in the Bite is on your broad side, then go on north and by west, somewhat more westerly, unto the buy of Westworckum, 
Buy of Westworckum  which lieth on the east shore in 16 foot at low water, upon these marks: a little sharp steeple, far within the land, called Harich, cometh over a little village, to the northwards of Hinlopen, called Dertwisch, the right deep thwart of it is three fathom. The old marks are two villages next to Mackum, upon the water side, standing north-east off from it, when these stand a little asunder, one from the other, you see yet two little steeples somewhat to the northwards of Bolswart, almost one to the other, near about as the other upon the water side stand asunder, the one is called Idsegahuysen. The thwart marks are a high house on the east end of Coudom, that cometh within a capstane bars length to the south end of Hinlopen. From thence to the buy upon Yghelhoeck, 
Yghelhoeck.  the course is north, the marks there of are, a little sharp steeple with the first long village to the northwards of Worckum, called Geest, when that little steeple cometh in the innermost swampe of that long village, than you have the buy, that is a good thwart mark: the longest marks are, the sharp steeple of Pingom over the flat steeple of Coorenwaert upon the waterside, and Pendragen to a little house to the northwards of the village with the swamp, or when the mil of Staveren standeth betwixt the town and the Block-house of Stavern, these are all good longest marks of the buy upon Yghelhoeck.  
From Yghelhoeck to the middle ground the course is north, the right deep in the Middle ground 
Middleground.  is seven fathom in the farewaye betwixt Westworckum and Yghelhoeck the right deep in four fathom, soft ground, the east shore is flat and the west shore steep. The buy of the Middle ground lieth upon these marks: the two sharp steeples Arun and Pingom one in the other about north-east from you: or Bolswaert right to the northwards of a Country house, to the northwards of Mackum, these are good thwart marks of the Middleground. The longest marks are: kinswaert (that is the runner) cometh behind the church of Surich, than you are right in the farewaie. The Church of Surigh standeth upon the water side, upon a point that lieth out about north-east and by north from the buy, or when the flat steeple of Wynaem (to the northwards of Harlingen) cometh betwixt Midlum and the east end of Harlingen, than you are right in the Middleground, on which side that Wynaem standeth nearest, that shore you are also nearest unto, the west shore is steep; the east shore indifferent flat, you may run over it in three fathom, and come again in five fathom towards Friesland. From the Middleground outwards to the Fly, you can sail within no tails of sand on the west shore.  
Being past the buy in the Middleground, then go on northnorthwest unto the buy upon Swanebalgh, 
Swanebalgh  which lieth in 3 fathom on the east shore, the thwart marks there of are Bolswaert over a little short house to the southwards of Cornwaert. When you run over betwixt the buys of the Middleground and Swanebalgh on the east shore more easterly then in three fathom, that you come again in four or five fathom, you might (in sailing out) sail behind the shoals of Swanebalgh, or when you are bound in behind the shoals of the Middleground, the west shore thwart of this, you may sound in four fathom, or three fathom and a half, over against the buy upon Swanebalgh, on the west shore is good ground for to anchor in.  
From the buy upon Swanebalgh to the buy upon Schuytesand 
Schuytesand.  the course is north w. somewhat northerly: the thwart marks there of are Wynaem over the highest part of Harlingen: the longest marks are, Bolswaert the northwards of the Sluys, which lieth to the northwards of Woens: this buy lieth in six fathom on the east shore, upon a tail or point, which you might sail within when you sail out, the right deep thwart of it is 7 and 8 fathom, the west shore is indifferent flat, which you may sound in 4 fathom, the e. shore is steep, but a little without the buy it is flat all alongst to Keeshoeck, and you may sound it all alongst unto the Sloot. In sailing up, you might sail within the w. shore over against Schuytesand, or a little to the southwards of it in 3 fathom, or 3 fathom & a half into a Deadbalg, behind a tail of sand, 
Point of Waert.  called the point of the Waert, but keeping in 4 fathom from that shore, you cannot take hurt of it. In sailing up with a forfloud, keep the east shore, or else you should be lightly carried therewith into the foresaid balgh, behind that Waert, before you should be ware of it. Upon the point of that waert standeth a drift beacon, & 2 to the northwards or the westwards of it, which men do call the beacons of Claesoomen, and to the southwards of it standeth a beacon upon Dominicu● plate, or (as the Pilots do name it) Meynsen plate. T●e marks for to sail alongst this long reach are: Mack●● with a mill upon the water side, and a village with a li●●●e flat steeple to the southwards of Mackum, called Idsegahuysen, when Pandragen cometh betwixt M●ckum and that village than you shall go clear of that foe esayd tail or Deadbalg: If Pandragen come nearest to ●dsegahuysen, than you are too near the foresaid tail or plate or if Pandragen come nearest to Mackum, than you are too near the east shore.  

Keeshoec  From Schuytsand to the buy upon Keeshoeck, the course is w.n.w. or northwest and by w. according as the wind & tide shall be. In that long reach go little more than half tides alongst the deep, the afterfloud & fore-eb fall thwart over there to the westwards, & the after-eb & forefloud right contrary to the eastwards. The marks of the buy upon Keeshoeck, are Franiker steeple betwixt the mill & the town of Harlingen, or to the masts of the Schips which lie in the haven.  
T●is buy lieth on the east shore, the right farewaye thwart of it is 8, 9 and ten fathom deep.  
Betwixt Keeshoeck and Schuytesand, or betwixt the beakons of Claesoomen & the point of the water lieth a little narrow plate alongst the reach, almost in the midst of the fareway nearest to the west shore, where upon it is not deeper than four fathom, or 3 fathom and an half, when men turn to windewards they are over it with 2 or 3 casts of the lead.  
Westwards from the buy upon Keeshoeck lieth the Old-Flye, 
Old-Flye.  it lieth in first s. s.w. and then forth to the buy upon the Nesse in the Tessel stream. The after flood with the fore ebb fall in very strong into this channel. In sailing upwards you might sail within it in 4 fathom. The marks of it are, the steeple of Franiker right to the southwards of the steeple of Harlingen. From thence outwards off unto Schieringshals the w. shore is very steep, in eight fathom you shall be close by the shore. The fareway betwixt these buys, and thwart of the buy upon the Ellbow● is ten and eleven fathom deep.  
From Keeshoeck to Wolfshoeck 
Wolfshoeck.  the course is first northwest and northwest and by north unto the buy betwixt them both, by some called the Schor tun and by the Pilots the buy upon the Ellbowe: 
Schor tun or the buy upon the Ellbow.  and from thence to the buy upon Wolfshoeck, north, or somewhat more easterly, which lieth in four fathom on the east shore.  
From the buy upon Wolfshoeck unto the buy unto Schieringshals 
Sch●eringshals.  the course is northnorthwest, & north w. and by north according as the wind and tide shall be. To the northwards or to the eastwards of the buy upon Wolfshoecke goeth up a broad bite southeast fare into the grounds, so deep as the right farewaie, called the Inschot, 
The Inschot.  coming in you might sail within in seven fathom, the forefloud falleth from Schieringshals very strong into it, and the fore ebb to the contrary, very strong out of it upon the tail of Schieringshals, where by main ships are miscarried.  
Schieringshals is a tail of sand, which shooteth off from the west shore, upon it lieth a white buy in three or four fathom, coming in from without, men might sail within it in six fathom, the right deep betwixt Wolfshoeck and Schieringshals is nine fathom.  
From Schieringshals to Longsand, 
Longsand  the course is northwest, and northwest and by north, betwixt them both on the w. shore it is shallow water, and the best road of all the Fly stream, there goeth also little tide. The right deep is eight, nine and ten fathom, Longsand men might sail within it on the east shore, in sailing up, but if they keep themselves in 7 or 8 fathom, they shall not come too near neither of Longesand nor Schieringshals. When the eastermost house upon Grindt cometh a little to the northwards of the westermost, than you have even the length of the buy upon Longsand. From Longsand to the Sloot the course is forth northnorth w. the right deep is ten fathom, 
Moncksloot.  or men run alongst by the beakons upon Crakesand until they come into the Sloot.  
The Island Flyeland is three leagues long, and a land very easy to be known: upon the east end lie high white sand-hilles, and to the westwards it is a land full of short low hommocks or knobbs. Upon the west end standeth a Church with a mill to the eastwards of it. From the w. end shooteth off a riffe a good ways into sea. To the westwards of this riffe, betwixt Flyeland and the Eyerland goeth in a deep, called the Westergat, or Westfiel deep, which is not for great ships, but only for Fisher boats, there is not above 8 or 10 foot water. Upon the east end standeth a mill with a Cape, the which are marks for to avoid the grounds which lie before the Fly.  
The east end of Flyeland, and the west end off Tessel lie eight leagues asunder.  
Eastwards from Vlieland lieth der Schelling, 
der Schelling.  and is about three leagues long. Upon it stand two Churches and upon the west end thereof it hath an high stubbed tower called Branda●ies and by it standeth a Mill, about the middle of the land standeth a sharp steeple called Midlands. East thereof standeth another Spire steeple, called the Hoorn: between Midland, and the Hoorn standeth a mill. On the east end there lie little hills or downs. Upon the west end standeth a Light-house upon which there is fire at night, and two Capes, the biggest serveth as a Mark of the eastern Booms channel and the least for the western Booms-channel.  

Stortemelck.  
To sail into Stortemelck (that is the Landdeep of Vlieland bring the Cape that is on the east end of Vlieland and the Lighthouse together, they shall then stand from you southsoutheast or a little easterly, sail there upon, and you shall fall right upon the first buy, that lieth in five fathom, on the outermost of the long Bank, the Bank is on the northside reasonable plain, so that those who come out of the north may run thereby upon the lead in five or six fathom, and so likewise find the outermost Buy. If need require men may run over the end of the long bank, but n●● too far eastwards of the outermost buy in three ●●●●om or eighteen foot, towards the shore though not eastwards of the second Buy but a good way westwards, lieth right southwards the point of another small tail, whereupon near the buy is no more than eleven foot water, between this tail and the long bank runneth a Chop in the ground to the eastwards off five fathom deep. It happeneth sometimes that ships coming over the end of the Long bank and finding again deeper water, do think themselves to be in the right depth of Stortemelck, where upon they luffe but run in the foresaid Chop in betwixt the two foresaid tails, and if with a westerly wind not without great danger, and yet must run out again backwards. Coming out of the west alongst by Vlieland in four or five fathom, you shall not miss to run the foresaid outermost buy in sight: He that in the night falleth about Stortemelek let him bring the light-house southsoutheast from him, and run there upon till he come nearer the shore he shall run to the westwards of the outermost buy, within Stortemelck there lie 7 black buys with one white buy, sailing in leave all the black on the larboard and run alongst the southwards, leave the white on the starboard, even as all other white buys as well in Booms channel, the letting as upon the Vliestream.  
In coming from Stortemelck you must somewhat shun the shore for it hath a shoal right over against the first buy.  
The second Buy called the outtermost Drooge dry lieth on eleven foot upon the ridge or the shoalest of the channel south thereof is alsoo not more than 11 foot water, and a little further again 16 foot deep. The third is called the innermost Drooge dry lieth on 16 foot the right depth between both is 3 fathom. The fourth is called Heyckhoeck, between this and the third the right depth is in five fathom, over against the fourth lieth the white Buy on the strand, hard by runneth a little tail from the shore, which you may under sail when you sail outwards to this white Buy, or to the third from without it stretcheth eastnortheast in, from the fourth to the fifth almost east, & further more & more southerly. The fifth buy is called the outtermost corner buy, the sixth the middlemost corner Buy, and the seventh or last the innermost corner buy, betwixt the outtermost and middlemost corner buy, the next outtermost runneth a tail from the shore which you may under sail from without, this groweth sometimes almost as fare as the Buy, then breaketh the depth by the wall again through and scours the tail wholly to the north shore from the innermost buy men run forth alongst by the strand of Vlieland, or southward to the buy upon the plate.   

The eastern Booms Channel.  
To sail into the eastern Booms Channel Coming out of sea or from the westwards; bring the Cape on the Schelling & the tower of Brandaries together, they shall then stand south from you, & south & by east run there upon and you shall find the outermost buy without the Channel in sea upon 4 and a half and 5 fathom, right without and eastwards the outermost point of the steep grounds they are without upon the northside so steep that you are hard by them in 12 and 13 fathom, upon them, remaineth not more than 5 foot water hard by to the westwards of the foresaid Cape standeth a lighthouse where upon there is light every night. Coming by night out of the east you must hold the stroke of the shore, and you may run alongst there by in three fathom till the fire be right against you, and so still further upon three fathom till you come to Heyhoeck then is the fire almost east and east and by north from you, there get you deeper water In four fathom you ma● run without about the steep grounds. The eastern Booms Channel is very hard to be sailed in by an unxeperienced man, it is full of wand'ring grounds even as by Oesel. The foreflood falleth eastnortheast thwart over the Channel till almost half flood, before it draws right inwards, contrariwise the fore ebb falleth also westsouthwest thwart over the Channel, till almost half ebb before it falleth right out, therefore it is best with a north-east or easterly wind & fore ebb. A little eastwards of the Cape and the tower get the east shore, and so run alongst thereby upon three fathom, this is clean and flat wholly till within Cape and the Tower. The second buy lieth within the outtermost point of the steep grounds, distant from the first about south-west and by west, the steep grounds are so steep on the end that it is very near it 18 foot deep the east shore is flat going up, and drieth by little and little from 18 to 16, 14 and 12 foot. Eastwards the second buy the fareway is three fathom deep, and to the westwards it is five fathom, but not wide, therefore you may not run too fare westwards you should be very suddenly with a fore ebb upon them they are likewise within very steep. The east shore you may run so near upon your lead as you will, only with a storm the sea breaketh thereupon quite to the second buy. The second, third, fourth, and fifth buy lie all upon a row one from another, to wit, south-west and north-east, the third on the east coast though you may go there a little more eastwards about, the east coast is there most flat, and the fareway westwards of the buy seven fathom deep. The fifth called the buy upon Heyhoeck lieth also on the east shore but nearer than the third in five fathom, these may you also sail to the eastwards but not fare, the fareway westwards these is 7, 8 and 9 fathom deep, till you come passed this buy, you may from without sail in alongst by the east coast upon your lead, also by night or dark weather, from thence inwards it is wide and broad. From Heyhoeck you must sail to Robbegat. Upon the north side of the Robbegat upon the point of the dry plate standeth a beak on in the middle of Robbegat next the dry plate lieth a small shoal; before upon the shoal on the point in the coming in lieth a buy, betwixt that buy or the small shoal and the foresaid Beacon is the deepest water but you must run in hard by the Beacon that so you may not be deceived with the stream which falleth thwart over the dry plate below and between this small shoal and the Rosyne plate it is wider, and the Robbegat stretiches in south-west and south-west and by w. Being through the Robbegat, run to the strand of Vlieland, and alongst somewhat near thereby.   

The Western Booms Channel.  
To sail into the western Booms Channel coming from the west, bring the Cape and tower of Brandaries together, that is then east and east and by south from you, thereupon you must run to find the outermost buy, there is six fathom water, keep then the Cape and tower so standing till you come to the second buy bring then the tower a great handspikes length to southwards the Cape and sail thereupon then you shall sail betwixt a white and black buy, there is it upon the shoalest 17 foot with low water, from thence you come to six and seven fathom, & then you come again in the right Booms Channel, on the northwall it is the deepest, it is wide and broad that you could well vere it up, the stream runs there of itself right in in still weather.  
To sail into the letting, 
The letting.  coming through the Robbegat, about the Rosyne plate, you must run towards the buy upon Langesant a●d forth between the white and black buy, leaving in sailing up the black on the larboard and the white on the starboard till you come by the beacons upon the Nakens, you may easily see from buy to buy, sail then forth alongst by the Beakons upon the Nakens e. s.e. on till Brandaries cometh hard by Grind but not upon it keep them so standing, and run southwards on and you shall sail upon the buy on the tail of Hendryck it jaerts' plate, these you may under sail on the e. side, Leave them on your larboard, and run on west away southsoutheast to the last Buy that lieth upon the south point of the foresaid Hendryck it jaerts' plate. Over against the Beakons upon the Nakens lie on the southwall two white buys, the most easterly lieth upon the tail which sailing off you may undersayle southwards between the two last black buys by the west coast is the Ro●de where the ships (which are bound to Harlingen) set on to lighten.  

NOTE.  
All the depths here before rehearsed, as well of Stortemelck as of the Boomkens-gat, are said of the lowest water, at half flood is three foot deeper, it floweth upon these at the foresaid places with a common tide 5 and an half or 6 foot up and down. The numbers of the depths set down in the card of the Fly and Amelandgat, are to be understood of feet: as for example, by the outer buy of the Boomkens got stand 66, that are 66 foot, or eleven fathom, six foot being reckoned for a fathom.    

Amelandgat.  
Two leagues to the eastwards of the Schelling lieth Ameland, lying eastnortheast and westsouthwest four great leagues. Upon the west end of Ameland standeth a Cape, and a great thick flat steeple, called the Hoelme, the roof of this Church is broken off, but the after front with the roof standeth above the side walls, to the eastwards of the Church of Hoelm standeth a mill, with a house to the westwards of the mill, alsoo a broad flat tower. About the place where Midlan-church was wont to stand, lie three or four white sandhilles, which are low, flat, & long, towards the east end it is knobby land, with white amongst it. From the west end of Ameland runneth off a riff, almost three leagues into sea, called Born-rif, 
Bornriffe  which is upon the outer side ver●e steep: come no nearer it than in 12 fathom, coming from the eastwards you cannot sail within it, but in sailing alongst by it in seven fathom, you shall not run a bowls cast along without it.  
For to sail into Amelandgat, coming out of the sea, bring the cape upon the east end of the Schelling, right over the steeple of Horn, which shall then stand from you southsouthwest or a little more westerly, sail in right with them, until that the Cape upon Ameland, and the steeple of Hoelme are one over the other, then leave the first marks, and sail in upon the second, and you shall find the outermost buy, which lieth somewhat within the outermost point of Bornriff. Coming from the westwards, run alongst by the strand of the Schelling in five, or five fathom and an half at low water, and you shall not fail to sail right upon the outermost buy, & then the C. & steeple upon Ameland shall also come one over the other, and stand from you east, or a little more southerly. Coming alongst by the Schelling in four fathom, you shall not sail within the Koggedeeps ground, 
Kog deep grounds.  over against then lieth the first buy on the south side of Bornerif, run alongst to the southwards of it, keeping the Cape and steeple one over the other, until you be past the second buy, which lieth thwart of the west end of Kamper sand, 
K●mpersand.  the farewaye betwixt these two buys is five and six fathom deep.  
Being past the second buy, bring the steeple somewhat to the northwards of the Cape, and go on east n.e. towards the third buy upon Gerritshonden, 
Gerritshonden.  for to avoid the plate which lieth off from the south side, towards Bornriff, on it lie two white buys, the first over against the a foresaid third black buy, the other over against the fourth black buy, lying from the third about southeast, leave the black buys all on the larboard side, and the white on the starboard side, and run through so betwixt them both, the plate is on the north side ●●different flat, so that you may run to it upon the lead, reckon well your tides, especially be careful of a fore-ebbe, which falleth very strong over that channel northnorthwest into sea over Bornriffe. Betwixt the second and third buy in the fareway it is eight and nine fathom. Betwixt the third and the foresaid plate seven fathom. Being past the fourth buy, both sides are very steep, & the fareway eight, nine, ten, and twelve fathom deep, go then in southsoutheast, until that the steeple of Holm come over the south point of Ameland where the boats lie, and then you come in the bite, where it is on the s. side flat, and good anchoring in 5 or 6 fathom, the north shore is very steep.  
For to sail further into Horsen, go away from the bite eastnortheast alongst by the south side in five or six fathom, so long until Heynooms chamber (being a red tiled house) come a handspikes length to the northwards or to the eastwards of Hoelm-church, anchor there in five or six fathom, you shall lie there in good ground, & sheltered for all winds, also there goeth little tied; in this fareway it is twelve fathom deep, the north shore is there very steep. These foresaid depths (like as also those of the Fly) are said of low water.   

Of the tides.  
At Amsterdam a north-east and s. w. moon maketh the highest water.  
At Horn, Enckhuysen, and at Urck, a north & south moon.  
Betwixt Cripple-sand, and the Creyl, a n. & by w. & s. and by e. moon.  
Upon the Frieze and Wieringer flat, a n.w. and s. e. moon.  
In the Fly & Amelandgat a southeast & n.w. moon maketh high water, before the Fly the flood falleth to the eastwards thwart over the grounds, almost until half flood before it setteth into Boomkens got. Likewise the Ebb to the contrary falleth to the westwards thwart over the grounds, almost until half Ebb, before it setteth right out at the channel. The afterflood turneth about with the fore ebb and fall alongst Flyeland out at Stortemelck, but the foreflood runneth right into Stortemelck.   

Of the depths about these places and in what depths men may see the land.  
The Islands Flyeland, the Schelling, and Tessel, men may see in 15 and 16 fathom. Thwart of the Schelling the ground is white sand.  
The steep grounds or Petersand and Bornriffe, are very steep on the off side, close by them it is 12 or 13 fathom deep.  
Ameland men may see in 12 fathom, the depth of 13 and 14 fathom runneth far off to seawards, so that men cannot see it in 15 fathom.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the Fly to the Naes, n. & by e. a little easterly about 85 leagues.  
From the Fly unto the Riffe in 16 fathom n. and by e. 66 or 67 leagues.  
From Fly to Boevenbergen, the course is n.n.e. or a little more easterly about 69 leagues.  
From the Fly to Rinkopper, or Numer-deep, n.n.e. or a little more easterly about 58 leagues.  
From the Fly to the Island Silt, on the coast of jutland, the course is north-east 46 leagues  
From Bornriffe to the Naes, the course is north or a little more easterly 82 leagues.  
From Bornriffe to Holy Land, north-east and by east 30 leagues.  
From Bornriffe to Wrangheroogh, eastnortheast 27 leagues.  
From Bornriffe to the Wester-Eems 12 leagues.   
Petersand, or the steep grounds & Bornriffe, lie n.e. and by e. and south-west and by west four leagues asunder.  

From the Fly to the n.e. end of the Broad fourteens, the course is w.n.w. 8 leagues.  
From the Fly to Tinmouth or Newcastle, westnorthwest 88 leagues.  
From the Fly to Hitland, the course is n.w. & by north, somewhat northerly 156 leagues.  
From the Fly to Fairehill; northwest & by north about 151 leagues.  
From the Fly to Scuytenes, the course is north & by w. somewhat northerly 106 leagues.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Thus showeth the Schelling when you sail alongst by it about two leagues from the Land.  
Thus showeth Flyeland when you are two leagues thwart off from it.  
Ameland showeth itself thus, when you are two leagues thwart off from it.     

The second Demonstration, Where in The Scholbalgh, Lauwers, both the Eemses, the Weser, the Elve, & the Eyder, and other channels of the Sea between them.  
Schiermonckoogh 
Schiermonckoogh.  lieth from the east end of Ameland east somewhat northerly 3 leagues, it is a little low plain Island, about 2 leagues long, there standeth no special thing upon it to be known, but upon the west end two capes, with a white sandhill, otherwise it is all with low blackish sand-hils, or hommocks, (but higher than upon the east end) and mingled with white: the east end is a long flat strand, with little low rough sand-hills. When you bring the two capes upon the west end one in the other, and run so in, you shall find the outermost buy, which lieth without the channel, at sea, in 7 fathom, or there abouts. Sometimes there lie two and sometimes three buys in the channel, which you must leave on the starboardside, and run alongst to the eastwards of them, being come within the channel, you shall find also beacons on the w. shore, which you must follow all along, until you come to Ostmerhorn, where you may anchor. The lying in, and depths of that channel do alter and shift oftentimes, and sometimes much within a short time, so that there is no certainty to be written off it, where unto men might trust.  
Four leagues to the eastwards of Schiermonckoogh, lieth the Island Rottum, 
Rottum.  and betwixt them the little Island the Bosch. A few years passed through, setting off spyrie grass or heath, there was grown two or three handsome sand-hils, but are now again altogether blown away, and altered into a plain flat strand, which the sea at high floods doth altogether run over.  
Betwixt these Islands the Bosch & Schiermonckoogh was wont to go in a channel of indifferent depth, called the lawyers, which is now most cast too, by the foresaid strand of the Bosch, which is grown in all alongst unto the oogh, so that there is no more remaining, than a narrow & shoal creek.  
To the eastwards of the Bosch goeth in the Schille, also an altering & uncertain channel, which is sometimes deep, and sometimes again shoal, and the channel shifteth too and again, so that there is no certainty to be written of it, whereunto men might trust.  
The Island Rottum is a little Island, about a league & half long, and very easy to be known, the west end is high and steep, the rest is low land with some little sand-hills. Upon the east end stand two capes, the greatest or the runner standeth upon the e. end upon the flat strand, the smallest on the south side of the sandhill. There stand also two houses upon it, the one upon the west end, the other in the midst of the Island in a valley.  
Borckum 
Borckum.  is also an Island easy to be known, two great leagues long, it ariseth commonly, when you come in out of the sea) in three parts, as if it were three Islands, when you come from the westwards, it showeth itself in four parts, for with high floods the water runneth through in 3 places. The Wor. Counsel of Embden hath caused to be set upon the west end a high thick steeple, which men may see far off at sea, on the west side of that steeple standeth a little low church.  
From the west end of Borckum shooteth off a riffe, a great ways into sea, called Burckum riffe: To the southwards of it, to wit betwixt Borckum & Rottum, goeth in the wester-Eems, which is the very best channel that lieth in all this coast.  

The Old or western Eems.  
Bring the Capes upon Rottum together, and they shall then stand southeast and somewhat more easterly, if you come out of the sea, sail resolutely upon them, then shall you find the outermost Buy, then shall you have the Tower of Borckum e. and more southerly from you, & the west end of Rottum southeast & by south & lies upon the tail of Geltsacks plate, 
Geltsacks-plate.  there is a white buy with a little flag & lieth upon 6 fathom with low water and is marked in the Card with the letter a.  
From the first to the second, the course is southeast & by south, is marked with letter b, and is the first black buy upon 7 fathom on the south shore, let this buy in your sailing in lie on your starboard, and the white on your larboard, then have you from this foresaid black buy, the tower upon Borckum east & the Capes upon Rottum southeast & by e. from you, from the first black buy to the second, third, and fourth buy marked with the letters, c, d, e, your course is east and by south.  
Coming from the w. near the Lauwers or Bossandt, keep the stroke of the shore upon 5 fathom, till you are passed it, sail then freely eastwards on, so shall you run within through Geltsack plate in five, four, and three fathom, afterwards on eight fathom, and so come by the fourth black buy which lieth in four fathom.  
Pascaarte vande EEMSEN, Als the oude oft wester Eems en de ooster Eems.  
Pascaarte vaned VLIE, Als meed e'en gedeelt vaned Amelander got.  
PascaerteVande EEMS, ELVE, Weser, Eyder, en de Hever: als meed ho die selvighe gaten van Heylighe: landt gelegen sin.  
The Borckummer riffe 
Borckummer riffe.  cometh on from without and is flat on the end, when as the Capes upon Rottum stand southeast off then come you over the riffe, and shall come upon the tail of the riff with low water with less than 7 dutch els depth of water for it is flat and broad, on the inner side it is very high and steep, and shoots with a breast inwards but you may cast your lead well upon it.  
From the fourth buy till within the bending of Rottum the course is eastsoutheast is marked with f, and lieth upon 7 fathom, from this to the buy upon the high plate and is the sixth buy marked with g, and lieth upon 7 fathom, as also to the Huyberts buy h, the course is east and by south when the Cape upon the southside and the tower come together they stand southsouthwest from one another, so are you even with the outtermost Huyberts buy, go then eastsoutheast on to the innermost Huyberts buy marked with i, which lieth also even as the first Huyberts buy in 6 fathom, upon the west side of these buys you have Huyberts' plate which is now divided from Huyberts' sand and you may under sail it with low water, and is in the fareway 12, 13 and 14 fathom deep, from the innermost Huyberts buy marked with i, to the buy before the watt, called Steven janss buy 
Steven Ian●s buy.  marked with k, the course is southeast and lieth on 8 fathom k, coming alongst by the buy on Huyberts' plate, you must leave Borckum a little that so you may shun the Mieuwen tail 
Mieuwen tail.  which shooteth from off the wolds or the south end of Borckum this you may under sail upon 5 fathom when you come inwards.  
Westwards from Steven janss buy stand 5 beakons a little to the southwards there goeth the watt 〈◊〉 north and by east almost as far from Steven janss buy as the innermost Huyberts buy lieth from Steven janss buy there shooteth out also an out corner or riffe called Ransel, 
Ransel.  but you may under sail it upon 5 fathom, the marks of this channel and how to shun the tail or Ransel are these, upon the south end of Borckum lie two little downs called the Wolden, keep the tower of Borckum on the west side of those little downs so shall you not sail upon the Ransel, in this channel it is deep nine and eight fathom.  
From Steven janss buy to Doecke buy l, the course is eastsoutheast, there find you (southwards from this buy) a beacon m, called Ruytebaken, 
Ruyte baken.  this buy lieth upon 5 fathom and in the fareway you have 7 fathom deep, the flood falleth very strong behind this buy into Doecke-gat whereof you must beware, from the buy with the Doeck to the Camper buy the course is eastsoutheast marked with n, from thence to the buy of Eemshorn marked with o, the course is southeast lie both upon 5 fathom in the midst of the farewater it is 7 fathom deep, 
Marks of the buy of Eemshorn  the Marks of the Eemshorn buy are these when the Cloister of the Dam (being a flat Church) cometh together with Holdwijck than have you the length of the buy; these marks stand then about south and by west from you, stretching out from the buy of Eemshorn you shall find on the south shore five beakons sail about that from thence to the Groningerdike southsouthwest till you get the Church of Wtwyrde & the Cloister of the Dam together, run betwixt to the shore of Delftsayl, for being past the buy of the Doecke, than you must presently sound the west shore as far as Otterdum in 5, 6, and 7 fathom, and come not nearer them, for it very steep the east coast in sailing up you may hereabout sound upon six fathom, behind a plate called the Hondt being a hard sand, and somewhat more inward lieth yet another plate called the Pape, also an hard sand runneth through between both the creeks but the west shore is soft & clay ground as fare as Otterdum, you must keep the west shore and follow the beakons which stand alongst the shore, this reach stretches southsoutheast and south and by west and so in the bending alongst southsoutheast and by the Groninger land southeast.  
For to avoid Reydersand or jannens sand, 
Reyder.  that is a plate in the midst of the Eems, betwixt Otterdum and Reyde, where upon at low water it is ten foot, you must look out for Otterdum a slat church, without a steeple, standing in Groningerland on the dyke, when you come thwart of it, edge over to Embderland, to wit, to the Knock, which is a steeple broken of, standing in the water upon the point, Coming by the Knock, then run within two cables length along by the north shore unto Loegerhorn, and then you shall not sail too near the plate. There standeth a flat steeple betwixt the Knock & Loegerhorne, called Gerritswaert, when you can see through that steeple, or when that steeple & the church come one to the other, then are you thwart of that foresaid plate.  
When you sail up the Western Eems, you must leave all the buys on the starboard side.  
A southeast and northwest moon maketh without the Eems the highest water. In the Balgh a southsoutheast and northnorthwest moon: Before the town of Embden, a south, or south & by west, and a north or north and by east moon.  
The Island juyst 
Island juyst.  lieth a great league, or a league & a half eastnortheast from Borckum, which is a little low Island, the west end is a high steep point & grey land, the east end is higher than the midst. The church standeth in the midst upon the land; the steeple is somewhat sharp, and standeth at the east end of the church for you cannot see the church, but thwart of a low place or valley. Betwixt Borckum & juyst goeth in the eastern Eems. From the west end of juyst lieth off a riffe two leagues, or 2 leagues & a half west into sea, on the off side you may sound it in 3 or 4 fathom, to the southwards of it goeth in the eastern Eems.   

The eastern Eems.  
Run upon the grounds of Borckum in 5 fathom and set the tower of Borckum with the New Cape (which is of late there made) then will they stand south from you, or if you come from the west, then keep the tower upon juyst east and east and by north from you, so shall you find the first or outtermost buy in 5 fathom, from the outtermost to the second the course is east and by north, from the second to the third eastsoutheast, they lie all in 5 fathom in the fareway, it is five, six, eight and ten fathom deep.  
The end of the juyster riff, between the outtermost and the second buy is upon the innermost side so extraordinary steep and rising up, that you cannot sound upon it, but more inwards from the second buy it is slatter, there is good sounding ground, the third buy lieth upon the point of Brewer's plate 
Brewer's plate.  on the east side of Borckum which you may under sail, the tail is on the north side very steep, from the third buy sail yet eastsoutheast on till you come even with the beacon upon the Hooge-Horn, there is a good road upon five, six, or 7 fathom, and good lying for a south wind, then with a flood you must go on east & somewhat more northerly that you may so shun the point of the foresaid Brewer's plate, the juyster riff is inwards from the second buy flat, so that you may sound in 5 or 6 fathom when you are a little eastwards the third buy, go then southeast on: the eastern Eems is thereabouts wide and broad. The east end of Borckum is flat, than you must not forget to sound when you sail out or in with a ship that draweth much water, and if it be with a southeast course then come you upon the Coning plate 
Conings plate.  upon the point or tail of which lieth a buy, and upon the plate a Beacon, this buy and Beacon you must bring on your starboard. To the north in east Friesland stand two towers one by another of which the one is stumpy and great and the other low and small, when these towers come with the north end of Bandt a little Island upon the WATT even one with another, then have you the Buy upon Conings plate they are good longest Marks, and when juyster tower cometh northnortheast from you, they are good thwart Marks of the same buy.  
From the buy upon the Coning plate to the buy upon the Westernbalgh the course is southeast till you get the two Capes upon Bandt together that is the buy southsouthwest from you, from the first buy upon the westernbalgh to the second, the course is south-west even as the whole westernbalgh is, you shall not miss (if you keep both the Capes upon Bandt together) to run out of the balgh but at last a little more westerly.  
From the balgh beacon to the beacon upon Eemshorn the course is south and north, to sail through the channel from these beacons forth to the Knock the course is southsoutheast from thence to Loegen east.  
About a half league within Juyst, betwixt the beacon upon the High Horn, and the buy upon Kings-plate on the east side of the Easter Eems lieth Memerbalgh. 
Memerbalgh.  It lieth in most north, that is a good road for small ships, that are bound to the westwards, or out into sea. Within the balgh he that runneth in by the High Horn shall find good road for small ships, that are bound to the eastwards, which lieth in south.  
Coming from the eastwards, you may sound juyst riff which is flat on the off side, without, in the point of the riffe is a shore or Deadbalgh, with 2 points, betwixt them it is 3 fathom and an half deep.  
A southsoutheast and a northnorthwest moon maketh (without in the Easter Eems) the highest water.  
To the east of juyst lieth Buys, the shortest and smallest Island that is upon all this coast. It riseth up in two Hommocks, where of the one Hommock, which is the most easterly is the highest and sharpest.  
Betwixt juyst & Buys goeth in the Buysdeepe: 
Buysdeep  the Wor. Counsel of Embden was wont to set it with buys, but it is done no more, in regard it doth so oftentimes shift.  
Two great leagues to the eastwards of juyst lieth Norderny, 
Norderny  betwixt them both lieth that little Island Buys. Norderny is to be known by a broad flat tower, which standeth upon the west end, but sometimes men can hardly perceive it. About the midst of the Island, nearest the east end lieth a high white sandhill, thereby it is best to be known. Further the land is all full of Hommocks. Betwixt Norderny and Buys goeth in a channel, called the Norder-deepe, or Norderny.  
A great league to the eastwards of Norderny lieth the Island Baltrum, 
●●ltrum.  which is about two leagues long, a little shorter than Norderny. Upon this Island standeth no special thing, whereby men may know it: but upon the east end a high sandhill, which is sharp above, the west end is low sand-hills. When the foresaid high sandhill is southeast and by east from you than it is round to see to: Upon the west end there goeth a swamp through.  
Betwixt Baltrum and Norderny runneth in a channel, called the Whichterie, 
Whichtery.  there is no certainty to be written of it, that men may trust to, sometimes there is 2 fathom water, & more, & sometimes no more than 4 or 5 foot.  
The Island Langeroogh lieth a league to the eastwards of Baltrum, which is sour great leagues long, and hath on the off-side a fair strand, & three or four sand-hilles, where by men may know it, which lie from about the midst of the Island unto the west end, a good ways one from the other, the tops of them are plain and slat. Betwixt Langeroogh and Baltrum goeth in the Acumy, 
Acumy.  wherein lie 2 buys. It is no channel for great ships, it lieth out alongst by the foot strand of Langeroogh, first north-east, & then somewhat more easterly, but it is not to be trusted to, because it altereth and shifteth very often.  
Betwixt Langeroogh and Wrangeroogh lieth the Island Spyckeroogh, 
●●●●●er●●gh.  which is about a league long. At the e. end there was wont to lie a little Island, easy to be known, called Luttick Spyckeroogh, which is now altogether gone. Upon Spyckeroogh standeth nothing, whereby men might know it, but it is a black land, with Hommocks & Nobbes, like to the other Islands: Betwixt Spyckeroogh and Langeroogh goeth in the Oxebalgh. 
Oxebalgh   
Wrangeroogh 
Wrangeroogh.  lieth two great leagues to the eastwards of Langeroogh, which is a great league long, being a little plain white Island: Upon the east end lie high broad white sand-hills: Upon the west end the ●arle of Oldenbourgh hath caused to be made a great thick tower, with 2 spires: when they stand one right in the other, than you are by the outer buy of the Weser; the aforesaid tower, men may see two kennings off at sea. Betwixt Wrangeroogh and Spyckeroogh goeth in the Harrel, 
The Harrel.  about southsoutheast, but it is not to be trusted because it shifteth very often.  
The Acumy and Harrell are set both with buys by the Wor. Counsel of Embden: These channel serve not but for small ships, like as all the other, lying betwixt the eastern Eems and the Weser.  
The Land lieth from Bornriffe to Wrangeroogh eastnortheast and westsouthwest 29, or some will have it 30 leagues.  
For to sail into the jade or Western Weser with a southerly wind, run to the strand of Wrangeroogh in four fathom, with a westerly wind run no further than five fathom, and lead it in so by the strand of Wrangeroogh, in 4 or five fathom, until you come a good ways within, or to the end of foot strand of Wrangeroogh, there you shall find the first buy in 5 fathom at low water: Menserchurch shall then stand south from you. Thwart of this first buy the red sand is very steep, which you must leave on the larboard side, and the buy on the starboard side, when you come in. Thwart of this first buy cometh a tail, shooting off from the south shore, that is the innermost point of the Stonebalgh, which men might, at unawares sail within, in three fathom and an half, or four fathom, the first buy is laid upon the point of this tail. The Stonebalgh goeth in to the eastwards of Wrangheroogh the south side where of is steep, but the north side flat, which men may sound. In this Balgh it is ten foot deep at low water. From the first buy to the second, and alongst to the third, the course is east, the second buy lieth in two fathom and an half: The third, that is the Jade buy, lieth in three fathom. upon the shoalest of the Highwaye. It is very uneven betwixt the first and the third buy, you shall get wise depth of five or six fathom and then again two fathom, or two fathom and an half.  
For to sail from the jade to the Weser, then sail by the third buy over the shoalest of the High way on eastnortheast to the Mellembuye, and you shall find at low water upon the foresaid shoalest place, or by the third buy, no more water than nine or ten foot, and being over there you shall get again deeper water, and then you are in the Weser: Reckon well your tides, for the ebb falleth very strong northnorthwest out at the jade, and the flood to the contrary, very hard inwards, so that you can hardly stem the tide, when the weather is somewhat calm, whereof you must be very careful.  
For to sail up into the jade, leave the foresaid third buy on the larboard side, and go from thence most south up, unto the point of the Dyke, called Hormerscheel, when you are come by the Dyke, there the jadeiss wide and broad, without the foresaid Dyke standeth a beacon or two, for ships that are bound over the Wadt: If you will sail further up into the jade, then keep the west shore, until you come thwart of the church without a steeple, which standeth by the Dyke, there you must leave the west shore, because of the Aent●n or jeppe plate, which shooteth off from the Veer, alongst the west shore, and sometimes lieth dry at low Water. The west shore lieth most southeast somewhat southerly.  
A south and north moon maketh the highest water upon the Jade, and it floweth with an ordinary tide a fathom and an half up and down.   

The Weser.  
For to sail up the Weser, come no nearer Wrangeroogh than seven fathom, being in seven fathom, than edge off from the shore into 11 fathom, and you shall there find the first buy at the coming into the Weser, lying in seven fathom upon the tail of the Redsand, Menser Church (that is a flat Church without a steeple in Vroukens land) is then southsoutheast from you. Being thwart of the first buy, and that the west end of Wrangeroogh is southsouthwest from you, than you run over the tail of the Redsand in five fathom.  
From the outtermost buy to the second, third, fourth, & fifth, the course is due east, which lie all in 7 fathom the south side (to wit the Redsand) nearest each a point different from Menser church, so that Menser church lieth from the second south and by east, from the third south, from the fourth south and by west, and from the fifth southsouthwest. The fifth buy is called the buy upon the Head, for to know that from all the other buys, there standeth a staff upon it of a half fathom long. With a white knot upon it. Over against the buy upon the Head lieth a white buy on the white grounds. Betwixt all the foresaid buys you must reckon well your tides, the flood cometh out of the north west, and falleth alongst over the Redsand, and the ebb to the contrary. The right deep thwart of these foresaid buys, in the coming in is eleven fathom, but thwart of the buy upon the Head, five fathom at low water.  
Right before the We lieth the Middle-plate, 
Middle plate.  the Eastermost or the Inn●●side beginneth right to the northwards of the buy upon the Head by the white grounds, & lieth alongst the reach of the third buy, to reckon from without, and is on both sides flat for to sound about. On the west side of the foresaid plate lieth a white buy about from Menser Church, which you must leave in coming in on the larboard-side.  
For to sail from the buy upon the Head, out again to the eastwards of this plate unto the Elve. Then sound it out about the white grounds, in 4 or 5 fathom, until you be out in the sea.  
For to sail further up into the Weser, the course from the buy upon the Head unto the sixth buy is southeast & northwest. Menser Church shall then lie from you south-west and by south, the Weser is thwart of it about 20 fathom deep. From the sixth buy to the seventh, that is, the buy upon the Cours, or the Wapperbuye, or the south-west buy, because Menset Church lieth south-west off from it, the course is southeast. The Jade buy lieth about south, or south & by west from this buy. From the buy upon the Cours unto the Mellem buy the course is yet southeast, which you might sail within are unawares in six fathom. Menser Church lieth off from it south-west and by west. From the Mellem buy to the buy upon Bollenziele the course is southeast somewhat easterly, you must reckon your tides there very well, because the flood falleth exceeding hard into the west shore. Langworder church lieth right south & by east from that buy upon Bollenziele, 
Buy upon Bollenziele.  over against it upon the point of the blackgrounds lieth a white buy, come no nearer to it at half flood than four fathom and an half, you might unawares sail within that point (in sailing in) in four fathom. From the buy, upon Bollenziele to the beacon upon Bollenziele the course is southsoutheast, or southeast & by south. Langworder church lieth about south from that beacon, you must leave it on the starboard side, coming in within that beacon upon Bollenziele is a good road for a westerly wind. From the beakons upon Bollenziele to the first buy upon the flat, the course is southeast till you come somewhat beneath the beacon, & then alongst eastsoutheast. The marks of the first buy upon the Flat is, when you can see through the belholes of Langworder steeple, than you are thwart of the first buy, Langworder Church is then from you somewhat more southerly than southsouthwest. From the first buy upon the Flat to the second, the course is eastsoutheast. Betwixt these two buys stand five beakons on the larboard side, upon the black grounds. From the second buy upon the flat to the Meyland, the course is southeast and by south. Being come thwart of Wadnis or the Meyland, sail then close along by the green shore, until you come within Blixem, there is the road for great ships that are bound to sea.  
Like as upon the jade, so also upon the Weser a south & north moon maketh the highest water, it floweth there also 2 fathom and a half up and down.  
To the eastwards of the Weser lie the south grounds 
South grounds  of the Elve, there go in 2 fair deep Balghs or Creeks of 10, 12, & 13 fathom. The Till, called also Broadbalgh, is the westermost, and lieth so far to the westwards, that men can but even see the New-worke from thence.  
If it should happen that coming to the eastwards of the Weser, you should be beset upon the souther grounds, being a lest shore, & be in danger, then sail to the south grounds in 4, or 5, and 6 fathom, but not much nearer also, for they are somewhat steep. When you (running so along by these grounds upon the same course) shall get 8, 9, yea, 10 or 12 fathom soft ground, 
Easter Til.  then that is certainly of the Broadbalgh or Wester Till, take then the sounding of which side that you will, and sound it about by the grounds in 4 or 5 fathom, and you shall find amongst the sands smooth water, and good road, and may lie sheltered for all winds. The wester Till lieth in first eastsoutheast, alongst by the north shore it is deepest, on the south shore you cannot sail within any tails in sailing out, but you may in sailing in: when you come somewhat further in, lieth up more to the southwards: there are divers Balgs or channels, where men may sail through that are acquainted.  
The Easter Till or Broadbalgh lieth betwixt the Wester Till 
Wester Til.  & the Hondtbalgh, which runneth in seven fathom into the eastermost point, (or the old Schorhorn) that is a tail which lieth off a good ways, and which you might at unawares sail within in seven fathom coming from the westward. This Till lieth in also (like as the other) first eastsoutheast, but a little further in more easterly. Here also you may take the sounding of which side or shore that you will.  
Being come within, you shall get smooth water of the sands for all winds. In this channel is not less than 7 fathom water.  
The Hondtbalgh 
Hondtbalgh.  lieth right into the westwards of the Steep-buye or Schorhorn. If you will go in there with small ships for to sail over the Wadt into the Weser, then go (when you have the Steep buy) in southsoutheast. The Hondtbalgh is without indifferent wide, keep that course, until you come thwart of the beakons, which you must leave on the starboard side, you may well sound in about the off-side of the Schorhorne, but not the west side, by it lie plates which you might sail foul of in 9 fathom, in coming in, but on the Schorhorne you cannot do amiss.   

Holy land.  
The Island Holyland, and the outermost buy in the Weser, lie one from the other, south somewhat westerly, and north somewhat easterly. When it is clear and good sight, you may see Holy land, when you lie in the Weser, by the buy upon the head. Holyland and Bornrisse lie one from the other south-west and by west, and north-east and by east according to the common opinion, two and thirty leagues. When you come from the westwards and begin to get Holy-land in sight, it showeth itself with a high radish steep point, which is slat above. For to anchor or make road under Holy land, coming from the westwards, then run to that land in ten or twelve fathom. When you sail towards the south point, and come somewhat near the land, you shall espy a rock, like unto a small tower, close by the high land, called the Monk, 
Monck.  which is almost so high as the high land. About southsoutheast an English mile, or a little more from that rock under water. 
Rock under water  If you keep yourself in eight and nine fathom, than you run without this rock, and cannot take any hurt of it. When the Monk is covered of the other land, than you are thwart of this sunken rock. When the soresayd Monk cometh a handspikes length, past or without the other land, there is the road; & good anchoring in ten or eleven fathom, the ground is there fair and clean, except it be of wracks of lost ships, or lost anchors, which are there may Lying there in nine, ten or eleven fathom, you have shelter for a westfouthwest, northwest and north winds. From the point where the Monk standeth by, shooteth off a little riffe from the shore, which men may sound in 3 fathom, you may also run in 5 fathom from the shore, and sail clear of the foresaid sunken rock, to wit, through betwixt the sunken Rock, and the little riffe: but if you run into deeper water, to wit, in 7 fathom, you shall run right upon the sunken Rock. In 8 or 9 fathom you do run about without the sunken Rock.  
From the north side of Holy-land lieth off a filthy Riffe, almost a league into sea so that you cannot come nearer the whole north side, then in nine or ten fathom. If you will go about to the northwards of Holy land, being come so fare that the east end of Holy land come to be south and south and by east from you, sail then freely unto the Scholvers point, 
Scholvers point.  that is a flat point, which you may sound in five, six, and seven fathom. If so be that you will run in eight fathom off from it, you shall run above two great leagues from the shore. The right fareway betwixt the Hever and Holy-land is not more than nine or ten fathom deep. When you come about the point to the road, and that Scholvers point lie north-east, and the Rock south-west from you, there is good lying in five fathom.  
Scholvers point is the point where the South Haven 
South-haven.  lieth within, which lieth from the high land about east into sea. From the outermost end of Scholvers point lieth a bank of three fathom, unto the point where the Monk alsoo standeth, within it is very good lying for ships of little draught, that is called the south Haven of Holyland. A southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh there the highest water.   

Of the Elve.  
The Road of Holy land, and the outermost buy of the Elve (called the Schortunne or the Steep-buye) lie right southeast and by east and northwest and by west 8 leagues asunder, which lieth right to the northwards of the Schorhorn, that is the outermost point of the New-workes ground, on the south side of the Elve, the right deep of the Elve runneth in alongst to the northwards of it. On the north side of the Elve lie the north ground, which lie somewhat flat far off to seawards upon the northwest side. The south end of the northgrounds, 
Mirdle of Vogelsand  called Voghelsand, runneth from the foresaid buy a good ways west and by north into sea, with a narrow tail of perfect hard sand, about a half league broad, which waxeth by little and little the farther from the shore the deeper. Three leagues from the foresaid buy, there is upon it eleven fathom water, when you sail on north from the steep-buye, you run over it in three fathom, or three fathom and a half, but it doth soon deep again in five, seven, eight & ten fathom, soft ground, that is in the creek of the North Elve. 
North-Elve.  To the southwards of that a foresaid Voghelsand, in the right fareway of the Elve (for him that cometh from the westwards) it is also somewhat soft ground, and fourteen and thirteen fathom deep, to the southwards of it, towards the souther or Steep grounds, the ground is again very hard, and the grounds very steep, you may not come nearer them (especially by night or dark weather) then in eleven or twelve fathom, if you come nearer to them, you might sail foul of the wester Till, or Souther-Broad-Balgh, which runneth up to the southwards into the grounds to nothing.  
When you come from the westwards, and sail to the Elve, you shall find betwixt Holyland and the Weser, and thereabouts somewhat to the eastwards, depth of twenty fathom, until that you come well half ways to Holyland, toward the Steenebuye, than it doth begin to shoal from eighteen to sixteen and fourteen fathom, close by the Steep buy it is twelve fathom deep.  
If you come by night alongst by the steep or southergrounds, with a southerly wind in twelve or thirteen fathom, and go on east and by north, you shall at last meet with the shoaling of the New-workes-grounds, right to the northwards of the Hondtbalgh in eight and seven fathom, there you must then let fall your anchor, for to stay for the day, and you shall find yourself not fare from the buy. With northerly winds you must anchor further from the south shore in the foresaid shoaling in eleven or twelve fathom.  
To the northwards of the foresaid narrow tail, or shoaling, which lieth off from Vogelsand, runneth in a great bite or Slenck into the norther grounds, called the Norther Elve, 
Nor●●●r-Elve.  it is in the going in somewhat within so broad that you may there in turn to windewardes, but within it runneth narrow and sharp too; and at last to nothing, (ending almost against the whitebuye, which lieth upon the Elve, upon the tail of the New-grounds) it is going in more than half ways thirteen and twelve fathom deep, and soft ground, very much like the right Elve. It happeneth oftentimes by dark wether that the shippers (thinking that they are entered into the right Elve) run in there, sometimes with danger, especially with westnorthwest winds, for they must come out there back again. When you sail off from Holyland on eastsoutheast, you shall have depth of twelve or thirteen fathom, being a league off from it, that you lose the white cliff out of your sight, than you shall get one eve depth of thirteen fathom, and soft ground, all alongst until you come within the foresaid north Elve. When you shall perceive that you are entered in there, you may (when the New-worke is more southerly than southeast and by south from you) run alongst over the tail of Vogelsand in five fathom, and so come against the Steep-buye upon the right Elve.  
For to set sail by night from the road of Holyland, the course is southeast and by east, than you shall run over the foresaid tail of Vogelsand in seven and eight fathom, and somewhat hard sandy ground. If you then run a little more southerly, you shall get again twelve and thirteen fathom and somewhat soft ground, that is the right deep or channel of the Elve betwixt Vogelsand and the steep-grounds. If you run then more southerly, you shall get again somewhat hard ground of the souther grounds, which are (as hath been here be foresaid) very steep and hard, when you come near them in twelve or eleven fathom, you must edge off again from them unto twelve or thirteen fathom, and alongst by them towards the steepe-buye, unto the foresaid shoaling of the New-workes grounds, and there stay for the day light.  
When you come by day from Holy-land or from the westwards, and that you get New-worke in sight of you bring that and the Cape one in the other, and sail so right in with them, than you shall find the steepe-buye, which lieth (as hath been already said) towards the south land on the side of the Schorhorne the outtermost point of the New-grounds in ten or eleven fathom. From the Steep-buye to the Kool-buye, that is, the second buy, the course is due east, which lieth in eight fathom. Upon the New-work stand three country men's houses, the middlemost of them, and the steeple of the New-worke come one in the other when you come to the second buy. The third buy lieth in six fathom, from the Kool-buye east and by north somewhat easterly, but nearest east and by north. The fourth lieth in five fathom from the third, east and by north. Betwixt these buys a little within the third, runs a deep Creek eastsoutheast into the New-workes-grounds, called the Kinder-balgh, 
Kinder-balgh.  which is wide at the entering in, and at half flood well nine fathom deep; but runneth at length altogether dry to nothing. He that cometh running alongst by the southgrounds, might lightly get in there, therefore the third buy lieth a little further off from the south shore, because men should avoid that Creek. Betwixt the third and fourth buy on the north side of the deep lieth a white buy in three fathom, upon the tail of the New-ground, 
New-Grounds.  which men might sail within, when they come inwards, that you must leave on larboard side, and all the black buys on the starboard side.  
The foresaid white buy and the New-worke lie northnortheast and southsouthwest one from the other, to the eastwards of it the north side is very steep. The fifth buy lieth in 3 fathom and a half, or 4 fathom, and lieth from the fourth full east.  
The sixth buy, that is the point buy, lieth in six fathom from the fourth and fifth due east. In the right deep to the northwards of these foresaid black buys from the Kool-buy to the point buy in the right fareway, it is all alongst six and seven fathom deep. From the point buy to the buy in the Rosse, the course is southeast which lieth in seven or eight fathom, when the Ros beacon cometh to the little steeple of Gron or Groen, than you are thwart of this buy. Half ways betwixt the point buy, and the buy in the Rosse, lieth yet another buy on the south side, which is there betwixt them both exceeding steep and needle too. Right east southeast from the point buy over against the buy in the Rosse, somewhat further inwards, lieth a white buy upon the tail of Romaerl plate, which men might at unawares sail within, in four or five fathom when they sail upwards. When the little sharp steeple of Word cometh to the westwards of Oldenbroek (that is a church with two spires upon one steeple) than they are south from you, from thence inwards you may sound Romaerl plate in six fathom without danger, otherwise it is on the off-side very steep. From the Ros beacon to Bruns buttell are fiv● leagues, betwixt the buy in the Rosse, and the buy upon Romaerl plate gins a sand lying right in the midst alongst the fareway about two leagues long, called Pilgroms-sand, upon it is alongst no more than two fathom water, or a little more, upon it lie three black buys, and over against it on the north side, two white buys, you must sail through betwixt them, alongst to the northwards of that sand, being past it, you shall come upon the flat. There lie yet two buys which you must leave also on the starboard side in sailing up, before you come to Bruns buttell. All the depths here before mentioned, are reckoned at half flood.  
From Bruns buttell to the buy upon Salfhorne, or Friburger-sand, the Course is east, and east and by north alongst by the north-land. From Salts-horne to the buy against the Steur east and by south, & eastsoutheast, from the Steur to the buy upon Gringer-oortssand southeast, and southeast and by east, that lieth against Bilenburg more than half ways in the deep. Betwixt this buy and the buy upon the Steur lieth another buy in the fareway. From the buy of Gringeroort to the buy upon Stader-sand southeast and by south, and southsoutheast. This buy you must leave on the starboard side. From Stader-sand to Willems-fliet, or the buy upon the Luye it is southeast, and southeast and by south, and from thence to the buy upon Terloo eastsoutheast. From thence to the buy upon Hanneball, the course is east and west. From Hanneball to the buy upon Blanckenes sand east and east and by north, you must keep that buy right with a great tree, and then run alongst by the north land until you be passed the buy.  
From Blancknesse sand unto the buy in the bite, the course is eastsoutheast, & from thence unto the Eeckhout east and by north in the right channel it is there 3 or 4 fathom deep, there lie the great ships for to lad & unlade.   

The Eyder.  
Six leagues to the northwards of the Elve lieth the Eyder, with many shoals lying fare out without the land chiefly and most on the south side, on the north side of the deep alongst by the land of Eyderstee lieth a long sand called the Broad-back, or New-grounds, on the south side lie Blavoort, the Iron Hendrick, the Hound and Hecksand. To the southwards of Blavoort, & the Iron Hendrick, about a league to the southwards of the mouth of the Eyder, goeth yet a Deep in called the North pipe, where men may sail in, and come out again by the Hound upon the Eyder. In this Eyder lie on the south side of the Deep seven black buys, which you must leave all (in sailing in) on the starboard side, and on the north shore, which you must leave on the larboard side. The outermost buy lieth from the steep buy right north, and from Holy-land east or a little mo●e northerly seven or eight leagues. When you fall with the land with that course you shall espy to the northwards of the Eyder, upon the land of Eyderstee, a sharp steeple indifferent high, called Gardingen, bring that over or to the south side of the little sand-hils lying on the north side of the Eyder, called the Southerheads, they shall then stand from you north-east and by north, or a little more easterly, sail right in with them so, & you shall fall with outermost buy, when that then the sharp steeple of Weslinburen, standing to the southwards of the Eyder in the land of Ditmarsen cometh to be east or a little more southerly from you, than you have the length of the foresaid buy, & then S. Peter's Church upon the Eyderstee to the westwards of Gardingen, not fare from the sea side, shall stand from the northn. east. Thus, or coming out of the south-west upon the foresaid marks of Gardingen, and the Southerheads, you shall run over the shoal of Blavoort, which men do call alsoo the tail of the Hound, lying off from Blavoort almost half ways to Holy-land. It is also by some called Blavoort, or coming from the northwards, bring the foresaid steeple of Weslinburen east or a little more southerly from you, & sail so right in until that Gardingen cometh to the foresaid southerheads, or that S. Peter's church be northnortheast from you, in doing so you shall not miss also the outermost buy. From the outermost buy to the second, third & fourth, it is all one course eastsoutheast the second lieth upon the shoalest of the channel at low water in 16 foot, the the third in 4 fathom, and the fourth in 5 fathom.  
These three last lie alongst the north side of Blavoort, on the south side of the deep. In sailing in. You must leave them all on the starboard side, & run alongst to the northwards of them. From the fourth to the fifth, that is, the buy upon the Hound, the course is east, which lieth thwart of the Hound, on a point which lieth off from Heckesand, which in coming in, men might at unawares sail within alongst to the southwards of the buy, therefore you must leave that also (as well as the former) on the starboard side, and sail alongst to the northwards of it. Betwixt this foresaid buy upon the Hound and the fourth, lieth another buy upon the north side of the deep, upon the southermost point of the New-grounds, which you must leave on the larboard side, & run about to the southwards of it. From the buy upon the Hound to the sixth, the course is northnortheast, and two fathom deep. From the sixth to the seventh and last buy north-east and by north, and the deep alongst to the northwards of it three fathom. Being past the last buy, follow the beakons, which stand alongst on the north shore, until you come to Bulk, run close alongst to the southwards or to the eastwards of them, for to avoid a tail of sand, which cometh off from the east shore, which men might unawares sail within into a Dead-creeke. From the Bulk to Schulperzile, the course is east southeast. In that reach, the beakons stand on the south side upon the Ballast-plate, and you must run alongst to the northwards by them, leaving them on the larboard side. From Schulperzile to Tonningen the course is northnortheast. Before Tonningen the Eyder is at the shoalest, and at low water no deeper than one fathom and a half. From thence further in towards the Newtown called Frederick stadt, there is depth enough.  
The depths here before mentioned are all to be understood at low water. From Tonningen towards Wollersum, the Eyder lieth alongst north-east and by east. From Wollersum towards Harebleck northnorthwest. From Harebleck towards Reymers-bode north-east. From Reymers-bode towards Nyenzyle eastsoutheast. From Nyenzyle to the Nyen-veere south.  
Betwixt the fourth buy upon the Eyder and the fifth, that is, the buy upon the Hound, over against the buy upon the southermost point of the New-grounds, stand two beakons a little to the southwards of the foresaid two buys, the westermost upon the east point of the Blavoort, or the Iron Hendrick, and the eastermost upon the tail of the Hound. Betwixt these two beakons goeth in through a deep southeast or southeast and by east, where you may sail through alongst by the beakons upon the Iron Hendrick (which you must leave then on the starboard side) until you come into the end of the North-pipe, which lieth from thence about west into sea. You may sound in at the North-pipe, coming in out of the sea by the south shore in 3 & 4 fathom, until you come to the foresaid beakons, & then about by them northwest, or somewhat more westerly up unto the Eyder, or else you may run further alongst by the foresaid south shore, until you come about the beacon upon Hoedmeersand, and then forth betwixt the Island Bulheads and Buysen alongst by the Beakons upon Hoedmeersand, with many points and bights on to the southwards, and come out at last upon the Old Elve, about north-east from the New-work against the New-grounds, which is not well to be sailed, but of those that are there very well acquainted.  
Alongst by the North shore of the Eyder, close to the southwards of the little sand-hills, the southerheads, runneth in yet a Land-deepe, east and east and by north in, & cometh out again upon the Eyder by the Bulk, that serveth but only for small ships, there remaineth at low water but five foot.   

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
Before the Scholbalgh, the Lauwers and the Schille, & before the Western-Eems a southeast and northwest Moon maketh high water.  
Before Embden and Delszyle a north or north & by east and a south or south and by west Moon.  
In the Eastern-Eems & Burckumbalgh a southsoutheast and northnorthwest Moon.  
Before the Channels betwixt the Eastern-Eems & the Weser, a south & south & by east, & a north & north & by west Moon.  
In the fareway betwixt the Fly & the Elve, the foreflood cometh out of the north sea, & turneth about by little and little with the sun, falling the half tide eastnortheast alongst the shore, & the ebb westsouthwest.  
Before the Weser and Elve, and alsoo in the Eyder a south and north Moon maketh high water. The flood cometh there out of the northwest, & the ebb out of the southeast, and fall very strong over the grounds that lie out there.  
Under Holyland a northnortheast & southsouthwest Moon maketh full sea.   

Of the Depths about these places, and in what depths men may see the land.  
Schiermonickoogh men may see in 12 & 13 fathom 4 great leagues without the land.  
Rottum & Borckum men may see in 14 & 15 fathom.  
Thwart of Borckum the ground is gross red sand, mingled with some black.  
Juyst, men may see in 13 and 14 fathom, 3 leagues without the land it is 12 fathom deep.  
Buys & Norderny men may see from the Poop in 12 & 13 fathom.  
Baltrum Langeroogh & Wrangeroogh, men may see it in 14 and 15 fathom.  
Thwart of Botjadigerland, Reidingerland & Ditmarsen, the grounds lie so fare without the land, that you cannot see the coasts, except you climb be up into the top.  
About Holyland it is deep 7, 8, and 9 fathom, to wit, on the inner side, but without on the west side 15, 16, 18, & 19 fathom, in such depth you may see the land of Holy-land from the westwards.   

Courses and Distances.  

The coast alongst these Islands lieth eastnortheast and westsouthwest.  
From Borckum-Riffe to Wrangeroogh east north-east 17 leagues.  
From the Eastern-Eems or Juyst-riffe to the Steep-buye or Schortunne eastnortheast. 20 leagues.  
From the Eems to Flambrough-headwest somewhat northerly 77 leagues.  
From the Eems to Bovenbergen north & buy. 57 leag.  
From the Eems to Holyland the course is north-east and north-east and by east 21 or 22 leagues.  
From Wrangheroogh to the New-worke eastnortheast 8 leagues.  
From the outermost buy upon the Elve to the Eyder, north 7 or 8 leagues.  
From La●gheroogh to Holy-land, northnortheast ten leagues.  
Holyland & the outermost buy in the Weser lie north somewhat easterly, and south somewhat westerly. The buy upon the Head in the Weser, and Holyland lie north and south asunder. 8 leagues.  
The steep-buye on the New-work & Holyland lie south east and by east, and northwest and by west asunder 8 leagues.  
The outtermost Buy in the Eyder & Holy-land, lie east somewhat northerly, and west somewhat southerly asunder 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Holyland to the Holms before Jarmouth, the course is westsouthw. or somewhat more westerly 72 leag.  
From Holyland to Scarbrough & Flambrough head, west or somewhat more southerly 88 leagues.  
From Holyland to Tinmouth, or Newcastle, west somewhat 
Pascaerte Vande West en Oost-zyde van JUTLANDT, Als meed De Belt Mitsgaders De Zee-cust van Holster. Mekelenborg. en de Eylanden van Lalandt. Falster. end Meun.  what more northerly 106 leagues.  
From Holyland to Leeth in Scotland, west and by north & somewhat more northerly 120 leagues.  
From Holy-land to Boecknes northwest and by west 128 leagues.  
From Holy-land to Hanghlip in Hitland northwest 169 leagues.  
From Holyland to Bovenbergen, n. & by w. 43 leagues.  
From Holyland to the Horn, or Dodebergh, north 25 leagues.  
From Holyland to Knuytsdeep, or Ryperdeep, the course is north and north and by east 20 leagues.  
From Holyland to the Deep of Silt, or List, north & by east 17 leagues.  
From Holyland to Ameren, or Small-deep, the course is northnortheast somewhat easterly 10 leagues.  
From Holyland to the outermost buy in the Hever, north-east 8 leagues.  
When you lie by the outermost buy in the Hever, in clear weather, you may see Holyland.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Thus showeth Schiermonckoogh, being 2 leagues thwart off from you.  
Borckum Rottum.  
Thus showeth Borckum and Rottum, when you sail alongst by them, being two leagues a seaboard the Land.  
Thus showeth the Island juyst, being about 2 leagues off from you.  
Norderny. Buys.  
Thus show the Islands Buys, and Norderny, being two leagues thwart off from you.  
Th● riseth Baltrum, when you are about two leagues a seaboard the land.  
Langeroogh showeth itself thus, when you are about two leagues off from it.  
Thus showeth Spykeroogh, when it is about two leag. from you.  
Thus showeth Wrangeroogh when it is about two leagues thwart off from you.  
Holyland north-east & by east 5 leagues from you, showeth itself thus.  
White cliff.  
Holyland north-east and by east from you showeth thus.  
Thus showeth the New-land, or New-worke when you are at the entering of the Elve.     

The third Demonstration, Where in Are deciphered the Seacoasts of the west and east side of jutland: together with the Belt until you are past Laland and Langeland.  
FRom the New-worke, or Steepe-Buy to the Hever, the course is north ten leagues, when you come about half ways betwixt them both, you shall meet with the foresaid sand or tail of Blavoort in the depth of two or three fathom. In this fareway you must be very careful of your tides, that you come not upon the grounds, which lie far out a seaboard the Land, the foreflood falleth there very strong thwart over the grounds towards the land, and the ebb to the contrary.  
For to sail from Holyland to the Hever, go on north-east somewhat easterly, or according as the wind and tide shall be, and run towards the grounds, until you come in six or seven fathom, and then you shall espy a steeple which is sharp, and indifferent high, called Pielworme, bring that north-east & by north from you, a masts length to the southwards of the southermost Cowhouse, upon the little Island Nuball, keep that so standing, and sail towards it, and you shall so find the outermost buy, from that to the second buy, go on north-east and north-east and by east; being come to it, Pielworme steeple shall stand northnortheast from you. From the second buy alongst inwards, the course is north-east and by east. Being come in so a good ways, you shall find two beakons on the starboard side, upon a dry sand, called the Quade, there over against cometh the north balgh in the right Hever. From the first beacon to the second & third, the course is east and by north, sail all alongst by the beakons, leaving them on the starboard side. To the northwards of them betwixt the first and third beacon, it is full of sands and plates, where you might at unawares sail within. By the third beacon cometh the souther ba●gh into the Hever. From that third beacon to the two other beakons the course is north-east and by east, being past that you shall come by the green land on the starboard side, there it is a square deep, large and bro●d channel, from thence you may sail alongst amidst the channel unto Hoesem at the bridge, or anchor thereabouts every where, where you will.  
Without in the Hever the north side is steep, therefore keep the south side until you come within the beakons, in the channel is at half flood two fathom and a half water, and without the channel it is very fare flat. Somewhat without the Hever lieth also a bank, whereof men must be careful when they will sail in there. A south and north Moon maketh there the highest water.  
The south balgh goeth into the southwards of the foresaid bank the Quade, in right with the little Island Utto, and alongst to the northwards of it, it is from without a league and a half to sail to Utto. From Utto it lieth in alongst north-east and by north, and cometh out into the Hever by the third beacon.  
The north balgh lieth in to the northwards of the Hever about east and by north, or west and by south from Pielworme, right in with the foresaid little Island Nuball, which you must leave on the larboard side running in along by it, and so come into the Hever, against the foresaid dry sand, the Quade: you may also (coming in at the north balgh) sail up to the northwards from the Island Nuball unto the end of Strand, till you come thwart of a flat Church, and anchor there behind the shoals, that is a deep balgh or Creek.  

Small deep.  
Three or four leagues to the northwards of the Hever, lieth the Small-deep. For to sail off from Holy-land toward it, go on north-east and by north, and run to the grounds, about west and by north, from the Pielworme, the south end of Ameren shall then be north or thereabouts from you. Seek then to the south grounds, and sound about by them, and there you cannot do amiss, it is flat rising ground fare without the land. On the north side lie many sands, shoals and points, that lie out, which men might (without good heed-taking) sail within: sail in therefore alongst by the south side north and by east, northnortheast, and north-east and by north, and so you shall find one shoal or breach, leave that on the larboard side. If you leave that on the starboard side, you should run into a dead Balgh or Creek, wherein is at the first at least 7 fathom depth, but runneth at last by little and little to nothing: you may also run alongst by that foresaid shoal by your lead, until you come within it, coming then thwart of the south end of Ameren, you might unawares sail within the south grounds behind a snare which shooteth off from the grounds of Vooren, therefore keep the south side until that you come thwart of the Island Vooren.   

The Red-deepe.  
For to sail in at the Red or Silter-deepe, coming from the northwards, or out of the sea, run in sight of the Island Ameren. About the midst of Ameren lieth a white round hill, a little higher than the other Hommocks in a low plain valley. Bring that north-east from you, and run in so right with it, until you come within the riffe that shooteth off from the Voortrap, and commonly is called Amerens Borne, 
●meren-Borne.  and so you cannot take any hurt of it, and then you shall have upon the point of the Riffe not less than three fathom water, and within the same riffe eleven, twelve, or thirteen fathom. Sail so in until that the north end of Amerens be north and by east from you, and then run right with the north end of Ameren, until you come within the dry sand, and there you may anchor where you please, or sail so fare in as you will, and sound it all alongst by the Riffe.  
The Strand of Ameren is a fair Strand without any tails that men might sail within. When the foresaid hill upon Ameren is eastnortheast from you, and sail so right with it, than you run too near the foresaid Riffe of Silt, the hill is then also in two parts, the northermost is then the smallest.  
For to sail in at the Red-deepe, or Silter-deepe, coming off from Holyland, and that you have gotten sight of the land, then bring the north end of Ameren north and by east from you, until that you be come in betwixt Amerens, and the Riffe of Silt, run then in alongst by the Strand of Ameren, until you come about the north point of Amerens and so along to the eastwards, until that Ameren lie south and southsouthwest from you. You may not sail into this channel further to the eastwards, for than you come against the Island of Vooren but you may sail to the northwards alongst betwixt Vooren and Silt, till you come before Lit. In Silter-deepe is upon the shoalest three fathom water, being over it, there is again eight, nine, ten, and twelve fathom, there lie two riffs, or bad sands, the one about westsouthwest from Amerens dry above water, that is, very fare flat, to wit, in three, four, or five fathom, it is called of the Juthes the Borne, or Ameren-Borne, although that it be not fast to Ameren, for the Red-deep goeth in betwixt them both. It is not also fast unto the Voortraps, or that south end of Silt, although it cometh shooting off from it, betwixt them goeth out into sea a deep of about a fathom and a half, where the fishermen do daily go out through for to fish, especially those of the Island Vooren, this is the outermost sand that lieth on this coast. They that use this coast much; either for Rypen, or the quarters thereabouts are very much afraid for this Ameren-Borne when they come off from Holyland, they find this shoal about westsouthwest from Ameren.  
The other sand shooteth off from the south end of Ameren, lying about south, and south and by west into sea alongst the Land, that is also called by many the Born, or Ameren-Born. He that cometh off from Holyland, and is bound to the northwards, need not fear so much for the shoal, for it shooteth out most by the land.   

The Haven of List.  
About eight leagues to the northwards of Silter-deep lieth the Haven of List, which runneth in by the north end of the Island Silt. For to sail in there, coming from the southwards, run so long to the northwards in six or seven fathom, that you may see a little Island without the point (which lieth within these outer Islands) upon which standeth a house, called jeurtmans' house: when that house cometh a mast length without the point of List, then go in east and by south, and eastsoutheast, keep those marks so standing, until that you be within the point off List, edge then up to the southwards about the point and anchor before the Vuchts house, there it is nine and ten fathom deep. At the entering of the channel lieth a plate or sand, called Haefsand, 
Haefsand.  that you shall leave on the larboard side, when you come in, it is on the off-side very flat, and good for to sound when you come from the northwards. For to avoid that when you come from the northwards, edge off so far from the shore, that the red Cliff come without the sand-hills, or that you may see it plainly: Then you may go well over Haefsand, with a ship that is not of a very great draught. Likewise when you come out at the channel of List, and are bound to the northwards, sail so fare out that you may see the Cliff, and then you may go over the foresaid sand, which lieth from the south end of Rem a good ways into sea.  
On the south side of the channel of List lie also two sands or banks alongst the shore not very fare without the strand, the innermost or northermost is called Barling-sand 
Barling sand.  and the outermost, Rust, or Rusting, 
Rust, or Rusting.  that lieth to the southwards almost thwart of the red Cliff, betwixt these sands, and the strand of Silt goeth in the Land deep. For to sail in there coming from the southwards, you must seek betimes to the strand of List about the red cliff, because of the Rust which lieth off from the north end of List a little without the strand. When that you have the sounding of the shore, and are come somewhat within that red cliff, there shall meet you a flat from the shore, which you must somewhat avoid, and then you may sound very well: keep all alongst the foot strand, there you can take no hurt of it. From the Inner point of List shooteth off alsoo a little riffe, where of you must take heed. When that you are come within the Innermost point of List, than you may anchor where you please. If you will go to Lutke Tonderen, then leave that sand (which lieth to the southwards of juresand) on the starboardside, and run through betwixt them both. He that is bound to Hoesem or Silt over the Wad must leave that sand on the larboard side. Upon Vooren stand two or three trees, these you must keep over the westermost church or steeple, and run so alongst unto Vooren.  
Betwixt the Rust and Barling-sand goeth a fair deep channel through called the New deep, right in alongst to the southwards of Rocksand, 
Rocksand  that is a shoal which lieth to sea-wards of Rust and Barling-sand. For to sail in at that Newdeepe, bring the white cliff upon Silt east, and east and by north from you and run in so right with it, and you shall fall right in the Newdeep betwixt these two banks, leaving Rocksand or the Maber on the larboard side of you, run in so alongst by Rust, but come also no nearer to it then in four fathom, until that you come into the Landdeep, but coming against the shore, and getting shoaling of the strand, run in alongst by the footstrand on inwardes, as is rehearsed in the description of the Landdeep.  
Betwixt Haefsand, or Haes-sand, and the Island of Rem goeth in yet a little Land deep of about a fathom & a half water. The Island Rem is three leagues long, and very flat on the off-side, so that you shall scarce see that land in 6 or 7 fathom.  

Bank of at sea.  About eight or nine leagues a seaboard of the Island Silt lieth another bank along the shore of eight or 9 fathom, and is about two leagues long, about so long as the Island is. Betwixt this Bank and the Island it is thirteen fathom deep, being in nine fathom a sea-board the Island Silt, then lieth Holyland about south from you.   

Knuytsdeep, or Riperdeep.  
From the channel of List to Knuyts or Ryperdeep the course is north and south about seven leagues, but Ryper-deepe & Holyland lie north somewhat westerily, and south somewhat easterly one from the other, for to sail into Knuyts or Ryperdeep coming from the southwards, run about by the flat of Rem and Manu towards the south end of Phanu, called souther head, or Souther-heigh, and so you shall see two C●pes upon a dry sand, somewhat to the southwards of Southerhead bring those Capes a little through one another, to wit the innermost or longest a little or a h●ndspikes length to the northwards of the shortest or outermost, and then they shall stand eastnortheast from you, keep them so standing, and sail right in with them, and so you shall find the outermost buy, lying on the north shore in four fathom in the channel, called Old Ruper-deepe, leave that buy on the larboard side, and then go inwards east and by north, east, and east and by south unto the second buy, you must run also about to the southwards of it, for thwart of it cometh a shoal shooting off from the north shore, from the outermost Cape towards the second buy, which you must avoid.  
Or keep the sounding of the south shore called Coersand, 
Coersand.  and run by your lead first east and by north, than east, and at last east and by south in by it, you shall find there upon the shoalest not less than ten foot at low water and common tide; there within it is again 6, 7, and 8 fathom deep. Being past the Capes, then luffe up to the northwards, about the sand where the Capes stand upon, and anchor there where you please, there it is wide and broad, and also deep and steep, so that there you can take no hurt. The Ryper ships that are bound out, do lie there for to stay for a wind. Behind the Island Manu it is 6 and 7 fathom deep, there also men may ride, from thence you may go up the deep to Rypen, but not up alongst to Ripe with great ships, close to Rypen the deep endeth, so that there is a shoaleneck betwixt both, where there is no more than 6 foot depth. With small ships you may also sail about behind Rem towards jursand, there is a low water about 7 foot water.  
Coming from the northwards for to sail into Ryper-deepe, you shall also run on to the south end of Phanu, until that you shall espy the foresaid Capes, and go then further as is above taught. This channel is not the best channel in foul weather, for it is narrow and fare off shoal wihout it: but when you shall be entered into it, you may easily see both sides break, if it blow any thing hard.  
A southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh here the highest water.   

The Growedeepe.  
About north-east, or north-east and by north from the north end of Phanu lieth a little Hill, called Luysbergh: a little to the northwards of it lieth a long plain sandhill, called Langeleg: from thence lieth the land towards Zuyder-zyt westnorthwest and eastsoutheast.  
Betwixt the north point of Phanu & Langeleg 
Langeleg  goeth in that Growe-deep. For to sail in there when you come from the southwards, run alongst the Island Phanu, and about by the north end of it (which is fare flat.) When as that you get deeper water, you shall see three or four hommocks about north-east from you, upon the high land with a little flat steeple, called Holm, or Bruynum. Bring that little Church a cables length to the northwards of the Hommocks, go in then north-east, and keep the south shore, until you come within that dry sand, which shooteth off from Phanu, called Smeursand, 
Smeursand.  you may run to that upon your sight without doing amiss, but leave that on the starboard side when you come in. The shores are there abouts both of them very steep, as well Wisdike, (that is the Plate which lieth in the channel) as also Smeursand, but without the shores are flat. When you are passed the point of Smeursand, edge then over to Wisdike, and anchor there until that you have the lowest water, and then you may sail to Hartingen, and go on forth to Wardt, 
Wardt.  or Woerdt, which lieth eight or nine leagues within the land, the river is very crooked; upon the which here and there lieth a Gentleman's house.  
A southsouthwest & northnortheast moon maketh there the highest water, and there it floweth with a common tide about a fathom up and down.  
From Phanu to Schellingkroegh 
Schellingkroegh.  it is four leagues, betwixt them lieth Zuyder-zyt a little river of eight or nine foot water. The land betwixt Langeleg and Zuyder-zyt is ragged land with sand-hilles, and rough, being grown with spirie grass, or heath. If you should fall with the land at Zuyder-zyt, 
Zuyder-zijt.  and that you could not lead it into the channel, then choose the land of Langeleg, you may run to it without danger, keep in two fathom and a half, and you cannot sail amiss of this Kroegh: sor you may sound this land all alongst in two fathom and an half off from Langeleg until you come within Schellinghkroegh, but if you run in three fathom or three fathom and a half, you shall sail without the driesand, and run about a seaboard of the forenamed Kroegh. Schellinghkroegh lieth in most northwest men lie there within, sheltered for all winds, like as men do lie at Coningsborough in the Kettell. If so be that you come from the northwards, and are bound into this Haven or Kroegh, you may run about by that dry sand in three fathom, when you come by the innermost point of that dry sand, there shooteth off a little tail of sand, but you may see it well, and keep yourself from it: when you come to the east end of that sand, luffe up about it, until you come into that Kroegh, and anchor there in two fathom and a foot, it is there very wide, you may make there a good board, and turn it in to windwards. A southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh there the highest water, the farther you come to the northwards to jutland, the less tide goeth, and the less it floweth up and down.  
At the north end of the foresaid dry sand lieth the Doodenbergh, 
Doodenbergh.  that is a short hommock of a Sandhill, which lieth alone. When you are somewhat off from it, than it lieth under the other land, that you cannot see it, when you come from the southwards or the northwards you may see it. From the Doodenberg unto that south end of the dry sand, it is all alongst a fair strand, and flat ground. For to ride under the dry sand, you may sound about it coming from the northwards, and get smooth water for a northwest wind, and also for westerly winds.  
A little to the northwards of the Doodenbergh lieth the point called the Horn betwixt Zuyder-zyt and Wester-zyt making there a Horn of the land: to the southwards of it the Coast lieth eastsoutheast and westnorthwest towards the Growedeepe: to the northwards of it north, and south towards Wester-zyt. Wester-zyt is a village lying betwixt the Blawenbergh and the Horn.  
About this point or Horn runneth off a long bank about twelve leagues westsouthwest into sea: called Reefshorne, 
Reefshorne.  or as some do name it Devillhorne, which lieth at some places altogether dry, specially seven or eight leagues from the shore, where it is not deeper than two fathom and a half, or three fathom a foot less. A ship that saileth upon it, men can but even see it from the land it is at the deepest by the land, to wit four fathom lacking a foot. He that cometh there from the northwards with a ship of a great draught must take very good heed, for it is upon the northwest side off steep, that men shall have one caste two and twenty, the next cast fifteen, and the third cast no more than three fathom.  
When you fall with the land with Wester-zyt or to the northwards of Reefshorne, you may sound alongst by the shore in six or seven fathom, until you come near the foresaid Horn: you shall then also find another shoal Riffe, that runneth off from the land, called the Owl, 
The Owl.  which is also very steep on the north side: from the northwards you may not come nearer it, then in seven fathom. A little to the southwards of it beginneth Reefshorne to run off from the shore, it is there a narrow bank, you shall not find there less than three fathom, or three fathom lacking a foot water, at two or three cast, according as it shall blow hard or soft, and that you shall make your way, and then you shall get presently again five fathom, and sound it about by that shoal sand, whether you desire to be.  
According to the opinion of some, Doggers-sand beginneth from this bank. When men set sail early in the morning out of Rinkopper deep, with a south-west way, and a good north-east wind than they are about four of the clock in the afternoon yet in nine fathom, whereby it should appear, that Doggers' Sand should have his beginning at this bank.  
For to know the land hereabouts: About four leagues to the northwards of the foresaid Horn lieth a high hill a little from the strand, called the Blawenbergh, going plain down on both sides, which is somewhat blacker than the other land, being grown with spyrie grass, to the southwards of this Blawenbergh lieth that fisher's village Wester-zyt, betwixt that village and the Horn lieth one Black hommock, and also a Gentleman's house, otherwise the land is altogether full of hommocks.   

Rinkopper deep.  
To the northwards of the foresaid Blawenbergh lie three or four low white Sand-hills, and by the haven of Numen also two great white Sand-hills close one by the other. To the northwards of these Sand-hills runneth in that Haven of Numen, the land lieth betwixt the haven of Numen, and the Doodenbergh, most south and north about 7 leagues, all alongst a fair strand: the best to be known of this Coast, is the foresaid Blawenbergh and these two foresaid white Sand-hills.  
For to sail into Rinkopperdeep 
Rinkopper deep  or the Haven of Numen run alongst by the land of West-zyt, in six or seven fathom, until that you come to the two foresaid great white Sand-hilles, and then you shall see upon a low land two capes, upon each of them standeth a barrel: Bring them one in the other, and then they shall stand north, or north and by east from you, sail in right with then, and you shall find a buy, excepit it be laid somewhere else. Right before the haven of Numen lieth a Sandplate, named Glad Jaep. 
Glad jaep.  For to sail into the souther channel, then leave that plate on the larboard side, and run in close by the south shore or foot strand (where the aforesaid white Sandhilles do lie upon) right with the Capes, and there you cannot do amiss, but run in boldly by it upon your lead, that is the very surest way of all to sail in alongst by the strand, when men are careful of the lead.  
Being past Gladde-Iaep, run then towards the north shore, you may sail about by it so close as you will, it is a low plain point, altogether clean and very steep. When you are come within this point, you may anchor where you please. This channel lieth in most north and north and by east, until you come within Glad jaep, and then somewhat more easterly towards the foresaid point. In this channel goeth an indifferent strong tide, because there lieth such a great sound within. It floweth there little up and down, no more than two foot and a half, with a common tide. A south-west and north-east Moon maketh there the highest water. Right to the northwards of Glad jaep runneth in another channel, but there is no more but eight foot water.  
Further within the Haven of Numen it is Pilots water, but ships that are not of great draught may well sail up, especially at a low water. The deep runneth alongst by the strand of Numis keeping alongst by it, you cannot do amiss: so soon as you go off from it, you shall be in danger to sail within the shores or tails, which lie off from the Wadt towards the land of Numit, therefore run close alongst by the foresaid strand of Numit so long, until that the little Church with a flat steeple (be about east from you against the high land of the Holm come to the south side of the highland: than you are within the tails and sands that lie out, leave then the strand, and go in northnortheast, and north-east and by north, until that a round hommock come close to the southwards, or right over a little blue Church upon the highland of the Holm. Go then in alongst north-east and by east until that the foresaid little blue Church commerh over a Gentleman's house, beneath in the low land, close to the water. sail then on north, and by little and little north and by east, until you come before Rinkoppen, it is there broad, large and wide, and the right deep two fathom and two foot.  
Rinkoppen and the haven's mouth of Numen lie four leagues asunder, one from the other.  
To the northwards of Rinkoppen goeth a little river into the land, upon which lie two little towns, seven or eight leagues in the land, the one named Hostebro and the other Huysbuy.  
A half league to the southwards of Boevenberghen goeth in yet another little haven inwardly out of the sea. named Trosmone, there stand two masts, you must keep them one in the other, and run so into it: there lieth a little village within called Trosmonde. From thence you may sail over the Wadt to Rinkoppen.  
This little haven is not to be reckoned for a Haven because sometimes it is cast too, and sometimes there may go in and out again Boats or Crayers and small ships.  
From Rinkopper Deep or the Haven of Numen to Boevenbergen the land lieth most north and south ten leagues, there is all alongst betwixt them both a fair strand, with white sand-hills, grown with spyrie grass.  
When you sail alongst by it, you may see the blue double land of Rinkoppen, (called the Holmes) alongst over this land.  
Betwixt Boevenberghen and the Reefhorne lie some banks of seven, eight and nine fathom, and also some that are deeper.  
Boevenberg 
Boevenbergh.  is a long smooth hill, having in the midst a high round hommock or hill, and upon that hill standeth a church with a steeple: when you come thwart to land with Boevenbergen, it showeth itself in three hills, the middlemost is the highest, upon which standeth the foresaid church, with a flat steeple: upon both sides of that hill stand also other churches, but they are not so high: you may see the land in thirteen and fourteen fathom, the ground is gross red sand with some little stones there in.  
When Boevenbergen is east north-east from you, it showeth itself in a long hill, with some dale in the midst on the northside, with a church, and also a church on the south side, & also another hill to the northwards of it.  
From Boevenbergen to the Holmes the land lieth northnortheast nine or ten leagues, betwixt them it falleth in with a Bite, it is blackland with hommocks, and sandhilles grown with spyrie grass, here and there standeth a flat steeple in the land.  
About five leagues from land lieth a bank of ten fathom, but it lasteth not long before you get again deeper water.  

The Riffe  Betwixt Boevenberghen and the Holmes lieth the great juttish Riffe west into sea, running over it in twelve or thirteen fathom, then lieth the Naze from you, northwest & by north 24 leagues, running over it in seventeen or eighteen fathom, you may see the land, on the north side it is gross sand, on the south side stony like as pease and beans.  
Westnorthwest from Boevenbergen about eight leagues it is sixteen fathom deep, gross stony sand ground: ten leagues from the land it is twenty fathom deep gross stony land, like to pease.  
Southwest and by west from Boevenbergen about nine leagues, it is 25 fathom deep, red and black sand ground that is the ground of Doggers' sand.  
The Holmes 
Holmes.  is a plain point, going down steep on the north-east side upon the midst of the hill standeth a square church without a steeple. When that highest of of the land is southsoutheast from you, and that you can but even see the north end of it, than it is fifteen fathom deep, gross rough sand, with some little stones amongst it.  
Two leagues north-east, or as some say, somewhat more easterly, off from the north point of the Holmes: to wit, betwixt the north point and the Holmes, and the easter point, lieth a stone bank (in manner as the Trindell of Lesolde) upon which there is no more than twelve foot water, so that there remaineth about two third parts of the water betwixt that Stonebanck and the north point, and the other third part betwixt the Easter point & the aforesaid Stonebanck: there have divers ships been lost upon it. The foresaid Easter point lieth about four leagues to the eastwards of the Holmes, & is also a high steep point, as if it where the Holmes. Right thwart of this caster point shooteth off a riffe almost a league off into sea, which you may sound about in seven fathom. Some say, that men may sail through betwixt that riffe and the land.  
From the Holmes to Robsnot or Robbeknuyt, the course is north-east nine or ten leagues.  
A little to the westwards of Robsnot in the bite towards the eastern point, nearest to Robsnot stand five churches with flat steeples. There lie also two blue lands, betwixt the easter point and Robsnot, in the high, you may see also a cloven hill or sandhill before you come to Robsnot. It is there all alongst a flat strand.  
To the eastwards of the Holmes goeth in a little river called Misdorp.  
A little to the westwards of that white cliff or of Robsnot goeth in also a little River, where upon lieth a little town called Werlom.  
Robsnot 
Robsnot.  or Robbeknuyt is a high round hill, upon the top where of standeth a church with a sharp steeple. The land falleth away to the eastwards from this point, with a great bite towards Hartshals.  
Thwart of Robsnot it is fare off slatt, fifteen fathom depth is almost three leagues from the shore.  
There also thwart of Robsnot about sour leagues from the shore lieth a bank of nine fathom, lying alongst the shore.  
Thwart of Robsnot lieth also a rock about a league from the land.  
From Robsnot to Hartshals 
Hartshals  it is north-east & by east four leagues, there standeth a flat steeple betwixt both, nearest to Robsnot, there you may see the high land of Lackley, alongst over that high land.  
Hartshals is a long smooth hill, which is at the east end somewhat steep.  
Thwart of Hartshals lieth a shoal or stony ground, about an English mile from the shore, upon which (as men say) there have been ships lost, but men do seldom come near it.  
From Hartshals to the Scawe 
The Scawe.  or Schagen the course is eastnortheast eight leagues.  
The land to the eastwards of Hartshals is altogether full of hommocks and sand-hills, you may see the high land of Lackley also alongst over this land. Alongst these coasts men find none such long plain hills, as are Boevenbergen, the Holmes, Hartshals and Robsnot.  
Somewhat within the point of the Scawe standeth a flat Church with a slat steeple, called Old Schagen, when that is southsoutheast from you, than there runneth off from the shore, a little spit or shoal, there you must edge somewhat off from the shore, otherwise it is all alongst a steep strand betwixt Hartshals and the Scawe, but you may sound about this little sand in four and five fathom, so near as you will.  
Upon the east end or outermost point of the Scawe, standeth a fire beacon, like a Cape to see too: when the Church is south-west and by west from you, then are the fire beacon and the steeple one in the other and then you are right thwart of the riffe of the Scawe, which lieth off from the point eastnortheast, and by north almost a league into sea.  
He that cometh from the westward, and will sail alongst by the land, about the Riffe, must especially be very careful in using the lead, he may take the sounding of the shore, so near as he will, according as the wind shall be, in eight, seven, six, five, four, and also well in three fathom, without doing amiss, he need not to fear: If he be but careful in using his lead, with a south-west wind, he may sail about it in three or four fathom.  
When the fire beacon cometh to the east side of the houses of the Scawe, than you come against the west side of the riffe, when the fire beacon and the Church are one in the other, than you are on the east side of the Riffe.  
When the fire beacon cometh about half ways the houses, nearest the west side, than you are right upon the point of the Riffe, what depth that you have then you shall keep it still, without finding it shoaler, whether you sail alongst southeast or northwest.  
He that cometh from the southwards, and is bound about the Scaw to the westwards may not sound the Riffe because the south side of it is steep & needle too, it is not good to come nearer to it then in twelve, thirteen, or fourteen fathom, especially by night or dark weather.  

Marks of the Scawe riffe.  For to know by certain marks, when you are clear of this Riffe, as well over the one side as the other, then mark, coming from the westwards, when the old church and the firebeakon are one in the other, than you come upon the westside of the Riffe: coming from the southwards or the eastwards, when the old Church cometh in the south end of the village, than you come upon the south side of the Riffe. When the steeple and firebeacon are south-west and by west from you, than they are one in the other, & then you are thwart of that Riffe. When the steeple is south-west and south-west and by south from you, than you are without, or to the westwards of that Riffe: when the steeple or firebeakon is westsouthwest and west and by south from you, than you are within the riffe. This you may set by night, by the compass, and so may perceive weather you be within or without that riffe, when the Firemaker doth fire well. You may anchor on both sides of the Riffe in seven or eight fathom, and have room enough to set sail. Some also say, that men may run through betwixt the riffe and the land: (If need require) in two fathom and a half.  

Tides out of the Belt.  Betwixt the Scaw and Maelstrand or Norway it is all soft ground, the nearer to Norway the deeper water. When men come out of the Sound, and are in the farewaie, and can get no ground in eighteen, twenty, and two and twenty fathom, that is a sign that they are about the riffe of the Scawe.  
When you come about the Scawe from the westwards, and are bound to the Sound or the Belt, you must take an especial care of the tide that cometh out of the Belt, which falleth commonly out of the Belt towards Norway, especially when the wind hath blown a while east or north-east, it can carry a ship by night or dark weather under Norway, before you should think of it, it did happen in the year 1605, the three & twentieth of May, that a ship coming thwart of the riffe of the Scawe, so that the riffe did lie south-west from her, did drive with calms in 8 hours, until she came within three leagues near to the land of north-east, about Harmenshooft five leagues to the westwards of Maelstrand, so great & strong a current there did shoot alongst by the riffe towards the north-east, although it doth seldom happen, that the tide doth run there so strong out, yet nevertheless it behooveth men to be very careful, to consider there of, and to reckon there upon.  
From the Scaw to Seabuye the course is south and by west six leagues, there it is upon the road four and five fathom deep. Betwixt the Scaw and Seabuye lie the small Helms four leagues from the Scaw, and two leagues to the northwards of Seabuye. When you will sail into the Belt, you must leave them on the starboard side, going on still south and by west until thwart of Seabuy, you may also sail through betwixt the Helms and the main land unto Seabuy, if you will, there is at the shoalest betwixt them 3 fathom water, but about a seaboard the Helms, betwixt the Helms & the north end of Lesou, it is four leagues broad, and in the channel ten fathom deep soft ground.  
The lying of the Helms, & how men shall come to anchor there, & also of all depths, shoal & dwale grounds, betwixt the Helms, the Scaw, and Lesou, together with the description of the Island Lesow and the riffs that lie out there about it is described before.  
Betwixt Lesou and Seabuy lie many false grounds, which are very uneven of three, four, five & six fathom the like uneven and shoal grounds, lie also within or to the southwards of Seabuy, of four, five and six fathom, but the right channel through betwixt the false grounds of Lesou; and the shoals of Seabuy is seven and eight fathom deep.  
To the southwards of the small Helms and Seabuy, nearer to the main land than Lesou, lie also some uneven dwale grounds, upon which there is no more water than 10, 11, and at some places 12 foot. He that draweth but 8 or nine foot need not fear of them. You may for a need run through the small Helms.  
From Seabuy to Aelburger deep, 
For to fail into Aelburger deep.  the course is south and by west nine leagues, upon the north side of the haven standeth a flat steeple called Hals, in the haven's mouth lieth a buy, and upon the southland stand two Capes, which you must bring one in the other, by them you shall find the buy, the channel lieth in first west and by south, about a cables length, than you must run up northwest and west right unto Hals, and run in by the north shore, until thwart of Hals from the south point of the land shooteth off a slat which you must avoid; being thwart of Hals you must go south-west and by west unto the bite, and in the crooked channel, you must shun the north shore somewhat and then again northwest and by west alongst by the north side, unto the second crooked, and then southsouthwest and afterwards westsouthwest unto the town, in the coming in by the buy, it is two fathom. But for to sail in there, it is best to take a Pilot. By the south shore goeth in also a little deep of six and seven foot.  
The town Aelburgh, lieth up in the land four leagues, within the river. Also there lieth alongst this coast to the westwards some banks, there you must shun the land somewhat.  
When you sail from the Helms to Stevenshead, through betwixt the dwale grounds and the flat of Seabuy, you shall meet with a shoal ground, about half ways betwixt Stevenshead and Seabuy or 5, 6 and 7 fathom. This shoal is called the Swetering, 
The Swetering,  & lieth about 3 leagues eastwards from Aelburgh deep, the channel there betwixt them is about ten or twelve fathom deep.  
From Aelburgh deep to Haselin, the course is southeast and by east about 20 leagues.  
From Aelburgh deep to Stevenshead 
Stevenshead.  the course is southeast and by south about nine leagues. There betwixt them the land lieth in a great Bay, wherein lie the two little towns Mariacker and Randersen: Mariacker lieth from Aelburgh deep south & south and by west four leagues, and from Stevenshead five leagues. Betwixt Mariacker 
Mariacker.  and Stevenshaven lieth the River of Randersen, 
Randersen.  which runneth up crooked fare in to the land, unto the little town Schandelburgh.  
Under the wood of Mariacker runneth a riffe from the shore, and stretcheth near to Stevenshooft by Mariacker near unto the shore it is 12 foot & further 3 and 4 fathom fair sandy ground, within the riffe it is 6 a half & 7 fathom soft ground a little without Stevenshooft it is stony ground but near the shore it is sandy ground.  
From Stevenshead to Haselin 
Haselin.  the course is eastsoutheast 13 leagues. Haselin is on the outer side full of shoals, riffs, and grounds. A larger description of Haselin and Anout as also of all the foul grounds and shoals, lying thereabouts, you shall find in the first Demonstration of this book.  
A little to the southwards of Stevenshead lieth a little town called Oruntbuy, 
Oruntbuy Chalck-grounds.  there lie the Chalck-grounds right before the river of Grimsound in a bay a little about the point of Stevenshead: that is a sand two or three foot water, but not far off it, it is ten fathom deep, you may sound them in four fathom. You may sail up in to Grimsound, unto Grimstee, that is a lading place for Huyes.  
From Stevenshead unto the great Helm 
Great Helm.  the course is southsouthwest about six leagues. The land lieth from Stevenshead unto the point of Ebeltud southsouthwest seven or eight leagues. Ebeltud is a little Town, lying within the land thwart of the great Helm. Betwixt the great Helm and jutland it is six and seven fathom deep. Close by Stevenshead, and the point of Ebeltud it is eight, nine and also ten fathom deep. The great Helm hath two riffs, one upon the north-east side, and the other upon the south-west side.  
From Stevenshead to Siero the course is southsoutheast and south east and by south nine leagues. Between Siero and Stevenshooft lie some shallows but near Stevenshooft there upon it is 3 and 4 fathom deep.  
From the southeast point of Syero lieth off a riffe towards Rusnes, where you may anchor behind it.  
From the great Helm unto the Island Wero, 
Wero.  the course is northnorthwest, and southsoutheast, four leagues distant, there it is four and five fathom deep. From Wero there runneth off a shoal unto Kyholm, and about Kyholme: 
Kyholme.  and also about the little Island Samps; 
Samps.  it is also full of shoal grounds, which run off unto the great Island Sampso.  
From the great Helm unto the Island Sampso 
Sampso.  it is south-west & north-east four leagues.  
From the north end of the Island Sampso there shooteth off a little riffe north into the sea, you must sound close about by it for to come into the road of Sampso, when you will anchor there. It is there in the road ten fathom deep, and you shall be there under the Swangrounds sheltered for all winds.  
From the south end of Ebeltud to Aerhuysen, 
Aerhuysen  the co●rse is west and by south, and westsouthwest five leagues. It is there all shoal water of 2 and 3 fathom deep. He that will anchor in the road before Aerhuysen, let him bring the great steeple in the midst betwixt the two other sharp steeples, there is the best ground, and good road in three, four, and five fathom, so shoal as you will. To the southwards of Aerhuysen goeth in the Wedersound 
Wedersound.  betwixt Jutland and Sampso: he that will sail in there, must be well acquainted, for it is there all full of riffs and shoals. You may not also use that fareway by night, by reason of all the sand and shoals, a●●lso by day you must be very careful & circumspect in ●●oking out, 
For to sail through the Wedersound.  and not spare your lead, but you may anchor and have road there every where. When you will sail through the Wedersound, coming off from the gr at Helm or Ebeltud, you must leave the Island T●●●s and the Swangrounds on the larboard side, running all alongst by the Juttish coast in 2 or 3 fathom, until past Horsens, or the Island Endelau, which you m●y not sail to, not come near from the westwards, by reason of all the grounds, which lie before it on the west side. It is a narrow channel betwixt Endelau, and the main land, lying from the Wedersound through the Swangrounds 
Swanne-grounds.  south, it is on both sides shoal, and but a creek for to sail through.  
When you come off from the Melversound and will sail through the Wedersound, it is best to run alongst by the Juttish side until thwart of the river of Horsens, than you must edge somewhat off there from the land, and sail right with the Island Tons, and so you run through betwixt the Norther and Souther grounds, leaving the Island Tons on the starboard side. When you are then past Tons, you shall run out close by the north point of Sampso, towards the land of Ebeltud, it is altogether one course from Horsens to Tons, and forth to Sampso, and the point of Ebeltud, too wit, north-east and southeast eight or nine leagues.  
From Horsens, or that Island Endelaw unto the Melversound, 
Melversound.  the course is south and south and by west, 7 or 8 leagues. The Melversound is a deep sound of 20 and 25 fathom, very crooked to come into, it goeth in betwixt Fuynen & Jutland, which are both high lands. From the Island Ebelo unto Melversound the course is south-west and south-west & by south five great leagues.  
From the road of Sampso to Ebelo the course is south & by west 5 leagues. From the south end of Sampso to Ebelo 
Ebelo.  the course is south-west and by south 4 leagues.  
From Sampso to Roems 
Roems.  the course is southeast and by south six leagues. The northwest coast of Fuynen lieth south-west and by west eight leagues. The little Island Ebelo lieth off a league from the same, right before Bowens, but you cannot sail through betwixt the Island and Fuynen. To the southwards of the Island lieth a great rock under water, betwixt this rock and the Island is the road before Bouwens 
Road before Bounes.  in eight and nine fathom.  
Betwixt Syro and Wero lieth a dangerous riffe, long and broad, lying further than half way to Syro. When you will run through betwixt the two foresaid Islands a weather of Russenesse, you must leave at least the two third parts of the water on the side of Wero, and go in southsouthwest towards Roems, which is nine leagues distant.  
The foresaid riffe is called Haters riffe, 
Haters riffe.  is on the east side very hard and stony, he that cometh from Balt-sack, he shall run close to the Island Wero, for to avoid that riffe, the channel betwixt the riffe and Wero is not very broad, & 3 fathom, or 3 fathom & a half deep. He that cometh from Roems or Rusnes, & will sail through Wero sound, let him bring the great Helm to the east side of Wero, and keep them so standing sailing on so right with them, he shall (so doing) take no hurt of Haters riffe. Betwixt Syro and Haters riffe and somewhat more southwardly, the ground is very uneven of 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 fathom. On the south side of Haters riffe it is good anchoring for northerly winds, in six & seven fathom.  
Rusnes and Syro lie northnortheast and southsouthwest about five leagues a sunder.  
From the point of Rusnes runneth off a little riffe to seawards, but to the eastwards of it betwixt Rusnes and Haselyn, lieth off a riffe at least two leagues into sea, which lieth dry at the end, & by it, it is very steep, close alongst by the end, it is eight fathom deep.  
From Rusnes to Spro it is south and by east eight or nine leagues. Betwixt Rusnes and Spro lieth Callenburch, 
Callenburgh.  which is also a lade place, and about 2 leagues to the southwards of Callenburch lieth a flat alongst the coast about a league from the shore of five fathom depth, you must also avoid the south corner of Callenburgh, for there shooteth off a riffe half a league into sea, there is also to the northwards a long flat alongst the shore, but not deep to the seawards, between Callenburgh and Rusnes it is good lying for an easterly wind.  
From the east end of Spro runneth off a little riffe or ledge of rocks, and over against it cometh also a flat shooting off from the land, betwixt them both it is four and five fathom deep. Going on the south side of Spro it is also very foul, more than half a league without the shore. But behind or thwart of Spro lieth Casseur, 
Casseur.  a fair Haven, where men do lie at the Key, and let their goods be carried into the ships, where also it is between both forty, fifty, and sixty fathom deep, but in the middle of the fareway lie some banks, where there is no more than five and six fathom water, good strand ground.  
From Spro to Langeland the course is south and south and by east four leagues distant. He that cometh alongst to the eastwards of Wero, through the channel betwixt Wero & Haters riffe, and will sail to Roems, let him go on due south and by east, and then he shall run alongst about an English mile to the eastwards of the Boltsack, and fall with the land a little to the eastwards of Roems: likewise he that goeth from Roems, or a little to the eastwards of it, on north and by west, he shall fall betwixt Wero and Haters riffe right in the fareway. Betwixt Roems and Fuynen you may run through in two fathom, but with great ships you cannot go through there.  
From the north end of Fuynen shooteth off a little riff about an English mile into sea. About a league east and by north from Roems lieth a shoal of 3, 4, and 5 fathom, which is steep, and shoaleth up so suddenly, that a man, not knowing of it, and finding it so by the lead, should be affrighted at it, To the southwards of Roems, in the land of Fuynen lieth a little town, for to lad, called Cartemonde. 
Cartemonde.  The Haven goeth in from the eastwards, and it is shoal on the west side, there lie no buys in the Havens mouth, there is no more water than five, six, or sometimes seven foot.  
From Roems to Spro, the course is southeast 5 leag. Betwixt Spro 
Spro.  and Knuytshead, it is 12, & 13 fathom deep. But betwixt Roems and Spro, it is 10, & 11 fathom deep.  
Even about to the southwards of the point of Knuytshead in Buyen, lieth the Haven of Nyburgh, 
Nyburgh  when you are about the point, you run right up to the town, about northwest, a league, there it is 6, and 7 fathom deep. Men do lie there with ships to the Key, and let their goods be carried in what they will.  
From Knuytshead to Langeland the course is southeast 4 leagues, & then you leave Spro lying on the starboard side. From the south-west end of Spro shooteth off a little riffe which you must avoid. At the north end of Langeland lie the little Islands of the Frissell, 
The Frissell.  which are round about very foul. From Knuytshead to the Islands Tassing, the course is south and south and by east four leagues, and then you leave the Frissell lying on the larboard side, and run through betwixt the Frissell and Fuynen. If you be bound to Swineburgh, 
Swinburg  then go from the Frissell to the southeast end of Fuynen, on southsouthwest, and you shall meet a little Island which you may run about on both sides of it. Through betwixt Tassing, and that little Island, or you may run alongst by the land of Fuynen, until that you come to the little Town of Swineburgh, which lieth over against the Island of Tassing. Over against the point of Fuynen lieth a little Island called Olms, 
Olmes.  than you must go up to the westwards. You may also run about on the other side of Tassing, and leave the Island Arr with the foul grounds (which lie betwixt Arr and the southeast end of Fuynen) on the larboard side of you, it is no deeper upon these grounds then six foot. Now when as that you shall come by the little Island Olms, or by the southeast point of Fuynen, than you must (as before is said) go up to the westwards about the point of Fuynen towards Woburgh. Upon the south side of these foresaid grounds goeth also a Deep through, west, and west and by south through betwixt the grounds and the Island Arr: upon this Island Arr lieth a little Town called Koping. 
Koping.  This foul ground is 3 leag. long, and that Island Arr is also 3 leagues long, they lie both of them east and west, and the Munk Island lieth at the end of these grounds before Woburgh in Fuynen, which hath two riffs, the one shooteth off from the southeast end east into sea, the other from the north point north-east into the sea. When you sail through to the northwards of these grounds, to wit, betwixt Fuynen and these grounds, towards Woburgh, you shall also meet with the foresaid Munk, with another little Island or two more, leave them lying on the larboard side, and run all along by the land of Fuynen, about west and west and by north. Unto the point of Askens, 
Askens.  which is about six leagues distant from the southeast point.  
From the east point of Askens unto the little Island Toreu, 
Toreu.  the course is west and by north, and westnorthwest two leagues, and to Areu westsouthwest 3 leagues, these two little Islands lie one over against the other, the one on the side of Jutland, and the other on the side of Fuynen, men run through there betwixt 2 riffs which run off one against the other, it is there 4 and 5 fathom deep.  
To the northwards or westwards of Areu lieth the Sound of Haddersleu, 
Sound of Haddersleu.  which lieth in about west and by south, upon it lieth the town Haddersleu two leagues within the land.  
From Areu or Toreu to Melversound the course is northnorthwest five leagues, which you must run into from the southwards first westwards unto the sound of Coldingen, 
Sound off Coldingen.  being a broad Sound, which goeth a league into the land, if you will go through the Melversound, you must leave it on the larboard side, and go up to the eastwards unto the town of Melver, where you come then again into a crooked channel. The Melversound goeth out to the northwards with a very crooked channel, and you come out again upon the broad water to the northwards of Fuynen, as is before said. You may also sail off from Areu into the sound of Aelsem alongst southsouthwest unto Apenrade, 
Apenrade  and then about behind the Island of Aelsems until you come into the sound of Flesburgh,  
The Melversound & the little Island Areu lie southsoutheast and northnorthwest one from the other.  
To sail out of the Aelsen sound from Areu or the Melversound, then go from Areu or Toreu unto the Roen 
The Roe●  eastsoutheast 3 leagues, and then through betwixt the Island and Fuynen, that is alongst to the northwards of Roen, for you can not go about to the southwards of it. The Roen is a bad and shoaly riffe shooting off from Aelsen, whereunto it is fast, the outer end of it lieth dry like Anoutriffe. From the Roen to Arr or Koping the course is east and by south 5 leagues.  
From the south east end of Aelst shooteth off a great riffe towards Arr called the Poles riffe: 
Poles riffe  you must run betwixt Arr & that riffe, leaving two third parts of the water on the Aelsen side, and one third part towards Arr, & run on so with the south end of Langeland, until that you come against Copen.  
From Arr to the south end of Langeland, the course is eastsoutheast, four leagues. And from the Poles riffe to the south end of Langeland, the course is west & west and by north six leagues. You may run through betwixt Langeland and Arr to the northwards and come out again into the Belt by Nyburgh: from the south end of Langeland to Tassing, 
Tassing.  it is north six leagues; you may sail about Tassing on both sides, and leave Arr and the foul grounds, lying on the one side of you. Upon these grounds it is but 6 foot deep.  
You may also sail through betwixt the foresaid grounds and Fuynen into the sound of Aelsen, unto the little Islands of Areu and Toreu, as hath been said here before.  
From the little Island Areu to Apenrade the course is south and by west five leagues. The sound of Apenrade is a broad open sound, upon which lieth the foresaid town of Apenrade.  
From the river of Apenrade unto the crooked channel of Sonderburgh, 
The sound of Apenrade.  which goeth in betwixt the Island Aelsen and the main land, the course is east 3 leagues, there you may sail through about behind the Island of Aelsen to Sonderburgh, and then forth into the sound of Flensburgh. It is very narrow and crooked betwixt the Island and the main land, but when you are come through the narrow and crooked channel into the sound of Flensburg, there it is broader and larger.  
The sound of Flensburgh 
Sound of Flensburg  goeth in betwixt Senderburgh and Holsterland, being a broad sound. He that will sail in there, must take very good heed of the Holsterside, when you begin to come betwixt the two lands, and run in alongst by the land of Aelst, 
Calck-ground.  for from Nubell or Holsterland lie off the Chalck grounds half ways the deep. This sound lieth in west and by south until that you come before the river. There lieth in the river's mouth a little Island on the starboard side, you must run into the eastwards of it, and go in west and by south & west, until you come within the crooked channel of the River or Sound, and then you must go up again south-west than you shall see the town of Flensburgh lie before you.  
To the southwards of the Sound of Flensburgh, lie yet three Sounds or rivers, where great ships may go into, to wit, the Sley, Nylhofvoert and the Sound of Kiel, the land lieth off from Flensburgh to Kiel south southeast or somewhat more easterly six leagues.  
From Sonderburgh to the Slay 
The Sley.  the course is southeast and by east four leagues, that is, a broad deep sound, lying in first about west, and when you are within it; than it runneth in about south-west and by west past Sleeswyke, there also come out many great ships. The town Gottorpe lieth also upon this river.  
Betwixt the slay and Kiel lieth Nylhofvoert, 
Neylhofvoert.  upon it lieth a little town calle●●eckelenfoort.  
The sound of Kiel 
Kiel.  is a broad Sound, with lieth in about south-west, there you may go in also with great ships. From Kiel to the west end of Femerens it is east & by north about eight leagues.  
From the Poles riff to Femeren 
Femeren.  (over the Coelberger Heyd) the course is eastsoutheast 13 or 14 leagues, but from the south end of Langeland unto Femeren it is south east & by east eight leagues. The channel betwixt Femerens and Laland is 5 and 6 fathom deep, you may sail round about Femerens; there it is all shoal ground. Betwixt Femeren and Holsterland, you may run through in eight or ten foot, there lieth a little town, called Heyliger haven, 
Heyligerhaven.  where you may anchor with ships of small draughts for to lad wheat or barley. From the Island Femeren to Gester-rif the course is east and by north ten leagues. But from Femerens to the Trave of Lubeck southsouthwest ten leagues: there goeth in a good deep for great ships, it is deep upon the bank twelve foot water.  
There is also a great bay and a good haven, where men may lie safe for all winds, except the north-east and northnortheast winds. From the Trave of Lubeck to Gester-rif the course is north-east and south-west about nineteen leagues.  

Deep of Wismer.  From the Trave of Lubeck to Wismerdeep the course is first north-east and by east, and then eastnortheast, there goeth in a fair deep for all sorts of ships.  
For to sail in at the deep of Wismer, bring the steeple upon the south land south from you, and sail so in until that the steeple standing upon the east land, by that eastermost house, cometh to the five or six houses, by these houses stand some trees together, from that east land runneth off a little riffe, lying off northwest & by north from it, when the steeple cometh to those houses, then go in southsoutheast, in that deep is twelve foot-water. In the Summer there lie two buys in the haven's mouth●, the one upon the tail of the sand that shooteth off from the eastland, and the other upon the shoal ground, you must run in betwixt them. This deep of Wismer lieth from Femeren southsoutheast distant about seven or eight leagues, but from Wismer to Gester riffe, the course is northnortheast, twelve or thirteen leagues.  
About south from Gester riffe lieth Rostick, 
Rostick.  there goeth in also a good deep of ten foot, it is there very flat, you may sound it in on both sides with the sounding pole. Wismer and Rostick lie about eight leagues asunder.  
Somewhat to the eastwards of Rostick lieth a high land called Robbenesse, 
Robbenesse.  from it shooteth off a great riffe or shoal to seawards, towards Gester riffe, it is betwixt Gester riffe and that shoal not deeper than twelve or thirteen fathom. If you ●ome nearest to Gester riffe, than it doth shoal up suddenly, but if you come nearest this shoal, than it shoaleth by little and little. Gester riffe, as hath been beforesaid, is a shoal riffe, and runneth off at least three leagues into sea.  
A little too the eastwards of this foresaid shoal lieth Barts, 
Barts.  there goeth in a deep of six foot, at the west point goeth off a riffe, which men must avoid.  
The Island Langeland is about eight leagues long, and lieth south & north, to the eastwards, over against it lieth the Golversound, 
Golversound.  lying into the northwards of Laland, all alongst up unto Nestvelt and Wordenburgh, and cometh into the Greensound, and into the Wolvegat, and again into the east sea: Before the Golversound lie three little Islands the one at the point of Laland, which is called Wedero, 
Wedero.  and is also fast to it with a riff, so that men cannot sail through there betwixt them; to the northwards of it men do run into the Golversound, leaving that Island on the starboard side: the other two lie to the northwards of the foresaid Island of Wedero, the one is called Arnis, & the other Ooms. 
Arnis Ooms.  Ooms is a little plain Island, but Arnis is the greatest, which lieth nearest to Zealand, & is full of trees. From the Island Ooms, lieth off a riffe south-west to seawards, which is a great league long, and upon the end flat, which men may run over by the lead. When you will sail into the Golversound, you must leave these two Islands lying on the larboard side. The Island Laland hath upon the west point over against the south end of Langeland, a riffe or Hook, 
Riffe on Laland.  lying off from Laland at least half ways over the Belt: for to avoid that, you must run alongst within an English mile to the eastwards of Langeland; or when that you leave the two third parts of the water on Lalands' side, and the other third part on the side of Langeland, you shall not come too near it. When you come from the southwards, & are bound into the Belt, and that then the steeple of Mascon, which standeth upon Laland cometh to stand north-east and by east from you, than you are past that riffe, and lieth to the southwards of you: It is here in this Channel betwixt Laland and the south end of Langeland, five, six, and seven fathom deep.  
From the south end of Langeland to Femeren the course is southeast and southeast and by east distant eight leagues.  
When as you come off from Langeland and are past the riffe or Hook of Laland, than the south coast of Laland lieth east & west: alongst by it lieth a sand, which is called the Redsand, 
Redsand.  & lieth alongst until before Golversound which runneth in betwixt Laland and Gester.  
To the northwards of this sand is a road of fourteen, sixteen, and eighteen foot water, before the little towns of Aelholm and Roo-buy, 
Aelholme Roobuye.  where men do lad nuts and Bar●●●.  
Betwixt Laland and Gester, thwart of this Redsand (as hath been said) runneth in the Golversound, which men may run into, & come out again into the Belt, but in this sound or channel there is little depth, there lieth a stone bank within thwart over the channel. The little town Nicoppen lieth upon the Island Falster a league within Gester. 
Nicoppen Gester rif.  From Gester shooteth of Gester riffe, at least three leagues into sea, which is a shoal riffe.  
To the eastwards of Gester riff lieth an Island called 'Bout, 
Bout.  it is there abouts all shoal water; to wit, three and four fathom.  
To the eastwards of Bout goeth in the Green sound, 
Greensound.  by the little town Stuybekuype, & cometh out again into the Belt to the northwards of Laland: the Green sound lieth in about west and west and by north in three fathom, there lieth a shoal on the larboard side of the mouth of the Sound, called the Tolck, 
Tolck.  which men must avoid: you must go into the eastwards of it, you may lead it in alongst by the land of Meun, in fourteen or fifteen foot, that foresaid town Stuybekuype 
Stuybekuyp.  lieth about a league within the mouth of the channel.  
From Gester riff to Meun, the course is northnortheast seven leagues: but from Bout to Meun it is north-east about six leagues.  
From the Gelversound to Meun, 
Meun.  the land lieth in a bay you may anchor there for a north-east, north, northwest, and west wind, in five and six fathom.  
He that cometh out of the Sound, and is bound to the southwards of Meun, may come so near Meun as he will, and luffe up to the westwards by the point, and anchor where he please, in five or six fathom. On the north side of Meun you may also anchor in six fathom, behind a little riffe that shooteth off from the north point, for an east, southsouthwest and westwind, it is there all over flat, and good ground.   

Of the depths about these places, and in what depths men may see the land.  
In the Ripe, Eyder and Hever, a south and north Moon maketh the highest water, the flood cometh there out of the northwest, and the ebb out of the southeast, and so run over the north grounds.  
In the deep of List or Silt, a south and north Moon maketh the highest water, the flood cometh there out of the northwest, and falleth very little alongst the land, and the ebb to the contrary.  
In Knuytsdeep, a southsouthwest and northnortheast Moon maketh the highest water. The flood cometh there also out of the northwest and falleth, but a great quarter tied alongst the land, and the ebb to the contrary.  
In the Haven of Zuyder-zyt, the Growedeepe, the Schellinghkroegh a southsouthwest and northnortheast. Moon maketh the highest water, the flood cometh there also out of the northwest and falleth over the Reefshorne towards the juttish Island, and the ebb again to the contrary, off from the land in the north Sea.   

Of the grounds and Depths.  
The grounds of the Hever and the banks of the Small deep without Strand and Eyderstee, lie at least two leagues without the coast of the land.  
Betwixt Holyland and Ameren or Strand it is ten or eleven fathom deep, in that depth you may see both the lands, if you climb up in the shrouds. Strand is to be known by the steeple of Pielworme, standing upon the south end of the land: Upon the Island Strand stand more Churches and steeples, but none so easy to be known as Pielworme.  
Ameren is a league and a half long, and hath all alongst low sandhills grown with spiry grass.  
The Island Silt you may see in ten fathom: Upon this Island (nearest to the north end) lieth a high ●●eepe red cliff, on both sides going sloping down; upon the south side of the cliff standeth a flat Church, with a low steeple, and to the eastwards of it another Church, with a high thick steeple called Heydom. The north end of the Island is called List, and the south end Voortrap.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the Eyder to Hever the land lieth northnorthwest and southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From the Hever, or the south end of Strand to the south end of Ameren northnorthwest about 5 leagues.  
Two leagues north from Ameren lieth Silt, which is about five leagues long, and lieth south and by east, & north & by west.  
From the north end of Silt, called List, unto the south end of Rim or Rem, it is north-east and south-west one great league, Rem is three leagues long, and lieth most south and north.  
From the north end of Rem, to the south end of Manu, it is north-east and south-west a league and a half, you can hardly get sight of it by reason of the grounds, and great shoals, which lie thwart of it to seawards.  
Manu and Phanu lie about two leagues one from the other, Manu is almost a league long, and Phanu about 4 leagues long, and lieth from Phanu Knuyters to Knuytes-deepe, southsoutheast and northnorthwest. This Island hath also a fair strand, but the north end towards Grouwe deep is very flat.  
From Phanu to Doodenbergh it is about four leagues, betwixt them lie the Havens of the Growedeepe & Schellingkroegh.  
From Holyland to the Eyder east and by north, and west & by south 7 leagues.  
From Holyland to the outermost buy in the Hever, north-east and south-west 8 leagues.  
You may lie by the outermost buy in the Hever, and see Holyland with clear sight.  
From Holyland to Ameren or Small-deep, northnortheast, somewhat easterly, and southsouthwest, somewhat westerly 10 leagues.  
From Holyland to the deep of Silt or List, north and by east 17 leagues.  
From Holyland to Knuytsdeep or Ryperdeep, north and north and by east 23 leagues.  
From Holyland to the horn or the Doodenbergh north and south 30 leagues.  
From Knuytsdeep or the Island Phanu to the Fly, south-west and by south 50 leagues.  
From the Island Silt to the Fly north-east and south-west, 46 leagues.  
From the Doodenbergh or the Horn, to the Haven or Numen or Rinkopper-deepe, north and by west seven leagues.  
From the Rinkopperdeep, or the Haven of Numen to Boevenbergen north and by west about 10 leagues.  
From the Doodenbergh to Boevenbergen, the land of jutland lieth north and by west, and south and by east 17 or 18 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to the Holmes northnortheast, 9 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Robsnot or Robbeknuyt north-east 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Robsnot to Hartshals' north-east and by east four leagues.  
From Hartshals to the Scawe or Schaghen eastnortheast 8 leagues.  
From Rinkopper or Numer-deep to the Fly southsouthwest or a little more westerly about 58 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen alongst jutland, without the grounds unto the Elve or the outermost buy south & by east about 48 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to Holyland, south & by east somewhat southerly about 43 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to the Fly or Borneriffe southsouthwest about 67 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to the north Forland south-west & by south 118 or 120 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to the Holmes before Yarmouth south-west 93 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to Flambrough-head westsouthwest somewhat southerly 98 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to Scharbrough westsouthwest somewhat southerly 100 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to the River of Newcastle or Tynemouth west and by south about 106 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to Boecknes west and by north about 106 leagues.  
From Boevenbergen to the Naze northwest and by north 24 leagues.  
From the Riffe in sixteen fathom to the Fly south and by west 65 leagues.  
From the riffe in eighteen fathom to the straight betwixt Calais and Dover southsouthwest about 120 leagues.  
From the Ho●●es to the Naze northwest about 19, or 20 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Fleckery northwest and by north 19 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Mardow north 27 leagues.  
From the Holms to Longsound north and by east 35 or 36 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Ferderoer northnortheast 40 leag.  
From the Scawe to Tynemouth westsouthwest 130 leag.  
From the Scawe to the Naze west 33 leagues.  
From the Scaw to Fleckery west and by north 25 leag.  
From the Scaw to Reperwick west and by north and northnorthwest, 24 leagues.  
From the Scawe to Mardowe northwest and by west 20 or 21 leagues.  
From the Scawe to the Longsound northwest and by north or little more northerly 22 or 23 leagues.  
From the Scawe to Ferderoer north and by west 23 leag.  
From the Scawe to Otturen north and by east, somewhat easterly 42 leagues.  
From the Scawe to Maelstrand eastnortheast 13 leag.  
From the Scawe to Nidinck east and by south 15 or 16 leagues.  
From the Scawe to Waersbergen eastsoutheast 19 or 20 leagues.  
From the Scaw to the Trendels' southeast 8 leagues.  
From the Scaw, about a seaboard, the Trendels' southeast and by east 8 leagues.  
From the Scaw to Lesou southsoutheast 8 leagues.  
From Scaw to the Small Helms south 4 leagues.  
From the Scaw to Seabuy south and by west 5 leagues.  
From the Helms to Seabuy. 2 leagues.  
From Seabuy to Aelburger-deep south and by west 9 leagues.  
From Aelburger-deep to Mariacker south and south and by west 4 leagues.  
From Aelburger-deep to Stevenshead southeast and by south 9 leagues.  
From Aelburger-deep to Haeslin southeast and by east 20 leagues.  
From Stevenshead to Haeslin eastsoutheast 13 leagues.  
From Stevenshead to the great Helm south and by west about 6 leagues.  
From Stevenshead to the point of Ebeltud southsouthwest 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Stevenshead to Syro southsoutheast and southeast and by south 9 leagues.  
From the great Helm to Wero southsoutheast 4 leag.  
From the great Helm to Sampso south 4 leagues.  
From the south end of Ebeltud to Aerhuysen west and by south and westsouthwest 5 leagues.  
From the road of Sampso to Ebelo south & by west 5 leag.  
From the south end of Sampso to the Island Ebelo, the course is south-west and by south 4 leagues.  
The northwest coast of Fuynen lieth south-west and by west 8 leagues.  
From Endelaw to Melversound south and by west 6 leag.  
From Ebelo to Melversound southsouthwest, somewhat southerly 5 leagues.  
From Sampso to Roems southeast & by south 6 leagues.  
From Syro to Rosnes southsouthwest 5 leagues.  
From by west Syro to Roems southsouthwest & south and by west 9 leagues.  
From Wero to Bultsack south and by west 4 great leag.  
From Wero to Romps south and by east 8 leagues.  
From Romps to Knuytshead south & by east and southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Knuytshead to Langeland southeast. 4 leagues.  
From Knuytshead to the Island Tassing south and south and by east 4 leagues.  
From the southeast end of Fuynen the east point of Asken, west and west and by north. 6 leagues.  
From the point of Askens to the little Island of Toreu, westnorthwest and west and by north 2 leagues.  
From Areu to Melversound northnorthwest 5 leagues.  
From the point of Rusnes in Zealand, to the Island Syro, northnortheast and southsouthwest. 5 leagues.  
From Rusnes to Casseur southsoutheast. 9 or 10 leag.  
From Spro to Langeland south and south and by east 4 leagues.  
From the north end of Langeland to the south end south 8 leagues.  
From the south end of Langeland, to the Island Arr, the course is westnorthwest 4 leagues.  
From the Island Arr, or Koping, to the Roen, the course is west and by north 5 leagues.  
From the Roen, to the little Island Areu, westnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Areu to Apenrade south and by west 5 leagues.  
From the river of Apenrade to the Straight of Sonderburge 3 leagues.  
From Sonderburgh to the Slay, southeast and by east 4 leagues.  
From the south end of Langeland to Femeren, the course is southeast and by east 8 leagues.  
From the Pools-riffe, lying on the Island Aelst to Femeren, the course is eastsoutheast 13 or 14 leagues.  
From the slay to the Kiel southeast 4 leagues.  
From Kiel to Femeren, the course is east & by north 8 leagues.  
From Femerens to the Trawe of Lubeck southsouthwest 9 or 10 leagues.  
From the Trave of Lubeck to Wismer-deepe, the course is first north-east & by north and then eastnortheast in all 9 leagues.  
From Rostick to Robbenes, the course is north-east 4 leagues.  
From Robbenesse to Doornbosch north-east and by east 7 leagues.  
From Femerens to Wismerdeep, southsoutheast seven leagues.  
From Femerens to Rostick, eastsoutheast 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Femerens to Gester-riffe east & by north 9 or 10 leagues.  
From the Trave of Lubeck to Gester-riffe north-east 19 leagues.  
From Wismerdeep to Gester-risse northnortheast 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Rostick to Gester-riffe the course is north 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Gester-riffe to Doornbosh east 9 leagues,  
From Gester to Meun north-east 7 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Northerhead. Tatinghen. Gartinghen.  
Souterhead.  
Thus showeth the Land of Eyderstee to the northwards of the Eyder.  
Thus showeth the Island Ameren.  
List. White-cliffe. Red-cliffe. Heydom. Voortrap.  
Thus showeth itself the Island Silt, when you sail alongst by it.  
Doodenbergh. Zuyder-zyt. Langelegh. Luysbergh.  
Thus showeth the Land of Zuyder-zyt to the southwards of the Doodenbergh.   

Blawebergh. Doodenbergh.  
Thus showeth the Land betwixt the Horn or Doodenbergh and the Haven of Numen.  
Easter point. Holmes. Boevenberghen. To the southwards of Boevenberghen.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Boevenberghen and the Holmes, when you sail alongst by it, three leagues from the land.  
The Scaw. Harshals. Robsnot.  
Thus riseth the Land betwixt the Holmes and the Scaw, when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the land and the Church of Aelst, when you are 2 leagues and an half by east Aelburger-deep.  
Wismer Great Cruysoort Little Cruysoort Holster land The east point.  
When you sail to Lubeck, alongst betwixt the Land of Cruysoort and Holster land, than it showeth itself on both sides thus.  
Barto Robbenesse Rostick Oudevaet Buck-hoocke  
Thus showeth the Coast of Meckelenburgh, betwixt Cruysoort & Dornebosh, or the Jelle, when you sail alongst by it, a league without the Land.     

The fourth Demonstration, Where in are described The Schager Rack, as also the Sound from the Pater-nosters Kol, and so forth through the Sound to Falsterbon.  
Britto. MAELSTRAND. The Westerbergh.  
Island Maelstrand.  
Outrockes, or Pater-nosters.  
Eastnortheast.  
Pas caarte vaunt SCHAGER-RACK vande Pater-nosters aen Kol. als meed de Sondt, oock ho dese landen van Schagen gelegen zyn.  
De SONDT, met alle zyn gelegentheyt in't groot.  
About the midst, going in at the souther channel, lieth a rock above water, which you may sail about on both sides, but within that rock lieth a sunken rock under water, and to the southwards of it also a great rock, but a little further out then the other. There lieth also a sunken rock under water by the Island on the north side of the foresaid rock which lieth above water, which men must be very careful to take heed of. There is every where good anchor ground. From thence you may sail through within the rocks to Calf-sound, 
Calfsound  Bahouse and Nilus.  
Calf-sound lieth distant from Maelstrand about four leagues. For to sail in there out of the sea, you must run 〈◊〉 alongst to the southwards of a great rock, whereupon standeth a Warder. On the south side of the Havensmouth there are great rocks, but on the north side all small rocks. When you come within the rocks about the point of the north land, there you may anchor in fifteen or sixteen fathom, there is good anchor ground. From Calfsound you may run up to the southwards, through within the rocks unto the river of Nilus.  
Four leagues southsoutheast from Calf-sound, lieth the Island Winneu, to the southwards of it goeth in the channel of Nilus or Gottenbergh, which is a large and broad sound, lying in northnortheast, in 8, 9, and 10 fathom, you must leave Winneu on the larboard side, and run in betwixt the point of the main land, called Kalderhead, and the Island little Denmarck, and then in alongst by the main land on the south side until past Elsburgh to Gottenburgh, 
Gottenburgh.  it is there all clean and clear without any danger that might hurt you.  
You may also sail into the northwards of Winneu, than you must leave Winneu, and also some long rocks on the starboard side, and the through Island, or little Denmarck, on the larboard side, and then in alongst by the point of the main land, on the south side, as is before said.  
Three leagues southsouthe from Winneu lie Malesound and Consback: Malesound 
Malesound.  is a rough Island, which you may sail round about in seven or eight fathom, under it is also good road. Two cables length westnorthwest from Malesound, lieth a sunken rock under water, and also one even with the water, a bow shot from the land, whereupon standeth a Warder.  
Eastnortheast from Malesound lieth the haven of Consback, 
Consback  there stand 2 great Warders, each upon a rock close to the land, betwixt them lieth in the haven, it is a fair haven, ten fathom deep, and good anchor ground, when you come about the low point you shall see Consback lie to the northwards of you.  
From Malesound south-west and south-west and by west, a great league to seawards, lieth the fowl and dangerous rock Ning or Nijding: 
Nyding.  The land upon Ning is about a half league long. The riffe on the north end runs till about a league on the land north-east, and is a half league broad, wholly riffe, with sharp stones. Upon some places eight, seven, five, and four foot water. The tail, which shooteth southerly down, is narrow, and runneth from the land north-east about 2 leagues: There upon is 5, 4, and 3 foot water. A league and a half without Nynger-Riffe, northwest, men may stay upon 6 and 7 fathom. You may sail through betwixt Nyding and Malesound, or the main land, but it is there all shallow water. Upon Nyding is a fire-beacon, whereupon they make fire every night.  
Nydingh.  
Great stones.  
Three leagues to the southwards of Watersbergen lieth the river of Valckenburgh. 
Valckenburgh.  On the north side of the Riversmouth lieth an Island, called Murupting, and 3 leagues to the southwards of it, lieth an Island, called Tullo, 
Tullo.  betwixt that Island and Valckenburgh, within the land, lieth a high hill, called Haver, being white to see to, as if it were sandy Land: sea faring men do name it young Coll, because of the likeness of height & fashion, which it hath like Col, and sometimes it is mistaken for Coll.  
Three leagues eastwards from Tullo, lieth Helmstee 
Helmstee  upon a river, but there can go in no ships, but only huyes and boats.  
This river of Helmstee lieth within a great Inlet about southsouthwest 4 leagues from Swedereur.  
Kol over these two Warders s. w. from you.  
Swedereur  
Two leagues southwards from Helmstee lieth the little town, or little castle, called Laholm, 
Laholm.  there goeth also a little river into the land. A league westwards from Laholme lieth Bosstadt, these places lie in a great bay.  

Swedereur.  
Three leagues to the westwards of Bosstadt lieth the Island Swedereur, you may run in behind it at both sides, for to anchor from the northwards, it is there large and broad for to go in: but from the north end of Swedereur shooteth off a little ledge of rocks, you must run alongst to the northwards of the rocks, that lie at the north end of Swedereur leaving them on the starboard side, and anchor behind the Island, betwixt the great and little rocks in seven fathom, thwart of the little white church of Turcko, so that the great rock with the two warders at the south end be south-west from you, and Col stand over the foresaid Rock, there it is best lying, and there you are landlockt for all winds. If you will run out again to the southwards of it, then leave the two rocks with the Warders on the starboard side, and run boldy close about by them, towards Coll.  
He that cometh off from Anout, & by reason of southerly winds cannot run a weather Col, let him go from Col north-east and by north towards Swedereur, and run close about by the two foresaid rocks with the Warders, at the south end of Swedereur, until he come behind the Island, and anchor, as is before said, there it is soft ground. A north wind bloweth there open in.  
From Swedereur to Coll 
Coll.  the course is south-west and by south, betwixt both lieth a great bay, upon which lieth that little town Engelholme, where men also may ride.   

For to sail from the Scaw to Coll.  
From the Riffe of the Scawe to the Island Lesou the course is southsoutheast, but the point of the Riffe and the Trindel lie due southeast and northwest eight leagues asunder.  
The Island Lesou 
Lesou.  is compassed round about with foul Dwaelgrounds, riffs and sands, that lie off. From the southeast end where the Church stands upon, lieth off such a great riffe or shoal from the shore, that about 3 leagues from the land to the southwards of it, it is not deeper than two fathom, there under it you may make road for a southsoutheast wind. Likewise from the south-west point, lieth off such a great shoal, that when the foresaid flat church is east, and eastnortheast from you, you cannot come near the land within three leagues. But the north end you may come so near, that you may have road under it for a southerly & southeast wind, in three, four, five, six and seven fathom, the church being about south from you.  

Riffe of Lesou.  From the north-east end lieth off also a riffe right towards the Trindel, which you may sound about, when you sail through betwixt Lesou and the Trindell, which is the nearer Lesou the shoaler, and the nearer the Trindell the deeper. Close by the Trindell on the Inner side or west side, it is deep five and six fathom.  
The Trindell 
Trindel.  is a stony sandplate, three cornered, and somewhat long of fashion, it is no more than four foot deep, and about two Acres of land great, and lieth most alongst the farewaye, lying from the north-east end of Lesou north-east, or a little more easterly about 3 leagues distant. On the north-east side of the Trindell lieth always a great buy, whereby you may know it a fare off.  

Depths about the Scaw.  When the point of the Scaw is northwest and by west about a league from you, there it is seventeen and eighteen fathom deep, but when the point lieth west, and west and by south from you, about a league, there it is four or five and thirty fathom deep.  
But he that cometh sailing about the Scaw, & runneth without the riffe in ten, eleven, or twelve fathom, and goeth on from thence southeast, or southsoutheast, keepeth a long while still the depth fifteen & sixteen fathom at least the space of three leagues, before he get twenty, or five and twenty fathom. When as that you begin to get again shoaler water of ten, eight, seven, and six fathom, that goeth then through within the Trindell. When as you shall meet with the foresaid depth of the shoaling, and sail yet further on southsoutheast, than you must be very careful to use your lead of then, because of the foresaid shoal, which lieth off from the north-east end of Lesou towards the Trindell, you may run over it (as is said) in five, four, and so well (in the narrow) in three fathom. When the north-east point of Lesou beginneth to come southsouthwest from you, than you come on against the riff or shoal but when the point is south-west from you, than you are over the shoalest of the riffe. When the west end of Lesou is south-west, and the church south-west and by south from you, than you are about thwart of the buy of the Trindell.  
Four leagues south and by west from the Scaw lie the smal-Helmes, not far from the shore, 
The Helms.  there are three little Islands, the southermost the juttes do call the Deynen or the Dee, the middlemost Holmes, & the northermost Grasholme, by them lieth yet another little Island. You may sail throug between the southermost & the middlemost, but than you must run nearest the southermost, through betwixt them is four fathom water.  
Under the Helmes is good road for southeast, southsoutheast & southerly winds. He that will go to anchor under them, coming from the Scawe, must run to the strand in three fathom, and run so alongst by it, in between the strand and the Helms, until that he be within the rocks, there he may anchor, he may also well run through alongst by the footstrand in 3 fathom. When the rocks of the Helms are east, & east & by north from you, there is the road in 4 fathom & 4 fathom & a half. The best road for to lie under the Helms with small ships, is betwixt the southermost & middle most little Island, somewhat nearer the main land then the Islands: but for great ships it is best to lie by the Grasholme.  
He that will not lie so far within the Helms, may also anchor farther out under the high land of Lacklou, so that the Helms be southeast from him, in four, five, or seven fathom, there it is also very good lying for south & southsoutheast winds, in clean ground of small white and black sand.  
Betwixt the Scawe and the Helms in the farewaye it is deep eighteen, sixteen, and fifteen fathom. Betwixt the Helms and the main land, there is at the shoalest three fathom water. When you come from the northwards through betwixt them until you come thwart of the south end of the rocks, there runneth off a little riffe from the Helms towards the strand, where the great stones lie called Bourser riffe, but keeping in three fathom, you cannot take hurt of that riffe. You may well run out again by that south end towards Zeabuy. So that you may sail round about the Helms with ships that are not of very great draughts.  
Betwixt the Helms and Lesou, a good ways from the Helms, it is 20 & 25 fathom deep, soft ground, but one league from the Helms lie some rocks or shoals, where of you must take heed.  
To the westwards of Lesou lie the Dwaelgrounds, 
Dwaelgrounds.  to the northwards of the foresaid riff, that lieth off from the south-west point of Lesou, where the flat church standeth upon. Which are very uneven of three, four, five, and six fathom deep. Of these and more other shoals & uneven grounds betwixt Lesou and Zeabuy, read the description off the norther part of the Belt. 
Rocks betwixt Lesou and the Helms.   
About a league northnorthwest from the west end of Lesou, southsoutheast somewhat southerly from the point of the Scaw, & eastsouthe. from the little Helms, there lie two or three little low Islands or rocks, a little above water; betwixt these Holmkens, and the Helms, it is twenty fathom, but betwixt these Holmkens and Lesou five fathom deep, to the northwards of them is fare flat, four and five fathom deep sand ground.  
If you will sail by night off from the Helms or from the high land of Lacklie towards Lesou with a south-west or southsouthwest wind, then sail no nearer because of these little Islands and shoals than southeast and by east, with that course you shall run over those shoals or flats (lying to the northwards from the foresaid Holmkens) in six or seven fathom, afterwards it will be deeper again, nine, ten and twelve fathom, go then on eastsoutheast so long until that the east end of Lesou be south-west from you. When that east end beginneth to come south and by west from you, than you come on against that flat, or rif, which shooteth off from the north-east end of Lesou towards the Trindell. It doth shoal up from 14, 12, and 10 fathom, unto 8, 6, and four, and also to three fathom. If you be somewhat near to Lesou, three fathom lasteth a good while, and then it will be again deeper, four, six, ten and fifteen fathom, and then very deep. When that foresaid north-east end of Lesou is south-west from you, than you are clear of that flat. The Helms and the Trindel lie east & by south and west and by north seven leagues asunder.  

For to sail within the Trindell.  When you come from the Scaw with a south-west or westsouthwest wind, and that you will sail through within the Trindel, that is, betwixt the Trindel and Lesou, it is best that you go such a course, that you may make your ways good southeast and by south, and then you shall run alongst about the midst of the channel, through betwixt the Trindel, and the foresaid low rocks, (which lie northnorthwest off from the north point of Lesou, and southsoutheast from the point of the Rif of the Scaw.) At the deepest in this farewaye, betwixt the Scaw and Lesou, it is 23 and 24 fathom, being passed over that, you shall come against a bank of eight, seven, and six, and also into five fathom. and then you shall be about due west, or a little more northerly or southerly from the buy upon the Trindel. Afterwards it will be again deeper, if you be in the right fareway, to wit, seven, eight, ten, and also well twelve fathom.  
Not for to sail within the riff, or the north-east point of Lesou, it is good to run then somewhat more easterly, to wit, southeast or southeast and by east, until you come against the foresaid riff that lieth off from the north-east point of Lesou, which you may sound, and so run about by it in five, four, and also three fathom. When the north-east point of Lesou, (that is the point with hommocks) is south & by west from you, than you come against the rif, & when that point is southsouthwest from you, than you are right thwart of the rif, but when the point is south-west from you, than you shall be passed and clear of the rif. Being gotten about it towards Anoute, it will be deep thirty, five and thirty, and also forty fathom.  
He that cometh by night about the Trindell, must not spare his lead, on the outer side, that is on the east side of the Trindle you may not come nearer it by night, than nine or ten fathom, and then you shall not befarre off from it.  
When you sail close alongst without the Trindell in clear weather, and that you stand without board, upon the bends of the ship with your feet by the water, than you can even see Lesou. If that then in clear weather standing so without the ship, you cannot see Lesou, when you are about thwart of the Trindle than you run fare enough alongst without the Trindle.  

Depths betwixt Anout & Lesou.  The Trindle and the riffe of Anout lie northwest and southeast, or as some say southsoutheast and northnorthwest nine or ten leagues a sunder. Betwixt Anoute and Lesou in the right farewaye it is five & twenty fathom deep, but to the westwards of it, to wit, right betwixt the Islands Anout and Lesou it is shoal water; of seven and eight fathom, you may sail there over these flats and shoals through betwixt Anout and Lesou into the Belt.  
Anout is upon the west side very foul, and fare off to seawards from it, lie many uneven dwaelgrounds of two, three and four fathom.  
When you sail with a south-west or westerly wind from Lesou to Anout, and run over the flat of Lesou in three or four fathom, you need not sail on more easterly than southeast and by east, although it be by night, you shall with such wind and course run clear enough of Anout. When as that you reckon to have the length of the riffe, go then on southsoutheast; and south and by east, for to sail a wether of Coll. But by day or when you can see about you, not more leewardly than southsoutheast. When you sail off from the foresaid point of Lesou to Anout, with a south-west or westsouthwest wind, as is before said & make reckoning to come by night by Anout, than you can not do better; as to go eight, ten or twelve glass, (according as the wind shall blow fresh) on southsoutheast, until you come against the shoaling of Anout, and look for the day, that running not to far to leewards off the point of the riffe, you may the better get a weather of Col. Likewise, when you come off from Col with a south-west or southerly wind, and run about a half league alongst without Coll, you need not also sail more northerly, than northwest and by north, that goeth also a good way alongst to leewards of Anout riffe, and so forth towards Lesou. But when you come with a north-east wind out of the Sound, or from Col, you must run out close by Coll, if you will sail a weather of the riffe of Anout.  
He that must lie by or turn to windwardes betwixt Lesou and Anout, and is bound for the Sound, let him keep himself on the west side of the farewaie, when he is a league or two a weather of Lesou, upon those foresaid flattes, or four, six, and seven fathom, when as that he beginneth to come within a league or two of Anout, there it will be again deeper, but uneven the one cast at least a fathom more or less than the other, when that you shall begin to get that uneven ground of sixteen, twenty, and also thirty fathom, then is Anout yet about three leagues south from you; coming near Anout it will be very uneven, at one time thirty, and then soon again fifteen, seventeen, & also twenty fathom.  
If you will sail towards Lesou with a south-west wind, coming about the Riffe of Anout from the southwards, then go not on more westerly than northwest. If you go on more westerly, either westnorthwest, or northwest and by west, than you shall come soon upon the flat betwixt Anout and Lesou, and shall find first ten, and then by little and little six, five and four fathom. When that with the northwest way you begin to get Lesou in sight, than it lieth high, that is, the west end about westnorthwest, and the north-east end, where the riffe lieth off, about northnorthwest from you. When you come so near to Lesou, that you can see the east end out of the top in clear weather, about northwest from you, 
Depths by Lesou.  there it is thirty, and four and thirty fathom deep, that lasteth so long until that the foresaid east point be south-west from you, but when that point is southsouthwest from you, than you are right thwart or upon the point or shoalest, of the riff, than you shall run over there in three, four, and five fathom: when that foresaid point cometh to be south and by west from you than you are past and clear of the riffe.  
Betwixt Anout and Waesbergen in the farewaye it is deep one and twenty, two and twenty, 
Depths thwart of Anout.  and three and twenty fathom, betwixt them lieth also a bank of ten twelve, fourteen and sixteen fathom. When the northermost high hill of Waesbergen is north-east from you, than the points of Anouts riffs are south-west from you: but when that hill is north-east and by east from you, and that you be somewhat nearer norway than the riffe, than you are upon that bank. When you come upon it by night, then go on south, or south and by east, according as the wind shall be, & then you shall get again deeper water. There lieth yet another bank betwixt the riffe of Anout & Valckenburgh, which lieth alongst unto Haland, which at some places is not deeper than eight fathom. When the point of the riffe is about south and by east, and the high land of Anout is about south and by west from you four leagues, there lieth also a bank of 14 or 15 fathom.  
The riffe of Anout 
Riffe off Anout.  lieth off from the north-east point of Anout about eastnortheast a league and half into sea, and at the end lieth dry above water, which is exceeding steep and needle too. The north side (when you come from the northwards or the westwards) you may sound, and run alongst by it, in seventeen or eighteen fathom: but coming from the southwards, you cannot (in no wise) come near it by your lead, for on the south side close to the Riff, it is thirty, and five and thirty fathom deep.  
On the north side of the riffe, you may anchor at many places in ten, eleven, twelve, and thirteen fathom. When you anchor in eleven, twelve or thirteen fathom, so that the firebeacon be southeast and by south, and the high land of Anout, 
Road under Anout riffe.  which is the west end, about south-west and by west from you, than lieth the outermost end of the riffe east & by north from you, there is very good lying for eastsoutheast, southeast, south, and southsouthwest winds. When you set sail from thence, & are bound to the Sound, than you may boldly without fear (either by night or dark weather) sail alongst by the riffe in sixteen, seventeen, or eighteen fathom, until thwart of the end, keeping in such depth you can take no hurt of it. Coming by the end, it is four and twenty and five and twenty fathom deep, but when you come about the point, and begin to go on southsoutheast, than you have presently close to the riffe no ground in thirty and five and thirty fathom. The riffe of Anout and Col lie one from the other southeast and northwest about ten leagues asunder. In clear weather you may easily see from below both Coll and Anout, when you are betwixt them both. 
Depths betwixt Anout riff and the Sound.  For to sail from the riffe to the Sound with a westsouthwest wind, you need not sail nearer with a ship that saileth well, then southsoutheast, with that course you shall sail fare enough a weather of Col. Coming near the Coast of Zealand, that you may sound in fourteen, twelve, ten & eight fathom deep.  
Betwixt Anout & Zealand, in the farewaye it is eightteene and twenty fathom deep. Betwixt Anout and Zealand fifteen and sixteen fathom, but in the farewaye betwixt Anout and Coll, it is deep twenty, one and twenty, two and twenty, & three and twenty fathom. To the southwards of the westwards of it, it is shoaler, to wit, nineteen, eighteen, and also well fourteen, thirteen, and twelve fathom, according as you come to the westwards, but towards Norway it is deeper, to wit, four and twenty, five and twenty, eight & twenty, and also thirty fathom, whereby you may perceive whether you be nearest the Norway side to the eastward of the fareway or to the westward.  
About northwest from Coll four leagues, and southeast and by east from Anout, there lieth a bank of nine, ten and twelve fathom.  

Diversbancks.  About east and by south from Anout, so far that you cannot well see it from beneath, but may see it out of the top and northwest from Coll there lieth also a bank of sixteen fathom, gross sandy ground, as if it where ground of the riffe.  
South and by east about eight leagues from the point of Arnouts riffe, southeast and by south from the south end of Anout, and west and by north from Coll about five leagues, lie the Lowsegroundes, 
Louseground.  upon which is no more than eight foot water. He that cometh off from Anout riffe, being bound for the Sound, and goeth not more southerly than southsoutheast, shall not sail within these grounds, but with a south & by east course he should fall with them. He that cometh out of the Sound, being bound towards Anout, should (with a westnorthwest course off from the Sound) also sail within the same, therefore he that is bound with a bare wind from Anout to the Sound, or from the Sound to Anout, must be careful thereof.  
The Island Haselin 
Haselin.  lieth from Anouts riffe south 11 leagues distant, and from Coll south-west & by west eight leagues, which is on the north side, or outer side very full off riffs and shoals, but on the south side or inner side towards Zealand it is indifferent clean, so that you may well have road there. From the east end of Haselin lieth off a Riffe northnortheast and north-east and by north towards Norway three leagues into sea, until within a league near to the Lowsegrounds: he that must turn to windewardes here, with southerly or northerly winds, and runneth somewhat far over westwards into the bay, must be very careful, and take heed there of, because it is there abouts very uneven of depths, & uneven grounds, and therefore you cannot well come near then by your lead; but the Coast of Zealand you may come near in 6 or 7 fathom by your lead.  
If it should happen that you must lie by, 
Depths in the Scawe reach.  in the Scawe reach in long dark nights or misty weather, then observe these directions following: If you be betwixt the Scawe & Lesou, than you may keep yourself well boldly to the southwards or westwards, but use the lead much: about the Helms and the Scawe you may come near the shore into ten, twelve or fiftteene fathom, before you need to east about. If you be by your reckoning thwart of Lesou, you may come near it in ten or fifteen fathom: But if you be betwixt Lesou and Anout, there you may run upon the flats in five, six, seven, eight or ten fathom. If you be betwixt Anout Haselin and Coll, there you may run to the south shore in fifteen and sixteen fathom, but betwixt Haselin and Zealand in ten or twelve fathom.  
It is best in any wise to keep you rather to the south shore, then to the Norway side, but you must be very careful of your lead, and use it very much.  
From Coll to the Island Haselin, 
Haselin.  it is south-west and by west eight leagues, you may sail through betwixt Haselin and Zealand, until you come into the Belt: the coast of Zealand is a fair strand, but between Fisher's village and the Castle Kronenburgh, lieth a bank a little half league from the shore of two fathom, and runneth with a riffe to the shore and is four fathom water, as also, to the westwards of Haselin, there shooteth off a riffe to seawards, which you must avoid.  
About eastsoutheast from Haselin goeth into the Land a great broad sound, which without at the entrance of it, is a great league broad, there is good anchoring for a northwest wind in five or six fathom. The Sound divideth itself within the land into three parts, the first or the eastermost, called Roskildifiourd, 
Roskildifiourt  goeth up southsoutheast unto Rockil, the second, called Isenvoort, 
Isenvoort  lieth into the land south, and south and by west at least 5 or 6 leagues, unto Isickby and Holbeck: within it is at least two leagues broad, and in the midst lieth a great Island. The third lieth to Draecksholme, also at least five leagues south-west, and north-east, like the coast towards the Belt. The Coast of Zealand, betwixt Haselin and the Sound is a clean coast, you may sail alongst by the Land in six or seven fathom, besides the foresaid riff which lieth between Fisher's village there is upon it but four fathom deep, but come no nearer to it by night then twelve or thirteen fathom, for at some places it is steep, & shoaleth up suddenly. Where that little new church standeth, thwart of it, it is flat three and four fathom, and to the westwards of that wood which standeth to the westwards of Lapsand, you may come in four fathom by the shore, without taking hurt, but coming near Lapsand, you must keep further off from the shore, in seven or eight fathom, or else you should get behind the point of Lappesand.  
Lappesand 
Lappesand.  lieth about an English mile to the northwards of Elsenoore, or the Castle of the Sound, lying on the west side of the sail way, alongst the coast of Zealand. For to avoid Lappesand you must be careful of these marks, there standeth a house to the westwards of the King's mill, to the westwards of the Castle of Cronenburgh, keep the Chimney of that house to the westwards of the front of the King's mill, and then you can take no hurt of Lappesand, then run alongst by it in six, seven or eight fathom, so long until that the east end of the Island Ween cometh a little without the castle of the Sound, keep that so standing, and sail so in six or seven fathom, somewhat close alongst by the castle, you may plainly see lying through the water all that can hurt you.  

For to anchor behind Lappesand.  If you will shift roads out of the Sound, & anchor behind Lappesand, then sail thwart of the foresaid King's house called the Caux or King's mill, so that it do stand about south or south and by west, or south and by east from you, anchor there in six, seven or eight fathom, there it is good lying out of the current and sand ground but if you will anchor in twelve, thirteen or fourteen fathom, there it is soft ground, and there goeth a strong current with southerly or southeast winds, but you lie there better, in more room, for to sail inwardly again if it should happen that the wind did suddenly shift out to the northwest. It happened once to one of may acquaintance, that had anchored somewhat to the eastwards of the Kingsmill, in six or seven fathom and the wind did shift in the night to the northwest, when they weighed their anchor the ship fell towards the land, & before they could get the ship about before the wind, they did run in three fathom over the point of Lappesand.  
From Coll to Elsenure or the Sound, the course is southeast, & southeast and by south four or five leagues. About half ways betwixt Coll and Elsenburgh lie the Swyneboden, 
Swineboden.  which are some foul rocks, and sunken rocks, which lie off to seawards a good ways from the land, but when you sail towards the Sound coming from Col, then keep the Island Ween hidden behind the Castle Cronenburch, and then you cannot sail foul of the foresaid Swyneboden, when that you are passed them, then run in amidst the channel, for to avoid Lappesand, or else if you bring the east end of Ween, then again right without the castle, or keep in seven or eight fathom from the Sealands' side, you can not take hurt of Lappesand, 
For to avoid Lapposand.  when you are come within the castle, you may anchor where you please. The ships do commonly anchor all alongst by the land until to the southwards of Elsenure, there it is fifteen & sixteen fathom deep, but with a southeast wind it is bad lying there.  
Towards the Island Ween lieth a bank of eight or nine fathom, it is better lying there, but it is somewhat fare from the land.  

For to sail out of the Sound.  When you will sail out of the Sound towards Coll, & are come to the end of Lappesand, then go northwest and by west for to avoid the Swyneboden, until that Coll be northnortheast from you, then go boldly northwest and by north, or northnorthwest, according as the wind shall be, for with a north-east wind, you must run out northnorthwest very close alongst by Col, for to sail a weather of the riffs of Anout and Lesou.   

For to sail to Elleboge or Malmuyen, and Landscroone.  
If you will sail out of the Sound to Elleboge or Malmuyen, go from Ween southeast and southeast and by south, and then you shall see the steeple or the town lying before you, sail towards it, in that farewaye, it is most seven or eight fathom deep: when you come within the south Holmes, it will be five or six fathom deep, it doth shoal up suddenly, from the seven fathom to five, but before the town it is shoaler water, you may anchor there in three, four or five fathom if you will, you may lie also at the end of the Head, in three fathom, there it is good lying, but with a northwest wind it is a bad road, for it bloweth there open in.  
If you will run out again to the southwards of the south Holmes towards Fasterborne or Steden, you must take heed of the south Holmes, which are foul round about. From the north end shooteth off a riffe a great ways: Upon the east side, at the south end, it lieth very fare off shoal, there lieth also the Northuliet, 
Northuliet.  that is a ledge of rocks under water, but you may perceive it through the water, you shall leave it on the south Holmes side, to wit, on the starboard side of you: but the Southuliet, 
Southuliet.  which lieth thwart of Old Fasterborne, you shall leave on the larboard side, & so run through betwixt them, it is in that farewaye at the shoalest four fathom deep. When you come off from Malmuyen, and that the steeple of Coppenhaven come to the south end of the South Holmes, than you are passed the Northuliet. When you sail thus there through, you must be very careful to avoid these foresaid grounds. You may run out also alongst by the strand of Schoonen, and leave both the Northuliet lying on the starboard side: you may sound that strand in four and five fathom, as also the riffe of Fasterborne.  
He that will sail into Landscroone, 
Landscroone.  must know that there lieth a shoal before the haven's mouth, and must run in about to the southwards of it: there standeth a little church on the north side, by the water side and a Gentleman's house somewhat farther within the land, bring that church over the house, and then you are clear of the shoal, then sail in right with the point, and anchor in three fathom.  
To the northwards of old Fasterborne goeth in a deep, called Hull or Hulwater, 
Hulwater  it is a deep haven for ordinary ships, which goeth in most north-east in three or four fathom; you may sound it in alongst by the footstrand of old Fasterborne in three fathom, leaving old Fasterborne on the starboard side, it is there large & broad enough.   

How men shall sail out of the Sound, through the shoals or grounds, and into the Reefshol.  
He that will sail out of the Sound towards the shoals or Grounds, let him go on south and by east, or he may Sound alongst by the wood, in five or six fathom, and then he shall not sail a miss of the norther buy, 
Norther buy.  for it lieth in five or six fathom, on the north end of the Middle ground, to the eastwards of the buy, it is seven fathom deep, but in the right farewaye thwart of this buy, it is nine or ten fathom deep: the marks of this buy are, when that end of the wood is westsouthwest from you, than you are thwart of the norther buy, and there standeth then a flat steeple, a pretty ways to the southwards of that wood: there cometh also three hommocks to the north side of the town, these are all marks of the norther buy.  
From the Norther buy to the Middle buy, the course is south and by east. When you come by the Middle buy, then cometh the southermost mill on to the southwards of the town of Coppenhaven, and the flat steeple cometh within a handspikes length unto the sharp steeple, that are the marks of the Middle buy, or second buy in the shoals or grounds, it is here eight and nine fathom deep.  
From the Middle buy to the third, 
Third buy.  and forth to the buy upon Casper Caniell, the course is south and by east. When the white castle cometh over the sharp steeple, they are the marks of the fourth buy, or the buy upon the Casper Caniell, the third lieth at the south end of the Middleground, it is not there very broad, but steep on both sides, the deep thereabouts is seven or eight fathom: If you must turn to windewards there, you must cast about, so soon as it doth begin to shoal, as well on the one side as on the other.  

Buy upon Casper Caniel. Fisher.  The fourth buy lieth on the north end of Draecker upon the flat, over against it lieth a rock above water, called the Fisher, east & by north from the buy there you may well sound the south holm, for it is there shoal water. Betwixt the third and this sourth buy cometh running out a channel from Copenhaven, which men do call Casper Caniell, or the Kingsdeep.  
From the fourth buy or Casper Caniell, to Draker riffe, the course is south, & south and by east: the land of Draecker you may sound in three, four, and four fathom and a half.  
The Riffe of Draecker 
Riff of Draker.  lieth a good ways without Draker, it lieth off a half league east into sea. The marks of the buy upon Draker-riffe are these. When the steeple of Copenhaven cometh to the southwards of Draker to the wood, than you are thwart of the buy. The shoalest water that you shall find betwixt this buy upon Draecker riffe, and the foresaid fourth buy, is five fathom less two foot. For to sail by night through the shoals or grounds, go from the Island Ween south and south and by west, so long until that you come thwart of the point of the wood in four fathom, then keep somewhat off from the shore, and go on southeast & by east, until that you come in seven fathom, and then forth southsoutheast, until you be over the Middle ground, the first or northermost buy, as is beforesaid, lieth in five fathom, but you may well go over to the westwards of it, in three or four fathom, keep then somewhat off, until that you come in eight, nine, or ten and eleven fathom, and sail then on south unto Casper Caniell, there it will be by little and little shoaler, to wit, about 8 fathom. Thwart of Draker it is uneven for to sound, the one cast five and the other four fathom, but go your course, except you knew that you where nearer the one shore of Draker, or the south holmes, than the other. Without Draker it will be again 6 and 7 fathom deep. Full southeast from Draecker, about a good half league lieth a stone, three foot under water, and is about 2 rods length from the great where Cornelis jansz Buysman, from the streeck in September 1628. run upon with his ship.  
For to sail into Rifsholl or Copenhaven, coming from the northwards out of the sound; run along somewhat to the westwards of the Norther buy, for to avoid the plate, or Middle ground, which lieth to the westwards of the buys in the shoals, which upon the north end is not deeper than twelve foot, and on the south end eight, nine, and at some places ten foot deep, all hard stony and rocky ground, keep the sounding of the shore on the west side in two, three, or four fathom, so deep as you please, until you come before Copenhaven, on that side you can take no hurt, it is there broad and wide, and lieth in south & by west; in the midst betwixt the shore and the Middleground, it is 5, 6, and 7 fathom deep. If you should turn to windwardes there, then come not nearer the middleground then in four fathom, but the west shore you may run to by your lead, as you please.  
From the north end of the Island Draecker, runneth off a riffe to the northwards, upon the point of that riffe lieth a buy, which men do call the buy in the Reefsholl, 
Buy in- the Reefs haul.  leave that on the larboard side, and run in, until you come before the town, and anchor there. If you come from the southwards, and will sail unto Reefsholl, then run alongst to the eastwards of the foresaid fourth buy (which men do call the buy upon Casper Caniel) then luffe up presently about by it, and go on northwest into the Kingsdeep, unto the buy in Reefsholl, which lie one from the other due northwest, and southeast: you shall then also see right out a head, in the northwest within the land a flat steeple right over a great house or Hospital, that standeth close upon the seaside, keep them so one in the other, and sail right in with them, and so you shall run in right amidst the channel, it is there in the farewaye five, six, seven, & eight fathom deep. This Kingsdeepe is somewhat uneven of ground, therefore be careful in using of the lead, and come not too near the north side; that is the Middleground, which is very foul and rocky: from the south shore (about half ways betwixt the two s resaid buys) it lieth off somewhat shoal, of that you shall have at one cast five or six, & the other but 3 fathom.  
When you come by the buy in the Reefsholl, which lieth upon the point of the norther riffe of Draecker, leave that on the larboard side, and run on south about by it, unto Copenhaven. 
Marks of the buy in the Reefshol.  The Marks of this buy are these: there lieth a round hommock or great rock about half a league within the land, when that is right east from you, than it cometh right with a flat steeple which stands about a league within the land, than you are eventhwart of the buy, or point of the foresaid riffe. These marks will serve at times when the buy lieth not there. A little to the northwards of that buy lie the great ships which tarry for wind in five or six fathom, there is good anchor ground.  
From the buy upon Draker-riff unto Kuyck, 
Kuyck.  the course is south-west five great leagues, but unto the riff of Fasterborn, or Steden, it is south and south and by west 5 leagues, in the fareway betwixt Draecker and Fasterborn it is six, seven, and eight fathom deep, but between Fasterborn and Steden, 10, or 12, and 13 fathom, but by Steden deepest.  
Under Steden you may anchor as well to the southwards of it, for northerly, 
Road under Steden  as to the northwards for southerly winds. If you will anchor for northerly winds, then run in betwixt Steden and Meun, a good ways into the bay, so that the steep point of Steden lie about northnortheast from you, anchor there in 8 or 9 fathom, and you shall lie land-lockt for north and northwest winds.  
But if you will anchor for south or south-west winds, than anchor to the northwards of Steden, so that the southeast point be south and by east, or southsoutheast, and the northwest point northwest or westnorthwest from you, there it is good lying in seven fathom, the ground is there small white and blank sand. If you will set sail from thence to the shoals or grounds, then go not more northerly than north-east, so long until that you come by the riffe of Draker, then run about by it in five fathom.  
To the northwards of Steden the coast of Zealand goeth in with a great bay into Kuyck, it is there all to the westwards shoal water in five, six and seven fathom, and good anchor ground, so that you may anchor every where there abouts.  
The riffe of Fasterborne lieth off south-west to Seawards a league and a half. 
Marks of the riffe of Fasterborne.  It is a fowl stony and rocky riffe, upon the end of it lieth a buy in four fathom. You may run about by it upon your lead in five fathom with small ships of little draughts. Men do hold for a mark of this riffe that when the steeple of Fasterborn and the castle come one in the other, that then they are thwart of the point of the riffe. He that cometh from the northwards, and will sail about Fasterborne with a northerly or north-east wind, and that he will come somewhat near about the riffe, and cometh in five or six fathom, he must be very quick in using the lead. When old Falsterborne Church cometh half ways to the Castle and the Church of Fasterborne, then beginneth to come the worst and shoalest of the riff, that lasteth until that Old Fasterborn church cometh to the eastwards of the houses of Fasterborne, before that you are not past the riffe. If you should luffe up sooner about by it, you should run in great danger with a ship of great draught, you shall have (coming against the riffe) the one cast 4 or 5, and then presently three fathom upon it, all hard stony ground. Therefore it is best with a ship that draweth twelve or fourteen foot, to come no near this riffe then in six or seven fathom.  
If (when you come from the eastwards) you will sail about Fasterborne, and come alongst the shore with a north-east wind in six or seven fathom, and Falsterborne is about north, or northnortheast from you, than it shoaleth up very fast in two fathom, or two fathom and a half. Therefore keep you further off from the shore in ten or twelve fathom, so long until that the Castle be north-east, or north-east and by north from you or that old Falsterborne church come half way to the castle of Falsterborn and Falsterborn church, than you cannot sail upon the riff from the eastwards, but running about by it in five fathom, than you must be very careful in using your lead. But if you will come near the riff in four or five fathom, when old Falsterborn Church cometh to thee. end of Falsterborn, you shall run in great danger for to come on ground. When you come within the Riffe, you may run alongst by the coast of Schoonen in four fathom without taking hurt.  
He that cometh out of the Sound, and is bound to the southwards of Meun, may come so near Meun as he will, and lose up to the westwards by the point, and anchor where he please, in five or six fathom. On the north side of Meun you may also anchor in six fathom, behind a little riffe that shooteth off from the north point, for an east, southsouthwest and west wind, it is there all over flat, and good ground.  
From Meun to Steden, the course is northwest and by north four leagues, betwixt them both goeth in the Wolfsound, or Wolvegat, that runneth past Werdenborgh and Nest-veld through the Golversound out into the Belt.  
Meun and Fasterborne lie north and by east, and south and by west five leagues asunder.   

Of the Tides and Course of the streams.  
In the Scawe reach, betwixt Maelstrand and Waersbergen the stream goeth most still with the wind and it rippleth there sometimes in some places, as if there were shoals, this you may find in calm weather, if you let a lead sink to the ground.  
By the Scawe the Stream cometh most commonly falling out at the Belt towards the land of North-east, especially w●en the wind hath blown a while out of the east or no th'east, and runneth alongst by the Norway to the northwards.  
Men coming off from Anout, that will sail by night with a westerly wind, towards the Scawe: or coming from the westwards about the Scaw, with a southerly wind, being bound for the Sound, might soon be carried with this current under Norway, a good while before they should think or fear of it. Of this current read further in the first book.  
In this farewaye betwixt the Scawe and the Sound, & then from the Sound until about Fasterborne, it is exceeding necessary that a Pilot (or he to whom the charge is committed) be very careful in looking out, & be very vigilant, that he may avoid the multitude of dangers, of shoals and riffs lying there: the skilfullest and best experienced of all hath there enough to do.  
Through the Sound and the shoals or grounds, the stream runneth commonly with the wind, but the most part of the time to the northwards, before the coming of a hard east wind, or when it hath blown out of the east, than the stream runs still out the northwards.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the west end of the Pater-nosters to the Maelstrand, the course is eastnortheast 2 leagues.  
From Maelstrand to Winneu southeast 5 leagues.  
From Winneu to Maelsound southsoutheast 3 leagues.  
From Maelsound to Waersberghen southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Waersbergen to Tuylo southeast 5 leagues.  
From Tuylo to Laholme southeast and by east 5 leagues.  
From Laholme to the point of Turko behind Swedereur the course is westsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From Turko to Engelholme southeast 4 leagues.  
From Engelholme to Coll west 6 great leagues.  
From Maelstrand to Nyding southsoutheast 8 or 9 leag.  
From Maelsound to Nyding the couse is south-west and south-west and by west a league and an half.  
From Nyding to Waersbergen southeast about 5 leagues.  
From Waersbergen to Collsouth and by east 12 leagues.  
From the south end of Swedero to Coll south-west 4 leag.  
From the Riffe of the Scaw to Maelstrand eastnortheast 13 leagues.  
From the Riffe of the Scaw to Nyding southeast and by south 13 leagues.  
From the Riffe of the Scawe to Waersbergen eastsoutheast 20 leagues.  
From the Riffe of the Scawe to Coll alongst without the Trindle south 30 leagues.  
From the Riffe of the Scawe to Lesou southsoutheast 8 leagues.  
From the Riffe of the Scaw to the Trindel due southeast 8 leagues.  
From the Trindel to Anout riffe southeast, or as some will say somewhat more southerly. 10 leagues.  
From Anoutes riffe to Coll it is right southeast 10 leag.  
From Anouts riffe to Haselin south 11 leagues.  
From Coll to Haselin south-west and by west 8 leagues.  
From Coll to Elseneur, the course is southeast, & southeast and by south 5 or 6 leagues.  
From Lapsand to Ween southsoutheast 3 leagues.  
From Elseneure to the norther buy in the shoals or grounds, south and by east 6 leagues.  
From Elseneur to Landscroone eastsoutheast 4 leagues.  
From Ween to Malmuyen southeast and southeast and by south 6 leagues.  
From Malmuyen to Reefsholme west 5 leagues:  
From Malmuyen to Steden southsouthwest and south-west and by south 10 leagues.  
From the buy upon Draker-riff to Kuyck south-west, 5 great leagues.  
From the buy upon Draker-riff to Steden, the course is south and by west 5 great leagues.  
From the Buy upon Draker-riff to the buy upon Falsterbornes-riffe, the course is south 5 leagues.  
From Meun to Steden northwest and by north 4 leagues.  
From Meun to Falsterborne north and by east 5 leagues.  
From Meun to the buy upon Falsterborn-riffe north 4 or 5 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Britto. Waersbergen.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Maelstrand and Waersberghen.  
Thus showeth the Land of Waersbergen, when you sail alongst by it, from Anout into the sound.  
Thus showeth Anout, when you sail off from Lesou.  
Thus showeth Lesou when you sail from the Scawe towards it.  
Thus showeth Zealand, when you come from Anout, and will sail toward the Sound.  
Kol Elsenbergh Landscroon Persebeck Malmuyen Schooner Falsterborn.  
Thus showeth the Land of Schoonen off from Col unto Falsterborne, when you sail through the shoals or grounds.     

The fifth Demonstration, Where in Are showeth the Coasts of Norway, from the Pater-nosters to the Naze.  
THe west end of the rocks (which men do call the Pater-nosters 
Pater-nosters. ) and Harmanshead, lie northwest and by west somewhat Northerly, and south and by east somewhat southerly 5 leag. asunder, to the southwards of them men do sail into Maelstrand. Upon the Coast betwixt Farder and Maelstrand, is almost every where good anchor ground in 35 and 40 fathom.  
From Harmanshead to Southerwixholme the course is south and by east six leag. betwixt them lieth Boechschaer, but two leagues to the southwards of Harmansound lieth Kercksound, which is a great river, which lieth in far within the Land.  
Northerwixholm 
Northerwixholm.  and Southerwixholm, two great Islands, in a great sound, which lieth far & deep within the land, upon it (far within the land) lie many little towns, as Oldburgh, Oldwat, Alleroers, and Dragens, from thence cometh much fat ware. Southerwixholm 
Southerwixholm.  and the Island Akersound, lie northwest and by west, and southeast and by east six leagues asunder, and to Ottrom northwest five leagues.  
The Island Akersound men may sail round about it, to the northwards of it lieth a great Bay or Sound, lying in fare within the Land, called Ottrom. 
Ottrom.   
From the Island of Akersound, 
Akersound.  to the Sister the course is west & by north 4 leagues, betwixt them lieth the Graswijcke, 
Graswicke  within the Sisters, lying from Farder east north-east about 7 leagues. When you will sail in there, you must leave the sharp point on the larboard side, within lieth a round rock, which you may sail about on both sides, thwart of it is good anchor ground. North from this rock lieth a great Bay, fit for ships to lie in, that tarry for a wind, within lieth also a round rock. Men do run in alongst by the west land, which lieth in first north, & about the Island northnortheast, they leave the Island on starboard side, & run in northnorthwest by the west land. To the eastwards of Graswijcke, also betwixt the Sisters & Akersound lieth Shiphill, that is a Haven where men lad Spars and fat wares.  
From the Sisters 
The Sister.  unto Bast the course is northwest and by west five leagues. Behind the Sisters to the southwards of the point of Rogue, lieth the haven of Elffang, 5 leagues. When you come off from Farder, you go must distant from the Island Farder north-east and by east five leagues. When you come off from Farder, you must run through within the rocks, which lie within the Sisters, until you come against the land, there you shall find a great grey rock, which you must leave on the larboard side, and the small rocks that lie there within on the starboard side, and then alongst about by the west-land, & then the haven opens itself, which is narrow, & within flat and soft ground.  
When you sail from Farder or Bast unto Soen-water, you shall meet with a red point, betwixt the Soen-water and the Copperwycke. He that is bound into Soen-water must run alongst to the eastwards of it, but he that is bound into Copperwycke must go up alongst to the westwards of it and leave it on the starboard side. When that you come within the Lams, you shall espy a little Church upon the west-land, there is the lade place of the Copperwycke, 
Copperwijcke.  you may sail up from thence to Brakenes. On the north or east side lieth Holmsound, from Farther to the point of Rogue the course is northnortheast five leagues. At the east end of Rogue you may anchor, there is a plain strand, you may run through betwixt the Rogue 
Roge.  & the Calf, but anchor under Fletto, than you must run through within the two small rocks.  
From the Island Farther to the Soen-water, 
Soen-water.  the course is north, somewhat easterly but from Bast north and by east. The Soen-water lieth in most north. Upon it lie many havens and lad places, most on the starboard side as you come in. First there is Mos-sound, a Haven that goeth up to the eastwards, and then there is Wykestee, 
Wykestee  which is a bite behind an Island, afterwards Shiphill, 
Shiphill.  a sandbay and a very good road, that goeth so up alongst to the northwards into Anslo, and then it runneth about to the southwards into the Bottom.  
Custen van NOORWEGEN van Der Neus tot aen de Pater noster oock ho de seluige Landen van jutlant gelegen zyn.  
The Laerwyck 
Laerwyck  is a great broad Sound, where are many Bights and Lade-places, where men may lie and lad Firretimber. From the east point lieth off a great rane of rocks a good ways oft southeast and by east into sea, and run in almost half the Sound, called the Larwykes Swine's, where of men must take heed. Within in this Sound it is flat water and shoal, so that fare within no great ships can lie a float.  
A league to the eastwards of the Nesse, or east point of the Longsound, 
Stavange.  lieth Stavange, they are ome outrockes, where men may sail within on both sides to the eastwards of it lieth the Sound of Laerwyck.  
For to sail into the Nesse, 
The Nesse  that is on the north side behind the eastermost point of Longsound (you must run through betwixt the great rock, whereupon the Warder standeth, and the land of old Longsound, leaving the foresaid rocks on the starboard side, and so alongst about that rough Island, until you come into the Nesse, which lieth behind a chindle strand, there you shall lie under a chindle of rocks like red sand: There lie also some little rocks thwart of that chindle. This is a good handsome haven, and light for to come into, there it is four and twenty and five and twenty fathom deep.  
The Longsound is one of the fairest havens of all Norway, and lieth northnortheast from Jofferland distant one great league. Before old Longsound lieth a high round rock whereupon standeth a great round Warder, 
Coninxhaven.  for knowledge of this haven. Coninxhaven that is the southermost or westermost channel of the Longsound, & goeth in betwixt the westermost through point and Coning Island, and then men run alongst to the eastwards of the Baers, which lieth off from the foresaid rough point. For to sail in there, you must run in amid channel, and anchor in the Coningshaven in eight and twenty and thirty fathom.  
For to sail through within jofferland from Westkiell, the Sound lieth through the channel first north-east and north-east and by north, and then eastnortheast, and afterwards again north-east, and then you come to a place where the sound is somewhat broader, there lieth a sunken rock, which you must leave on the starboard side, and edge to the north shore. Being past that, you shall come again in a very narrow sound, which lieth through most north-east, and is at some places so narrow, that the yard arms do almost touch the rocks. Being through that narrow place, you must go north-east and by east, and eastnortheast, until you come thwart of the Longsound, than you may sail in there northnorthwest, 
Road Behind jofferland.  or sail into the sea as you will: Behind Jofferland you may also anchor in fifteen or twenty fathom.  
From the Baers unto the northermost rocks of Jofferland, that is the southermost or westermost point of Longsound, the course is southsouthwest a great league. going southsouthwest from with out the Baers 
The Baers  than you shall find a third part of water to Jufferland or shoal which you see quite under water about seven foot. Betwixt them both lie two havens, Eastkiell and Abbefoord, men sail in there to the eastwards of the out-rocks of Jofferland. From these foresaid northermost out-rocks of Jofferland unto Eastkiell, it is northwest about a league, but to Abbefoort northnorthwest and north and by west also a league. Men may (coming from the southwards, or from Westkiell 
Westkiel. ) sail through within Jofferland, into Eastkiell, or Abbefoort.  
When you come before Westkiel, you may see within the land three high hills, and also the high land of Long-sound, lying northwards from you, that land is altogether very easy to be known, he that seethe it once, and taketh regard of it, shall know it very well another time, when he cometh thereabouts.  
A league to the eastwards of Sandvoort lieth the haven of Westkiell, a little to the eastwards of it lieth Jofferland. For to sail into Westkiel, 
jofferland  you must leave all the great rocks (which lie off from Jofferland on the starboard side,) and all the foresaid little rocks of Sandvoort, and also a white holm whereupon a mast standeth on the larboard side, and run in first northwest and afterwards northnorthwest and at last north, until you come about the west point, and then you must edge up northwest to the north side of the Islands, which lie within the haven, there is a Vosse, or an Overfall of water, there you may anchor in twenty or five and twenty fathom.  
Thwart of Sandvoort lieth a bank at sea, which at some places is not deeper than three or four fathom, and lieth alongst to the eastwards until thwart of Westkiell.  
A great league to the eastwards of Sandvoort lieth Longen. For to sail in there you must leave all the little rocks on the starboard side, and run so alongst by the land until you come within the Long-holms which remain on the larboard side, and then right into the Bite. This is a fair haven, men come into it from the eastwards.  
When you are before Oxefordt and Longen, 
Marks of Oxeford. & Longen. Longhen.  than the Drommels lie about westnorthwest from you.  
A league to the eastwards of Oxeford lieth Longen before it lieth a little round Island or rock on the east side of the haven, upon which standeth a mast with a barrel upon a Warder. For to sail in there, you must run in close by that land where the Warder with the barrel standeth upon, close alongst by the Warder, but there standeth a hand on the starboard side of the haven's mouth, which pointeth that there lieth thwart of it a sunken rock under water, there you must edge somewhat off from the shore. Being within there, you may run to the eastwards again into sea, and come out in the Sound of Sand-voordt.  
About a league to the eastwards of Tromsound lieth the haven of Oxeford, 
Oxeford.  which is a great broad, and large Sound, lying in first without betwixt the rock, north. Without in the coming into the westwards of the haven's mouth, lieth a long rock, which you must leave on the larboard side, and somewhat past that long rock lieth a sunken rock, which you must leave on the starboard side and run in still north unto the west point of the land, thwart where of lieth a sunken rock which you must avoid, when that you come then within the west point, you must sail in northwest and northwest and by north, and anchor on the north side of the haven, there it is wide and broad, with many bights, where you may anchor every where in twenty and five and twenty fathom.  
About half a league to the eastwards of Maerdow standeth a little white Church upon the sea side, to the eastwards of it goeth in the Tromsound, 
Tromsound.  being a fair Sound. Without in the coming in, stand on the east or northside two Warders upon a high hill, you must sail in by them, and thwart of them you may also anchor, and from thence you may sail in further behind the Island Trom, and the land of Maerdow, until you come into the Sound of Maerdow.  
When the Drommels are northwest and northwest and by north from you, 
Marks of Maerdow  than you are right thwart of Maerdow. If you run in so out of the sea, right with the Drommels, you shall fall right with Maerdow, that is a certain mark to know whether you be thwart of Maerdow, or to the eastwards or the westwards of it, but when you are close before the land, or before the haven's mouth, you cannot see the Drommels, because they are then hidden of the cliffeland. To anchor under the Island there is the shoalest water, but with a northwest or northnorthwest wind, it is not so good to come from thence as out of the haven, but with an easterly wind it is better to set sail from thence and to get into sea.  
The Haven of Maerdow,  
Warder of Maerdow in the Haven.  
Trom.  
North or north & by east.  
Mieuholmes.  
N. or n. w. & by north.  
Island Maerdow.  
The eastergat lieth in westsouthwest there lieth a sunken rock on the starboard side, when you sail in, therefore you must run in close by the Island. It is not deeper there in the got or channel then three fathom, but being come within it, you shall find it deeper, you may anchor there under the Island in twelve or thirteen fathom, or you may run up to the westwards into the Sound, as is beforesaid.  

For to sail into Maerdow, through within the Mewholmes.  With a bare wind, or otherwise, you may sail also in, to this westergat of Maerdow, to the westwards of Miewholmes, thus: To the westwards of the southermost Miewholme, not fare from it, lie two little rocks, even above water, and a little further off from in two other rocks which are somewhat greater, you must run in amidst the channel through betwixt them, leaving the two smallest lying on the starboard side, and the two greatest on the larboard side, that channel lieth through most north and north and by east. Being come to the end of the Miewholmes; you may sail up either towards the north-east behind the Island Maerdow, or westwards into the Haven, as is beforesaid. There goeth sometimes a good tide out of this Haven, and the westerly winds do blow commonly out of this channel betwixt the high lands therefore he that will come in here with a westerly wind, must be very careful, and keep up his top sails, or else he should lightly not be able to get the haven, but drive out of it against his will.  
Thwart of the west end of the Island Maerdow 
Maerdow  lieth a sunken rock under water, whereof you must take heed, when you sail in thus to the eastwards of the Mieuholmes. When you are come within the foresaid west point or the Island Maerdow, you may run up towards the north-east behind it, & anchor in 12 or 13 fathom, or sail up towards the northnorthwest into the Sound, & anchor there on the west side in 16, 14, or 12 fathom, according as you sail fare in. In the going into the Sound, or haven, it is 34 fathom deep.  
The Island Maerdow standeth (upon the top of it) full of trees, and round about it are all bare rocks. On each side of the Island goeth in a channel. The wester gatt or channel goeth into the westwards of the Island, and the easter gatt to the eastwards of it. For to sail into the wester gatt, you must leave the Mewholmes (they are a fow rocks and Islands to the westwards of the Island of Maerdowe) on the larboard side, and the Island on the starboard side, and run in so betwixt them both northwest and by north, but with a south-west wind, you must sail in northwest. Upon the northermost Miewholme standeth a Warder.  
To the eastwards of Hamersound, men do go into Kercksound, 
Kercksound.  and then a half league more to the eastwards lieth the haven of Hesnes. Upon the land of Hesnesse 
Hesnesse.  stand two Warders: thwart of them it is very steep, but towards the little church it is shoaler, to wit, about thirty fathom: the outrockes  are all red of colour.  
On the west side of the haven's mouth lieth a sunken rock under water, called the Koenagle, upon the land stand two little masts, when they come one in the other, than you are thwart of the Koenagle. The two foresaid little masts, stand upon a grey Holme, leave that on the starboard side, and go so still inwardly, there it is high land, and the Drommels lie from thence northnorthwest within the land, there you may sail through within the rocks, until you come into Maerdow.  
To the eastwards of old Hilsound lieth Hamersound, 
Hamersound.  lying in northnortheast. On the west side of the Havens mouth lieth a sunken rock which you must avoid, and sail close alongst by the Island, which lieth on the east side of the haven's mouth, and anchor behind the Island right against the Warder, in thirty fathom. The easter-gatt lieth to the eastwards of that Island, in and out northwest, and southeast: upon the west side lieth a rock with a Warder.  
To the eastwards of Wolfsound lieth old Hill-sound 
Old Hill-sound.  but betwixt them both, at the point of the west side of old Hill-sound lieth the Island of Blindsound, to the eastwards of it lie many great rocks, with two or three Warders upon them.  
For to sail into the old Hill-sound, you must run alongst to the eastwards of Blindsound with the rocks that lie by it, in by the west land, leaving them on the larboard side, and the foresaid great rocks or Holmes with the Warders altogether on the starboard side, there are divers fair sounds, where men may sail into and anchor in, without taking hurt. You may edge up to the westwards about the point, and sail through betwixt the Islands, that you can not see the sea.  
On the east side of Reperwyck lieth Wolfsound, 
Wolfsound.  before it lie two great Islands, which show themselves in high grey Rocks, with three or four Warders upon them, whereby you may know them.  
Wolfsound is a narrow haven for to sail into, there stand two masts upon the west-land, where you must go in close by, leaving them on the larboard side, and some little rocks on the starboard side, until that you come within the great Island, whereupon the great Warders stand, there you may anchor, and lie landlockt for all winds. From thence you may run forth through within the rocks and come out again into the sea, by the old Hill-sound, or you may run out also at the Eastergat of Wolfsound, there standeth a great Warder on the west side of the got, upon a round high rock, there you may sail out or in by it where you will.  

Reperwijck.  Three leagues to the eastwards of Fleckerie lieth Reperwyck, a broad and wide Sound, lying in north, & north and by west. For to sail in there you must run in by the land of Wolfsound (lying on the east side of this haven) leaving all the rocks (& also where the mast of Wolfsound do stand upon) on the starboard side, and all the rocks of Ransound on the larboard side, until that you come to the end, or within in the haven, and then you must edge up to the westwards about the point, and anchor there, that is a good haven for ships that are bound to the westwards.  
About three leagues eastnortheast from Holysound and eight leagues to the eastwards of the Naze, lieth the haven and Island Fleckerye, 
Fleckerie.  you may sail in at both sides of the Island, as well from the westwards, as from the eastwards into the haven of Fleckerie. 
The wester got of Fleckerie.  The wester got lieth in northnortheast. When you come of from Holysound than you see open into the Sound, you must sail alongst by the Rocks without Holysound, until you come within the Island Fleckerye, and edge than westwards towards the land, until you come within the Dieveholme, where the gallows standeth upon, and anchor by the west land, in fifteen, sixteen, or twenty fathom: You must bring out there an anchor a head, and make a cable fast on the rocks upon the land. You may run from thence to the eastwards of the Island Fleckerie, out again at the Easter-gatt eastnortheast into sea, and then you must leave the little Island within the Warders, which lieth at the east end of the Island Fleckerie, with all the great rocks by it on the starboard side, and all the black holmes on the larboard side.  
The Easter-gatt of Fleckerie goeth in westnorthwest, betwixt the Island Fleckerie and the point of Ransound. When you come before it, you may see open in the Vosse. For to sail in there, you must leave all the black rocks thwart of the point of Ransound on the starboard side, & the great grey rocks with the little Island, where the Warders stand upon, on the larboard side, when as you come then by the forenamed Dievenholme, you must run to the westwards of it into the Sandbay, aod anchor there, as is beforesaid.  
When you are thwart of the Easter-gatt of Fleckerie, than there lieth right thwart from you within the land a high round hill, which men do call the Boat turned up side down, which lieth out above all the lands thereabouts, and coming from the westwards against Fleckerie, there show also three high double lands, which by little and little seem to go to nothing towards the Drommels.  
Three leagues eastwards of Scheersont lieth the Island called Holysound 
Holysound.  whereupon stand two great Warders, you must sail in westwards that Island alongst by Geve, which is a great high black cliff which is the mark to know the land by, you must leave them in your sailing in on your larboard side, till you are within then you may anchor under the foresaid Island, thereabouts runneth a great bay in towards the land, where you may sail in, and where many ships do lad.  
A little to the eastwards of Sparrels lieth a haven called Scarsound, or Westrysen, for to sail in there, you must leave Sparrels to the westwards on the larboard side, and all the great Holmes or rocks to the eastwards on the starboard side, and run so inwards until you come into the haven.  
From the Naze (that is the southermost point of Norway on the north sea) westwards, the coast lieth somewhat alongst by the land of Leest, westnorthwest; but to the eastwards of it (alongst without the rocks, until past the Island Fleckerie) eastnortheast about ten leagues. From thence alongst north-east unto the Longsound about 16 leagues. This coast is all alongst full of high steep stony hills and without it full of many rocks very strange to behold, but it hath many fair deep Havens, with very good anchor ground, where in great abundance of timber and boards laden. The first Haven to the eastwards of the Naze, 
The kloof Cow & Calf.  is called the Kloof or the Cow & Calf, after two high hommockes, easy to be known, the one somewhat greater than the other, which lie within the Haven upon the high land, and are so called by the Dutch Schippers. He that will sail into this Haven coming from the westwards, shall meet with a great rock somewhat to the eastwards of the Naze, called Melyn, where upon is a Warder, being past that he shall find another outrock, where upon standeth also a Warder, called Sparrels. Betwixt these two outrockes, he must run into this haven the Kloof. When he cometh against Sparrels, there lieth a sunken rock under water, where of he must take heed. Somewhat within Sparrels lieth an other Rock in the farewaye, but above water, which he must leave on the larboard side. In sailing in so, the haven doth open itself, by little and little, and so shall come against the Kloof: being come within it he must edge up to the westwards, about the point, and anchor there in a sand bay, in fifteen or sixteen fathom, so that the two foresaid hommocks the Cow and the Calf stand about north-east from him.  

Of the streams on these Coasts.  
Although the water on these Coasts of Norway doth ebb and flow beyond Bergen as fare as Stadt nevertheless it keepeth no certain tide, in sometimes of the year and principally in the Spring time there goeth such a strong stream about west alongst Norway that a ship having a south-west storm shall not be able to stem it, when it can bear sail. How nearer you come under the land of Norway so much the stronger goeth the stream. This stream falleth out of the Belt, on against the land from the north-east, and turneth so alongst by the Coast of Norway towards the north Sea. Read more largely of this in the description of the Belt.   

How these lands do lie one from the other and from other lands.  

From the west end of the Pater-nosters to Harmanshead north and by west somewhat northerly 5 leagues.  
From Harmanshead to southerwixholm north and west 6 leagues.  
From Southerwixholm to Akersound southeast and by east 6 leagues.  
From Akersound to the Sister's west and by north 4 leagues.  
From the Sisters to Bast northwest and by west 5 leag.  
From the Red-poynt to Bast southsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From Coperwijck to Bast south and by east 4 leagues.  
From Soen-water to Farther south somewhat westerly 8 leagues.  
From Bast to Farther south and by east 5 leagues.  
From Monck Island, or Rogue, to Farther southsouthwest 5 leagues.  
From the Sisters to Farther south-west and by west four leagues.  
From Farther to Laerwijck westsouthwest 4 leagues.  
From the Island Farther to the Longesound westsouthwest 8 leagues.  
From the Longesound to the jofferland southsouthwest one great league  
From jofferland to Maerdow south-west 8 leagues.  
From jofferland to Fleckory south-west 19 leagues.  
From Eastrysen to Maerdow southsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From Maerdow to Wolfsound, or Reperwyck westsouthwest 8 leagues.  
From Maerdow to Blindsound south-west 6 leagues.  
From Blindsound to Wolfsound south-west 3 leagues.  
From Wolfsound to Fleckory south-west and by west and westsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From Reperwijck or Wolfsound to the Naze westsouthwest 11 leagues.  
From Fleckory to the Naze westsouthwest 8 leagues.  
From Schare sound to the Naze westsouthwest 3 leag.  
From the Naze to the Holmes in Jutland southeast 19 or 20 leagues.  
From the Naze to Boevenbergen southeast and by south 24 leagues.  
From the Naze to Holyland the Course is south and by east and southsoutheast 67 or 68 leagues.  
From the Naze to the Eems, south, somewhat easterly 75 or 76 leagues.  
From the Naze to Bornriffe south, somewhat westerly 83 leagues.  
From the Naze to the Tessel or Maersdeep, the course is south and by west distant 93 leagues.  
From the Naze to Walcheren south and by west 125 or 126 leagues.  
From the Naze to the Head, or the Straight betwixt Calais and Dover, the course is southsouthwest, or somewhat more westerly 143 leagues.  
From the Naze to the Holmes before Yarmouth southsouthwest, somewhat westerly 104 leagues.  
From the Naze to Flambrough head south-west 100 leagues.  
From the Naze to Scarborough south-west 99 leagues.  
From the Naze to the river of Newcastle south-west & by west somewhat westerly 104 leagues.  
From the Naze to Liet in Scotland westsouthwest somewhat westerly. 103 leagues.  
From the Naze to Boecknesse west, somewhat northerly 88 or 89 leagues.  
From the Naze to Fayrhil westnorthwest 93 leagues.  
From the Naze to Hitland the course is northwest and by west about 100 or 101 leagues.  
From the Kloof or the Cow and Calf to the Scaw the course is east and by south, somewhat easterly 30 leagues.  
From Fleckory to the Holmes in Jutland southeast and by south 19 leagues.  
From Fleckory to the Scaw east and by south 25 or 26 leagues.  
From Reperwycke to the Scaw east and by south and eastsoutheast 24 leagues.  
From Maerdow to the Holmes the course is south 24 leagues.  
From Maerdow to the Scaw southeast and by east 20 or 21 leagues.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Calf cow.  
Thus showeth the Cow and Calf, being four or five leagues north and by east from you.  
Calf cow.  
Thus showeth the Cow and Calf, when you come from the westwards, and are thwart of them.  
Thus showeth the Naze, being four or five leagues west from you.  
Thus showeth the land to the eastwards of Longsound, when you are about five leagues off from the land, and sail from the westwards alongst by it.  
The Naze. The land of Spranger.  
Thus showeth itself the land of Norway, betwixt the Naze and Fleckory, when you are about five leagues off from it.  
Fleckery. The Boat. Wolfsound. Hamersound.  
The land betwixt Fleckory and Maerdow, or the Drommels, showeth thus, when you come from the westwards, and sail alongst by it.  
Drommels. Hill to the northwards of the Drommels. East Drommels. The land of westkiel.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Maerdow and Longsound, when you are about Langen, five leagues without the land.  
Distelbergh. Long. Britto.  
Thus showeth the land of North-east betwixt Southerwycksholme and Maelstrand, when you sail alongst by it, being four leagues without the land.   

De Custen van NOORWEGEN Tusschen Der Neus en Schui: tenes     

The sixth Demonstration, In which Are set forth the Coast of Norway, between the Naze and Schuytenes.  
A Little to the westwards of the point of the Naze lie two havens, New and Old Silloe, or Silleu; some do call these one haven (like as also men may do) and distinguish it into an easter and westergat or Haven, for men can go with boats through within the rocks from the one into the other, but not with great ships.  

Silloe.  For to sail into the eastergat, or New Siloe you must take heed of the Bishops Boeden, which are a few out-rocks a little to westwards of the point of the Naze, right before the midst of the Sound, leave them on the larboard side, & sail in alongst by the land of the Naze until you come somewhat within the foresaid Bishops Boede, and then you shall find there also a sunken rock, which you must avoid, run about to the northwards of it and edge then up to the westwards behind the Island of New Silloe, and anchor there against the white Church within the foresaid rock.  
For to sail into the westergat, or Old Silloe, 
Old Silloe  you must run about to the westwards of the out-rocks, and Bishops-Boeden, and sail right with the south end of the land of Leest; 
The Land of Leest.  being come by it, run to the eastwards alongst by it, but take heed of some rocks, which lie off from the innermost Island on the starboard side, being there within anchor against the Island, where you please.  
From the Naze to the Island Hitteroe, 
Hitteroe.  or Hittereu, the coast lieth alongst the land of Leest westnorthwest 5 leagues. To the southwards or the westwards of that Island men do sail into the haven of Windfoord, 
Windfort  which lieth in north-east, but to the northwards of it men do run into Berg-sound, 
Berg-sound.  eastnortheast in betwixt the Island and the land.  
In that Island is also a good haven, which you must sail into from the northwards, the haven's mouth is not very wide when you are come in within it, you may edge up to the eastwards or southwards, and anchor there.  
Two leagues to the northwards of Hitteroe lieth a haven called Soggendall, 
Soggendall.  there lieth a little Island before it, within men may anchor, it is a good road for them which are bound to the southwards. Betwixt them both, not fare without the land, lie two out-rocks alongst the shore, called Fock-stones, the one lieth a little more to the seawards then the other.  
A league to the northwards of Soggendall lieth Ekesound, 
Ekesound  before it lieth an Island, which you may sail into on both sides of it, the southergat lieth in north-east; being come in there you must anchor on the north side of the haven in a bay, there is the best road in eight or nine fathom, the norther got lieth into the eastwards; being come in there, you may anchor at divers places. Two leagues to the northwards of Ekesound lieth a haven called Sirowach. 
Sierowag.   
For to sail in there, coming from the northwards; you must run in right with the southermost sand bay until you come close by the shore, and then the haven doth open itself, loof up close alongst by the north shore, then run up by it to the southwards, and avoid the west point, thwart of it lieth a sunken rock twelve foot under water; being there within, let your anchor fall in seven or eight fathom, and bring a cable on the west shore, than you shall lie land-lockt for all winds. This is a good haven for those which are bound to the northwards.  
To the northwards of Sierowach lieth the land the Jedder, which lieth from Sierowach first northwest and by north two great leagues to point Walbert, or Mids-Iedder, and the north four leagues, which is altogether a clean whole coast, without any dangers or havens, except at the very north end, from which runneth off a little riffe northwest into sea, towards the Veetstone.  
The Veetstone 
Veetstone  is a great rock; lying about two leag. without the land, lying northnorthwest from Mids-Iedder five leagues, betwixt them both, a great league to the southwards of the Veetstone, lie some low black rocks, called Rut. When as you sail from Mids-Iedder on northnorthwest towards the Veetstone, than the Veetstone doth show himself very round, like a haycock, and sailing so, you might lightly fall with the foresaid rocks of Rutilio, 
Rut.  but being a little more to seawards, the Veetstone showeth itself a little longer on the west side, than you cannot take hurt of the rocks of Rut.  
About two leagues northnorthwest from the Veetstone lieth an Island, whereupon standeth a Church called Whiting eye, 
Whitings-eye.  but northnortheast from the Veetstone 4 leagues, lieth another Island before the sound of Stavanger, called Sibrichstone. 
Sibrichstone.   
If you will sail into Stavanger coming from the southwards, then sail through betwixt the Veetstone and the main land, leaving also the foresaid rocks of Rutilio, lying on the starboard side, but you must take very good heed of that little stoneriffe which lieth off from the north end of the jedder; sail in so until that the Veetstone do lie south-west from you, then go in north-east towards the point of Tongenes, which is a long point and low land on the south side of the Sound.  
When as you sail now from the Veetstone towards Tongenes, 
Tongene●  than you shall see that Island Sibrich stone before the Sound, which doth show itself in two parts, leave that on the larboard side, and sail in by the point of Tongenes, but there lieth a rock off to the northwards from the point: sail through betwixt the rock and the point, 
Doeswyk  about east or eastsoutheast into Doeswycke; when you are within the castle of Doeswycke, there you may anchor. But if you will sail in further before the town of Stavanger, 
Stavanger  then leave the Diefholm on the starboard side, and sail in southeast and southsoutheast before the town, and anchor there where you please.  
But when as you come from the northwards, and will sail to Stavanger, then run through betwixt the Veetstone & the Whitings-eye, & then go on north-east towards Sibrichstone, and the point of Tongenes, and do further as hath been before taught.  
From the Veetstone to Schuytenes, 
Schuytenes.  the course is northnorthwest five leagues: but from Schuytenes to Sibrichstone through betwixt Whitings-eye, the course is east, five leagues.  
Four leagues west and west and by north to seawards from Schuytenes lie the rocks called the Outseers. 
Outseers.   
Gaeltje jans Steerman of Staveren coming from Schuytenes and being about three or four leagues from it hath cast upon eighteen fathom and about eighteen leagues south and by west sailing, found 38 and 39 fathom & going yet 5 leagues further upon the same course found 24 and 25 fathom, and yet 9 leagues further sailing south and by west & found 23 fathom water fine sandy ground and afterwards four and twenty and five and twenty.  

Of the streams on these coasts.  
On these Coasts of Norway off from the Naze, until past Berghen unto Stade, the water riseth and falleth, but keepeth no certain tide: but from thence towards Dronten, and to the northwards of it, it keepeth tied according to the moon, like as in other places.   

How these lands do lie one from the other and from other lands.  

From the Naze to Hitteroe the course is westnorthwest 5 and 6 leagues.  
From Hitteroe to Ekesond the course is northwest 4 leagues.  
From Ekesound to Sierowach the course is northwest & by north 2 leagues.  
From Sierowach to Mids-Iedder, northwest and by north two and a half league.  
From Mids-Iedder to Rutilio northnorthwest 4 leagues.  
From Rutilio to the Veetstone north and by west a league and a half.  
From the Veetstone to Sybrichstone, northnortheast 4 leagues.  
From the Veetstone to Schuytenes northnorthwest 5 leagues.  
From Sybrichstone to Schuytenes through within Whiting eye west 5 leagues.  
From the Naze to Outseers northwest 31 leagues.    

Heights.  

According to the judgements of the Maps the Corner of the Naze lieth in 57 degrees 40 minutes.  
Schuytenes lieth in 58 degrees 36 minutes.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Thus showeth the land of the Jedder, when it is north-east five leagues from you.  
Thus showeth the land of the Jedder, when it is eastnortheast 5 or 6 leagues from you.     

The seventh Demonstration, In which is set down How you may sail up into the Liet of Bergen.  
BEtwixt Schuytenesse & Bock goeth in the Liet of Bergen. Schuytensse is about four leagues long, at the south end lie some sunken rocks and fowl grounds; for to avoid them coming in out of the sea, you must keep the top of Bock a little without the point of Schuytenesse, and then you shall go clear of them; But if you bring Bock close by or to the point of Schuytenesse, and sail so right in for to run about close by the point of Schuytenesse, you shall surely sail upon those foresaid sunken Rocks and fowl grounds.  
From the south end of Schuytenesse, the Liet lieth in first north and north and by west two leagues to the great Warder, 
The great Warder.  which is a road so called after four great Warders, which stand there thwart of it upon the land of Schuytenes, for the knowledge of this road: there lie commonly the ships that tarry for a wind, being bound either to the northwards or to the southwards, there it is very good lying in five, six, 7 or 8 fathom, as well for northerly as southerly winds, you may also anchor to the northwards of the Warders about a point in five, six, eight, ten and twelve fathom, there you shall lie landlockt for southerly winds.  
A little to the southwards of the Warders lieth a Bay, 
Coperwijke.  called the Coperwyke, within it is also a good haven for them which are bound to the eastwards, and will set sail with a west wind: when a easterly or northerly wind, you can not well shift roads from thence or come out. At the coming in to this Bay lies a sunken rock, called the Coppernaile, 
Coppernaile.  upon it standeth always a great Pole, where by you may see to avoid it.  
Without at the south point of Schuytenes on the east side is also a little Bay or two, where men may anchor.  
A little to the northwards of Bock, on the east side of the Liet is also a Bay, called Bock-haven, 
Bock-Haven.  where men may come to anchor.  
All these roads, as also the Coperwycke, are good for those which coming from the southwards, by reason of contrary winds can not get to the great Warders.  
A little more southerly than the Coperwycke, on the east side of the Liet to the northwards of the Bock, lieth in north into the land, a Sound, which showeth itself (when you come from the southwards) much broader than the right fareway, so that those that are not there very well acquainted, should not think otherwise, but that it was the right channel, and so should lightly go up a contrary way. Therefore it is necessary & needful to sail close alongst by Schuytenes, and not go off from the west shore, until you come thwart of Coperwycke, than you shall be within the point of the foresaid Sound.  
Pascaerte vaned Liedt van BERGEN, Beginnende van Schuitenes tot aen Bergen.  
About a great half league by north the great Warder, lieth Notou, 
Notou.  there standeth a little white church and some houses, thwart of it in the Bay is also good anchoringh for northerly winds, and good road for them which are bound to the northwards. Likewise see it is good anchoring by north the point of Notou, for them which are bound to the southwards. Almost at the north end of Schuytenesse, is also a road, called Sichstreame, where is also good lying.  

Sichstream.  At the north end of Schuytenesse lieth a little Island, when you sail up or down the Lieth, you can see through betwixt them into sea. At this Island is alsoo a good road under a rock, or Island, called Wybrants-eye, 
Wybrants' eye.  there it is good anchoring for all winds.  
Betwixt that foresaid Island and the main land, you must sail through a narrow strait, which is but a little more than a ships length broad; on the east side where of, which is on the side of the main land, there lieth a little rock; or sunken rock, therefore you must sail close by the west side that is close alongst by the Island for to avoid the foresaid rock.  
From Wybrants-eye over the Bommel 
The bommel.  to the Blocx, the course is northnorthwest, but first somewhat more westerly, about two leagues, betwixt them both it is on the west side a broken land, great and little Islands and rocks. About half ways betwixt them both goeth a channel into sea, where men do sail much in & out, and it is clean, broad, and wide. He that will run out there (coming from the northwards) may easily espy it, when he is a half league past the Blocx. On the west side lie two little Islands or great rocks, which show much greater than the other rocks, these you must leave on the larboard side, and run out by them southsouthwest into the sea.  
He that will run in here out of the sea, he shall (when he cometh to the end of Schuytenesse) see many little Islands or rocks, he must sail past all these, until that he get sight of those foresaid two great rocks, and then in by them leaving them on the starboard side; & so he shall come somewhat to the southwards of the Blocx 
The Blocx  or Longholme into the Lieth.  
The Blocx are 2 rocks, lying very near even with the water, which you must leave on the larboard side, in sailing up, and run close alongst by the east shore, through betwixt the Blocx and Longholm. 
Longholm.  Longholme lieth a little above the Blocx, within it is a good Haven, where is good lying. A little to the northwards of it lie 2 rocks more, thwart of them lieth a sunken rock, which you must avoid.  
From the Blocx alongst over the Bommel it is yet two leagues, first north, and then northnortheast, all alongst by the land of Bommelhead, the south end of this land is a high steep point, called Bommelhead to the southwards of it runneth a channel westsouthwest into the sea called Bommell-sound. 
Bommell-sound.  This channel is easy to be known, coming in out of the sea. The land of Bommelhead is about 4 leagues long, and the first long Island to the northwards of Schuytenesse, it is altogether low plain land except on the south end, which is so steep a point, as if it were hewn right off with an Axe. About the midst between both ends of this Island (on the sea side) lieth a very high round hill, called Sick, 
Sick.  of fashion almost like a sugarloaf or a man's hat, and lieth fare above all that low land, which you may easily see at both the ends of this Island, and also further, where by it is very easy to be known.  
For to sail into this foresaid channel out of the sea, you must bring that steep point of Bommell-head 
Bommell-head.  east north-east, or somewhat more northerly from you, and sail then towards it. And then you shall leave a great many little Islands and rocks on the starboard side, and the foresaid point on the larboard side, and close in about by it to the northwards.  
A little about this point of Bommelhead, on the Innerside lieth a Haven, called Bommelhaven, there lieth a rock before the mouth of it, and also a sunken rock betwixt that rock and the north point of that Haven: He that will go in there, must go into the southwards of the rock, in betwixt the south point & the foresaid rock, leaving the rock on the starboard side of him. So soon as men are within the Haven, they must let fall their anchor, within it is broad and wide, and men lie there landlockt for all winds.  
At the end of the bommel lieth Munsterhaven 
Munsterhaven.  in the land of Bommell-head, on the west side of the Lieth, even about the point. This is also a good haven for them which are bound to the southwards, and by reason of contrary winds cannot get further, there standeth a little white church thwart of it men must anchor in ten or twelve fathom.  
From Munsterhaven to Beulhave it is north an English mile, there is also good anchoring for southerly winds, 
Beulshaven.  further it is north, somewhat easterly to Volger-roade, 
Volger-road.  before it lieth a little Island, under it, or by it on the one side or other men may anchor for all winds. Men may also sail round about it, and run in and out at both sides of it, if they will.  
From Munsterhaven to Bremer-holme the Liet lieth north, somewhat easterly about two leagues, 
Bremer holm  there the Liet is divided into 2 parts, to wit, into the Old and the New Liet: The old Liet goeth through to the eastwards of Bremer-holme and the Island that lieth to the northwards of it, but the new land alongst to the westwards of it.  
The Old Liet 
Old Liet.  is not well to be used by them, which are not there very well acquainted, also great ships that draw twelve or thirteenfoot, may not go through there.  
Somewhat more than thwart of the midst of Bremer-holme, in the narrow of the Old Liet, lieth a shoal where upon is no more than thirteen or fourteen foot water. A little to the northwards of it on the east shore lieth a bay called Ingesound, where is good anchoring: there lieth also a bay on the west side, half ways betwixt that foresaid shoal & Bremerholm, where men also may anchor.  
The New Liet 
New Liet  is broad & deep enough. Thwart of Bremer-holme, in the fareway, nearest the west side lieth a sunken rock, where of you must take heed. For to avoid it, you must mark the Island before Volger road. If you keep it so that you may see it without the north-poynt of Volgher-roade, than you cannot come too near that sunken rock: but if you bring that Island behind the foresaid point, so that you cannot see it, you shall without fail, sail right upon it; you must observe these marks as well in sailing up as in sailing off.  
In the midst of the New Lieth lieth Ruighe-holme, 
Ruighe-holme.  there men lie with ships fast unto two Rings: the one is upon the Island, and the other upon the point to the northwards of it, where they bring out Cables to.  
From the New Lieth to the point of Redholme, 
Redholm.  it is northnortheast a half league, betwixt them both goeth out the Soltmerfioerd westsouthwest into sea, which is a fair broad & large channel. On the south side lie some sunken rocks, but if you run out amidst the channel, you can take no hurt of them.  
At sea men do know this Soltmerfioerd 
Soltmerfioerd.  by that foresaid high and round hill Siecke, which is very easy to be known, & lieth two leagues to the southwards of it, about half ways betwixt this Sound & Bommel-sound. The land on the south side of Soltmerfioerd towards Sick, are small white rocks, which you must leave on the starboard side, and run in so amidst the channel eastnortheast, and then you can take no hurt of those foresaid sunken rocks, lying on the south side of this channel. There lieth also a sunken rock at sea before this Sound on the south side a little off from the north point of the land of Bommell-head, with hard winds out of the sea, the sea breaketh very much upon it, but it lieth at least five or six fathom under water.  
When as you come in there, you have Redholm on the larboard side, and you must run north-east alongst by it, until you come about the foresaid point.  
From the point of Redholme to the Narrow it is north, & through the Narrow northnorthwest & north & by west at least a half league. In this straight it is so narrow, that you can but even turn through it on the west side of the straight lieth a little Island, thwart of it is good anchor-ground in 13 & 14 fathom.  

Rhine Knaep.  From the strait to the Rhine Knape, the course is northwest, and by north two leagues: this is a little Island without trees, clean round about, which you may sail about on both sides.  
Thwart of Rhine Knaep on the east shore lieth Deepesound, a good haven for them which are bound to the southwards, 
Deep sound.  the mouth of it is narrow, and also but three fathom deep, but within it is broad & large, and twenty fathom deep. Alongst to the westwards of the Rhine Knaep, it is broadest, to the eastwards lieth a point, & by it a little Island you may sail through betwixt the point & the little Island. From the Rhine Knaep to Bag-holme, the course is north & by east a great league: Betwixt them both lie some Islands and rocks, all which you must leave lying on the starboard side, there you may at divers places sail through and within these Islands and rocks, and at last come out again by Bag-holme into the Liet, but it is not to be done but for them that are there extraordinary well acquainted. Men might lightly get in amongst these Islands and rocks, so that they should not know how to come out again. At the east side of Bag-holm men may anchor, but there shooteth off a little ledge of rocks from the north end, whereof they must take good heed.  

Crabkerk.  From Bag-holme to Crab-kerke it is north about three quarters of a league, this is an indifferent haven for southerly winds, but it is little, there can lie no more than two or three ships.  
From Crabbe-kercke to Bock up Ramires, it is north, somewhat easterly a league, betwixt them both runneth out the Crosse-sound, or Cruysvoert westsouthwest, and south-west and by west into sea, which sound is very easy to be known at sea, by three hills (almost like the Drommels on the east side of Norway, but not so high) which lie there abouts within the land, which are also called by some the north Drommels, 
North-D●ōmels.  when they are north-east, or thereabouts from you, than you are open before the Crosse-sound. Before the mouth of it lieth a little Island nearest the south side, from which lie off some rocks to seawards, the broadest and largost channel is alongst to the northwards of it you may well also sail through to the eastwards of the Island betwixt it and the land, but there it is narrow, yet clean & clear without any dangers. When you are within it, you must go in alongst eastnortheast and north-east & by east, & so shall come into the Liet against Cruysenes, a little to the southwards of Bock up Ra.  
Bock up Ramires 
●ock up Ra.  is a little Island which you may sail about on both sides, alongst to the westwards of it is the common fareway, and also deepest. When as you sail about to the eastwards of it, and come to the north end of Bock, there it is very narrow, and there right in the fareway (somewhat nearer the east shore than Bock) lieth a sunken rock, there standeth always a pole upon it, for to avoid it, you must leave it on the starboard side, and run alongst to the westwards of it. Betwixt this Rock and Bock, it is no deeper than sixteen foot. Right to the westwards thwart of Bock lieth an other Island, under it you may also anchor in Bock-lieth. To the westwards of this Island goeth through the Cobbelieth, 
Cobbeliet  which men do sail through with bare winds, or when they must turn through, because it is broader than on either side of Bock up Ra.  
From Bock to the Wattingstream 
Wattingstream.  it is north a league, there you cannot sail amiss. If you do not sail against the land, for there lie no dangers, except at the west shore lieth a sunken rock close by the land, whereupon remaineth at low water about ten foot water. Upon the end of Watting stream, the course is north west about a shot of a cast piece, or a quarter of a league, and then you come thwart of little Alefioerd, 
Little Alifioerd.  which is a haven on the west shore, where is good anchoring both for a north & south wind, under a high round Island, where you shall lie land-lockt. From thence to the Reestone 
Reestone.  it is north about two leagues, betwixt them both on the west shore lieth great Alefioerd, 
Great Alefioerd.  which is also a haven both for northerly and southerly winds, thwart of it the fareway is about two musket shot broad. The Reestone is a rock under water, lying by the point, where the two high hills stand, which men do call the Lethoorns, 
Lethorns.  these are two high sharp hills, which men may see fare off, as they sail up or off that Lieth. Upon the Reestone standeth always a Pole, that thereby men may avoid it. You may also sail alongst to the eastwards of it, but to the westwards of it is broadest, and the right fareway, over against it on the west shore lieth Knorwyck, 
knorwike.  a haven where men may also anchor.  
From the Reestone to Werckenesse, 
Werckenes.  the course is eastnortheast about a quarter of a league, and then you leave the Island Asland lying on the larboard side to the northwards of you, in it lie also two havens where you may also go to anchor, the one called Struys-haven, 
Struys-haven. Schoon-haven. jeltefioerd  and the other Schoon-haven. To the westwards of Asland you may sail to Jeltefioerd, & run out there about northwest into the sea.  
When you come out of the sea into Jeltefioerd, than you come into the westwards of Asland against the Reestone into the Lieth.  
At the south point of Asland lieth jelteschaer, 
jelteschaer.  a little round Island or rock, whereupon standeth a great Iron ring when as men come up the Lieth and with calms are in danger to be driven with the current to the northwards along by Asland, than they bring with the boat a cable fast on it. Men may wend round about the foresaid rock without any danger.  
From Werckenesse to Hornesse, 
Hornesse.  it is east a little distance: when you come by it, you may see the town of Bergen lie before you, you must anchor before it in the Wage, in 11 12 or 13 fathom.  
To the northwards of Asland lieth the Island Harle, 
Harle.  which is about five leagues long; when you come from the northwards, you may run about it on both sides, and so come into the Waghe of Bergen. The Harlefioerd goeth out about north and by west, and northnorthwest betwixt Asland and the land of Harle.  

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Schuytenes to Bommelshead northnorthwest somewhat northerly 7 leagues.  
From Bommelshead to Cruysoort n.n.w. 9 leagues.  
From Cruysoort to Harle northnorthwest 13 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the Outseers west, and west & by north 4 leagues.  
From the Outseers to Jeltefioerd, or the Wage of Bergen north. 26 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the Fly south and by east southerly 106 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the tessel, south and south & by east, 112 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Walcheren south 138 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the Holms before Yarmouth south & by west, or somewhat more westerly 113 or 114 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Flambrough head, south-west & by south 104 or 105 leagues. 
De Cust van NOORWEGEN Vertoonde van Bergen tot aen de hoeck van Horrel.   
From Schuytenes to Tinmouth, the course is south-west, 99 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to boeckeness w. & by south southerly, 72 leagues.  
From the Outseers to the Fly south & by east, 106 or 107 leagues.  
From the Outseers to the rocks Outweers north and by west, somewhat northerly 43 leagues.  
From Jeltefioerd or the wage of Bergen to Hitland, west 63 leagues.  
From Jeltefioerd, or the Wage of Bergen, to the North-end of Hitland west & west & by north 63 leagues.  
From Schuytens to Hitland west and by north, & westnorthwest, 73 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the north end of Hitland westnorthwest somewhat northerly 80 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Thus showeth the Boek, when you are to the southwards of Schuytener before the Lieth.  
Thus showeth the hill Sick, when you are to the northwards of Schuytenes.     

The eighth Demonstration, Where in The Coast of Norway between jeltefioerd and the high point of Horrel is showed.  
FRom Jeltefioerd, or the Wage of Bergen, to Old, the coast lieth northnorthwest, and north and by west about 16 leagues, that is all broken land, with many rocks, where men may sail through within them. The Norway Barks come off from Stade all alongst through that broken land & rocks, & within the Island Harle unto Bergen.  
About 4 leagues and a half to the southward of Old, lieth a great row of rocks, lying 3 or 4 leagues without the other rocks, thwart off from the shore to seawards, called the Outweers. 
Outweers.   
Betwixt them & Old lieth a good Haven, called Southfoort, there lie 3 Islands before it, where men run in betwixt them both alongst into the Haven.  

Old.  Old is a high rock, a good ways from the land, and lose from the other rocks by the land, but hath some small rocks lying about it, there lieth alsoo a row of rocks, a good ways off from it south-west into the sea.  
About northwest and northwest and by north from Old lie 2 rows of rocks, where of some lie above and some under water. When as you are either to the northwards or to the southwards of Old, it doth show itself with a great saddle, in 2 hommockes, and going down round on both sides, but being thwart off, or westwards from it, than it lieth in one round hill, almost like Coll. You may (coming from the southwards) run in about the eastwards within Old, north-east to Oldesound, & come out again to the northwards of Old. Four leagues to the northwards of Oldesound lieth Kin, 
Kin.  also a great rock, which men may sail round about, and showeth itself with 2 sharp Hommckes, almost like a Cow's claw, or Bishop's Mitre.  
Betwixt Kin & Olde goeth a great Sound into the land, upon which lie two towns, Waldres & Easterdal. 
Waldres Easterdal.  Northwest and by west from Kin lie three or four rocks, and also some sunken rocks under water, South-west and by west about 3 leagues off from it, lie also some rocks above, and some under water.  
Three or four leagues to the northwards of Kin lieth Ornael, 
Ornael.  also a great rock, which showeth itself in one great high round Hill. Three leagues, or three leagues and a half to the northwards of it lieth the south point of Stade. But Ornaell and Olde lie about north and south 7 or 8 leagues asunder.  
Betwixt Ornael and the south point of Stade 
S●●de.  goeth in a great broad sound, from whence men may sail through within the broken land to the southwards to Bergen. A little within the south point of Stade is a Bay, where men may go to anchor, thwart of a sea-beacon, & lie sheltered for a west wind. 
North point off Staden.  The land of Stade lieth from the south-point to the north point northnortheast, and southsouthwest which is a whole main coast but full close alongst by the shore, with many small rocks, but none that men may sail about with in them for to have any shelter for the sea. The Norway Barks of all places to the northwards of it, yea and all those which come off from the North Cape, can sail all alongst the coast of Norway unto Berghen, through within the rocks, except thwart of this land of Stade, 
Havens on Stade.  there they must run a seaboard through the sea.  
Between these two foresaid points are also two little havens where men may ride, but a little or nothing used.  
To the northwards of Stade the Island lieth with many Islands north-east to the broadsound nine leagues. About half ways lieth a little Island or rock, called Swynoe 
Swynoe.  (that is Hogges-Island) a league from land without the other Islands of Flowach. When you are close by the north point of Stade, and go on north-east you run through within that little Island Swynoe, but with a north-east and by north course about a sea-board of it.  
He that is bound to Roemsdall, or into the Sounds of Sudmer, must run into the Broad-sound, 
Broad-sound.  which goeth in at the ends of the Islands of Flowach east and east & by south, the outermost of these Islands is called Hassen. When you come to the end of those foresaid Islands, you shall see east from you about two leagues, a great high short Island, called Goedeu, 
Goedeu.  or of some Godsche-saed, and a little to the southwards of it, somewhat further in a great black rock, of fashlon like a haycock, or almost like a sugar-loaf, it is called by the sailors the Cookes-broad: sail in right with it, but bring not that foresaid rock to or under that Island, but keep it clear off without it: for else you should surely sail upon the foresaid sunken rocks, which lie under water at the north side of the broad-sound.  
From the Island Goedeu or Godsche-sand runneth off also a little riffe, to the southwards, or towards the southeast from it. When you come by that Island run about that little riffe, in betwixt it & the foresaid black rock, and anchor a little within that riffe, under Goedue run not fare within it, for to avoid a sunken rock, which lieth somewhat further in, not fare from land, there stand two little wards upon the shore, a little within the risse, for knowledge of the road.  
Behind, or to the northwards of Godeu lieth the little Island Geske: 
Geske.  upon it standeth a little Church on the south side, before it men may also anchor in eight or ten fathom clean ground.  
A little within Goedue, on the east side of Geske lieth another Island, greater than Geske, called Walderoe, 
Walderoe  on both sides of the southeast point of that Island men may anchor in good clean ground and lie land-lockt for all winds.  
From thwart of Geske and Walderoe lieth a great multitude of Rocks northwest so fare into sea, that coming a scaboard by Swynoe with a north-east course, you should be fare within them.  
He that cometh from the northwards may sail by west alongst by these rocks to Goedeu, and leave the a foresaid sunken rocks (lying on the north side of the Broad sound) on the starboard side of him, and run in about by the point of Goedue, as hath been beforesaid.  
You may also run into the northwards of Goedeu, to wit in betwixt Goedeu and Geske, and anchor within Geske, or under Walderoe, but it is not well to be done, but for them which are there very well acquainted.  
There lie many Rocks, some above, & some under water, whereof men must take heed. In at the Broad sound is the best and surest.  
For to run from Walderoe to Roemsdale, go on to the northwards, alongst by the great Islands Luycko, it is in that farewaye, 10, 20, 14, 16, and 18 fathom deep but even past Luycko runneth a stone riffe thwart over the farewaye, on against the point of the main land, you must thereabouts edge off from the Island on the larboard side, & run indifferent close alongst by that point of the main land on the starboard side, & then you run over the deepest of that Stoneriffe, to wit, in 3 fathom or thereabouts, as soon as you shall be over it, it is again very deep of 10, 20 and presently an hundred and two hundred fathom. Run on still by the land on the starboard side, and very close alongst by it, and leave all the Islands that lie on the larboard side, & so you shall come unto the River of Roemsdale.  
Towards the southeast from the foresaid Island Goedeu or Godsche-sand goeth a great deep river into the land, to Sickule, Honighpale, and other lading places more.  

How these lands do lie one from the other and from other lands.  

From Jeltesioerd or the Waghe of Bergen to the Rocks of Outweers, northnorthwest, and n. & by west about 11 or 12 leagues.  
From the Outweers rock to Old, northnorthwest, & n. & by west betwixt 4 & 5 leagues.  
From Old to Cyne n. and by east, and northnortheast 4 leagues.  
From Old to Ornael north and north and by east 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Ornael to the south point of Stade northnortheast, 3 leagues.  
From the south point of Stade to the north point, n. n. east 8 leagues.  
From the north point of Stade to Swyno or Swynoost north-east and by north 4 leagues.  
From Swynoe to the outermost of Flowach, or the broad sound, north-east and by east 4 leagues.  
From the north point of Stade to the Island Hessen, or the Broade-sound north-east 8 leagues.  
From Hessen to Goedeu east, and east and by south 3 leagues.  
From Swynoe alongst without the Roemsdaels' schares to Boede, the course is north-east and by north and north-east  
From Stade to the north-end of Hitland westsouthwest 66 leagues.  
From Stade to the east point of Island, westnorthwest, 200 leagues.  
From Stade to Greeneland northwest about 330 leag.    

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
Betwixt Berghen and Stade the water riseth & falleth but it keepeth no certain tide a southsouthwest, and n. north-east moon maketh there most full sea.  
Betwixt Stade, Luyckesound & Boe a southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh high Water.   

Heights.  

The Outweers-rocks lie in 60 degr. and 53 min.  
The Island Cows in 61 degr. 30 minutes.  
Stade in 26 degrees.  
Broad-sound or the Island Goedeu, in 62 degr. 40 min.  
Luycksound in 62 degrees and 55 minutes.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

The Land about Northfoert & Southfoert, when it lieth east & by south from you.  
South point of Stade Ornael Cows Old  
Thus showeth the Island Ornael, Cows & Old, to the southwards of Stade.  
Stade  
When the south point of Stade lieth north-east & by north from you, than it showeth with the land from thence southwards within Ornael, Cows, & Old, like as it is portrayed in this & the figure following.  
The Land about Old  
This followeth the former figure.  
When the point of Stade lieth southsoutheast 8 leagues from you, it showeth thus.   

Caarte van NOORWEGEN vande hoeck van Horrel tot aen Momendael. waer in begrepen wort het Liet van Dronten.   

When Stade is southsoutheast from you, and Goedeu east 4 leagues, than the Land betwixt Stade & the Broad-sound like as is portrayed in this & the figure following, and then you are open before the Broad-sound.  
This followeth the former figure unto Stade.  
The form of Island Luycko, when it is east & by north from you.  
Thus showeth the Island Goedeu, being east from you.     

The ninth Demonstration, Where in The Liet of Dronten is showed.  
TO the northwards or northeastwardes from Geske lie (amongst a great many other rocks and little Islands) five great Islands: the first called Luco, 
Luco.  which is a high Island, like as also the second, betwixt these two goeth in a channel about southeast called Luycksound. 
Luycksound.   
Upon the third called Harnsoe 
Harnsoe.  lieth also a high hill, but it is at both ends somewhat low.  
The fourth and smallest called Lemsoe 
Lemsoe.  or the low Island showeth itself in 2 or 3 low hommocks.  
The fifth called Flemseu, 
Flemseu.  or the Island, is a great and low Island, but seemeth little to see to at sea, because there lieth but one hommock upon it (not very great) and of fashion as the roof or cabin of a Hoy, 
Roof Island.  or the west end highest within the east point of that Island is a good road in a bite, where men lie landlockt for all winds.  
To the northwards or eastwards of Flemseu or Roof Island, goeth in a channel called Nogwe Fioert, lying in east and by south, at which men may run in to Roemsdale.  
Without these foresaid Islands off from Luco unto Boede, lieth a great multitude of out rocks, great and small, called the Roemsdales Schares. 
Roemsdales' Schares   
Eastwards from the Roof Island, or Flemseu, lieth (amongst other rocks and little Islands) the Island Lever, 
Lever.  which men may sail about on both sides, whether they be bound outwards from Roemsdale to Beresound or Boe, or inwards from Boe or Beresound, 
Beresound  and will run through the foresaid Islands.  
Beresound is a Haven within some rocks even to the southwards or Westwards of the point Boe, 
Boe.  there it is good lying, but not good to come into without a Pilot, or some one that is there well acquainted.  
Boede is an out-point, with a neck or small point of land, fast to the main land, alongst to the southwards of it men may run in and up, to the southwards to Beresound, or else go to anchor in a bay on the north side behind Boe, by some houses, where they may lie sheltered for a west wind.  
From Boe to Stemmeshest, the coast lieth about n. e. and by n. 2 leagues, betwixt them both about half ways lie many small low black Out-rocks, as if they were sown alongst the shore, called the Stoppels, 
Stoppels.  betwixt them and the main land you cannot sail through with great ships without great danger. The Norway Barks run alongst with in them, and also anchor there within, under a rock, which is somewhat greater than the rest, and lieth about the midst of the Stoppels (or somewhat nearer the main land) called the Eartholm.  
All the Islands betwixt Broad-sound or Flowach and Boe, belong under Roemsdale.  
From Stade to Stemmeshest (or Stemmesnes) the course is alongst without the Islands north-east and by n. about six & twenty leagues, the land betwixt them both is called the Government of Roemsdael.  
Stemmeshest 
Stemmeshest.  is a high point easy to be known, it showeth itself (when as you get sight of it, coming from the southwards or the westwards) in two Hommocks thwart of it goeth in the Liet with divers entries.  
About a shot of a cast-peece from the point lieth a black round rock, altogether alone, not very great, called the black Ox. 
Black Ox.  Betwixt it & the point goeth in an entry, called after the foresaid rock, also the black Ox, north-east and by east, it is not very wide, and upon the shoalest 4 or 5 fathom deep at low water, the nearer to the Ox the deeper, & the nearer to the main land the shoaler water.  
A little within the Rock, (the black Ox) lieth an other great rock or Island, pale of colour, called White-holme, which you must leave (in sailing) also on the larboard side, you cannot sail through betwixt it & the black Ox, be cause from the one to the other it is all full of rocks some above & some under water.  
A little within or to the end of Whiteholm 
Whitteholme.  lieth a sunken rock, 
sunken Rock.  which you must leave also on the larboard side.  
In calm weather or smooth water you cannot well see it, but when it doth blow any thing hard, you may well perceive it by the breaking of the sea upon it. On the starboard side within Whiteholm, lieth a great multitude of rocks, as if they where sowed along the shore, amongst these rocks a little within or to the eastwards of the point of Stemneshest lieth Smeerholme, an Island, where men may ride under, and lie sheltered for all winds, 
Smeerhelm.  except with e. & north-east winds, which blow there in open, with those winds you cannot also come out there, neither with southsoutheast, south, southsouthwest, & south-west winds, you cannot also come in there. You must sail in there from the northwards, behind the Island. In the going in (which is not above a cables length broad, 8 or 10 fathom deep) lieth a little round rock, at high water, about a fathom above water, by which you may run about on both sides.  
Northnorthwest about a half league from the black Ox lieth also a greater and broader, but a lower rock, called the Vogel, 
The Voghel.  which at high water lieth a little above water, but with a spring tied the sea runneth alongst over it. Betwixt it & the black Ox there seemeth to lie in a broad and wide channel, but betwixt them it is full of sunken rocks and soul grounds under water: When it is smooth water, it is in no wise good to run in there, but in foul weather and with a grown sea, and that you cannot do otherwise, you might run in there by the breaking of the sea.  

Mew-holme.  A great half league northnorthwest from the Voghel lie yet some rocks, lying to the eastwards, called the Mewholmes, betwixt them and the foresaid Rock the Voghell goeth in a broad & large channel, very clean without any dangers, which (after the Rock is also called the vogel, there men may see all that can do hurt. The marks for to find this channel) coming out of the sea are two hills, very easy to be known, which lie from thence east and east & by north within the land. The westermost is a hill somewhat low and round of fashion, 
Clapmuts & Mangelbergh.  almost like a flat cap, called the Clapmuts. The eastermost is a high steep sharp Hill, above on the one side with a cut, like as a steep, called Manghelbergh. When these are one in the other, than they are about east & by north from you, and then you are also right open before this channel.  
For to sail in there, keep these two foresaid hills one in the other, and sail in right with them east, and east & by north, or (when as you come within the Vogel) somewhat more easterly, so that you have the foresaid Hills out a head a little on the larboarde side, until that you come by the main land, and then eastnortheast alongst by the shore, (if you be bound to Dronten) unto the Island Edou or Edoe.  
About a league within the Vogel lie two rocks, the westermost is high and somewhat round, the other is low and also round, and lieth to the eastwards from the first, towards the land, you shall run with the a foresaid course of east & e. & by north off from the Vogel, about a shot of a cast-peece alongst to the southwards of the 2 rocks. About half ways betwixt them and the vogel, (but nearest the 2 rocks) lie two sunken rocks, 
Two sunken rocks.  these you leave with the same course also on the larboard side, you may see the sea always break upon them, except in very smooth Water.  
You may also sail through betwixt these two foresaid Rocks and the Mewholmes, to wit, alongst to the northwards of the rocks, until you come into the Liet, leaving these 2 rocks on the larboard side, and the Mewholms on the starboard side.  
Alongst to the northwards of the Mewholmes and those two foresaid rocks lieth also a channel where men may sail through into the Liet, than you must leave these 2 rocks to the southwards on the starboard side, & some other rocks to the northwards of them on the larboard side, and so come also into the Liet.  
About three quarters of a league within these two foresaid Rocks, lieth a great sunken rock, right in the midst of the farewaye, which breaketh always, and at low water is uncovered, about which you may sail on both sides. From this sunken rock to Swegge sound, the course is east, and east and by north a league, but the Voghel or black Ox & Sweggesound are distant about three leagues.  
Sweggesound 
Sweggesound.  is a little Haven behind three great rocks, with a little Island of an English mile long on the east side of it, when you sail alongst by it, being but a little off from the shore, you cannot discern this Island from the main land, but it seemeth to be all whole land, he that is not there very well acquainted, cannot perceive that to be an Island, before that he come close to it, for to run in behind it. You may sail into Sweggesound either to the eastwards of that Island, or to the westwards of it, according as the wind will serve. To the westwards of Sweggesound or the three foresaid rocks, at the west end of the end of the foresaid Island lie a great multitude of rocks & foul grounds.  
For to sail into the western channel, you must leave them all on the starboard side, and run in betwixt them and the three foresaid rocks: when you come to the and of these three Rocks, you must luffe up to the southwards about by them towards the north-east or north, & anchor there in seven or eight fathom, there you shall lie landlockt for all winds, but with a storm out of the west the grown sea can come in rolling there through. You may also sail in further behind the rocks, until you come in behind the foresaid Island, in a little narrow Bay, there men do lie in 2 fathom and a half, or three fathom, and also sheltered for all winds. In this Haven of Sweggesound the ships commonly do lie there to tarry for the wind. He that is bound to the westwards, may run out to the southwards of the three foresaid rocks, & he that is bound to the eastwards, may sail out to the northwards, through betwixt the Land and the Island, but that channel is very narrow & not above 2 fathom deep.  
A half league to the eastwards of Sweggesound lieth the haven of Bremsnes, 
Bremsnes.  a little quarter of a league within it on the starboard side standeth a little church, with some houses, which you shall espy behind a point, when as you are come somewhat within, there dwelleth the Governor of Normer Leen. Men were wont to come to anchor there to pay custom, but now the King's Customer dwelleth over against it in little Fossen, so that now at this present, men may either go there, or to little Fossen for to pay their custom, according as occasion doth serve.  
For to anchor before Bremsnes, you must look out for two beackons, which stand by the church upon the water side, thwart of the innermost is the best Road, & also the best ground, let your anchor fall there, in twenty, fifteen, eight or ten fathom, that is near by the shore, for there it is very steep rising ground, and make you fast with a hawser to the beakons, there you shall lie landlockt for all winds, you may not anchor any where thereabouts, then in the foresaid place, by reason of the great depth, & very steep grounds.  
Little Fossen or Fossound is a narrow haven, 
Little Fossound.  lying to the northwards, over against Bremsnes, betwixt two lands. In these two places lie the ships commonly to tarry for the wind, they that are bound to the eastwards before Bremsnes, & they that are bound to the westwards in Little Fossen. Men may also sail from Fossen to the eastwards, through betwixt the foresaid land, & come into Stanwixfioerd again in room into the Lieth of Dronten, but it is a very narrow channel, and not well to be done for them which are not there very well acquainted.  
Westnorthwest, from the haven of Bremsnes goeth a channel through the rocks called Flessound, 
Flessound  after three round Rocks, 
Three Flessen.  called three fless which lie in a row without the east side of this channel, and thereby is very easy to be known. A little within the three Flesses, lieth a great black flat rock, when you are by or in the Havensmouth of Bremsnes, it lieth westnorthwest, or somewhat more northerly from you. For to run out from thence at that channel, sail right with the aforesaid black rocks, and run to the southwards of it close alongst by it, leaving it and the Flesses on the starboard side, (to the norhwards of this flat rock & the fless it is all full of rocks, some above and some under water) you shall then leave on the larboard side of you two other round rocks, which you shall see lie about a shot of a cast piece eastnortheast, or north. & by east one from the other. When you are come without the Flesses, you shall be without all the rocks, but somewhat to the westwards of them lieth a great row of rocks, lying westnorthwest a good ways into sea, you may run westnorthwest alongst by them unto the end: when you are come without the Flesses you may set your course somewhat more northerly, for to get sea room betimes. In this foresaid channel there is no danger, that can hurt you, but you may see it. In the offing you may know this foresaid channel, by the foresaid three Flesses.  
The marks for to find Flessound, coming in out of the sea, are two high Hills, the one called Freekol, 
Freekol.  lying upon an Island, towards the southeast, not fare from Bremsnes, the other called Northhorne, 
Northhorne.  lying far within the land. Freekol is a hill with two hommocks where of the southermost is the smallest & lowest. Northhorne is a hill much higher, with a sharp top, & lie always white, covered with snow. When this hill & the foresaid southermost Hommock of Freekol stand one in the other (than they are southeast & by south from you) and if that you sail in right with then, you shall without fail fall right open before Flessound. It is a channel of a shore inlet, and very commodious, as also Grypsound for them which coming from Dronten, Edou, or any other place in the Lieth, and before night cannot sail to the channels of the black Ox or Voghel, for to run through them into sea.  
About a quarter of a league to the eastwards of Bremsnes lieth Stangwyxfioird, a large broad sound, at the east point lieth a great many rocks, within lieth a Haven, called Hamersound, 
Hammersound.  you may not come in there but with a Pilot except you be there extraordinary well acquainted.  
A quarter of a league within that foresaid point, on the north side of Stangwyxfioird, lie two lade-places, jorianwach & Lynwach, 
jorianwach. Lynwach.  men run in there to the northwards, behind some rocks, but it is also Pilots water.  
Towards the southeast from jorianwach, men may sail fare within the land, into divers sounds, Stangwyxfioird, Schaelwicxfioird, Northfioird, Walsfioird, Wenningfioird, and other more. Upon the land of jorianwach lieth the mountain of Toester, in 2 hills, to the eastwards of it upon the next land lieth the mountain of Stadebuye, also in 2 hills, as Toester. These hills of Toester and Stadebuy, when you come from the westwards alongst the Lieth, lie right behind one the other, and seem then to be no more than one hill, but being thwart of them in the Liet, or at sea, each sheweth in 2, which is together four very high hills, and are commonly called together without difference Toester Poester. 
Toester Poester.   
Betwixt Toester & Stadebuye runneth through a narrow Sound, into the Northfioird, called Soolsound. 
Soolsound  To the east of Stadebuye runneth also another sound through into the Northfioird, called Emmersound, within which on the north side, close by the Northfioird is a lade place, where men do lad good deals.  
A quarter of a league in the Liet, to the eastwards of Emmersound, 
Emmersound.  runneth in another sound, at the entry broad and wide within it divideth it self into 2 p●rts. Sailing in there you must leave Fisholme and the Yellow Island on the larboard side, & a rocky Island, called the flat Island, with many Rocks on the starboard side. The Yellow Island 
The Yellow Island  is not well to be discerned from the main land, for those which are not there well acquainted, the end of the Northfioird runneth there about behind it, & maketh it an Island the Norwaybarkes run much thereabout behind it. To the southwards of the flat Island lieth a Rock or little Island, 
Flatholm.  called Flathome, betwixt them both is good anchoring in 10 or 12 fathom, landlockt for all winds.  
Through this Sound men do run into Eursound, 
Eursound.  a lade place lying in the Northfioird, there standeth a little church on the west side of the flat Island. Betwixt the little Island is also a good haven, where men may lie in three, four and five fathom, it is not broad but clean. To the eastwards of this Yellow Island lieth the high land of Dromsnes. 
Dromsnes  From thence eastwardes, further up into the Liet, towards Dronten or Agenes, it is most all whole land, and not so broken, as to the westwards of it.  
Thwart of the rocks of Hammersound (lying on the east side of Stangwyxfioird) lieth a fair channel called Grypsound, one of the best channels for to come in out of the sea into the Liet, it is about a quarter of a league broad, and goeth in close to the eastwards of the Island Gripe.  
Gripe 
Gryp.  is a little round Island lying from the Voghell north-east and by east distant about five leagues, upon it dwell many Fishernen, which go from thence to sea, to fish upon divers banks, of forty, fifty, seventy, eighty, and hundred fathom, four, five, six, seven, eight and some ten leagues without the land, which they know to find by marks on the shore. On the north side of Gripe there lie but two or three rocks close to the shore, some say that thereabout is anchor ground in twelve fathom. On the south or west side, it is full of Rocks, but they lie most above water. About half ways betwixt Gripe and the three Flesses, somewhat without all the other Rocks, lieth a sunken rock a little under water, he that runneth alongst without these rocks, must be mindful thereof.  
For to go into Grypesound coming in out of the Sea, 
Grypsound.  you must bring the high Mountain of Toester Poester eastsoutheast from you, and sail in right with it, and so you shall not sail to run in sight of the Island Gryp, which is easy to know from the other rocks, by the great many fisher-men's houses, which stand upon it, and upon no other Island nor Rocks thereabouts, leave that Island on the starboard side, and go in first eastsoutheast right with Toester, being past the Island Gryp, bring Toester two points on your larboard bow, and go so in southeast, you shall come into the Liet betwixt Hammersound and Toester. From thence to the little Island Edou 
Edou.  are about four leagues. About three leagues to the westwards of it, or a league to the eastwards of Grypsound in the Lieth, lieth also a sunken rock, almost even with the water, and almost amidst the farewaye, nearest the north side, you may always see the sea break upon it, leave it on the larboard side, and run to the southwards of it, there it is broadest, you may for a need run also to the northwards of it through betwixt it & the other rocks, but it is there narrow.  
Edou 
Edou.  or Edoe is a somewhat low plain Island, a league long, & very narrow, which is the first land out on the larboard side, upon the Liet, that men have shelter of from the sea, to the westwards of it, there is nothing but broken land, Rocks and little Islands, where the grown sea cometh rolling in through. Not fare from the west end, upon the south side of Edou, standeth a little white Church, thwart of it, or a little to the eastwards of it, men may anchor in eight, nine, and ten fathom. The shore is steep rising ground: If men do come near it in four fathom, they shall be presently fast, but the ground is soft. When as men come from the westwards, and will anchor there, they must (coming near the west end of the Island) continually feel with the lead for the anchor ground, and so soon as they feel it, let fall their anchor, thwart of the aforesaid little white Church, or a little to the eastwards of it, so that the little Church come to stand over the houses. When as they let fall their anchor in 10 fathom, and wending up towards the land, very out the cable than the ship shall come to lie there in six fathom, the Liet is thereabouts about a half league broad.  
Upon the east end of Edou is also a little haven called Kurow, 
Kurou.  and it is so little that there can lie no more than two or three ships, there lieth a little black rock not fare from the shore, men do run in betwixt that little rock and the Island, & anchor betwixt them both, there men lie landlockt for all winds, but the ground there is not clean.  
At the east end of Edou lieth another Island somewhat long, called Glaseu. 
Glaseu.  To the eastwards of it runneth a great broad Sound into sea, called Ramsfioird, but it is known of few. 
Ramsfioerd.  With northerly winds there cometh through a great grown sea into the Lieth.  
To the eastwards from Ramsfioerde lieth the land of Hitteren, two great long Islands. Norther Hitteren, 
Highland of Hitteren.  & Souther Hitteren, together about seven leagues long, so that he that saileth up the Lieth thwart of them, can not perceive otherwise, but that he saileth in betwixt two main lands. At the south end or west end of Hitteren, which is on the cast side of Ramsfioerd lie two little Islands, called Weroy, 
Weroy.  there you may sail in betwixt them, & anchor in good white sand ground, you may also sail through betwixt the little Islands, alongst into the Liet, & then you leave a sunken rock lying on the starboard side by the southermost little Island.  
From the Island Edou to the Highland, or the point of Dromsnes 
Dromsnes  it is north-east and by east and eastnortheast distant about three leagues. To the westwards of that point, to wit, betwixt that point & the land to the westwards of it called Schipnes, lieth a haven called Schaerswycke. 
Schaerswyke.  In the mouth of this haven, about the midst of the channel, but somewhat nearer Schipnes than Dromsnes, lieth a sunken rock, which falleth dry at low water, you may run in about it on both sides. A little within the point, on the south side standeth a Countriemans' house, before which you may anchor in five, six or seven fathom, clean rising ground, which you may come near by your lead. This haven lieth about a league more to the eastwards, than Ramsfioird, on the south side of the Liet, fit for to come to anchor in, for those which can sail no further by day. To the westwards of this foresaid haven Schaerswycke alongst the land of Schipnes, lie many Rocks by the shore, some above & some under water, therefore you must somewhat shun the southshoare thereabouts, but the north shore alongst by Hitteren is very clean. The Liet is thereabouts a great half league broad.  
About five leagues to the eastwards of Schaerswyke, on the north side of the Lieth, lie the two Islands of Lexen, 
Lexen.  to wit, norther and souther Lexen, which are together about a half league long. There the Liet lieth betwixt both eastnortheast, and north-east and by east.  
In souther Lexen is a bay, before which lieth a round rock, making it there within a fair haven, called the haven of Lexen the best haven of all the Liet. john Geurtson Boogart of Amsterdam, hath (at this own charges, for the commodity of ships that come there) caused to be made a great Iron ring: men do anchor either to the eastwards or to the westwards of the foresaid rock, where they will in six, seven or eight fathom, and bring a hawser on the foresaid Ring, the further men do run into the Bite, betwixt the Rock and the land, the shoaler it is but all clean and clear ground.  

Road under north Lexen.  At the norther end of norther Lexen is also a place, where is good anchor ground fit for to make road in.  
Over against the haven of Lexen lieth another haven called Moltow, 
Moltow.  where the ships do oftentimes anchor in the Harvest or beginning of the winter, for to set sail with an east wind, because they can hardly get to sail from Lexen with easterly winds.  
A league to the southwards or to the westwards of these havens of Lexen and Moltow, on the south shore, lieth a little Island, whereupon standeth a Warder, called Swanholm 
Swanholm.  which men may sail round about; under that little Island it is good anchoring (as well for them which are bound to the eastwards as to the westwards) in 4 or 5 fathom good clean sand ground.  
The south side of the Liet off from Schaerswyke alongst to Hegwyke, (which is a league and a half, & two leagues by west the point of Agenes) is most clean with little fowl grounds: but from Hegwyke alongst to Agenes the coast is fowl and rocky. The north side alongst by Hitterens, is also indifferent clean, except at the north end lie some rocks called the Terlingen, which lie somewhat off to the southwards from the shore into the Liet. A little to the eastwards of Hemnesioird, 
Hemnefioird.  over against Hemneschell (an Orchard upon a high land) there the Liet is at the narrowest, & no more than a half quarter of a league broad.  
Hemnesfioird lieth over against the north end of Hitteren, it is a bay where many Saws do stand, & abundance of good Deals are cut & laden.  
To the northwards or eastwardes of the Terlingen, at the north end of Hitteren, in betwixt Hitterens and Lexen, lieth a haven called Deepsound, 
Deepsound.  the Norway Barks (coming from the southwards) run in there along behind Lexen to the northwards.  
From Lexen to the point of Agenes 
Agenes.  on the south side, or to Euriland on the north side, the Lieth lieth alongst eastnortheast and north-east & by east 3 leag. Agenes is the northermost point of the Lieth, you must go about by it when you are bound to Dronten.  
Betwixt Norther Lexen & Euriland lie two Islands, the southermost is called Fossen, 
Fossen.  the northermost Garten, 
Garten.  to the southward of Fossen you may sail through alongst into the sea, but not without a Pilot.  
For to sail from Lexen to Agenes, run alongst by the north shore, which is the cleanest, the south shore is fowl. A cables length or a cables length and a half to the westwards of the point Agenes, lieth a sunken rock not fare from the shore. For to avoid it & more other danger, keep alongst by the north shore (but take heed that you run not in to no bights or bays) so long until that you can see the houses upon Agenes, than sail towards it, & then you shall not sail within any dangers on the south shore. On the point of Agenes is also a great Iron Ring for to moor the ships to there by it is deeper and steep off-going soul ground. For to anchor there you must be very close by the shore before you shall find ground, & then you must make a cable fast on the foresaid Ring, close to the shore it is about five of six fathom deep fowl ground.  
On the north side of the Liet over against the point of Agenes, lieth Euriland, 
Euriland.  a flat fair green land, upon it standeth a little white Church about an English mile off from the shore within the land, almost like the little Church of Edou, thwart of it is a good road clean flat rising sand, & clay ground, men do commonly anchor there thwart of the first beacon in seven, eight or nine fathom good clay ground, 16, 17 or 18 fathom men lie fare from the shore.  
With contrary winds, or that men can not come about Agenes, or taken with the night, they do anchor most commonly there.  
By Agenes there runneth out always a great strong current to the westwards, & by reason the lands from thence to the southwards on both sides are very high, and the wind (being southerly) falleth there betwixt then both, always strong to the northwards, men can not (in sailing up) get any thing there with turning to windewards, but in sailing off they may get much by the current with turning to windewards.  
A little about the point of Agenes on the starboard side, is a great Bay called Salva, 
Salva.  wherein is good anchor ground, & good lying, but with northerly winds it is very hard to come out there for those that are bound out, or to the westwards.  
From Agenes to the point of Rooberg, the Liet lieth southsoutheast about three leagues. About half ways or somewhat more on the west side lies another bay, called Lenswycke, where men may have road.  
Roobergh 
Roobergh.  is a somewhat flat point, to the eastwards or to the northwards about this point is good road in six or seven fathom. 
Roade.  A good ways from the shore to the westwards of the point, the Norway Barks do oftentimes anchor, but the ground there is not clean, and therefore it is no good road for great ships.  
Over against Roobergh lie divers Bays and havens, as Urkedal, Bursen, 
Bursen.  Bodwyke 
Bodwyke  and other more, where many Deals are cut and laden.  
Rivier van Londen  
Pascaarte van ENGELANT Van t' Voorlandt tot aen Blakeney waer in te sien is de mont vande Teemse.  
About a bow-shot north-east from the Holm lie two sunken rocks, which at low water are uncovered. When as they are even covered with the flood, than you may sail in over the shoalest of the Bar into the Elf with a ship that draweth 11 foot.  
To sail into the Elf of Dronten, it is Pilots water, there stand commonly two or three masts for beakons, but there is no certainty of them that men may trust unto, for they are oftentimes shifted: sometimes they stand on the east side, sometimes on the west side, and also sometimes on both sides. When you come a ships length or two within the beakons you shall come to a chindely point on the starboard side, by which you must luff up to the Key: upon the Bar it falleth with a spring tied almost dry, but within it is deeper.  

Of the streams on these coasts.  
From Stade to Dronten a south and by east and north and by west moon maketh high water, with a spring it falleth a fathom and a half up and down, with an ordinary tide scarce a fathom.  
The tides run not there alongst the land, but the flood falleth thwart on against the land, and the ebb to the contrary thwart from the shore to seawards.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Stemneshest to Gryp north-east and by east 6 leag.  
From Gryp to the Islands of Momendall north-east 18 leagues.  
From Gryp to Holyland northnortheast and north-east and by north 27 leagues.  
From Gryp to Rust north and north & by east 64 leag.  
From Gryp to the north end of Hitland south-west and by west 115 leagues.  
From Gryp to the south end of Fero westsouthwest, 167 leagues.  
From Gripe to the east point of Island west, and west and by north 233 leagues.    

Of the heights of these lands.  

The Islands Whitholme and Smeerholme lie in 63 degrees 54 minutes.  
The Island Gryp in 64 degrees.  
The town Dronten 64 degrees,    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Thus showeth the point of Stemmeshest or Heynst.  
Flenseu. Roofen Island. Lemseu. Low Island. Harnsoe. Luycko.  
Thus showeth the Islands of Roemsdale, when the middle most of the three highest and the westermost is southeast from you about 3 leagues.  
Stemneshest.  
The Islands of Roemsdale.  
Thus showeth the Land between Stemmeshest and the Broad-sound, when as you sail a seaboard alongst by the Roemsdaels' Islands & Schares.  
These two figures belong at the crosses one to the other.  
The land from Gryp westwards or southwards towards Stemmeshest like these two figures here above, when as you sail alongst by it seven leagues without the land.     

The tenth Demonstration, In which The east side of England, is showed, from the River of London to Welles.  
BY two ways men may sail into the river of London, from the southwards alongst by the north Forland, and from the northwards alongst by the Naes. If you will sail in there from the southwards, than you must first shun the North Forland, it is there shoal a good ways from the shore, bring the north Forland also not more southerly from you then south-west, that you do not run on against the northgrounds, which lie fare to seawards. Coming by the land, run alongst by it, but come not too near it, that you lose sight of the spire of the steeple of Margat behind the land, for than you should come too near it; but if you keep so far from the shore, that you can see the foresaid steeple above the high land, or keep it even in your sight, than you cannot take hurt of the south grounds. Coming thwart of Margat, than you are passed the foresaid shoals or south grounds. Run then boldly towards the shore, and within two cables lengths alongst by it, for to avoid the north grounds, which lie fare to the southwards towards the land. Sail on so west all alongst by the shore, until that the Reculvers (which are two steeples upon one Church) come one in the other, and then you shall run in sight of the first buy upon the Lasts, which lieth upon the foresaid marks of the Reculvers, 
Reculvers  being by it you can also see the other buy which lieth like as the first also on the north side, and over against it on the south side standeth a beacon, there you must sail through betwixt them both, leaving the buy on the starboard side, and the beacon over against it on the larboard side. From thence you may with little ships, or ships of little draught, but not with ships of great draught, at high water run over the Swallow on westnorthwest towards Sheppy, for it is there shoal water, with ships of great draught you must run through the Fisher's deep towards Blacktayle. You may also run from Margat with small ships alongst by the shore upon the lead at high water even unto the Sheppy, but in sailing, alongst there you must cast your tides well, for the flood falleth very strong into the Swallow, and the ebb to the contrary very strong out.  
When you come by Sheppy, 
Sheppy.  run within two cables lengths alongst by it, for to avoid the tail of the Spanjard, 
The Spagniard.  until that you be past Quinsbrough, edge then off from the south shore for to avoid the Noere, 
The North  which is a sand that shooteth off from the south point of the River a good ways to the eastwards, upon the outermost end where of standeth always a beacon, whereby you may know it. Run alongst to the northwards of it, leaving it on the larboard side, and alongst in the middle of the channel into the sea-reach for to avoid the grounds which lie off from the north shore, go in so alongst towards Gravesend.  
To sail with ships of great draughts alongst by the north Forland up into the Thames, you must (when you are passed the buys upon the Last) sail through the Fisher's deep, 
Fishers-deep.  toward Blacktayle, which lieth from the second buy upon the Lasts, unto the first buy in the Fisher's deep, northwest and northwest and by west, which lieth upon the north side of the sand, which men do call the Spanjard, those two buys lie a great ways one from the other.  
Sailing from the buy upon the Lasts it is a great ways all shoal water, so that you must run over there with high water, but coming near the buy upon the Spanjard, it is by little and little deeper water. He that will sail over here, must reckon his tides well, the flood falleth there alongst towards the south-west almost thwart over the deep and the ebb to the contrary.  
The second buy in the Fisher's Deep you must leave on the starboard side, & the buy upon the Spanjaerd on the larboard side: being past that you come against the Blacketayle, to the southwards of the Shoebeakon into the right deep. The cast point of Sheppy shall then lie about south from you. From the Shoebeakon the course is south-west to the point of Blacktaile there runneth off a hook which men might (at unawares) sail within (coming from the northwards) in five or six fathom, but if you keep from the shore in seven fathom, you cannot sail within it. From Blacktaile to the beacon upon the Noere, the course is westsouthwest, leave it on the larboard side, as before is said, and run in alongst the river, in the midst of the channel betwixt both lands unto Gravesend.  
For to sail into the river of London coming from the northwards 
For to sail into the river off London from the northwards.  you must come near the coast to the northwards of Orfordnes which is to the northwards of all the sands, there lie Albrough, Dunwich, Walderswike, Sowle and Covehit, all betwixt Orfordnes and Leystaf. Covehit is a sharp steeple like as also Leystraffe, but Sowle and Walderswyke, Albrough and Orfordnes are flat steeples Sowle 
Sowle.  and Dunwich 
Dunwich.  lie both upon the high land, betwixt them both is a valley, therein you may see Walderswike when you are thwart of it Dunwich is the best to be known of all these foresaid places: it hath two flat steeples, and on both sides some trees. To the southwards of it lieth Albrough 
Albrough  which is also very easy to be known, it hath one high flat steeple with three mills, the two stand to the northwards, and the third to the southwards of Albrough when you are thwart of it, but sailing to the southwards, they come at last all three to the southwards of it. The land without Albrough, and to the southwards of it is very low flat and chindely land.  
Betwixt Albrough and Dunwich about half ways betwixt them, lieth a Wood which is at both ends high, and in the midst low with a saddle; this you shall commonly see first when you fall with the land thereabouts, and is the best to be known for to know the coast by; the land without it, and to the southwards is very low flat chindely land. About two leagues to the southwards of Albrough lieth Orfordnes, 
Orfordnes.  betwixt them both stand also two woods of trees, which show themselves a fare off like castles or towers. Orfordnes is a flat steeple with a thick or broad castle, which hath also athick flat steeple, almost of fashion like the steeple of Rarop, open above with holes in it like Bellholes.  
Before Dunwich you may anchor, there is good lying in eight or nine fathom, somewhat soft ground. Before Albrough is the best road of all the coast thereabouts in six and seven fathom.  
East from Aelbrough about two league lieth Aelbrough Knock, 
Aelbroug Knock.  this is a sand which at low water is not deeper than seven or eight foot: you may sound round about it in five fathom, but is not good to come nearer it. With sea winds you may discern it plainly by the breaking of the sea upon it; but with lawderly or westerly winds, & fair weather, the sea breaketh not upon it, he that runneth thereby to the northwards with an ebb shall see it commonly ripple very much upon it, like as upon most of the English banks, & not indeed upon the banks, but against them, for upon the shoalest or midst of the banks is always the smoothest water, like as you find every where.  
When as Aelbrough is west from you, and the two steeples of Orfordnes are one in the other, there you shall find Albrough Knock. These are sure marks of that sand.  
The Whiting, or Whiting sand, is somewhat a long small sand lying before Orfordnes, and the chindely land to the southwards of Aelbrough, and lieth alongst the reach, but the south end lieth further from land then the north end, there is at low water not above six or seven foot water upon it. Coming from the northwards, men sail commonly to the westwards of it, that is through betwixt the land and Whitingsand, towards the Naze. Men may also sail alongst to the eastwards of it, through betwixt Whitingsand 
Whitingsand.  and the eastermost point of the Court, 
The Court  or Court-sand, which some do call the Rib.  
The north end of the Whiting lieth alongst close to the shore, and lieth from the steeples of Orfordnes southeast and by south, it is so exceeding steep and needle too, that you shall have the one cast nine, the next cast five fathom, and then you are no more but a ships length from it, before you can heave the lead again you should be upon it. When as you sit with the foreship against it, it is at the stern five or six fathom deep.  
Alongst the innerside, it is also every where so steep, that you cannot sound it, but on the outer side you may run alongst by it in five fathom upon the lead, until you come within the sands.  
When as you come from the northwards and will sail through within the Whiting, you must run close alongst by the shore, & south-west about by the point of the chindle to the southwards of Aelbrough; until you come within the north point of the Whitinge, when the steeples of Orfordnes come to be northwest and by north from you, than you are right thwart of the north point of the Whiting, being within it go again more southerly, to wit, south-west and by south towards Balsy cliff.  
If you should fall to the southwards of Whiting, or else coming from the southwards will sail in there to the northwards, then bring the steeples of Orfordnes westnorthwest or northwest and by west, but for all not more northerly than northwest from you, and sail so right in until you come by the Chindle strand, then run in alongst by it, as is before said, and then you shall run far enough alongst to the northwards of the Whiting.  

For to run into the eastwards off the Whyting.  If you will sail into the eastwards or the southwards of the Whiting, then bring the steeples of Orfordnes northnorthwest, or northwest and by north, or northwest from you, and sail in so right with them; until that the wood of trees, that standeth upon the next point to the southwards of Balsy cliff, come to Balsy cliff, which shall then stand about westsouthwest from you, keep that aforesaid wood to the south side of the cliff, and sail in boldly right with it, and then you shall run right in the farewaye, in betwixt the Whiting, and the tail of Courtesand but if you bring the foresaid trees more than a handspikes length without the cliff, you shall not fail to run on against the point of the Court. That aforesaid wood of trees is very easy to be known, because there abouts stand no other trees.  
Or bring the steeple of Balsy westsouthwest from you, and sail in so right with it, until you come by Whitingsand, in five or six fathom: and lead it in so by, it upon the lead, until that you come by Balsy, or that you get deeper water.  
When you come near Balsy, whether you be come in from the northwards, or the southwards of Whitingsand, you must keep somewhat off from the shore, because of a little riffe or smalltayle, that shooteth off from the shore, thwart of Balsy cliff, which you must avoid somewhat, with ships of great draughts, there remaineth at low water upon it not more than two fathom, you may commonly perceive it well by the rippeling of the tide.  

For to sail in at a channel through the Court.  You may also sail into the southwards, of the Rib (that is, the tail of the Court or Courtesand) thus: Bring the steeple of Balsy northnorthw. or a little more northerly from you, and sail in so right with it, and so you shall run into the northwards, or through the Court, at a channel of eight fathom depth, the e. side of this channel is steep, come no nearer it than eight fathom, but by the w. side you may run in about by the Court, upon the lead, until you come within the sands.  

Balsy.  Balsy hath a high flat steeple, & lieth somewhat within the land behind the cliff, when as you come from the northwards, you may see Balsy to the northwards or the westwards, of the cliff, but you sail it altogether behind the cliff, so that at last it cometh out again to the southwards of it.  

For to sail into Harwich.  If you will sail to Harwich being past Balsy, then bring Balsy to that steep-poynt to the southwards of Balsy where trees stand upon, keep these marks so standing, and run so alongst by the shore, until that you be over the point of the Chindle, the marks thereof are two high trees within the land, when they are about northnorthwest from you, than they come one in the other with the steeple of Harwich, and then you are right over the point of the Chindle, and then you shall get deeper water, to wit sour and five fathom or somewhat more against the highest water. Run in then about by the point, the channel lieth in right north, but in the midst of the haven's mouth lies a sunken rocky & stony ground, which you must avoid, you may sail in about it on both sides, by the one shore or the other, but alongst by the east shore it is best, being within it, you cannot sail amiss, or take hurt, if you do not sail bluntly against the shore: there you may anchor all over, where you please before the town, in five, six and seven fathom. You may well also go further into the bite, there it is clean everie where. The farewaye betwixt Ordfornes or Whitingsand and the Naes lieth most south-west and by south, & is six, seven & eight fathom deep, in turning to windewards, you may run to the shore in 5 and 4 fathom, but close to the sands it is deeper, to wit, eight nine and ten fathom, the nearer the sands the deeper water.  
But for to sail from Balsy to the Naze, 
The Naze  you must mark the steeple of Balsy, when it cometh within a capstane bars length near to the south end of the cliff, then keep them so standing, so long until that the house upon the Naze come over the two fields, which lie on against the Highland, or come over a black head upon the sea side, sail then right in with them, until that the steeple of Harwich come to be northnorthwest from you in the little valley off a red cliff, leave then the first marks, keep the steeple of Harwich in that little valley, and go on southsoutheast, until that the third point of the Naze come without the 2 other points, so you shall run through betwixt the Naze & the course, there remaineth at low water no more than eight, ten, and at same places twelve foot water, therefore it is not good to run through here, unless that it be a quarter flood or with a ship of great draught at half flood, there it is very uneven ground rocky and stony. The point of the Naze is vere stony, soul and uneven, the nearer the shore thwart of that point the shoaler, but the nearer the Sands the deeper.  
When that the third point of the Naze cometh without the two other points or the other land, and that it doth again begin to deepen off, to wit; 4 or five fathom then go south-west somewhat southerly, or southwestand by south, unto the buy upon Longsand. 
Longsand  Thwart of the Naze is Longsand very steep, so that it cannot be well sounded with the lead by them that are not there very well acquainted, but somehwat more to the southwards, you may run alongst by it in four fathom, and three fathom & a half, until that you get the buy upon Longsand in sight of you. The north shore to the southwards off the Naze is also flat, you may run alongst by it also upon the lead, without any danger.  
The buy upon Longsand lieth in 2 fathom and a half at half flood, you must leave it on the larboard side, and the Buy upon the Spits, 
Buys upon Longsand and the Spits.  on the starboard side, which lieth a little shoaler, they lie about south and by east and north & by west, a musket shot one from the other. The course betwixt the two buys is southsoutheast & northnorthwest, but you must reckon well your tide, whether you run through there with a flood or with an ebb. Upon the Spits, 
The Spits  betwixt the two buys is at half flood at least three fathom and an half, or almost four fathom, in the right channel, a little to the southwards of the buy upon the Spits stand two masts above water, of a lost ship, which are good marks. Being over the Spits, the course to Whitakers beacon 
Whitakers beacon.  is southsouthwest.  
About half ways, betwixt them stand also 2 masts more on the same w. side, & over against these masts lieth a middle plate, whereupon lieth a buy on the w. side: the fareway is alongst to the westwards of this Middle-plate, through betwixt that foresaid buy and the masts.  
To the northwards of that foresaid Middle plate, 
Middle-plate.  goeth out a channel by the south side of Longsand, which you may sail out and in, called the Kingsdeepe. If you come from Whitakers beacon, past the Middle-plate, so far that you get sight of the buys of Longsand or Spits, go then boldly eastnortheast and north-east & by east into sea, or upon the lead alongst by Longsand, but if you should run into sea, to the southwards of the Middle-plate, you should with an eastnortheast way fall within the hook of the Mouse. This Kingsdeepe 
Kinghs-deepe.  is a ready channel, and is used almost by all ships for to run out at.  

For to sail into the King's deep.  For to run in at this channel out of the sea, then bring the point of the Naze northwest from you, and sail in so with it, until that you come near Goemfliet or Longsand in five fathom, go in then alongst by it about westsouthwest and south-west, and by west, and keep the sounding of Longsand; and so you shall not fail to run in sight of the buy upon the Spits and the foresaid masts to the of it.  
From Whitakers beacon to the Shoebeacon the course is southsouthwest somewhat westerly, coming thwart of the Shoebeakon, then lieth the east point of Seppie about south from you. From the Shoebeakon 
Soebeakon.  the course is alongst south-west to the point of Blacktayle, there runneth off a Hook, which men might sail within coming from the northwards: but if you keep from the shore in 7 fathom, you cannot take hurt of it, but in five fathom you run within it. The like Hook is also a little to the southwards of the Shoebeakon, which you might unawares sail within, coming from the southwards.  
From Blacktayle 
Blacktaile  to the beacon upon the North, the course is westsouthwest. The North 
The North  is a sand, lying from the south point of the main land of the river, fare to the eastwards, therefore leave the beacon on the larboard side, and go on west alongst, amidst the channel into the river, betwixt both the lands, as here before hath been said in the description of the Fishers deep.  
From Aelbrough alongst by Dunwitch to Covehit the coast lieth north and by east somewhat easterly, & south & by west or somewhat westerly five leagues: but from Covehit to Leystaf north & south two leagues. Aelbrough, Dunwhitch & the sands lying thereabouts, are descriptt here before.  
Betwixt Dunwhitch & Covehit lieth the haven of Soul 
Sowle.  which is a little shoal river, a little within it divideth itself into three parts, upon the northermost arm lieth Soul upon the middlemost Walderswycke, and upon the southermost Dunwitch. 
Dunwich   
Covehit hath a high sharp steeple, thwart of it lieth a bank not far from land, which falleth almost dry at low water, but a half flood you may sail through betwixt it & the land in 3 fathom, upon the outer side it is very steep, so that you cannot come nearer it than nine or ten fathom. When the steeple of Easton is westnorthwest from you, than you are to the southwards of the bank, & when the steeple of Covehit is south-west & by west from you, than you are to the northwards of it.  
Two leagues to the northwards of Covehit lieth Leystaf, 
Leystaf.  & two leagues more to the northwards of it lieth Yarmouth. The steeple of Leystaff is a high sharp steeple, & standeth a great musketh shot within the land from the houses, so that in sailing alongst you may bring the steeple on both sides of the houses. Off from Leystaff begin the bank or Holmes of Yarmouth & lie alongst to the northwards past Yarmouth, until thwart of Winterton, there go divers channels through them, which men may sail through, upon divers marks, for these that are there acquainted, you may sail through within these banks, 
For to come with i● the banks of Yarmouth  off from Leystaff until past Winterton.  
If you will run through from before Leystaf within these banks, then look out for the firebeakons which stand by Leystaf, which are two little white houses, the one standeth beneath upon the chindle on the sea side, & the Innermost upon a little hommock, somewhat farther within the land. When you come from the southwards, they show themselves to the northwards of the town, but come at last thwart of it. In the night there is always fired upon then, for to sail in there also by night. Bring these foresaid firebeakons northwest & by north, or somewhat more northerly from you & sail in so right with them either by night or by day, the church of Leystaf cometh then to the southwards of the Town over a Country house by the water side, when you come against the channel, there is at low water no more than 3 fathom depth, keep these foresaid firebeakons one in the other, or bring the Innermost rather a little to the northwards of the outermost, for to avoid a little plate, which lieth on the southside of the Deep, but the channel is indifferent wide, run until you come against the strand in two fathom and a half or two fathom, so near as you will or can, & go then up northwards alongst by the shore, you shall then (having sailed a little to the northwards) meet with a flat, whereupon remaineth at low water less than two fathom depth, with laden ships, you must anchor before that flat and stay for high water, it floweth there about eight foot, up & down, so soon as you are over the flat it will be 5, 6, & 7 fathom deep, edge then to the shore, & sail toward it, and then you come before the Brewehouse, there is the road, where you may anchor in 4, 5, or 6 fathom, from thence northward toward Yarmouth alongst the shore is all over good anchoring and good ground.  
About an English mile or somewhat more to the southwards of the town Yarmouth, is the haven of Yarmouth, 
Haven of Yarmouth  it hath two wooden heads, where you must sail in betwixt them both against the highest water, when the strongest of the flood is spent, at half flood it is dangerous, because of the strong tide, which should lightly carry you into the bite, against the shore, (against your will) it is also best to run in alongst by the southerhead, there it is deepest. 
Road before Yarmouth.  At Yarmouth in the road men do commonly anchor to the northwards of the haven, right thwart of the town, in 5, six, seven, or eight fathom the nearer you anchor to the sands the deeper water you shall have, but all good sand & soft grounds.  
If you will sail into the Road of Yarmouth through the Holmes, then bring the sharp little steeple, that standeth to the northwards of Yarmouth within the land, over the broad castle, or bring the mill to the north side of the town: keep these marks so standing, and go in so westnorthwest, you shall find in this channel not less water than eight or nine fathom at half flood, this channel is called S. Nicholas channel: 
S. Nicholas channel.  on the north side it is deepest being come in, the road is right before the town in five & six fathom.  
thwart or over against the haven of Yarmouth goeth also a channel through the Holmes, for to sail in through there coming from the southwards then bring the Souton over the north side of the haven; the great tree betwixt Northon & that flat little house or castle, sail in right with them, and keep these marcks so standing, until that you be within the Holms, within them lieth a plate on the starboard side, a little to the northwards of haven, called the Middle ground, you may sail about it is on both sides, on the inner side in five fathom, but towards the Holmes, or about to the eastwards of it in eight and nine fathom.  
From Yarmouth to Winterton, the coast lieth north & by west and northnorthwest two leagues.  
If you will sail from Yarmouth forth through within the banks to the northwards, sail a long by the land, & keep the sounding of the shore in 5, 6, or 7 fathom, until that you have the two firebeacons, (which stand a little to the northwards of Castor) one in the other, sail then right with then, either by day or by night, (in the night there is fired upon them) you shall so run over a flat, through betwixt 2 buys, which lie each of them upon a tail of a sand; sail boldly in with the foresaid firebeacons, until you come again near the shore, in 5 or 6 fathom, being come by the shore, run then again alongst by it, & keep the sounding there of as before, all alongst until you come before Winterton.  
Thwart of Winterton runneth off a dangerous rif, which is dangerous to sail about by night, if men do come too near it, which is upon the end so steep, that (in 3 fathom or 2 fathom & a half) you shall not be a ships length off from it. But when as you (coming from the southwards) keep yourself in six or seven fathom, than you cannot sail so near to it. To the southwards of that rif upon the land, standeth a firetowre, which is very easy to be known, with a firebeakon, & also a little white house, when these come one in the other, than you are thwart of the point of the riff.  
To the northwards of this riff upon the land stand two white firebeakons, whereupon there is fired by night, for to avoid this riff. When as you come thwart of the point, then are these also one in the other, so that these do serve for thwart marks, and the other to the southwards of them for longest marks, for those that will sail about it from the southwards. Coming from the northwards alongst the shore in 5 or 6 fathom, until you come by the firebeakons upon the north side, you must keep somewhat off from the shore, before they come one in the other, or else you should run on against the rif. When they are one in the other than they stand s. w. & by w. from you, and when as the high firebeakon to the southwards of Winterton cometh to be s. west, somewhat more westerly from you, than you are thwart of the point of the rif: you may not also run about far within that riff, for than you should lightly be foul of the grounds on the eastwards of it, especially when you come from the northwards for there it is not very wide betwixt them both.  
From Winterton to Haesbrough point, the course lieth northwest 3 leagues.  
Betwixt Haesbrough & the Admiralshouse stands a ruinous tower upon the strand. When as you keep it & the steeple of Haesbrough one in the other coming from the northwards, than you run right upon the point of the foresaid riffe. Four leagues without the land lieth Winterton sand, the south end where of lieth about east & the north end north-east from Winterton.  
Thwart of Admiralshouse, not far from the shore, lieth also a little plate where no ship can go over, but if you go in six or seven fathom, you cannot sail too near it, you may also run through in 2 fathom, betwixt this plate & the land.  
From Haesbrough to Cromer, the coast lieth alongst northwest and by west, and westnorthwest, three or four leagues.  
The land lieth from Cromer to Bornum first westnorthwest and west and by north, and then west, and west and by south 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Cromer to Blakeney it is 2 or 3 leagues. At Blakeney 
Blakeney.  standeth a high steeple, which you may see alongst fare over the land, when it cometh to the little steeple, than you have the first buy of the channel, which lieth at the south end of the Pole, which is a sand at the west side of the channel of Blakeney, go from the first buy to the other and alongst by them, until you come within the Haven. This is a tydehaven, where men do lie dry at low water. Four leagues to the westwards of Blakeney lieth Wells, betwixt them both lieth the foresaid shoal, called the Poll and Pyper, 
Pol and Piper.  there it is shoal far off at sea. At the west end of this shoal, goeth in the Deep of Wells, the beacons that you must sail in alongst by, stand all alongst by the Pyper. When Hoebrom standeth eastsoutheast from you, than you are to the westwards of the Pyper, thwart of it is good road in 6 fathom Wells 
Wells.  lieth then southeast from you, and the trees stand then also against the steeple, than you may sail open into the Haven of Wells, alongst by the foresaid beakons.  

Of the Depths and Shoales about these places and in what Depths men may see the land.  
Five or six leagues north and by east & northnortheast from the north Forland or from Margat lieth a bank, called Kentish-knock, upon it is three fathom water. Being by it, you may even see the land from below.  
Five leagues north-east from this bank, it is twenty fathom deep.  
Northeast and by north from the north Forland nine or ten leagues, and about east from the Naze, eight leagues into the sea, lieth a bank called the Galloper, of five, six and seven fathom depth.  
The westrocks is a stony ground, lying between the Court and Longsand, whereupon is no more than two fathom water at a half flood.  
Without that sand or Harwitch five leagues from the Naze, it is twenty and two and twenty fathom deep, being there you may see the land.  
Thwart of Orfordnes you may see the land from below, in two and twenty fathom.  
Five or six leagues without Leystaffe & Yarmouth southeast and east into sea, it is 27 and 28 fathom deep, there you may see the land.  
Four leagues east and by south from land, without the Holmes of Yarmouth lieth a bank, called the Newsand, which is not deeper than two fathom.  
Eastnortheast at least 7 leagues from land thwart of Yarmouth, it is 15 fathom, the ground red gross sand with little round stones, being there you may even see the land from below.  
Thwart of Winterton and Cromer 7 or 8 leagues from the land, it is 18 and 19 fathom deep, and there you may see the land.  
Winterton sand lieth 4 or 5 leagues from land north-east from Winterton.   

What moon maketh high water at the places.  
At the north Forland a north and south moon maketh high water.  
Within the Thames a south and by east moon.  
Before the Thames, at Harwitch and Orfordnes a southsoutheast moon.  
At Leistaff & Yarmouth a southsoutheast moon maketh high water.  
Without the banks of Yarmouth, and before Cromer, a southeast Moon maketh full sea.  
Betwixt the banks of Harwitch and the Holmes of Yarmouth the flood falleth south, and the ebb north.  
Thwart of the banks of Winterton and Cromer the flood falleth southsoutheast, & the ebb northnorthwest.   

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
From the north Forland the flood falleth to the Recolvers, and over the Brakes westsouthwest, and west and by south.  
Without about Good-win towards Kentish-knock, the flood falleth north and by west, and northnorthwest there cometh the flood also against it from the northwards, and meet one another by the Galloper, with very great rippeling and noise, (whereof this bank is also called the Galloper) and falleth to the westwards into the sands & channels, and also to the eastwards towards Flanders.  
Betwixt the North Forland & Orfordnesse the stream falleth without the sands south and by east, and southsoutheast.  
When you are to the northwards of the Galloper, than you can reckon no ebb, then that which runneth alongst England to the northwards, the streams fall there all alongst the coasts. To the southwards of the Galloper, the ebb goeth to the contrary to the southwards, and the flood to the northwards.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the north Forland to the north end of the Goodwin the course is south and by east one great leag.  
From the north Forland to Kentish Knock north-east and by north and northnortheast 4 or 5 leagues.  
From thence to the Orfordnesse north 11 leagues.  
From the north Forland to the Gallopper north-east and by north 9 leagues.  
From the Gallopper to Orfordnes northnorthwest, 9 leagues.  
From Orfordnes to the Naze south-west 8 leagues.  
From Orfordnes or Abre to Leytstaff south and north 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Abre to Abreknock eastsoutheast one great leag.  
From Leytstaff to Yarmouth with in through the banks south 2 or 3 leagues.  
From the north Forland to the Wielings, the course is east somewhat northerly about 27 leagues.  
From the north Forland to the Maze, the course is eastnortheast or somewhat moor easterly about 31 leagues.  
From the north Forland to the tessel or Maersdiep north-east somewhat westerly 47 leagues.  
From the Naze or Harwitch to the Maze east 31 leag.  
From Orfordnes to tessel eastnortheast 37 leagues.  
From Yarmouth or Leystaff to Walcheren or the Wielings southeast, and southeast & by south 32 leagues.  
From the point of Cromer or Schield, to the tessel, the course is east 40 leagues.    

Of the heights of these lands.  

The north Forland lieth in 51 degrees 30 minutes.  
Orfordnes lieth in 52 degrees 14 minutes.  
Yarmouth lieth in 52 degrees 48 minutes.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Orfordnes. Albrough. Dunwitch. Walderswyke. Sowle.  
Thus showeth the coast of England betwixt Orfordnes and Soul haven.  
Sowle. Covehit. Leytstaff.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Sowle and Leystaff.  
Leystaff. Yarmouth. Winterton.  
Winterton. Admiralshouse.  
The land to the northwards of Winterton, until past Haesbrough showeth when you sail alongst by it, as is demonstrated in these two figures following the A A one to the other.  
Castor. Haesbrough.  
Thus showeth the land alongst the north coast of England, betwixt Yarmouth and Cromer, when you sail through within the banks.   

De Cust van ENGELANDT tusschen Welles en it Eylandt Coket   

Castor. Winterton. Haesbrough. Cromer.     

The eleventh Demonstration, Where in The Coast of England and Schotland are set forth between Welles and the Island Cocket.  
BEtwixt Wells & Bornum lieth a bank. You may ride under it in five or six fathom, at half flood there is upon it no more than two fathom water.  
He that will sail into Bornum, 
Bornum.  must go in at high water, and he must bring the steeple against the Black-house, and sail so in by the beakons, leaving them on the larboard side. These are all tyde-havens.  
From Bornum to Chapel, 
Chapel.  the course is westsouthwest, 2 leagues, to the northwards of it lieth the Sunk, which is a sand that falleth dry at low water. You may sail about it on both sides of the Sunk 
The Sonk  unto Lin.  
For to sail into the easter channel of Lin, 
Easter channel of Lin.  then sail about to the eastwards of the Sunk, and bring that wood of trees, over the point of Sitsein or Suytson, and Chapel cast from you, then go in southeast and by south and you shall find the first buy, then in south and by west and southsouthwest and by little & little more westerly; until you come about the point, there the buys and beakons shall show you the way.  
When you come about the point, than you may run through the sands, into the norther channel, and sail out again by the same into sea, by the buys & marks that are thereof. This norther channel lieth into sea north-east and north-east & by east, and is very well buyed and beakoned,  

Wester-channell off Lin.  You may also sail into the westwards of the Sunk, to wit, south and by east in alongst by it and so run to the first buy, and then from the buy alongst by the beakons, unto Lin before the town. When you come from the eastwards, you may well run through within the Sunk, alongst by the land, close alongst by Chapel, and in south and by west unto the foresaid first buy.  
For to sail from Cromer or Blakeney to Bostondeep, 
Boston deep.  you must go on w. & by n. until you come by the land betwixt the Hommer and Lagernesse. From the Soecke lieth a long bank, called the Flats, 
The Flats.  n. into sea a league, which at low water falleth dry at divers places. You run with the foresaid West and by North course, (when you are by Cromer or Blakeney a little without the land) alongst without, or to the northwards of this bank, at high water, you may well go over it, the ground on the east side goeth up flat and plain, run boldly to it without fear, until you come in four or three fathom, he that useth his lead can take no hurt of it, but on the inner side, that is, on the west side, it is very steep, so soon as you be over the shoalest, you shall get suddenly deep water, and good sand ground, under it or within it, it is good riding for easterly winds.  
For to sail into Boston deep, 
For to sail into Boston deep.  through within the Knock or Elleknock, you must keep the sounding of the shore in four or five fathom, so long until that the point of Lagernesse be westnorthwest from you. Betwixt the shore and Elleknock 
Elleknock  remaineth at low water, five fathom in the midst of the channel, but Elleknock falleth dry at low water. When as Lagernesse is westnorthwest from you, then go on southeast, through betwixt Elleknock and the shoal, (which shooteth off from the shore to the westwards of Lagernesse) until that you get again depth off six or seven fathom, in this going over remaineth at low water, no more than two fathom, but it floweth there about three fathom up and down. Being over it, then go on south-west alongst betwixt Longsand 
Longsand  and the shoal, which lieth off from the shore, there it is deep betwixt them both 9 and 10 fathom, you may sound both sides, (as well the shoal which lieth off from the land, as Longsand) in five fathom, but the flats is somewhat steeper than Longsand.  
For to sail without Elleknock into Bostons' deep, coming (as is before said) to the west land, you must look out for the two steeples of Ingoldmills, 
Ingoldmills.  standing somewhat to the northwards of Lagernesse, bring them one in the other, and then they shall stand about northnorthwest from you, keep them one in the other, and go on southsoutheast, until that the trees upon the point be by west Lagernesse, come without the point of Lagernesse, and then you run through betwixt Elleknock and Dogshead, 
Dogshead.  (that is a shoal without Elleknock when the aforesaid trees come a handspikes length past, or to the eastwards of the point of Lagernesse, then go on south-west, and then you run right into the deep, betwixt Elleknock and Longsand, and so you shall find betwixt Elleknock, and the point of Longsand five fathom depth, being past Elleknock, it will be eight nine and ten fathom deep.  
If you will sail out of the sea into Boston deep, and not alongst by the land, as is before said, then bring the foresaid trees a handspikes length without the point of Lagernesse, which shall then stand from you about westsouthwest, sail in so right with them, until that the high land within Lagernesse or Winfleet begin to come even without the point of Lagernesse, which shall then be from you somewhat more northerly than west, than you are within the point of Longsand. Or else there stand three little houses on the sea side, about half ways betwixt Lagernesse, & Ingoldmils, when they come to be northwest from you, & those foresaid trees without the point, than you are also within the point of Longsand, go in then south-west betwixt Elleknock and Longsand, as aforesaid. Alittle past Lagernesse lieth a shoal or plate about the midst in the fareway, but nearest Longsand when the trees upon the point to the southwards of Winfleet come in the second valley of the high land within Winfleet, than you are right thwart of this shoal, edge  to one side or other, rather towards the shoal, there is widest, keep boldly the sounding of the shoal, & run south-west alongst by it, until that the steeple of Boston come over the steeple of Butterwyke, 
Butterwyke.  that is also a flat steeple, but smaller then that of Boston standing in a wood of trees, thwart of it runneth the shoal somewhat off with a point, being past it, go on westsouthwest all alongst by the foresaid showld, until that the great steeple of Boston come over the second mill, there it is good anchoring by the west shore in five fathom at low water. He that cometh there at low water, must anchor and stay for the tide until half flood, before that you may not sail further in from thence, and then you shall not also find more than two fathom upon the shoalest.  
From thence the Deep lieth in alongst by the beakons about south to the third beacon, being past that westsouthwest, and then by little and little, more westerly & northerly, but run all alongst by the beakons, leaving them on the starboard side, at last on north into the River.  
Upon the point of the river standeth a house, which is a sheephouse, before that you come by it, it seemeth as if there were no opening, by reason that it is all even green land, run in by it, all alongst by the land, being past it, the River doth open itself. Being come within the points you must run in betwixt two dikes, a league up until you come before the town, in the river it is at half flood every where deep enough. When as that you come a little within the houses of the town on the larboardside, there you must let fall your anchor and stay until that the water begin to fall, than you shall have flood enough for to drive to the Key, there you make fast with one cable, it doth not begin to be ebb there, before that water be fallen three foot.  
An east and west Moon maketh in Boston deep the highest water, but before the town an east and by south and eastsoutheast moon. He that cometh from Boston, and will sail out at the deep with a high water, let him look out for the foresaid high land within Lagernes, when that cometh behind the point of Lagernes, than he may boldly set his course whether he desireth to be, either to the eastwards, northeastwards, or northwards, there is nothing then that can hurt him.  
From Lagernesse to the Hommer it is about seven leagues, most north, betwixt them both, about a league to the southwards of the Hommer lieth a place called Saltfleet haven, 
Plate by Saltfleet haven.  a little to the northwards of a sharp steeple called Wilgrip. Thwart of that foresaid Saltfleet haven, about an English mile from the shore lieth a bank or Sandplate, not very great, which at low water falleth almost dry, you must run about without it, & leave it lying towards the land from you, but yet for need you may also sail through within it.  
For to sail into the Humber 
For to sail into the Humber.  coming from the northwards, you must sail alongst by the shore, and run about by the n. point, but coming by the point you must keep somewhat off from the shore in 4 or 5 fathom, for to avoid a little tail, which lieth off from the point, being about it, run to the little Island, which lieth a little by west that foresaid north point.  
If coming from the southwards you desire to sail to the Humber, then bring the paul Steeple (which is a high sharp steeple standing on the North side of the Humber) a little by south the North point of the Humber, or over that foresaid little Island, and sail so right in with it, until that you come by that little Island, being come by it, leave it on the starboard side and run in close by it, for to avoid a great Sand called the Bull, which lieth off from the South shore almost unto that little Island. When that you come within that little Island, then bring the two beakons (which stand upon that little Island) one in the other, keep them so standing, 
Road before Grimsby.  & sail so on to the westwards towards Grimsby, you leave the Buy upon the Bull lying then on the larboard side, & run along to the northwards of it: In this faireway it is seven and eight fathom deep. You may not come nearer the Bull then in six fathom. Before Grimsby you may anchor in three or four fathom at low water, it floweth there at least three fathom up & down, a westsouthwest & eastnortheast Moon maketh before the Humber the highest water. Within the foresaid Island at the north point of the Humber, you may anchor in three or four fathom: There lie commonly Ships that are bound out, and tarry for the Wind.  
From Grimsby in alongst to Hull, the course is west northwest to the end of the Bank or ballast Plate, which you must leave lying on the north side. On the south side lieth also a little plate, there standeth commonly a Beacon upon it, that you must leave on the Larboard side, & run along to the Northwards of it, being past it, you may run alongst by the South shore in 3 fathom. The fareway there is four, five, and six, and thwart of the foresaid Beacon eight and ten fathom. When you come to the end of the Bank, you must edge up to the Westwards about by the point on the South side, but there runneth off a Flat which you must avoid. Being a little about that point you shall see the Town of Hull, lie before you, there you may anchor before it in six, seven, or eight fathom: An east and west Moon maketh full sea before Hull. He that will anchor upon the ballast plate, let him bring the flat steeple which standeth a little to the northwards or the eastwards of Hull to the high point of Pawl, and keep them so standing until that he come to the plate, there it is best for to anchor upon it.  
From the North point of the Humber called  head to Flambrough head, 
Flambrough head.  the course is northnorthwest nine or ten leagues, betwixt them it is shoal water of six, seven, and eight fathom deep. Flambrough head hath many white spots and Chalk Hills, especially upon the north side towards Fyley. Flambrough hath a Head or Pier. A league to the westwards of it on the south side lieth a little Town called Burlington, 
Burlington.  which hath also a Pier. You may anchor there in the Bay in six or seven fathom.  
Three leagues by west Flambrough head lieth Fyley, 
Fyley.  in a round bay to the southwards of a point that lieth out, which hath a Pier or Head, where you may lie within it, but it falleth there dry at low water.  
Without the head of Fyley lieth a rock under water, called Fyley bridge, 
Fyley bridge.  betwixt it and the Pier you may well lie a float with a ship of an hundred lasts, in five fathom at low water, and have shelter for a north-east & east wind.  
From the point of Fyley to Scharbrough it is northwest two leagues. Scharbrough 
Scharbrough.  hath 2 Peers or Heads, where you may run within them at high water from the southwards, but at low water it falleth there also dry. Men come in there from the southwards.  
From Scharbrough the coast lieth alongst by Robbinhoods' bay, 
Robbinhoods' bay  until before Whidbye, most northwest, but past Whidbie the land falleth in westnorthwest, & by little & little more westerly unto the Tees.  
Robbenhoods bay is a good road for a southsouthwest and west wind, there men lie in seven or eight fathom.  
Whidby 
Whidby.  is a tide haven, which falleth dry at low water, at the east side of the haven runneth off a riffe of rocks, where of you must take heed. For to sail in there, you must run in betwixt the two beakons, until that you come in betwixt the two lands, and anchor there.  
From Whidbie to the Teese the coast lieth most westnorthwest, and west and by north, about seven leagues, betwixt both lie Huntley foot & Redcliffe. Huntley 
Huntleyfoot.  foot is a high hill, lying on the sea side, about 4 leagues to the eastwards of the Tees. Redcliffe 
Redcliffe.  lieth about half ways betwixt Huntleyfoote and the Tees, it is a cliff of such very red earth, that when the sun doth shine against it, it is to see to like red cloth these two are very good marks, for to know this coast by.  
Close to the southwards of the mouth of the Teese lie three riffs, which lie about a half league eastnortheast into sea, which are very foul and stony, and fall dry at low water, upon the north side they are very, flat, so that you may sound about by them, in five, six & seven fathom, but on the south side are so steep that coming near them, and sounding in thirteen and fourteen fathom, you should be upon them, before you should be able to heave the lead the second time.  
A league and half to the northwards of the Teese lieth Hartlepoole, upon a point that lieth out almost like an Island. For to go in there you must run into a bite to the southwards of the town with in a head, until you come against the town, there you shall lie dry at low water.  
About half ways betwixt Hartlepoole 
Hartlepoole.  & the Teese, runneth off also a riffe of rocks thwart from the shore a good ways into sea, come no nearer in then, 5 or 6 fathom. There standeth a mill to the northwards of the town Hartlepoole, if you keep that to the west side of the town Hartlepoole, than you cannot sail upon that foresaid riff, but if you bring the foresaid mill a little to the westwards from the town, so that you may plainly see through betwixt the mill and the town, than you shall not fail to sail upon that riffe.  

For to sail into the Tees.  For to sail into Teese coming from the northwards, you must observe these marks following. A good ways to the northwards off Hartlepoole, a little to the southwards of Sonderland, and a little within the land lie upon the high land, two hommocks close one to the other, very easy to be known, off fashion like women's breasts, called the Paps, 
The Paps.  keep these 2 hommocks even without the point of Hartlepoole, which shall then stand from you northwest and by north, and sail so on to the southwards, and you shall fall before the Tees, and shall not sail to near the sands that lie out before the mouth of the Tees, and lie off about a half league into sea.  
On both sides, as well on the north side, as the south side of the Tees stand 2 little white houses for fire beacons: If you come from the northwards and get sight off them, then bring first the 2 southermost one in the other, which shall then stand from you south and by east, sail right in with them, until that the other 2 which stand on the north side of the Teese, come also one in the other, then leave them on the south side, and sail in right with them that stand on the north side, and so you shall run in amidst the channel, there is upon the bar, or shoalest, at low water no more than five foot, but it floweth there with a common tide, at least 2 fathom up and down. A south-west moon maketh there full sea. If when you come from the southwards, you will sail into the Teese, then bring the innermost of the 2 firebeakons (which stand on the north side) at least a handspikes length, or the length off a capstane bar, to the northwards of the other, and run so westwards towards them, until that the two firebeakons on the south side are one in the other, then sail in right with them, as hath been said, until that the 2 firebeakons on the north side come one in the other: when you have them one the other, run in right with them, until that you come by the north shore, & then close alongst by it.  
When as that you come so fare in past the first fire beacon, to weet, that you may see Hartlepoole betwixt the 2 firebeakons, there you may anchor in three, 4, or five fathom, or when Hartlepoole cometh betwixt the foresaid firebeakons, then go southsouthwest, until that you come by the south shore there it is also good anchoring. Further it is pilots water unto Stockton, for there within, the deeps do shift oftentimes, and that in short time, 3, 4, or 5 times in a summer.  
He that will sail in there with northerly winds, and a flood, must reckon well his tides, for the flood falleth strong to the southwards over the grounds, and should thereby be lightly carried behind the bank to the southwards off the buy, which lieth upon the point of the bank.  
Besides this foresaid channel there runneth yet another channel through the grounds, which lie off from the north point of the Tees. 
For to sail in to the newe-channell.  For to sail in there, you must take mark of the two high lands within the land, to the southwards of the Tees, bring them within a handspikes length one to the other, or bring the Paps to the west side of Harlenope, then shall also a foresaid two high lands come within a handspikes length near one to the other sail in right with them, and so you shall run right into that new channel, alongst through that a foresaid sand, and come against the buy (upon the sands, on the south side off the Deep) again in the right farewaye. When that you get again deeper water, or have the two firebeakons on the north side one in the other, then go in towards them, and further as hath been before said.  
About seven leagues to the northwards of the Tees lieth the river off Sonderland, a little to the northwards off the Paps, which are very good marks for to know the land by there abouts. When the Paps are southsouthwest from you, and that you are about an English mile from the land, than you are right before the river of Sonderland, the ground is there abouts indifferent clean, but somewhat stony, you may anchor there in 4 or 5, & 6 fathom. On both sides, as well on the north point, as the south point of the River it is stony. On the north point standeth a beacon in the water, there you must run in, within a little ships length alongst by it, being past that you shall get deeper water, to with, a fathom & a half, & 2 fathom at low water, but upon the bar remaineth no more than three foot. With a common spring & high water there is about 2 fathom & a half, or a little more.  
After this aforesaid first depth of a fathom and a half or two fathom, you shall meet again with a stony floor, about three ships lenghts broad, upon it is at high water about 11 or 12 foot deep, according as the tides shall run: being over there, it is again deeper. A little past that is a narrow place, where a long ship shall scarce be able to wend, within it, it is wide enough, and very where good anchor ground.  
From the Tees to Tinmouth the course is northnorthwest 8 or 9 leagues. Two leagues to the southwards of Tinmouth lieth the point of Sonderland, 
Sonderland.  but close to the southwards of Tinmouth goeth in the River of Newcastle. From the point of Tinmouth shooteth off a ledge of rocks, you must sail in by it, leaving it on the starboard side. The marks for to sail into this River are two firetowers or firebeakons, which stand upon the north shore, bring them one in the other, or the innermost (that is the highest) a little to the northwards of the outermost or lowest, & sail so right in, alongst by the aforesaid ledge of rocks on the north side, and so you shall have upon the shoalest two fathom at half flood, a south-west moon maketh there full sea. The south shore is flat you may lead it in there with the sounding pole, for ships, that go not deep, in ten foot at half flood. When you come within, run all alongst by the north shore, until past the little town Sheels, edge then over to the other shore, until you come through the crooked reach, there the river lieth up again a little to the n. wards, & then to the southwards to Hawkes-bill, & about by it to the town Newcastle.  
Seven or 8 leagues to the northwards of Tinmouth lieth the Cock Island, betwixt them both about half ways lieth a River called Bly, 
Bly.  where the French men do much sail to fetch coal. From the north point of this river runneth off a ledge of rocks a great shot of a cast-peece; about southeast into the sea, but the south side, & the coast to the southwards of it, is very clean and sandstrand. Upon the south point stand two beakons: If you will sail in there, bring them one in the other, and sail right in with them, and then you can take no hurt of the foresaid ledge or riffe of the north point. When that you come by or thwart of the outermost of the 2 foresaid beakons, you shall see there by it another smaller beacon, that standeth upon a little ledge off rocks, that shooteth off from the south point, leave that on the larboard side, and run in alongst close about northwards of it. The foresaid ledge of Rocks on the north side remaineth at high water (a good ways from the land, and also at a springtide) above water, within it is a bite, there it is good lying for a north or north-east wind, and there remaineth at low water two fathom depth. In the mouth of the River it is with an ordinary tide and high water about two fathom deep, or somewhat more, and it floweth there two fathom up and down, so that at low water it falleth almost altogether dry.  
The Cocket Island, 
Cocket Island.  is a very little Island, & not high it lieth about a half league from the land, you may come to anchor in it for an east, south, & southeast wind, but the wind coming to the northwards of the east, maketh there a bad road, for you must lie betwixt the Island and the main land where you have no shelter for a north wind. On the south side of the Island the ground is foul, & a little to the southwards of the Island, runneth off a foul ledge of rocks from the shore, until thwart or past the Island. He that cometh from the southwards, must keep the Coast of Bambrough without the Island, or else he should not fail to sail upon the point of that foresaid ledge.  
Betwixt that ledge and the Island it is also very narrow, so that a man standing at low water mark upon the rocks of this ledge, should almost be able to cast with a stone unto the Island. For to sail in there, take heed unto these marcks here after described: there standeth a house upon the sea side, which is a Salt kettle, and also a Castle somewhat further in within the land, which doth show itself high enough, bring them one in the other, & then they shall stand somewhat more northerly than west from you, and run so right in with them, and so you shall run in right amidst the channel betwixt both, being come within, edge up behind the Island, & anchor there in five or six fathom.  
About this Island there run also many more divers little Rivers in to the land, but they fall most dry at low water.  

Of the Depths & shoals about these places, and in what Depths men may see the land.  
Thwart of Winterton & Cromer, seven or eight leagues from land, it is eighteen and nineteen fathom deep, and there you may see the land. Northeast and north-east and by north from Cromer lieth a Bank, whereupon remaineth at half flood no more water, then 4 fathom, from thence you may see the land indifferent well.  
North & by east from Blackeney lieth a bank, whereupon remaineth at half flood no more water than five fathom. In eighteen fathom thereabouts you may see the land. From thence to the point of Chapel it is all shoaly.  
About northnorthwest and north and by west from Winterton-sand lieth the bank before Cromer 5 leagues without the coast.  
To the northwards of the Humber of Hull, you may see the land in 25 fathom.  
Flambrough-head men may see in five and thirty fathom.  
Scharbrough men may see from below in five & forty fathom.   

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams, about these foresaid places.  
Before Crommer a southeast Moon maketh high water.  
At Blackeney, Wells, Bornum and Lyn, an east and west Moon.  
Before the Humber of Hull an eastnortheast and westsouthwest Moon.  
From Blackeney to Flambrough-head, the flood falleth southeast & the ebb northwest.  
At Flambrough and Fyley, in the Peer a westsouthwest moon maketh full sea.  
At Scharbrough and Robbinhoods-baye a south-west and north-east moon.  
In the Tees & at Hartlepoole also a south-west and north-east moon.  
Before the River of Newcastle a south-west & north-east moon maketh also the highest water.  
Thwart of Flambroug-head, Scharbrough, the Teese, & also thwart of the river of Newcastle, the flood falleth southeast, and the ebb northwest.  
To the northwards of the Tees, the flood falleth southsoutheast alongst the land, & from the Tees to Scharbrough southeast and by east.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Crommer to Blackeney westnorthwest 3 or 4 leag.  
From Blackeney to Bornum through within the sand west 7 leagues.  
From Bornum to Chappel westsouthwest 2 leagues.  
From Chapel to Elleknock, or the north point of Bostondeep, the course is northwest and by north 5 leagues.  
From thence to the north point of Humber north, and north and by west 7 leagues.  
From the north point of the Humber to Flambroug-head northnorthwest 9 leagues.  
From the north point of the Humber to the Tessel, east and by south & eastsoutheast 55 leagues.  
From Flambrough-head to Feley northwest and by west, and westnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Fyley to Scharbrough northwest and by west, & westnorthwest 2 leagues.  
From Scharbrough to Whidbye northwest 5 leagues.  
From Whidbye to the Teese, the course is first westnorthwest and afterwards west & by north 7 leagues.  
From the Teese to Tynmouth northnorthwest 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Whidbuye to Tinmouth, the course is northwest and southeast 16 leagues.  
From to Cocket Island northnorthwest 8 or 9 leagues.    

Heights.  

The north point of the Humber of Hull in 53 d. 35 m.  
Flambrough-head lieth in 54 degrees. 5 minutes.  
Scharbrough in 54 degrees. 12 minutes.  
Tynmouth or the River of Newcastle in 55 deg. 10 min.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Flambrough-head Fyley Scharbrough Robbinhoods-bay Whitbuy Huntleyfoot Redcliffe  
Thus showeth the land betwixt the Tees and Flambrough-head when you sail alongst by it.  
Huntleyfoot Redcliffe Teese Hartlepoole Esington Schel Sonderland.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Tinmouth & the hills of Huntleyfoot & Redcliffe, to the southwards of the Teese, when you sail alongst by it.   

De Custen van SCHOTLANT met de Eylanden van Orcanesse; van eylandt Coket tot I. Sande.   

Tinmouth  
Cocket  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Tinmouth and Cocket Island.     

The twelfth Demonstration, In which The east side of Scotland, is showed, from the Island Cocket and Orcaneis.  
FRom the Cocket Islands to the Staples 
Staples.  the course is northnorthwest & north & by w. 8 or 9 leagues. The Staples, they are high Islands & rocks right to the eastwards of Bambroug, lying at least 3 leagues from the land north-east into sea, a little to the northwards of them lieth the Holy Island. 
Holy Island.  To the southwards or the westwards of the Holy Island is a bay, where you may lie landlockt almost for all winds, against the Castle is the best road: you may also run in there from the southwards, through betwixt the Staples and the main land.  
Betwixt the Staples and Holy Island lie two sunken Rocks, which at low water come very near even with the water, the westermost towards the Holy Island, is called the Goldstone, 
Goldstone Plough.  the eastermost by the staples, is called the Plough. For to avoid them when you will sail through betwixt the Staples & the Holy Island, whether you come from the Southwards or the Northwards, then bring the Steeple of Teustenbrough over the Castle of Bambrough and keep them so standing, and then you shall run through betwixt them both, this channel lieth so through north-east & south-west. From the outermost end of the Staples to S. Abbens head, 
S. Abbens head.  the course is northwest 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Holy Island to S. Abbens head it is northnorthwest 7 or 8 leagues.  
To the northwards of S. Abbenshead men do run in unto Lieth and to Edenbrough in Scotland.  
S. Abbens head & the Island the Bas lie east and west 4 leagues asunder. The Island May & S. Abbens head northwest & southeast 4 great leagues. May & Bas lie one from the other south-west & by west and north-east & by east three leagues & a half. The Bas 
The Bas.  is a high round Rock clean round about, which you may sail alongst by on both sides. Betwixt the rock and the south shore it is ten and twelve fathom deep, but the common fair way is alongst to the northwards of it. Between S. Abbens head and the Bas it is most part a clean Coast, but without anchor ground. The Island May 
Island May.  is greater than the Bas, & also clean round about, except on the east side, there it is foul.  
From S. Abbens head alongst to the northwest of the Bas, the course is west and by north and west northwest four leagues, and from by north the Bas to the Island Inchkieth 
Inchkieth.  west and west and by north about five leagues. Between the Bas and Inchkieth by the s. shore lie many Rocks▪ little Islands and foul grounds, where at divers places is road, but are not to be used, but by them which are there very well acquainted. Inchkieth and Island May lie s. w. & by w. & n. e. & by e. 7 great leagues asunder. Inchkieth is somewhat a long small Island, a league to the northwards of it lieth an out point on the north coast called Kingornesse, 
Kingornesse.  before it and about it lie some little Rocks under water but a little to the eastwards of the eastwards of the point is good anchor ground & road for westerly winds. Between that point and the Island May, or the point of Fifsnes on the north shore lie divers little Havens, where of some of them do also yield out coals, but are little or nothing used by the Hollanders. On both sides of Inchkieth is good ground, & good lying as well for westerly as easterly winds.  
From Inchkieth to Lieth it is southeast a league. Before Lieth 
Lieth.  about half an English mile from the shore lieth a Rock upon which standeth a Mast (with a cross or some other thing of wood upon the top of it) for a beacon. At high water the Sea floweth over it, & at low water it falleth dry. With a spring tied at low water men may go on foot to it. From the east side of that Rock lieth off a Riffe almost unto Inchkieth. You may also run through to the southwards of Inckieth betwixt that foresaid Riffe & the south shore, but is not to be done, but by them which are there exceeding well acquainted: There is altogether full of Rocks & foul grounds. When as you sail in to the northwards of Inchkieth you must leave the foresaid Mast on the larboard side, and run about to the northwards of it, & then towards the south shore, and anchor about half an English Mile by west Lieth, and also half an English Mile from the shore, in 6, 7, or 8 fathom. Lieth the Haven Edenbrough are tide Havens which fall dry at low water.  
From Lieth to Queen's Ferry 
Queen's Ferry.  there lie on both sides many Rocks, some above and some under water. In the Narrow before Queen's Ferry lieth a little Island called Inchgarve which you must run alongst to the northwards of, on the south side it is with a Stone bank (where men may go over at low water) fast to the main Land, alongst to the northwards of it, it is clean and deep. Within that little Island lie Caryn and other places more where men do lad Coals.  
Under the east side of the point to the northwards of Queen's Ferry is good road in 2, 3, or 4 fathom, according as you lie fare from the shore.  
A league north from the Island May lieth the point of Fifsnes, 
Fifsnes.  lying from S. Abbens head northwest and by north 4 great leagues. From thence to Dondee it is northnorthwest five leagues. Dondee 
Dondee.  is a good Haven which goeth in betwixt 2 high Lands, being within men do anchor before the Town. Farther in upon the River lieth another Town called S. john's, 
S. john's.  which you may go up to at high water.  
Between the point of Fifsnes and Dondee lieth also the Bay of S. Andrew's, 
S. Andrew's.  there is all over good anchor ground. Four great leagues north & by e. from the point of Fifsnes, & north-east from S. Andrew's lieth a great Rock called the Inchkap, 
Inchkap.  which the Sea floweth over at high water, and at low water it falleth so dry, that the Fishermen go upon it.  
Seven leagues to the northwards of Dondee lieth Monrosse, 
Monrosse  a good Haven, First you must sail in there amidst the channel, and edge up to the northwards & anchor before the Town.  
Over against Monrosse lie three Hommocks which shoot out from the other land, bring the middlemost and the houses upon the strand together, then shall you find the middle of the fareway, on both sides of the haven's mouth lieth a blind cliff.  
Betwixt Dondee and Monrosse lieth an out point called Redhead, 
Redhead.  about a great League to the Southwards of Monrosse. There standeth a high Tower upon the Land called Abrot.  
From Monrosse to Stone Bay 
Stone-Bay.  or De Torre, the course is north-east & by North four leagues. This is a deep bay & a good Haven for those that are bound to the southwards, where men may lie Land-lockt with many Ships.  
Three leagues to the northwards of it lieth Aberdyn: 
Aberdyn.  In this Havens mouth it is three fathom deep. The west point is somewhat foul, therefore you must run in by the east land, until you come within the Haven, and anchor before the Town in four or five Fathom. Up to the northwards is a great Bay, but is shoal on both sides. There goeth through a little Creek towards old Aberdyn, which is an old ruinous Town.  
From Aberdyn to Boeckenes 
boeckeness.  the course is northnortheast twelve or thirteen leagues. Betwixt them both lieth a tide Haven. boeckeness is a high Hill and lieth upon the south side of the point. To the northwards of boeckeness lieth a Bay as a Haven called Spy 
Spy.  or Spilaert and right before the shore lieth a sand called Ruttenbrugh which you must take great care thereof as you come from the northwards. From thence the land lieth in west & west south-west unto the Haven of Rosse or Luvernes.  
To the northwards of Rosse lieth an out point called Cape Tarbate, 
C. Tarba.  right in the bottom of the Bay betwixt Catenes & boeckeness, distandet from boeckeness about 19 or 20 leagues. In this bay are many havens & sounds, which are deep enough for to come into with great ships. It is from thence to Catenes 14 leagues north-east & by north Catenes lieth from boeckeness northwest & northwest and by north 20, 21, or 22 leagues. From boeckeness unto the outermost Orckanes it is north and by west and northnorthwest two and thirty or three and thirty leagues.  
The Orkeneys are one and thirty Islands in number, first Wayets or Elhoy, which lieth next to Scotland, five leagues about the point. About northnortheast off from the point of Catenes lie two little Islands Pits & Pichlandscare there you may run through to the westwards betwixt Elhoey and Scotland.  
To the northwards of them lieth an Island called Heynda, with an other Island called Platta, to the northwards off Platta lieth Mayland or Ponoma. On the north side of this great Island are all the havens where the ships come to.  
Upon the east side of this great Island lieth another Island called Kabunsa, to the northwards of it lieth an other Island at the north-east point of the great Island, you may also run through there towards Papewester, and leave Sand a lying on the starboard side.  
Close to Papewester lieth Fara, to the southwards of it is Sirza. To the eastwards of Sirza and Fara lie two Islands, in the midst of all these Islands, called Eeda and Chapnoza.  
Sanda lieth to the northwards of all these Islands, but Papa & Stronza lie to the southwards of Sanda.  
To the eastwards of Stronsa lieth an Island called Cuistella, that is the eastermost Island of all, the northermost is called Ronalze or Northernase.  
Eleven or twelve leagues northwest from the great Island lie two rocks, the one under water & the other above water, he that cometh from the westwards, must take heed of them.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
On these coasts betwixt Tinmouth & S. Abbenshead a south-west & north-east moon maketh high water.  
At Lieth in the Haven a south-west & by w. moon maketh full sea.  
The flood falleth alongst these coasts southsoutheast and the ebb northnorthwest.  
At Orcanesse & Boecknes a south-west & north-east moon maketh high water.  
The floods come about from behind Scotland from the westwards through betwixt Fayrhill & Orcanesse, & make there about full sea with a south-west & north-east moon.  
From Boeckenesse, the flood falleth south alongst the coast towards Lieth, & the ebb north to the contrary.  
In this fareway it is deep 40, 50, and 60 fathom, in 45, 50, fathom, you may see the land. In this fareway in the summer the first Herrings are caught.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Tynmouth to Staples north and by west 16 leag.  
From Staples to Berwick westnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Berwick to S. Abbenshead n. n. w. 5 leagues.  
From the Staples to S. Abbenshead n. w. 8 or 9 leagues.  
From S. Abbenshead to the Bas west 4 leagues.  
From the Bas to Inckieth west & west & by north 5 leagues.  
From S. Abbenshead to the Island May northwest 3 leagues.  
From S. Abbenshead to Fifsnes northwest & by north 4 great leagues.  
From Fifsnes to Doonde northnorthwest 5 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to Scuytenes north-east 99 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to the Naze north-east & by east easterlye 103 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to the Scawe eastnortheast 130 leag.  
From Tinmouth to Holyland east & by south easterlye 106 leagues.  
From Fissnes to Stone-Bay north and by east 16 leagues.  
From Redhead to Monros' northwest 4 leagues.  
From Monros to Stone-bay n.e. and by north 5 leagues.  
From Stone-bay to Boecknes northnortheast somewhat northerly 16 leagues.  
From Aberdine to boeckeness northnortheast 12. leag.  
From boeckeness to Phyloort or Spyloort northnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Phyloort to the point of Elgyn west 10 leagues.  
From the point of Elgyn to the Haven of Rosse or Luvernes west & by s. somewhat southerly 7 leagues.  
From cape de Terbate to Catenes n.e. & by n. 14 leagu.  
From Catenes to Ilhoy westnorthwest. 5 leagues  
From boeckeness to Catenes northwest & by northwest and by north 22 leagues.  
From Boockenes to the Orcaneys' north & by west and northnorthwest 26 leagues.  
From boeckeness to Hanglip, or the south end of Hitland north somewhat easterly 50 leagues.  
From boeckeness to Scuytenes east and by north somewhat northerly 72 leagues.  
From boeckeness to the Naze east somewhat southerly 88 or 90 leagues.  
From boeckeness to Boevenb. in Jutland east & by south 106 leagues.  
From boeckeness to Holylande s. e. & by e. 128 leagues.  
From Boockenes to the tessel s. e. southerly 143 leagues.  
From Boockenes to the Holmes before Yarmouth southsoutheast 108 leagues.  
From Aberdine to the Holmes before Yarmouth southeast and by south somewhat southerly 100 leagues.    

Heights.  

S. Abbenshead in Scotland in 56 degrees 12 minutes.  
boeckeness lieth in the height of 57 degrees 55 minutes.  
Catenes in 58 degrees 40 minutes.  
The greatest or the outermost Island of the Orekneys in 59 degrees 8 minutes.   

Eylanden van HITLANDT oft Schetlant. Fair hill, en Fulo.  
Eylanden van HEBRIDES gelegen achter de noordwest hoeck van Schotlant.  
Eylanden van FERO oft Fare.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Thus showeth boeckeness when you sail alongst by it.  
In this form showeth the land Catenes, when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the north-east point of Orkenes when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the land of Scotland to the northwards Aberdyne, when you sail alongst by it 2 leagues from the land.     

The thirteenth Demonstration, Where in Are set forth the Coast of Fayre-hill, Hitland, and the Islands thereabouts as also the Islands of Fero, and some Islands behind the northwest Corner of Scotland.  
THe Island Fairhill 
Fairhill.  lieth from the east point of the Orcanais north-east, & from Boeckenesse north and by west about seven and thirty leag.  
On the west side of Fairhill is at some places foul ground, but upon the southeast side is good anchor ground, there you may anchor every where but there stretcheth a riffe on the east side of the shore off southeast two leagues in to sea.  

Fulo.  Fulo lieth from Fairehill northwest and by north ten leagues, betwixt them both lieth the southermost point off Hitland, lying from Fairehill northnortheast 7 or 8 leagues, and from Fulo east and by south, 4 leagues.  
The south-west coast of Hitland, (to wit from the southermost point to the northwest point) lieth northwest and by north eight or nine leagues. On the same south-west side, over against the Island Fulo lieth a Sand-bay, where men may anchor, but on the east side of this Bay, it is somewhat foul. From that northwest or west point off to the north end, the land of Hitland lieth north-east by north, & south-west and by south, twenty or one and twenty leagues.  
Two leagues to the northwards of the foresaid west point lieth the Haven of S. Magnus, 
S. Magnus.  which is a broad Sound, within it is good anchor ground in sixteen or seventeen fathom depth, according as you shall be fare within the land. On the north side lieth a high rock, where you must run in to the southwards of. And on the south side lieth two or three rocks, which you must leave on the starboard side, when you sail in there.  
Even to the eastwards about the s. point of Hitland, lieth a fair Sand-bay, where you may anchor in twelve or thirteen fathom, from thence to Hanglip, the course is north-east somewhat easterly 8 or 9 leagues.  
Betwixt Hanglip 
Hanglip.  and the south point lieth an Island, which you may sail about on both sides, within it lieth Hambrough Haven, 
Hambrough haven.  or the Scottish Haven which is a lade place for the Hamburgers and Scots. This Haven is also called Bremer Haven. There lieth also a high steep point to the southwards of Hanglip, to the southwards of it men do run into Broad-sound, 
Broad-sound.  the chiefest Haven of all Hitland, which is deep and hath clean ground, there men do lie landlockt for all winds.  
From the Broad Sound lieth a Sound in alongst to the northwards, through the land, which cometh out again into the sound to the northwards, and so maketh an Island of the land whereupon the high hill Hanglip lieth. When as you will sail in there from the northwards, that is to the northwards of Hanglip, you must run in nearest by the south shore, and edge to it betimes. In this channel betwixt both lands lie two Islands or rocks, the greatest lieth nearest the north shore, and the smallest nearest the south shore, betwixt them both lieth also a sunken rock, which at low water is uncovered, and at high water you may know it by the breaking upon it. When as you will sail in here, you must leave the foresaid greatest Rock, with the sunken rock, on the starboard side, and the smallest rock on the larboard side, there is upon the shoalest three fathom and a half water.  
Within this haven lie also two havens at the north point, which lie into the land, where is good lying.  
When as you will sail from this foresaid haven through within unto the Broad-sound, you shall meet, scarce half ways with a rock, from which lieth off a risse towards the west shore thwart of it you must run close alongst by the west shore, for to avoid that riffe.  
To the northwards of Hanglip▪ the land of Hitland lieth north, north and by east, and northnortheast, at least north, and at some places you may sail in through Hitland, especially to the northwards of Walsoeu, where a fair broad Sound lieth northwest through, there is good anchor ground to find at some places, for these that are there acquainted. From Hanglip to the north-east point of Hitland, the course is northnortheast ten leagues, there lie some outrocks called the Outschares. 
Outscares  From thence alongst to the north point of Hitland, the course is north about 4 leagues.  
A little about the east point goeth in a fair haven, called Bloem-sound, 
Bloem-sound.  lying in south-west. On the west side lieth a long rock, you must sail into the eastwards of it, and anchor a little within the Haven, it is there within all clean sand ground, and good lying. Bloem-sound lieth in first (as hath been said) southsouthwest afterwards south and south and by east, on both sides is good anchor ground, there you may sail altogether through, and come out again through Jelle-sound into sea, about the Island Fero.  

Names of the Islands of Fero.  The greatest and chiefest Islands of Fero are 12, in number, as Suydro, Sando, Moggenes, Wage, Stromo, Ostro, Calso, Cuno, Bordo, Wydro, Swyno and Fulo.  
The little Islands of Fero are ten, as Littledymen, Stoerdymen, Schuyvo, Dalsfles, Hesden, Trallo Colster, Moggensholme, the Monk, and the Bishop. Besides these there are yet some rocks and little Islands, to seven or eight in number.  
The southermost great Island called Suydro, 
Suydro.  lieth most southeast and northwest, about seven or eight leagues. At the southeast end of this Island lieth a high rock, called the Monk, or Sambie, after the name of the first or southermost haven in Suydro. Betwixt the Monk 
Monck Samby.  and the south●●st end of the Island Suydro, is a race or Well, which men must avoid especially with spring tides.  
Upon the west side of the Island Suydro are no havens for to save any ships in, but it is altogether high steep land. On the North side are main havens, where men may sail into and save ships, as Sommersound or Hest, Hofwycke. Vrobie, Quaelbie or Rane, all broad sounds or havens, a country man or Pilot can bring you in there every where to your desire.  
From the Northwest end Suydro to Moggensholme, 
Moggenes-holm.  the westermost and outermost Island of Fero, the course is northwest and by north, and northnorthwest about eight leagues.  
At the east end of Moggenesholme lieth Moggenes, 
Mogenes Wage.  to the eastwards of it lieth the Island Waghe, and to the eastwards of Waghe goeth in a fair Sound from the southwards off from the Island Sando about Hesten & the Island Colster, for you may run in about these Islands on both sides, & leave the great Island Stromo on the east side, and so come into Waghe. In the midst of the Sound of Waghe, goeth up a haven to the eastwards into the great Island Stromo, there in you may anchor in ten or twelve fathom, but the Sound is at least twenty fathom deep.  
Moggenes & the north-east end Fero lie eastnortheast or a little more northerlye, & westsouthwest about fifteen leagues asunder. Betwixt them both lie ten Islands, and betwixt each Island, is a fair broad & deep Sound where of the fourth off from Moggenes is called Somsound. 
Somsound.  All these Sounds lie most northnorthwest and southsoutheast through the land, and upon all these Islands stand Churches, except upon Ostra, which never the less is a great Island.  
From the southeast end of Suydro to Scalhead, 
Scalhead.  or the southeast end of the Island Sando, the course is north and by west about five leagues. Betwixt Suydro and Sando lie the little Islands, Little Dymen, 
Little Dymen.  Stoer Dymen, 
Stoer Dymen.  Schavo and Dalsfles.  
From Schalhead until within the Island Mulso (lying before Stromo) the course is north and by west four leagues, there you may every where anchor, where you will in twenty, thirty or forty fathom. If any man coming in out of the sea, desireth to see a good road or haven under the Islands of Fero, he shall keep that middlemost great Island Stromo northwest and northwest and by west from him, and then he shall see upon the midst of the Island Stromo a high steep hill called Schellinck, which he must sail right in with, and so he shall meet with that foresaid Island Mulso, a low Island, which you may sail about on both sides, but it is best for to run in there at the south, under this Island is all over good anchor ground. Right over against this Island, on the great Island, lieth Torshaven, the chiefest haven of Fero, where all the trade of merchandise is.  
From Torshaven 
Torshaven  or the Island Mulso to the north-east end of Fero the course is north-east, and north-east and by east about twelve or thirteen leagues, betwixt them both lie seven Islands, & betwixt each Island (as hath been said) goeth a broad Sound thorough the land, lying through about northwest a broad thorough the land, lying northnorthwest. The north end of Fero is about four leagues broad, and lieth northwest and southeast, and is called Fulo, thwart of it lieth the Bishop.  
He that desireth to sail off from Mulso into Somsound, let him go on north-east & by north three leag. 
Fulo.  unto the point of Bordenes, then up northwest off from Bordenes, & then he shall espy a Church upon the Island Calso, which he must leave on the starboard side, 
The Bishop.  & go in along westnorthwest until he come into the Bite of the Island Ostro, and anchor there in seventeen or eighteen fathom.  
These Islands of Fero lie in a triangle, it is from the southeast end of Suydro to Fulo, or the north end of Fero northnortheast and southsouthwest 21 leagues a sunder.  
From Scotland westwards and to the northwards of Ireland, lie many Islands, whereof we shall here describe some, with so much perfection, as thereof is yet known.  
The names of the principal Islands 
Names of the Islands.  lying there are these: Areu, Ila, Jona, Mulla, Bragedull, Hun, Lewis S. Patricius, S. Maria, S. Colane, S. Petous, Epth, and S. Kilda, these are the greatest. There are yet some small Islands: as Rona, Ghent, Trauta, Fladde, Grand Melul, Petit Melul, Stalpan, Cannay, Rum, Egghe, Mule, Cut, Carndenbrough, Gronsay, S. Karbo, Lismont, Swynoy, Machare, Gegay, Caray, & Navarsay. All these Islands do lie and belong under Scotland, and are those which by the Cosmographers are called Insulae Hebrides.  
The Island Bar or Rona 
Bar or Rona.  is the northermost Island lying behind Scotland, & lieth from Fulo about westsouthwest 37 or 38 leagues, it lieth by two other little Islands about a great league one from the other.  
The Islands of Lewis lie from Rona south-west distant sixteen or seventeen leagues, and from the north end of Lewis to S. Kilda, it is south-west and by west, 16 leagues.  
On the east side of S. Kilda is a good road for a west and northwest wind. This Island lieth by the other little Island where of the two are not very great, upon that which lieth to the westwards, you may see some houses stand, and these two little Islands lie ten leag. to the westwards of the great Island of Lewis. Upon the coast of Lewis lie also two rows of great rocks, like as if they where little Islands, lying one from the other south & north somewhat easterly about 7 or 8 leagues.  
The southermost lie by 3 little Islands, but the northermost lie by eight small little Islands or rocks.  
The Island of Lewis is divided into many parts, the which men may sail through at many and divers places. Lewis with the Islands belonging to it lie southsouthwest and south and by west about 29 leagues.  
But on the east side goeth a broad Sound through of five or six leagues. Men sail in close by the Island of Lewis, about southsouthwest until past the Island Cheut.  
From thence the Sound lieth through betwixt the great Island Bragadull & Lewis south & south & by west towards the west end of Lewis, called the Ephts, than you must leave Mulla and Ila, with divers many other Islands on the larboard side.  
Jona, Ila, Mulla & Bragadul are 4 of the greatest Islands, which are lying on the west coast of Scotland, and lie close by the main land, but there are many havens & Sounds, so that there you may sail in and about them every where.  
At the northwest point of Ireland lie also some Islands, which you may sail through & round about them all.  
Betwixt Rona & Orkneys lie also some Islands which also you may sail through betwixt and round about.  
He that falleth with these Islands must be very careful and circumspect, for the most part of them are inhabited by wild and savage people.  
In Lewis & the Islands thereabout a south-west and north-east moon maketh the highest water & likewise also without the north point of Scotland.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
In Hitland within the havens & Sounds a southsouthwest & northnortheast moon maketh full sea. The flood runneth there to the eastwards, and the ebb to the westwards, especially at the south end and north end of Hitland, and so fall thwart through the Sounds and havens.  
In the Island of Fero a north and south moon maketh the highest water.  
Under the Islands of Fero go very hard tides, with great turn, the flood cometh there out of the west & westnorthwest the ebb out of the east and eastsoutheast and fall so alongst through the Islands, there you must reckon your tides there after, when you will sail from the one Island to the other, there are two wells or Maelstreames, the one at the south end of Suydry, and the other a league within Scalhead at Quaelnes.  
Although the tides do run so strong through these Islands yet nevertheless it floweth not there four foot up and down.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Fairehill to the north-east point of Orcaneys' south-west 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Fairehill to the south end of Hitland southsouthwest and south and by west 7 or 8 leagues.  
From the south end of Hitland to the Island Rona westsouthwest 46 leagues.  
From the north end of Hitland to the rocks of Rocol westsouthwest 127 or 128 leagues.  
From the south end of Hitland to Fero westnorthwest, & northwest and by west 61 leagues.  
From the north end of Hitland to the south end of Fero west and west and by north 58 leagues.  
From Hitland to the east point of Island, the course is northwest and by west about 130 leagues.  
From the north end of Hitland too Gryp north-east & by east the north-end of 115 leagues.  
From Hitland to Stadt eastnortheast 66 leagues.  
From Fero to Rona, the course is south and by east 45 or 46 leagues.  
From the south end of Fero to Rokol south-west westerlye 85 leagues.  
From Rona Lewis, the course is south-west 16 leagues.  
From the north end of Lewis to Saint Kilda south-west. 16 leagues.  
From the south end of Lewis to the northwest point of Ireland, the course is southsouthwest about. 27 leag.  
From S. Kilda to the north end of Hitland north-east and by east 39 leagues.    

Of the heights of these lands.  

The south end of Hitland lieth in 59 degrees 48 minu.  
The north end of Hitland lieth in 60 degr. 50 min.  
The south end of Fero lieth in 61 degr. 15 min.  
The north end in 62 degr. 20 min.  
The Islands of Rona lieth in 58 degr. 46 min.  
The north end of Lewis lieth in 58 degr. 18 min.  
The Rock Rokol lieth in 58 deg. 20 min.  
The northwest point of Scotland lieth in 58 degrees. 30 minutes.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

When Fairehill is west and south 3 or 4 leagues from you, it showeth thus.  
When Fairehill is west from you, see Hitland northwest from you, it showeth thus.  
When Fairehill is southeast and southeast and by east 3 or 4 leageus from you, it showeth thus.  
When Fairehill is northwest and northwest and by west 4 leagues, it showeth thus.  
Fairehill being 5 leagues south-west and by west from you showeth thus.  
When Fulo is northwest from you so far, that you may even see it out of the top, it showeth thus.  
When the southeast end of Hitland is westnorthwest from you, than showeth the land as in these three figures the AA BB one to the other.  
Thus showeth Hitland, when it lieth northwest and by west about 4 leagues from you.  
Bremerhaven Point of Broadsound. Hanglip.  
In this form showeth Hitland, betwixt Hanglip and Hamburger-haven.  
Thus showeth the land to the northwards of the haven of Broadsound, Hanglip northwest from you.  
Five leagues to the northwards of Hanglip, the land showeth thus being about a league off from it, Hitland lieth in there with a great bite, with many Islands.  
Thus showeth Hanglip, when it is northwest from you eight leagues.  
When as the north end of Hitland is southeast and by cast from you, than it riseth thus.  
When S. Kilduyn is south-west about five leagues from you, it showeth thus.  
When the Island Lewis lieth east from you than it riseth thus, and then you are without S. Kilda.  
This Island lieth also upon the coast of Lewis.  
S. Kilda 6 leagues south-west from you, it showeth thus.  
S. Kilda north-east from you, 4 leagues, it showeth thus.  
S. Kilda south-west and by west 4 leagues from you, it showeth thus  
Fulo 4 leagues from you, it showeth thus.  
This Island lieth westsouthwest from Scotland.  
Thus showeth the Island Bar or Rona, when it is 4 leagues s. s.e. from you.  
This land lieth on the northwest point of Scotland towards Locherme.  
The south point of Fero westnorthwest from you, 5 leagues, it showeth thus.  
The south point of Fero northwest, 6 leagues from you, it showeth thus.      

The first part THE SECOND BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN Is set forth the Description of the Seacoasts of Norway, Finmarck, and Lapland, and also the whole White Sea, from Dronten to Nova Zembla.  
Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famons' Seamen, and lovers of Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


Pascaart Vande zeecusten van RUSLANT, Laplant, Finmarcken, en Spitzbergen.  
De Custen van NOORWEGH tusschen Dronten en Tromsondt    

The first part of the New LIGHTNING SEA COLUMN, OR SEA MIRROR. THE SECOND BOOK, Of the EASTERN NAVIGATION Containing The Description of the Seacoasts of Norway, Finmarck, Lapland, & the whole White Sea.  

The first Demonstration, Where in Are set forth the Coasts of Norway, from Dronten to the Island Tromsound; as also john Mayes Island, and the Newfoundland of Spitsburgh.  

Nomen-dals Islands.  FRom the Island Gryp to the Nomen-dals Islands, the course is north-east, eighteen leagues, but from Gryp to the Island Rust, 
Rust.  north and north and by east four and sixteen leagues. Betwixt them lie (besides the Nomen-dals Islands) also the Islands Holyland, 
Holyland  and Traenoch. 
Traenoch  Traenoch and Rust lie thirteen leagues asunder. From Rust to Wero, the course is north-east and by north nine leagues, but to Loffoert northnortheast and by north three and forty leagues. Betwixt Wero 
Wero.  and Loffoert 
Loffoert.  lieth the Maelstrame, 
Maelstreame.  where you may sail through, but at still water. By the west point of Loffoert you may run in, and make road under it. And also you may run through from thence within betwixt the Islands and the main land, all along unto the North-Cape.  
Betwixt the Island Westerholl, Sanien 
Sanien.  and Tromsound, 
Tromsound.  you may also run in at divers places, and make road. Thwart of these Islands lie here & there in some places sunken rocks and foul grounds, a great league & more without the land. He that saileth alongst this coast, may be careful there of.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams, about these foresaid places.  
On these coasts a southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh full sea. The flood cometh there out off the northwest and westnorthwest, and falleth alongst Finmark towards the North-cape.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Rust to Loffoert northnortheast and north-east & by north 33 leagues.  
From Loffoert to Sanien north-east easterly 36 leagues.  
From Sanien to Suyro north-east and by cast 40 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Maelstream lieth in about 68 degrees.  
The Island Sanien in 70 degrees.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Loffoert east and by south  
Rust east and by south from you showeth thus.  
When the east end of Loffoert is southeast and by east from you, it showeth thus, with the land to the westwards.  
When Loffoert is southeast from you 6, or 7 leagues, it showeth thus.  
When Loffoert is eastsoutheast from you, it showeth and the land between thus.  
This belongeth to the Former.  
The east end of Westerholl shown thus, when as you sail alongst by it, about 7 leagues off from it.  
These two figures belong at the crosses one to the other.  
Thus showeth the land of Sanien, when the 2 high hills upon the east end are southeast and by south, & the point, with the cliff south and by west from you 4 leagues. When as the two foresaid high Hills upon the east end are south from you, than they are right one in the other.     

The second Demonstration, Where in Are set forth the Seacoasts and Islands of Finmarcken, From Sanien to north Kijn or north Cape.  
FRom the Island Tromsound to Surroy 
Surroy.  it is eastnortheast somewhat northerly 15 or 16 leag. To the eastwards of the Island Tromsound goeth in the Tromsound betwixt the Island Fogelden 
Fogelden  and Skyrfeu, 
Skyrfeu.  as you sail in there you leave the Islands Loppen, 
Loppen.  & Loppen-kalf 
Loppen-kalf.  lying on the larboard side without the other Islands, within it are divers Islands, bays and sounds, where you may sail in, and seek road, as Oxefioert, Biurfioert & more other.  
Betwixt Loppen and Surroy men do sail through Suyersound and Stiernersound into the river of Altenbotten, 
Altenbotten.  and then betwixt them they leave on the starboard side Niussioerd, Oxefioerd & Langefioerd. On the larboard side about by the west point of Suroy, on the land of Suroy, lieth a Haven, where by is also a Fisher village, both called Haeswyke, 
Haeswyck  Suroy is about ten leagues long, and lieth on the off-side, eastnortheast.  
Nine or ten leagues to the eastwards of the Island Tromsound, about three leagues without the land and westnorthwest 5 leagues from the west-end of Surroy lieth a shoal of rocks a little under water. 
Showld.  John Huygen of Linschoten in this second voyage to Nova Zembla, in the year 1595 sailed with his ship upon it in fair weather and smooth water, that the sheating of his stem was beaten of two ships; but after some beating the ship turned off with the strong current. It is to be thought that there lie more than men can see, or as yet are discovered.  
About six leagues east and by north from the east end of Suroy, lieth the Island Ingen, 
Ingen.  betwixt them both lie also Reef-holme 
Reefs-holm.  and Shipholme 
Shipholm  little Islands, which you may sail about on both sides, until under Ingen or Suroy.  
When as you come in betwixt Suroy and Ingen, there lieth thwart off from Suroy towards the other land, a good haven, called Hamerfeest. 
Hamerfeest.  A little further in lie two high little Islands, and over against them a road called Slechtnes. Between Hamerfeest and Slechtnes, 
Slechtenes  before that you get Slechtenes, lieth a bay on the land of Suroy, where is good road in 25 or 30 fathom close by the shore. A little past these Islands on the land of Suroy, over against the river of Alten, is a good road called Goeshop 
Goeshop.  being a fair sandbay.  
Between Ingen & the north-cape, or the Island Maggereu lieth Homsbuy, 
Holmsbuy.  an Island which you may sail round about, having on the northwest side a bay, called Akefioerd, 
Akefioerd  where men may make road for southerly & easterly winds, on the southeast side is a bay called Knaarwyke, 
Knaarwyke.  where men may make road, and lie sheltered for westerly and northerly winds.  
Caarte van FINMARCKEN van t' Eylandt Sanien tot Noordkyn  
On the south side of Maggereu even about the east point, lieth Keelwyck a good haven. On the same southeast side, by the southermost point of Maggereu, lieth a little Island called Altensoleu, the Sound betwixt that little Island, & the land of Maggereu is called Maggereu-sound 
Maggereu sound.  there is good road, and shelter for almost all winds: Men may run in through Suyersound to the westwards of Suroy within Suroy, Ingen, Helmshuy, & other more Islands to the southwards of them, a long through divers channels to the southwards of Maggereu, and come out again into sea betwixt the North-Cape and Northkyn.  
From the north Cape westwards the coast lieth alongst the Islands west and by south about 37 leagues, and then from thence westwards, it falleth away more southerly.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
Between Suroye, and the river of Alten a south-west & by west and north-east and by east moon maketh high water.  
At the North-Cape a southsouthwest & northnortheast moon.  
To the westwards of the North-cape the streams come out of the northwest and westnorthwest, and fall alongst Finmarck towards the North-cape.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the Island Tromsound to the west-end of Suroye eastnortheast northerly 15 or 16 leagues.  
From the east-end of Suroy to Ingen east and by north 6 leagues.  
From Helmshuy to the North-cape east and by north 6 leagues.  
From the North-cape to Northkyn east and by south 11 or 12 leagues.    

Heights.  
The North-cape lieth in the height of 71 degr. 30 min.   

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

When this point with the *  westsouthwest from you it showeth thus.  
Noortfoelen with the land to the westwards showeth thus, when the point * is south-west and by west from you.  
The land to westwards Foelen showeth thus, when it is south-west and by south from you.  
When southerfoulen is south-west and by south from you 3 leagues, it showeth thus.  
Noortfoelen south and by west from you 3 leagues, showeth thus.  
Thus showeth Suroy, as you sail alongst by it 5 leagues off.  
Shipholm Island without Suroy,  
When as Shipholm is southeast and the Island without Suroy is south about four leagues from you, than they show themselves thus.  
Thus showeth the land Ingen, when it is eastsoutheast 4 leagues from you.  
Road of Ingen  
Thus showeth Ingen, when this Hill is 1 league south and by east from you.  
This Hill lying upon the Island Lappen, you may see over Suroy as you sail alongst by Suroy from the north end to the south end.  
Thus showeth the Island Lappen, when it is south and by west from you, 4 leagues.  
Lappen south and by east from you, 4 leagues showeth thus.  
Lappen sheweth thus south-west and by south from you, 4 leagues.  
When as Ingen lieth south thwart from you about 4 leagues, it showeth thus, and then Shipholme lieth south and by west from you.  
Long-Hill.  
Thus showeth Ingen, when this Long-Hill is south-west and by west from you.  
When Helmsey is south or somewhat more westerly about 3 leagues from you, it showeth thus.  
When as Helmsey is south and south and by west 5 leagues from you, it showeth thus.  
Helmsey being south-west seven leagues from you, sheweth thus.  
Southsouthwest  
Thus showeth Helmsey being four leagues off from it, when the flat hill is southsouthwest from you.  
Thus from showeth the Island Stappen, when it lieth southsouthwest 4 or 5 leagues from you.  
Thus showeth Stappen, when it is 5 or 6 leagues south-west from you.  
The east end of Stappen showeth thus, when you sail alongst by it.  
North Cape south and by east The Mother with the Deughters' southeast and by south.  
Thus showeth the North Cape sailing alongst by it, the point being from you as above is showed.  
South and by east.  
Noord-kaap.  
The Noord-kaap south and by east from you showeth thus.  
When the Mother with the Daughters is eastsoutheast from you, the land showeth thus.  
When the North-Cape is southeast, and the Mother with the Daughter's southsoutheast form you, than they show themselves thus.   

De Custen van NOORWEGEN en Laplandt. vande Noordkyn tot aen: de Rivier van Kola.   

Thus showeth the North-Cape sailing alongst by it about three leagues from land, when you are close by the land, you may see the Mother alongst above the land.  
Nortkyn. Mother with the Daughters.  
Thus showeth the North-Cape, when as the Mother with the Daughters are southsouthwest four leagues from you, than the Northkyn lieth southsoutheast from you, as is here above demonstrated.  
Southwest and by south Southwest south-west and by west.  
Thus showeth the North-Cape the point being from you, as standeth there above Written, and then you may see the Mother from the hatches appear even above water.  
Thus showeth the North-Cape, when it is west and by north from you, and that you are 3 or 4 leagues without Northkyn.  
Southsoutheast.  
Thus showeth Northkyn being southsoutheast eight or nine leagues from you, than lieth the north cape nine or ten leagues south-west from you, and then between both you may see yet more land in the southsouthwest     

The third Demonstration, In which Are showed the Sea-coastes between the North-Cape and the River of Kola.  
EAst and by south about 11 or 12 leagues from the north-Cape lieth north-kynes. 
Northkyn  From north-kynes to Tannebay it is eastsoutheast 10 or 11 leagues, between both, it is all a clean coast, without Rocks or foul grounds, a high steep craggy land, without any strand.  
When as you come sailing alongst past North-kynes, towards Tannebaye, you shall meet first with the point of Slechtnes, a plain point lying out, very easy to be known: and then Omega a Fisher village, standing on the Sea side, even there to the eastwards of it goeth in the Tannebay, 
Tanebay.  which is a great deep River which lieth in first south, & afterwards, south-west fare within the land, & doth divide itself into two parts, at the mouth of the River, it is at last two leagues or more broad, and all over very deep. He that is bound into the Tannebay, must run in alongst by the west shore, because he must lie by the west shore, on the eastside is no road or place, where men may anchor.  
On the foresaid w. side are many points & bays to see to as if they were roads, but you must sail past them all so long, until that you se on the same w. shore a round hill, whereupon standeth a Warder, a little past that, stand some fisher-men's houses, upon a low hommock, twhart of these houses runneth of from the land a low flat point, you must run in behind that point, & anchor before those houses, with an anchor to seaward & a hawser fast on the land.  
A little to the eastwards of Tannebay lieth the point, & the land of Matkorf, 
Matkorf  from thence to Wardhouse the coast lieth southeast and by east, southeast, and most southeast & by south sixteen leagues, betwixt them there is much high plain land. Half ways betwixt both, but nearest Wardhouse, 
Wardhouse.  lieth a high hommock upon the high land, to see to like a castle, or Country house, very easy to be known, being thwart of it close by land, it seemeth as if there were a great Sound, where men might sail into Wardhouse are three little Islands with some little rocks also by them, the southermost is the greatest of the three, which only is inhabited, upon it is a village of about 300 Norway houses with a castle, it is abouts a half league long, and lieth an English mile off from the land, lying as the coast most south & north, betwixt both, it is all over deep water. On the south side of this Island, lieth a haven or great bay about half ways the Island, and likewise one also on the north side, so that these two bays do come so near one to the other that there remaineth no more than a narrow chindle strand about a stone cast broad, dividing so the Island almost into 2, the eastermost part is the shortest, & highest, the westermost the longest. Close upon the strand, on the east side of the souther-haven lieth the Castle, to the northwards of it, upon the foresaid chindle strand, & about the Bayestrand the houses. In the souther Bay it is good lying, but the best road is betwixt the main land and the Island, about half ways on the side of the Island against a Sandbay, 
Roade Kilduyn.  and right against the Castle, there is good anchor-ground, in ten or twelve fathom landlockt for all winds, except for north and south winds, which blow there right through, yet men have some shelter of some point of the Island. Men may without fear come in there, betwixt the Island and the Many, either from the southwards or the northwards, it is all over cleanie and clear, but he that cometh in from the northwards, must run somewhat nearer the Rock, where the gallows standeth upon, than the Island, because thereabouts the Island is a little foul.  
About a shot of a Cast piece northwards from the greatest, lie the two smallest close one to another, seeming afar off to be one Island, are together not an English mile long, but high and rocky to see to, there lie also two or three rocks by them.  
On this coast like as at the north-Cape a north-east & south-west moon maketh high water.  
From Ward-house to the point of Kegor or the Fisher's Island, the course is southeast and southeast and by south ten leagues.  
Betwixt them both is a great bay, wherein are divers Sounds & rivers, amongst other the River Pitsing, which is a great fair and large River, where men may go in with great ships, a good ways within the river is good road, there is taken and laden much Salmon, but there fall no other special wares. Southsouthwest from the point off Kegor lie two Islands, to the southwards of them men do run into Monnick-forde.  
Kegor is a fair haven, lying at the north end of the Fisher's Island, 
Kegor or Fisher's Island.  a little without the point; There lie two or three rocks at the north point of the haven, and also a sunken rock in the midst of the haven's mouth; you leave the sunken Rock, with the other Rocks on the starboard side of you, and run in by the south shore and edge then behind the foresaid rocks, and anchor there in seven or eight fathom, the haven's mouth lieth in south-west, it is there so good lying as in any havens thereabouts on the coast.  
The Danes call this haven Easterhaven, 
Easterhaven.  there was wont to be the Staple of the Fish, where every one must come to buy: therefore the Island is yet called, whereon Kegor lieth, the Fisher's Island.  
It is indeed no Island, but very near: it is fast to the main land, with such a very small neck, that the Russes, which come from Kilduyn, or the River of Kool, and are bound to the River Pitsing, do go alongst within this land, & haul their boats over that small neck, for not to go about a seaboard.  
From Kegor to Laus, 
Laus.  the course is alongst the shore southeast and by south, somewhat easterly nine or ten leagues. This is a right plain coast; without points or bays, all alongst by Laus to Tiepena, but the south point of Laus lieth out a little, upon which stand two Warders, to the northwards of that point is the haven of Laus, a fair sand-bay, there is very easy lying for southerly or easterly winds, but not for northerly winds, the winds between the northermost and north-east do blow there open in, and make therein a very great hollow sea, men lie there in twelve, ten and eight fathom, according as they run fare in, the farther the shoaler, but all clean rising sandground.  
From Laus a little towards Kegor lieth a little Island, behind which is good anchoring for easterly winds, in clean sandground, but it is somewhat narrow.  
From Laus to Tiepena, 
Tiepena.  it is a great half league, at the point lie some little rocks, but you cannot see them, before you be close to them. Tiepena is a fair haven, when you come from the northwards, you must run so fare to the southwards, alongst by the shore, until that you see open into it, and sail in amidst the channel. When as you come from the southwards, the haven openeth itself, being come in, you must edge up to the northwards, and anchor there, there you lie land-lockt for all winds, there are no dangers which may hurt you, but it is over all clear and clean sandy ground.  
A little about the point, to the southwards of Tiepena, which is on the south-west side of the Fisher's Island is another fair haven, where men may go to anchor, called Kowens. 
Kowens.   
From Laus to the River of Kola, the course is south and by east and southsoutheast about ten leagues. But Kilduyn and Laus lie southeast and by south, somewhat easterly and northwest & by north, somewhat westerly also ten leagues assnder.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
At the North-Cape a South-west moon maketh high water.  
Thwart of the Tannebay a south-west moon maketh high water.  
At Wardhouse a south-west moon maketh high water.  
On this coast like as at the North-Cape a north-east and south-west moon maketh high water.  
Alongst these coasts of Lapland to the eastwards of North-cape, the flood cometh out of the northwest and northnorthwest and so runneth alongst the land unto Orlogenes.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the North-cape to the North-kyne, east and by south 11 or 12 leagues.  
From the North-kyne to the Tanebay eastsoutheast 10 or 11 leagues.  
From the Tanebay or Matkorf to Wardhouse, southeast & by east, southeast and southeast and by south 16 leagues.  
From Wardhouse to the point of Kegor southeast & southeast and by south 10 leagues.  
From Kegor to Laus southeast and by south easterly, 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Laus to the River of Kool south and by east, and southsoutheast 10 leagues.  
From Laus to Kilduyn, southeast and by south easterly 10 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

South. Southsouthwest, South-west & by south. The North-cape west & west and by south. The Mother & the Daughters.  
Sailing between the North-Cape and North-kynes, and the points being from you, as stand here by Written, the Bay betwixt them both showeth thus.  
North-kynes southeast and by south. The point of Tannebay South and south and by east Cows southsouthwest This lieth by west Cows.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt North-kynes and Tannebay, when the North-kynes is southsouthwest eight leagues from you and the point of Tannebay, south and by east.  
Thus showeth Cows when the hill with the Cross is southsouthwest from you 2 leagues.  
Southsouthwest The west point of Cows.  
Thus appeareth the Mother.  
When this hill with the Cross is south and by west from you 2 leagues, then showeth North-kynes thus.  
Tannebay Cows south-west and by west.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Cows and Tannebay, when you sail alongst by it seven or eight leagues without the land Cows being south-west and by west from you.  
Tanebay.  
Thus showeth the Tannebay, when as you come off by Cows, close alongst by the land, you may see these two points on against the high Innerland, the east point showeth itself, almost like Portland, the west point showeth itself first sloping, but when you come by little and little before the Sound, than it well be also steep.  
Matkorf Tannebay Cows  
When as Matkorf is thwart from you, than it showeth, and the land to the northwards of it towards Cows thus.  
Tannebay Cows  
Thus is the land to the eastwards of Tannebay, when as you sail alongst by it three leagues without the land.  
Wardhouse The land to the northwards of Wardhouse.  
Thus showeth the Island Wardhouse, when it lieth south from you three or four leagues.  
Island Wardhouse The many land.  
In this form showeth the Island Wardhouse, & the land to the northwards of it, when it is s. s. w. a league & half or 2 leag. from you.  
Thus showeth the land and the Island Wardhouse being westnorthwest from you three or four leagues.  
Thus showeth the land of Kegor or the Fisher's Island, when as you sail alongst by it four or five leagues without the land.  
Thus showeth the land of Kegor or the Fisher's Island, when as you sail alongst by it coming from the westwards.  
Island Kilduyn.  
These three last figures belong one to the other by the Crosses.  
Point of the Fisher's Island.  
Thus showeth the Island Kilduyn, and the land to the northwards of it in the bay towards Fisher's Island, when as you are betwixt then both seven or eight leagues from land Kilduyn being about south, or southsouthwest from you.     

The fourth Demonstration, Where in Are described the Sea-Coastes of Lapland between the River of Kola and Islands of Swetenoes'.  
FOr to sail up into the River of Kool or Kola, 
The River of Kool.  you must go from Laus, or the south end of the Fisher's Island towards the River southsoutheast and south and by east, run about by the high land of Poden-wolck, and then the River shall open itself very wide. When you are by the point of Laus, you may see the Island Kilduyn, and the River of Koole, or the land by it, Betwixt Laus and the River of Koole, is also a great bay.  
When as you are in the mouth of the River, it lieth in first south and by west, and then southsouthwest, to that Island, which standeth marked with A in the Card of this, River, and then by little and little south-west and by south, alongst by the Island marked with B unto the Train Island than south-west and by west, and by little and little about the point west & by south, afterwards in west, unto Devil's point, over against it lieth the White stone, which lieth upon the land, thwart of it is good road. From thence again west and south, westsouthwest and southsouthwest unto Kool.  
When as you come into the River, 
Road in the River.  and will seek road there, you must keep alongst by the west shore, being somewhat within, you shall see a little Island lying close by the shore: from thence somewhat further about the high point is a Bite or Bay, and in that Bite a Sand-baye, where men may save a ship without Anchor or Cable, that is a fair Sand-baye, where men may run in all alongst.  
Alongst by the north side it is five fathom deep, and clean sandground, men run in there betwixt the two points, but there lieth a black Rock in the narrow, betwixt both shores, which they must leave lying on the starboard side, within that rock it three and two fathom deep unto the strand, within there is fair green fields.  
A little without the Bay lie two Islands, where of the outermost or eastermost is the smallest. When as in sailing up alongst the River, you may come by these two foresaid little Islands about half ways to the Island marked with A, there is also good road, 
Road three Kings.  at the west shore, you shall see upon the high Land three Warders called the three Kings, thwart of them is the road.  
When you are somewhat past the Island A you cannot see the River any more open, but it seemeth to be shut, and close, for that Island by A cometh then under the high land, on the east side.  
Under the Island marked with B is also good road 
Roade.  and clean sandground.  
Likewise is also good road under the Train Island, that is reckoned for the half of the River, to wit off from the mouth of Kool.  
When as you come now a little past the Train Island, where the C standeth, than you shall see out a head a black blue hill, called the Devil's hill, 
Divelshill.  it seemeth m there, as if the River were close and shut. It is best sailing alongst by the starboard side, there you have most all ground close by the land. There are many Bights, points, and Bays, which are not all to be described.  
Het eylandt Kilduyn met de Reed nae it leven ontworpen leggende op de hoochte van 69 graden 40 minuiten.  
De Rivier van KOLA in tgroot besteck.  
De Custe van LAPLANDT tusschen de Rivier van Kola en de eylanden van Swetenoes'  
From the Klinck-hill unto the Robben Island 
Robben Island.  sail all alongst by the west shore, the Robben Island is also covered at high water, but when it is under water, than anchor thwart of the  trees. Thwart of the Robben Island lieth a very great rock, as soon as you are thwart of the high land, look out carefully for it, keep without it, or to the northwards of it, to wit a bow shot, there is the road, there you may anchor by the shore so shoal as you please, it is there good lying, and there you begin to see Kool alongst by the house. Betwixt the Island Kilduyn and the River of Kola, somewhat nearer the River than the Island, lieth a haven, called Bliesna Silensi, 
Bliesna Silensi.  that is so say, the next to Silensi, there you sail in by a round radish Hommock, being come within it, you must edge up to the westwards, so that the haven is altogether shut, and that you can see no sea, you may anchor there so deep or shoal as you will, it is there every where clear and clean white sandy ground, and somewhat oazye and soft, there you may also without fear sail on against the shore in the oaze, and so may save a ship without anchor or cables.  
The Island Kilduyn 
Kilduyn.  is about two leagues long, and one league broad, and lieth westnorthwest and eastsoutheast alongst the land, like as also the channel betwixt the Island & the main land, which is at some places about a half league broad, and at some places, narrower, but all over very deep and clean. About the midst, yet nearest the cast end, is a fair close road, betwixt two points, that lie out towards the main land, there men lie under the Island, close to the shore, before the Laps tents, under the eastermost point, which is a low plain point, in twelve, thirteen, or fourteen fathom, sandground, more to the southwards, it is very deep you shall soon have fifty and sixty fathom.  

For to go into Kilduyn from the westwards.  If you will go to anchor under Kilduyn coming from the northwards or the westwards, then run about by the west end, in betwixt Kilduyne and the main land. When you are come somewhat within, you shall espy a little round Island, there the Channel beginneth to be narrow, yet it is broad enough for to turn to windwards through, sail forth towards the southeast end, until you come in betwixt those two points, and run to the foresaid low point, and anchor there within the bite, before the cabbens so near to the land as you please, there you lie landlockt for all winds, as if you lay within a town in a close haven.  
For to sail in from the eastwards, 
For to sail into Kilduyn from the eastwards.  you must sail in to the westwards by the east end, so long until that you come by the foresaid low point of the Island, than edge up about it to the northwards, and run into the foresaid bite, before the Cabbens, and anchor there in twelve, thirteen and fourteen fathom, that is the chiefest road.  
At the north and east end of Kilduyn, betwixt the Island and the main land, there is also a very good road, in eight, ten or twelve fathom, where men may lie sheltered for all winds. Thereabouts is on the Island a good water place, there the water cometh running off from the high land, there men may go lie by it, and fill their casks lying in the boat.  
You may also anchor under the main land, betwixt the narrow, and the Road of Kilduyn, at the place where the anchor standeth marked, in the Card. At the east end of Kilduyn lieth also a Fisher's village, called Kammen, at a high point, which is called the Sacrifice point.  
From the Island Kilduyn to the point Tiribiry, the course is southeast and by east about five leagues betwixt them is a great bay. In this bay, a great league from Kilduyn lieth a high Island called Bliesna Olinie, 
Bliesna Olinie.  which is the next or the nearest Olinie, behind it, under the main land, nearest the south end of the Island is a good road, where three or four ships may lie very well.  
The lieth a round hill, or high Hommock upon the main land, which showeth out above all the other hommockes▪, and is very easy to be known, upon which standeth a high cross of two crosses one above the other, to the northwards off it lieth a flat point, thwart of it lie some rocks alongst the shore, which at high water are covered.  
At the south end of the Island Olinie, a little from land, lieth a rock almost even with the water, but you may always see it well by the breaking of the water.  
To the Northwards of the Island about an English mile, lieth a rock not fare from land, and also to seawards from it a sunken rock, which you cannot go over at low water.  
He that will (coming from the northwards) go to anchor behind Olinie, must run a good ways to the eastwards of this foresaid rock alongst to the northwards of the Island, for to avoid the foresaid rock. Being come behind the Island, you shall espy the foresaid round hommock with the cross, you must not run past the cross, but leave it on the larboard side, and sail enclose by it for to avoid the foresaid rocks, which lie off from the flat north point, the point with the cross is very clean and so steep, that you might lie with a ship on against the shore without any hurt.  
He that will come into this Road from the southwards, let him run alongst by the coast, which is very clean, until past the foresaid point with the cross, and edge up close about by it, as is beforesaid.  
Men do anchor within the point in seven, six, five, four and three fathom, deep or shoal as they will, there goeth no grown sea at all.  
About half ways betwixt the Island Olinie and Tiribiry 
Tiribiry.  is another haven or great Bay, where men may lie landlockt for all winds.  
Tiribiry is a great River and off-water, where is a great Salmon fishing, there men may go in with great ships, and anchor every where within it where they will in good sandy-ground, it lieth in most south, and afterwards more westerly, the eastermost point lieth out more to seawards than the other, so that it maketh a bay, where men ride under for a northwest wind.  
Two leagues to the southwards of Tiribiry lieth Waronia, which is a great sand-bay or haven, with at the mouth is narrow, but within it is a broad Sound, there is also an off-water, where is also much Salmon caught.  
Within this bay it is every where good anchoring, shoal water and clean ground.  
Before the mouth of this haven lie three little Islands, behind them is also good road.  
Two leagues or two leagues & a half to the southwards of Waronia lieth a Gabriele, 
Gabriele.  a tide haven, which falleth dry within, so that men may go over there dry at low water, it floweth there twelve foot up and down, a southsouthwest moon maketh high water on this coast.  
In the mouth of this haven lie three Islands, two on the north side (which are the lowest) and one on the south side, that is the highest, you must run nearest the southermost when as you will sail in there: being come within the Islands, you must edge up to the northwards behind the two northermost Islands, and anchor there on the north side of the haven, there it is seven and eight fathom deep clean ground.  
About a league to the southwards of it lieth Salensi Daelna, 
Daelna Silensi.  that is to say, the farther Silensi; but betwixt them both a little to the northwards of Silensi, lieth yet a great indraught which lieth in at least two leagues into the land, and is about so wide as the River Tie before Amsterdam, there may lie a great multitude of ships, it is there broad and large enough, and all over good anchor ground.  
A little to the northwards of this in-draught lieth a little Island, or rock, somewhat high, about which you may sail within, to wit, through betwixt these rocks and the land, but may make no road under them.  
Salensi Daelna 
Daelna Silensi.  is a great broad bay, before it lie three Islands, which are to see to grey of colour, as the main land.  
To the northwards of these Islands upon the point off the bay standeth 3 great Warders, and a little to the southwards of the Islands, on the main land lieth a steep hill, by which marks this bay is very easy to be known.  
If you will sail into this bay coming from the northwards alongst the shore by the foresaid great in-draught, a little to the northwards of this bay, you must look out for these foresaid great Warders, leave them on the starbord side, & sail in close by them, through betwixt that point and the Islands, first westsouthwest, somewhat within, and then more southerly, until behind the Islands, and anchor there in five, six, or seven fathom: you may also sail further to the southwards into the bay, so deep as you will, there it is all over clean.  
When you come before the channel, it seemeth to be very narrow, but it is broad enough.  
To the southwards of these Islands is also a channel which is very narrow, but yet for need you may sail out there. The southermost Island, that is, whereupon the Fishermen dwell, is fast to the northermost with a shoal, whereupon is at high water 10 or 11 foot water, but at low water you cannot go over it.  
Two little leagues to the southwards of Salensi lieth the Island Daelna Olinie, 
Daelna Olinie.  that is to say, the Furthest Olinie, it is an Island almost of Fashion like Bliesna Olinie, at the north end high, at the south end lower, and upon the end very steep, it hath in the midst, (but some what nearer the south end then the north end) a low valley, where at high water the sea doth almost run alongst over it.  
Behind this Island, not under the Island, but under the main land, are good roads.  
For to come in from the northwards behind this Island, it is a broad, large, and very deep Channel, without any dangers, but if you will sail in behind it (from the southwards) than you must run in close by the Island, for to avoid a foul and stony riffe, which lieth off from the main land, half ways to the Island, and so shoal that it falleth dry with the spring tides at low water.  
About half ways the Island, nearest the south end, is a point, lying out from the main land, twoards the Island, to the northwards of it men do anchor in 6, 7, or 8 fathom.  
When you come in from the northwards, you may (so soon as you come within the points) lusse up towards close about the point of the main land into a bay, & anchor there in eight, six, five or four fathom, according as you sail far in, there it is very easy lying. In these roads under the main land, it is all clean & flat rising ground, but under the Island it is deep, and the ground rising very steep, & therefore it is not good anchoring there.  
Betwixt this Island Daelna Olinie, & Silensi, lie 3 little black Islands, where is very easy road under them in 8, 7, and 6, fathom.  
From Daelna Olinie to Rinde 
Rinde.  are five leagues. Rinde is a very fair Haven, before it lie four little Islands, where men may go to anchor behind them, behind these Islands this Haven hath two bays, upon the point betwixt them both standeth a great Cross, the southermost bay is fare the greatest, into it cometh also a river or off water, where men do catch Salmon. The middlemost Island (which is the northermost save one) is the greatest and highest upon which standeth a great Warder, the northermost is somewhat long and small, & so low, that at high water the sea runneth up a good ways upon it on both sides, and so maketh that Island smaller.  
Betwixt that Island and the main land, or the north shore of the Havens mouth lieth a sunken rock, which you must leave, in coming in, on the larboard side, and run in close by the main land, this channel is so narrow, that you cannot sail in it, except you have a large wind, at low water there remaineth no more than 9 or 13 foot water.  
To the southwards of that great Island, lieth another Island that is indifferent high, and the southermost of them all, betwixt that and the point of the main land, lieth in the souther channel, which is broad and deep enough, but when you seyle in there, you must run nearest the land, for to avoid a sunken rock which lieth at the foresaid point of the main land.  
These channels both from the southwards and from the northwards lie in both alongst the shores, when as that you come then within the Islands you may anchor there all over where you will, there it is broad and large, and every where clean & clear. Men do anchor commonly under the greatest Island thwart of the great Warder, and also behind the norhermost Island in five, four or three fathom there it is very easy lying but with a southeast wind, the sea cometh a little rolling in, but there can go no great sea.  
Fare within the southermost bay, almost before the river, lieth a rock, but above water. Without the greatest and the southermost Island, lieth a little Island, or great rock, somewhat round, you may sail out and in betwixt the southermost and the greatest Island, alongst to the n. wards of that little round Island, that is you must leave the southermost Island with the outermost little round Island both on the starboard side, and the greatest Island with the Warder on the larboard side, when you sail out, this is a very narrow channel, but very clean and clear, so that there is nothing to be avoided, but only a little sunken rock, which lieth at the north end of the outermost little round Island, and falleth dry at low water, nevertheless it is not good to use it, except it were for need that you could not do better.  
He that is bound into this haven, must run close alongst by the shore for to get sight of the foresaid Islands, for by reason that the inner land is high, the Islands lie so under the land, that men can hardly see them, when they be any thing far off from the shore.  
A half league to the southwards of Rinde is another great Bay, or haven, before it lie two little high Islands upon the northermost standeth a great cross, you may sail in there about on both sides off these little Islands, and also through betwixt them, and anchor where you will in fifteen, twelve, eight, or five fathom, deep or shoal, according as you sail fare in lie & there sheltered for all winds, but when the wind is hard out of the sea, thwart upon the shore, there will come in somewhat a rolling sea, but there can go no great sea that can hurt you. A little to the northwards of this haven lieth a low long Island close to the shore, whereby you may also know this coast, you may sail through betwixt this foresaid Island & the main land without any danger.  
From this haven to the Seven Islands are four great leagues. A little to the northwards of the end of the seven Islands, lieth a fair great sand-bay, where is also good anchoring for southerly and southeast winds, but not for easterly winds, with a north-east or sea wind, it is bad lying there for there is no shelter for them, men do anchor there in twenty, fifteen or twelve fathom, according as they lie far or near to the shore. The Ruffs call this Bay the Golden Bay, 
Golden Bay.  because the strand is of red sand.  
On all these foresaid coasts a south-west & north-east moon maketh high water, like as on the former.  
The seven Islands 
Seven Islands.  lie all of them alongst the shore, the first or northermost is fare the greatest of all, a high Island. The four northermost follow close one to the other, and lie about an English mile, or a shot of a cast piece, a little more or less off the land, so that men may sail there through betwixt. The fifth is a little round Island, and lieth nearer to the land, there you cannot run through within it, which is fast to the land with a shoal of rocks, whereof some lie above, and some under water. The two southermost lie a good ways to the southwards of the fifth: betwixt them & the main land you may also sail through, you may also run through in & out betwixt these same Islands every where, except betwixt the second and third off from the northwards betwixt them both it is fowl.  

The first Island.  Betwixt these Seven Islands and the main land, goeth a strong tide, as well of flood, as of ebb, whereof men must be very careful.  
Betwixt the northermost and the main land is a good road (thwart of the south end of the Island) under the main land, there is a fair sand-bay, with an off-water, where is much Salmon to be caught, but it is not there used.  
A little to the northwards of this Sand-bay lieth a little Island betwixt the great Island and the coast, men do anchor to the southwards of that little Island, thwart of the sand-bay in seven, six, five, or four fathom, so shoal as they will, there is a very even sandground, rising so even as if it were planed.  
Over against the foresaid bay men may make road under the south point of the Island, thwart of a little bay, there they bring a hawser on land, and an anchor to seawards in nine-tenne fathom, there they lie somewhat more out off the tide then in the bay over against it.  
Betwixt this great Island and the coast is about two third parts of the channel towards the main land, flat rising ground, and the other third part towards the Island Deep; the nearer the Island the deeper unto 18 and 19 fathom.  
About half ways betwixt that foresaid little round Island, and the north point of the gratest Island, stand on the main land some little Lappish houses, or a little village.  
Betwixt the second and third Island, 
Second & third Island  or nearest thwart of the second, to tell from the northwards, lieth yet a little village, thwart of it is a bay where men may anchor in ten or twelve fathom all clean sandground, but with a south wind there cometh in a rolling Sea, but with northerly winds it is very good lying there.  
Thwart of the fourth Island 
The 4 Island.  on the main land, is also a sand-bay, where is also good road in seven or eight fathom for a northwest or north wind, but with an east winde it is there bad lying, that bloweth there in open through betwixt the fourth and fifth Island.  
Even at the end of the seven Islands is a great Indraught, or bay, which the Russes call the Shipper, 
The Shipper.  which is narrow at the coming in, but within indifferent large & wide: within it is good road in twelve, eight & four fathom clean rising ground, but with a north-east wind it is bad lying there, that bloweth there flat in.  
About nine leagues to the southwards of the Seven Islands, lieth a point called Siornenos; that is to say; Blackpoynt, it is so called, because it is very black to see to, there within it the land is high, and goeth downwards low towards this point, almost as Swetenoes'.  
At this point the land beginneth to alter inform to the northwards of it the coast is altogether high, but to the southwards of it all low and even land, so that thereby you may know (when you sail alongst this coast) whether you be to the northward or to the southwards of this black point.  
A little to the northward off this point lieth a high and great Island a half league long, which the Russes call Noock Ostrove, 
Noock Ostrove.  which is the Nail Island, behind it is very good road, you must run in there from the southwards; from the northwards, you cannot come in there behind it.  
The north end is fast to the main land with a bank or strake of sand, which lieth most part above water, you may sail in there so fare behind it as you will, and anchor in ten, eight, six or four fathom, the further that you sail in the shoaler it is, it is very good lying, there and sheltered for all winds.  
From the Siornenos, or the black point to Evanekrist, 
Evanekrist  it is southsoutheast four leagues, that is a point with many crosses, under it you may make good road for southerly winds.  
From Evanekrist to Kletna 
Kletna.  are yet three or four leagues this is a point whereupon stand also many crosses, it lieth out a little, but not so much as Evanekrist, there you may have also road for southerly winds, but not for seawards.  
From this point to the Islands of Swetenoes' or Jockena, 
Island of Jockena.  it is two leagues.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams, about these foresaid places.  
At Kilduyn an eastsoutheast moon maketh the highest water.  
At Seven Islands a southeast moon maketh highest.  
At Swetenoes' a south and north Moon maketh high water.  
Alongst the coasts to the eastwards of the north cape, the floods come out of the northwest and northnorthwest, and run so alongst the coast of Lapland, unto Orlogonose.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Kilduyn to the point of Tierrebirry southeast and by east. 5 leagues,  
From the point Tierrebirry to the Seven-Islands, southeast & by south. 18 leagues.  
From Tierrebirry to Swetenoes', the coast lieth south east & by south 40 leagues.    

Heights.  
The land Kilduyn lieth in 69 degrees & 40 minutes.   

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Kilduyn. Meyne-land River of Kool.  
In this form showeth Kilduyn, when the steep point lieth south and by east, and the River of Kool southsouthwest about five leagues from you, and the land to the westwards of Kilduyn is very hilly, and the river doth show itself very wide open as here standeth portrayed.  
The River of Cool.  
Thus showeth the Island of Kilduyn, when the w. point lieth s. w. and by s. and the east point south and by west, somewhat westerly from you, the river of Cool lieth then s. w. & by w. from you, the main land that you may see to the eastwards lieth then s. e. and by south, somewhat southerly from you: the land of Laus you may then yet also see in the n. w.  
Tiribiry. Island Kilduyn.  
Thus showeth the land eastwards from Kilduyn, when the south, or east end of Kilduyn is west and by north 3 leagues from you.  
The land of Tiribiry.  
The Island Kilduyn.  
The Island of Kilduyn and Tiribiry show thus, when as you sail alongst by them four leagues from land, about half ways betwixt both, nearest to Tiribiry, as is portrayed in these two figures here above, the AA one to the other.  
The land of Tiribiry.  
The Island Kilduyn.  
In this form showeth the land of Tiribiry, when you sail alongst by it, being 4 or 5 leagues from it, and eleven or twelve leagues from Kilduyn.     

The fifth Demonstration, In which are set forth The Sea-Coastes of the Mouth of the White Sea.  
THe Islands of Swetenoes' or Jockena, there are six in number, whereof the five lie alongst the shore about the space of two leagues, the sixth lieth within the other, thwart of the southermost of the five. The three northermost lie one by the other, as also the 2 southermost parted asunder from the other three the northermost off all these Islands of Jockena 
Islands of Sweetenoes' Jockena.  lieth from the point of Swetenoes' due west three leagues, behind it is good road thwart of the south end in five or six fathom. The point of Swetenoes' is a flat point lying out, to the westwards of it, at the end of those foresaid Islands, goeth in the river of Jockena, where is a great Salmon-fishing. When you are by Swetenoes' 
Swetenoes'  you can see little perfectenesse of these Islands, because the main land is much higher than the Islands.  
He that cometh from the northwards, and is bound in to Jockena, 
For to sail into the River off Jockena.  must run close alongst by the shore, for to get sight of these Islands. Through four several ways you may sail through these Islands into the river of Jockena: First coming from the northwards, you may sail alongst by the shore, through betwixt the shore and the Islands, (which you leave then all on the larboard side) into the river.  
The second pass lieth in through betwixt the three northermost, and the two southermost Islands, that is broad, wide and deep, and also the best channel off all, it lieth south-west, and south-west and by west from the point of Swetenoes', and lieth in most south, when you sail in there, you must run nearest the southermost Island, because of a sunken rock which lieth in this channel somewhat off from the third Island, at high water you may run over it, but not at low water.  
Being come within these Islands, you shall see the sixth Island, which lieth within the two southermost, you must run about by it, leaving it on the larboard side; When as you are then a little past that innermost Island; you come against the high point, and sail in alongst amidst the channel, betwixt both lands, there it is shoal water, to wit, five, four, three, to two fathom and a half, but you may sail in amidst the channel without fear, all alongst unto the Lappish-houses, where the Salmon-fishing is, and anchor there also in the midst of the river, thereabouts lie some sunken rocks, which at low water are uncovered, whereof you must take heed.  
For to have the right knowledge of this channel, you must look out for the high point, which lieth at the west point of the river, within the Islands, when that is behind the fourth Island (to reckon off from the northwards) and the point of Swetenoes' is north-east, and north-east and by east from you, than you are right open before the foresaid channel.  
Betwixt the two southermost Islands goeth also an indifferent wide channel through, where men can sail in, and so come on against the innermost Island, which you may sail about on both sides.  
Betwixt the Islands and the main land you may also sail through, but that is a very narrow channel, men sail through it, as if they sailed in alongst a ditch betwixt two Dykes.  
For need, or if it were in extremity, you might also sail through at high water betwixt the northermost Island, and the second, and likewise also betwixt the second and the third, but if you can by any means do better, it is not good to do it.  
Pas caarte Van de Mont van de WITTE ZEE, tot aende Rivier Dwina al-Archangel toe.  
Men may anchor at divers places within these Islands. Betwixt the two southermost Islands, and the innermost Island, you may have road, where you may lie sheltered for all winds, and safe from Icedrifts out of the sea. Within the innermost Island you must also anchor over against it somewhat further in against the steep point. At the river's mouth, on the west shore is a bay where you may sail in, and anchor so near to the shore as you will, in six, five, four and three fathom soft sticking ground, there you lie safe from Icedrifts. You may also anchor on the east side, right before the steep point, but there you lie not safe for ice that cometh out of the river. The tide here alongst these Islands, agreeth near with the tide of Swetenoes', it floweth with Spring tides near two fathom and a half up and down.  
Behind the point of Swetenoes' you may run into the bay, and anchor there for a north, north-east and east wind, there is clean ground.  
From Swetenoes' to Lombascho, 
Lombascho.  the coast lieth southsoutheast thirteen leagues. Under Lombascho men may also go to anchor, but it is not there very good lying, especially with great ships; the ground there is not clean, and when the wind is out of the Sea, cometh in there rolling very much. The lying of this road standeth drawn out at large in the Card, with the depths set down as it is at high water and neepe tides: the water falleth and floweth there at least two fathom up and down, & at spring-tidings little less than three fathom, or two fathom and an half.  
Within the point, or in the bite of Lombascho you may not anchor, there remaineth not above three foot water, and the ground is stony and foul.  
To the northwards of Lombascho lie five Islands lying alongst the coast almost half ways to Swetenoes'.  
Three leagues to the southwards of Lombascho, lieth a black steep point, until that the coast lieth of from Lombascho also southsoutheast, but from that point to Orlogenes, 
Orlogenes  the course is south 9 leagues, betwixt them there is no place where men may anchor, but all alongst a whole coast, clean and steep.  
From the point of Orlogenes lieth off a stoneriffe a shot off a cast piece into Sea, which falleth dry a great ways at low water, whereof men must take very good heed.  
From Orlogenes to the river Ponnoye, it is six leagues: betwixt them lie the three Islands. 
Three Islands.  First from Orlogenes to the two first Islands, the course is south three leagues, & from thence to Ponnoye south-west & by south 3 leag.  
A half league to the northwards off Ponnoye lieth the third of the three Islands, so that the two and the third lie about two leagues asunder.  
These Islands are much lower than the main land, so that they can hardly be seen or not at all, except you be by the shore, thwart of them you may come near the shore in seven fathom without danger.  
Thwart of these three Islands, and Ponnoy, the mouth off the white sea is at the narrowest.  
About four leagues thwart off to seawards from the three Islands in the midst of the mouth lieth a shoal, which is very uneven and stony, and at some places with low water cometh dry above water, it lieth south and north, first north alongst the coast, at last north and by west until thwart of Lombascho, but there alongst it is deep enough, fifteen and sixteen fathom. About southeast from Ponnoy it is at the shoalest seven fathom deep. You may also sail alongst to the eastwards of this shoal into the white Sea, but there it is shoal water, uneven & very shoal. The right fareway is alongst to the westwards of it, and five and twenty fathom deep.  
Ponnoy is a River where at low water remaineth no more than ten foot water, it floweth there with a springtide three fathom up and down, and with an ordinary tide 15 foot.  
From the three Islands to the Island Sousnowits, which men do call the cross Island, the course is south-west & by south, or as some do hold south-west ten leagues, or from Ponnoy nine leagues. All alongst this coast men may anchor every where in eight or nine fathom, and with contrary winds stop the tides, there go strong tides especially in the spring of the year withan Ebb.  
Between the three Islands and the cross Island lieth a point, upon which stand also three crosses, one by the other, which men do mistake oftentimes for the cross Island, but it is much smaller to see to. When you do get sight of that point, there showeth by it, as if there lay a ship before the land with the topmast-stricke. The right cross Island hath upon the north end two Crosses, and upon the South end three, by all these marks they are easy to be known one from the other.  
Behind the Cross Island you may have road in 6 or 7 fathom, you may sail in behind it, as well from the northwards as from the southwards, it is there clean and clear every where, men do anchor, when as the great cross doth stand from them e.n.e. there is the right road.  
Southeast and by south from the three Islands, and Ponnoy on the Ruff side, there goeth in the Meseens' gulf, into which cometh a great River, where men may go up to Kilda, and Kolmogro, and also another, upon which the town Slowoda lieth.  
Southeast from Ponnoy lieth a little Island in the mouth of the Meseens' golf, where you may have road under for westerly and south-west winds.  
The south point of this golf is a low sandstrand, all grown with trees, there you may also anchor alongst by the shore, but close by the land; if you lie somewhat of from the shore in 9 fathom, there the ground is foul, from thence alongst the shore to the Blue point, it is all fair strand ground.  
From the Cross Island, to the blue or Grey point, the course is south-west twenty leagues. In this fareway in the mouth of the White-sea, 
Current in the mouth of the white sea.  there go sometimes very strong currents, especially in the spring, through the terrible great freshuts, of the melting of the snow, which falleth from both sides into the White-sea, and runneth through this straight into the sea, with graet whirling & terrible riplings: It happeneth sometimes that the current runneth there so terrible strong, to the w. wards into the sea, that with a reasonable gale & full sails, men can do no more but stem the tide, where of men must be mindful.  
Under the Grey point 
Gray-poynt.  men may anchor on the south side in ten, eight, or seven fathom, there it is good lying for easterly winds, a north-east wind cometh from the point the ground is there reasonable good, but not the cleanest.  
From the Grey point eastwards to the Meseens Golf the coast is all fair sandstrand, with some banks of 2 fathom and an half, and three fathom alongst the shore, not fare without the land, where sometimes the current falleth over with great riplings.  
From the blue point to the river of Archangel, the course is south and by west fourteen leagues. When as you sail so towards the rivers, you shall then first espy the land a good ways to the westwards of S. Nicholas, it arriseth in a long strake, and then there riseth more land towards the River, as if it were a round Island, afterwards you shall see the steeple of S. Nicholas, when that standeth south and by west & southsouthwest from you, than you are open before the mouth of the river of Archangel.  
The cape of Candenoes' 
Candenoes'.  and Orlogenes lie north-east & south-west 7 and sixty leagues asunder. The point off Candenoes' is very easy to be known, there stand five great crosses upon it for marks. When as you fall with it, you may very well perceive, that the land falleth away, on the one side to the south-west, towards the White sea, and southeast on the other side.  
About thirteen leagues to the eastwards of the cape de Candenoes' lieth an Island, called Morsonowits, 
Morsonowits.  to the eastwards of it goeth a great Bay into the land, but it is very shoal water, with many shoals and Dwale-grounds. It hath heretofore happened, that some ships have been here lost, thinking that they run into the mouth of the White Sea, for it agreeth very near with the course, and also with the height of the White Sea, but it is easy to be know by the land, and to discern one from the other, for the Ruff coast to the eastwards of Candenoes' is altogether a land with Sand-hills, and a flat strand, but the coast of Lapland is high and hilly. In this Bay goeth a River through the land, where you can come through with Lodges into the White Sea.  
Thwart off this Bay, about six and twenty leagues east, and east and by south from Candenoes' lieth the Island off Calgoya, 
Calgoya.  being thirteen leagues long, you may sail round about it, but upon the south side runneth a great riffe alongst the land: they that come from the eastwards must avoid it, for it is fast to the west end off the Island. Upon this Island are great store of Geese, which in the Summer are altogether bare, or naked, without any feathers, which sit & broad upon one egg, which they have lying under them, & so do hatch their young one which are there in such abundance, that the Russes do come there a shore with their Lodges, & lay a devil or board upon the land, and drive the Geese with staves, into their boats or Lodges, in such abundance, that they salt them into Barrels, in great abundance.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Tussara, 
Tussara.  it is eastsoutheast two and forty leagues betwixt them both goeth in the foresaid Bay. By west Tussera lieth the point off Swelgenoes'. 
Swelgenoes'.   
From Tussara to the River of Colcova, 
Colcova.  the course is east seven leagues, which is a good River, being twelve foot deep, but there is no other trade, but that the Russes do come there from Colmogro and S. Nicholas with Lodges, for to trade there, & to barter their wares there for Skins and other wares.  
Seven leagues to the eastwards off the River of Colcova, lieth the River off Pitsana, 
Pitsana.  there is but six foot water, and is an unknown place, but a little to the westwards of it lieth a shoal, which you must avoid: Oliver Bruneel in his voyage from Nova Zembla come on ground there.  
About thirteen leagues to the eastwards of Pitsana lieth the river off Pitsora, 
Pitsora.  which lieth in southsoutheast by the east point, and hath twelve foot water the land is there low with Sand-hills, & upon the west side standeth a Pack-house with some crosses. When you come within the River, you must edge up westwards towards the Pack-house, and anchor there in three or four fathom, there is a great Haff, or broad water. You must avoid the east side off the River, which is full of Sands & banks. The little town of Pitsora lieth about five and thirty leagues within the land, there is great abundance of costly Skins and Crystal.  
Betwixt Pitsora and Waygats lieth Oltgyn, 
Oltgyn.  & without the Land lie two rocks or little Islands, the one called Orangien, and the other Grave Maurice, you may anchor under them in six or seven fathom. From the southermost shooteth off a little riffe, but you may sound it well in three fathom.  
To the eastwards and to the westwards of these two little Islands is a great Bay, where it is shoal water, the land runneth there round to the point of Pitsora, all alongst in a Bay off from Pitsora unto the Waygats. It is from Pitsora to Waygats north-east and by east 38 or 40 leagues.  
Waygats, 
●aygats.  which is also called the Straight of Nassaw is Straight where, men may sail through into the Tartarish Sea, it lieth in first about e. afterwards north-east through about eight or nine leagues, about half ways through lieth an Island, 
●ne●●  which you may sail about on both sides. A little within the point, on the north side is a fair Bay, which you may sail into so deep as you will, in five, four and three fathom, good sticking ground alongst by the east shore is the deepest water, there you shall lie sheltered for all winds and Icedrifts.  
Through this narrow or Straight, hath been divers times attempted, or under taken, for to discover, and to find a way, for to pass alongst to the northwards of Tartary, unto the rich Kingdoms of Cathay & China, & so forth to the Molucques, but in vain because of the terrible ice that remaineth there to whole year through, & can never melt, by reason of the continual cold.  
From the east end of the Straight Waygats to Bay off Oby 
Oby.  it is eastsoutheast, & southeast & by e. forty leagues. To the eastwards of it that land lieth forth north-east forty leagues more, to the two rivers, & then yet so forth alongst north-east but how far it yet unknown.  
The West cast of Nova Zembla 
Nova Zembla.  lieth to the northwards off from Waygats to Costintsarck northnorthwest about three & fifty leagues. To the northwards of it the land falleth away, about north and by east to the point of Langenes, or the State's point, further northnortheast, north-east & eastnortheast to the Island of Orangien, the northermost part of Nova Zembla, in the height of 77 degrees and an half.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams, about these foresaid places.  
At Swetenoes' a s. and n. Moon maketh high water.  
Alongst the coasts to the eastwards of the north cape, the floods come out of the northwest & northnorthwest, & run so alongst the coasts of Lapland, unto Orlogonose.  
At the three Islands a south-west and north-east moon maketh high water.  
At Katsnose point an east and west moon maketh the highest water.  
Before Podessemske and S. Nicholas an east & by s. and west and by north moon maketh the highest water.  
At the Island of Nova Zembla a southeast moon maketh high water.  
From Orlogenes & the three Island, the flood falleth into the mouth of the White Sea, towards the grey point of Catsnose about s. s.w. & south-west & by west.  
But about the point of Catsnose, the flood falleth into the White Sea, partly towards Warsiga and Ombay, and also towards the Podessemske and S. Nicholas.  
To the eastwards of Candenoes', towards the Island of Colgoyen, the flood falleth east and by south, as also alongst the same Island, & from Colgoyen towards the Waygats, the tide falleth east and west. Alongst Nova Zembla, the tides turn about with the moon alongst Rusland, they come out of the west and westnorthwest, betwixt Candenoes' & Pitsora, & fall so alongst Rusland.  
The floods towards Waygats come from Colgoyen and Nova Zembla, and fall together east and by north through the Straight of Waygats towards the River of Obye, so that the ebbs and floods do keep open the channel of Waygats, that they are oftentimes without ice, or at least but with ice that drivers in shoals.  
But to the eastwards of the Waygats, the floods come out of the north-east, and fall so into the Oby, and into the Straight of Nassaw, there the water riseth and falleth, but keepeth no certain tide.   

Of the Depths and grounds bot to the eastwards and westwards of Waygats.  
All the coast alongst off from Candenoes' unto Waygats, men do find a flat rising ground, the most part sand and soft ground, he that must sail there in misty weather, must know that in 8 or 9 fathom depth, he is 4 or 5 leagues from the coast, but when it is 30, 35 or 40 fathom, than he is fare enough from the land. So it is alongst Nova Zembla, and also over the east side of Waygats, but when you come before the Straight, it will be shoaler by little and little.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Swetenoes' until 3 leagues past Lombascho southsoutheast 16 leagues.  
From thence to Orlogenes south 9 leagues.  
From Orlogenes to the 3 Islands south 3 leagues.   

Pas caarte van WITTE-ZEE begrypende de custen van Laplandt▪ van Warsiga tot aen Kandalox en de cust van Corelia tot aen de Riviere Dwina  
Caerte van ARCHANGEL oft de Rivier de Duina. so well vaned Nieuwe als it Oude diep.   

From the three Islands to Ponnoy, south-west and by south, 3 leagues.  
From the three Islands to the Crosse-Island Sousnowits' south-west, and south-west and by south 10 leagues.  
From the Crosse-Island to Catsnose, or the grey point south-west 20 leagues.  
From the Grey point to the River of Archangel south and by west 14 leagues.  
From the Crosse-Island to Warsiga westsouthwest, and west and by south 24 leagues.  
From Orlogenes to the cape de Candenoes', the course is north-east 47 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Colgoye east and by south 26 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to Swelgenoes' s. e. & by e. 29 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Morsonewits' s. e. 13 leag.  
From Candenoes' to Tussara it is eastsoutheast 7 leag.  
From Colcova to Pitsana east and by north 7 leagues.  
From Pitsana to Pitsora e. and east and by north 13 leag.  
From Pitsora to Waygats, the course is about north east and by east 38 or 40 leagues.  
From Catsnose to the Islands of Solofky west or somewhat more southerly 37 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to Costintsarck in Nova Zembla n. e. and by east about 83 leagues.  
From the east end of Colgoyen to Waygats e. 80 leag.  
From Pitsora to the east end of Colgoyen w.n.w. 43 l.    

Heights.  

The point of Catsnose or the Graye point lieth in 65 degrees.  
S. Nicholas or the River of Archangel in 64 degrees, 30 minutes.  
Cape Candenoes' 69 degrees, 30 minutes.  
The Island Colgoya in 69 degrees, 10 minutes.  
The River of Colgoya, Pitsana, and Pitsora lie in 68 degrees, 30 minutes.  
Waygats or the Straight of Nassow lieth in 69 degrees 43 minutes.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Orlogenes Third point Second point First point Swetenoes'.  
Sconce.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Swetenoes' and Orlogenes, as you sail alongst by it.     

The sixth Demonstration, Where in Are set forth the Sea-Coastes of the whole White Sea.  
FRom the blue point to the river of Archangel, the course is south and by west thirteen leagues. When as you sail so towards the rivers, you shall then first espy the land a good ways to the westwards of S. Nicholas, it ariseth in a long strake, and then there riseth more land towards the River, as if it where a round Island, afterwards you shall see the steeple of S. Nicholas, when that standeth south and by west and southsouthwest from you, than you are open before the mouth of the River of Archangel.  

For to sail into the River of Archangel.  If you will sail in there, then bring the steeple of S. Nicholas a ships length and a half, or two ships lengths to the eastwards of the Cross sandhill, keep them so standing and sail right with them, until that the wood within come midwayes in the middlemost Podessemske, go on the south-west and by south, & south-west, for to sail a weather of the tail or shoal, which shooteth off from the east shore, when as then the wood within (that is the wood upon the north-east point of the River) cometh to the southermost of the two woods, which stand upon the middlemost Island or the Poedessemske, than you are in the mouth of the channel, right upon the shoalest of the Bar, the marks of the east tail are, when the wood cometh half ways betwixt the southermost and the middlemost Podessemske, when the point of the southermost Podessemske is southsoutheast somewhat southerly from you, than you are without the point of the west grounds. If you bring that point more easterly from you, you can take no hurt of that point. When you are entered the channel, then go, as is beforesaid, south-west and by south, and south-west, until that the steeple of S. Nicholas come a ships length by west the Cross sandhill, then further take the sounding of the west shore, and run in by it, towards the foot strand, and alongst close by it, without going off from it, until that you come thwart of the white place, or spot, on the west shore, about the place where it standeth marked in the Card with A. Edge over then from thence east and by south, and eastsoutheast right to the point of the Wood on the east shore, and on southeast in alongst by the east land, close alongst by the shore, but thwart of the two Islands which lie on the starboard side, it is a good ways alongst the east shore somewhat foul & shoal, where of you must take heed: but go all alongst by the east shore, until that you come by the first River on the larboard side, edge then over again to the west shore alongst southsouthwest, until you come to the bite, there it is shoal water on the east side.  
When you are come in the bite, then go on eastsoutheast, & afterwards east & by south towards the Stonereach, 
Stonereach.  sail through there amidst the channel, alongst by the buys, which lie in the midst of the deep, it is on both sides of the buys uneven and rugged.  
When as you come against the Stonereach there standeth a Fisher's house upon the west shore, by the little River that runneth into the land, at the north end, or west end of the Stonereach, thwart of that foresaid house lieth a great stone under water, which you may sail about on both sides, it lieth about the midst of the fareway, as you come sailing on, men sail commonly about to the westwards of it, all alongst by the west shore, like as also through the Stonereach, for the west side is deep enough, & at some places somewhat soft ground, but the east shore is full of rocks.  
When as you are passed the buys, than you must keep off again, somewhat from the shore. There was wont to lie a little Island at the end of the Stonereach, but that is of late years altogether scoured away with the Ice. When as you are now through the Stonereach, the course is first southeast & afterwards southeast & by south until you come in the bite, then go on easts. e. and keep yet to the west shore, until that you see the town of Archangel, 
Archangel.  then sail right towards it, but avoid the point on the larboard side, for it is foul.  
For to go from Archangel further up the River to Kolmogro 
Kolmog o.  it is about twelve or thirteen leagues most southeast, but the River runneth upwards with many crooked Bights.  
For to sail out of the River 
For to sail out of the River.  of Archangel, then run out by the footstrand, and keep the sounding of the west shore. When as you begin to see the steeple of S. Nicholas, then bring it a ships length to the second or middlemost Podessemske, there lieth a black Hommock upon the strand. The north side of the wood within cometh then over that Hommock, then go on north-east and by north, and northnortheast, towards the Podessemskes. When as then the wood within cometh to the north side of the southermost of the two woods, upon the middlemost Podessemske, than you are upon the shoalest of the Bar, but when the point of the southermost Podessemske is southsoutheast somewhat southerly from you, than you are at the end of all the shoals, and may go your Course through the sea, where you please, no shoals shall hinder you.  
From the Bar of Podessemske, or from the River of Archangel to the road of S. Nicholas 
S. Nicholas.  it is four leagues. There standeth a Beacon at the end of the Island, where the English house standeth upon, by west that beacon is the road for the English ships, in six or seven fathom, according as they lie near or far from the shore. The English River 
English River.  lieth in there eastnortheast, & n.e. & by east, alongst by the Cloister of S. Nicholas, but that is so shoal a river that no ships can go into it, men must lad them without with Lodges.  
About south-west and west and by west from the bar of the river of Archangel lieth the Salt Island, upon it standeth a Cloister, & is fast to the main land. This land lieth off from thence to the Cape de Onega, west and by north.  
From the Crosse-Island to Warsiga, the course is west south-west, and west and by south about four and twenty leagues. Warsiga 
Warsiga.  is a village, lying on a river, where is a Salmon-fishing, which lieth into the northwards within the land, you cannot come into the River with ships, there is no more than eight or nine foot water, but must stay without in the Road before the River, there is clean sandground, without any fowl ground, so that you may anchor there without danger, so near or fare from the shore, as you will.  
This River men do know (when they sail alongst the coast) by three high Hommocks, which are higher than all the other, and almost of fashion like the three hills by Bayonne in Galicia, to the northwards of it are white sand-hills with trees upon them. Even by west the three foresaid hommocks goeth in the river.  
For to sail from Warsiga to Ombay, the course is alongst by the coasts a little west, west and by north, and then westnorthwest, afterwards the most northwest, unto the point of Tauria 
Point off Tauria.  six and thirty or seven & thirty leagues. About half ways betwixt them, well so near Warsiga as Tauria lieth on the coast a high bare hill, thwart of it and to the westwards of it lie some banks, whereof you must take heed.  
The point of Tauria is a high steep point full of trees, to the eastwards of this land, the point falleth away into a great Bay fare alongst to the eastwards. About five leagues to the eastwards of the point of Tauria, lieth a rock, a good ways from land, which is not very great, but very easy to be known, it showeth a fare off, as if there sat a great Ape upon it, this rock the Russes call Tourie Babbe, 
Tourie. Babbe.  that is to say, Grandmother of the point.  
Within that Rock in that foresaid Bay it is all shoal water, uneven and foul ground, where you may not anchor not have road, but to the eastwards of the point Tauria you may anchor for westerly & northerly winds, somewhat to the northwards of the point in the Bite, there it is shoal, but by the point it is deep, there you must anchor close by the land.  
By the west point lieth the Island Volna Ostrove, 
Volna Ostrove.  by the Dutchmen called the Reeme-Island. From the point Tauria to that Island, the course is northnorthwest, two leagues.  
Betwixt the Island and the land of Tauria lieth also a little Island, betwixt these two Islands, you may (for need) sail through with a ship, but it is very narrow, at the north-east point of Ostrove is road in thirty fathom, than you lie with the ship, (when she lieth wended to the Island) in eight fathom, so very steep and rising is the ground there.  
From Volna, Ostrove, or the Reeme Island to the Gouba that is the salt river, 
Salt river.  where men do lad, lying a half league by east Ombay) the course is northnortheast three leagues which lieth in north, and north and by east, it is not very broad but deep, at the coming in it is in the midst four and twenty, and five and twenty fathom, fare within, five or six fathom deep, but there it is foul. Men do commonly anchor a half league within the river, on the east side, with an anchor in the midst of the river, sixteen or eighteen fathom, and with a cable on land, there it is good lying with all winds, except, with a southsouthwest wind, which bloweth there open in.  
About half a league to the westwards of it lieth the fresh River of Ombay, 
Ombay.  which is so shoal and foul, that men cannot go in there with ships, except they be small, and also the Russes are not willing they should come there; for not to spoil their Salmon-fishing, there is great store of Salmon caught, which is carried from thence with boats to the ships in the salt river.  
From thence the coast lieth somewhat alongst westsouthwest and then upon northwest to Kandalax.  
Thereabouts lie also more lade-places, where Salmon is caught, as Kierickarick, 
Kierickarick.  and Kargapoll, 
Kargapol  that lieth south-west from Ombay, on the Koreels side.  

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From the Bar of Archangel to the Salt Island south-west somewhat westerly 7 leagues.  
From the Salt Island to the C. Onega west, and west and by north 17 or 18 leagues.  
From the C. Onega to the Islands Solofky northwest and by west 20 leagues.  
From Warsiga unto the point of Tauria west & west and by north, westnorthwest and northwest 37 leagues.  
From Cruys Island to Warsiga westsouthwest 24 leag.  
From the point of Tauria to Volna Ostrove, northnorthwest 2 leagues.  
From Volno Ostrove to the Gouba to the eastwards of Ombay northnortheast 3 leagues.  
From Ombay to Kandalax northwest & by west 13 leag.  
From Catsnose to the Islands of Solofky west or somewhat more southerly 37 leagues.  
From Catsnose to Warsiga northwest and by west 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Catsnose to Polongi northwest and by north 23 l.  
From the Islands of Solofky to Ombay in Lapland north 32 or 33 leagues.  
From Solofky to Warsiga eastnortheast 32 leagues.  
From Solofky to Pologni north-east & by east 50 leagues.    

Heights.  

S. Nicholas or the River of Archangel in 64 degrees; 30 minutes.  
The Island of Solofky in 65 degrees, 10 minutes.  
Ombay in 66 degrees, 45 minutes.   

Pascaert van JAN MAYEN EYLANT. Verthoonde alle de ghelegentheyt van alle bayen. inbochten. diepten en en drooghten.  
Pascaerte van SPITSBERGEN met alle haer Rivieren. havens. bayen. sanden en droogten. als meed Hoemen C. de Uytkyck op Spitsbergen van de Noord Caap en Beeren Eylandt bezeylen sal.  
Pascaerte van GROEN-LANDT. Yslandt. Stract david's en jan Mayen eylandt; hoemen de seb●ige van Hitlandt en de Noort custen van Schotlandt en Yrlandt-beseylen mach.      

THE THIRD BOOK Of the new LIGHTING COLOMNE, OR SEA-MIRROUR, OF THE EASTERN, and NORTHERN NAVIGATION. Containing The Description of Yceland, Green-land, or the Straits of David: likewise the situation of John Mayens Island; and Spitsbergen: Also the situation of Candenoes' eastward, through Weygats, to the Tartarish or Yce-Sea.  

The first Demonstration, Wherein Is showed the passages between Hitland and Yceland; and from thence to the Straits of David, or the corner of old Green-land, now called Staten-hoeck.  
FRom hence, or out of Texel to Hitland is the course well enough known to (almost) all kind of Mariners. But when ye will sail from Hitland to Yceland, 
How a man must sail from Hitland to Yceland.  your course must be from the South-end of Hitland to the South-west-corner of Yceland, leaving West-Mana Islands on your right hand: the course is west northwestward, a half stroke westerly; and east-south-east, a half stroke easterly, the matter of an hundred fourscore and fifteen dutch miles.  
Sailing from the south-west-corner of Yceland, ye must sail northward on alongs the wall, the matter of five miles till ye come to the cleft of Rcykenesse; from thence east-south-east hard underland till ye come to the haven of Hanifioert: Ye can scarcely know that there is a haven here till ye come to the end of the farewater; but sailing all alongs the wall, till ye come to a blind Rock 
A blind Rock.  standing in the middle of the water, and a little Island whereon there is a house, than ye can see the Bay where the road is: Ye may sail on either side of this blind Rock, but rather on the north as southside; and so running inwardly till ye be right opposite to the house, there ye have a good road and ancker-ground, 
Road and Anker-ground.  of three, four or five fathoms: Here ye need fear no kind of winds, the west and west-north-west are the worst, but without danger, because of the cliffs that streatches themselves from the northwall: here ye can have good water because of a stream that flows through between the mountains on the north-wall. The Indwellers here be of a reasonable good condition, and brings aboard fish, stockens and other commodities for a small price, they would rather have linen as money for their wares; but above all they are most desirous of burnt-wine. Ye can have here likewise sheep, milk and flesh for other wares.  
The matter of three miles northward from Hanifioert runs several warmwater rivers into the sea, landwards in, those rivers are so hot that if ye should put a piece of flesh on a fleshhook, and let it hang in the water, it is able to boil the flesh: but on the seashore these waters be lukewarm, so that ye may either swim or bathe your bodies into them.  

The Straits of David.  He that would sail from hence, to wit, from the south-west-corner of Yceland to Fretum david's, he must set his course westward somewhat southerly, that he may reach to the corner of the land, the which corner ye can see when ye are the matter of six or eight miles from the land: coming thither ye can see the Ice which lieth there continually the whole year through: So that in case ye should set your course more southwardly as is above mentioned, ye should not attain to the cape. Therefore when ye see both the land and the Ice, ye must sail along by the Ice, which shall lead you into the corner of the Straits.  
The corner of the Straight lieth just upon sixty grades benorth the Line, for the Ice stretches himself according as the wall lieth: and when ye come besouth the Ice, about nine and fifty grades and five and twenty or thirty minutes, sometimes somewhat southly, sometimes somewhat northly, so shall the Ice lie north northwestward from you, alike as the wall the Straitward in lieth, to the height of threescore three grades, and then lieth the wall right northward, till over the threescore six grades and thirty minutes; and than ye come into the narrow of the Straight, which is about thirty miles broad; till ye come to the height of one and seventy grades and thirty minutes: and then ye come in an open room Sea lying northwest, running round northward towards the east, and from thence southward again to the above mentioned narrowness.  
This Sea runs northward to the height of seventy and nine grades, where it is closed by fast land; with a great many bays and rivers most part full of Ice, which because of the ebbing and falling of waters is driven through the narrowness of the Straight into the north-Sea, and from thence unto the coasts of Terra Nova, 
Terra Nova.  into the great-bay of St. Laurence, after and on the westside of Terra Nova.  
The inhabitants of this land on both sides of the Straight, are heathens and wild men: and therefore are not to be trusted though they give never so many tokens of friendship. Whatsoever they handle or change with you, they lay it on the oars wherewith they row their Canoe, they trust no body, and therefore are not to be trusted, for as aforesaid they lay their wares on their oars and so delivers it to you. When ye are resolved to go on land, ye must be well armed, and especially with muskets, for as for swords or Sabels' they care not, because they can reach you with their arrows, or with their slings ere ye can come near them; but if ye happen to kill one or two of them with musket bullots, the rest should in haste flee from you to their mountains where they have their abode.  
This land from old Green-land be north Yceland lying southward to the cape or Staten-hoeck, 
Staten-hoeck.  and from that corner all along to Fretum david's, and all round about that inward-sea, is it altogether a fast land, and joined to America, until the north and north-east of Yceland; yet it is the opinion of some men, (as likewise of myself) that it is joined to Spitsbergen, and that because of the rivers which come from the north foreby Spitsbergen, which rivers ye can perceive when ye are on the height of fourscore and three grades, and because they ebb towards the north, it may be believed that there is a passage, but as yet unknown.  

To know the Land.  
Ye can see the southeast coast of Green-land when ye are the matter of six or eight miles from it; and when ye see it, than ye are hard by the Ice.   

Of the Tides and flowing of Streams.  
The Streams or rivers come out of the north from Spitsbergen, and floweth alongs Green-land.  
They ebb on fourscore and three grades towards the north, and floweth towards the South.   

Situation and Courses.  

From the South-end of Hitland to the south-west-corner of Yceland, west northwest, and a half stroke westlier 195 miles.  
From the south-west-corner of Yceland, to the cleft of Reykenesse northward 5 miles.  
From the cleft of Reykenesse to the haven of Hanifioert east southeast 12 miles  
From the south-west-corner of Yceland to Staten-hoeck, west south-west somewhat westly. 186 miles.    

The Heights.  

The Cape of Old-Green-land or Staten-hoeck lieth on 60 grades  
The south-west-corner of Yceland lieth on seventy four grades and 5 minutes.  
The Mouth of the Straight of David lieth on 71 grades.     

THE SECOND DEMONSTRATION which Containeth the description of JOHN MAYENS ISLAND.  
IOhn Mayens Island lieth from Hitland northward, according to the common Holland's Compass; or as others say north northwest upon the half stroke: yet it is better to sail somewhat westlier as to fall a little eastly, because they must be on the westside of the Neering, for if they fall easterly than they must needs sail about the north of the same, where they have too great calmness, and sometimes whirlwinds, that fall in a sudden from the mountain called the Beerenberg, or in English called the Bears-mountain.  
In the Spring of the year on the east-side of this Island is not so much ice as on the north-side. For the sea on the north side, (which is never above ten miles navigable) is in the Spring commonly always frozen.  
The wind blows there commonly out of the South-west, both harder and oftener as out of any other place.  
In the South-bay, a south-south-east and a north-north-west moon (according to the common compass) makes a full Sea. The flood flows there from the south towards the north, and ebbs contrarily.  
The first day of August (at the north-end of the aforesaid Island) did the Sun rise in the north-east with the one half of his body under and the other half above the Horizon: and the last day of July was he wholly under.  
On the North-end of this Island is a very high mountain commonly called the Bears-mountain, 
The Bears-mountain.  the which, if ye behold it from the north, seemeth to be cloven, but if ye behold it from the east or westside, it seemeth round, falling as it were smoothly downward, except at the north-east corner, where it stretcheth itself outward.  
The North-corner is hilly and rough, it seems somewhat low because of the high ground that lieth about it: from thence the matter of half a mile southward the coast is hilly, stay and shallow, so far from the wall as a little canon can carry, is it about 20 fathoms deep: a little more southward is there a small footstrand of stony ground, so that upon some places ye could make shift to bring your chaloup or boat, and this stretches itself the matter of a mile in length southward.  
In or upon this strand there are three Yce-hills 
The three Yce-hils.  high and stay, those are congealed of the snowwater which falls in the sommertime from the top of the mountain, two of them lies near to the North-end of the shore.  
From thence further southward is the wall for the matter of a quarter of a mile, (or scarce so much) hilly and stay, as it is at the north-end, and from thence is there another shore about half a mile in length, thereon likewise can ye bring your boat.  
From thence come we to the Southeast-corner of the Beats-mountain, which is likewise hilly and stay as the aforesaid wall, so that it is impossible to come up on it, at some places higher other some lower, oneven, it is commonly 25 or 30 fathoms high from the water, and within goeth it in some place somewhat stay upward to the Bears-mountain.  
At this corner lie some little rocks separated from the land, whereon are a great many of several sorts of fowls, ye can row to and about these rocks with your boat: A little about this corner there lie likewise such rocks without the wall, 
Divers rocks.  between these rocks there is a commodious haven, with a little Sand-bay, 
Sand-bay.  where ye can easily bring up your boat whilst ye anchor; there ye are freed from the sea, for it is there commonly calm water, although it storms without. Ye cannot perceive that there is a haven there till ye be within the rocks; from these rocks westward about a short mile, is the wall stay and rocky as before, yet not so high, all alongs the coast is there many sharp rocks standing as it were out of the wall: from the land off, as well by the shore as by the stay wall, the matter of a musquet-shot, or thereabout ye have water some sixty fathoms deep.  
When ye have passed this stay shore, than ye come to a flat ground of black sand, which is about a mile in length, about a little canon-shot from the wall, ye have six fathoms water with black sand on the ground, this strand is commonly called the great Hout-bay, 
The great Hout-bay.  or Wood-bay, because there is sometimes found much old broken wood: hereby landwards in lies divers flat hills of black 
The black hill.  earth and few stones, here is the land at his smallest, for being on the top of this hill, and ships sailing on every side of it, ye could make them hear your voice both at once.  
Westward from the end of this great Hout-bay, where the land lieth south-west to the south, is there another rocky wall, alike to the aforesaid, so far as a piece of canon can carry, further have ye another flat, called the small Hout-bay, 
The small Hout-bay.  with an even shore like to the first.  
A quarter of a mile Seawards in, by the South-end of that small Hout-bay, there lieth a rock, which to look to seemeth to be a ship with topsails up: 
A rock like a ship with topsails.  hereabouts is it flat water.  
Southward from this small Hout-bay, there lie many rocks and hills in the sea, there is likewise a stay rocky wall; between this wall and the rocks is a passage that runs in sea south southeast on, called the Bears-gat, 
The Bears-gat.  where within four fathoms ye have stonie-ground. Ships could come in to lie there, but there is no anker-ground.  
A mile and a half south-west southerly from the aforesaid rock that seemeth like to be a ship, there lieth another rock of that same fashion, yet not so sharp above as the other, this lieth but a small canon-shot from the land: besides this there are many other little rocks (whereon are abundance of fowls) standing out in a corner: between this and the Bears-gat is the wall rough and rocky, and sometimes here and there small foot-strands whereon ye cannot come with your boat: and from thence gins the land to be higher and stonier, for from the aforesaid corner Seawards in it is rocky and stony, and landwards in full of hills and mountains; in time of need ye may bring your boat to the foot of the hills: half a mile further there lieth more such rocks, stayly descending to the water; alongs the shore, so far from land as a small piece of canon can carry, it is commonly fifty or sixty fathoms deep.  
The matter of three mile's south and to eastward, from the south or west-corner, there lieth a stone, 
A Stone.  which at the undeepest hath about eleven foot of water, which stone in circuit is about so big as a man can throw a small-stone.  
Lucas Bouwenson from Delfshaven hath with calm water broken the ruder of his ship there on; about this stonegoeth commonly a hollow water.  
The length of half a mile northeastward from this stone ye have uneven ground, for casting your sound-lead one time ye can have but seven fathoms, and at the other time ye can sound five and thirty: from this stone towards the land falleth the ground by degrees off to the depth of six and thirty fathoms and deeper, yea so far from the wall as a small piece of canon can carry ye have fourscore fathoms water, with soft clay-ground: but about the stone the ground is stony and sandy.  
Claes Dirckson Seyn from Wijck wrote in the year after our redemption 1616. that about eleven or twelve mile's south southeast from the South-corner of the Island, he found 35 or 36 fathoms, with black moulie sand, and small stones.  
John Sybrantson Pael-man writes, that south-eastward from the southeast corner of the Island about two miles he found rocky ground, my neighbour had once 60, and I had but 30 fathoms, so that it is very uneven there.  
About a quarter of a mile northwestward from the South-corner, there stands a rock high above water, with sundry other little rocks by him, which are commonly called the seven or five rocks, 
The seven or five rocks.  when ye come from the north ye can easily pass through between them: hard by the land there lieth a Holmken 
Holmken.  a little above water.  
From these seven or five rocks till near under the wall drieth it up from thirty to five fathoms.  
From the southwall north northwest a short mile the land falleth out with a corner, commonly called the Low-south-corner, 
The Low-south-corner.  on the shore is it low, and there lieth the sloops that keeps watch.  
Between the South-corner and this corner there are several infalls, with a low shore, commodious for boats to come by, in the infalls is it sandy ground, six or seven fathoms deep.  
Between this and the South-corner lie some small rocks, some above and some under water: from thence about two canon-shot is the land somewhat crooked to an infall, which is commonly called, the bought of Guinea. 
The bought of Guinea.   
From this aforesaid bought north-east northward about half a mile, come ye into the South-bay, 
South-bay.  a lesser bought as the aforesaid, there were wont to stand ten tents in this bay, for the handling of fish oil, but in one year the sea washed away three tents, thirteen chaloups, tuns and oily-vessels, pertaining to the chamber of Amsterdam, it washed away likewise most of the ground whereon they stood, wherefore those from Amsterdam did delve a large piece of ground the summer following, whereon they have set two tents.  
Afore this Bay ye have from nine to fifteen and so forth to eighteen fathoms, with black sandie-ground, a little further off ye have five and twenty, yea thirty fathoms, with short stony ground; and again so far as a small piece of canon can reach ye have fourscore fathoms, and soft ground.  
Between the bought of Guinea and the South-bay the wall is very stay, stony, and rocky: when ye lie on fifteen fathoms afore this South-bay, than ye can see through between the land and the Fowlie-rock, or Vogel-klip.  
Some two canon-shot from this Fowlie-rock 
Fowlie-rock.  into the bought there lieth a small rock; and on land there is a Red-hill; 
Red-hill.  in the aforesaid bought there lieth a channel, whereon ye may lay four or five chaloups.  
The matter of a mile northeastward from the South-bay, ye shall find a little corner, than ye have a gate or entry where ye can row through from the mountains into a Kolk or depth, there ye have so much room as to lay some twenty chaloups on; and it is very convenient for the waiting on whales: this is called of Seamen the Hoepstocks-Bay. 
The Hoepstocks-Bay.   
A large canon-shot from this Hoepstocks-Bay ye shall find a corner where there are many small rocks, (which are called the Rudsen 
The Rudsen. ) from thence to the Red-hill the wall is rocky and stony.  
The matter of a mile north-east northerly from the aforesaid Rudsen, there is an outlying corner, commonly called the Walrush-gate, 
Walrush-gate.  without or rather at the which there lieth the Briellish-steepel, between these two the land hath a great infall, which is commonly called North-bay, and is the most convenient place of all for the handling of fish-oile.  
A quarter of a mile from these Rudsen or small rocks towards the bought, there is a flat place, 
North-Bay.  which is called the Wood-bay, 
Wood-bay.  because of this flat the land lieth high, this flat is a short quarter of a mile large, between this and the Walrush-gate there lieth a great flat Channel, whereon lie all the tents and kettles of the chambers of Holland and Zeeland: this bought hath a flat sandie-ground, where the ships may lie at anchor on fifteen or sixteen fathoms water, about a canon-shot from land. In the fore-sommer the ships lie near on land within the Bay on eight or nine fathoms water.  
From the Briellish-steepel the land lieth eastward up, and hath for a mile flat strand, which is very convenient for chaloups to keep watch: the aforesaid corner of the Walrush-gate is very high and stay towards the sea; at the end of the aforesaid mile, ye find nothing but rocky stay land without any strand, (and which is worthy to be made mention of) a canon-shot from thence ye have a stone, on the fashion of a steepel.  
At the end of this aforesaid land a little foreby the steeple, there ye find a little infall, which is called Mary-Mus-bay, 
The Mary-Mus-bay.  because that Mary Must from Rotterdam, of happy memory, was the first that ever sent a ship there to boil oil: there is a very commodious anker-ground; for about a canon-shot from land, ye have five, six, or eight fathoms water: and a far way Seawards in ye have smooth water, likewise ye have a shore fit for all kind of commodities useable for boiling of fish.  
A little landwards in ye have a pool, whereout ye can take fish, yea, ye can bring your boat from shore into that same pool.  
From the east-corner of Mary-Mus-bay the foot of the mountains streatches themselves in sea, very stay and high towards the west strand or shore.  
From the foot of these mountains, setting your course north-east northerly for the matter of a quarter of a mile, ye have a flat shore, where aforetimes there hath stood a cross on a grave: between those two the land hath a great infall; and hard under wall a stony ground; the wall of itself is flat and sandy, so that a man might have occasion on several places to boil fish.  
The Northwest Corner.  
De Noord-westhoec van JAN MAYEN Eylandt.  
BEsides this aforesaid Bay two musquet-shot from land, ye have nine fathoms depth; off-falling ground to the seventeenth fathom: about a musquet-shot further ye have good single sandy ground: but when ye come to have five and twenty, thirty, or fifty fathoms, there ye have foul stony ground, which continueth till ye come so far in Sea, that ye can see both the corners of the land: half a mile from the land ye lose the stonie-ground; and again hard under land, where ye can see the ground, is it stony.  
From the cross to the next Yce-hill, is it overall flat sandy ground, and in some places stony, it is about half a mile broad, and some places are fit to lay your boats on that keeps watch, but it is not convenient for ankering of ships, for deepness.  
From the northwest corner towards the east ye have a stony and stay wall, a quarter of a mile in length, where ye find a convenient little bay, whereon ye may set one kettle to boil fish in: but because a short canon-shot from thence it is well 300 fathoms deep, therefore it is inconvenient for ships to lie there.  
From thence runs the wall, well a half mile in length, eastwardly up; at the end whereof there is a little bay, where ye could set a kettle and lay a boat on watch, but a short canon shot from the land, is it well three hundred fathoms deep.  
From thence to the north-corner, which is half a mile, on the shore is it stony, knotty and stay.  
On the north-side of this Island the ice lies sometimes so near, that if ye would sail from hence to Spitsbergen, ye should be forced to set your course forty, five and forty, yea sometimes fifty miles, northerly about; and sometimes ye can sail right northwards from this Island well five and forty or fifty miles, to the height of 75 grades norther breadth, before ye can see any Ice.  
By fair and clear weather ye can see the Bears-mountain when ye are thirty miles from it. Now adays there are not so many fish taken about this Island as was wont, because they run now more towards the north than they used to do.  
At John Mayens Island the veriation is a stroke and a half northwestward.  

Of the Tides and flowing of Streams.  
In the South-bay a south southeast and north northwest Moon, according to the Holland's compass makes high water: the flood flows from the south running northwards, and ebbs contrarily.   

Situation and Courses.  

From Hitland to John Mayens Island, north and northwest, at the half stroke 160 miles.  
From the North-end of John Mayens Island, to the North-cape, east somewhat northerly, but little 170 miles.  
From the North-end of John Mayens Island, to the southermost point of Spitsbergen, west northwest, half a stroke northerly 165 miles.  
From the South-end of John Mayens Island, to the Island Grijp, on the Liet of Dronten, northwest, a little more northerly 147 miles.  
From the South-end of John Mayens Island, to Langenes, the northermost corner of Yceland, south-west, half a stroke westward 111 miles.  
From the north-corner to the south-corner, north-east and north-east easterly 9 miles.  
From the North-corner to the South-east-corner of the little Sandiebay, north-east northerly, and north north-east 2 miles and a half.  
From the little Sandiebay to the Eyer-Island, or the beginning of the great Hout-bay, east southerly 1¼ of a mile.  
From the Eyer-Island to the first Rock that is like to a ship with her sails, southward westerly 1¾ mile.  
From the first Rock to the other Rock which is also like to a ship, west and a little southerly 1½ mile.  
From this second Rock to the south-corner south-west 2¼ mile.  
From the South-corner to the five or seven Rocks, northwest ¼ mile.  
From the south-corner to the low south-corner or the Hoy-berg, north 1 mile  
From the Hoy-berg to the Southbay, north-east 1¼ mile.  
From the Fowlie-Rock to the Hoepstock-bay north-east 1 mile.  
From the Fowlie-Rock to the Rudsen north-east scarce 1½ mile.  
From the Rudsen to the Briellish-Steepel north-east northerly 1 mile.  
From the Briellish-Steepel to Marie-Mus-bay east northerly 1¼ mile.  
From Marie-Mus-bay to Muyens second Crosse-corner, north-east 1½ mil.  
From Muyens' Crosse-corner to the North-corner, east 2½ mile.    

The Heights.  
The North-corner lieth on the height of 71 grades 23 min.  
The South-corner lieth on the height of 71 grades.   

Thus appeareth the land in your sight when ye are on Sea.  

The flat strand.  
Thus appeareth the Bears-mountain, when he is northward two miles from you.  
Thus appeareth the Bears-mountain, when he is westward two miles from you.  
Thus appeareth the Bears-mountain, when he is southward two miles from you.     

The third Demonstration, Containing The situation of the Bear's Island, the Hoopen Island, as also of whole Spitsbergen for so much as they are northerly and easterly known as yet.  
WHen ye come from the North-cape to the Bears-Island, 
The Bears-Island.  your course is north northwest and northwest northerly, about 54 or 55 miles, Syroy 
Syroy.  then lies right north northwest from the Bears-Island. (Upon the aforesaid North-cape there are people who lives till they be seventy or fourscore years old, they never eat any bread, for they live on fish and flesh.)  
The Indwellers of the North-cape towards Finmarken say, that that Bay never friezes, so that they get their living most by taking of fish and drying the same.  
The Bears-Island is reasonable high, ye can row about it in the space of six hours; at the northwest corner thereof coming within three miles to it, ye can find ground of forty fathoms, and how nearer the land ye come how undeeper it is, for within a canon shot to it ye are on 15 fathoms.  
Out of the Bears-Island ye can have refreshment of waters although it were for an hundred ships: there groweth likewise brave herbs, whereof ye can make salate, which refresheth a man extraordinarily: there are also many fowls: ye find there coals to burn, not unlike to the Scots coals.  
At the north-east corner there lieth a little Bay, where ye can lie safe after a little Island, cornerwindes from east southeast to west south-west blows flat into this bay, but as for other winds ye lie safe; ye can come into this bay at the southside thereof, at the north-side it is almost fast to a great Island, except a narrow passage where ye can come handsomely through with a chaloup; hereabouts is no other Inham to run into in time of storm, but round about ye have anker-ground; yet ye must lie in open Sea, the ground is dirty, and there goeth a hollow Sea, so that it is not good to anchor there in time of storm: the flood floweth commonly from the south-west toward the north-east: a south-west & north-east moon make high water: and it floweth commonly four foot up and down. At the time of year ye can take good kods, and haddoks at the Bears-Island.  

The East-coast of Spitsbergen.  
FRom the Bears-Island to Hoopen-Island, 
The Hoopen-Island.  the course is north-east northerly as is suspected two and thirty miles; the Island is seven or eight miles in length, and not above three musquet-shot broad, it lieth east north-east, & west south-west, at both sides, so well at the south as the north: but on the north side alongs the whole Island ye have good anker-ground, on twenty fathoms, a great half mile from land, on the south-west end and the north-east end ye have some flat ground, where the Walrushes use to come, otherwise it is overall stay and ragged, but on the southside it is overall stony and rocky, and not fit for ankering, of which ye must take heed: yet ye may sail within half a mile alongs the coast without danger, but there is nothing on this Island that serveth for refreshment.  
There hath been some who have sailed beyond the Hoopen-Island east northeastward 24 miles, but found no land, found abundance of ice, and could reach no ground.  
The Hoopen-Island appeareth to you as five mountains, whereof the north-east end is the highest.  
At the north-east end of Hoopen-Island there is a valley well a quarter of a mile in circuit, whereon resorts a great number of Walrushes, yea sometimes it lieth whole full of them: there are likewise an innumerable number of Sea-mews and other Sea fowls, they fly sometimes in such multitudes, that they hinder you from the sight of the firmament above your head; so that the land is well enough to be known by the off and on flying of those fowls seeking food for their young ones.  
From the north-east corner of Hoopen-Island to Black-point, the course is north westerly, some ten miles; but before ye come to Black-point, on the southeast side there lieth a great many small Islands; from the mast of your ship ye can tell sixty of them, but indeed there are so many as if they were sown, and that all alongs the coast so far as ye can see; and that towards the north-east and west northwest, as we suspect, altogether stones and rocks.  
When Black-point 
Black-point.  is four mile's north easterly from you, you see a great Island, in comparison of the other: when ye are a large musquet-shot on the south side of this Island, ye lie on thirty fathoms stitch-ground, it is a stay ground, for the length of a ship more Seawards in, ye have 60 fathoms; within the aforesaid Islands towards land, ye can see open in Sea, where the Islands are not so close together.  
A mile further east from the aforesaid great Island, without the low Islands, there lies a great many blinds in Sea, where ye can have no anker-ground, the Sea beats much on those blinds when it is high water, yet there is no great flood.  
On the north-east corner of Hoopen-Island there goeth as strong a stream as there doth in Texel, the flood cometh from the south south-west and runs along the land. A south-southwest wind maketh there the highest water: on the aforesaid Island is no refreshment to begot, (so far as is yet known, but is all stony low land: neither can ye see the aforesaid Islands from fare. But Black-point is a very high land, so that when it is fair weather ye can see it from Hoopen-Island: thereabout ye have thick mists: yea sometimes for the space of five or six days, ye see not once the Sun, but all thick cold mist.  
From Black-point, so lieth the coast eastward on, north-east up, so far as ye can see, to Wijbben jansons' water west northwest, but the whole coast along lieth full of rocks and little Islands, the flood cometh out of the south-west by the Cape on the east side of Look-out, and runs northeastwardly up to Wijbben Jansons water.  
Ye can scarcely lay on by the east side of the Cape Look-out, because of the Ice that cometh from the east of Nova Sembla, and runs along the coast, (as if it were fast land) like to a bank, so that ye can scarcely come through.   

The West-coast of Spits-Bergen.  

Look-out, or Kijck●●●.  FRom the Bears-Island to the Cape Lookout or the south corner of Spits-Bergen, is the course north northwest somewhat westly, about eight and twenty miles.  
There lies a stony channel on the southeast cape of Look-out Seawards in well four miles in length, on some places when the water rages ye can see it beat on the channel, ye can sail through between this channel and the land, but with great danger.  
From the cape Look-out to the south-end of the foreland, the course is north northwest six or seven and twenty miles; between both lies Hoorn-zond, Klock-bay or Belzond, and Yce-zond.  
From the cape Look-out to Hoorn-zond the course is north northwest six miles: it is between both stony and foul ground.  
The Hoorn-zond 
Hoorn-zond.  is a wide bay, and lies without danger of all kind of winds: The English have their tents standing there, and comes every year to take fish.  
Between Hoorn-zond and Klock-river (by others called Belzond, 
Belzond. ) lies the coast northwards westerly and north northwest, all alongs the coast it is stony and foul, and full of rocks and craigs.  
Within the Belzond lies sundry rivers and havens, and a little within the corner on the north side, lies Willem van Muyens' haven, 
Willem van Muyens haven.  (that is so called, because Willem van Muyen had fished there aforetimes) a little northwards up runs a river landwards in, which is called the undeep river, 
The undeep river.  whereon lies the cold harbour, where aforetimes there have stood some tents: a little more southerly lies Michael Rinders river, and more southerly from the aforesaid river lies Sardammer-river, which runs a great way landwards in.  
From the Sardammer-river westward, or sailende in through Klock-bay, a little about the south corner there lies a fair harbour, which because of its conveniency is called the Fair-haven, 
The fair haven.  which is a brave road, and in time of need a man might keep a ship there without anchor or tow: it is a clean slippery ground.  
From the Klock-bay to Yce-zond lies the coast all northwesterly, and north northwest, between these two it is dirty and foul, without any bochts or Infalls, yet when ye come a little about the south corner ye find there the Green harbour, there is a good road, and ye may freely anchor there, so hard under the wall as ye please, and that on eight, ten or twelve fathoms water, it is there every where a clean flat upgoing ground, and ye lie there befreed from all sorts of winds.  
When ye come a little about the north corner ye find the Safe haven, 
The Safe haven.  which lies northward up, and sailing a quarter of a mile upward, ye come to a good road, which is called the Safe-haven; the ground is somewhat stay but clean, there ye may let anchor fall, on thirty fathoms, and ye lie secure from all winds.  
Farther eastward up, the farewater runs so far up that never any boat yet hath been at the end of it; for it lies most commonly the whole summer throughfull of Ice; but if ye eat this north-wall, there is no danger ye need to fear.  
The Yce-zond 
The Yce-zond.  is a wide river to come into, but when ye come into the Hoorn-zond or Safe haven, or get into the Yce-zond, and when ye perceive that theyce gins to come out of the south, ye must make haste to lift anchor, otherwise ye should be besieged with Ice, so that ye could not come forth, and chief in the after-sommer.  
Whilst ye sail this passage upward, ye shall find a great many Roes, of which ye can take some: and all alongs the shore ye have such a multitude of fowls on the rocks, where they breed their Young-ones, that by their dung the rocks grow, as if it were green: there grows likewise a sort of herb, which is called Slae, and is alike to scurvie-grasse, the which herb tastes even as salate, and refreshes a man extremely.  
From the Yce-zond to the south-corner of the Foreland, the coast lies northwest, yet ye must shun the south-corner, because it is a little foul: there lies a rock south-west from the land off seawards in, which is a quarter of a mile long. The Foreland lies south and north from the south to the north-corner, or fowlie corner, well fifeteen or sixteen miles in length: a mile and a half benorth the south-corner of the Foreland there lies two Islands, the one a canon shot from the other, and as far between them and the wall; on these Islands there are many thousands of fowls like to Rotgeeses, and drakes, there are likewise a great multitude of eggs to be got: a great mile benorth there lies a rock of clear white stones (under which there are many great ones) this lies from the wall seawards in about a mile and a half: three miles beyond the Persh-Rif, there lies a little Island near under the shore, where likewise are many fowls and eggs to begot, between both it is reasonable clean, but towards the wall lies some rocks, wherefore ye must take heed that ye come not too near to the wall.  
About the north-corner of the Foreland, between the main land ye can cast anchor on twenty, eighteen, fifeteen, ten, and four fathoms, according as ye are far into it, but nearest the foreland.  
At the fast land lies the Crosse-bay, 
Crosse-bay.  and somewhat forward southerly within the foreland, there lies the English-bay, 
The English bay.  where the English come a fishing.  
From the Fowl-corner or north corner of the foreland to the Danes-Island, the course is north-east northerly, the matter of nine miles: under way lies Madaleenen-bay, 
Madaleenen-bay.  where ye have a good road at the south-corner of the bay, but it is high stay land, and we cast anchor commonly a little within the south-corner, yet ye may sail a little farther in, and let the anchor fall at the north wall, for ye have every where good ground on fifeteen, twenty and five and twenty fathoms.  
The north-corner of the Madaleenen bay is the south-corner of the English-bay, Which is stony and foul, and very dangerous for those that knows it not.  
From the Madeleenen-bay to Robbe-bay, the course is north north east and south south-west two miles, between those two there lies a low Island, which is called the English-look-out, 
English look-out.  from whence a stony channel lies, in length of a canon shot: ye can come through this channel, but with great danger.  
From the Robbe-bay (which lies on the Danes-Island) to the south-bay, the course is north north-east about half a mile, we sail commonly benorth the south-corner of the south-bay, into the bay, but when ye come into the south-bay, ye must shun the north-wall, for it is foul; in the incoming ye may go somewhat near the northwall, and cast anchor on ten, fifeteen, sixteen or twenty fathoms good ground, safe from all winds.  
The Hollands or Maurits-Bay.  
AT the north-corner of the South-Bay there lieth four small Islands, of which the uttermost is the greatest from the westmost part of those four Islands, to the Hollands or Maurits bay, the course is east north-east a quarter of a mile, if ye eat the rocks, ye need fear no danger, except some rocks, otherwise is it a fair coast, for ye may lie at anchor under two several corners of this bay, and that a canonshot or two from the wall as ye please, & that on fifteen, eighteen or twenty fathoms: if ye sail a little south southeast in, ye can see the Hollands ships lying at anchor afore their tents: but if ye would sail to them, ye must not come nearer the southwall as where ye have seven fathom water: and then ye come first where the Amsterdams' tents are, when ye are there ye may go as near the wall as you please, yea if there come an Ice, ye may make your tow fast on land, and need not fear any winds: then come ye to the tents of the chamber of Middelburgh and Vlissing, likewise where the Danes and others stands: From the westmost tent there runs a craig off, by the which ye cannot come, it runs most the whole passage over; and than ye see flat out of the South-Bay; on the south side of the afore said craig there lieth sundry little Islands, as also many stones under water: it were possible to sail from hence out of the South-Bay to Sea, but it must first be marked with beacons or tuns, because it is a narrow passage: From the west-most tent out of the South-Bay is about a mile in length, and is called the Amsterdams-Island, 
Amsterdams-Island.  because their tents stands there: the place where the tents stand, is about a musket shot in breadth, after which runs a Kind of water or a still standing pool.  
East southeast and east northerly from the Amsterdams' tents lie two Yce-mountains hard on shore; sometimes the Ice comes down with such a force, that they make the ships that lie afore the tents to stir: The land within the bay is very high and stay, as likewise it is by the Amsterdams and Danes Island, although not so high.  
At the South-corner of the Hollandsbay lieth a little Island hard underwall, called the Devils-Island; 
Devils-Island.  ye need not fear it, for ye may sail hard by it: From that same corner to the Vogelsang, the course is east north-east a great mile: The Vogelsang is an Island, clean round about, for ye may let anchor fall where ye will. From hence east southeast a canonshot lieth the Island met de kloof, or cloven Island: 
The Cloven-Island.  so called, because the mountain that lieth on shore is cloven, and lieth between the Vogelsang and the aforesaid Island.  
Between the fast land and the aforesaid Island, there lie divers Islands, who because of their multitude, are called Archepelliga; 
Archepelliga.  in these Islands are divers roads to be found for those that are acquainted there, but none to be had at the fast land.  
From the cloven Island to the Island called the Zews-uytkijck, 
The Zews-uytkijck.  (or Look-out:) the course is southeast easterly about half a mile: between both there lieth a little round Island, called the Geese-Island: 
The Geese-Island.  when ye come thither ye must sail through between this and the Zews-kijck-uyt, keeping the Gansen-Island a canonshot from you seawards in: at the Zews-island ye have good anker-ground and lieth on 20 or 15 fathoms good anker-ground.  
That passage which runs between the Islands and the fast land, ends between the Zews-island and Moniers-bay: it is possible to sail through the Hollandsbay, but only for those who are used with those passages.  
From the Zews-uytkijck to Moniers-bay 
Moniers-bay.  is the course southeast a half mile, and the passage is almost a quarter of a mile broad; and on the southside there lieth a haven called the Eyer- (or egg) haven: 
The egges-haven.  Moniers-bay is not fit to sail into, because it is stony foul and rocky, and seldom used.  
On the east side of the Zews-kijck-uyt, in the after-sommer, ye have often south-west winds with great calmness; and in the fore-sommer northerly winds; although ye have had a good gail at sea: how farther east so much worse: the flood floweth from the south toward the north all alongs the coast: it floweth well eight hours, and ebbs in less than four: All the Ye that cometh with an east wind from Nova-Sembla, cometh with a great force along the northcoast of the cape the Kijck-uyt, into the Hollandsbay; yea so hard that the ships have enough to do to shun it; this is always so when ye have often eastwindes in the fore-year; than it is driven to the westside of the cape the Kijck-uyt, where the ye lieth and swimmeth till it be driven by the south-floud until the coast of the Fore-land, so that all the bays are filled therewith, from thence it runs northward on, not knowing whether.  
From Moniers-bay to the Red-bay, the coast lieth east southeast four miles; the coast is everywhere foul and stony, hard under Moniers-bay it is a low land, yet by piece and piece climming upward to the Red-bay: 
The Red-bay.  the east-corner of Moniers-bay is called the Low-corner.  
From the Red-bay to Reenevelt, the course is east southeast five miles; the coast is not clean, yet ye get anker-ground on twenty or eighteen fathoms alongs the Reenevelt, yet ye shall find no clean ground.  
The Reenevelt 
The Reenevelt.  is low even ground, in the middle thereof lieth a little roundhill, which when it is from the south south-west from you, ye have all along the coast of Reenevelt anker-ground, as is aforesaid.  
On the east-side of Reenevelt there runs a broad sail-water, called the East-wijck, at the end of which never any hath been as yet, this water runs very far landwards in, and is well three miles broad: on the east-corner of the Easter-wijck lieth the Gray-corner, & lieth from Reenevelt south-eastward three miles, as is aforesaid. The Reenevelt lieth from the outmost of the Islands east southeast ten miles. From Reenevelt north-east northerly four miles lieth the Moffen-Island where are many Walrushes.  
From the Gray-corner 
Gray-corner.  with a southeast course, ye sail to the South-easter-land on, over a bay which is four miles broad, which bay runs south, and south south-west.  
The Easter-land runs east north-east upward, but it is yet unknown how far, it is a even lane, reasonable high, but of divers sorts of earth, alike to Spitsbergen, so that it is thought to be an Island.  
The whole west coast of Spitsbergen is wholly high uneven land.  
The difference at Spitsbergen is 22 grades north-westerly; when the Sun is south south-west he is at the highest there, according to the Holland's compass.  
In the fore-sommer ye have there commonly easterly, and in the after-sommer southerly winds.  
Likewise on the west coast of Spitsbergen in the fore-year ye have commonly east and north-east, and in the after-year most southerly winds.   

Of the Tides and flowing of Streams.  
At the west-coast of Spitsbergen the tide keeps no constant course, but a flood with a north-east and south-west moon maketh the highest water; it floweth with a daily tide five and with a flood six foot.  
A south-west and north-east moon maketh highest water at the Bears-Island, the flood cometh commonly out of the south-west and floweth toward the southeast.  
A south south-west and north north-east moon maketh the highest water on the north-east corner of Hoopen-Island, and it floweth there as hard as in Texel: it cometh out from the south south-west, and runs along the coast to the Cape the Kijck-uyt: the stream floweth from south-west northeastward to Wijbbe Jansons water.  
On the east-side of the Zews-uytkijck cometh the stream from the south, and runs to the north; it floweth eight hours, and ebbs scarce four.   

Of the Depths.  
At the north-west-corner of the Bears-Island ye have forty fathoms, and drieth more and more up till ye be within a canon-shot of land where ye have fifteen fathoms water.   

Situation and Courses.  

From the North-cape to the Bears-Island the course is north northwest, and northwest westerly, 54 or 55 miles.  
From Suroy to the Bears-Island north northwest 50 miles.  
From the Bears-Island to Hoopen-Island, north north-east northerly 32 miles.  
From the south-west to the north-east corner of Hopen-Island east north-east 8 miles.  
From the north-east corner of Hopen-Island, to Black-point, north westerly 10 miles.  
From the Bears-Island to the Cape the Uytkijck, north northwest somewhat westerly 28 miles.  
From the Cape the Uytkijck to the south-end of the foreland, north northwest 26 or 27 miles.  
From the Cape the Uytkijck to Horn-zond north northwest 6 miles.  
From Horn-zond to Belzond north westerly and north northwest 7 miles.  
From Belzond to Yce-zond, north westerly 11 miles.  
From the south-end to the north-end of the foreland, north 15 or 16 miles.  
From the north-corner of the foreland to the Danes-Island north-east northerly 9 miles.  
From Magdalene-bay to Robbe-bay, north north-east 2 miles.  
From the Robbe-bay to the South-bay north north-east half a mile.  
From Devils-Island to the Vogel-sang, east north-east a large mile.  
From the Vogel-sang to the Zews-Uyt-kijck, southeast easterly a large mile.  
From the Zews-Uyt-kijck to Moniers-bay, southeast half a mile.  
From Moniers-bay to the Red-bay the course is east southeast 4 miles.  
From the Red-bay to Reenevelt east southeast 5 miles.  
From Reenevelt to the Gray-corner southeast 3 miles  
From Reenevelt to the Moffen-Island, north-east northerly 4 miles.    

The Heights.  
The Bears-Island lieth on four and seventy grades and a half.  
The Cape the Kijck-uyt lieth on six and seventy grades and six and thirty minutes.  
The north-corner of the Foreland lieth on nine and seventy grades twenty minutes.   

Thus appears the land in your sight when ye are on sea.  

Reenevelt. Red-bay.  
Thus appears the Red-bay, when the round hill lieth south from you.  
Thus appears Hoopen-Island, when ye are north-east north and northwest from it.     

The fourth Demonstration, Containing A Description of Orlogenes from the Cape of Candenoes' to the west-coast of Nova Sembla and the Weygat.  
Orlogenoes' and the cape Candenoes' 
Candenoes'.  lieth severally north east and south-west 35 miles. The corner of Candenoes' is well enough known; there stands 5 great crosses up for tokens, which when ye come by, ye can perfectly perceive that the land fails you, on the one side south-west toward the White sea, and on the other side southeast.  
About ten miles easterly from Cabo de Candenoes', there lieth an Island called Morsonowits, 
Morsonowits.  from thence easterly there lieth a great Inham landward in, which is a flat undeep water, withal a deceitful ground. There hath been divers ships who have sailed amiss here, thinking that they had been in the mouth of the Whitesea, therefore it is necessary to learn to distinguish the land, for the Russish coast eastward Candenoes' is very sandy, and a flat shore; and the coast of Lapland is high, and full of mountains. Into this Inham there runs a river from the land, through the which ye can come in boats to the White sea.  
Besides this Inham about twenty mile's east and east southerly from Candenoes', there lieth an Island called Colgoya, 
Colgoya.  which is ten miles in length; ye may sail round about it, but on the southside thereof lieth a craig which comes from the east, that ye must shun, because it joins to the west-end of this Island. There are a great many geese on this Island, which in the summer time are wholly naked having no kind of feathers; they lay their egg under their stump or tail, and on that fashion breeds forth their young ones: there are such multitudes of those geese there, that the Russes comes with their Lodges or boats to land, and takes of them by multitudes, and salts them in tuns.  
From the Candenoes' to the Island Tussara 
Tussara.  the course is east southeast 32 miles, and between both lieth this great ham. On the westside of Tussara lieth the corner of Swelgenoes'. 
Swelgenoes'.  From Tussara to the river of Colcova 
Colcova.  the course is eastward five miles, that is a good river, and some twelve foot deep, there is no other traffic there but that the Russes comes from Colmogro and St. Niclaes' with their lodges to change their wares for rough skins.  
Five miles eastward from the river Colcova lieth the river Pitsana, 
Pitsana.  which is but six foot deep, and is not well known, a little westerly from this lieth a dry bank which ye must shun. Olivier Brunel coming from Nova Sembla sat here on ground.  
Ten miles eastward from Pitsana lieth the river Pitsora, 
Pitsora.  that runs by the east-corner in, south southeast, and is deep six Holland yards: the land there is low and sandy, on the west-corner there stands a Pack-house whereon stands some crosses; when ye come within the river, turn a little westward up toward the Pack-house, and let anchor fall on three or four fathoms water, there is a great pool or lake.  
Ye must shun the east side of the river, for it is full of sand and banks. The town of Pitsora lieth 26 Dutch miles landward in: there is abundance of costly skins and crystal.  
Between Pitsora and Waygats lieth Oltgijn, 
Oltgijn.  and without on the land lieth two rocks or little Islands, the one called Oranjen, and the other Graef Maurits: there ye may lie at anchor on six or seven fathoms. From the southside there comes a sandbed off-falling, where ye have but three fathoms. On the east and westside of these two Islands there is a great Inham, flat water; the land lieth there in the round to the corner of Pitsora, all in one Inham: it is from Pitsora to Waygats north-east easterly 24 miles.  
Waygats, 
Waygats.  which is likewise called the Straight of Nassowen, is a narrow passage through which ye can sail into the Tartarish sea. It lieth first easterly, and then north-east the matter of six or seven miles, about midway there lieth an Island which ye can sail by on both sides. A little within the corner on the north-side is a brave bay, 
Traen-bay.  into the which ye can let anchor fall so deep as ye please, to wit on five, four or three fathoms, good strong ground; toward the east wall ye have the deepest water, and ye lie there safe from all winds or Yee-flouds. It hath been assayed at two several times to find away through this Straight, to sail be-north Tartary to come to the rich Kingdoms of Cathy and China, and from thence to Molucquen; but all in vain, because of the great Ye that lieth there the whole year, and never melts, by reason of the constant cold.  
From the east-end of the Straight Waygats to the Inham of Oby, 
Oby.  the course is east southeast and southeast easterly thirty miles. On the east-side hereof the land lieth north-east thirty miles more, to the two norther rivers, and from thence north-east, but how far, is not as yet known  
The west-coast of Nova Sembla 
Nova Sembla.  lieth from Way-gat northward to Constintzarck, northwest about forty miles. Benorth this falls it north easterly-ward to the corner of Langenesse or the Staten-hoeck (or State's corner) and so forth north north-east, north-east and east north-east to the Islands of Oranje; the northmost part of Nova Sembla lieth on the height of 77 grades and an half.  

Of the Tides and flowing of Streams.  
From the east-side of Candenoes' to the Island of Colgoyen, the stream falls east and east southerly, as likewise along that same Island; From Colgoyen to Waygats falls the stream east and west. Alongs Nova Sembla the streams turns about with the moon. Alongs Rusland they come from between Candenoes' and Pitsora out of the west and west northwest, and so runs alongs Rusland.  
The streams that comes to Waygats comes from Colgoyen and Nova Sembla, and falls with the rest east northerly through the Straight of Waygats to the river Oby, so by this means the flowing and ebbing of the streams keeps the passages of Waygats open, so that they are often without Ice, except boards of Ice that come from other places driving. But on the east-side of Waygats the flood comes from the north-east, and falls in the Oby and Strait of Nassow. The water flows and ebbs there, but keeps no constant course.   

Of the depths and grounds, so well on the east as westside of Way-gat.  
Along the whole coast from Candenoes' to Waygats, it is a flat upgoing ground, most sand and fast ground. If it be misty weather and if ye have eight or nine fathoms water, than ye must know that ye are but three or four miles from the coast: but if ye have 30 or 35 or 40 fathoms, than ye are far enough from land: so is it likewise alongs Nova Sembla, and over the east-side of Waygats, but when ye come into the mouth it grows flatter.   

Of the situation, and how far every land lieth from another.  

From Orlogenes to the Cape Candenoes' the course is north-east 35 miles.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Colgoye, the course is east southerly 20 miles.  
From Candenoes' to Swelgenoes', southeast easterly 22 miles.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Morsonowits, southeast 10 miles.  
From Candenoes' to Tussara, east southeast 32 miles.  
From Tussara to Colcova, east 5 miles.  
From Colcova to Pitsana, east northerly 5 miles.  
From Pitsana to Pitsora, east and east northerly 10 miles.  
From Pitsora to Waygats, the course is about north-east easterly 10 or 12 miles.  
From Catsnoes' to the Islands of Solofky, west a little southerly 28 miles.  
From Catsnoes' to Warsiga, northwest westerly 12 or 13 miles.  
From Catsnoes' to Polongi, northwest northerly 17 miles.  
From the Islands of Solofky to Ombay in Lapland, north 24 or 25 miles.  
From Solofky to Warsia, east north-east 24 miles.  
From Solofky to Polongi, north-east easterly 38 miles.  
From Candenoes' to Costintzarck in Nova Sembla north-east somewhat easterly 46 miles.  
From the east-end of Colgoyen to Waygats, east 45 miles.  
From Pitsora to the east-end of Colgoya, west northwest 32 miles.  
From the Lowland to the Stream-bay east & west 4 miles.  
From the Stream-bay to Yce-havens-corner, east northerly 3 miles.  
From the Yce-havens-corner to the Islands-corner the course is east north-east 5 miles.  
From the Islands-corner to Vlissinger-head, north-east easterly 3 miles.  
From Vlissinger-head to the Head-corner the course is north-east 4 miles.  
From the Head-corner to the corner of Begeerten, (or desire) south and north 6 miles.  
From the corner of Begeerten to the Islands of Oranjen, northwest 8 miles.  
From the Islands of Oranjen to the Yce-corner, west and south-west 5 miles.  
From the Yce-corner to the Cape the Troost (or comfort) west and west southerly 25 miles.  
From the Cape the Troost to the Cape Nassow, west northerly 10 miles.  
From the Cape Nassow to the east-end of the Crosse-Island, west northerly 3 miles.  
From the east-end of Crosse-Island to Wilhelms-Island, west southerly 3 miles.  
From Wilhelms-Island to the Black-corner, west south-west 6 miles.  
From the Black-corner to the East-end of the Admiraliteyts Island, west south-west 7 miles.  
From the East-corner to the West-corner of the Admiraliteyts-Island west south-west 5 miles  
From the West-corner of the Admiraliteyts-Island to the Capo de Plancio south-west westerly 10 miles.  
From the Capo de Plancio to Lomsbay, west south-west 8 miles.  
From Lomsbay to the Staten (or States) corner, west south-west 10 miles.  
From the States-corner to Langenesse, south-west southerly 14 miles.  
From Langenesse to the Capo de Cant south-west southerly 6 miles.  
From the Capo de Cant to the corner of the Black-rock, south westerly 4 miles.  
From the corner of the Black-rock to the Black Island, south southeast 3 miles.  
From the Black Island to Constintzarck, east and west 2 miles.  
From Constintzarck to the Crosse-corner, south southeast 5 miles.  
From the Crosse-corner to St. Laurence-bay, southeast 6 miles.  
From St. Laurence-bay to Meelhaven, south southeast 6 miles.  
From the Meelhaven to the two Islands, south southeast 16 miles.    

The Heights.  

The Cape of Candenoes' lieth on 69 grades 30 minute. I. Colgoya on 69 grades 10 minutes.  
The rivers of Colcova, Pitsana, and Pitsora, lieth on 68 grades 40 minutes.  
Waygats or the Straight of Nassow lieth on 69 grades 43 minutes.  
The North-corner, which lieth most northward of Nova Sembla, lieth on 77 grades 30 minutes.      

The first part THE THIRD BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN IS The Description of the whole EAST-SEA.  
Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famous Seamen, and lovers of Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


Pascaarte vande OOSTZEE Van it Eylandt Rugen. oft Bornholm tot aen Wyborg.  
De Custen van DENEMARCKEN en Sweden van Valsterbon tot Schenckenes, Als meed de Custen van Pomeren vaned Eylant Rugen tot Rygshooft.    

The first part of the New LIGHTNING SEA COLUMN, OR SEA MIRROR. THE THIRD BOOK, Of the EASTERN NAVIGATION Containing The Description of the whole East-Sea.  

The first Demonstration, Where in Are described the Sea-Coastes of Falsterborn to Schenckenes, and from the Island Rugen to Ryghs-head.  
HOw men shall sail about the riff off Fasterborn hat been here before rehearsed. The coast from Fasterborn eastwards lieth most east and east and by north. First from Fasterborn to Elburgh 
Elburgh.  are three leagues. If you will anchor before Elburgh, then bring the Cloister and the Church within a fathom or a fathom and a half near one to the other, and sail so right in unto the town, you may anchor by it in 4, 3 or 2 fathom and a half.  
From Elburgh to Uytstede are 7 or 8 leagues. Betwixt them both about 3 leagues to the eastwards of Elburgh, and 5 leagues to the westwards of Uytstee 
Uytstee.  is a point, off from which lieth a shoal, come no nearer it than 8 or 9 fathom. Uytstee lieth in a bite, and hath a high sharp steeple. If you be bound thither, then bring the steeple north from you, and then sail in right with it towards the strand; there standeth a red tiled house to the eastwards of the bridge, bring that house and the end of the bridge one in the other, and sail in so, and run to the westwards of the bridge, anchor there in 3 fathom, or two foot less, there is clean sandground. When you come from the west, and are past that foresaid shoal than you may boldly run alongst by the shore in 3 fathom & an half, without fear.  
Three leagues to the eastwards of Uytstee lieth a high point called Goessebeer, 
Goesbeer.  from thence to Sandhammer is a league.  
From the point of Goessebeer runneth off a great shoal fare to seawards, and lieth alongst the coast, unto near Sandhammer, you may sound it in six, eight, and ten fathom, as you will. When you run over it in ten fathom, then lieth the north-end of Bruntholm about east & by south from you, and the point of Sandhammer north. Under the Sandhammer 
Sandhamer.  is good anchoring for a west, westsouthwest, westnorthwest, & northwest wind, in five or six fathom. When you come out of the north-east, you may run along by this coast, with a northwest wind, in 7, 8, 9, or 12 fathom, unttill past Goesbeer, for to avoid Bruntholm.  
The point of Goesbeer and the north end of Bruntholm lie northwest and by west and southeast & by east about five leagues asunder, but Uytstee and the foresaid north end off Bruntholm lieth westnorthwest & eastsoutheast 9 leagues asunder.  
For to sail from Falsterborne about to the northwards of Bruntholme you must go on east, so long until that you have the length of Uytstee, than forth east and by north, and then you shall sail yet near enough to the point and shoal of Goesbeer, come no nearer it than seven or eight fathom. But to sail From Fasterborn to the southwards of Brontholm, the course is east and by south somewhat southerly two and twenty or three & twenty leagues, & alongst the south side off Brontholme eastsoutheast.  
The Island Brontholm 
Brontholm.  is clean round about, except on the southeast point, there runneth off a foul riffe, called Brewer's rif, which men must avoid. On the north-east side you may run alongst by it upon your lead, without doing amiss, in 12 or 13 fathom, & alongst the south-west side in 8 or 9 fathom.  
Men may anchor round about Brontholm, 
Roade under Brontholm.  at divers places, as before Rottum, & to the northwards, before the Castle, thwart of Sandwick, Suaux and Nex.  
Before the Village, betwixt Rottum, 
Rottum.  & the castle that standeth upon the northwest point, is good anchoring for an east or north-east wind, in thirteen, fourteen, and fifiteen fathom, but not very clean ground.  
Thwart of the Castle it is good lying for an eastnortheast, east, & eastsoutheast wind in 18 & 20 & also 14 & 15 fathom, sand ground, but nearer the shore the ground is not  clean, the nearer to the shore the fouler ground.  
Under the northwest point before Sandwick 
Sandwick  there is good anchoring for south-west winds, and you may come near unto that point. From the northwest point to the other point the shore lieth eastsoutheast and westnorthwest.  
On the east side is good anchoring before Suaux and Nex: but before Nex it is not very clean. By Nex 
Nex.  runneth off a little riffe from the shore, which is steep on both sides: but if you come no nearer it than in ten fathom, you can take no hurt of it: to the northwards of Nex lieth also a great rock. He that will anchor before Nex, let him anchor so that the flat steeple which standeth above Nex, do stand betwixt the w. & w. & by s. from him, and that the north point be north and by west, and the south point be southsouthwest from him, there it is two and twenty fathom deep, and clean sandground. At many other places it is otherwise stony & rough ground, with south-west & west winds you have there a weather shore.  
The Eertholmes lie from the north-end off Bruntholm east and by north & west & by south three leagues asunder, and from the southeast end south and north five leagues. In the Eertholms is a little Haven, but by reason that is not used it is unknown.  
Betwixt the north point of Bruntholm 
Shoal by Bruntholm.  & the point of Sandhammer, but nearest to Bruntholm lieth a shoal of six fathom, where sometimes Fishermen do lie to fish it is not very great, but hard stony ground.  
From Sandhammer the coast lieth northnortheast & north & by east two leagues to Somerhaven, this is a round bay, within it is very good anchor ground. From thence the coast lieth about north 6 leagues unto Ahuys. From the north point of Brontholm to Ahuys, the course is north somewhat westerly about 13 or 14 leagues. But to Hanno north, and by east 13 or 14 leagues.  
Ahuys lieth upon a river, where sometimes is before the town 10, or 11, and sometimes also no more than 4 or 5 foot water, according as the water cometh off out of the land, upon it is a great fishing, where in the summer time are great store of good Else taken. To the eastwards of the mouth of the River runneth off a stony flat from the shore, and to the southwards of the river a foul stony riffe, right off from the shore alongst by the foresaid flat, so that there lieth in a channel betwixt the foresaid flat, and riffe, which is called the Eastergat.  
Through this foresaid riffe lieth in a channel until into the Eastergat, on against the slatte, which is called the Southergat. If you will sail into this southergat, coming from the southwards, then run to the west shore to the southwards of Ahuys, until you come in 5 or 6 fathom, and then you shall see upon the north shore, north and by west or somewhat more westerly from you, a cape or beacon standing a little from the strand within the land, of fashion like a mill without wings: Bring this beacon to the west side of the high Hill, which lieth somewhat further into the Land, to wit, even in the going off the highest of the hill, keep these marks so standing, and sail in right with them, until that Ahuys cometh over that tree, which standeth there at the north end of the wood; or that the white Countrie-church come to the northwards of the little houses of Ahuys, then go on northwest, or bring that foresaid white-countrie-church in a little valley, a little to the northwards of an old ruined castle, where of there standeth yet some of the walls upon the north side of the River, and sail so on, until that Ahuys come to stand in the midst of the River, anchor there in two fathom and an half, or three fathom, there is the road there can go no sea. In this southergatt it is two fathom, two fathom and an half, and sometimes also at least 3 fathom deep.  
For to sail into the Eastergat, 
Eastergat Ahuys.  coming from the southwards keep in six or seven fathom, and run so to the north shore, and then you run alongst without the riffe, that lieth off by south the river's mouth from the west shore until that Ahuys do stand right west from you, than there cometh a great tree to the wood, that standeth upon the west shore, keep that so standing and run in right with it, until that foresaid countrie-church come to that aforesaid old piece of wall, of the old ruinous castle, and then right in, as hath been before said. Or run in by the first marks, until within a shot of a cast piece near to the west shore, & then edge up to the north shore, until that Ahuys come in the midst of the River, and anchor there, as hath been said.  
Hanno 
Hanno.  is a high round Island, which men may sail round about, under it is good road for south and southeast winds.  
Behind Hanno runneth up a little River to Self-brough, but serveth only for small ships or Crayers, which go not deep.  
From Ahuys to the Rocks the course is east and by south twelve or thirteen leagues, betwixt them both lie divers little towns, as Fleholme and Rottenbuy, 
Fleholm Rottenbuy.  where men may anchor before, in six, seven, and eight fathom good anchor ground: And other Havens more, but little or nothing known by Hollanders. Thwart of Rottenbuye lieth a little Rock somewhat off from the land, called Malqueren, under which men may also ride.  
From the north point of Bruntholm to the Rocks the course is north-east somewhat northerly sixteen leagues, but from the point of Sandhammer eastnortheast sixteen leagues. If you run alongst close by the north point of Bruntholm, you shall run with a north way, alongst even without the Rocks: But if you run alongst close by the point of Sandhammer, and will sail from thence to the Rocks, you shall with a north-east & by east way fall with the Land even within them, or to the Westwards of them.  
The Rocks 
The rocks  are some little rocks together, which men may sail round about, but can have no Road under them; they lie 3 or 4 leagues distant from the main land, & are smaller than the Eartholms.  
A leagues or two to the northwards of them lieth the Vrouwen of Green Island, by some called the Rough-Island, and also the Outlyers: It is not so brooken in itself as the Rocks, and also much greater, off to seawards from it, lie some rocks, to the westwards of it, it is all full of rocks, some above and some under water alongst even fast to the Land, you may sail about within the Greene-Island betwixt it and the rocks, but no man can do it, but he must be very well acquainted there, and then also not without great danger. To the s. wards of it you may also find Road at some places but you must be very well acquainted, & also not without danger, by reason of the multitude of sunken rocks and sharp grounds. The east side of of the Outlyers lie from the rocks north-east and by north. The south end of Oeland 
Oeland.  is a sharp point, and lieth from the rocks east & west about ten leagues distant. Thwart of it, betwixt the main land and the aforesaid south point of Oeland, it is about four leagues broad, betwixt them both goeth in the Calmer-sound.  
For to sail up into the Calmer sound, then go on from the rocks, or from the Outlyers' north-east, and by east and then you run in betwixt Oeland & the main land, upon 14 fathom and sail then northnortheast betwixt them both, a midst the channel, both the shores are very foul: but if you come not nearer them than in 7 fathom, you can take no hurt there.  
From the Rocks to Calmer are sixteen leagues: About half ways betwixt them, northwest from Southerorden the southermost point of Oeland lieth the town of Christianopell, 
Christianopel.  lately built there upon a little Island by the King's Majesty of Denmark, and so called after his name. Thwart of it was wont to lie upon the main land a little town called Overschare, 
Overschare.  now it is one with Christianopel, thwart of it lieth a ledge of rocks about a great English mile off from the shore southeast into the sea, come no nearer it than in ten fathom.  
At Christianopel is a haven on the east side, from it lieth off a riffe towards the eastnortheast into sea; therefore he that will sail in there must come in from the northwards for to avoid this riffe.  
To the northwards of Christianopel towards Calmer, it is on both sides (as well on the side of the main land, as on the side of Oeland) all full of rocks and foul grounds, but you may sound both the shores: in the midst betwixt both in the farewaye, it is ten and twelve fathom deep, all soft clay ground, to the southwards of Christianopel it is deeper, but to the northwards of Calmer it is by little and little shoaler.  
Two leagues to the northwards of Christianopell lieth Bercker haven, 
Berckerhaven.  there men do lad oaken beams, there within it is good lying, but very bad for to come in or out, because of the multitude of sunken rocks, and other foul grounds, which lie before it, about a half league off from the shore to seawards.  
About a league to the northwards of Berckerhaven lieth Hosmes ground, 
Hosmes ground.  which is a very bad foul ground, lying somewhat farther off from the shore to sea-wards, than the other rocks which lie alongst the shore, thereof you must take heed.  
About a league to the southwards of Calmer, & two leagues to the northwards of Hosmes ground, lieth a point called Steensoe, 
Steensoe.  which is a somewhat high rough and very foul point, a half league long, lying within, a half league near to the town, to the westwards of it runneth in a great bite, where is good lying also for many ships, but you cannot come in there, because of the many foul grounds and dangers, except it be with a very skilful Pilot: upon the west side, over against the point standeth a white house. The King of Denmark's fleet of ships lay there, in the time of the last siege of Calmer.  
When you come so fare in, that you lose the south end of Oeland out of your sight, than you get the Castle of Calmer 
Castle of Calmer.  in sight, sail towards it but shun the shores, as hath been said here before. The Castle hath four great towers, when the two eastermost of the four come one in the other, then is the Castle about northwest from you, than you come by the Grimschaer, 
Grimschaer  this is a rock easy to be known, upon it standeth a mast, with a Barrel upon the top of it, which lieth much nearer the west shore than Oeland, when you get it in sight, then sail towards it. Thwart of the Grimschaer or Tonholm lieth a sunken rock, about a cables length off from it, and a little more to the eastwards, upon it is no more than five foot water.  
The farewaye is through, betwixt this sunken rock & the Grimschaer about north-east and by north, sail close alongst by the Grimschaer, leaving it on the larboard side, and then the foresaid sunken Rock remaineth on the starboard side of you.  
Being a little past the foresaid sunken Rock, & Grimschaer, you come then on against the west end of a long small rock, which lieth far to the eastwards, towards Oeland, and lieth almost even with the water, at some places a little above water, and at some places the Sea runneth alongst over it, edge then a little up to the northwards, and run about by the point of that rock; Being past that, you shall meet on the larboard side a low rock, from the which there shooteth off a little tail to the northwards, upon it standeth a little beacon, sail alongst by it, and being a little past it, then shall the town lie westsouthwest from you, let your anchor fall there in five or six fathom, there is the right road. If you come to anchor somewhat northerly in the road, you must be careful to take heed of a sunken rock which lieth not more than eleven or twelve foot under water.  
The Marks of this sunken rock 
Sunken rock.  are these: When the mills upon the Mulholm are one in the other, with the mill which standeth on the north side without the town, than you are thwart off the foresaid sunken rock; On both sides of it, as well to the northwards as the southwards of it, it is deep enough. It is good lying there, almost with all winds, but a north and by east wind is the worst, which bloweth there open in. With ships that go not deeper than six or seven foot, men may come to lie at the bridge before the town.  
You may also sail to the westwards of the Grimschaer: that is, through betwixt the Grimschaer and the land, with ships that go not deep, but he that shall do it, must be very well acquainted there, for there it is all full of Rocks, some above and some under water.  
From the south end of Oeland, called Southerorden, 
The riff of southerorden.  lieth off a great dangerous riffe a league and an half into sea, there it is seven and eight fathom deep, when the Chapel upon Southerorden is northwest a great league from you, there it is ten and eleven fathom deep; you may sound about this riffe in eight or nine fathom, but it is not good to come nearer it, when you can do otherwise, and can pass it.  
A half league to the northwards of the Town Calmer, to wit, a little to the northwards of the road, lieth an Island, called Skalloe, 
Skalloe.  which you must leave on the starboard side, when you are bound from Calmer to the northwards: It is indifferent clean upon the west side, but from the Sweeds side there over against it runneth off a stone riff, almost unto the Island. Upon this riffe standeth commonly a stone-beacon: it is dangerous to sail through there, or over that shoal, for one that is not there very well acquainted: It is also Pilots water.  
Four leagues to the northwards of the Calmer, on the Sweeds side, lieth an out-poynt, called Schenknes, or Skegnesse, 
Skegenes.  thwart of it lieth a small Island, called the Baker, 
The Baker  betwixt this point and Skallo it is very uneven of depths.  
The east coast of Oeland is a clean coast, & lieth northnortheast, & southsouthwest.  

Off the Island Rughen.  
To the westwards of the Island Rugen men do sail up into the Jelle unto Straelsound. For to sail from Straelsound out alongst the Jelle, 
For to sail out at the Jelle.  go on north, and north, and by west, there lieth a Middleground, sometimes there standeth a beacon upon it, and sometimes not, leave that on the larboard side, being past that, sail to the point where the wood standeth upon, so that the town come behind the wood, you shall then see a very high tree, bring that over the flattest steeple, and keep it so a while standing, going on still north, and north and by west unto the beacon the Jelle. When as you luffe up about by it west, then look out for two trees, which stand upon the east shore, somewhat within the land, bring them a ships length without the highest tree, which standeth upon the shore, & luffe up about the beacon, towards the buy. In the mouth of the deep lie three buys, which in sailing out you must leave all on the larboard side, but in sailing in all on the starboard side. It is not deeper in the mouth of the Deep then six & seven foot, and also without, it is fare of shoal water.  
The Island Rugen hath four points that lie out, under which men may ride at divers places, as Doornbosh, Whitmond, Jasmond and the Peert.  
The point of Doornbosh 
Dornbosch.  lieth from the Jelle north distant two leagues, it is high land with a steep point, men may ride under it for north-east, east, and southeast winds. If you will anchor there, then anchor in three, four, or five fathom, so that the steep point stand northnortheast from you, or that the Church stand over the point, or anchor where about that it shall please you, or shall be best convenient, it is there all over shallow water and clean sandground.  
From Dornbosch to Brontholm, the course is east north-east seventeen or eighteen leagues, but Dornbosch and Fasterbornes Riffe lie northnorthwest and southsoutheast, fourteen leagues asunder.  
From Dornbosch to Whitmont, the course is north-east & by east four leagues. Betwixt them both goeth in a great Bay, where you may run in alongst by Whitmondt, and have road there in five or six fathom, for south-west, south, & also for an east wind.  
If you will seek road under Whitmondt 
Roade under Whitmont  for westerly winds, and run about by the point coming from the westwards, then come not nearer the point, than seven or eight fathom, there shooteth off an uneven shoal, which you must avoid, being come about the point, anchor there in twelve, thirteen, or fourteen fathom, that is about a league from the shore, nearer to the shore in seven, eight or ten fathom, the ground is not clean, in twelve fathom you have gross sand, in thirteen or fourteen fathom soft ground, so that with hard winds you should need to show your anchor, you lie there also landlockt for a west and south wind.  
jasmond 
Roade under jasmondt.  lieth from Witmond eastsoutheast distant three leagues.  
If you will anchor under jasmond, for a west or westnorthwest wind, then sail so far about the point, that it come to be northnorthwest, or somewhat more northerly from you, when you come about the point, you shall see in the south-west or somewhat more westerly from you, a little thick wood of trees, upon a plain hill, and on each side of that little wood, a little sharp steeple, and also a great tree, like as if it were a mill without wings, when that tree cometh to be south-west and by west from you, anchor there in 9 or 10 fathom, there is indifferent ground, according as the ground is there, by the point of the land, it is about 13 fathom deep.  
Or bring the north point northwest, and the other point south-west and by south from you, and anchor there in ten or eleven fathom, there it is good soft ground, but it lasteth not long, so soon as you find the soft ground you must let fall your anchor, for the ground is there at many places not clean, or you must sail fare about both the points, there you lie landlockt for a northwest and north wind, in ten, eleven or twelve fathom, good soft ground.  
The Peert, 
The Peert  which men do also call the great Buck upon jasmond, is a tough of trees or two, and is a point that lieth out with two points, where is betwixt them both a fair Sand-bay, where in is good lying in four or five fathom clean ground.  
Jasmond and the Peert lie southsoutheast and northnorthwest distant four or five leagues.  
To the southwards of the Peert goeth in that Newdeep, where men do sail through to Statyn.  
THE NEWDEEPE.  
About a league south, somewhat westerly from the Peert lieth a point, called the Ironhead, there lieth off a little riffe, therefore you must run alongst somewhat without that point, and being a little past that point, you can see the outermost buy of the Newdeep, 
For to sail into the New deep  wherein lie two buys in the midst of the deep, so that you may sail alongst on both sides of the buys, but with ships of great draughts, you must run close along to the e. wards of the buys, there is the very deepest of the channel. By the outermost buy it is at the shoalest, there is the bar, commonly there is 11 foot water, or a little more than 11 foot and a half, and sometimes also well 12 foot, but in the midst of the Mouth of the deep it is commonly still 12 foot, and sometimes more.  
Upon the Peert lie three high hommocks, the westermost of them is the greatest, one great round hommock, when you keep that right without the Iron head, and then run on southsouthwest when you cannot sail amiss, although there were no buys in the mouth of the Deep.  
When you come over the Bar, you shall find again 4 or 5 fathom depth, being a little over it, you must go on southeast unto the entrance of the Peen, with that course you leave the Island of the Roeden 
The Roeden.  lying at least two cables lengths on the larboard side. It is there all over good anchoring. Right over against Grijpswald lieth a little Island called stobber round about which you may almost sail something more easterly than Grijpswald lieth a little riffe thwart from the shore.  

Roade under the Roeden.  If you will sail into the Peen you shall espy (sailing thus right out a head at the east side of the Peen, two points, keep the eastermost a handspikes length without the westermost (for to avoid a stony shoal, which runneth off from the west point of the Peen) until that you come before the Peen. Upon the east shore stand 2 beakons, bring them one in the other, & run so into the Peen, which lieth in first s. w. but in the coming in, there, is no more than 6 foot, or 6 foot & an half water.  
If you will anchor under the Island the Roeden, you must be mindful of a little riffe that lieth of from the Roeden to the s. wards, towards the main land, anchor there, either to the westwards or to the eastwards of it, accordings as the wind shall be, in 3 fathom, or 2 fathom and a half, so shoal or deep, as you please, there is the common road for the ships.  
The Rough Island 
Rough Island.  lieth from the Roeden north-east and by east distant about two great leagues.  
About eastnortheast from the Roeden 
For to sail out to the eastwards of the Roeden.  lieth also a channel into the Sea, a little to the southwards of the Rough Island, that is good for to run out with westerly winds, when you cannot come out at the New deep, and also for those that are bound to Dansk, or to the eastwards. From the Rough Island lieth off a little riffe to the southwards, which you must avoid, and run through betwixt that and the shoal which runneth from the shore, thwart off it is the bar or shoalest off this channel not less than eleven or twelve foot water, that is a short out let, being over you shall get presently deeper water. This channel is Pilots water. Upon the Island the Roeden dwell Pilots, which do bring out ships. The Coast of Pomeren lieth from the New deep to Colbergen east and west about sixteen or seventeen leagues.  
Betwixt them both lie yet two channels, the Swinne, and the channel of Camin. The Swim 
Swim.  lieth seven leagues eastwards from the Newdeepe, which runneth through a little River into the Haff or broad water, right over against the river of Stetyn. Camin 
Camin.  lieth five leagues to the eastwards of the Swim, upon the east end of the Haff or broad water of Stetyn: that channel goeth through also with a river into the Haff.  
Five leagues without the land, when Jasmond is westnorthwest, or thereabout, the Peert westsouthwest, and Rough Island south from you, there lieth a bank 
Bank.  of seven fathom, upon one place somewhat less, and upon another somewhat more, betwixt it and the land towards Jasmond it is again thirteen, fourteen and fifteen fathom deep, but to the eastwards of the Newdeepe, alongst by the coast of Pomeren, it is all shoal water, off four, five, six and seven fathom, so fare into the Sea, that when you can but even see the land of the Swim, there it is not deeper than seven or eight fathom, without sight of the land it is twelve & thirteen fathom deep.  
The Haven of Colbergen 
Colbergen.  you must sail into between two heads, until you come before the Town. Within in the river, right over against the town, lieth a Well or Brook which can give all the country thereabout Salt, off water which they seethe, and yet the water of the river is fresh as Milk, for it is a little water that cometh out of the land. The coast of Pomerland lieth from Colbergen to Gashead north-east & by east & south-west and by west about 13 leagues, betwixt them both lie two havens more, to wit, Coflyn and Ruwolde.  
The haven of Coflyn lieth from Colbergen eastnortheast 3 leagues distant. And from Coflyn to Ruwold, 
Coflyn. Ruwolde  the course is north-east and by east five leagues. Into the haven of Ruwold, or the little river, called the Wipper, an indifferent ship may go in. It is from Ruwolde to Gashead north-east & by east four leagues.  
The land lieth from Garshead to the Rosehead east and east and by north 20 or 21 leagues, betwixt them lie the havens off Stolp, 
The Stolp  Liba, and Sernevis.  
A little to the eastwards of Garshead lieth the haven off the Stolp, which is a river so called as the town, which runneth up to the same town, only for small ships, although that theredoe indifferent great ships lad.  
From Garshead unto Reefcoll it is all a white Strand, and lieth eastnortheast from it four leagues. Reefcoll is a high round hill very easy to be known, when you come off from Brontholm. From Reefcoll to Liba 
Liba.  it is seven leagues.  
Liba lieth upon a great river, called the Osse. From Liba to Sernevis 
Sernevis  are five leagues, betwixt them lie the three Woolsacks, which are three black tuffes of trees, where by this land is very easy to be known, a little to the eastwards of these three little Hommocks lieth a long hill which doth show itself (when you come out of the west) on the west end divided into three or four little hommocks. Seven or eight leagues to the eastwards of the Woolsacks followeth the high land of Rose-head, which is very steep upon the water side. Betwixt the Rose-head and Reefcoll it is all white strand, and most of the land grown with trees.  
Servenis 
Sernevis  is a little town lying upon a little off water which with a little river runneth into the Sea, but within, it doth spread itself into a great river. It is from Sernevis to the Rose-head 4 leagues.  
You may sound about the Rose-head in 15 and 20 fathom, and also you may well anchor under the Rose-head, there is better ground then under the Heel. All the strand off Pomer-land is alongst the Sea side above all black with trees.   

Of the Dephts.  
In the fareway to the northwards off Brontholm alongst to Rye, it is deep betwixt Oeland and Brontholm five and thirty, six and thirty, and eight and thirty fathom, but coming against Oeland, so that the south end come to be northwest and by north, northwest, and northwest, and by west five or six leagues from you, there you shall find very uneven grounds. Southeast five or six leagues from Southerorden, are grounds of nine, ten, twelve and sixteen fathom, in the nine & ten fathom soft ground, that there remaineth nothing upon the lead, but in the fourteen or fifteen fathom, it is gross red and black stony sand ground, almost like jet. Nearer again to Oeland it is agine deeper water and farther from the land it is also deeper, but all uneven ground; the south end of Oeland, being about northnorthwest from you eight leagues, there it is again sometimes twenty, fourteen and also well ten and nine fathom in the shoalest deep, all stony ground, that there remaineth nothing upon the lead, but in twenty and five and twenty fathom gross red and black stony sand. He that saileth with a northerly wind over these foresaid shoals, of ten, eleven and twelve fathom, and is bound to Brontholm, let him go on westsouthwest, for to sail clear of Brontholm, if he reckon to come against it by night: the Bleecksche side he may boldly run to by the lead in seventeen and eighteen fathom. The point of Sandhammer runneth far off flat, at hath been said here before, you may run about by it in seven and eight fathom.  
Betwixt the Rocks and Oeland, in the farewaye to Gotland it is eight and thirty, and nine and thirty fathom deep, easy clay ground.  
When Southerorden is northnorthwest, somewhat northerly a league from you, there it is thirteen fathom deep.  
When the little chapel upon Southerorden is westnorthwest from you two leagues, there it is thirty fathom deep.  
When Southerorden lieth west two great leagues from you, there it is seven and twenty, eight and twenty, & nine and twenty fathom deep.  
Betwixt Fasterborne and Brontholme it is thirty, & five and thirty fathom deep, in the farewaye, but when you begin to come near Fasterborne, there it is shoaler water of fourteen, fifteen and sixteen fathom.  
When you (coming from the west) sail alongst by the south side of Brontholm eastsoutheast about a league without the land, and that the east end of Brontholm is east somewhat southerly about two leagues from you, there it is deep seven or eight fathom gross pale sand, that lasteth until that the foresaid east end be east and east and by north about a league and a half from you, all in one depth, but when it cometh to be eastnortheast from you, it is fifteen fathom deep, small blackish sandground.  
Four or five leagues from Brontholme, when the east end (from which Brewers-riffe runneth off) is about eastnortheast or north-east and by east, & the north end about north, or north and by east from you, there lieth a bank off seven, eight or nine fathom, and lieth northwest and southeast more than a great league long, the southermost end lieth about south-west from the east end of Brontholme. He that meeteth with this bank by night, may make some guessing thereby, for to direct his course thereafter, whether he be bound eastwards towards Reefcoll, or towards Fasterborne.  
About two leagues eastsoutheast from the aforesaid east end of Brontholme (to wit the low sand point) where Brewers-riffe lieth off, there it is four and twenty and five and twenty fathom deep, stony ground.  
About four leagues east, somewhat northerly, or east and by north from Meun, lieth a bank off eleven and twelve fathom, which lasteth from thence with a northwest and by west course, until that Meun come to be westsouthwest, or south-west & by west from you, than it is again eighteen, nineteen and twenty fathom deep, soft ground.  
Fasterborne shall then be northnorthwest and Steden westnorthwest from you, going on with that same northwest and by west course, you shall then get by little and little shoaler water, to wit, sixteen and fifteen fathom, and close by Steden fourteen, thirteen, and twelve fathom. He that cometh from Witmondt or Jasmondt towards the Sound, & runneth alongst four leagues without Meun, runneth alongst over this foresaid bank, he that findeth himself by night upon it, hath a good mark for to make his reckoning there after.  
Betwixt Brontholm and the coast Pomerland, in the fareway, when you can see Brontholm, it is 26 fathom deep, but so fare to the southwards that you can see the coast of Pomerland, there it is 7 and 8 fathom deep, but without sight of the land 12 and 13 fathom deep. Alongst all the coast of Pomerland betwixt the Newdeepe and Rose-head, it is alongst by the coast 22 and 20 and also well 25 fathom deep.  
Betwixt Colbergen and Garshead it is all a flat even strand and ground, without any banks. In the fareway betwixt Bruntholm and Reefcoll, it is seven and twenty and eight and twenty fathom deep, but fare to the northwards of it is at least five and thirty and eight and thirty fathom deep.  
Northwest from Reefcoll four or five leagues from the land, lieth a bank of nine, ten, and eleven fathom, when you come from Bruntholm, and Reefcoll cometh to be southeast and by east from you, than you come against this bank, and endeth when Reefcoll is south and by east from you.  
From this foresaid bank towards Bruntholm, it is five and twenty, thirty, and six and thirty fathom deep, soft clay ground, but towards Reefcoll it is shoaler.  
If you cast the lead often, sailing alongst that coast, you shall find more banks.  
You may boldly sail alongst this coast by night, or dark weather in eight, ten or twelve fathom off from Reefcoll until about the Rosehead. Thwart of the Rose-head it is fare flat, and round as riffe ground. When you come past or about Rosehead it is very deep.  
When the Rose-head is southsouthwest from you about a league, there it is thirty fathom deep, but very uneven and full of banks, and the ground white gross sand.  
Rose-head being southeast from you, it is eight and twenty fathom deep, with red stony ground, almost like as if it were riffe sand.  
Rose-head being west from you, there it is sixteen fathom deep, and white sandground.   

Courses and Distances.  

From the point of Sandthamer to Somerhaven, the course is northnortheast, and north and by east 2 leag.  
From Somerhaven to Ahuys north 6 leagues.  
From Ahuys to Hanno east 6 leagues.  
From Hanno to the Rocks, the course is east and by south, 8 leagues.  
From the Rocks to the Outlyers' north & by east 1 leag.  
From the Outlyers to Cristianopell north-east and by east 7 leagues.  
From the Rocks to Calmer first north-east and by east, and then northnortheast 16 leagues.  
From Calmer to Scheggenes northnortheast 4 leagues.  
From the Rocks to Southerorden, the south end of Oeland east 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Sandhamer to the Rocks eastnortheast, somewhat easterly 16 or 17 leagues.  
From the north point of Brontholm to Ahuys north and by west, somewhat northerly 14 leagues.  
From the north point off Brontholm to Hanno north & by east 14 leagues.  
From the north point of Brontholm to the Rock north-east somewhat northerly 16 leagues.  
From the north point off Brontholm to Southerorden north-east and by east a little easterly 23 or 24 leag.  
From the south end or east end off Brontholm to the Rocks northnortheast 19 leagues.  
From the east end of Brontholm to Southerorden north-east 24 leagues.  
From Southerorden to Reefcoll south and by east 22 leagues.  
From Southerorden to Rosehead southeast 28 leagues.  
From Southerorden to Quinsbrough-Deepe southeast and by east 48 leagues.  
From Southerorden to Dermemell e. & by s. 48 leag.  
From Southerorden to Sevenberghen east 48 leagues.  
From Southerorden to Derwinda east and by north and eastnortheast. 60 leagues.  
From Southerorden to the south end of Gotland eastnortheast and north-east and by east 23 or 24 leagues.  
From Southerorden to the Great Karell north-east somewhat northerly 27 leagues.  
From Fasterborne to Elburgh east and by north and east 3 leagues.  
From Elburgh to Wtstee east 10 leagues.  
From Wtstee to Goesbeer eastnortheast 3 leagues.  
From Goesbeer to Sandhamer north-east 3 leagues.  
From Fasterborn, or from the riffe to Brontholm east and east and by south 20 leagues.  
From Fasterborn to the northwards of Brontholm east and by south 20 leagues.  
But to the southwards of Brontholm east & by south somewhat southerly 23 leagues.  
From Wtstee to the north point off Brontholm eastsoutheast 9 leagues.  
From Meun to Brontholm east and east and by north 21 leagues.  
From Steden to the north ends of Brontholm east 24 leagues.  
From Fasterborn to Whitmond southeast 15 or 16 leag.  
From Fasterborn to Dornbosh southsoutheast 14 or 15 leagues.  
From Meun to Whitmont southeast & by south 11 or 12 leagues.  
From Meun to Dornebosh southeast 9 leagues.  
From the Jell to the point of Dornbosh north 2 leag.  
From Dornbosh to Whitmont, the course is north-east & by east4 leagues.  
From Whitmont to Jasmont eastsoutheast 3 leag.  
From Jasmont to the Peert southsoutheast 4 or 5 leag.  
From Dornbosh to the north end of Brontholme north-east and by east 19 leagues.  
From Whitmont to the north end of Brontholm north-east and by east 15 leagues.  
To the south end east and by north and eastnortheast 15 leagues.  
From Jasmond to the south end of Brontholm north-east and by east 13 leagues.  
From the Peert to the south end of Brontholm northnortheast 14 leagues.  
From Jasmond to Comyn eastsoutheast somewhat southerly 7 leagues.  
From the Newdeepe to Colbergen, the course is east & east and by south 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Comyn to Colbergen eastnortheast 6 leagues.  
From Colbergen to Coslyn eastnortheast 3 leagues.  
From Coslyn to Ruwolde north-east and by east 5 leag.  
From Ruwolde to Garshead north-east & by east 4 leag.  
From Garshead to Reefcoll eastnortheast 4 leagues.  
From Reefcoll to Lyba east and by north 7 leagues.  
From Lyba to Sernevis east and by north 5 leagues.  
From Sernevis to the Rose-head, the course is east & east and by north 4 leagues.  
From Colberghen to Garshead north-east and by east 12 leagues.  
From Reefcol to Rose-head, the course is east and east & by north 17 leagues.  
From the south end off Bruntholm to the Swim, south somewhat westerly 15 leagues.  
From the south end of Bruntholm to Colbergen southeast and by south 16 leagues.  
From the south end of Bruntholm to Reefcoll, the course is east and by south 24 leagues.  
From the south end of Bruntholm to the Eartholms north 4 great leagues.  
From the north end of Bruntholm, or from the Eartholms to Rose-head, the course is east, and east and by south 40 leagues.    

How most off all the chiefest points and places off the East sea do lie distant from Brontholm.  

From Bruntholm to Der memel east, 64 or 65 leagues.  
From Bruntholm to Der Lyba east and by north somewhat northerly 67 or 68 leagues.  
From Bruntholm to Derwinda eastnortheast 80 leagues.  
From Bruntholm to Houbrough, or the south end of Gotteland north-east and by east 50 leagues.  
From the north end of Bruntholm to Southerorden, the south end of Oeland north-east & by east somewhat easterly 24 leagues.  
From the south end off Bruntholm to Southerorden north-east, somewhat northerly 24 leagues.  
From the north point of Bruntholm to the Rocks or out rocks north-east somewhat northerly 16 leagues.  
From the north point of Bruntholm to Hanno, the course is north, & by east 13 or 14 leagues.  
From the north end of Brontholm to Sandhamer northwest 6 or 7 leagues.  
From the north end of Bruntholm to the point off Goesbeer northwest & by west 5 leagues.  
From the north point of Bruntholm to Wtstede westnorthwest 9 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Brontholme showeth itself thus, when you come from the west.  
The south end of Oeland showeth thus, when it is thwart off from you.  
The Eartholms, being northnortheast from you, show themselves thus.  
The Eartholms, being east from you, show themselves thus.  
In this form ariseth the Eartholms, being north from you.  
Thus showeth Whitmont, when you sail alongst by it, being three leagues off from it.  
Thus showeth Jasmond, when you sail alongst by it, being three leagues from the land.  
Whitmont. Here under is a great bay a league long. Dornebosch.  
Thus show themselves Whitmont and Dornebosch, with the land betwixt them both, when it is about southsouthwest from you, so fare that you may but even see it from below.  
The Rose-head. Woolsackes. Reefcol.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Reefcoll and the Rose-head, when you sail alongst by it three leagues without the land.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Colbergen and the Stolp, when you sail alongst by it about 2 leagues without the land.     

The second Demonstration, Where in The Sea-Coastes between Rygs-head and Der Winda are set forth.  
FRom the Rose-head to the Heel, the course is southeast eight or nine leagues distant. When you come near the Heel, you are almost ground off in thirty fathom. On the coast of the he'll close by the land, it is four and twenty and also thirty fathom deep.  
Under the Heel 
Roade under the Heel.  you may anchor in twelve; and twenty fathom close by the land, the ground there goeth off very much. If you be a little off from the land, than you are ground off, not very fare without the land you have no ground in forty fathom. A league to the northwards off the he'll there runneth of a flat from the land, where you must take heed, when you will go to anchor under the Heel, you may anchor on both sides of the Heel, but on the innerside it is soft ground.  
From the Heel to Dansk before the Wissell, the course is south and by west 5 leagues. If you will anchor before the Wissell, than anchor to the westwards of the Chests, or the Westerhead in ten or twelve fathom.  
But for to sail into the Wissell, or the Dansk Deep 
Dansk Deep.  you must look for out the two masts with barrels upon them, which standeth upon the Chests, or the Westerhead, bring one in the other, and sail in right with them, in betwixt the Chests, but when you are within Termunde, you must choose the easter shore, for the West shore is flat, when you come before Boatsams' flat, you must choose the side off the Green-shoare, and make there fast with four hawsers or cables.  
The Quinsbrough deep 
Quinsbrough deep.  lieth from the Wissell, or the Chests of Dansk east and by north thirteen or fourteen leagues. From the Rose-head east southeast southerly 19 or 20 leagues, and from the Heel eastsoutheast easterly 12 leagues.  
From the Wissell to the Quinsbrough-deep & all alongst to the northwards of it, it is altogether a fair white sandy strand, upon both sides off the deep stand some withered trees, to see to as if they were burnt, but upon the south side stand two Capes, or beakons. If you will sail in there, bring the capes one in the other, when you come in 10 or 8, fathom, and sail in so right with them, and so you shall run right with the buys, which lie on both sides of the Deep to 8 or 10 in number, to wit, on each side four or five, sail in betwixt them, until you come within in the Kettell. There is no certainty to be written of the lying in of this channel, as also of the the Dansk deep, whereunto men might trust, for by reason of the scouring of the Freshuts, and with great streaming of the Ice, they do change oftentimes, and sometimes in short time, but the Lords of the land there have very great care to give charge, that they be always well set with buys and beakons.  
For to anchor in the road without the deep, than anchor so that the point of Locksteed lie about north and by east from you, there it is eight, nine and ten fathom deep.  
Within the Deep in the Kettell, men do lie to tarry for the wind in three fathom and three fathom and a half.  
For to sail up the Haff go out of the Kettel about e. until you come against the Heert, and southeast over it and then alongst the Haff amidst the channel unto the Haverstrome, the course is most east. Being over the Heert edge somewhat to the south shore for to avoid that riff which lieth off from the north shore about a third part into the Haffe, to wit; from the point by east Fishouses there lieth a little buy upon it, and come no nearer it than twelve or thirteen foot. The right fareway is to the southwards of it fourteen and fifteen foot soft ground, until about Brandenburg, from thence further it is by little and little shoaler twelve, eleven and ten foot upon the Haverstraw. When you get the steeple of Quinsbrough in sight, than you shall see also by it a round black little wood; keep the steeple on the north or east side off that little wood, until that you be past Brandenburg, then let the steeple come a ships length to the eastwards of the little wood of trees, & sail so right with it, till you come by the buys or little trees of the Haverstraw, there you must run through amidst the channel betwixt them, until you come into the Pregell which lieth up north-east unto the town.  
From der Pillo to Quinsbrough are about eight leagues, but to Melven 
Melven.  it is about 9 leagues, you must also sail up there amidst the channel about south-west, but the point over against the Pillo, where the castle Terbaly standeth, you must avoid somewhat, which runneth far off flat.  
Four or five leagues north and north and by west from the Quinsbrough Deep lieth the point of Brusteroort, and betwixt them both Loocsteed, whereupon standeth a Castle with a Church, not fare one from the other, and also two high hommocks or hills, and the land there abouts is all full of trees.  
From Brusteroort to the Deep off Der memel, 
Der Memell.  the course is north-east and by north sixteen or seventeen leagues. It is there betwixt them both a fair strand, and the land lieth in a great bay. The deep of Der Memell lieth in north-east, and north-east and by east, and is two fathom deep, within it you come into a great Haffe: you may run to the westwards about the point, and anchor there where you will.  
From Der memel to Heyligena, the coast lieth north & by east four leagues.  
From Heyligena to the point of Sevenbergen, north and by east, five leagues, that is with hommocks and hilly land.  
Four or five leagues north and by east from Sevenbergen lieth Terlyba. 
Terlyba.  There goeth into the land a little river, but there can go in no ships, there is no more than six foot water. On the north side of the river standeth a Gentleman's house or Castle, with a turret upon the midst of it, the north end of the house is covered with boards, and the southend with red tiles, to the southwards or the eastwards of it stand also some houses, covered also with tiles, in betwixt two woods to see to. If you will anchor in the road of Terlyba, than anchor a little to the southwards of the village so that the foresaid Gentlemans-house with the turret do stand east and by north from you in four fathom and a half, and five fathom less two foot, there is the best road and ground that is thereabouts. When you come out of the sea, and fall with the land to the eastwards or to the northwards of Terlyba, you shall see within the land a black wood, and the houses in a ragged valley of Sand-hills.  
From Terlyba to Derwinda, the course is northnortheast sixteen, or seventeen, leagues, betwixt them both the land lieth in a bite, so that the coast alongst by the shore lieth not so right, especially four or five leagues by south Derwinda, there it falleth away into a great bite, which men do call Sackerwyke, 
Sackerwyke.  and also with more smaller bights and bays towards Terlyba.  
Caarte van PRVYSSEN en Coerlandt van Rygshooft tot der Winda  
For to know this coast off Coerland, 
For to know Coerland.  then remember these places here under written.  
At Derwinda standeth a Castle with three Towers, which is covered above with red tiles, and under it is white, about a league to the southwards of Derwinda, lieth the Bakeovens, 
Bakeovens  which is next to Domesnes, the best land to be known of Coerland, it ariseth first when you begin to see the land, in a white Sandhill, the top whereof is full of trees, but when you come so near the shore, that you can see the other land also then there ariseth more land with hommockes, so that then it is not so easy to be known.  
About four leagues to the southwards of it in Sackerwyke lieth yet a hommock or hill full of trees with some little hommockes to the eastwards of it, when you are thwart of Derwinda, you may even see it half ways up to the top, but not well from below. This hommocke is called by some Duke D'alves Castle, 
Duke de Alves Castle.  and lieth most alone: the land, as well to the southwards as to the northwards of it, is most all even and plain land.  
About six leagues to the southwards of the foresaid hommock, and 5 or 4 leagues and an half to the northwards off Terlyba, lie also two high hommocks close one by the other, the land to the southwards of them towards Terlyba, is to see to fare off (when you are thwart of these two hommocks, or somewhat to the northwards of them) as if it were all broken land, thwart of this about 5 leagues from the land, or when you can but even see the land from below, it is 30 fathom deep.  
When you begin to come about Derwinda 
Bank by Derwinda  within 2 or 3 leagues off the land, there lieth a bank of 12, 13, and 14, fathom: some say that west and by north from Derwinda there should be no more upon that bank than 5, or 6, fathom water, it is about a half league broad betwixt the bank and the land a league without the shore, it is again 20 and 24 fathom deep.  
If you will anchor before Derwinda, then bring the foresaid Castle about eastsoutheast from you, than it cometh almost behind the high land, anchor in 5 fathom from the shore, there is the best road.  

Of the Depths and grounds about these Coasts.  
Betwixt the Heel and the Rose-head, but nearest the Heel, there it is 33 fathom deep, and the ground is there white sand.  
At the Heel in the road it is 25, fathom deep, the ground black sand, and going off to 30 and 40 fathom.  
Betwixt the Heel and Quinsbrough it is very deep, coming near the Heel it is steep, but towards Quinsbrough and the Nerung it goeth up plainly flat.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From the Rose-head to Axternes southeast 4 leagues.  
From Axternes to Vernorden southeast 1 league.  
From Vernorden to the Heel southsoutheast 1 league.  
From the Heel to Dansk south & by west & southsouthwest 5 leagues.  
From the Chest or Wissell off Dansk to the Deep off Quinsbrough east & by north 13 or 14 leagues.  
From the Deep of Quinsbrough to the point of Brusteroort north and north and by west 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Brusteroort to the Deep of der Memell north-east & by north 16 or 17 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to Quinsbrough deep eastsoutheast somewhat southerly 19 or 20 leagues.  
From the Heel to Quinsbrough deep eastsoutheast easterly 12 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to Der memel eastnortheast, somewhat easterly 29 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to Sevenbergen north-east & by east 33 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to Derwinda north-east 53 leag.  
From the Rose-head to Dageroort north-east & by north 80 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to eastergore, north and by east, 45 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to Houbrough the south end of Goteland north 35 leagues.  
From the Rose-head to the south end of Oeland northwest 28 leagues.  
From the Rose-head of Hannoe, the course is northwest and by west, and westnorthwest 43 or 44 leagues.  
From the Quinsbrough Deep to Houbrough the south end of Gotland northnorthwest 48 leagues.  
From Quinsbrough-deepe to Southeroorden, the south end of Oeland, northwest somewhat westerly 48 leag.  
From Der memel to Houbrough northwest, 37 leag.  
From Der memel to Heylighena north and by east 4 leagues.  
From Heylighena to the point off Sevenberghen, north and by east 5 leagues.  
From Sevenberghen to Der Lyba north and by east, 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Der Lyba to Derwinda northnortheast 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Der memel to Brusteroort south-west & by south 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Der memel to Dansk south-west 32 leagues.  
From Der memel to the Rose-head westsouthwest somewhat westerly 29 leagues.  
From Der memel to the Eartholms, or the north end of Brontholm, west 64 or 65 leagues.  
From Sevenbergen to the Rose-head south-west & by west 33 leagues.  
From Sevenbergen to Southeroorden west, 48 leagues.  
From Derwinda to the Rose-head south-west 53 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Bruntholm westsouthwest 80 leag.  
From Derwinda to Houbrough west somewhat southerly 37 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Eastergore the course is west and by north 29 leagues.  
From Derwinda to the Gotsche sand n. w. 31 or 32 leag.  
From Derwinda to Dageroort north somewhat easterly 31 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

Heel. Vermoorde. Aexternes. Hanckeheers.  
Thus showeth the Land betwixt the Rose-head and the Heel.  
Loockstede. Rosehead.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Quinsbrough deep and Brusteroort.  
Thus showeth itself the coast of Coerland about Sevenberghen, when you sail alongst by it a league without the Land.  
The coast of Coerland from Sevenbergen alongst by Derwinda unto Luseroort showeth, as is portrayed in these six figures, following, the like marks belong one to the other, as A A, B B, C C, D D, etc.  
Sevenbergen.  
Ter lyba.  
Sackerwyck. Hommock. Hommock.  
Sackerwyck. Duke Dalves' Castle. Sackerwyke.  
Backovens a league by south Derwinde. This Hommock about three leagues by south the Backovens.  
Luseroort. Castle Derwinda.  
Derwinda. Backovens.  
When Derwinda doth show itself first, being east from you, it showeth itself thus with the land, as well to the northwards as to the southwards, but when the Castle doth begin to come eastsoutheast from you, than it goeth behind the land, that you cannot see it.     

The third Demonstration, Where in Are Described the Sea-Coastes betwixt Der Winda and Revel, and the Islands of Aland.  
THe lying of Derwinda, and how men shall know it, is here before declared.  
From Derwinda to Lyserorte, the coast lieth north-east and by north four leagues, and from Lyserorte to Domesnes eastnortheast twelve or thirteen leagues. When you are thwart of Lyserorte, you can perceive no point, it seemeth to be all an even right coast from Derwinda to Domesnes, but coming from Derwinda or Domesnes, and being a league or two to the eastwards or to the westwards of it, you can see well that it is a blunt point, lying out. Thwart of Lyserorte runneth off a great uneven shoal, at least two leagues into sea, but you need not fear of it, you may run over it in four, five or six fathom by the lead, like as also alongst all the coast of Coerland from Derwinda, until about Domesnes.  
To the westwards of Lyserort the land hath a little bite, there you may anchor for north-east, eastnortheast and east winds: when it bloweth hard, & that you can do no good with turning to windwards, you must bring the point of Lyserorte eastnortheast from you in seven fathom, there is clean sandground and good lying.  
The land betwixt Domesnes and Derwinda is very easy to be known. At the point of Derwinda it is high, and goeth sloping down by little & little to the eastwards unto Lyseroort: Likewise 3 or 4 leagues by west Domesnes lieth a high blewhill, called the Doembergh, which is steep on the east side, & goeth by little & little sloping down to the westwards unto near Lyserorte, so that there two high double blewlands do go down into a valley one against the other, the low land betwixt both is Lyserorte. 
Leyserorte.  The point of Domesnes itself is low sandy land, it lieth out about 3 leagues to the eastwards of the foresaid Doembergh: but all that is together full of trees.  
The south end of Oesel 
Riffe off Oesel.  lieth from the point of Domesnes northwest and by west about six leagues a sunder, there runneth off a great Riffe, about south and by west, and southsouthwest into sea, towards the shoal Lyserorte, called Swalverorte, 
Swalverorte.  that is a dangerous riffe, at  three leagues long, very hard and uneven, at some places towards oesel it lieth dry above water, and at some other places it is two, two and an half & three fathom deep. To the westwards of that riffe lie also many uneven Dwaelgrounds a good ways off from the land, which lie alongst the coast of Oesel to the northwards, which are at some places not deeper than two, three and four fathom.  
Pas caarte van LIIFLANDT end Oost-Finlandt, van der Winda tot aende hoeck van Alandt end voort tot Revel.  
If you will go to Rye, and coming out of the sea do fall with the land about Derwinda, then leave not the coast of Coerland, but run about by it upon the lead, all along unto Domesnes in four, five, six or seven fathom, according as you have the wind, that you may not fall without, or to the westwards of that riffe Swalverorte. The channel betwixt Coerland and that foresaid riffe is fourteen, fifteen and sixteen fathom, but very uneven. The ground upon the shoal thwart of Lyserorte is at some places also very uneven for to sound, sometimes six, sometimes eight and nine fathom, the one cast at least two or three fathom more or less than the other, and that not very fare from the land but you need not fear of it, you may boldly run to the shore in four and five fathom.  
But if (when you come out of the sea) you are past Lyserorte, and come with the land to the northwards of it against oesel, than you have deeper water, for not far to the westwards without Swalverorte 
Marks to shun Swalverorte.  it is thirty fathom deep. If you can see Oesel and Coerland, and that the Doembergh be eastsoutheast or southeast & by east from you, then run on southeast until you come near Coerland, for to avoid Swalverorte, and then alongst by it upon your lead towards Domesnes, as is beforesaid. Or when as you have the Doembergh eastsoutheast from you, then keep it so standing from you, and sail in so right with it, and then you shall (without hurt) run alongst over the tail of the outermost shoal of Swalverorte, it shoaleth up there very soon and suddenly from 13 or 15 and nine fathom, but if you bring the east side of the Doembergh not more southerly from you then eastsoutheast and southeast and by east than you shall not meet with any dangers of the Dwaelgrounds, nor of Swalverorte, you shall thus sail alongst at least three leagues over the Dwaelgrounds and Swalverorte, over very uneven grounds, the one cast at least twelve, the other nine, and also well seven, and six fathom, but go on your course without fear, when as the Inner side, or east side of the south end of Oesel cometh to be north, and north and by east from you, than you are over the riffe, within all the foul grounds that might hurt you, when as that you get then 13 or 14 fathom, then sail boldly without fear towards Domesnes.  
If it should happen, that with a northwest wind, you should fall with the land to the northwards of Derwinda or Lyserorte, & should fear to come near the Coast of Coerland, then keep not further off to Sea, then that the east point of Doembergh be eastsoutheast from you, when as then you bring the east side of the south point of Oesell northnortheast from you, than you shall run alongst over Swalverorte in seven fathom. Betwixt Oesel and Coerland it is sixteen and seventeen fathom deep. When as Domesnes is southeast and by east, and the south point of Oesel northwest and by north from you, and that you are a like near to them both there it is eighteen farhom deep.  
From the point of Domesnes runneth off also a riffe north-east and by north, or a little more northerly a league and half into the sea, which is on the east side very steep, but on the west side somewhat flatter.  
When you come from out of the west, and are bound to Rye you may run about by it upon your lead, in 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 fathom, so near as you will, but according as the wind and weather shall be, I know of some that have sounded about it in four, and four fathom & half: but he that will run so somewhat near about it must be very careful in using of his lead, & not let it rest.  
Not very fare from the riffe, on the west side, it is 12 and 13 fathom deep. When as the point of Domesnes, where the withered trees stand upon come to be southsouthwest from you, than you come on against the west side of the riffe, when that point is south-west and by south from you, than you are right thwart of the point, but when it is south-west, and south-west and by west from you, than you are about the riffe, and then you may boldly go on southeast towards Rye. Domesnes and the Deep of Rye lie southeast & northwest twenty leagues distant.  
About eight leagues to the eastwards or to the southwards of Domesnes runneth off another riffe from a point which you may sound about in five & six fathom. The land betwixt Domesnes and that point lieth about southsoutheast, and northnorthwest, but to the southwards of it, it falleth away to the south; so that betwixt this point, and the Deep of Rye, there is a great bay, which is called the Kowerwyck: 
Kowerwy ke.  somewhat to the southwards of this point in the bay, lieth some high land, which lieth from the Deep of Rye w. and by s. and e. and by north. It must be very clear weather when you can see it, lying at anchor before the deep of Rye.  
When as (coming from Rye) you shall be somewhat to the southwards in the Koperwike, and come running out there by the shore, this foresaid point hath thus oftentimes been mistaken for Domesnes, because that then you can see no Land without it, but when as you come about the point, you shall again see the Land out a head, than you are yet about 8 leagues from Domesnes.  
Under the point of Domesnes you may anchor on both sides, as well to the westwards as to the eastwards. If you will anchor to the westwards of it, than anchor in 6, 7 or 8 fathom, there you have good sand ground, and sheltered for east and southeast winds. If you will anchor to the eastwards of it, than anchor in 6 or 7 fathom, a little within the point of the land, so that the point be north or north and by west from you, there is good sandy ground, & good lying for a southsouthwest westnorthwest and northnorthwest wind: the point of the riffe lieth then from you about northnortheast a league and half. If you will anchor further from the shore, so that the point of Domesnes be northwest or northwest & by north from you, there it is eighteen and twenty fathom deep & soft ground.  
If that you are coming off from Rye against the riff of Domesnes, you will sail about it, 
Road under Dosnes.  than you must run fare enough about without it, or if you will take it somewhat near, you must be exceeding careful in using your lead. It is (as hath been said) very steep on the east side, with a northwest way, (which runneth thwart into the riffe) you shall have the one cast twelve nine, or eight, and the next cast four, or three fathom, if you fall within the point of the riffe. But if you have been at anchor under Domesnes, and set sail from thence and will sail about the riffe, than you may the better run about it by your lead. Go from thence northnortheast and north-east & by north, that runneth most alongst by the riffe. When the point off Nesse cometh about west from you, than it will be by little and little somewhat shoaler, you must not spare your lead, but must sound often. With a northwest course come not nearer it than in nine ten or twelve fathom. When the point of Nes cometh to be south-west from you, you may run about sound it so in five, six or 7 fathom, than you come to the east side of the riffe, when that is south-west & by south from you, than you are right thwart of the point of the riffe, but when it is southsouthwest from you, than you are about the riffe, go then west south-west or more southerly towards Coerland, and run alongst by it, in five, six or seven fathom (according as the wind shall be) toward Luseroort.  
If you sail from Rye with an east or north-east wind, & shall sail by night about the rif, than set your course so, that you be sure you run fare enough alongst to the n. wards, or without the Riffe, & keep that course until that you come near the grounds of Ambroock or Oesel in 15 or 16 fathom, than you shall be without doubt past the riffe, then go on a while south-west, until that you reckon the point of Domesnes to be southeast, or somewhat more easterly from you, than edge up to the coast of Coerland by your lead, and run alongst by it, in four, five, six or seven fathom, as hath been beforesaid.  
East and by north somewhat easterly eight leagues from Domesnes lieth the Island Round: 
Round.  you may run round about it by your lead, in six or seven fathom. All alongst the south-west side it is all foul and sharp rocky ground, therefore come not nearer the shore there, then in 6 fathom. Southsoutheast about a halfleague from the south point lieth a little plate, where upon it is not deeper than six foot, there hath once a man beaten off his rudder. It lieth betwixt seven and eight fathom deep, for to avoid that, take thereabouts the sounding of the shore in five or six fathom, and then you run through betwixt it and the shore, or else if you keep in eight or nine fathom, than you run about without it.  
If you will anchor under Round 
Road under Round  for a southsouthwest, south-west or westsouthwest wind, then run about the southeast point, until you come to the east side, there is a little bay, where stand a few houses with a chapel, which you can see when you come somewhat near to the shore, anchor thwart of it in five fathom, so that the chapel do stand south-west from you, there is the best road under Round, being clean sandy ground, but when it bloweth hard the sea cometh rolling in. At other places it is not very clean.  
The fareway betwixt Round and Domesnes is two and twenty and three and twenty fathom deep, and betwixt Round and Duynemond three & twenty & four and twenty fathom.  
From Round to the Deep of Rye, it is southsoutheast, 15 leagues. Before the Deep of the river Duyn you may anchor in ten fathom, either to the southwards or the northwards of it, where you please.  
The Deep of the river of Rye 
The Deep of the river of Rye  is Pilots water, as well in sailing up, as sailing off. How men shall sail there in or out it is not possible to describe, so that men might rely upon it, for by reason of the continual scouring of the stream, and especially by some extraordinary great freshuts, and strong drifts of ice, the depths and shoals do there often shift and change, where of every one that is bound thither may be mindful of.  
From the Deep of Rye to Parno, the course is northnortheast and north-east and by north five and twenty leagues, betwixt them both, about fourteen leagues from Rye lieth a little town called Lemsael 
Lemsael.  or Sales, there goeth in a little deep of eight foot water. Before that Deep lieth a bank, which you may sail about on both sides, and come within it, there it is three fathom deep. The Island Kyn 
Kinne.  lieth from Sales northwest and by west 7 leagues: from Round east and east and by north seven leagues, and from the Deep of Rye north and by east about 14 or 15 leagues. It is a little low Island, about 2 leagues long, & hath round about it most foul ground. Betwixt Kin & the coast of Lyfland it is 7 leagues broad, and the right deep betwixt them both is 8 and 9 fathom deep.  
Northwest eight leagues from Round, and north and by east seven leagues from Domesnes lieth Ambrook, 
Ambrook  that is a little Island, which is round about foul, with sharp stony ground, and lieth two leagues distant from the coast of Oesell. Betwixt Round and Ambrook but nearest Ambrook lie many uneven Dwaelgrounds, 
Dwaelgrounds.  of three, four and five fathom. Ambrook and the south end off Oesell lie eastnortheast, somewhat northerly, and westsouthwest somewhat southerly about five leagues distant. Under the south point off oesel 
Roade under Oesell  on the east side is a good road for westerly winds. If you will anchor there, then anchor in eight or seven fathom, so that the white Church, which standeth somewhat within the southermost point, do stand west and by south from you, there is good soft clay ground, and you shall lie sheltered for a west & westsouthwest wind. The ground is there very even & slatte, when as you get the seven fathom, and sail towards to land it continueth long all one depth of 7 fathom, until you come very close by the shore before it will be shoaler.  
It is there all alongst by the east coast of oesel flat ground of three, four and five fathom.  
For to sail from the south end of oesel unto Arentsbergh through within Ambrooke, you must leave two thirds of the water on the larboard side towads Oesell, and one third part on the starboard side towards Ambrooke, there you shall have about seven fathom water, and soft clay ground, towards the Coast of oesel it is full of uneven Dwale-grounds; alongst by the west side of Ambrooke you cannot lightly take hurt.  
Arentsbergh 
Arentsbergh.  lieth from the south end of Oesel north-east distant eight leagues, but from the Island Ambrook northnorthwest four or five leagues. Upon the west side of Oesel, the coast lieth off from the south end unto Hondsoorte, with divers bays, about northnorthwest & southsoutheast twelve leagues, betwixt them both lie two lad places, Wyke and Reeck. Alongst this west coast of Oesell lie very many uneven and soul grounds, where of men must take very good heed.  
Hondtsoort, the northwest point of oesel, and the point of Dagerorte lie northnorthwest, and southsoutheast about 8 leagues distant. Betwixt them both is a great haven there runneth also a channel through, but it is so shoal that no ships can go through, and all over sharp and uneven ground. Upon Dagerorte 
Tower upon Dagerorte.  standeth a high tower which the Wor. Counsel of the town of revel caused there to be builded, for to know the land by, which men may see on both sides of Dagerorte fare into sea, and also may see it over the land fare in the foresaid bay.  
Under the point on the south side of Dagerorte is good lying for north and north-east winds and clean sand ground● you may sound about by the point of Dagerorte in seven or eight fathom, on the north side of the point is good road for southerly winds.  
From Dagerorte to Syburghnes, the coast lieth eastnortheast seven leagues. Betwixt them both, to wit, three leagues from Dagerorte, and four leagues from Syburghnes, lieth a ground, going flat off thwart from the land northwest into sea, at least five or six leagues, almost in manner as the great luttish riffe, is first of three, four, five, six and seven fathom deep, and waxeth deeper by little and little towards the Finish Scheers, where at last it runneth to nothing.  
About three leagues without the land of Dagerorte, north and north and by east from the high tower, there lieth a sunken rock which is very steep, whereupon there is no more than ten foot water: A man of Ossanen hath beaten upon it, which went no deeper than eleven foot and a half, presently after the stroke he cast the lead, and found five fathom depth. The tower of Dageroort was then from him south and south and by west.  
Syburghnes 
Syburghnes.  is an out point, with two points, from each of which shooteth off a riffe, betwixt these two riffs is a fair flat sand strand, where you may anchor so near the shore as you will, in six, five or four fathom.  
A little to the westwards of the westermost point of Syburghnes, not fare from the land lieth a shoal under water, about so great as a ship, whereupon it is not deeper than twelve foot.  
From Syburghnes to Oetgensholm, the course is e. & by n. 7 leag. betwixt them both goeth in the Moensound.  
To the southwards of Oetgensholm goeth in a great bay into the land, where in lieth an Island, and behind it a little town called Hapsael, there you may anchor where you will. On the south-west side of this bay, runneth off a great shoal or ledge of rocks at least a great league into the sea, which is very broad, you may run in alongst by it into Moensound.  
Eastnortheast, and w. s.w. from the east hoeck of Oetgensholm a league in sea lieth a cliff under water whereupon in the year a man of Harlingen is cast. away.  
From Syburghnes to the Oxeholm 
Oxeholm  & the Grasholm, 
Grasholm  the course is southsoutheast 4 or 5 leagues, the Grasholm are two little green Islands, and the Oxeholme lieth about a league to the northwards of the Grasholm, about which you may sail, and anchor round about, a little league north-east from the Oxholm lieth a ground lose from the land, which you must avoid, called the wester Grasground, 
Grasground.  there are two shoals, which are called the Grasgrounds, the other Grasground, which is called the eastermost, lieth over against the Grasholm, towards the riffe of Hapsael, upon which there is no more than five footwater. He that will sail into the Moensound, must take heed thereof.  
He that will sail off from Oetgensholme through the Moensound 
Moonsound.  must go on southsouthwest to the Grasholme, and sail in close by it, for to avoid the Grasground, which lieth to the eastwards over against it. From the Grasholme to the point off the oesel, where the great tree standeth upon, the course is east five or six leagues. From the Grasholm towards Oesell lie four little Islands, each about a league one from the other.  
When as you sail from Grasholme towards Oesel, you must sail alongst by these little Islands, leaving them lying about two or three cables lengths on the starboard side, until that you come to the land of Oesel, over against the great tree. In this fareway it is five fathom deep.  
When as you come sailing so alongst past the Grasground, you shall meet with an Island on the larboard side, to the northwards of it goeth in the Deep unto the Castle of Moensound 
The Castle of Moon sound.  in three fathom, but sometimes, it is shoaler, for there it is all full of sands. To the southwards of the same Island goeth in another Deep, which you may sail through, until you come to the end of oesel, and then you leave the two little Islands by the south end of Oesell lying on the starboard side. But the right and best Deep goeth from the foresaid great tree, in alongst by the land Oesell, which is three and four fathom deep, and at last it will be six, seven & eight fathom: when you sail alongst there, you leave the foresaid two little Islands by the south end of Oesell lying on the larboard side. From the great tree to the first little Island, the course is eastsoutheast eight or nine leagues & then from the first little Island to the second south east, and forth to the end of Oesell east and by south.  
From that end or north-east point of oesel runneth off a foul riffe, a great half league into the sea, called the Paternoster 
Paternoster.  which you must avoid.  
From this north-east point off Oesell unto Parno, the coast of Lisland lieth eastsoutheast and westnorthwest.  
When you come about that point, you may sail into the sea or buy off Rye, where you will, west and by north to Arentsbergh, southw. or somewhat westerly to Ambrooke south somewhat easterly to Round, southeast and by south to Kin, or where you will, the lying of Kinne is described here before.  
From Kin to Magno and Serckholm all alongst unto Parno, the course is north-east and by north eight leagues. Thwart of Magno & Serckhollom 
Magno Sterckholm.  it is betwixt Coerland and the Islands, five and six fathom deep, and alongst Coerland altogether a fair strand.  
Parno 
Parno.  lieth in a great Bay, it is there in the road three and four fathom deep. For to anchor there, you must anchor so that the steeple of Parno stand northnortheast from you there is the best road.  
Oetgensholme 
Oetgensholm.  and Syburghnes lie east and by n. and w. & by south seven leagues distant one from the other.  
You may sail round about Oetgensholme, and anchor under it, for northerly and northwest winds in six or seven fathom but you must beware of the Blind as before is said.  
From Oetgensholm to great Rogue, 
Great Roge.  the course is east four leagues, betwixt them both, a little to the southwards of the fareway lieth a shoal even above water, which you may sail round about, but you may not come very near it, because it is stony and rocky round about it. Great Rogue is an out point with two or three white Chalck-hills, and thereby is very easy to be known. Betwixt this point and Oetgensholm, somewhat more southerly lieth another point, called little Rogue 
Little Roge.  betwixt it and great Rogue, goeth a broad Sound into the land of six and seven fathom depth; but in the end it is shoal  it is all clean ground, and good for to anchor in.  
From great Rogue to the Island Narghen, the course is east somewhat northerly five leagues.  
When you sail from great Rogue towards Narghen, you shall find four leagues to the eastwards of great Rogue an other point with two white chalck spots, called Surp, betwixt it and great Rogue, the land falleth away to the southwards, into a great bay. If you will sail to Revel, then sail alongst by that point of Surp, towards Narghen, leaving it on the larboard side off you, going on still east, until you come to the east end of Nargen. Being there by it, then go on eastsoutheast a league and an half, and then you shall come by the end of the riffe, which lieth off from the Blote Karels, 
Riffe off the Karels.  come no nearer it than in six fathom. When as the castle of Revel cometh without the Karels, then sail right unto the head of Revel 
revel.  until you come to the east side, let your anchor fall there, and then hawl with the foreship or stern, to the head, and make you fast by four cables, for the north and northnorthwest winds which blow there flat open in, making it a lee shore, so that sometimes with such winds there cometh in a rolling sea.  
East about 4 leagues from the south end of Nargen, lieth the Island the Wolf, which is about a league long.  
Northnorthwest, and northwest and by north two leagues from the west end of the Island the Wolf, and north-east and north-east and by east from the north end of Nargen lieth a rock under water, called the Revelstone, although there be no more water upon then 3 or 4 foot, yet it is in the Summer time with fair weather, oftentimes so smooth water, that it doth not break upon it, and it is also very steep, so that you may not come nearer it by your lead then in 12 fathom. The marks for to know the place of this Revelstone 
Revell-stone.  are these: When the north-east end of Nargen is south-west and south-west and by west from you, and the high steeple of revel is a capstane bars length, or a little more to the westwards off the west end of the Island the Wolf, than you are right thwart of this rock. The steeple of Revel is also the right south from you. But when the steeple of revel cometh to the Wolf, 
The Wolf  and that you are bound to the eastwards, and you are surely past this Revell-stone, and a good ways to the eastwards of it.  
From the west end of the Island the Wolf lieth off a riff to the northwards into sea, about an English mile toward the Revell-stone, upon the end of this riffe lie five or six rocks a little above water. If you come away from revel on north and by west alongst by the Wolf, then mark the point of Surp, when that cometh even unto the south end of the Island Nargen, than you shall also have even the length of the foresaid riffe. If you look out then on the starboard side, and be not sailed very far alongst to the westwards of the Wolf, you shall see the foresaid rocks (lying upon the end of the riffe) lie thwart from you, and then you may run to the northwards about by them in five fathom without doing amiss.  
Betwixt Nargen and the Wolf lieth also a stony shoal which is very broad, but much nearer Narghen than the Wolf, and lieth from the south point or Narghen 
shoal of Nargen.  about north-east, and from the north point eastsoutheast. Therefore if you bring the south point of Nargen about south-west or south-west and by south, and the foresaid north point westnorthwest from you, and that the Wolf lie then free from the main land, you shall not miss to fall upon this shoal.  
You may sail round about Nargen, 
Nargen.  and also anchor under it for northerly and westerly winds in 10, 12, 14 & 18 fathom.  
From Nargen to the Island Wranger, the course is east, seven leagues. The lying there of you may see in the following directions.  

Of the Coast of Finland betwixt the Alands' Haffe and Elsenvoes.  
Betwixt Uxe or Bostell on the coast of Sweden, & the Island of Aland, 
Alandts.  goeth in the Alands Haff, which men do call the North Bodem, which lieth up so fare to the northwards into Finland, that a ship with good fresh way should scarce be able to sail to the end off it in five days, upon the farthest end of this North Bodem lieth the town Toreu, there Sweden is parted from Finland.  
At the outermost rocks off Finland on the Alands Haff lie Islands, Ercke, Castelholm and Corpe. 
Ercke Castelholm Corpse.  Ercke is the westermost of all, and the outermost, from thence goeth in the Corpe sound, north-east alongst thwart off Castelholm and Corpe. Corpe lieth within the other Island, and from Corpe you may edge over into the Liet off Abbo, which cometh running off from Uttoy: you may alsoo sail up into this channel about behind Lipland, and so come out into the North Bodem.  
Uttoy is a great Island, upon it standeth a great mast with a barrel for a beacon, and lieth from the Island Corpe east and west about nine leagues. On the west side of Uttoy 
Uttoy.  goeth up the Liet of Abbo, which lieth in first north & north and by east about three or four leagues, and then you come on against a great Island. And then it lieth in alongst that great Island north-east unto the the Sound of Abbo. 
Abbo.  Abbo lieth at the end of that foresaid great Island. This Liet runneth up alongst to the eastwards through betwixt the rocks about thirteen leagues, within it lieth a rock under water which is a Magnes 
Magnes.  or Loadstone, also the ground seemeth to be there of the virtue of the Loadstone, or when you come thereabouts, the compasses do not stand, but run and turn without any certain standing still, until that you be at least a league past it, and then they begin to stand right again. From thence it lieth east and east and by south all alongst through the rocks unto the Rough Island, to the westwards of it runneth the channel of Lewis into the sea, when you are thwart of it sea, you may see the land of Revel. It is there betwixt them both, to wit, betwixt the Out rocks and Nargen, or the land thereabouts ten leagues broad.  
The Out-rocks of Lewis, and the channel of Uttoy lie east & west about 21 or 22 leagues distant, although it be there betwixt them both all broken land, and full of rocks, yet nevertheless there are no havens nor channels fit for ships to come into.  
From Lewis 
Lewis.  alongst without the Rocks to the channel of Elsenvoes, the course is east and by north 15 or 16 leagues, but Nargen or the Wolf, and channel of Elsenvoes lie northnortheast & southsouthwest about 16 or 17 leagues asunder.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Derwinda to Lyserorte north-east 4 leagues.  
From Lyserorte to Domesnes eastnortheast 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Domesnes to Round east and by north somewhat easterly 8 leagues.  
From Round to Duynemondt or the mouth of the river of Rye southsoutheast 15 leagues.  
From Domesnes to Rye or Duynemond southeast 20 lea.  
From Duynemondt to Lemsael or Sales north-east, 14 leagues.  
From Duynemond, or the mouth of the river of Rye to the Island Kin north and by east 14 or 15 leagues.  
From Round to the Island Kinne east & by north & east 7 leagues.  
From Domesnes to the south end, or the road of Oesell northwest and by north 6 great leagues.  
From Domesnes to Ambroeck north and by east, 7 leag.  
From Round to Ambroeck northwest 8 leagues.  
From the south end of oesel to Arentsbergh north-east, 8 leagues.  
From Luseroorte to Howbrough west & by south, somewhat westerly 40 leagues.  
From Lyserorte to the point of Alant or the Islands, north and by west, somewhat westerly 52 leagues.  
From the south point of oesel to Hondsorte northnorthwest 12 leagues.  
From Hondsort to the point of Dagerorte northnorthwest 8 leagues.  
From Dagerorte to Syburghnes' east and by north 7 leag.  
From Syburghnes to the Oxeholme and the Grasholme southsoutheast 4 or 5 leagues.  
From the Grasholme to the great tree upon oesel, south 5 or 6 leagues.  
From the north-east point off oesel to Parno eastsoutheast 20 leagues.  
From Arensbergh to the north-east point of Oesell east and by south 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Ambroeck to the north-east point of Oesell north-east somewhat easterly 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Round to the north-east end of Oesell north somewhat westerly 13 leagues.  
From Lemsael to Parno north and by east 11 league.  
From Dagerorte to the Rose-head south-west and by south. 80 leagues.  
From Dagerorte to Eastergore south-west and by west 39 leagues.  
From Dagerorte to the Godtsch sand w. s.w. 26. leagues.  
From Dagerorte to Boechschaer northwest and by west 18 leagues.  
From Dagerorte to the point off Alandt or the Islands northwest and by north 26 or 27 leagues.  
From Syburghnes to Oetgensholm east and by n. 7 leag.  
From Oetgensholm to great Rogue east 4 leagues.  
From great Rogue to Surp east 4 leagues.  
From Rogue to Nargen east somewhat northerly 5 leag.  
From the south end of Nargen to the Island the Wolf, east 4 leagues.  
From Revel to the Wolf north somewhat easterly 5 lee.  
From Oetgensholme to the Out rocks of Lewis north & by east 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Syburghnes to the channel of Abbo, or Uttoy northwest and by north 20 or 21 leagues.  
From Uttoy or Abbo to the channel of Lewis, the course is east 22 leagues.  
From Lewis to the channel of Elsenvos east 16 or 17 leag.  
From Nargen to the channel of Abbo, the course is westnorthwest 32 or 33 leagues.  
From Nargen to the channel of Elsenvos north-east and by north 17 leagues.  
From Nargen to the Out-rocks of Lewis northwest & by north 13 leagues.  
From the Wolf to Peltingschares eastnortheast 20 leagues.  
From the channel of Abbo to Boeschaer south-west somewhat southerly 16 leagues.  
From the Island the Wolf to Wranger east and by south 3 leagues.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Domesnes. Doembergh. Lyseroort.  
Coerland showeth itself in this form, betwixt Lyseroort and Domesnes, when you sail alongst by it.  
Domesnes. Doembergh Lyseroort Derwinda Backovens Towards Der Lyba.  
Thus showeth the coast of Coerland, from Domesnes past Derwinda, and the Backovens towards Der Lyba.  
When you sail about Domesnes, than Oesel showeth itself thus.  
The little Island Ambroeck.  
The Island Round, when you sail alongst by it, showeth itself thus.  
Round.  
Doembergh Domesnes.  
Thus showeth Coerland to the eastwards of Domesnes.  
Castle of Duynemondt Rye The high land of Kowerwyck.  
The mouth of the Duyn  
When you come against the mouth of the Duyn, the River of Rye, the land showeth itself on both sides of it thus.  
When Dagerorte is northnortheast four leagues from you, it showeth thus.  
Dagerorte being north-east from you three or four leagues, showeth itself thus.  
In this form appeareth Dagheror, when the tower is east and by south, and the northermost point is east from you four leagues, and then you may even see it in clear weather from below.  
When as the tower upon Dagherorte is southeast & by south, & the land to the eastwards of it is southeast four leagues from you, than it showeth itself thus.  
Syburgnes  
When the tower of Dagerorte is southsoutheast from you, than it showeth itself (with the land to the westwards of it) thus.  
Syburghnes' Dagherorte  
Thus showeth the land of Dagheroort towards Syburghnes.  
High-hill  
Thus showeth Syburghnes when the high hill is southsouthwest 4 leagues from you, there it is five and thirty and six and thirty fathom deep.  
Thus showeth revel when you are by the Revelstone without the Wolf.  
The form of Oetgensholm.     

The fourth Demonstration, Where in The Sea-Coastes between the Wolf and the outtermost of the East Sea.  
THe Island Wranger 
Wranger.  lieth from Nargen east distant 7 or 8 leagues, and 3 leagues east and by south from the wolf.  
Under Wranger is on both sides good road & good anchor ground, especially on the south side, where there is a Bay, there you may anchor betwixt the two points in ten, twelve, or fourteen fathom, according as shall be convenient, and lie sheltered for a north-east and east, and also for a northwest and west wind. You may sail round about Wrangher, but from some points (as from the south point, and from the north point) lie off some little riffs, whereof you must take heed, and be careful in using the lead when you sail about by them.  
About an English mile from Wrangher lieth little Wranger, 
Little Wranger.  a little long small Island, lying about northwest and southeast, which is rocky and foul, especially on the north-east side. From the southeast point runneth off also a rocky riff whereof you must take heed.  
On the south-west side is good anchoring for north-east and east winds, anchor under it so that the southeast point lie about east from you, there is good lying for north-east and east winds.  
GREAT AND SMALL WRANGER.  
About a great league north from the east end of Wranger, and two little leagues north and by west from little Wranger lieth a little Island, which by some is called Kuyken, but commonly is called the Kocxschaer, 
Kocxschaer.  which is a little bare rock with a Warder upon it, you may sail round about it on both sides, it lieth from the Wolf north-east and by east distant two great leagues.  
From Wranger to Eckholme, the course is east and by south 14 leagues.  
Three leagues by west the Eckholms lieth an out-poynt to the eastwards of it is a Bay, called the Monkwyke, there it is good anchoring for south-west and west winds in 8, 10, or 12, fathom. Betwixt this point of the Monkwyke 
Monkwyke.  and Wranger lie 3 little long Islands, lying alongst the coast of Lysland, about a half league from the shore which are very foul and rocky, and almost nothing but rocks, whereof you must take heed, otherwise the coast betwixt them both is clean.  
The Island Eckholm 
Eckholm.  is clean round about, and lieth about northwest and southeast, it showeth itself high at both ends and in the midst with a Valley. Under Eckholm is good anchoring at the north-east side for west & south-west winds in 20, 22 and 25, fathom, & on the south-west side for easterly winds.  
Five leagues to the eastwards of Eckholm lieth the Castle Telsburgh, 
Telsburg.  thwart of it lieth off a shoal from the shore, but you may sound it in 8 or 9 fathom. From thence the coast lieth alongst most east & by south unto the road of the Narve about 15 leagues, it is altogether clean without fowl ground, so that you may also sail alongst there by night in 8 or 9 fathom without fear.  
Northwards from this coast in the fareway betwixt Eckholm and the Island of Highland lie the Chalk grounds, Hosts, the little and great Tutters, all of them with very dangerous foul grounds and shoals. Eckholm & Highland lie eastnortheast and westsouthwest distant about 10 leagues. About 2 or 3 leagues east from Eckholm, & also 2 leag. from the main land lie the Chalkgrounds, 
Chalck-grounds.  which are foul grounds, almost 3 leag. long under water, and lie to the westwardswestnorthwest into the sea, and to the eastwards almost to the riffe of the Hosts. Some say that they are fast to it, so that you should not be able to sail through betwixt them.  
De Zeecusten van LIIF LAND T. end host Finlandt. van Wolfs-oort tot aen Wyborgh.  
Northwards from the Hoftes lie the little Tutters, and 2 leagues to the eastwards of the little Tutters lie the great Tutters.  
The little Tutters 
Little Tutters.  are two Islands not high but round about rocky, rissy, and fowl, they lie south-west and south about three leagues from Highland.  
The great Tutters 
Great Tutters.  lie from the little Tutters' east southeast about 2 leagues, and from Highland south also three leagues, there lieth off from it also a great stony riffe westwards towards the little Tutters: there lieth also betwixt the little and great Tutters a row of rocks, where of you must take heed when you will sail through betwixt them.  
South and by east about two leagues from the great Tutters lieth a shoal of five fathom. He that will sail to the southwards of these foresaid Islands and shoals 
Shoal.  towards the Narve, may be mindful thereof, it lieth about four leagues to the eastwards of Telsburgh: two or three leagues from the shore.  
Betwixt the great Tutters & Highland lieth a shoal upon which there is no more than six foot water.  
Southeast a great half league from the south end off Highland lieth another shoal of a fathom and half and two fathom deep.  
To the northwards off all these foresaid rocky Islands and soul shoals, lieth a little Island whereupon standeth a Mast for to know it by, & to discern it from the other little fowl Islands, that you may come indifferent near to it, but not too near, for it is also somewhat rocky and fowl, but not fare off, it lieth from the little Tutters' west and by north and west northwest about three leagues, from the Island Highland south-west & by west at least four or five leagues, but from Wranger east somewhat southerly eighteen or nineteen leagues.  
He that will sail off from Wranger towards the Narve alongst to the northwards of these foresaid grounds, and doth get sight of this little Island with the mast, may thereby the better know to direct his course but it is not wisdom to sail through these foresaid shoals, except for them that are very well acquaited.  
The Island Highland or Hooghland, 
Highland or Hooghland.  is about four leagues long, and a league broad-lying southsoutheast & northnorthwest. When you come out of the west, it ariseth in three hommocks, so high to see to as Coll in the Sea reach, upon the north end and upon the east side it doth stand all full of trees. A little about the north point on the east side is a little bay thwart of a Boers house, there it is clean ground and good lying for westerly s. w. winds, somewhat to the southwards of it, not very far from the shore, lieth a great rock above water. At the north end is also good lying for a southeast wind. Alongst the south-west side you may also anchor every where in sixteen, seventeen, or eighteen fathom close by the land for east & north-east winds.  
From the south-west side of Highland unto the road of the Narve, the course is southeast and southeast and by south about fifteen leagues, & then you run through betwixt the Highland & the Tutters.  
Likewise when as you sail on northwest from the road of the Narve, than you run alongst betwixt the Tutters and Highland, but you must be very careful, and take heed off the foresaid shoals, which lie betwixt them both.  
The land of the Narve men do know by three high hills, lying a league to the westwards, or to the southwards of the road, and a league further to the westwards stand some little houses upon the high land.  
The town of the Narve 
The Narve.  lieth upon a river about two leagues within the land. For to sail in there men were wont to look out for a long hill, which lieth on the south side within the river's mouth, and at the east end goeth down somewhat steep, with some high trees to the eastwards of it, than they brought the wooden tower of the Narve to the northwards of the foresaid trees, and did run in so with it. When as the eastermost of the three foresaid hills (a league to the westwards of the rivers mouth) come over a little hommocke, which lieth on the water side, than they were upon the bar of the rivers mouth, there was upon the shoalest ten foot water, and then they sailed up the river, that was wont (for some years) to be so, but it is possibly since that time more or less altered, like as it doth oftentimes happen in such rivers.  
From the road of the Narve to the Russehaecks, 
Russehaecks.  the course is north and by west five leagues, which lie with many rocks a good ways off from the shore. The point thwart of it is called the point of Castrum after a little town (so called) lying there.  
From the Russehaecks north 5 leagues lieth a little Island, called Rette Sarre, 
Rette-Sarre.  from which there runneth off a rif south into sea. From this Island, to the Summers, the course is north and by west, westerly 4 or 5 leag.  
Eastsoutheast and southeast and by east from Highland, & three leagues from the Russehaecks lieth another shoal, called the Slimme grounds, 
Slimme-grounds.  it lieth long & small alongst northnorthwest and southsoutheast, with hard wind you may see it break in four or five places: when it is west from you about half a league, there it is two fathom deep to 3, 4, 5 and 6 fathom uneven ground, some of the rocks of it lie also above water.  
From the Russehaecks to the Rodehell, the course is north-east and by north about three and twenty leagues, betwixt them both on the Ruff side, run also divers rivers into the land, but there it no trade. The land there lieth in a great bite, it lieth first from the Russehaecks unto the River of Nioa, or Oreschacke eastnortheast about 22 leagues, that parteth Rusland from Finland by a great Mere or water, called the Lading. 
The Lading.   
The strong castle of Noetenburgh lieth there also upon a river which lieth out of the Lyslands or east sea into the foresaid Lading. Further the land lieth northwest, about fifteen or sixteen leagues unto the Rodehell.  

For to sail from revel to Wyburgh.  
From a little to the northwards of the Kocxschaer to Highland, the course is east and by north a little more easterly 23 leagues, with that course you run alongst a little to the northwards of it. You may sail about Highland on both sides, but alongst to the northwards of it is the right fareway for these that are bound to Wybrough. A half league north and by west from Highland lieth a sunken rock under water. For to avoid it you must sail close alongst by Highland. Further, the lying of Highland hath been described here before.  
From Highland to the Summers, 
Summer.  the course is east seven leagues. Summer is a rock or little Island almost like the Eartholms, it showeth itself in 3 hommocks. A little to the eastwards off it lie some rocks above water: you may sail about on both sides of Summers, and also through betwixt Summers & the foresaid rocks that lie to the eastwards of it: but about to the northwards of it is the right fareway, you cannot also run alongst fare to the northwards of it, for a half league to the northwards of it, it is very fowl and full of little rocks, some above and some under water.  
From the Summers to the Goeschaer, 
Goeschaer of great Fishers.  the course is north-east and by north more easterly seven leagues. The Goeschaer which by some is called the great Fisher is a long & broken Island of 7 rocks, therefore it is also called the Seven-rocks, it lieth not far from the land, so that you cannot get sight of it, before that you come nearer it, it showeth itself when you shall first see it, in 4 hommocks, as if it were 4 little low Islands, you must leave it lying a half league on the larboard side, for to avoid a sunken rock which lieth off from it southsoutheast a great shot of a cast piece. When the water is not very smooth, but a little grown, you may perceive it by the breaking of the water: you may also well sail to the northwards of this sunken rock, to wit, through betwixt the sunken rock & the Goeschaer; than you must run indifferent close alongst by Goeschaer; when it is northwest and by north from you, than you are passed the foresaid sunken rock, whether that you run alongst to the northwards or to the southwards of it. Northwest and by north behind the great Fisher you may anchor in a good haven, between the cliffs where upon the south Corner of a cliff there standeth a warder, wherein if you lie there you are free from all Icedrifts.  
From the Goeschaer or great Fisher to the little Fisher, the course is north-east and by east three leagues. The little Fisher is a bare round rock which lieth not fare from the land: when you come near it, you may know it well from the other rocks, because there lie none fare from the land alone, you may sail about it on both sides, but alongst to the southwards of it is the right fareway. About a shot of a cast piece southeast, or southeast and by east from this little Fisher, lieth a black rock with the top even above water, almost like a buy upon the Flyestreame, to see to a fare off as if it where a Seals head. This rock you must leave on the starboard side, and run through betwixt it and the Fisher but there is a piece of it driven off with a strong Icedrift so that as many say there is not much fear to be made of it.  
He that must turn to windwards thereabouts, let him not come very near this rock, for men do hold that there lie more rocks by it under water.  
Both the Fishers are otherwise clean round about; so that you may also find road under them.  
From the little Fisher to the point coarseness, 
coarseness.  which the Lubickers do call Kruysoort, the course is eastnortheast somewhat easterly a league. coarseness is a point going off low of the main land, not very clean, which you must leave on the larboard side. To the westwards of coarseness lie two little Islands close to the land. Thwart of the point lieth a rock almost like a boat, you may run about by it in four fathom and a half, but not near. On the east side of that point you may anchor for Westerly winds in five or six fathom.  
About two leagues thwart off from coarseness, lie very many rocks, some one fathom, some a half fathom, some more, and some less under water, you may not go out of the fareway without great fear and danger. It is impossible to describe all the uneven grounds, the great multitude of rocks & rocky shoals which are lying thereabouts.  
From coarseness to the Island Rodehell, 
Rodehell.  the course is north-east and by east about three leagues. Rodehell is a great rough Island with a saddle in the midst, which you must leave lying on the starboard side. The north point is a red point, there stand up long staves over end, like unto a Warder in Norway, you must go close alongst by them, or you may run in amidst the channel, according as shall be best convenient, but you may not go close by the north point over against it (which the Dutch shippers do call Jan Lambertsons point) because of a stony and steep little riff which lieth of from it, but you may run about by it upon your lead in seven or eight fathom, but may come no nearer; the right fareway betwixt then both is fourteen and fifteen fathom deep.  
Betwixt the point of coarseness & the Rodehell, it is not without danger to turn to windwards, especially you must be very careful not to run too far over to the south wards, but to the northwards, towards the main land it is indifferent clean: It is there in the fareway fifteen fathom deep, soft clay-ground.  
For not to miss this foresaid channel; or the north point of the Rodehell, then take the mark out a stern of the little Fisher, bring that even without the point of coarseness, & keep it so standing sailing towards the Rodehell, and so you shall not fail to fall right before the channel. This is a sure mark whereupon you may trust. If you fall somewhat to the southwards of the foresaid channel, you can see opening, but seemeth to be all whole to the main land, so that men (that are not well acquainted) might not know where to seek the channel, but sailing to the northwards the channel doth open itself.  
When as you shall be then within the foresaid point of Rodehell, you may anchor there where you please, & fetch a Pilot from the land, which may bring you up to the town Wybrough. It is there within fifteen fathom deep, and good soft clay-ground.  
If you will (being come within the Rodehell) sail up to Wybrough, then go on east and by south a shot of a cast piece unto a black point, leave that about 2 cables lengths on the larboard side, for there it is not clean. Being a little past this black point, then go on north-east, or eastnortheast a half league, and then you shall come against a great white sand-bay, but before you come by this sand-bay, you shall meet a rock with a grey stone like a buy upon the Flyestream, leave that foresaid rock on the starboard side, and the grey stone on the larboard side, & run amidst the channel through betwixt them both, there it is three fathom deep. It is in no wise to be done to sail up there for him that hath not been re before, but it is best to anchor a little within Rodehell & to let him be brought up by a Pilot.   

The Coast of Finland betwixt Elsevos, and Wybrough.  
The Channel of Elsevos lieth from Narghen or the Wolf north-east and by north & south-west and by south about seventeen leagues, and from Wranger south and north.  
Upon the west side off the channel lieth a high round rock, whereupon standeth a mast, or Warder, called Kubben, 
Kubben.  over against upon the other side of the channel lieth a long rock or Island called Sautum, 
Sautum.  & an half league to the eastwards of Kubben lieth another great round rock called Mely. 
Mely.  These three rocks are the best marks to be known of this foresaid channel.  
Betwixt Kubben and Sautum lieth that channel in from thence north-east until that you be within the rocks, and then northnortheast and north and by east, until you come before the river of Elsenvoes, 
Elsenvos.  there you may anchor betwixt the rocks in good anchor ground.  
There runneth also a Lieth through within the rocks, where you may sail alongst, and come out again into the sea by Putsfagre, this runneth about very crooked with many bights, but it is Pilots water.  
If you will sail to Borgo, 
Borgo.  then run a league to the eastwards of the foresaid rock Mely, there you shall find two high bare rocks, called the Tolcken, run in betwixt them both, but nearest to the eastermost, which is clean and clear close to it, and lieth somewhat further to seawards then the westermost. Westnorthwest from this eastermost high rock, lieth a little rock above water, leave that on the larboard side. When as then you shall be by this eastermost rock, which you leave lying on the starboard side of you, then go on northnortheast to Schoeland, that is a rough Island off from which lie many bare points, all which you must leave (with the Island also) on the starboard side, then run alongst close by these bare points. When you are passed them, go then north-east and by north, somewhat easterly, and so you shall see two other bare rocks, the eastermost of the greatness off a ship very steep and high, but the westermost is small, run in there betwixt them: the Sound is called Cramerpoort. 
Cramerpoort.  When you are within them, go then in north and by east, and then you shall presently meet with a great Island called Carmer, 
Cramer.  leave that on the starboard side, and so you run right on with an other great Island, called the Hester, leave that on the larboard side, and anchor betwixt the 2 Islands Cramer & the Hester, there is good anchor ground.  
From the mouth of the Sound of Elsenvoes to Peltingsound, 
Peltingsound.  the course is eastsoutheast 13 or 14 leagues. Peltingsound lieth in north-east, there you lie within a great many great rocks, or little Islands, sheltered for all winds. You may sail from thence through within the rocks all over where you desire to be, if you have a good skilful Pilot.  
From Peltingschares to Putsfagre 
Putsfagre.  it is 8 leagues. Putsfagre is a great rock, or Island, lying from High-land northnorthwest distant five or six leagues. About a league south from this Island Putsfagre lieth a sunken rock, which you must avoid. He that will sail through within the rocks, let him take a Pilot from Putsfagre, that may bring him through the rocks where he desireth to be: you may run in there every where, and within the rocks it is most all over good anchor-ground.  
From Putsfagre to the Epelschares, 
Epelschares.  the course is east six leagues: these are a great many out-rocks, a little to the eastwards of them lieth a great rock called Quadeschare which you may sail round about.  
From Epelscharen to the Goeschare, 
Goeschare.  the course is east somewhat northerly 9 or 10 leagues. That, & the lying of the land, & dangers from thence eastward, hath been described here before.   

How these lands do lie from the other, and from other lands.  

From the Wolf to the Kocxschaer east and by north 3 leagues.  
From Wolf to the Peltingschares eastnortheast 20 leag.  
From Wolf to Wranger east and by south 3 leagues.  
From the Kocxschaer to the east end of Wranger, south and by east 1 league.  
From the Kocxschaer to little Wranger southsoutheast, 2 leagues.  
From Wranger to Eckholm east and by south 14 leag.  
From Eckholm to the Castle of Telsburgh eastsoutheast, 5 leagues.  
From Telsburgh to the road of the Narve e. s.e. 15 leag.  
From the road of the Narve to the Russehaecks north & by west 5 leagues.  
From the Russehaecks to the River Nioa, or Oreschack, east north-east 22 leagues.  
From Oreschack to the Rodehell north w. 15 or 16 leag.  
From Rodehell to Schares terny southeast 10 leagues.  
From the Russehaecks to the Rodehell n.e. & by n. 23 lea.  
From Russehaecks to the Island Rette Sarre north 5 leag.  
From Rette Sarre to Summer, n. and by w. somewhat westerly 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Eckholm to the Island Highland e.n.e. 10 leagues.  
From the west side of High-land to the road of the Narve southeast and by south and southeast 15 leagues.  
From Highland to the little Tutters' south-west and by south 3 leagues.  
From Highland to the great Tutters south 3 leagues.  
From the Island with Mast to the little Tutters' east by south and eastsoutheast 3 leagues.  
From the Kocxschaer to the Island with the mast east & by south 18 or 19 leagues.  
From the Island with the mast to the Highland north-east and by east 4 or 5 leagues.  
From the Kocxschaer to high land east 23 leagues.  
From Highland to the Summer's east 7 leagues.  
From the Summers to the Goeschaer or great Fisher, north-east and by north somewhat easterly 7 leag.  
From the great Fisher to the little Fisher north-east & by east 3 leagues.  
From the little Fisher to the coarseness eastnortheast somewhat easterly 1 league.  
From coarseness to the Rodehell north-east & by e. 3 leag.  
From the sound of Elsenvoes to Peltingsound eastsoutheast 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Peltingsound to Putsfagre east 8 leagues.  
From Putsfagre to the Epelschaers' east 6 leagues.  
From the Epelschaers to the Goeschaer or great Fisher, east somewhat northerly 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Eckholm to Elsenvos northwest and by north somewhat westerly 23 leagues.  
From Highland to Peltingschares northwest & by west 9 leagues.  
From Highland to Putsfagre northnorthw. 5 or 6 leag.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

The Island Wranger showeth thus, when it is southeast and by east 3 leagues from you.  
Northwest point Midland Southeast point  
Thus showeth Eckholm, when you come from the westwards, & that it lieth to the eastwards from you.  
Southeast point Northwest point  
Thus showeth Eckholm, when you come from the eastwards, and that it is to the westwards from you.  
In this form showeth the Island the Huftes, when you are to the southwards of it, and sail alongst by the coast of Lyfland.  
The little Tutters show themselves thus, when they lie to the northwards from you.  
Thus showeth the great Tutters, when you sail alongst by the coast of Lysland, and that they lie to the northwards from you.  
Thus showeth the land to the eastwards of the River's mouth of the Narve, when you come thereabouts, coming off from the High-land.  
In this form showeth the land to the eastwards of the Narve, when you come off from the High-land.  
Thus showeth the Island High-land, when you see it coming from the westwards.     

The fifth Demonstration, Where in Are set forth the Coasts of Sweden, between Oeland and Stockholm.  
ABout two leagues more northerly over against it, on Oeland lieth Borckholm, 
Borckholm Coping wyke.  a little to the northwards of it lieth Copingwyke, where men do lad many Toomb-stones and other stones, with a northerly wind it is bad lying there.  
Northwest, or somewhat westerly from Borckholm, about 3 leagues on the Sweeds side, lieth a Haven in the rocks, where men do lad Beams, to the northwards of it northwest and by north from Borckholm lieth Munsteraas, 
Munsteraas.  that is a good Haven also for very great ships.  
From Calmer to the Sweeds-Ioufer, 
Sweeds-Ioufer.  the course is northnortheast 9 or 10 leagues, this is a round rock, and very high, you may see it alongst over Oeland, being a good ways to the eastwards of Oeland; it is not very great, but clean round about, so that you may anchor near under it on every side 18 & 19 fathom, but by reason that it is not broad, there cometh in (with hard winds) a rolling Sea.  
From the Sweeds joufer to the channel of Westerwyke, or Silbuy, the course is northnorthwest 7 leagues, but from Northeroorden the north-end of Oeland northwest 8 leagues.  
The channel of Westerwyke and Silbuy is called Idesound, 
Idesound.  after a great rock lying on the north side of this channel, called Ydehoe, off from it lie many rocks, some above and some under water 2 great leagues to seawards, which are called Idebanks. 
Idebancks   
He that will sail from the north-end of Oeland towards the barsound, and by bare winds doth come a little to the westwards, without the right fareway, must be very careful, and take good heed that he get not in amongst them.  
For to know the channel of Westerwyke, you shall see a high bare rock, bring that northwest from you, and sail so right in with it, & then you shall fall with the land right before it, & then also you shall espy another bare rock, whereupon standeth a Fisher's beacon, and also another to the southwards of it, with a mast, sail in betwixt the two rocks, the channel lieth in northwest and northwest and by north when you are come within them you may sail alongst through the rocks where you desire to be, to Silbuy, Strixholm, Flourbuy, Vrowenberg, Westerwy-up to the northwards to Schelsuyt & other places more, there it is all clean ground, and 12, 15, 18, and 20 fathom deep.  
If you be bound to Silbuy, 
Silbuy.  then sail up to the northwards or eastwards until you come before the town, and anchor there in the midst between the rocks in 7, 8 and 9 fathom.  
If you be bound to Flourbuy, 
Flourbuy.  or Vrowenbergh, then sail in west, and west and by north through the rocks till you come against the main land, there you may anchor before Flourbuy, or sail up northwest betwixt the Island of Vrowenbergh and the main land, and anchor there in 12 fathom, also you may run through that way until you come to Westerwyke. 
Westerwyke.  Westerwyke lieth from Silbuy through within the rock west, and west and by north there it is in the faireway fifteen & sixteen fathom deep.  
From Silbuy to Schelsuyr 
Schelsuyr.  it is north and by west 7 leagues, all alongst through within the rocks. Schelsuyr is a good haven, there lieth a rock in the haven's mouth, about which you may run in on both sides, and anchor before the town.  
To the eastwards of Schelsuyr lieth the Hondtsbay and the Green Island, 
Hondsbay Green-Island.  there it is also good anchoring. You may run from Silbuy alongst by it until you come in the Sound of Southercoppen and Northcoppen.  
From the channel of Westewyke to the Barsound, the coast lieth alongst by the rocks north and by east 9 leag. But from the north end of Oeland to the Barsound the course is north & by west 15 leagues, go not more westerly, that you get not into the sunken rocks & foul grounds of the Idebanks.  
The north end of Oeland runneth somewhat far off flat. If you run out close by Oeland, and sail on north & by west, than you run alongst fare enough without the Idebancks, and so shall fall with the land about a half league to the southwards of Barsound 
Barsoun●.  against a deal of low out-rocks. It seemeth a far off (by reason of the multitude of rocks and little Islands to be all firm land, but coming near it, it is all broken. You shall see there also an Island by which there seemeth to be a channel, but you must be further to the northwards, run alongst by the coast in 7 fathom, so long until that you see out a head an high outrock, these shall be the Heerscharen, 
Heerscharen.  which are very foul, and lie off from the north point of the channel, a good ways eastsoutheast into sea, all which you must leave on the starboard side and run alongst by them unto the channel.  
When as you come out of the sea, you must take very great heed that you fall not with the land to the northwards of the channel, that you do not run into the foresaid Heerscharen. When you come before the channel, you shall see 2 Sound or going in, the southermost seemeth to be the broadest and fairest, but the northermost is fare the best, and lieth in northnorthwest.  
Caarte van SWEDEN Van Oelandt tot aen Stocholm.  
Caarte vantgat van ABBO, host VTTOY.  
Caarte van STOCHOLMSE Liet.  
About an English mile within the Sound, you leave (in sailing up) the Taldersound 
Taldersound.  on the larboard side, there is no more than 6 or 7 foot water, from thence you edge up north and also north-east a half league, than again west and by south about 2 league, afterwards westnorthwest a league unto Karholm, which is a Gentleman's house with a mill.  
From Karholm to Stickbrough is further west about two leagues, that is a castle upon a little Island, you must go about to the southwards of it through a bridge.  
From Stickbrough 
Stickborg  sail up alongst the Sound, & leave most of all the rocks (which you see) on the larboard side, except one or 2 a little above Stickbrough, leave them on the starboard side. About 2 leagues past Stickbourgh standeth a Gentleman's house called Man, there is the place where men do lad, a half league from Southercopping.  
For to sail from without the the Northercopping, you run in by the Swartbodem up westwards unto Schenes and Braburch, and alongst unto the Barwyk the sound of Northcopping, or else you must come in at the Barsound through within the rocks into the Brawyke 
Brawyke.  unto Northercopping but it is not to be done without a Pilot for them that are not there very well acquainted, for it is Pilots water.  
From the north end of Oeland to the channel Nycopping by the Hevering, 
Hevering.  the course is due north about 18 or 19 leagues, but if you run close alongst by the end of Oeland, you shall fall with the land a little to the westwards of the Hevering. The Hevering is a great radish bare rock, whereupon stand 3 or 4 Fishers beacons, heretofore there was wont to stand up on it a barrel upon a mast, which men might see far of at sea, but it is taken off in the last wars between the Kings of Sweden and Denmark, now there standeth nothing upon it but some Warders.  
Two great leagues to the westwards of the Hevering, to wit, south-west from it, lie the foresaid rocks called the Swartboden, 
Swartboden.  which are great rocks, & are sometimes mistaken for the Hevering, you may sail in also by these Swartboden, and run through within Oxelen and the other rocks, & come by the point of Hommelwyke into the right sound of Nycoppen.  
When you come before the channel of the Hevering, you can at first hardly see a channel, or any opening, but bring the great rock the Hevering northwest from you, & sail so right in, and runin close alongst to the northwards of it. In the sailing in you shall see two channels, the northermost is within full of dangers, so that you cannot go through there. The right channel by the Hevering it so narrow, that you can hardly turn too and again there.  
From the Hevering you must sail in first n. w. a league and half, or 2 leagues, unto a great rock, leave it on the starboard side, & sail about by it, & go in alongst n. w. & by north. A little within the foresaid great rock, thwart of the point of the Hommelwyke, 
Hommelwyke.  you shall find also a great rock on the starboard side, you may run about to the westwards of it until you come within the other rocks & little Islands, and anchor there in 3 fathom soft ground: but if you will anchor there, than you must shun somewhat the w. end of the great Holm, because of a sunken rock that lieth even without the point of the rock. From that foresaid road unto Hassellholm the course is yet in alongst n. w. and north but with ships of great draught you must anchor before the channel of Hasselholm. From the Hevering to the Hassellholm it is in all about 3 or 4 leag.  
From Hassellholm 
Hassellholm.  alongst upwards through the stone reach, it is not deeper than nine foot, you must also (if you will sail up there) first set the rocks, or sunken rocks with beakons with your boat or else you should sometimes sail upon some of the rocks in seven foot depth. The narrowest of the Stonereach 
Stonereach.  is thwart of an Island which you must leave on the starborard side, off from which lieth a sunken rock in the narrow, you must go close alongst by the sunken rock, for to the westwards of it is very shoal water. Being past this stony ground, you shall get oasie ground, where it is not deeper than six foot; being come over that by the town Nycopping, 
Nicopping.  it is again eight foot deep, but stony ground. This ships lie without the town thwart of the beakons over against the Castle, which lyath on the west side of the river.  
From Hassellholm to the town Nycopping it is about a league first up north and by w. and afterwards west. For one that is unacquainted, it is not easy to sail up, it is also Pilots water, so soon as you come within the channel, you can get a Pilot to bring you where you desire to be.  
From Nycopping you may sail alongst through the rocks to the northwards off Hassellholm unto Trosa and Telghen.  
Landesoort 
Landsoort  (which is the west point of the Liet of Stockholm) lieth from the Hevering east and by north distant 6 or 7 leagues.  
About half ways betwixt both lieth a great high rock very easy to be known, a good ways without the land alone called Hartsoe, 
Hartsoe.  and a little league to the westwards of Landsoort lie also some fowl out-rocks, called the Heyr-hamer. When as you sail from the Hevering on eastnortheast, than you run alongst a little without the Hartsoe, leaving it on the larboard side. With that curtsy, on cannot also sail too near the Heyr-hamer, 
Heyr-hamer.  and then you leave it lying also on the larboard side towards the land.  
The land to the westwards of Landsoort lieth w. or w. and by north with divers great rocks and havens where you may sail into, About a league to the westwards of it lieth a haven within a low rock in betwixt two other low Rocks, there you must make you fast with cables on both shores, and with an anchor in the Sound. Before the haven's mouth lieth a high round rock, which shutteth the haven's mouth.  
A little to the westwards off Hartsoe goeth in a haven or Deep, where you may run through with Barks within Elsnap unto Stock-holm.  
A little to the westwards of that Deep lieth the Sound of Telghen lying in northwest, almost unto the great Lack de Mell, upon the end of that Sound lieth Telgen, but at the mouth of the Sound lieth a little town Torsa.  
About an English mile south-west from the point of Landsoort, lie 2 rocks even with the water, and within these rocks close by Landsoort lieth also a sunken rock. He that cometh from the southwards, being bound to Stokholm, and falleth with the land to the westwards of the point of Landsoort, must take heed of them; you may sail within these two rocks (lying even with the water) to wit, betwixt them & the foresaid sunken rock, and also (as Pilots say) you may sail through within the sunken rock, that is, betwixt the sunken rock and the main land.  
Landsoort and the north point of Oeland lie southsouthwest and northnorthe. a little more northerly and a little more southerly distant 23 or 24 leagues. If you sail on northnortheast from the north end of Oeland, you shall fall with the land right with Landsoort, or a little to the eastwards of it. It is better to fall with the land somewhat to the westwards of it, then to the eastwards of it, to the westwards the land is better to be known then the rocks to the eastwards off it. Therefore when as you will sail from the north end of Oeland to Stockholm, especially in dark weather, go on somewhat more northerly then n. n. e. or north & by east, & then you shall run in sight off the foresaid rock Hartsoe, which is easy to be known.  
The Lieth of Stockholm goeth in north-east by the point of Landsoort. About a league east from the pointly some black rocks, some above and some under water, called the Karwasen. Betwixt them and the point, about once so near the Karwasen, as the point, lieth an other black rock, not great called the young Karwasen, betwixt that rock and the point off Landsoort, men do sail into the channel of Stock-holm. Close to the point lieth also a little Island which you must leave on the larboard side, and run alongst to the eastwards of it, a league north-east from the point lieth the Wigstone, 
W gstone  lying southeast or eastsoutheast thwart off from the shore. This a somewhat a long rock with tree hommocks, the two westermost are the greatest, and show like a saddle the eastermost hommock is the smallest, upon it standeth a little walled cape, you must sail alongst to the eastwards of it, and leave the rock on the larboard side. You may well sail also about to the westwards of this Wigstone, it is clean round about, but on the west side it is narrowest, betwixt it and the land lieth also a rock, with a little rock off from it, which you must avoid.  
A league north-east from the Wigstone lieth the Middle-stone, 
M●ddle-stone.  which is a great high rock with a great cliff or saddle, with another great rock a little to the westwards of it: you cannot sail through betwixt them, they are fast one to the other with rocks. In sailing up men leave this Middle-stone on the starboard side, and run about to the westwards of it.  
From by east the Wigstone to the Middle-stone, to wit, alongst to the westwards of it, the course is northnortheast. About a great English mile east from the Wigstone, and north from the Karwasen lieth another rock, called the Gomberg-stone 
G●mberg stone.  and to the eastwards of it another, called Schaeropen. When you sail from the Wigstone to the Middle-stone, you leave them both on the starbord side.  
Thwart of the Middlestone, on the Westland lieth the haven of Ramskloof, 
●●ms●o●f.  there you may anchor within the rocks. The Middle-stone lieth about a half league south-west from the east point of the Lieth, to wit, from the e. point off the main land, or the Swedes schares, betwixt them both goeth in a channel, called the Dansk channel. 
D●nske-c●annell.  For to sail in there you must avoid the foresaid east point a good ways off (whereupon standeth a mill) and run in by the Middle-stone, for from that point runneth of a great ledge off rocks a good ways to seawards, towards the Middle-stone. From by west the Middlestone to Elsnap; the course is north-east three leagues.  
When you are a little past the Middle-stone, you come in betwixt the two lands, and a little within the east point you shall meet with a rock in the fareway, called the Red-Cow. 
R●d Cow.  You may sail about it on both sides, but men leave it commonly on the starboard side, within that rock, that is on the north side you may anchor.  
Elsnap 
El●nap.  is a haven behind two little Islands, where the King's ships of wart do commonly lie to tarry for a wind, when they are bound to sea, there it is very easy lying, when with contrary winds you can neither get up nor down, you can come in and out there both from the northwards and from the southwards very conveniently. Coming from the southwards, you can see over the southermost little Island, the masts of the ships that lie behind it. For to sail in there behind it, run in about by the s. point of the Island Elsnap behind it, and then you leave a little black rock on the south side of the haven's mouth lying on the larboard side. Betwixt the two little Islands of Elsnap runs also a channel through where you may go through with Huyes and small ships. From thwart of Elsnap, the course is inwards northnortheast about two leagues, to the Redholm, 
Redholm  that is a great Red round rock grown full of trees, to the westwards off it lieth another smaller bare rock, the fareway is there in through betwixt them, and about a musket shot broad in this narrow it is all over good anchor-ground. From the north end of the Redholm lieth off a great row off rocks unto the east shore of the Lieth, where you must sail through. When as you sail through betwixt the Redholm & the foresaid bare rock to the eastwards of it, go then on yet about an English mile further northnortheast until you come thwart of the fourth channel counting from the Redholm which lieth through the foresaid row of rocks to the northwards of the Redholm, that is called S. John's channel, 
S. john's. channel.  it lieth through about northnorthwest, or somewhat more northerly, it is a short Inlet, run through there. Being through S. John's channel, go again northnortheast about an English mile to the Redholm, which is a long rock upon it stand three barrels upon masts, this you must leave on the larboard side, and run alongst to the eastwards of it. From the north point of that Redholm 
Redholm.  runneth of a little riffe or shoal, which you must avoid. From the Redholm unto the great Daler, 
Great Daler.  the course is northw. and by north, that is a haven on the west side of the Liet, there lieth a Churchyard within on the land, where the slain Poles people in the last Polish wars lie buried, Thwart of that Churchyard is a Sand-bay, there is good anchor ground, like as is all over in that foresaid haven. At the north point of the haven the great Daler lieth a sunken rock close by the land, called the Saltsack, 
Saltsack.  upon which is no more ten nine foot water. From the great Daler, the course is alongst north-east, a half league unto the little Daler, 
Little Daler.  which is a high steep rock, the highest that you find amongst all the the rocks in the Lieth, run alongst to the westwards of it, and leave it on the starboard side. Over against it on the west side lieth another rock, which is called also the Daler, to the westwards of it, to wit, betwixt that rock and the main land, is also an opening, where you may sail through. A little within that foresaid rock on the westland goeth in the Hardstick 
Hartstrick  which is a Sound that lieth in first west, and west and by north, a good ways in, and then northwest and comet into the Lieth to the northwards of Waxholm, by King's haven. The King's Majesty hath caused to sink some ships in the mouth of the Sound, so that men cannot go through there with great ships, but only with little barks. From the little Daler, the course is northnorthwest about a half league to Steendeur, 
Steendeur  a great Island, which you must leave on the starboard side, and run close alongst by it and so you shall leave a round rock to the southwards over against it on the larboard side, and sail through betwixt them: this channel lieth through northwest. At the west end of the great Island Steendeur lieth a little black rock, you must run about by it again to the eastwards.  
From Steendeur to Kow-haven, 
Kow haven.  the course is eastnortheast two leagues, that is a rock lying in the broad Sound, leave it on the starboard side, & sail to the westwards of it alongst by the west land unto Berckhaven. Betwixt both about half ways lieth a haven, called the Crosse-haven, there it is good lying for west and northwest winds.  
Berckhaven 
Berckhaven.  lieth from Cow-haven north-east and by north distant about two leagues: this is a haven betwixt two Islands where is good anchoring for all winds, as well for them which come from Stockholm, and desire to sail to the Northbodem, as also for them that will sail off towards Landsoort, there is (like as at most places betwixt the rocks and Islands) good clay ground. When you come from Kow-haven, and are bound to Stockholm, you must leave these two Islands of Berckhaven on the starboard side, and run in about betwixt them and the point of the main land. From the narrow betwixt Berckhaven and the foresaid point to Duer-haven 
Deur-haven.  the course is northwest about a half league. On the south-west side of that fareway thwart of the point over against Duer-haven, lie two sunken rocks on each side of the point one, the one on the northwest side, and the other on the southeastside, commonly there standeth upon each of them a little tree for a beacon.  
From the point of Deur-haven unto the Draybome, 
Draybom  the course is south-west and by west somewhat westerly about a half league, it is called also the Duer-haven, of from the point with in the Islands until you come before the buy, alongst there, and also within the Islands, it is good lying every where.  
The little Islands which lie in the channel of the Draybome, you must leave them on the starboard side of you.  
From the Draybome to the Windstream, 
Windstream.  the course is first north, & north & by west until about half ways, there you shall find a little Island with a little tree, leave that on the larboard side, and go from thence in n. northwest to the Windstream. In the Windstream is a good anchoring by the shore, except in the north end of the stream, there is no anchor ground. From the Draybome to the Windstream it is about a league distance.  
From the Windstreame to the Seugh, 
The Seugh.  the course is westnorthwest a half league, that is a chindle or stonebanck even with the water, run alongst to the northwards of it, and leave it on the larboard.  
From the Seugh to Scheggen, 
Scheggen  the course is west and by north a league, run alongst there by the south shore. When you come against Scheggen, you shall see upon the point of the south shore a little round tree, over against that little tree somewhat more northerly then in the middle off the channel, lieth a sunken rock, for to avoid it you must run nearest the south shore. The reach off Scheggen lieth through west, and west & by south about an English mile, it is narrow, but hath every where anchor ground.  
From Scheggen, the course is westsouthwest an English mile to Steck-sound, or west to Kingsdeep, the little Islands on the starboard side, 
Steckholm.  as you sail to Steck-sound, are clean round about, so that you may go on all sides about by them.  
Coming close to Steck-sound you shall find a sunken rock a little by south the fareway. The Steck-sound lieth through southsouthwest, it is a short Inlet about a cables length long.  
From Steck-sound unto Waxholm 
Waxholm.  it is south-west westerly above an English mile. Upon Waxholm standeth the King's Castle, there all the ships are visited whether they go up or down, the channel there by it, is paled to so near, that they can shut it with a bar.  
From Waxholm to the Wester reach, 
Wester reach.  the course is westsouthwest and through the Wester reach south-west. From thence alongst west to Eeldam, that is a very narrow channel a little more than a ships length broad.  
From Eeldam, 
Eeldam.  the course is west to Mouseholm, which is about a league from Waxholm, men leave the high rough Mouseholm on the starboard side, and run alongst by it to the southwards.  
From the Mouseholm 
Mouseholm.  to Kingshaven it is a league west, and west and by north all alongst by the south-land.  
From Kingshaven 
King's haven.  unto the town Stockholme, the course is northwest, and northwest and by west, also a league distance along by the shore. When you come before the Town, you may anchor where you please.  
He that falleth to leewards, or by any other accident cannot come by Landsoort into the Liet of Stockholm, 
Stockholm.  he may sail in more to the northwards through divers channels. Amongst others there is one where men may sail into, and come by the great Daler into the Lieth: there goeth another in by the Swedes-sand, through it men come by Berckhaven into the Lieth. The knowledge off this channel is a very high rock, with another that is not so high, thereby to the southwards of it, betwixt these two rocks goeth in this channel, it is very narrow in the coming in, not above two ships lengths broad. So soon as you come in within these rocks, you may edge up about by the lowest, which is the southermost, and anchor under it in very good anchor ground.  
From that road in the Swedes sands the Sound goeth up first about n. w. & by north, & n. west, 5 leagues unto Berker-haven into the Lieth of Stockholm. This is a very easy channel as well for to sail in as out, but because it is not easy to be known, coming in out the sea, it is seldom used.  
To the southwards or the westwards off these two foresaid rocks, at the coming in of this channel, it is all low land. If you come from the southwards, and run alongst by that low land, so long until that you begin to get the high land, you shall also run in sight of these two foresaid hommocks. About a league to seawards from them, lie three or four small rocks; for to sail in there you must leave them on the starboard side, and in sailing out on the larboard side.  
From the south-end of Oeland to the south-end off Gotland, the course is eastnortheast and north-east and by east three and twenty or four and twenty leagues but to the Karels north-east somewhat northerly seven and twenty leagues.  
The course alongst the farewaie, for to sail from the south end of Oeland through betwixt Oeland and Gotland, is north-east & by north.  
The Island Oeland is twenty four leagues long, and a league and half broad, when men sail alongst by it, they may count eighteen towards upon it, which are all flat: then east coast is a clean coast, & lieth northnortheast & southsouthwest, but about 7 or 8 leagues to the southwards of the north end, there shooteth off a little riffe, thwart from the land a great half league into the sea, which men must avoid: by it goeth in a little haven, where indifferent ships may go in, otherwise Oeland hath no havens.  
From the south end of Gotland runneth off a foul stony riffe, a good ways in to the sea, you may run about by it upon the lead in seven, eight and nine fathom.  
The Karels are two little high Islands, lying on the west side of Gotland north and by west about seven leagues from the south point of Gotland, and east and w. about a half league one from the other the greatest is called the great Karell, 
The great Karell.  and lieth a great league from the land the smallest, the little Karell, and lieth about a half league from the shore. When you come from the southwards, the great Karell showeth itself in two hommocks, and the little Karell 
Little Karell.  in one hommock, and nearer to the land. Under the little Karell is round about good road, in eight, nine, and ten fathom, and is round about clean and clear, without foul grounds. Men do anchor betwixt it and the land, in six or seven fathom, there it is good lying for all winds, as well for them that are bound to the eastwards, as to the westwards. He that shall be to the northwards of Gotland, and shall get a contrary wind, may also anchor under the great Karell, but under the Little Karell is fare the best road. Under the great Karell men may anchor, on the west and east side but on the north and south side it is soul, therefore come no nearer it by night, then in eleven or twelve fathom. Betwixt the two Karels it is thirteen and fourteen fathom deep.  
About half ways betwixt the Karels & the south end off Gotland, southsoutheast from the Karell, lieth the haven Boswyke: 
Boswyke.  thwart of it runneth off a riffe, an the north side of the haven a good ways from the shore, come no nearer it than in seven or eight fathom. When you are thwart of the south point, about a half league from the land, and will sail alongst to the northwards of Gotland, you must not sail on more northerly than northwest, as well for to avoid that riffe of Boswyke, as for to sail a weather the Karels.  
Four leagues north-east from the Karel, lieth the Island Reefholm, 
Reefholm  thwart of it men do run into Westergorte: you may sail & anchor round about it. A little to the northwards of it lieth the northwest point of Gotland.  
Two leagues to the northwards of the high point lieth the town Wisbuy, about seven leagues north-east from the Karell. Men were wont in old time to lie there behind a great head or Chest.  
Wisbuy 
Wisbuy.  hath been in times past a famous merchant town, where was wont to be driven great trade of merchandise, but it is now through the will of God, altogether fallen down, and come to nothing. The Hance towns haven a long time there held their staple. The old Sea laws were made there, and also the old famous Read-carde. Men may see yet to this day many old ruinous houses of costly marble and hewn stones, whereby men may partly perceive and Judge, what manner of staltenisse there hath been.  
From Wisbuy the coast lieth forth north-east & by east towards the end of Gotland about nine leagues. But from the Karell to Gotshe sand, the course is north-east one & twenty or two and twenty leagues: there is a little Island, whereupon dwelleth no people, and standeth full of trees: you may sail round about it, which hath a white strand. From the northwest point thereof shooteth off a little riff, & likewise one from the south point, a good ways off into sea, towards the north end of Gothland. On every side of Gotsche sand, you may anchor in six, seven, eight, nine, ten and twelve fathom, all clean and good anchor ground, but these foresaid riffs you must avoid. It lieth northnortheast six leagues distant from Faro, the north end of Gotland, when you lie there under it at anchor, you cannot see Gotland.  
The Copper stone lieth from Gotsche sand north west and by west distant three great leagues.  
Upon the south end of the east side of Gotland standeth a high tower, called Howbrough, and thereafter the south end of Gotland also is called Howbrough. By it goeth in a little river, before which you may anchor in six or seven fathom.  
Five leagues north-east from the aforesaid south point lieth Heyligh-holm, which is a good haven, but by reason it is but little used, it is therefore also but little known.  
Two leagues to the eastwards of Heyligh-holm lieth the haven of Narwyck, upon the east side of the Haven lieth a long rock, by which you must run in, and leave another sharp rock on the larboard side, within the haven you may anchor in four or five fathom.  
Two leagues to the eastwards of it lieth Sandwyk which is a good haven for a west, northwest, north-east, and southeast wind, and lieth in about north, a south wind bloweth there open in: On the east point, (which is a low bare point) lieth a Holm, which is fast to the land, upon it standeth a Warder: From this point runneth off a little sandriffe, which you may sound about in five or six fathom. Within at this Holm is a bridge of Masts which lieth off a little from the shore. If you will anchor there in the Haven, then run in alongst by the east shore, until you come within the bridge, and anchor there nearest shore, so that the foresaid east point do stand southeast, or southeast and by south from you, in four fathom, four and an half, or five fathom, there is clean clay sand ground, and very easy lying for west, north and east winds.  
A league to the eastwards of Sandwyck lying the Island of Eastergore, 
Eastergore.  about half ways betwixt both the ends of Gotland n.e. from the s. w. point, this is a bare Island without trees. Under this Island is very easy road for all winds, as well for them that are bound to the eastwards, as to the w. wards. Coming from the westwards, or from Sandwyck alongst by the land, then is the northw. point, (which is a high bare grey piont) hidden behind a point of the main land of Gotland, so that it seemeth a fare off to be no Island, but coming near it, it openeth itself, that you may see large enough through betwixt them: sail in there betwixt them both in the midst of the channel, it is there clean and clear, but somewhat uneven of ground, to wit, eight, ten, twelve and fourteen fathom, but you need not fear. If you will anchor under it for north-east or east winds, than anchor betwixt the land and the Island, so that the aforesaid bare grey northwest point stand north, and the southermost east from you, in nine or ten fathom. Or if you will anchor for a south, south-west, or west wind, then run further in about by that aforesaid bare grey point, bring it south-southwest from you, and anchor there in seven, eight, nine, or ten fathom, there it is clean ground of small white & black sand. A little to the northwards of the Island is a great Bay on Gotland, there you may also anchor in seven and eight fathom, for westerly winds.  
If you will sail in or out, to the northwards of Eastergore then come not very near the Island, because there lieth off a riffe from the east point fare into the sea, which is a great half league without the land, not deeper than two fathom & a half, stony and very uneven, and is to be through, that nearer to the land it is shoaler and fouler. From the southeast side runneth off also a flat, a good ways to Seawards, at some places not deeper than three, four & five fathom, and also very uneven, whereof you must take heed.  
Four leagues north and by east from Eastergore lieth a haven, called Sliet or Sliet haven, lying in north and north and by west, behind some little Islands, there it is good lying for easterly, westerly, & n. winds. Upon one of the norther must little Islands standeth a ruinous church. You must come in there alongst by the shore from the southwards. From thence to Farosound the coast lieth north and by west two leagues.  
Farosound you may run into, in two and three fathom water, there standeth a Church with a flat steeple upon the land, From Farosound lieth off a foul dangerous riffe, a league and half, or 2 leagues into sea, called Salfonteyn, you must take very good heed there of, when you will run about to the northwards of Gotland.  
From Farosound to Gotschesand, the course is north-northeast, about 7 leagues.  

Of the Depths and grounds about these Coasts.  
Betwixt the south ends off Oeland and Gotland in the fareway, it is uneven for to sound, sometimes men have two and twenty, three & twenty, & sometimes again eight and twenty, nine and twenty, & thirty fathom, all black mingled ground, sometimes stones so great as pease, of colour like black earth.  
When Howbrough is northnortheast 7 leagues from you, there it is fifteen fathom deep, stony ground, from thence on north-east 2 leagues, there it is twenty fathom deep, foul stony ground. Near about the places, so far from land that you cannot see Gotland, are banks, where it is not deeper than twelve fathom. The like uneven grounds are also thwart of the southend of Oeland, as hath been said in the former, but betwixt them both is deeper water. If you come in the farewaye from Rye to Brontholm betwixt the south ends of Gotland and Oeland, and must lie by with contrary winds, when you are in ten or twelve fathom, and then sail towards Oeland, you shall get deeper water.  
If you lie by betwixt Oeland and Reefcoll, and that Reefcoll come to be southsoutheast and south and by east from you, so fare without the land, that you cannot see it, than you shall get also the like uneven ground of ten and twelve fathom, red gross stony sand, & also blackish gross sandy stone ground. If you be nearest to Oeland, you shall get, in ten or twelve fathom pits in the tallow, so that it seemeth, that those grounds off Oeland do run over unto, or near Reefcoll. The like grounds and unevenesse do seem to lie over the sea also from the south end of Gotland towards Rosehead: for when the south end of Gotland cometh to be about north from you, although it be fourteen or sixteen leagues from you, you shall find depth of sixteen & twenty fathom soft ground, like as off from Oeland, but if Gotland be more easterly or westerly from you, you shall have deeper water.  
When you are about a league by west the south-west point of Gotland, so that it be southeast, or eastsoutheast from you about a league, than the Karels lie about north from you, which you may even see in clear weather, there aboutes it is shoal water a good ways off from the shore. When the west point or steep point is about north from you a little to the eastwards or to the westwards of it, there is ten, twelve, fourteen, sixteen, and eighteen fathom deep, a great ways from the land: but when that point cometh to be north-east, eastnortheast, or east from you, there it is above forty fathom deep.  
Betwixt the south-west point of Gotland, and the north point of Oelandt it is also very deep, so that there you cannot cast ground with forty fathom.  
When you are northwest and northwest and by north about two leagues from Houbrough there you have great red stone sand, & black stones in it, so great as beans.  
Betwixt Gotland and the Sweeds schares in the farewaye it is four and thirty, and six and thirty and eight and thirty fathom deep, and close by Gotland five and twenty fathom.  
When the tower of Houbrough is westnorthwest from you, so fare as you may see it from the poop, there it is thirty and one and thirty fathom deep, but being northnorthwest from you it is shoaler, five and twenty and six and twenty fathom.  
Betwixt Howbrough and Eastergore lieth a bank of four and twenty fathom, gross red sand, so fare without the land, that you cannot see the land out of the top. To the eastwards of it lieth another bank of fourteen fathom grey and white sand, when you are over it, you shall have no ground in forty fathom.  
Two leagues without the land, by west Eastergore, there it is about one & thirty fathom soft ground.  
He that saileth from Brontholm alongst by Oeland towards Eastergore, let him not spare his lead, but sound often for these aforesaid banks and grounds; thereby you may well make some reckoning.  
If you should make reckoning to come by night with Gotland on the southeast side, and have no good sight, then come no nearer the land (about the north end or south end, also by Eastergore) then in twenty or four and twenty fathom, and so you can take no hurt by night. By day you may come near enough to it at many places, in seven, eight or ten fathom.   

How these lands do lie one from the other and from other lands.  

From Houbrough to Eastergore north-east 12 or 13 leag.  
From Eastergore to Farosound north & by east 7 leag.  
From Farosound to Gotsche sand northnortheast and north and by east 6 leagues.  
From Houbrough to the Karels northnorthwest 7 leag.  
From the Karels to Wisbuy north-east. 7 leagues.  
From the Karels to Gotsche sand north. 21 or 22 leag.  
From Houbrough to the north end of Oeland northwest, 14 leagues.  
From the Karels to the swedes Jonckurow west and by north 13 leagues.  
From the Karels to the channel of Stockholme north, a little more westerly 23 leagues.  
From the Karels to Boeckschaer north-east northerly 46 leagues.  
From Gotsche sand to Boeckschaer north east, and by north, a little more northerly 20 or 21 leagues.  
From Gotsche sand to the south point of the Alands haff north and by east 33 or 34 leagues.  
From Gotsche sand to Wttoy north-east and by east 36 leagues.  
From Gotsche sand to Dagerorte eastnortheast 26 leag.  
From Gotsche sand to Derwinde southeast, 31 or 32 leagues.  
From Eastergore to Dagerorte north-east, and by east, 39 leagues.  
From Eastergore to Derwinda east and by south 29 leagues.  
From Eastgore to Quinsbrough deep south and by east, 52 leagues.  
From Eastergore to Rose-head south and by west 45 leagues.  
From Houbrough to Hondsorte eastnortheast & north east and by east, 50 leagues.  
From Houbrough to Lyserorte east and by north, somewhat easterly 40 leagues.  
From Houbrough to Derwinda east somewhat northerly 37 leagues.  
From Houbrough to Dermemell southeast 37 leagues.  
From Houbrough to Quinsbrough deep southsoutheast 48 leagues.  
From Houbrough to Rosehead south 35 leagues.  
From the north end of Gotland to Derwinda eastsoutheast somewhat southerly 28 or 29 leagues.  
From Scheggens to the Sweedes Jofuer northnortheast, 7 leagues,  
From the sweden Joufer to Idesound the channel off Westerwyke, or Silbuy, north and by west somewhat westerly 7 leagues.  
From the Swedes Joufer to Northeroorden, the north end of Oeland east and by north 3 or 4 leagues.  
From Northeroorden to the channel of Westerwyke north west 8 leagues.  
From Northeroorden to the Barsound, north and by west 15 leagues.  
From Northeroorden to the Havering, or the channel off Nycopping north 18 or 19 leagues.  
From Northeroorden to Hartsoe north and by east, 20 or 21 leagues.  
From Northeroorden to Landsoort northnortheast a little more northerly 21 or 22 leagues.  
From Hevering to Landsoort east and by north 6 or 7 leagues.    

How these lands do show themselves at sea.  

West point. Houbrough.  
Thus showeth the west point, or northwest point of Gotland, when you come from the southwards.  
When Gotschen sand is north-east from you two leagues it showeth thus.  
In this form showeth the land a little to the westwards of Eastergore, when that point is a great league west from you, there it is four and twenty and five and twenty fathom deep, soft ground.  
Eastergore being a league west from you. showeth thus, there it is five and twenty fathom deep.     
FINIS.   

The second part. THE FIRST BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN Is contained the Description of the Seacoasts of Holland, Sealand, and Flanders, from tessel to the Heads.  
Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famous Seamen, and lovers off Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


Pascaarte van de NOORT SEE Vertonende van Calais tot Dronten. als oock tusschen Doeveren en Hitlandt.    

The second part of the New LIGHTNING COLUMN, OR SEA MIRROR. THE FIRST BOOK, Of the WESTERN NAVIGATION Containing The description of the Seacoasts of Holland, Zealand, and Flanders, from tessel to the Heads of Dover and Calais.  

The first demonstration. Where in Are delineated the Tessel-streame, and the Channel of the same.  
WHEN you sail from Amsterdam to the Fall of Vrck, you must keep the middle of the channel, in sailing to Tyoort, & from thence over Pampus, 
Pampus  with a ship of great draught, that draweth ten foot or more, keepe Marken church without to the land of Udam, called Schyteldoecks-haven, so long until that the steeple of Zuyderwouw come past Kinnigherbeurt, which are the houses half way betwixt Schyteldoecks-haven & Durgerdam, go then towards the land east, until that the New church of Amsterdam come about Durgerdam, keep that so standing, until that the church of Weesp be come past the House or Castle at Muyen, so that it do stand somewhat nearer to Muyen then to the House, keep Weesp standing so, until that Edam come without the east end of Marken. In this fare way it is a foot deeper, then if you sailed right through.  
For to avoid Muyen sand: men were wont to bring the houses which were wont to stand upon Tyoort to the southwards of the Heyliger-stee at Amsterdam, thereby you may make some reckoning, they are good longest marks: when Monnickedam is about the west end of Schyteldoecks-haven, and the house at Muyen betwixt Weesp and the church at Muyen, then are you thwart of Muyen sand. For to sail right through over Pampus, then keep the steeple of Diemen over or about the point of Tyoort, so long as you can see Tyoort, that is a right longest mark for to sail over Pampus.  
When you are come thwart of the east end of Marken, go then on north-east, or somewhat more eastwardly towards the Fall of Urck, which is seven leagues: when you are come with in a great league of Urck, you shall meet with a hard sand, called the Houtribbe, 
The houtribbe.  lying southeast and northwest thwart over the Fare way, there is no more water upon it, then upon the Flat of Wieringen, or of Freesland, you shall find also no deeper water there then eight through. When Enckhuysen lieth northwest and northwest and by west from you, than you are upon the Houtribbe. Before that you come against the sand, you can by night see the fire upon Urck. When that Urck or the fire is more northerly than north-east from you, and that you get shoaling, then that is certainly of the Houtribbe: for so you cannot come too near the Enckhnysen sand. When you come from the southwards, you are not about the Enckhuysen sand before that the church upon Urck come without the little village of houses, which is then east & by south, and east southeast from you: if that than you go af●ay n. w. and by w. or w. n. w. you shall run close alongst by the side of the sand. With a ship of great draught, bring the church a good way through the houses, until that it stand e. s.e. from you, then go boldly on n. w. & by w. or keep Medenblick without the point of the Venus, and so you shall not come too near neither to sand nor shoal. Likewise if you come from the northwards, & bring Urck not more eastwardly then e. s.e. from you, than you cannot take hurt also of the Enckhuysen sand. 
Marks of Enckhuysen sand.  From Urck to the buys upon the Cripple & Hofstede, the course is n. w. & by w. with that course you may run all alongst unto the souther buy upon Wieringhen Flat: in turning to windwards, you may well bring Medenblick a little within the point of the Venus, but when as Medenblick is without it, than you are in the right fare way.  
Betwixt Urc and the buy upon the Hofstede north-east somewhat eastwardly from the steeple of Enckhuysen lieth a little plate of hard sand, lying towards the end of Enckhuysen sand, which is not deeper than the Frees Flat, about to the eastwards of it, is the deepest water, but about to the westwards of it (by some called the Kattegat) you shall be sooner about the High horn, or the Enckhuysen sand, and it is good for ships that draw but little water.  
The thwart marks of the buys, both upon the Cripple and Hofstede; 
Marks of the buys upon the hofstede & Cripple.  are Grootebroeck & Hempskirke (two sharp steeples) right one in the other, and Warnis, a little sharp steeple in Freesland to the south side of the Cliff of Staverne, than you have the length of these buys, which lie each of them in three fathom, the one on the east shore, and the other on the west shore upon the tail of the Cripple. There is in the right fare way, two foot less than five fathom, & soft ground. When the steeple of Medenblick cometh to the northwards of the house of Medenblick, so far as the house is broad, than you are clear of Cripple sand, and past it; go then on northwest, and northwest and by north to the buy upon the Creyl, according as the wind and tide shall be, the right farewaie there, is deep five fathom scarce. Thwart of the Creyl, 
The Creyl.  in sailing out, or about the Creyl, in sailing in, that is a little within the Creyl on the north shore, lieth alongst the reach (towards the buy upon the Hofstede, a hard sand or plate, called the south Creyl, 
South-Creyl.  upon which there is no more than twelve foot water, at low water, betwixt that bank and the north shore, it is three fathom deep, and soft ground, and to the southwards, or the westwards of it, four fathom and a half. When Mirnes, a little flat steeple in Freesland, cometh over a long countriehouse to the southwards of the clisse of Staverne, than you come right thwart of that foresaid plate.  
The marks of the buy upon the Creyl, 
Mark of the Creyl.  are the sharp steeple of Twisch over the Cornemill to the westwards of Medenblick, & that little flat steeple of Mirnes to the south side or east side of the cliff. The right fareway there is four fathom & an half, & five fathom deep, soft ground, the buy lieth in four fathom, if need require, men may run well a cables length about to the eastwards of it.  
From the Buy upon the Crippell, which lieth upon the east end off the Cripple-sand, 
Marks of the beacon upon Cripp esand.  three fathom unto the Beacon upon Cripple-sand, the course is northwest and by west, and northwest. When Lutkebrooke, a small spire steeple cometh to Hempskirke (which is also a spire steeple) then are you thwart of that beacon. From the Beacon upon the Crippel, unto the souther buy upon Wieringher flat, the course is northwest and by west, or westnorthwest, according as the wind and tide shall serve it lieth at high water with an ordinary tide in thirteen foot and a half, 
Marks of the fouther buy upon the Flat.  the marks thereof are these: Grootebrooke cometh betwixt two Hay-stacks to the eastwards of the five water-mils which stand to the eastwards of Warvers hoof, that is a long mark in the s. Twisch a sharp steeple to the westward of Medenblick, cometh over Almerdorp, there was wont to be a little flat steeple, but it is fallen down, and therefore now not so well to be known, that was a right thwart-marke. Upon Wieringhen standeth a cape, bring East lander steeple, which is a flat steeple upon Wieringen, right over the cape, and sail so right with it, and you shall come right with the buy. When you are at the buy, Westlander Church cometh then over Cleverstee, and the eight mills to the eastwards of Medenblick, a little without the Town. For to find the deepest of the flat coming from the Cripple, you must be careful to look out for the foresaid marks. If that Twisch come first to Almerdorp, before Cleverstee come to Westlander Church, than you are to near to Breesand, or the grounds on the starboard side, these are sure marks for to sail over the flats, when there lie no buys. Alongst to the eastwards of the buy is the deepest water. If you will anchor before the Wieringer flat, then come no nearer the Flat then when Twisch cometh a little to the Northwards of Opperdoes, or half way betwixt Opperdoes and Almerdorp.  
For to sail from the foresaid souther buy over the Gammels to Medenblick, 
For to fail over the Gammels to Medenblick.  you must bring the westermost water-mill of the eight (which stand to the eastwards of Medenblick) a capstone bars length without or to the eastwards of the Bulwark of the Town, and sail then boldly without fear right in with them, until that you come into the road where the ships commonly lie, or else, if you desire to go into the Haven, then sail in right to the northerhead, there is nothing that can hurt you, But if you must turn to windwards over the Gammels, and that your ship draweth more than eleven foot water, then run not Further over to the westwards, then that the foresaid Water-mill cometh almost within, or a handspikes length to the foresaid Bulwark, so that yet you may well see through betwixt them, than cast about, & run over to the eastwards, so long until Grootebrooke come in the five water-mills, which stand to the eastwards of Warmershoof, or on to the eastwards of them, so you shall not do amiss, for it is there broad and wide.  
If you desire to sail over the Gammels to Medenblick, when you come from the Fly, then bring the steeple of Opperdoes over the westermost Water-mill of five, which stand to the westwards of Medenblick, and run in so right with them, until that the westermost water-mill oft eight (to the eastwards of Medenblick) come to stand a capstone bars length without the Bulwark, as here before once already hath been said. Having these marks thus, and that it do become dark, then go on south & south and by east, according as the wind and tide shall serve, and you shall not do amiss, neither shall you miss the Town. In this foresaid fair way, there is no less depth then upon the Wieringher flat, and all soft ground.  
When the steeple of Twisch is over the westermost watermill except one of the five which stand to the westwards of Medenblick, and Grootebroeck, in the little village, to thee. wards of the five water-mils on the Easterdyke; then are you in 13 foot from the northwest point of the Crippl, and past the tail of the Cripple. Upon these foresaid marks, & 13 foot, lieth a buy with three legs, & on the foresaid west shore lie three drift-beakons in 12 foot, and then cometh the wester-most water-mill (of the eight which stand to the eastwards of Medenblick) and so you shall not have less water than upon the Wieringer flat.  
From the Souther-buye to the second or middle buy, 
For to sail over the Wieringen flat.  the course is northwest and northwest and by north: but for to find the deepest water, go first northwest so long until that Ypels-hoofs Church come over the water-mill, which is called the Bolmill, and then forth n. w. and by n. When the Cornmill upon Wieringen cometh in the swamp off the Oever, than you have the length of the second Buy, which lieth upon the west, or the south end of a little plate, called the Repel, the fair way is alongst to the westwards of it, there being at low water two fathom large, and at high water scarce three fathom deep. On the west side of the fair way, betwixt the souther-buye, and the middle-buye, nearest the middle-buy, lieth a hard sand called the Sow, or the old Sow, which on the east side is very steep and needle to which (in sailing up) men might sail within a point or tail of it: to the westwards of it shooteth off another tail to the northwards, a great ways towards the North-east buy. Upon the outermost, or northermost point, called Seughoort, standeth always a beacon. Upon Wieringer upon the Oever stand two little capes with barrels on them, the one upon the North-end off the Oever, and the other upon the head, they are so little, that you can hardly see them: when you come off from the souther-buye towards the middle-buye, then keep them not one in the other, for if you keep them one in the other, than you will be very close by the south shore, and shall but even run clear of the old Sow, but keep the southermost a little to the westwards of the northermost, and then you shall run alongst the right fareway, and shall not take any hurt of the old Sow. When you come near the middle-buy, you must leave these marks and use them then no longer.  
From the middle buy unto the Northerbuye, the course is northnorthwest, when you come thwart off the northerbuye, then cometh Oostlander Church and the Cornmill both over a little Chapel covered with red tiles, that stand upon the Oever, thwart off it also standeth the foresaid beacon upon Seughoort. By the Northerbuye it is scarce three fathom deep at high water, the fareway is alongst to the westwards off it. When you come by the northerbuye, keep still the foresaid Northnorthwest course, until that Oostlander Church come to the northwards of the Sedge-dyke of the Oever, and then you are passed the little plate which lieth by the Northerbuye.  
Cust van Hollant tusschen de Maes end Texel.  
De TEXEL Stroom met de gaten vant Marsdiep.  
Caarte van de Read● end Haven van Aledenblick boemen die comen so van t Wicringer als uriesch ulack bescylen mogen tot dienst en nutvoor alle Zeevaren luyden perfectly geme●en en afgepeyle. Beschreven A: 2642 vyt speciale last van E. H. Burgemeesteren en de Regeerders der voorss. Stade Aledenblick.  
Caarte van DE MASE, End het Goereesche got.  
From the beacon upon Vogell-sand, the course is west northwest unto the buy upon Burg-sand, 
●●rgsand  which lieth upon the tail of the Share, the marks of it are: the Eyerland even unto the east point of the Island tessel, and the Church of the Horn upon tessel too Zuyd-haffell, which is a few houses to the northwards of the Schonce. Or else when you come about Vogelsand, then keep the foresaid cape and mill one in the other, until that the foresaid Horn come to, or through Zuyd-haffell, & then run on, keeping them so: When that Eyerland cometh even to the east point of Tessel, than you have the length of the buy upon the Burg-sand, you may bring the Horn well somewhat to the northwards of Zuyd haffell, but in no wise to the southwards of it, for else you should sail on against the south shore. For to sail from thence to Copevaerders 
Cope●rders ●●ade.  road, you must keep the Horn to Zuyd-haffell, and sail forth keeping them so, until you come against tessel in the road, and anchor there where you think good. Before Ooster-end it is best for small ships, there it is should water, and there goeth little tide, but most ships do anchor before the Geest.  
Upon the point of the Boss 
The Boss  lieth a white buy in three fathom on the west point of the Balgh, which you must leave on the starboard side, and run about to the eastwards of it into the Balgh; & then forth alongst by the beacons to Wieringhen, you must leave all the beacons alsoo on the starboard side.  
For to sail up from the Helder towards the Wieringeflat, you must go north-east, or somewhat more easterly, according as the wind and tide shall be, or else in eight or nine fathom alongst by the tessel, until that the Hoorn come to the northwards of Zuydhaffel, but take heed of the Wieringhen side, which is so steep there, that you may have twelve or thirteen fathom at one cast, and should be a ground before you should be able to heave the lead again.  
When that the Hoorne cometh then to Northwards of Zuyd-haffell, then keep them so standing, and sail up so to the Vogelsand, when that the Eyrland cometh even without the east point of tessel, then you have the length of the buy upon Burghsand, which lieth on the south shore, upon a tail of sand, which men may sail within at five or six fathom. From that Buy upon Burghsand, it is e. s.e. to the Beacon upon Vogelsand, but sail upon the foresaid marks of the Hoorn and Zuyd-haffell so long until that you have the Cape upon tessel, and the mill of Ooster-end one in the other, then keep the one in the other leaving the first marks, and sail up so unto the buy or Beacon upon the Nesse, and so you shall run amidst the channel in the fareway which is 10. 11. and 12 fathom deep. If you bring the mill a little to the Westwards of the Cape than you shall be close by the south shore, which is so steep, that you may not come near it, in turning to windwards, then in eight or nine fathom. Being come about the nesse, then go on south & south & by west, towards ●he buy upon the flat.  

Of the tides & courses of the Streams about these foresaid places.  
Upon the Wieringer-flat maketh full sea a southeast or northwest moon. Before Texel, in Coopvaerders road and east southeast, & West northwest moon.   

Heights.  
The Marsdiep lieth in three and fifty degrees, sail out of the north sea, (being in that height) east on, and you shall fall right with it.    

The second Demonstration. Wherein The Coast of Holland from Texel to the Maes, as also the Channels of Texel, the Maes and Goeree at large.  
tessel is a long plain Island, whereupon stand 4. Churches, the westermost hath a high sharp steeple, and is called west-end, or S. john's, but by the Pilots it is called the Westen, or the Wambus. To the southwards of that standeth an other sharp steeple, called the Hoorn. The third is called the Burgh, which standeth somewhat more to the northwards then the other two beforesaid. The fourth is called the Oogh, or the Koogh, which is the norther-most of them all, without steeple, and is covered with blue slates.  
The Eyerland 
overland  lieth close to the east wards, or to the n. ward of the Tessel, and fast to it, when it floweth somewhat high, it is divided of from the Tessel by the sea, & made to an Island: it showeth itself of at sea like a Low Plain little Island with little hommocks, there standeth upon it no more than 2 little houses.  
Huysdown 
Huysdown.  is a short point of land with some white sandhils, where of the greatest and highest is called the Kyckdowne, or Kykers-downe, the next to the southwards of it, is called Dirckooms sandhil, further to the southwards they run flat of by little and little; and at length to nothing in a flat plain strand. Upon the east end, called the Helder, lie also some sandy hills, betwixt the Helder and the Kyck down it is a most-flat strand, with some sandy hills like a dike upon which (about half way betwixt both) standeth the little or the outer most Cape, the great cape standeth somewhat within the land, about east from the Kyckdown.  
Huysdowne, or the Marsdeep and the Maes lie south s. w. somewhat southerly, and northnortheast somewhat northerly about 24 leagues asunder. From Huysdown to Petten 
Petten.  the coast lieth south and by west four leagues. Petten hath a little Church with a little steeple, and thereabouts you shall see two other little sharp steeples in the Northland. A little to the southwards of Petten lieth the Hondbosch, a league to the southwards of Petten lieth Camperdowne the best land to be known thereabouts, the north end is a high steep white sandhill, which goeth sloping down: the southermost part is grey and rough, being grown over with head, or spyrie grass, to the southwards of it lie many rough hommockes or sand hills, where sometimes you shall see amongst them a white spot, so that it is very good to be known. From Petten to Egmont upon the sea, it is three leagues. Egmont upon the sea 
Egmont upon the Sea.  is also very good to be known, for it hath a thick flat steeple, which standeth like a sail in the sandhill, and a little to the southwards of it you may see Egmont-within, which hath two high steeples upon the Abbey close one to the other, whereof the one is sharp, and the other (to wit, the northermost) is flat, because the spire is lately fall'n down. A little to the northwards of the Abbey standeth another steeple of the church upon the old walls, but it is not so high as that upon the Abbey: so that upon all the coast of Holland, there is no place so good to be known as this. From Egmont upon the sea, to Wyck upon the sea, 
Wyck upon the Sea.  are 3 leagues that is alsoo a flat steeple: when you are thwart of Wyck upon the sea, you may see Beverwyck a little to the northwards of it, which is a high thick, and sharp steeple; besides that, you may see alsoo betwixt Egmont and Wyck upon the Sea Castricom, and more other sharp steeples. From Wyck upon the sea to Santfort, it is three leagues, Sandfort 
Sandfort.  hath a sharp steeple, with a high firebeakon, a little to the southwards of it, in the black sandhill which showeth itself alsoo like a steeple.  
To the northwards of Sandfort lieth a high white sandhil, alongst over which you may see Haerl:, a high square cross Church, which hath a high sharp steeple upon the midst of the Church, and alsoo to the northwards of it, a high small steeple, called Baecknesser steeple) thwart of it hath the coast of Holland a great Bay. From Sandfort to Northwyck 
Noortwyck.  upon the sea, are 3 leagues, that is a flat steeple, whereby standeth a firebeakon. To the northwards of Northwyck upon the sea, you may see Northwyck within, a flat steeple, whereupon standeth a little cap not very high, and upon the midst of the Church standeth a little small tower. From Northwyck to Catwyck 
Catwyck  upon the sea, it is a great league, being also a flat steeple, which in times past hath had a spire: to the southwards of it standeth a high firebeakon, seeming like a steeple: you may alsoo see thereabouts within the land (when you are not very fare from the shore) Catwyck upon the Rhyne, and Reyns-burgh, and Valckenburgh, all sharp steeples. From Catwyck to Schevelingen 
Schevelingh.  are 3 leagues, the Choir of Scheveling Church is somewhat higher than the Church itself: in manner as the Hagues 
The Hague.  Church: a little to the southwards of that Church standeth alsoo a fire beacon. About half a league within the land, you may see the Church of the Hague, which is very good to be known, the Choir is higher than the body of the Church. The Hagues steeple you may see far above any other part of the land. From Scheveling to the Heyde 
The Heyde.  it is 2 leagues, and from thence forth to Gravesand, or to the north side of the Maze, one league. The Heyde is a village without a steeple: but a little within the sandhill, standeth a flat steeple called Monster. Gravesand 
Monster. Gravesand.  is a high sharp steeple, very good to be known, which standeth on the north side of the Maze. The Brill 
The Brill.  is a great flat steeple on the south side of the Maes. All this coast of Holland; frow Huysdown to the Maes, it altogether a clean strand, which men may come so near to as they will, into 4 or 5 fathom,  
For to sail from the Copevaerders road out at the Tessel you must go first south-west or somewhat westerly to the Helder, 
For to fall out at Tessel.  or run alongst by the tessel side in 9 or 10 fathom, until you come near the Helder, and then go out west close along by the shore of the Helder, and by little & little somewhat more northerly, until that the capes upon Huysdown be one in the other, or that the greatest come through the smallest, to wit, to the westwards of it, and then go out n.n.w. or more northerly or westerly, according as the wind or tide shall be, until you come against the northshoare, in 5 or 6 fathom, and run boldly out alongst by it, until you be clear out at sea.  
When the tower of Wester-end (which men do name the western, or the Wambus) cometh to be e. n.e from you, or a little more easterly, than you have the length of Cape & steeples buy, that is, the innermost buy of the Spaniards channel, which you shall espy on the larboard side. To the northward of it lie three other buys, all alongst the east side of the Keysers-plate, near upon one course, (to wit, n.n.w. or a little more northerly) which you must leave (in sailing out) all on the larboard side. The outermost buy lieth from the fourth, north somewhat easterly upon the point of the Keysers-plate, in 22 foot at low water, you may run alongst to the westward: of it, but not far, for the Keysers-plate is on the east side unto the outermost end very steep, but the east shore of the deep is flat, when you come thwart of the foresaid outermost buy, then lieth the Kooger Church right. e.n.e. from you, and the Capes upon Huysdown are one in the other.  
For to find the Spanniards' Channel 
For to sail in at the Spanniards' Gh●nuel●  coming from the northwards, you must bring the Capes upon Huysdown one in the other, or a little through one another, to wit, the runner that is the southermost and greatest, a little to the eastwards of the other, than they shall stand s. s.e. from you sail then right in with them, keeping them so, and you shall sail right upon the outermost buy, or in sight of it, which lieth (as is said) upon the point of the Keysers-plate in 22 foot at low water; when you come to the buy, the Kooger Church shall lie full east north east from you. Therefore if you come from the westwards or the southwards then bring that Church not more northerly than eastnortheast but rather a little more easterly from you, and sail then right in with it, until that the Capes come one right against another, or else you should lightly sail upon the Keysers-plate, which is without upon the north-side very steep. Men may run a little west wards of the outermost buy, Alongst to the eastwards of it is it broader.  
From the first or the outermost buy, to the second, the course is south, somewhat westerly, and from thence to the third, fourth, and fifth, which is the buy of the Cape and steeple, it is all most one course, south south east, or somewhat southerly, the buys lie along the west shore, men may for need sail alongst to the westwards of them, but not fare, for the west shore is so steep, that if a great ship should lie with the stem against it, there should be at head no more than 3 foot, and by the main mast at least 3 fathom deep, but the east shore is flat, men may run alongst by it upon their lead, until they come within the buys. The buy upon the tail, that is the innermost buy of the old slenck, lieth from the buy upon Cape and steeple, south & by west, & s. s. west, but the Helder southeast, men may sail from the buy upon Cape and steeple, rightwith the Helder, without danger, or to the buy upon the tail, & from thence alongst by the south shore, which is also very steep, or right to the Helder, according as shall be best convenient for the wind and tide. The foreftood falls very strong over the south ground to the Spaniards channel, till half flood, and the fore-ebbe s.s.e. till half ebb. 
The falling of the tide.  The Helder lies from the buy upon the tail, e.s.e. and s.e. and by e. When you are come near the Helder, run close by it, so to avoid a tail shooting off from Geest sand, which you may sail within as you come from the sea, there lieth a Buy upon it, which leave on the Larboard side. Being past the Helder, go north-east; or a little more easterly, or alongst the Tessels side in eight or nine fathom, unto the Copevaerders road. The Wieringhen side is steep.  

The Slenck.  In The Slenck used to lie six buys, but the sands are grown now so high and have stopped the passage.  
Within the sixth Buy it is wide enough to sail in from thence right to the Helder east southeast.  
To sail out at the Land-deepe, 
The Land deep.  run alongst within a bow-shot of the foot strand of Huysdown, and about by the heads, and you shall not miss the innermost Buy, lying on the shoals, nearest the west shore in seventeen foot at high, and 13 foot at low water, that shoaly place is not above 2 ships lengths broad, over it, and alsoo within it, it is deep enough. Thwart of that Buy shooteth off a little tail from the shore towards the Buy, therefore run close alongst by the Buy, and leave it on your starboard side in sailing out. Besides that Buy, there lie 3 other Buys in the Landdeep, which you must leave all lying to seawards of you, and so run betwixt them and the shore, when you are passed the 4 Buy, you are passed all the shoal, and may sail where you will.  
To find the Landdeep coming from the sea southwards, you must sound the shore in four fathom and a half, and running so by the shore, you shall sail right with the outermost buy; which dove, come not near the shore else you should sail within the tail of Arrian Bergers Creek, which shooteth off from the shore, to the south sandhill. Or else if you come from sea with an open wind, then keep the great Cape upon Huysdowne over Dirckooms sandhil, (that is, a round sandhil a little to the south of Kyck down burr not so high) and sail so in right with it, you shall then meet with the outermost buy, which lieth at low Water in 4 fathom and a half nearest the Wester-grounds, or the hakes, leave it on the larboard side, and run in alongst to the eastwards of it, betwixt it & the shore, it lieth most north-east, and north-east and by north in, you can take no hurt on either side, if you take heed to keep you from the shore. Thwart of the Kyckdowne, or coming to the southwards of it, you must edge a little from the shore, to avoid a shoal which lieth near somewhat off from the shore. When you come to the second buy, then cometh the mill to the Northwards of Kyckdowne, and at the third, the mill and Cane Nels house come one in the other; which two buys lie in 5 fathom at low water. From the third to the innermost buy, it is n.e. and by e, run close along to the east ward of it, to avoid the foresaid little tail of sand, which (thwart of it) lieth off from the shore, and then forth within a bow shot about the heads, and so along by the strand of the Helder.  

Conrerning the Maze, and Goerees Gat.  
The Maze is at present but a wide or broad flat having little change of depth, which may be sailed with all winds.  
When the wind is south, regard the old marks, that is (coming from sea) before you see the Capes, bring the steeple of Brill which is a stumpy steeple e. s.e. south from you, 
To sail in to the Maze with a south wind.  or a little e. or southerly after you have gotten the cape, bring them together, and run on, or if you bring the Brill steeple a spades length northwards the tower of Oostvoorn, and run on, you shall then first run the buy in sight lying in 3 fathom at low water.  
From this first buy to the 2 and 3 buy, we sail right upon the Capes. The second buy lies on 13 and the third upon 11 foot, being there come, the steeple of Goer: comes a little upon the foot strand of the land of the Brill▪ the fourth buy lieth much alike with the third right upon the Capes, though a little more southerly between these buys the shallowest of the Maes is about ten foot, by the fourth buy it gins to deepen, with a common low water, it is about eleven foot deep, but with a southerly or s. e. wind it runs shallower. From thence to the fourth buy it is broad, so that there we may sail in a reasonable depth. Below the Heydyck or inmost beacon it is much narrower. The fifth buy lies distant from the fourth e. n. e, and n.e. and by e. From the fourth buy to the fifth southward along the buys in the right channel it is deep 14. 15. 16. & 17 foot, & near the fifth buy five fathom. The sixth buy lieth from the fifth e. and by N. in twelve foot, there alongst the southward it is 5 & 6 fathom deep, and is called the Pitt. Coming then a little beyond the sixth buy, so cometh Maeslandt sluice and Vlaerding steeple together, keep them so and run forwards so long till you bring the old head of the Brielin the new head than you may run to the land of the Briel and so further alongst the southwall till you come before the Briel where you may anchor. Now who will run higher up the Maze, let them run all along the soutwall till he is past the New sluice choose then the Northwall. From the east end of Roosenburgh there comes a tail off; which you may undersayle coming westwards. If then (when you are passed the heads of Swartewal) you bring not the Briel steeple without or northward these heads but keep to the southward, you can not then undersayle it but must run fare about southwards. Full eastward of Heenuliet runs the old Maes in; the Flood falls there very hard on, you must take heed that you be not deceived with the Terwesand, that is a great flat sand, lying foremost in the midst of the old Maze, 
The old Maze.  & that lies a great deal dry at low water, and stretcheth with a long small point westwards into the Maes. To shun this, take notice of a bush of trees; standing on the southwall, a little eastward the old Maes, keep the steeple of Rotterdam northward that bush, so shall you not sail over that Tarwesand but if you let the steeple come southward the bush, you shall surely strike upon the foresaid tail. Northward of the Tarwesand 
Tarwesand.  is it deep upon  you may sail in the old Maes even to Dort, therein lie alsoo two buys, he who will run upon the foresaid Marks of the Roterdams' steeple and the bushof trees so long till the steeple of the Briell comes together with a tilehouse which stands upon the southside of the east end of Roosenburgh, and keep that so standing, so shall he not miss of the buy. Being past the old Maes we sail in the midst of the water beyond Vlaerding till we come to the five sluices from thence ye must choose the southwall, & run along near unto it, till you come over a small sand or bank, where with low water there is 11 or 11 and a half foot water how nearer you keep to the southwall so much the deeper it is, stretching cross the Maes, assoon as you are past that so keep strait to the Schiedams' head, there have you the deepest water.  
Will you sail to Delfshaven 
Delfshaven.  (being past Schiedam) keep the side of the northwall, and run along thereby till you come before the haven and anchor there. But if you will go for Rotterdam, run along the Northwall, so long till Ouwerschie and the house of Spanjen, come together, strike then over, or a little sooner to the southwall, and alongst thereby, or bring the steeple of Vlaerding, when you are passed the head of Schiedam over the third house upon the Schiedams' head, keep that so standing, so long till the Mill and the head of Charlois (upon which standeth a little bush of trees) come together, you shall leave a little dry plate lying half way between Schiedam & Delfshaven on your larbord and so run southward of the dry platt under the Haven. Upon this platt lies no more them seven and upon the bank near the haven 2 or 3 foot water, and are both very steep. Now when the foresaid Mill and Charlois head come together; so keep them standing till you come near the new head of Roterd; sail them to the City, and there along close in between the City and Platt, there may you cast anchor.  

How you sail the Maes in with a northerly wind.  But if you will sail the Maze in with a Northerly wind you must keep, the upperwall that so you may have the smoothest deepest water, for by the North-wall there goes in a depth where a full foot of water and more is then by the buys above written and is called Everskil. To reach this, you must bring the outermost beacons in the Brill and keep it so standing, till we bring two bushes of trees on the North side east of it, that is about a goteling shot northwards the uttermost Buy, bringing the most northerly bush in with the Delfs steeple so are you then on the northside of Everschil, and the southerly bush to the Liar then are you on the south side of Everskill, then keep so long between both till you bring the steeple of the Brill between both the Beacons (than are you right over against the Hompel) then run again to the land of the Briel either to the pit or the abovementioned Southergat.   

The Goerees-gat.  
Betwixt the land of the Brill and Goeree, go in alsoo two channels, the northermost is called the Quacks-deep, and is not for great ships, but only for smacks, and small ships: the other is the Goerees-gat. Betwixt these two channels lieth a great plate, called the Hinder, which at low water is not deeper than five, six, and seven foot. To the northwards of it goeth in the Quacks-deepe, and to the southwards of it the Goerees-gat.  
For to find the Quacks-deepe 
Quacks-deep.  coming in out of the west, you must keep the steeple of the Brill east from you, and run so in, until that a great country house, (which you shall see stand alone a little within the point of the Quacke) come to the southermost sand-hills of the land of the Brill, which shall then stand near about south east from you, keep that then so standing, and run so right in, until that Oostvoorn come to the westermost or southermost sand-hills, then run in alongst by the strand somewhat more southerly, until that Goeree come to the eastwards or within the sand-hills, and then you shall be passed the east point of the Hinder, which the Pilots call the Buyen, run then towards Goeree, or to the eastwards, to Hellevoet-sluce, where you desire to be.  
For to sail in at the Goerees-gat, 
Goerees-gat.  you must bring the steeple of Goeree, and the Cape upon the land of Goeree, one in the other, and then they shall stand east and by south, and eastsoutheast from you: or if you can not see the cape, then bring the steeples east and by south, or eastsoutheast from you, according as you shall have the wind, sail in right with it, until you come hard aboard the strand, and within a bawls cast in alongst by it, east and by north, & east in, so long until that the land do fall away more to the southwards: thereabouts runneth of from the shore a little tail which men might sail within, in going out, but not in coming in, there you must edge a little further off from the shore, being past that, luffe up again towards the shore, or haven of Goeree, & anchor there before it, or else if you will run up to Hellevoet-sluce, then bring the mill which standeth to the westwards of Goeree, a little to the northwards of the steeple of Goeree, keep then so standing, & sail so up to Hellevoet-sluce, & you shall not come near the plate which lieth over against or to the southwards of Hellevoet-sluce.  
When you sail in at the Goerees-gat with a bare southerly wind, & that you can not bring the cape & steeple one in the other, you may bring the steeple well e. s. east, or a great capstane bars length to the northwards of the cape, & then run over until you come against the strand, and so you shall run over the tail of the Hinder in 14 & 15 foot at low water, but when the cape & steeple are one in the other, you shall not have less than 19 or 20 foot. Being come over the tail of the Hinder, in the right deep, it is 6, 7, & 8 fathom deep, the nearer the strand the deeper water. A little within the cape, or almost thwart of it, is the narrowest of the channel further in it is wider, on hen. side towards the Hinder, it is rising ground, but the south shore alongst by the strand is very steep.   

Of the tides & courses of the streams, about these foresaid places.  
UPon the Wieringer-flat maketh full sea a southeast or northwest Moon.  
Before Tessel, in Coopvaerders road, an eastsoutheast, & westnorthwest Moon.  
Without the grounds or shoals of the tessel, an east & west Moon maketh the highest water, and in the entering of the Tessel, an east & by south, & west and by north Moon: but the flood goeth a good while longer in. And likewise runneth the ebb also longer out, than the lowest water. When the Moon is south, or somewhat more westerly, it beginneth apparently to flow without on the strand, and likewise upon the shoals.  
The foreflood, and the after-ebbe out of the Tessel, fall both one with the other n.n. e. thwart over the grounds and channels, and right out at the Spanjards' channel, until half flood: &c to the contrary, the fore-ebbe, with the afterflood fall right in at the Spanjards' channel s. s. east over the south grounds, and thwart over the Slenk and the other channels, until half ebb. A little while before half flood, the flood beginneth to run right in at the channel, and again a little before half ebb, the ebb beginneth to fet right out at the channel. Therefore he that will sail into the channels, must reckon his tides very well, wherein consisteth very much. Without before the channel in the sea, the tide turneth about with the Sun, so that when a ship doth lie at an anchor without the channels, & hath neither good nor hurt of the waves of the sea, it should have but a little still water.  
In the North Sea the tide falleth round, more than half tide, upon the Broad fourteen, it turneth about with the Sun or the Moon, and falleth but a quarter tied right alongst the sea. Nearer the coast of Holland & Zealand, the tide falleth (whether it be flood or ebb) somewhat sloping towards the land, but in the midst of the tide, it falleth right alongst the sea, and in the last of the tide, it setteth to seawards, towards the westwards or the northwards.  
Betwixt the Marsdeepe and the Maes in the fareway, the fore-floot cometh out of the north sea, and turneth about with the Moon, falling towards the land north-east, & n. east and by north.  
The Fishermen of the Maes say, that when they are out of sight of the land, they can perceive in calm weather by the turning about of the tide, they be to the northwards or to the southwards of the Maes. Somewhat to the southwards of the Maes, the afterflood turneth about against the Sun, but to the northwards of the Maes, is turneth about with the Sun, until the last quarter, and then it setteth towards the shore, or the coast next unto it. They say also, that alongst the coast of Holland, men have no help of the ebb in turning to windwards towards the Maes, except they be without sight of the land, because there go no ebbs by the land when the wind is to the southwards of the west.  
Before the Maes a s. w. and by west, and a n.e. and by east moon maketh a high water.  
Before the Brill a s. w. and s. w. and by south, & north-east, & n. e. & by n. Moon.  
Before the old Maes a s. w. and n. e. Moon.  
Before Rotterd. a s. w. & by west. & n.e. & by e. moon.  
Before Dordrecht a westsouthwest Moon.  
In the Goerees-gat, and before Goeree, a s. w. & by south, and s. s. w. Moon.  
Before Hellevoet-sluce a s. w. and by south Moon.  
Betwixt the Marsdeep and the Maes in the fareway, the foreflood cometh out of the north sea, & turneth about by little & little n. e. & n. e. & by north towards the land.  
In the sea thwart of the places, (without sight of land) is a point, or a point and a half later full sea, the further from the land the later.  
Not very long after that the flood beginneth to go without the Maes, it doth begin also to go into the Maes, but the afterflood falleth strong in, and so likewise in the Goerees-gat. Close before the channels by the land, the tide turneth about with the Sun, so that when the afterflood falleth into the channels, it turneth to the southwards, and becometh against a running ebb: the after-ebbe falleth again thwart off to seawards out of the channels.   

Of the depths & grounds about these places.  
Five or six leagues without the tessel, lieth the Broad fourteens, lying from thence n. east with a small tail which lieth about north from the tessel, and n. w. from the Fly, to the southwards it runneth with the east side against Catwyck or Scheveling, but the west side lieth off at least 11 or 12 leagues thwart off to seawards from Nortwyck and Catwyck, it is a bank most of fourteen fathom deep in some places somewhat more or less. Betwixt it & the land it is again 18. and 19 and to the northwards 20. fathom deep. When you come over it about the Tessel or the Fly, and come again in 16 or 17 fathom towards the land, than you shall begin to see the land.  
There runneth of to the southwards into the sea from the coast of Halland 3 small Banks or ribs, which are somewhat broad & shoal by the land, & run off sharp & deep to the end, the first the fishermen call the Smal-eight, & beginneth a little to the southwards of Egmont upon the sea: the second the Wtterrib thwart of Wyck upon the sea: the third and southermost the Hard, a little to the northwards of Santfoort.  
The high steeples of Holland and West-Friesland, as Egmont-within, Wyck upon the sea, Santfoort and other more, men may see before they can see the sand-hils five leagues without the land, in 14 or 15 fathom, that is, upon the south end of the Broad-sourteenes, but Camperdownes, and the sand-hills thwart of Haerlem, they may see before they can see some of the steeples. The steeples alongst the coast are most of them flat, except the Beverwyck, Schevelingen and Santfoort.  
Before the Maes and Goeree men may see the land in 14. and 15. fathom.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Tessel to the Maes, s. s. w. 24 leagues  
From Tessel to the Heads, or the Straight between Calais and Dover, s. w. somewhat southerly 52 leagues.  
From Tessel or Marsdiep to Calais cliff south-west and by south 52 leagues.  
From Tessel to the North foreland s. w. somewhat westwardly. 47 leagues.  
From Tessel to Orfordnesse w. s.w. 37 leagues.  
From tessel to Yarmouth west, and west and by south. 34 leagues.  
From tessel to the Shield, or Cromer west. 40 leagues.  
From tessel or Marsdiep to Flambrough head west northwest 60 leagues.  
From the Marsdiep to Lieth in Scotland n.w. and by w. somewhat northerly 104 leagues.  
From the Marsdiep to Newcastle w. n. west somewhat northerly 83 leagues,  
From tessel to Bockenesse northwest, and n. west and by n. somewhat westerly 123 leagues.  
From the Marsdiep to Aberdine n. w. somewhat northerly 119 leagues.  
From the Marsdiep to the Liet of Berghen in Norway north 110 leagues.  
From the Marsdiep to the north end of Hitland n. n. west. 165 leagues.  
And then you shall fall about five leagues to the eastwards of the land.  
From the Marsdiep to the Naze north and by east 94 lea.  
From the Maes or Goeree to Dover, south-west and by west somewhat westerly 33 leagues.  
From the Maes to the north Forland, west south w. westerly 31 leagues.  
From the Maes to the Naze, west 31 leagues.  
From te Maes to Hitland north north west 180 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Marsdiep lieth in three and fifty degrees, sail out of the north sea, (being in that height) east on, and you shall fall right with it.  
The north side of the Maes lieth in 52 degrees.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Wambus.  
Thus appeareth the Island tessel, when it lieth east and by north from you,  
Huysdowne showeth itself thus, when it is east south east from you.  
Camper down Egmont upon the sea Egmont within Wyck on sea Beverwyck  
Thus showeth the coast of Holland betwixt Huysdowne and Wyck upon the sea, when you sail alongst by it, about three leagues from the land.  
Haerlem Santfoort, Noortwyck Catwyck Schevelingen. The Hage Monster  
Thus showeth the coast of Holland; betwixt Wyck upon the sea, and the Maes, when you sail alongst by it about a league from the land.  
Loosduyn Delft Monster The Heyde Gown head.  
These two figures belong to the AA one to the other.  
S. Gravesant S.E. by S. The Brill. S. by E. S. Cape S. Cape Oostvoorn.  
When Gravesand is south east and by south from you, being a half league without the land; then the coast of Holland to the northwards of the Maes showeth itself, as is portrayed in the two figures here above.  
The Heyde Monster Delft SH' Gravesand Naeldwyck Liet North Capes.  
When you are open before the Maes, the land to the northwards of it showeth itself thus.  
The outer S. Cape. The Inner. S. Cape. The Brill S.E. by E. Oostvoorn Recagne.  
These two figures one to the other.  
Recagne Goerees got Goeree Outdorp Cape of Goeree.  
When you are upon before the Maes, being north west and by west from the Brill, than the land to the southwards of the Maes showeth itself, as is prefigured in the two figures here above.  
Oostvoorn The Brill east The land of the Brill  
The two figures following belong unto this at the AA and BB, one to the other. Goerees  
Goereese got Goeree Ourdorp  
Cape upon Goeree.  
When you are before the Goereese got, about a league without the land on both sides of it showeth, as is demonstrated in the three figures here above.  
These two figures belong at the crosses one to the other.  
S. E. by south Renisse Wolsack or Blenck.  
The land of Goeree showeth itself, as is portrayed in the two figures here above, when the cape and steeple come one to the other, and that you are a league and a half without the land.     

The third Demonstration. Which unfoldeth All the Channels betwixt the Maes and the Whielings, as that of Goeree, Brewers-have, Zirick-zea, the Veer and the Whieling.  
COncerning the Situation between the Maes & Goerees-gat we have handled sufficiently in the description of the River Maes. Betwixt the land of Goeree and Schowen there go in alsoo two channels, the norther most is called the Kevitsen, (which is only for small ships) the southermost for great ships is called the Brewer's haven's channel, Betwixt them lieth a great dry sand, called the Springer, which floweth not under, but with very high floods.  
For to find the Kevitsen, 
Kevitsen.  you must bring the steeple of Zierickzee southeast and by south, or a little more southerly from you, and then you shall espy upon the land of Schowen, about the steeple of Zierickzee, a wood of trees, bring that and the foresaid steeple of Zierickzee one in the other, and run so right in until you come against the sand, so shoaler so near as you can, and then you run fare enough alongst to the westwards of the west head. When you come within the west head, against the sand on the south side, then go in east alongst by the foresaid dry sand the Springer, at the end of the aforesaid dry sand shooteth off also a point under water, the which you must sound for: being past that, run then directly with Brewers-Haven, as is showed in the Card. In this channel it is upon the shoalest ten forth deep.  

The Brewers-Haven.  
Before the land of Schowen, thwart of the Brewer's haven channel, lie three banks, the outermost, called the Breebanke, lieth a kenning without the land, upon which it is 7. fathom deep, and again within it, 19 fathom deep, upon the second nearer the shore, it is five fathom deep, and again within it 7. fathom deep; the third Called the Ooster, lieth close by the Land, and runneth into the eastwards, betwixt Schouwen and the land of Goeree, upon it is no more than six foot water, when you will sail into the channel of Brewers-Haven, you must go about to the Westwards of it.  
Upon the west end of Schouwen stand two Capes, bring them one in the other, and run so right in with them, until the steeple of the Renisse (which steeple is somewhat sharp) come to the Blenck or Wolsack, that is, a high white sandhill, 
Renisse Wostack.  (which showeth itself out in whiteness high above all the other Sand-hills) then leave the Capes, and run in by the marks of the Blencke 
De Cust van ZEELANDT, Begrypende in sich de gaten als vande Wielingen. ter Veer Ziericzee. Brouwers haven. Goeree. en de Maes  and Renisse, until that Outdorp, (a little white steeple upon the Land of Goeree) come to the steeple of Goeree, and so you shall go in betwixt the Ooster of the larboard side, and the Hill on the starboard side, and alongst a little to the southwards of the outermost buy, until you come within the Ooster. When that Outdorp and Goeree are one in the other, then leave also the foresaid marks of Renisse, and run in right with Goeree, until that you come by the second buy; or (if there lie no buys) until that the Bommenee come a little without the Oxetayle, that is a point of Schowe, lying out a little to the westwards of Brewers-haven, sail so right in until you are passed the Brewers-Haven. This Channel of Brewers-Haven, is a broad and deep Channel, very convenient for great ships, he that must turn in or out to windewards, may run alongst a good ways on both sides, as well of the outermost as of the second-buy, but to the southwards of them it is deepest, and the common fareway. The third buy is a buy with a tail, and lieth upon a point of a tail, which off from the Ooster, which you may not go to the northwards of, until it were very close alongst by it: all alongst by the strand of Schowen, it is deep and steep, you may run close by it from the outermost buy unto Brewers-Haven, there is nothing that can hurt you, the shoalest of this Channel is eighteen or nineteen foot; at least a league without the land in the coming in betwixt the Ooster and the Hill. Further inwards it is four, five, six, and seven, and at some places ten and eleven fathom; as it is showed in the Card by the numbers of Feet, and all at low water.   

The Keel, the Newdeep, the Velt, and the Roompot.  
You may run into Zierickzee through divers channels, through the Keel, the Newdeep, the Velt, & the Roompot. For to sail through the Keel, then run in as is before said of the channel of Brewers-haven, first in by the marks of the Blench and Renisse, so long until that ter Veer come to the westermost point of Schowen, called the Hoot, keep them one in the other, or to the other, & run so in until you come by the strand, and then forth by it, and you shall find so in the Keel at the shoalest, 18 and 19 Foot, and coming against the point of the Hoot, four and five fathom. Betwixt the Hoot and the Newsand (which falleth at the east end in some places dry (run all alongst by the land of Schowen, until you come thwart of the southermost cape of Schowen, edge then somewhat off from the shore towards the Baniard, for to avoid a Share which lieth off from Schowen, which you might sail within when you come out of the sea. There lieth a buy upon the point, whereby it is easy to be known: being past that, run all alongst by the shore, until you come to Zierickzee: somewhat within the buy, upon the point of the share, there is lately laid another little buy for those that will sail that ways out, for that they may not sail upon the east side of the foresaid share.  

The Newdeep  For to sail in at the Newdeepe, you must look out for two stone firebeakons, standing a little to the southwards of the foresaid Capes of the Channel of Brewers-Haven, bring the innermost a handspikes length to the southwards of the outermost, and run then right in with them, and then you shall run in betwixt the Hill & the Newsand in sixteen, seventeen, and 19 foot, go in alongst by the foresaid marks, until that you come by the strand, and then you come into the Keel. If you bring the firebeakons one in the other, & sail so right in, you shall then run over the tail of the Hill in eleeaen or twelve foot. The Hill is a land somewhat flat, which men may come near to the south side by their lead, but the Newsand is very steep, and the sea breaketh very much upon it. When as you come in by the strand into the Keel, then run in alongst by the strand, as is before said in the description of the Keel.  
For to sail in at the Velt, you must observe these marks here under described: almost upon the southermost end of Schowen standeth a Tower alone in the field, with a cape upon it, called Westschowen, bring that Tower a capstane bars length to the southwards of the foresaid southermost cape of Westschowen, 
The 〈◊〉  and run so right in, and then you shall run through betwixt the Newsand and the Baniard, and shall find upon the shoals (thwart of the outermost point of the Newsand) twelve and fourteen foot; being past that; there will be again fifteen, sixteen, and eighteen foot, and by the strand twenty foot deep. When you come in by the strand, run all alongst by it until you come even to Zierickzee, as here before is said of the Keel, and Newdeepe. When you run in at this channel, you must take very good heed of the Banjard, which is very steep upon the north side; close to it, there is three, four, and five fathom, but thwart of the foresaid strand which lieth of from Schowen, six and seven fathom deep. The Newsand is indifferent flat on the south side, that you may borrow of it by your lead.   

The Veergat.  
For to sail in the Veergat (coming from the northwards) you must keep Westcappell not to the westwards of south from you, and then you cannot come to near the Banjaer: but if you bring Westcappel to the westwards of the south from you, you should lightly sail upon the Baniaert, 
Marks of the Baniaert.  run so right with Westcappell, until that Middelbrough come over East-chappell, than you are to the end of the Baniaert, sail then right with East-cappell and Middelbrough, until that Cortgeen come through or a great capstane bars length to the Southwards of West-kercke, they are two Towers standing in the sunken land, and shall be then about eastsoutheast from you, keep these Towers so standing, and run in so right with them, and you shall run in sight of the first buy of the Veergat. In the Veergat lie three buys with two bottoms, of fashion like great Hogsheads, which you must leave all on the starboard side. Before you come to the first buy, you shall sail by another buy on the larboard side, lying upon the point of the Polle, 
The Polle.  which is a point of the Baniaert, that is, a Pear buy, of fashion like all other sea buys that lie in the Maze or Elsewhere. The foresaid first buy in the Veergat lieth in three fathom and a half. From the first to the second and third buy, the course is southeast and by east, or somewhat more southerly, but you may easily see from the one to the other. The second and third buys lie in two fathom, each upon a point of a plate, called the Maid. 
Maid.  Over against the third buy lieth a shoal called the Unrest, 
Unrest.  which lieth with a longsharpe point towards the third buy, so that it is not there very broad betwixt them, therefore you must run close alongst to the northwards of the buy: betwixt the buy and the foresaid point of the Unrest, it is not deeper than twelve and thirteen foot, but thwart of the first & second buy, it is broad and deep enough. Being past the third buy, sail then right to Ter-Veer. Over against Ter-Veer lieth a plate, called the Scotsman, which you have only to avoid.  
If you will go in at the Roompot to Zierickzee, 
For to sail in at the Roompot  and that you are come betwixt the foresaid Pear buy upon the point of the Polle, and the first or outtermost buy of the Veergat, then cometh Domburgh to the Hoot, which is a white sandhill upon Walcheren, almost of fashion like the Woolsackes upon the land off Schowen: keep them one in the other, and you shall run alongst by two buys more, 
Wolplai●  which shall lie on the larboard side alongst by the Polle, and you shall see one buy with a tail lying upon the west point of the Wool-plate▪ over against the third buy of the Polle: betwixt these two buys you must run through, leaving that with the tail on the starboard side, and run about by it to the eastwards. There lie also two buys with tails, (besides the foresaid) upon the Wool-plate, you may easily see from one to the other, these you must leave on the starboard side, and run alongst to the northwards of them, about eastsoutheast on, so long till the steeple of Koukercke (upon Schowen) come even without the point of Schowen, run then in right with that point, & about by it, & then alongst by the shore unto Zierickzee. When as you run towards the point of Schouwen, than you sail through betwixt two buys more, the one lying on the starboard side, upon the eastermost point of the Baniart, or Hooghplate, & the other with a tail on the starboard side, upon the point of another plate, called Poolvoet, lying betwixt the land of Schowen & Oresand. All the buys with tails men must leave (in sailing in) on the starboard side, & those without tails on the larboard side.  
The Fishermen run (by day) most about to the southwards of the Poolvoet plate, and leave the foresaid buy with the tail, then on the larboard side; that plate is somewhat flat, that men may borrow off it by their lead, but they must sound quick: but by night they run by Schowen close alongst by the shore, which is exceeding steep and needle too.  
The Channel betwixt the Island Walcheren and Flanders, hach divers deeps, and channels, where men may sail in and out through with great ships, as the Botkill, the Doorloye, the Splete, and the Wieling. It is commonly called after one of the chiefest of the same, with the name of the Wielings. The greatest shoals, betwixt which these foresaid channels do run through, are: The Rasses, 
the Rasses The Raen The English Poll. the French Poll.  the Raen, the English Polle, and the Innerbanck. The Rasses lie alongst the west side of Walcheren: The Raen to the westwards of it: The English Polle betwixt them and the coast of Flanders, lying of to the westwards with a long small, rib unto thwart of Oostend. The Innerbanck lieth betwixt the east end of the English Polle & Casand, which is also called the French Poll, or the Ripped.   

The Botkill.  
For to sail out at the Botkill, you must run from Flushing within 2 Cables lengths alongst by the shore, through betwixt the land & the Gear & the Rasse, the shore is very steep, so that men may come close by it with great ships without any danger, the Rasses are flat on the cast or the inner side towards the land. To the eastwards, or to the southwards of Souteland in that fareway it is 5 & 6 fathom deep, but to the northwards, or to the westwards it is deeper, and thwart of Westcappel 8 & 9 fathom. When the Church of Westcappel (which hath a flat steeple) cometh over the mill, thwart of that runneth a channel through betwixt the n. etc. Rasses w. s. w. into the sea where remaineth at low water no less than 2 fathom water, 
Marks of the Botkil.  keep Westcappell & the foresaid mill one in the other, & run out so by them. When Buys Church cometh over the foresaid mill of Westcappell, then keep them one in the other, and you shall run then right out at the Botkil through betwixt the n. Rasses on the larboard side, & a sand called Calloo on the starboard side. In the Botkill is not less than 4 f. & a half depth, but upon both the Rasses remaineth at low water, no more than 2 foot and a half, and upon Calloo 3 or four fathom.  
To the northwards of the sand Calloo lieth yet a plate called the Quernes, 
Quernes.  lying northwards almost until thwart of Domburgh, betwixt them both is a channel of four or five fathom depth, called the Eastergat; For to sail out there, or to find it coming in out of the sea, you must bring Westcappell to the northermost head, 
Landdeep.  which is a head very good to be known, and run out in or thereby. Betwixt the quernes & the land goeth out yet a Landdeep of three fathom & a half. For to find that coming in out of the sea, you must run to the shore, thwart of Domburg (which is a sharp steeple) into 3 fathom, or 2 fathom and a half, & keep the sounding of the shore so near as you please, and run in so alongst by the heads, until you be come within, When you come in at any of these channels, and are come so fare to the eastwards, as betwixt Buyens' Church & Soutland, and that you must turn to windwards with an easterly wind, than you may sail through betwixt the easter Rasses, and the plate to the westwards of it, called the Gear, and so come out in the broad channel into the Dorloy and Splete & run so about to the southwards of the Gear unto Flushing.  
About 2 leagues without the land of Walcheren lieth a long small bank, lying s. w. &. n. east, called the Stone bank, upon the midst where of there is no more than 2 fathom, & upon the north-end of it 3 fathom water. He that will sail in or out at the Botkill, or the channels to the n. of it, the Eastergat or Landdeep, must sail about either to the northwards or to the southwards of that Stone-bank: When Middleburgh cometh over Domburgh, then are you thwart of this Stone-bank, but if you bring Middleburgh half ways betwixt Domburgh & East-cappell, & so sail to the land, than you run along to the northwards of it. Or else if you bring Westcappell e. s. e. from you, in a black valley of the sand-hills, and sail so right in, than you run alongst to the westwards or the southwards of it. 
Marks of the Stone bank.  Within the Stone-bank it is again 8 or 9 & at some places 10 fathom deep. Upon the foresaid marks & course, to wit, Westcappel east souhteast from you in the black valley, you may sail right in at the Botkil: when that East-cappell cometh then somewhat through Domburgh or to the eastwards of it, than you shall get deeper water, go then towards the shore, & so alongst by it, as is before said. A little from the south west end of the Stone-bank lieth yet another, but it is not long, called the Oyster-bank, 
Oyster-banke.  upon it remaineth at low water about 4 fathom Water.   

The Doorloy.  
For to sail from Flushing out at the Doorloy with ships that draw much Water, you must set sail when the Water is flowed an hour or two, for to come with half flood, or against the highest Water to the shoals, go from Flushing first alongst by the shore, and then westnorthwest, until that Westcappell come within two ships length to the point of the Sandhill, to wit, that Westcappel stand so much within the west point of the Sand-hils, bring that alsoo not further out, not nearer to the point of the Sand-hills, for else you should sail upon the Raen. When that Westcappell standeth so, and S. Anne (a flat Steeple in Flanders to the westwards of Sluice) standeth amongst the east Sand-hils of Casand, then go northwest and by west out at the Doorloy. When that S. Anne cometh then to the westwards of that foresaid Sandhill, then cometh the castle of Sluice, under or behind that sandhill, keep that under, or right to the east side of the foresaid sand-hils, & then go out northwest and by west, and you shall go clear of the Raen and the Rasses. If you bring Westcappell without the sand-hills before that Saint Anne come without the foresaid sand-hills of Casand, than you shall be to fare to the northwards, and to near the Rasses. Or if you bring Sint Anne without the sand-hills of Casand, before Westcappell come to the end of the sand-hills, than you shall be to fare to the southwards, & shall come against the Raen, but when you bring Westcappell to the point of the sandhill, & S. Annes without the sand-hills of Casant one as soon as the other, than you are amid the channel of the Doorloy right in the fareway.  

For to find the Doorloy coming in out of the sea.  For to find the Doorloy coming in out of the sea, you must run to the Raen by the lead, until that Westchappell come within a masts length near to the Sconce, and sail so right in, or take the sounding of the Raen, and run alongst by it, until that S. Anne come to the foresaid east sandhill of Casand, then go in alongst s. e. & by east, & you shall soon be over the shoalest & find deeper water, but you must reckon well your ty●●● for the flood falleth in to the Doorloy first south (as also the after-ebbe) afterwards s. s. e. & at last to the southwards. Therefore if you will go in at the Doorloy with a foreflood, you must go at lest e. s. east, or else (if you should go in upon your direct course) you should lightly be carried against the Raen. Coming then out of the sea alongst by the Raen, until that S. Anne be hidden amongst the sand-hils of Casand, then go on eastsoutheast, until that Westcappell come within the point of the sand-hils, and then run boldly right on with Flushing. In dark weather men may sound alongst by the Rasses; when that you keep the Castle of Sluice to the eastwards of the foresaid sandhill upon Casand, than you cannot take hurt of the Raen, but when the Church of Sluice standeth to the w. side of the foresaid sand-hills, than you are thwart of the shoalest of the Raen.   

The Splete.  
For to sail from Flushing out at the Splete, you must go on first (as is before fayd) w. n. west, until that westcappell come almost to the point of the sand-hils, but not without it, or that the steeple of Middlebrough come to the Inner sandhill, then go w. s. west, & then you run out at the Splete, which is more than a great half league broad, and at low water upon the shoalest 4 fa. & a half deep. Betwixt Soutland and Dyshoeck lieth a high sandhill, which is at the east end somewhat steep, called the Doorne-hill, 
Doornhil.  to the eastwards of it lieth another sandhil, which is somewhat long, not altogether so high as the Doorne-hil, with a cleft or little dale in it, which doth (as it were) divide the long sandhill in two sand-hills, the southermost is called the Inner sandhill, 
Inner sand hill.  because that to the southwards of it there are no more high sand-hils. When that the steeple of Middlebrough cometh over that Inner sandhill, or in that foresaid cleft, & keep that over it or in it, than you run out at the Splete, and can take no hurt neither of the Poll nor the Raen.  

Engllsh Pol.  The English Poll is ●epe, but with easterly winds men may borrow of it by the lead. The Raen 
The Raen.  is flat on the Inner side as well as on the out side, so that men may sound out alongst by it all the Splete when you cannot have sight of the foresaid marks in dark weather, and it is so broad, that men have an half hours work for to sail thwart over it, but the English Poll is so narrow, that men may run over it with four or five casts of the lead. When that Aerdenburgh cometh without the foresaid sand-hils of Casant, than you are passed the dry Raen, 
Marks of the Raen.  but it lieth yet out to the westwards with a great flat, so fare to the westwards, until Bridges cometh to the eastwards of Blanckenbrough in the Gallow sherds, which are high sand-hils to the eastwards of Blanckenbrough, where in times past was wont a Gallows to stand, than you are passed all the shoals, and may go your course where you desire to be. Blanckenbrough hath a flat steeple somewhat higher (but not so thick) as Liswegen.  
From the end of the English Poll lieth a long rib (about a shot of a cast piece broad) to the westwards, until past Oostend, 
The Ripped.  called the Ripped, it is hard sand, & good ancher ground. When Blanckenbrough standeth southeast & by e. from you, there is upon the Ripped at low water six fathom deep, more to the eastwards towards the English Poll it is shoaler, but the farther to the westwards the deeper unto the outerbanck thwart of Oostend. A shot of a cast piece to the northwards of that Ripped it is deeper, and soft ground. Also when you come towards the south or s. s. e. a shot of a cast piece over the Ripped, it will be presently a half fathom deeper, and soft ground, that is, than the other channel of the Wielinge. Therefore when you come out of the sea, and will sail in at the Splete, edge to the coast of Flanders, when you are (by your reckoning) past Oostend, and borrow to it by your lead, until that you get hard ground, and shoaler water, that is then for certain that foresaid Ripped: having found that in six, seven, or eight fathom, according as you shall be to the eastwards or the westwards, than edge of again to the northwards into the sea, until it begin to shoal, and be hard ground; keep so the sounding of the Ripped until that you find again deeper water and soft ground, run in then east●●●theast, and edge now and then to the southwards towards the north side of the foresaid Ripped, until that Bridges comes to Liswegen (being a flat and very thick steeple) or that Blancken●rough stand south from you, than you come thwart of the point of the Raen into the Splete. Then bring the steeple of Middlebrough over the foresaid Inner sandhill, betwixt Soutland and Dishoeck, and run in right with it, e. n. e. on, until that the castle of Sluice come to the eastwards of the foresaid east sand-hils of Casant, sail then right on with Flushing, and so you shall go clear both of the Raen & the Polls. If it should happen in dark or misty weather, that you cannot see Middlebrough, then run in by your lead alongst by the north side of the Ripped eastnortheast until that you find shoaling and ha●● ground of the bank, and so you shall run in betwixt the Raen and the bank. The west end of the Raen is flat, which you may sound very well. In the channel betwixt the bank, or English Poll, and the Raen, it is soft ground on both sides, as well towards the Raen, as towards the bank, it doth begin to shoal, and to be hard ground. When Heyst, that is, a high sharp steeple cometh to the firebeakon, thwart of that is the bank, or English Poll at the shoalest, to the eastwards of that, the bank waxeth deeper; Being come past the shoalest, if you edge towards the bank, you shall find deeper water, and may run over there at half flood with 18, foot, but it is not good to do it, for not to sail upon the French Poll, but keep all alongst the sounding and hard ground of the bank, and shape your course a little more easterly for to avoid the Rasses which lie thwart of Soutland, & are steep. When you are come somewhat further in, go then east on towards Flushing, & you shall not come near any shoals. Thwart through the Raen goeth a Slenck 
Slenck through the Raen.  where remaineth at low water, not less than ● fathom and a half water; for to find it coming in out of the sea, you must bring Aerdenburgh a little without the point of the sand-hils of Casand, or Westchappel in Flanders a little to the eastwards of Knock, sail then right with it, until that you get deeper water, or that the steeple of Middlebrough come over the inner sandhill, & then in alongst with it. Westchappel in Flanders is a short flat little steeple, with a little short blunt spire, or cap upon it, but Knock is a sharp steeple not so high as Heyst.   

The Wielinge and inner-Wielinge.  
For to sail in at the Wielinge coming in out of the sea you must run on to the coast of Flanders, (when you are past Oostend) until you come in 5 fathom. Thwart of Blanckenbrough there was wont a few years past to lie a bank or share off from the shore, which men might sail within, coming from the westwards: now there is nothing but a little flat, and Dobbelsand is alsoo altogether clean gone. Or else you must look out for Liswegen a flat steeple, and the thickest thereabouts. When the steeples of Bridges, (being called the Bruggelingen) stand a cables length to the westwards of Liswegen then are you yet to the westw. off all the sands, poles, and banks, keep these steeples so standing and run on to the coast, until you come over the foresaid Ripped, and that you find again soft ground, and more depth, until you come in 5 fathom, go then n.e. and n.e. and by east with a flood, or north-east and north-east, and by north with an ebb (reckon well your tide, which runneth there most e. s.e. somewhat southerly, and w.n.w. somewhat northerly, and the tide runneth but a little hour alongst the land) keep the steeple Wenduynen one or 2 ships lengths without the Sconce of Blanckenbrough, so long as you can see them, and still in 5 fathom; when as Heyst cometh then to Bridges, and Westcapel to Knock, then are you right in the fareway of the Wieling, the nearer that you are to the bank of the English Poll, the deeper water you shall find, except that you have the shoaling of the bank itself. Bridge's must come first to Heyst, or else you should be to far to seawards, or to near to the English Poll; with a foreflood you may bring them both at once together, but not with a fore ebb. If you get then shoaling, that is, of the English Poll, go from thence alongst the same course, through betwixt the English Poll and the French Poll, or Innerbanck, that is a hard sand & steep, but the English Poll is thereabouts flat, which you may sound. When as that the castle of Sluice cometh to S. Lambert (a high flat steeple upon Casand, to the northwards or to the eastwards off the Sluice) than you are passed the French Poll, 
Marks of the French Poll.  go then east on right with Flushing, or else observe these marks following: Liswegen must not come within Heyst, before the Castle of Sluice come to the e. sandhil of Casand, but remain without it, or else you should sail on against the innerbanck, when as that the Castle cometh to the sandhil, go then boldly north-east and by east and eastnortheast, for to avoid the French Poll, until that the steeple of Flushing come to the northwards of the Prisongate, than you get deeper water: go then on east, and east & by south right with Flushing. There remaineth in the Wieling, as also in the inner Wieling at the lowest water, not less than 4 fathom & a half water.  

The inner Wieling.  The inner-Wieling lieth in through betwixt the innerbank, or French Poll, and Casant. When you come from the westwards into the Wieling, and are come so far, that Westchappel come to Knock, and will go in at the inner-Wieling, then go from thence east and by s. on and you shall espy the buy upon the point of the Paerd-marck (that is, a sand that shooteth off from the east point of Sluice haven, and is very steep) leave that buy on the starboard side, & keep S. Lambert's steeple even without the s. sandhill of Casant or Sluice haven, and go on n. e. or somewhat more northerly alongst by the shore, for to avoid the Krakesand, 
Krakesand.  when as then the Castle of Sluice and S. Lambert's steeple come one in the other, then go on east right with Flushing.  
Flanders is a Land full of sand-hils and hommocks, with many steeples alongst the coast, lying from the Haven of Sluice unto Calais, most w. s. w. and e. n. east. The first steeple to the westwards of Sluice is S. Anne a flat steeple, and then Westchappell a little short flat steeple, with a blunt cap upon it. Heyst to the westwards of them is a long sharp steeple higher than Knock. Betwixt Heyst and Blanckenbrough, lieth Liswegen somewhat within the land, that is a flat steeple, & the thickest of all the steeples there abouts. Blanckenbrough is alsoo a flat steeple higher than Liswegen, but not so thick Within the land from Blanckenbrough standeth Bridges, two thick sharp steeples upon one Church, to the westwards of Blanckenbrough a great half league lieth Wenduynen a sharp steeple.   

Of the tides & corpses of the Streams.  
Before Brewers-haven, a s. s. w. and n. n. e. Moon maketh high water.  
In the Channel of Brewers-haven a south and by west Moon.  
At Ter-Veer a s. s. w. and n. n. e. Moon.  
In the Veergat a s. and n. Moon.  
It is not good to run in at Veergat, especially with a southerly or south-west wind, before that the flood be half spent, for the after-ebbe, and the foreflood fall thwart over the Baniaert hard in at the Roompot, towards the land of Schowen, but when the flood is half spent, than it falleth right in at the Veergat. When the Moon is southeast, or northwest, than the water is there already two third parts flown.  
Like as it is here before said of the Maze and the Goerees-gat, so also here before the channels of Brewers-haven and Ter-Veer the flood turneth about with the Sun, so that the afterflood falleth in the channels, & the afterwards turneth about to the southwards, and becometh a running ebb, but the after-ebbs fall right out at the channels thwart into the sea, and then with the foreflood about again to the northwards.  
Before the Wielings a south and by w. and a s. s. w. Moon maketh the highest water.  
At Flushing & Ramekens a s. s.w. Moon.  
At Westchappell on the land of Walcheren, a south and north Moon maketh high water. When the water is a half hour fallen, than the tide beginneth to fall out there, and when it is flown a half hour, it beginneth to fall in: but before the Botkill it beginneth to go therefirst an hour before the lowest water, but it falleth long at sea. In the Splete, and over the shoals lying the abouts; the tide turneth about against the Sun, and at last falleth in at the channels. A south and north Moon maketh there the highest water. The foreflood falleth over the shoals there towards the land. When the Moon is about eastsoutheast, or that the water be about two hours flown, than it beginneth to turn towards the south, first southsouthwest, and then past the south towards the east, until that the Moon be southsoutheast, and then the flood falleth to the eastwards. When Blanckenbrough standeth about southeast and by east from you, from thence to the eastwards, the tide turneth about against the Sun, but from thence to the westwards, you shall not find the tides to turn about.  
Against Zealand in the fare way a third part of the flood falleth towards the land, and afterwards east and by north. Men may see Zealand from the poop in 16 fathom.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Flushing to Blanckenbrough nearest Westsouthwest, 9 leagues.  
From Blanckenbrough to Oostend south-west and by west. 2 leagues.  
From Flushing to the north Forland, west somewhat southerly 25 leagues.  
From the Wielings to Dover w. and by south 26 leagues.  
From the Wielings to Lay-stasse or Yarmouth, north west 32 leagues.    

Heights.  

Flushing, Ramekens, and the south coast of Walcheren lie near in 51 degrees and a half.   

Brewers-Haven.  
The land of Schowen showeth itself thus when it is three or four leagues thwart from you.   

De Cust van VLAENDEREN Beginnende vande wielingen tot aen de Hoofden met alle haer sanden en droogten.   

Renisse Blenck or wolsack. E. S.E from you. Visnamenghen sandhil, Lauwest sand waggon path Cape Cape Fire beacon The Hoot S.S.E.  
When you are before the Channel of Brewers-Haven, the land of Schowen showeth itself thus.  
Westchappel Souteland Middelleburgh Souburgh Coukerek Flushing.  
Thus showeth Walcheren when you are in the Doorloy, or before the Splete,  
S. Lambert Sluice Knock Heys Liswegen Blanckenbrough.  
Thus showeth the coast of Flanders from Blanckenbrough eastwards, when you sail in or out at the Wielings.     

The fourth Demonstration. Which unfoldeth The Coast of Flanders, from the Wielings to the Heads, about Calais, together with the Coast of England, from Dover to the north Forland.  
BEtwixt Wenduynen & Blanckenbrough standeth another little steeple, called john David's steeple. Oostend lieth a great league to the westwards of Wackerhout. A half league to the west wards of Ostend, lieth S. Catelyn, & a league to the westwards of it is Midlekerck, being a high thick flat steeple. From Middlekerck to Newport it is two leagues, there is a flat steeple with a little sharp steeple. A little to the eastwards of Newport lieth our Lady of Lombardy, a high flat steeple.  
From Newport to Broers it is two leagues, and from Broers to Dunkercke three leagues. The Southkoten is a league to the eastwards of Dunkerck. Dunkerck hath a high flat steeple, with a little sharp steeple. From Dunkerck to Gravelling are three leagues, betwixt them stand these steeples, first little Sinten a little sharp steeple, great Sinten a thick flat steeple, Mardycke a thick flat steeple, and S. George's a high sharp steeple, Gravelling hath no steeples, but there stand two mills, one on the Easter-gate, and the other on the west end of the town. From Gravelling to Calais are three leagues. Calais hath many sharp Steeples, where of one is higher than all the rest, and betwixt both lie these villages most without steeples. First Hooghenpryse and Dasen, two flat steeples; more Valdam a flat Church with a little spire upon the midst of it, that is all the knowledge of Flanders. The Coast of Flanders betwixt Calais and Blanckenbrough, is four and twenty leagues long, or as some say, one and twenty leagues, & Blanckenbrough from Flushing nine leagues. So that Flushing is from Calais, at the least 30 leagues, or as some say 33 leagues at the most.  
That which is here said of the steeples and leagues alongst the coast of Flanders, is very serviceable and needful as well for that which is before described of the Wielings, as also for the sailing into the havens of Flanders, but especially for the knowledge of the Flemish banks.  
For to sail into Oostend, 
Oostend.  you must run close to the eastwards of the town into the haven, called the Gueule on the east point of the haven lieth a head, whereupon standeth a beacon, you must run close in by that head, there it is deepest, from the west side to wit towards the town, shooteth of a little flat, whereof you must avoid that side a ships length or 2, at low water & a common tide remaineth in this haven's mouth 6 foot, and at high water there is two and twenty foot water. A little within the haven you may anchor where you will, and at low water you may lie there with a great ship a float.  
Newport 
Newport  is a tydehaven, which falleth altogether dry at low water and at high water and a common tide there is 13 footwater, close before the haven's mouth is a bank, which lieth from the eastwards of the Haven of Newport over to the westwards, thwart before the Havens mouth, and at half flood lieth dry, and at high water there cometh no more upon it then eight foot water.  
He that will go into Newport, must go in from the westwards betwixt the foresaid bank and the land, 
For to fall into Newport.  and sail unto the southwards of the bank so long until that the innermost beacon come even through, or to the eastwards of the outermost, and then run in so right by them, & in alongst amidst the channel betwixt the heads. Betwixt the bank and the land it is on both sides flat rising ground, so that you may sound the shores on both sides, but on the north side the bank is somewhat steep, it is 3 fathom deep close alongst by it. Within the haven's mouth it is set on both sides of the deep with beakons, where you must run through betwixt, until you come before the Town, which lieth about a Cannon shot from the seaside. There is fire in the night upon the 2 great beakons, out not longer then from half flood to half ebb.  
From Newport to Dunkercke alongst by the shore through within the banks, it is clean without any foul ground or banks, and at low water fifteen foot deep, the nearer the shore the deeper. Thwart of the Cloister Ten Duynen betwixt it and Broers bank, it is narrowest, which lieth not fare from the shore, thwart of it you must go close alongst by the shore.  
The Quade-bancke 
Quade-banck.  runneth of to the eastwards of the head of Dunkercke, at least two leagues to the westwards ending thwart of the heads of Dunkercke. To the eastwards of the easter head of Dunkerck men may anchor behind this bank, and lie sheltered for a northwest, north, and north-east wind, it is two fathom deep there at low water, but in the coming in, it is shoaler. Before the Havensmouth of Dunkerck, it is 9 and ten fathom deep, and to the westwards of the westerhead of Dunkerck, 6. 7. and 8. fathom, from thence men may run over the small bank in three fathom, and come against the Broad bank. This small bank 
Smal-banck.  lieth right thwart before the Haven of Dunkerck, to wit, betwixt Dunkercke and the Broad-banck.  

For to sail into Dunkerck.  For to sail into Dunkerck you must bring the fires within a capstane bars length one to the other, to wit, the innermost so much to the eastwards of the outtermost, keep them so, and run in then close alongst by the easterhead, the westerhead lieth somewhat further of into the sea than the other, thwart of it lieth a sandplate with some pales, therefore you must avoid it, and run in close alongst by the easterhead it is a narrow haven, & at high water and a common tide there cometh no more than 12 foot water. In the night they do fire there as at Newport, from half flood to half ebb, and the lowest firebeakon standeth next unto the sea.  
From the westerhead of Dunkerck runneth of a bank about 2 leagues long, called the Splinter, 
The Splinter.  which falleth dry at low water at many places, men may sail in by the shore, behind this bank from the westwards almost to the westerhead of Dunkerck, and there may come to an anchor in 5, 6, 7, and eight fathom. About half a league from the foresaid westerhead, there runneth a Slenck through the foresaid bank, where little Ships may go through at high water.  
Gravelling 
Gravelling  is also a tydehaven, where men must go in at high water, there stand two beakons, which you must keep one by the other, and sail so in betwixt the heads, on the west side runneth off a little riffe, which you must avoid. When you come from the eastwards alongst the coast running through Wolbreck Sound, at the end of the Brakes, (that are the banks before Dunkerck, and from thence westwards) than you come against the west point of the foresaid little riffe or out-sand off Gravelling, which lieth a good way of into the sea, to the eastwards of it men run into the Haven of Gravelling by night right in with the fires.  
To the westwards of the Haven of Gravelling lieth a bank or flat alongst the shore, lying a good way of from the land to sea-wards, almost as fare to the westwards as Calais, 
Newlanden.  called the New-Land, men may run alongst by it, or over it in five, four, and three fathom, according as men will.  
The haven of Calais 
Calais.  falleth every tide altogether dry, and at high water with a common-tyde, there is no less than three fathom water. For to sail in there you must keep the mill (standing on the east corner of the town) right over the easterhead, & run in so close alongst by the easterhead, and let the castle lie on the west side of you, from the wester head runneth of a little the riffe, therefore you must avoid it. When you are come in within the westerhead, you must go up to the westwards into Paradise, and there lie dry at low water. By night when the tide serveth, there stand two fires, you must run in right with them. It is not good to come into this haven before high water, because of the exceeding strong tide that runneth in there with the flood, for to avoid the anchors of the ships, which lie there within. It is there within dangerous and bad lying, especially with a n. lie wind which bloweth there open in.  
Thwart of from westerhead of Calais lieth a bank of two fathom, betwixt the head or Meyland, and the same bank men may run through in three fathom at half flood, the bank is two fathom deep. Under Calais cliff at the east end, men may anchor in then fathom but at the westend lieth a rock under water, a bow shot from the land. Calais cliff 
Callice-cliffe.  lieth betwixt Calais & Blancknesse.  

Of the Flemish Banks.  
West from Westcappell, and northwest from Oostend, about nine leagues without the Coast of Flanders, lieth a little plate, whereupon at low water is no more than two and twenty foot water, in foul weather the sea breaketh very much upon it.  
About two leagues from Oostend without the land lieth the Trick, 
The Trick.  or outerbanck, upon it there is no more than fifteen or sixteen foot water. When S. Catherines steeple cometh against Oostend, than you come on against this bank: betwixt this bank and the heads of Oostend, lieth another bank of three fathom water.  
Betwixt Oostend and Newport lie four banks, all which four begin about thwart of Oostend, the two nearest to the lands end thwart of Newport. The other lie all alongst the land almost to Dunkercke: the first and nearest to the land is called the Gear, 
The Gear  betwixt that and the land goeth a channel through, of 8. 9 & 10. fathom.  
The second called Laland, 
Laland.  endeth also against Newport, betwixt these two goeth a channel through of eight and nine fathom.  
The third are two banks one to the other, the eastermost ending half ways: Laland is called stroom, 
Stroom  the westermost ending thwart of Dunkerck, is called the Stone-bank 
Stonebanck.  which hath on the east side a hook, which lieth to the eastwards, running to nothing almost against Newport: this bank is three or four fathom, and upon the east end five & six fathom.  
The fourth is alsoo in two banks, the eastermost is called Sandele, 
Sandele  or Oudemoers bank, 
Oudmoers' Bank.  and the westermost Cal bank, 
Calbank.  of some called alsoo Small bank, which lieth alongst by the Broad-bank: but that outer end lieth at least two great leagues of.  
The ships that will go before Dunkerck & cannot get alongst by Flanders, do run about without these banks, until they come against Broad-banke, and then run in alongst by it 5 or 6 fathom. The Channel is 15 fathom deep, and every one of these four banks hath a dry Poelder. When 2 Steeples (that are somewhat flat to the southward of Newport) stand a handpikes length asunder, then are you thwart of these four banks here before mentioned, which are not deeper at low water then one fathom, and at spring-tidings fall almost dry.  
Betwixt all these banks you may anchor in 9 10. 11. and also in 12 fathom, you may run over them, in 4 fathom, but when you are to the westwards of them you shall find it deeper, to wit, 8. 9 and 10 fathom.  
The Broers bank 
Broers bank.  is three cornered, and lieth close by the land thwart of Broers and the Cloister Ten Duynen, and lieth of from the shore about westnorthwest a league into the sea, when the Cloister Ten Duynen, or the Broers lieth south from you, than you are at the innermost part of the Broers-bank, you may run through betwixt the land and this bank, in four fathom at low water; but men do run commonly about to the westwards of it, when they sail through within the banks, alongst the Coast of Flanders.  
A little to the westwards of Broers-banck lieth the Cams-banke, 
Cams-banck.  which is three fathom deep, and lieth in many Rasses, you may run through betwixt the land and this bank also in 8. 9 and 10. fathom, and alsoo may ride there for alt winds. By the land, betwixt this bank and Broers-banck, it is 5 fathom deep. When you run through betwixt this bank and the land, than you come alongst by the Quade bank until you come before the Haven of Dunkerck. When you are a good ways past the head of Dunkerck, about s. w. from the Splinter, than you run over a shoal of two fathom, called Wilbaert Sound, 
Wilbaert Sound.  being over it you shall have again then, 11 & 12 fa. When Borburger Steeple cometh in the valley of the sandhill, than you are thwart of this bank, by these marks you may sail through these banks northnorthwest into the sea, and come against the tail of the Broad-banck in four fathom. When as that you do edge again somewhat towards the land in twelve, thirteen, or fifteen fathom; than you may sail through betwixt the Broad and the Small bank, on eastnortheast, or east and by north until you are passed the Cloister Ten Duynen, or the Broers-Banck, which lieth off from the Cloister about a league into the sea. To the eastwards past this bank it beginneth to be shoal water against Newport four or five fathom, being past Newport, you must edge towards the land, in eight or nine fathom, keeping close to the land, and then you shall run through betwixt the land and the Gear, (which lieth alongst towards Oostend:) When you come against Oostend, than you are clear of the banks, and then you may run into the sea for to go into the Wielings.  

Marks of the Flemish banks.  There lie yet five long banks alongst Flanders. When Gravelling is southeast from you than you are thwart of the south end of these banks: and when Newport is southeast from you. Then you are thwarr of the north end of them they are very long, and betwixt each goeth a wide Channel through, of eight, nine, twelve, fifteen, sixteen, eighteen, nineteen, and twenty fathom deep, each of a several depth.  
The outermost or westermost bank called the Cliff 
The cliff  lieth from Calais cliff northnortheast about four leagues and a half, and is three fathom and a half deep: betwixt this and the other goeth a wide channel throug of three and twenty and 24 fathom deep.  
The second called the Ruyting, 
The Ruytinig.  lieth from Calais cliff north-east and by north about four leagues, and is there five or six fathom deep, but upon the south end of it, is a Poelder of a fathom and a half. When the south end of Winocxbergen cometh betwixt the two flat steeples to the westwards of Dunkerck, then are you thwart of this Poelder.  
There stand three or four mills to the eastwards of Dunkerck, when the outermost cometh over the east end of the town, that is also a good mark of this Poelder or shoal, and then the steeple of Dunkerck shall be from you s. e. five leagues.  
Betwixt this and the third goeth alsoo a channel through of 12 and 13 fathom  
The third, called the Dyke, 
The Dyke  lieth from Calais cliff north-east, and is deep four & five fathom, upon the south and north end of this Bank are Poelders, the southermost is deep one fathom, and lieth also upon the marks of Winocxbergen about northwest, somewhat westerly from Dunkerck, & is called the Polder of the Dyke, or Dyke-Polder, the other Polder or shoal of this bank is about four fathom and two foot deep, and lieth n. w. from the Cloister Ten Duynen. These banks are very dangerous; for the Ruyting lieth almost in the fareway, and at low water they have no more than two fathom depth.  
The fourth bank, called Kettell-banck, lieth from Callice-Cliffe north-east and by cast, and is deep, three, four, five and six fathom. Upon the south end is a shoal of one fathom water at low water, at spring-tidings these Polders fall dry. Alongst by this goeth also a channel through of 19 and 20 fathom.  
To the eastwards of the Kettel-banck, to wit, betwixt that and the Broad-banck goeth throug a great channel of 19 and 20 fathom.  
In all the channels betwixt the foresaid banks, men may turn to windwards every where from one bank to the other, & anchor betwixt the banks where they will.  
The south end of the Broad-bancke 
Broad bank.  lieth from Callice-cliffe eastnortheast, and hath one shoal upon the south end of one fathom and a half, is throughout three and 4 fathom deep.  
The north end is deep 6, 7, and 8, fathom, and lieth so far to the northward, until Newport be northwest from you, or the Cloister Ten Duynen be northnorthwest 5, or 6, leagues from you.   

The Coast of England from Dover to the north Forland.  
Betwixt Calais and Dover amidst in the fareway, (or somewhat nearer the French side then the English) lieth a narrow bank of four leagues long, lying about n. n. east, and southsouthwest alongst the land of Blackness, being called the Vaen, and by the Dutchmen called Vrow-sand, of 5, 6, 7, and 8, fathom depth, and runneth to the southwards towards the land of Bulleyn. West and by south from Callice-cliffe, and south and south and by east from Dover, is the shoalest of it, at low water not deeper than sixteen or seventeen foot. On both sides of this bank, as well alongst to the eastwards as to the westwards of it, it is 20, 22, 23, and 24, fathom deep. Men may anchor before Dover for a north and northwest wind, right against the Castle, in ten fathom, is the best road, and clean ground. For to sail into the Downs from the southwards, you must run about by the south Forland, within two cables length alongst by the land, and anchor thwart of the middlemost Castle in 7, or 8, fathom.  
The southermost point of Gooding, and the south Forland lie n. e. and s. w. asunder.  
Betwixt Goodding 
Goodding.  and the Valley in the land off the north Forland, called Ramsgat. lie two shoals, whereof the westermost is called the Quernes, and the eastermost the Brakes.  
For to sail from Dover (through within the Goodding, betwixt the Goodding and the Brakes,) to the north Forlant, you must go on north and by east so long until that the mill upon the north Forland come to the west side of the Valley in the north Forland, then go yet north and by east, and northnortheast, until that the little steeple upon the North Forland come to the East-side of the foresaid valley, than you shall be to the northwards of the Brakes, and then the little flat steeple on the south Forland cometh too, or right over the third white Chalck-hill to the Northwards of the south Forland, that is a direct long mark, for to sail through betwixt the Brakes and Goodding, as well when you come from the Northwards as from the Southwards.  
For to sail through within the Goodding from the Northwards, you must not come nearer the Brakes 
Brakes.  then in seven fathom, and set the south Forlant southsouthwest from you, and sail then so right with it, and then you shall run alongst the best deep. When as the flat steeple upon the North Forland standeth in Ramsgat ot the Valley, than you shall be thwart of the Brakes, and when the mill cometh in Ramsgat, you shall be to the southwards of the Brakes.  
When you lie in the Downs, and that the inner point of the cliff of the south Forland lie southsouthwest from you, than the Quernes 
Quernes.  lie north and by east from you, and the, end of Goodding n. e. from you.  
The north end of Goodding, and the point of the north Forland, lie southeast and by east and n. w. and by w. a league & a half asunder.  
For to come from the northwards into the Downs through betwixt the Brakes and the Quernes: 
For to sail through betwixt the Brakes and the Quernes.  there standeth a Church upon the high land of the south Forland, to the northwards of it, which is a flat steeple, & the church somewhat great of body, & there are 3 Castles upon the strand of the Downs, you must bring the foresaid Church with the flat steeple right in the midst betwixt the two southermost Castles, and then you are in the fareway in the middle of the channel, and that will serve for a leading mark to run through betwixt the Brakes and the Quernes, and the course lieth through s. s. west. If the wind be southerly, that you must turn to windwards through, run not further over to the eastwards then that the foresaid church come within 2 ships length of the southermost castle, for if you should bring them nearer, or together, than you should run upon the brake, and being cast about run not further over the westwards then that the foresaid church come within two ships length of the three for if you should bring them nearer, or together, you should run upon the Quernes, and these marks will serve to turn to windwards through betwixt the Brakes & Quernes either from the northwards or the southwards. The Brake is steep, being 5 s. close alongst by the side of it, and in the middle of the channel is but 15 foot at low water, so that it is deeper by this side of the Brake, then in the middle of the channel. As you turn to windwards, and run over to the eastwards towards the Brake, as soon as you must cast about, or else you should be against the Brake: the Querne is flat, but nevertheless as soon as you find it shoaler (in running over to the w. wards the Querne) then 15 foot, you must cast about again, 
Thwart marks of a tail of sand, lying of from the Goodding.  and so turn through. About half a league from the north end off the Goodding to the southwards, lieth of a flat tail or spit of sand to the westwards from the Goodding, a great musket shot of, and falleth dry a good ways of at low water, which maketh the channel there betwixt the Goodding and the Brake very narrow, the thwart marks of this tail of sand are these: up within the land, a little to the southwards of Ramsgate, stand 3 or 4 high trees together, when these trees do come right over the southermost end of the cliff that lieth alsoo a little to the southwards of Ramsgat, than you are thwart of this foresaid tail of sand, as soon as you shall be passed it, than you shall have more room to turn to windwards, and may run further over to the Goodding.  

For to run about a seaboard of Goodding.  For to sail from Dover without the Goodding to the north Forland, you must keep the point to the westwards of Dover without the south Forland, and go on north-east until that the north Forland come n.w. and by west from you, than you may boldly run to the north Forland, and anchor before Margate, or where that you shall think it best, but thwart of the steeple, where the mill standeth by, is the best road. Or when the point of the north Forland lieth southsouthwest and south-west and by south from you, there is alsoo good riding in 8 or 9 fathom. Betwixt Margate & the Reculvers, men may anchor every where in six or 7 fathom at half flood.  
Betwixt the Querns & the north Forland men may also run through to Sandwich, there runs of a little stonebanck from the shore, called the Fourefoot, betwixt that and the Quernes it is at half flood two fathom deep. The Quernes are lately grown much less, and shifted, so that the north end of them is almost gone.   

Of the tides & courses of the Streams,  
Alongst the coast of Flanders on the Land, a south and north moon maketh full sea.  
In the fareway without the Flemish banks in the sea, a s. w. moon maketh high water.  
In the midst betwixt the heads, a s. w. Moon.  
At Dover, a south & north moon.  
In the Downs, a southsouthwest moon.  
At the n. Forland, a south & n. moon.  
Alongst the Flemish banks, the foreflood falleth over the banks, towards the land, about the third part of the tide, afterwards alongst the Land, but the afterflood falleth to the northwards alongst the sea in the right fareway.  
When the flood beginneth to go there thwart off at sea, than it is already halfflood on the land, and the water flown half ways, so that men may go into all the Havens on the Flemish coast with 5 or 6 foot water.  
In the midst through the Heads, the flood falleth n. e. & by east, & the ebb south-west & by west.  
Fro. Dover to the n. Forland, the tide falleth through within the Goodding n. & s. over the Brakes & Quernes.  
Before Calais and Blackness, the flood falleth first one quarter to the land, afterwards n. n. e.   

Of the Depths.  
In the right fareway betwixt the Marsdeep & the Heads it is 23 & 24 fathom deep. A little without the Flemish banks 18. 19 & 20 fathom, but near Goodding, or about the north Forland, it is 26. 28. and also 30 fathom deep, the nearer Goodding the deeper water.  
Being thwart of Goodding in 28 or 29 fathom, you shall not be 2 shots of a cast-peece from it.  
For to sail out of the Marsdeep towards the Head, go not on otherwise then south-west, & southw. and by south, (but you must be very careful to take heed of the tides) when you shall reckon to have sailed 40 or 46 leagues, than edge over to the Flemish banks until you come in 20 or 18 fathom, when that you are sure of these grounds, then go on south-west, & at length south-west, & by west, & you shall come in the midst betwixt the Heads of Calais & Dover.  
Flanders you may see from the Poop in 16 fathom, and then you are within the point of the Flemish banks.  
Calais cliff & the south Forland, or the point of Dover you may see when you are before them in 24 fathom.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Blanckenbrough to Ostend s. w. & by w. 2 leagues  
From Oostend to Newport w. s.w 3 leagues.  
From Newport to Dunkerck w. sw. 5 leagues.  
From Dunkerck to Gravelling w. s.w. 5 leagues  
From Gravelling to Calais w. s.w. 4 leagues  
From Calais to Callice-cliffe s. w. & by west 1 league.  
From the Heads of Calais and Dover to the Riffe of jutland northnortheast 120 leagues.  
From Callice-Cliffe to the Naze in Norway, north north east, somewhat northerly 143 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Heads and Dover lie in 51 degr. 12 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Wenduynen. Ostend. Middlekerck. Newpoort.  
Wackerhout. S. Catelijn Lombardside.  
Thus showeth the coast of Flanders betwixt Ostend and Newport.  
Thus showeth Dover when you sail to the westwards of the Vaen, or Vrow-sand, through the Heads.  
When you run from the Downs towards the north Forland, than the land showeth itself thus.  
Newport The Broers Soutkoten Dunkerck Gravelling. Calais.  
Thus showeth the coast of Flanders, betwixt Newport and Calais, when you sail alongst by it.      

The second part. THE SECOND BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN Is contained the Description of the Seacoasts of the Channel between England and France; and likewise the Sea-coast of Ireland Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famons' Seamen, and lovers of Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


Pascaart vant CANAAL Begrypende in sich Engelandt. Schotlandt. en jerlandt. als meed e'en gedeelt van Francryck.  
De Cust van NORMANDY en Picardy als meed e'en gedeelt in Engelandt tusschen de Hoofden end Ornay.    

The second part of the New LIGHTNING COLUMN, THE SECOND BOOK, Of the WESTERN NAVIGATION Containing The description of the Seacoasts of France, from Blackness to Ushand, and the Coasts of England from Dover westwards, to the Lands end the Channel of Bristol, with all the Seacoasts of Ireland.  

The first demonstration, Where in Are set fourth the Coasts of France, from Blackness to the Island Aldernay or Ornay, & From Dover to Beachy.  
ABout a great league to the westwards of Calais cliff lieth Blackness, 
Blacknisse.  a fowl out-poynt, thwart of it lie many rocks alongst the shore. From Blackness to the River of Bullen, lieth the coast south and by east three leagues, a league to the southwards of the Nesse, the land falleth somewhat in with a fair sandy Bay. In this Bay lieth a Fisher village on the coast, thwart of it in the sandy Bay is a very good road for easterly winds, in 5. 6. 10. 15. and 16. fathom, according as you will lie fare from the shore. For to anchor there, you must bring the steeple of the village over the midst of the houses. This place is called S. john's road. 
S. john's Roade.  A little to the northwards of that foresaid Fisher village, stands a mill with some houses, from thence to the northwards you may not anchor, for there the ground is fowl and stony. To the southwards of the Road towards the River of Bullen, lie alsoo some little rocks alongst the coast which you must not come very near to.  
Upon the north point of the River of Bullen standeth a high thick Tower, called the Turd ' Ordre, 
Tour d' Ordre.  by sea men the Old-man, 
Oldman.  a special mark for to know the River by. About an English mile to the northwards of this Tower, a little mile from the shore, lieth a little sunken rock 
sunken rock.  under water where a Huye or Smack may not go over.  
Upon the south point of the River of Bullen 
Bullen.  standeth a stone wall, and upon it a great Beacon of a mast, thwart of it from the south point lieth off a little riffe or shoal, that you must shun, and run close alongst by the Head, which lieth at the north point, and hath been there lately made. When you are come within this Head, you must presently let fall your anchor and ride there; It is a tydehaven, there you must go in at high water, and at low water lie dry upon the chindle. Without, before the River, lieth a bank, men were wont from the southwards to run in over in two fathom and from the northwards in three fathom but it is now to the southwards deeper through the scouring of the water alongst the foresaid Head which is made at the north point.  
From the Oldman, or the River of Bullen to Somme 
The Somme.  is the course south about eleven leagues, between them lie alsoo two other rivers, Cauche & Auty, upon the first lie Eastaples and Monstreu, there you must go in a middle channel at the highest water, within, it falleth altogether dry at low water.  
Men may sail into the Somme, 
For to sail into the Somme.  through two channels, from the east point called the East Down, lieth off a sand thwart before the channel; to the westwards off that riffe lieth alsoo another great bank, between them goeth in the Easter-channell. For to sail in there, bring S. Valery a cables length to the westwards of the west point of the River, called the Oordell, and run in thereupon, until you come to the land at that foresaid west point; and from thence close alongst by it, or as soon as you get again deeper water over the bank, then turn up eastward towards the beacons. From the point of the Oordel lieth of to the northwards a little riffe, upon the end of it lieth a buy which you must leave on the starboard side, and run in close about to the northwards of it. From the point of the Oordell upwards, it is set allongst with beacons, you must run alongst close by them, until you come within the point of S. Valery, where you must anchor, and lie every tide dry. The sands there within do shift so often, that they are not to be described for always.  
For to sail into the western-channell, 
For to sail into the wester channel.  coming from the east or the north, you must run alongst by the banks in six or seven fathom, and not nearer, they are so steep, that a ship sitting fast upon them with the fore castle, at the stern hath three fathom. Coming towards the land at the end of the banks, you shall find a buy. Or else if you come from the west, and bring Crotoye a cables length within the Oordell, and sail so right in, you shall find the foresaid outermost buy. Besides this, there lie three other buys, whereof that foresaid buy on the point of the Oordell is the fourth, & the innermost: You must leave them all on the starboard side towards the land, and run in alongst by them to the northwards of them.  
These channels and sands there within (all until past S. Valery) Fall at low water altogether dry, the buys alsoo fall dry, that men may go by them, at half flood with an ordinary tide there is no more than two fathom Water, it is not good to go in there before that two third parts of the ●lood be spent. With an ordinary tide it floweth there five and six fathom, but with a springtide seven fathom up and down. At high water and springtide, a man may go over all the banks and sands with eight or ten foot Water five leagues upwards lieth Abbeville.  
Thwart of the Somme, it is fare off in to the sea shoal water, five, six, seven, eight, nine and ten fathom, three or four leagues off into sea: He that cometh from the west, and findeth himself in dark and misty weather to be in such shoaling, may be well assured, not to be fare from the Somme.  
From the Oldman to Diep, the course is southsouthwest 18 leagues, but from the Somme to Diep south-west and by west eight or nine leagues. About half way between the Somme and Diep, lieth the River of Heu, within it on the north side lieth Tresport, 
Tresport.  being alsoo a tydehaven, where men must go in at high water, and at low water lie dry.  
At the east side of the Haven of Diep, 
Diep  lieth a rank of rocks, and from it lieth a little riffe of chindle towards the north, or the west; to the southwards of this riffe goeth in the channel, about southeast in, it is very narrow, and a short inlet, therein lie three buys in in the midst of the deep, not above a stones cast one from the other, men may run in on both sides of them; coming to the end of the buys, they must keep the middle of the channel, and run in between the heads, until they come within the town, & there make fast with a cable on the shore. Men may not sail in there before flood, but not at half ebb; at low water it falleth altogether dry, but within at the Town men may ride a float, at high water there cometh three fathom, or at the highest not more than 3 fathom and a half water, there come out always Pilots to bring ships in.  

S. Valery, in Caux.  From Diep to Saint Valery in Caux, it is south-west and by west four leagues, that is alsoo a tydehaven, where you must go in with high water, it is a narrow channel, where you go in between to the Heads, there is neither sand nor bank before it that can hurt you being come in, you may let your anchor fall, and make you fast with a cable on the shore. He that hath neither cable nor anchor, may (being come there within) sail his ship on against the shore in the chindle, and so save his ship & goods without damage.  
From S. Valery to Fecam 
Fecam.  it is w. s. w. four leagues; that is a deep tydehaven, there remaineth at low water little less than 2 fathom water. At the east side of the havensmouth lieth a bank or plate, men may with small ships sail in through betwixt it and the land, and so run in, sounding, borrowing it eight or nine foot alongst by the east shore, which is flat. For to sail into the westwards of the plate, you must keep the Tower of Fecam, without the land, or without the West point of the Haven, and then it shall be southsoutheast from you, run then upon that mark into the Haven, and then the foresaid sand shall remain on the larboard side of you, and at half flood you shall have in the Havensmouth 2 fathom water, being come in before the town, you may anchor there by the Western shore in three fathom.  
From Fecam to Struysaert 
Struysaert  it is westsouthwest three little leagues. Without the point of Struysaer lie two high sharp rocks. From thence to Seynhead it is s. and s. and by west, 2. leagues and a half.  
About northwest from Seynhead lieth a bank, upon which at low water remaineth no more than two fathom and a half water: when the town of New-haven cometh without Seynhead, then are you thwart of the back: For to avoid it, run in close aboard the Seynhead, alongst until you come within the first mill, there let fall your anchor in 6 fathom, & stay for a Pilot to bring you into the haven.  

For to sail into the River of Rouen.  For to sail into the River of Rouen, coming from the north or the east, you must run close aboard the land to the northwards of Seynhead, and alongst by it, so long until the south side of the river come unto the point of Seynhead, then run in with it, until the land to the westwards of Newhaven come without Newhaven, sail then unto the Haven of Newhaven. Or el●e, if you will go without about the bank or the Rettires, than edge over to the westwards so far from the land until the river come open, sail then towards the point of Tochet, and run in upon your lead by it, there is at high water three fathom, and at low water no more than one fathom. The Rettires is a stony bank, lying in the midst of the River of Seine, lying over towards the point of Honfleur, at low water it falleth at some places dry, at half flood it is to the southwards three fathom, but to the northwards 2 fathom deep. When the land of Caen is without the point of Seynhead, and you sail then with it, south on, than you run to the westwards of it, or alongst without it. Or else, if you keep Struysaert a handspikes length without the point of Seynhead, than you run alsoo without it. When the easter gate of New-haven cometh over the easter head, and the easter mill, sail then so on, keeping them so, than you run in right to the northwards of the Rettires, and alsoo you can take no hurt of the bank that lieth towards Seynhead. At Habell or New-Haven men must go in at a high water, and within lie every tide dry,  
The river of Seine must be sailed into upon the tide, when the most, or the strongest of the flood is spent, than you may sail alongst by the land upon your lead, until you may see in open into the river of New-haven, when then the souther Castle cometh over the easterhead, and the mill; run then right in upon it, but it is best to anchor half ways betwixt the Castle and Seynhead, and there to stay for a Pilot: If there come none off, then sail from thence right with the Castle that standeth upon the head, there it is deepest water.  
To sail from New-haven upwards towards Rouen, is not well to be done without a Pilot, you must go with the tide through the first travaille or banks, which lie from New-haven to Honfleur s. east, alongst by the souther-land, and from thence alongst the north side of the River to Quillebeuf, being come there, you are through the first travaille. You must alsoo be well advised, and take good heed for the strong spring by the Normans, called La Bar, which every tide cometh on so strong with the flood, that anchors and Cables have enough to do to hold a ship: For that and other dangers more, it is not good nor convenient to sail up the River without a Pilot.  
Two great leagues to the southwards of the River of Rouen, lieth a Tydehaven, called Tochet, 
Tochet.  on the west side of the entry standeth a beacon, by it you must go in, or you may sound it in by the Eastershoare. Southwest, or south-west and by south from the point of Seynhead, about six or seven leagues off, lie many banks, a good ways in sea, you may sail on both sides of them (as well to the eastwards as to the westwards) into the Fosse of Caen, 
Fosse of Caen.  which lieth in most south, and lieth in a Bay. At the west side lieth a chindle, where men may ride within it, it is wide and broad, and sandy strand, the East land is sand-hills, and fare flat in six & seven fathom, there men may go in, sounding with the sounding Pole.  
From Seynhead to Cape de Barfleur, or Cape de Schierborough, 
Cape Schierborough.  the course is West and by north nineteen leagues. About four leagues to the eastwards of it lie the Islands of Saint Marques, men may sail round about them, but it is not there very clean.  
A league to the westwards of the Island of Saint Marcus lieth La Hung 
S. Marcus La Hung  a flat Tower, to the westwards of it lieth the point of Barfleur, betwixt both is a great bay, where men may lie in six or seven fathom land-lockt for a n. n. west wind. A north-east wind bloweth there open in.  
From the north-poynt or C. de Barfleur (which lieth northnorthwest from you, 
Sunckenrock.  when you lie in the road) lieth off a bank or little riffe, yet a ship may go over it. Northeast a league and a half off from the foresaid point lieth a rock under water, where ships may not go over.  
From C de Barfleur to Schierborough it is northwest and by west four leagues, that is a little Tydehaven. To the westwards of the point of Barfleur lie some foul grounds, if you keep the high land of Schierborough without the Cape de Wyck, 
Cape de Wyck.  you shall not come too near them.  
Before Cape de Wyck is a good road in six fathom, a little to the east-wards of the two high rocks in a sand-bay.  
Before Schierborough lie some rocks, or little Islands, which are clean round about, to the westwards of it lieth a Tydehaven, called the Fosse of Moberille, before it on both sides lie 4 or 5 high rocks, at high water men run through betwixt them, and so into the Haven. A great league and a half to the westwards off it, lieth Cape de Hague.  
Two leagues west and by north from Cape de Hague 
Cape de Hague.  lieth the Island Aldernay or Ornay, betwixt them goeth the Race of Blanckert through.  

The Coast of England.  

Road under the Nesse.  The point of Dongienesse lieth from Dover south west and by west distant 8 leagues. At the east side of the Nesse in Romans Bay, thwar, of the Romans-Tower, is a good road for west & s. west winds: For to anchor there, run so farre in the Bay, that the point of the Nesse be south and south and by west from you, anchor there in about 7 or 8 fathom; you may alsoo anchor on the west side of the Nesse, for a north-east wind, so that the point lie east and by north from you.  
For to sail in to the Camber of Rye, 
Camber of Rye.  coming from the west, you must keep Beachy without the point of Fairlee, and run so towards the Nesse, and beingh come in fair by it, run in without two Cables length alongst by it, unto the end of the Nesse, than edge up to the westwards, and leave the beakons upon the starboard side, until you come before the Castle Camber, that standeth upon the souther chindle, there you may anchor in four and five fathom: From thence alongst even unto the Town of Rye, it is all set with beacons, which stand alongst by the east side of the Deep, unto the Daries, which at low water fall dry. In sailing unto Rye you must leave all the beacons unto the starboardside, and run indifferent close alongst by them.  

Road under the Beachy  The point of the Nesse and Beachy lie west south west, and eastnorth east distant 7 leagues. Beachy is by the seven white Cleeves, the best known land that a man can see any where. To the eastwards of Beachy men may anchor for westerly winds in six or seven fathom, so that the point besouth, and south and by west from you.   

Of the Tides and Courses of the Streams.  
Before Calais and Blackness, the flood falleth first one quarter to the land afterwards n. n. e.  
Betwixt Blackness and Bulleyn, the flood falleth n. and by east by the land, but a seaboard in the offing north-east. A south and south east moon maketh there the highest water.  
Betwixt Bulleyn, Diep, and before the Somme, the flood falleth first one quarter to the land; afterwards north east and by east, and the ebb south-west and by west.  
Betwixt Diep and Struysaert without the land in the Fareway, the flood falleth north-east and by east, and the ebb south-west and by west.  
At New-haven, and in the River of Rouen a southeast Moon maketh a high water.  
From Struysaert to Caen in the Fosse, the flood falleth southsouthwest, and the ebb northnortheast. Before the Haven of Caen a southsoutheast maketh high Water, within the Haven a south and by east Moon.  
At Marckell, lafoy Hung, Barfleur, Sherborough, and C. de Hague by the shore, a south & by east moon.  
From Seynhead to Barfleur, the flood falleth by the and east and by north, and the ebb west and by south. But in the channel a seaboarde the land, the flood falleth away eastnortheast, and the ebb west south-west.  
At Cape de Hague by the shore, a south and by e. Moon maketh high water.  
In the Race off Blankert a north and by east, and south and by west Moon. The flood falleth through the Race north-east, and the ebb south-west.  
In the midst betwixt the heads a south w. Moon.  
At Dover a south and north Moon.  
Betwixt Dover & Dongie Nesse, and likewise thware of the Nesse, a s. s.w. Moon maketh full sea.  
In the Channel of Winchelsea, a south and by east Moon.  
At Beachy by the shore, a s. s.e. & n.n.w. Moon.  
In the Fareway thwart of it, a south & north Moon.  
From Dongie Nesse to Dover, the flood falleth n. e. & by east, & the ebb s. w. & by west.  
From Beachy to the Nesse, e. n. e. and w. s. w.  
At Beachy by the shore before the seven Cleves, the flood falleth east & by south, and the ebb w. and by n.   

Of the Depths.  
Calais cliff & the south Folland, or the point of Dover, you may see when you are before them in 24 fat.  
To the southwards of the Oldman, or Tour d' Ordre, lieth the high land of Eastaples, which is very good to be known, because thereabouts is no land so high. When that is n.n.e. from you; and you be thwart of the Somme, it is there deep 8 and 9 fathom.  
Upon the land of Somme towards Diep, stand many sharp towers, & some mills & trees, and hath all alongst the coast a sandy strand.  
Before Diep, men may see the land in twenty & two and twenty fathom.  
About four leagues without Struysaert it is deep 20 fathom.  
Between Diep & Seynhead stand alsoo many sharp towers, trees & houses upon the land. Struysaert is best to be known on a great rock like a high Tower, thwart of it in the fareway it is deep 16 and 17 fathom.  
About C. de Barfleur and Sherbrough four leagues from the Island, it is deep thirty fathom.  
Barfleur is a high point, below upon the white land standeth a flat Tower, two mills, and some little houses, and to the westwards of it is more white land.  
Upon Cape de Hague standeth a Castle, with a little turret; a little to the eastwards of it in the land standeth a sharp Tower. Two leagues to the eastwards off it lieth Sherborough with a flat steeple.  
Betwixt Winchelsea & Picardy in the midst of the Channel it is deep 26 and 27 fathom, upon such depth men may see Fayerley and the land of Dover.  
Without Beachy thwart of the seven Cleeves it is deep 28 and 30 fathom.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Callice-cliffe to Blackness s. w. one great league.  
From Blackness to the Oldman, south 2 leagues.  
From Blackness to Some south 14 leagues.  
From the Oldman to the some south 11 leagues.  
From the Somme to Tresport w. s.w. 7 leagues.  
From the Oldman to Deep s. s. west 18 leagues.  
From Tresport to Diep south-west and by w. 4 leagues.  
From Diep to Fecam, w. s.w. 10 leagues.  
From Fecam to Struysaert s. w. and by w. 3 leagues.  
From Struysaert to Seynhead, the course is southsouthwest two great leagues.  
From Seynhead to Caen in the Fosse, the course is south-west and by south 8 leagues.  
From Seynhead to C. de Barfleur or Chierenburgh w. and by north 19 leagues.  
From Blackness to Diep south and by west 22 leagues.  
From Blackness to Struysaert, or C. de Caux, south west & by south 31 leagues.  
From Blackness to the Caskets, the course is westsouthwest 54 leagues.  
From Blackness to Wight w. somewhat southerly, 37 l.  
From Blackness to Beachy west 18 leagues.  
From Diep to Wight, the course is w.n.w. 36 leagues.  
From Diep to Beachy northwest and by north 25 leagu.  
From Diep to Dover north 27 leagues.  
From Seynhead to Dieruliet, or the point of Sherburg west and by north 19 leagues.  
From Seynhead to Portland n.w. and by w. 38. leagues.  
From Struysaert to the east end of Wight, northwest somewhat northerly. 29 leagues.  
From Struysaert to Beachy, north 26 leagues.  
From Struysaert to Fairlye, north & by east, somewhat northerly 29 leagues  
From Struysaert to the point of Dover, the course is n north-east 35 leagues.  
From Caen to Dierfliet, or the point of Barfleur northwest 16 leagues.  
From Dierfliet to Cape de Hague w.n. west 8 leagues.  
From Dover to Dongienesse s. w. and by west 8 leagues.  
From the Nesse to Fairlee w. s.w. 3 leagues.  
From Dongie Nesse to Beachy. w. s.w. 7 leagues.  
From Fairlee to Beachy s. w. and by w. 5 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Heads and Dover lie in 51 degr. 12 min.  
The Somme lieth in 50 degr. 6 min.  
The Point of Struysaert in 49 degr. 35 min.  
Beachy lieth in 50 degr. 50 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Callice-cliffe. Tour d' Ordre. Old man The land of Bulleyn.  
From Callice-cliffe unto beyond Bulleyn, the land showeth itself thus, when you sail alongst by it.  
The high land of Eastaples northnortheast East and by south.  
This undermost is Sand-hills  
Thus showeth land betwixt Eastaples and the Somme, when the high land is northnortheast from you.  
Some Sand-hills White Chalky Cleeves  
Thus showeth the land to the southwards of the Somme, towards Diep.  
These two figures belong at the AA one to the other.  
Grand valley Fecam.  
The land between Diep and Fecam showeth like these two figures here above, when you sail alongst by it, two or three leagues without the land.  
Seynhead Struysaert.  
The form of Struyseart, and Seynhend, when you sail alongst by them.  
Thus showeth the land or Cane, when you are tower leagues off from it.  
Thus showeth the land of Sherborough, and the land to the westwards or it towards C. de Hague when it is southeast 4 leagues off from you.  
Thus showeth Dover when you sail to the westwards of the Vaen, or Vrow-sand, through the Heads.  
Thus showeth Fairlee, when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth Fairlee when you come from the west.  
Beachy showeth thus when you come from the west.   

De Custen van BRETAIGNE, Waer in vertoont wort alle gelegentheyt tusschen Caap de Hague en t' Eylant Heyssant.     

The second Demonstration. Where in Is deciphered the Coast of Britanny, from the Island of Ornay to the Island of Ushant.  
TWo leagues west and by north from Cape de Hague, 
Cape de Hague.  lieth the Island Aldernay or Ornay, betwixt them goeth the Race of Blanckert 
The Race of Blanckert.  through. Aldernay or Ornay 
Ornay.  is about three leagues long, and lieth east & west. The east end is clean, men may sail reasonable close alongst by it, but the west end is very foul: There lie some little Islands close by the west end, being passed them, men may sail towards jarsey without any fear.  
To the southwards of the foresaid little Islands at the west end lieth of a ledge of rocks within it, on the south side it is clean, except at the south point, that is also foul. He that will anchor on the south side of Ornay, must be mindful thereof, & anchor a little to the eastwards of the Tydehaven.  
From the west end of Ornay lieth a great multitude of rocks west and by north, & westnorthwest off three leagues into the sea.  
Upon the outtermost and westermost end, lieth a great high rock with many other smaller rocks about it. Half ways betwixt this great rock and Ornay lieth another great rock, but not so high as the foresaid westermost, from it lie off a multitude of rokes towards the outermost, which fall dry at low water, but at high water many lie under water. These two great rocks are called by the French Les Casquettes, and by the Dutch the Kiskassen, and by the English the Caskets. 
Catskets.  Close by the west end of Ornay, towards the Caskets, lie other two great ranes of rocks, called the Barroches. 
Barroches   
From the east point of Ornay to the east end of Garnesey (about to the southwards of Ornay) the course is westsouthwest, 9 leagues; but from the Caskets to the west end of Garnsey south-west and by south, 6 leagues.  

Road under Garnsey.  If you will anchor under Garnsey (coming from the Caskets) then run on to the north-east point of Garnsey, and so far to the eastwards of it, until you get sight of the castle that standeth upon the rock on the east side of Garnsey. Or if you come about to the westwards of the Caskets, then go on southeast, or somewhat more southerly, until the north-east point of Garnsey be south and by west from you, sail then towards it, till you shall come in sight of that foresaid castle upon the rock. Bring that over the south point of Garnsey, and sail in upon that mark, betwixt the Island Arem or Harm; and Garnsey, until you come by the foresaid Castle, betwixt these Islands it is on both sides full of rocks, where of you must take good heed, especially on the larboard side towards Arem, when you are come by the castle, you may anchor within or without it, where you please, without the Castle in 12 or 13 fathom, or within the Castle) that is betwixt the Castle and Garnsey) in six or seven fathom at low water, It doth flow there six or seven fathom up and down, which men must reckon upon.  
Under the south side of Garnsey men may ride for northwest, north, & north-east winds. If you come from the west, or from the Caskets, you must run close about by the south-west point, called C. de Gruse; and alongst by the south side of the Island, well half ways the Island, and anchor there where you think good, in eighteen or nineteen fathom. If the wind shift to the south-west, or to the westsouthwest, than you may run about by the south point unto the foresaid Castle▪ and anchor there either without or within it, as here before is said. From the aforesaid south point, lieth off a little ledge of rocks, where of some rocks lie above, & some under water, these you must avoid when you sail about by it.  
South & by west, and southsouthwest about eight leagues from Garnsey lieth a great ledge of rocks, more than a league great, called Rockeduves. 
Rockeduves.   
About 2 leagues southeast from Garnsey lieth the Island Sarck, 
Sarck.  there men may anchor round about it in five and twenty, six and twenty, and seven and twenty fathom. From the north end lie of some Rocks, where of some lie above, and some under water. At the south end hereof lie alsoo some rocks, but all above water.  
Betwixt Garnsey and Sarck lie two other little Islands, Arck and Arem, 
Arck, and Arem.  or Harm, there men may sail through betwixt them.  
The Island jarsey from Garnsey southeast distant 7 leagues, round about this Island are good roads at divers places. All alongst the north side men may anchor in 10 & 11 fathom. At the same north side, somewhat within the west point, lie some great rocks, a good ways of from the shore, called the Pater nosters, 
Pater noster.  or Pierreleg. At the south-west point lie many rocks which lie of a great ways into the sea, to the northwards of them, to wit, betwixt them and the westermost point, at the west side of jarsey men may anchor at divers place in ten, eleven & twelve fathom. At the south side of jarsey is also a good road for a northwest & w. n. w. Windes. At the east side lieth Saint Catherines bay, 
S. Catherines Bay  there is alsoo very good road for westerly winds.  
The west end of jarsey and Saint Maloes, or the Island Sisember before S. Maloes' lie south and by east, and north and by west, eight or nine leagues asunder. About half way betwixt both right in the fareway, lie a great number of high rocks together, which contain in circuit in sailing about, seven or eight leagues, 
Mankies' Rocks.  called the Mankierrs, they lie fare towards jarsey, some above and many under water, so that it is not without great danger to run through betwixt jarsey and the Mankiers.  
When men will sail through the Race of Blanckaert, bound for S. Maloes', they run commonly through betwixt Sarck and jarsey, may alsoo sail to the eastwards of all the Islands and shoals alongst the coast of Normandy, towards S. Maloes' in manner as followeth.  
When men come a little past the C. Voorha, they shall meet (thwart of the Island jarsey) with three or four high rocks, called Le Beuf, 
Le Beuf.  men may run to the westwards of them, and so through betwixt them and the Island jarsey, or else to the eastwards of them alongst by the main land, even as they will, towards the riffe of Mortefaim, that lieth upon the coast of Normandy southsoutheast, 8 leagues from Cape de Voorha.  
Over against, or thwart of the Riffe of Mortefaim, lieth a rane of rocks lying east and west more than a league in length, called Beufkin, 
Beufkin.  at the east end many of them lie above, & at the west end most of them lie under water. Men must sail through betwixt them and the riffe of Mortefaim that are bound for Granville.  
Betwixt the foresaid rocks Beuf and Beufkin, lieth another great rane of rocks, called Eckerof, 
Eckero●  which lie of from the southeast point of jarsey towards Granville; you must leave all these rocks on the starboardside, & run alongst to the eastwards of them.  
From the riffe of Mortefaim to Granville, the course is southsoutheast, and from bufkin southeast 4 leagues.  
Cape de Voorha & Granville 
G●anville.  are two points that lie without the other land. About the south point of Granville lie two or three little rocks; along by them men must run in within a Pier or head, where the ships lie dry at low water. Betwixt cape de Hague, and Granville men may see upon the land many little houses, mills, & trees, as they sail alongst by it. A little to the southwards of the riffe Mortefaim stands a Church with two steeples, called Quotanse. All alongst this whole coast is every where good anchorage in 6 or seven Fathom, especially a little to the southwards of Cape de Hague.  
About two leagues west from the point of Granville lieth another great rane of rocks two great leagues long, lying east & west, called La Shausee, 
La Shausee  betwixt them & the point of Granville men must sail through that are bound for Concalle or S. Maloes'.  
About five leagues to the southwards of Granville, in a great bay, lieth an Island before the river of Aurantie about a league without the land, called Mount de S. Michiel, 
Mount de S. Michiel  upon it lieth a Castle, or little town, called S. Michiel, with a high Tower which men may see at sea. This Bay is to the southwards of Granville, within the rocks of Concalle, very flat and rising ground, from thirteen, ten, eight, six and four fathom to one fathom, so that at low water the Bay falleth so fare dry, that from the strand men see no sea nor water.  
From Granville to the point of Concalle, 
Concalle.  the course is south-west 5 leagues, from that eastwards lie three rocks, under which men may anchor in ten fathom. For to sail to the town men must run in betwixt the point & the foresaid rocks. It is betwixt them both eight and nine fathom deep. Before the town it is shoaler water. To the north-wards of the Town lie other two rocks, there men may also anchor under in 5 and 6 fathom water.  
From the outermost rocks by the point of Concalle until you come before S. Maloes', the course is west, & west and by south 5 leagues.  
Before the haven of S. Maloes', lieth an Island, called Sisember, 
S. Maloes' Sisember.  upon the west end thereof standeth a mill, and upon the east end a church with some little houses being a Friary, coming out of the sea, you can but even scarce see the Church, but being within the Island you may see it better, because it standeth on the southside of the Island. A great shot of a east piece to the eastwards of Sisember lieth a great high rock, called the Meuwstone: 
Meuwstone.  betwixt them and Sisember it is all full of rocks and stones, which at high water lie most under water: there is a little channel betwixt them both, which the French men use with their small shipping, through betwixt the rocks, but is not to be used with great shipping, neither by them that are not very well acquainted with it.  
Betwixt the Meuwstone, and some other rocks to the eastwards off it, lieth in a channel south and south and by east, called lafoy Congee. 
La Congee.  For to sail in there you must run in close aboard to the eastwards of the Meuwstone, southeast and by east right in with the town, until you be gotten in two third parts of the distance (between the Meuwstone and the Town) from the Meuwstone, & are one third part of the distance from the Town, that is when the Meuwstone is twice so fare from you as the Town, than you shall see by the northwest point of the Town two great rocks, about a cast piece shot from the foresaid point; upon each rock standeth a little house, the outermost is the smallest, & is called the little Bee, the nearest to the Town is the greatest, and is called the great Bee, 
The l●ttle and great Bee.  sail then towards them, and run in about them within a cables length of them, but keep that course so long, until that the little Tower (that standeth a little to the southwards of the town upon the point) come over the tower of Boar a little to the eastwards of Saledoor, keep them one over the other, and sail so in, unto the south end of the town, where the mills do stand, than you shall see there upon the rocks two beacons, run betwixt them through at high water, until you come within the town, at the eastside, the ships lie moored with sour cables, dry at low water, two fast on the town, & two upon the sand. Betwixt these two foresaid beacons, to the southwards of the town, and thereabouts, is the ground sharp, rocky and stony, therefore men must take heed not to stay there at low water, or to ground there, but within on the east side of the town it is clean sandy ground, there may the ships lie a ground without danger.  
A little within, or to the southwards of the foresaid rock the little Bee, men may anchor in five or 6 fathom water at low water, so that the towet of Boar cometh little to the eastwards of the little Tower upon the point to the southwards of the Town, that road is called by the French La Ranse, 
The Road La Ranse.  there men commonly first anchor, and stay for high water, for to go in about to the southwards of the Town. It sloweth here at S. Maloes', & thereabouts, seven fathom up and down with an ordinary tide.  
From the west end of Sisember, lie off alsoo a great many rocks alongst to the westwards, more than a great shot off a cast piece, at the end of them goeth in the Wester-channell of S. Maloes', east and by north in. For to sail in there, you must look out for a sharp little Tower, that lieth somewhat to the northwards or to the eastwards of S. Maloes', within the land called Pellemy, when you have brought that east and by north from you, than you shall see upon the shore right against it, a great black rock, which for Blackness showeth itself without all the other rocks thereabouts, and thereby is very easy to be known: Bring that rock & the foresaid little Tower one to the other & sail so right in until you come thwart of the Island Sisember, or else that the little Tower (upon the point to the southwards of the Town) come to the Tower of Boar, to the eastwards of Saledoor, sail then towards the road of La-Ranse to the southwards of the little Bee; or else if it be high water, you may run in upon the marks, and then in about to the southwards of the Town, as here before is said.  
When you sail into this western channel, you shall leave on the starboard side a high rock (called the Schoorsteen) with more other rocks to the westwards of it, which at high water are most of them over flown. On the north side, that is on the larboard side, lie alsoo many rocks, whereof many of them are overflown at high water, and also many remain above water.  
Yet a southern channel 
More, a Southern channel.  lieth in by the land to the southwards of the rock of S. Antony, upon marks that men may see a stern the ship, but it is not used but with small ships.  
About half ways betwixt the western channel of S. Maloes', and C. de Farela, lieth a stony bank 
Stony bank.  under water. A little to the westwards of C. de Farela, lieth a great rock. When you will sail from C. de Farela towards S. Maloes', and that you keep the foresaid rock right upon the point of Farela, you shall so (without fail) sail upon the Stonebanck: but if you keep the rock hidden under or behind the point, than you shall sail alongst to the southwards of it. Or else if you keep it without the point (so that you may see through betwixt it & the point) than you shall sail alongst to the northwards of it. The foresaid rock is a good mark for to know Cape de Farela by.  
S. MALOES.  
De Haven van S. Malo  
Four leagues west from S. Maloes' lieth a great Sandbay, where men may lie landlockt for all winds: Men use to anchor within a great rock, right against a mill and some trees.  
About two leagues northwest from that Sand-bay lieth the Cape de Farela, 
Farela.  which is alsoo called Cape de Late, after the Castle de Late, that standeth to the eastwards off the point, there is a good Road for west & south-west winds.  
Two great leagues northwest from the entry of the Haven of S. Maloes', lieth the Oysterbanck, 
●yster●●nck.  there under it men may anchor in 6 or 7 fathom.  
To the westwards of Cape de Farela unto the north-end of the Island Briack, 
Briack.  the course is west and by north nine or ten leagues. Two leagues from the land west from the Cape lieth a great rane of rocks above water. Between the foresaid Cape and the Island Briack lie the Havens or Rivers of S. Brieux 
● Brieux.  and S. Benit. 
S. Benit   
The Island Briack is two leagues long, & lieth southsouthwest and northnortheast, when you come from the east, you shall see two mills upon it, and betwixt them a high round hill, with a little house upon it: you may sail round about this Island, and may make roads on every side where you will, although round about it here and there lie some rocks, yet it is all over good anchor-ground. A good ways off from the north-east point lieth a rock, called Souffe, and at the north end lieth a ledge of rocks under water, where of you must take heed.  
A great league westsouthwest from Briack, three or four leagues a seaboard the land, lie the outrockes, called the Pickeles, men may sail round about them also, but to the eastwards of them towards the main land, lie many sunken rocks.  
Four leagues to the westwards of Briack lieth the Port Blank upon a great river, called Lantrilliers, 
Portblank Lantrilliers seven Isles.  to the eastwards of this haven lie off many outrockes.  
To the westwards of Port Blank, lie the Sept Isles, or seven Islands, lying from the Pickels distant five leagues east and west. A league to the southwards of them lieth the Green land, there you may ride round about it. Between the seven Islands you may not sail through, but to the southwards of them, betwixt them and the Green Island 
Green Island.  goeth a broad channel through. From the eastermost Island lieth off a fowl riffe to the southwards, upon the outermost end of that riffe lieth a rock, as a good mark for to sail about the riffe. Northwest from the west-end of the seven Islands, lieth alsoo a sunken rock, which at low water may be seen. Men may alsoo sail alongst by the coast from Port Blank, within to the southwards of the Green Island, and come out again into the sea to the westwards: from thence northwest off into the sea, lie the treacle Pots, 
treacle. Pots.  these are great fear full outrockes, which lie spread wide and broad westsouthwest from the seven Islands, and four or five leagues a seaboard the land.  
Betwixt the treacle Pots and the seven Islands lieth the River of Laminoe, 
R. Laminoe.  to the westwards of the Green Island: For to sail in there, men must take good heed of the north-east point, which is fowl.  
Thwart of the seven Islands, upon the main land, standeth a Church with a high steeple, called Our Lady of the Clearness, thereby men may know them.  
Thwart of the treacle Pots standeth alsoo a high Tower, thereby men may know when they are near them, but it must be very clear weather before men can well discern it upon the land.  
He that cometh by night or dark weather from the Fourne, or Ushant, and is bound to Saint Maloes, let him not go with a southerly wind, to the eastwards of eastnortheast, or north-east and by east with a westerly wind, so long until he hath the length of the treacle Pots, that they be on his broad side. The flood falleth southeast within the treacle Pots and the seven Islands, and should by night easily draw a ship towards them. By day, or when there is sight, there is no such danger.  
Within the treacle Pots lieth the tide haven of Saint John de Doy, two leagues to the westwards of the Green Island, and two leagues to the eastwards of Morlions, men may sail from thence through the rocks unto Morlions, and anchor in five and six fathom at low water.  
To the westwards of the treacle Pots lieth a great rock, the eastern entry of Morlions 
Morlions.  lieth from it south-west and by south distant two leagues, but the western entry lieth from it westsouthwest & west and by south four or five loagues, that goeth in by a great long ragged rock. This entry men may sail in south, & south and by west, unto the castle of Morlaix; 
Morlaix.  being about the castle they may run through the rocks again to the eastwards, and run out again at the eastern entry northnortheast, and north and by east into sea, according as the tide shall be, the flood cometh there out of the northwest.  
If a man would go from Morlaix to Morlions, he may go on east through the rocks, and so sail to it: It is all broken land, and there remaineth at low water five fathom depth.  
If you are bound to S. Paul de Lion, 
S. Paul de Lion.  you must run right with the great rock, with the two horns or Saddle, and so close alongst by it: being past it, edge to the land upon the strand lieth a village, called Plempoll, sail right with it, & alongst by it, to the eastwards of it goeth in the river. These are all tyde-havens, but betwixt the rocks of the Morlions, and the Islands Bay, it is at low water deep enough for to save a ship.  
The land of S. Paul de Lion is double land, upon S. Paul's Church stand two sharp steeples. The Island Isle de Bas, lieth thwart before it, upon it standeth two stakes, to see to a fare off like mills. Upon the east end of that Island lieth a very high ragged rock, when you are to the eastwards of this rock, you shall see two sharp steeples a little one from the other, these are the steeples of Plempolle: you may also then see the Castle of Morlaix, lying southeast from you, upon a high rock.  
The foresaid outermost long ragged rock of Morlaix, lieth from the top of the Island Isle de Bas, 
Isle de Bas  east and east and by south three or four leagues. Men may sail alongst by the main land within and through these rocks, until they come to the seven Islands, they are all great bays, where inmost places is good anchor ground.  
Five great leagues north and by east of Isle Bas and south-west and by west 27 leagues, from the Caskets, lieth a dangerous rock or Cliff called Roche Blanch, 
Roche Blanch.  and lieth from seven Islands westnorthwest 9 leagues.  
Within the Isle de Bas lieth the town of Roskow, 
Roskow.  you may sail into the haven of Roskow on both sides of the Island.  
For to sail into the eastern channel, when you are passed by the high rock with the saddle, or two horns called Le Taureau, and come by the land, betwixt the east point of the Island, and the point of the main land over against it, you must sail still keeping the middle of the channel. It is in this channel 7 and eight fathom deep. Being come within the point of the Island, you must run in about by it, west & by south, & west on until you come about half ways within the Island, and anchor there in eight or nine fathom. And then Roskow shall lie south and south and by east from you.  
If you will sail into the western channel▪ you shall see to the westwards of it, close by the main land two great long rocks. From the point of the main land, a little to the eastwards of the eastermost long rock, lieth of a riffe from the land, which maketh the west side of the channel, you must run in southeast betwixt that riffe and the west point of the Island, & when you come within the point of the Island, you must edge up north-east unto the midst of the Island, & anchor there as here before is said.  
From Isle de Bas alongst to the Fourne or Ushant lieth the coast westsouthwest 16 leagues.  
From the Island Isle de Bas unto the Fourne, (the outermost or westermost end of the main land of Britain) the course is westsouthwest, and west and by south thirteen leagues. About half ways betwixt them both lieth Obbeurack, or Abberwrack.  
About a league northwest without the rocks of Obbeuracke or Abberwracke 
Abberwrack.  lieth a rane of Rocks under water. They that by night will sail or turn to windwards from the Fourne or towards the Fourn, 
The Fourn.  let them not come thereabouts nearer the land then in 45 fathom.  
A league to the eastwards of the Fourne, & all alongst the coast even unto the Fourne, lie many long black ragged Rocks, in many places appearing like Villages, these are called the Ovens, within them on the main land (which is not very high) men shall see (sailing alongst by them) many white sand-bayes, and here and there some little houses, whereby the foresaid land thereabout is very easy to be known.  
The Fourne and Ushant 
Ushant.  lie westsouthwest & eastnortheast distant two great leagues. Ushant showeth it self at sea at the south-end low, and at the north-end going up sloping, upon the midst of it standeth a little flat Tower, by which marks it is good to be known.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams,  
At Cape de Hague by the shore, a south and by e● moon maketh high water.  
In the Race of Blanckert a north and by east, & south and by west moon. The flood falleth through the Race north-east, and the ebb south-west.  
In the Islands also a north and by east, and south and by west moon maketh a full sea. Men cannot well reckon the tides there: because they have divers courses about the Islands, but for the most part north-east & by north. A quarter of the tide, the flood falleth thwart into the Caskets.  
In Garnsey a north and by east, and south & by west moon maketh full sea.  
At Concalle & Granville a westnorthwest moon.  
At S. Maloes' an east & west moon maketh high water.  
The flood falleth in there at the western channel, & goeth out again at the eastern channel, men must reckon there upon when they will sail into these channels.  
From the Island Briack in the bay of Benit, the flood falleth southeast, but in the fareway eastsoutheast, and westnorthwest.  
At the east-side of the Island Briack in the road southsoutheast. An east and west moon maketh there the highest water.  
Betwixt the Island Briack and Garnesey, a westsouthwest moon maketh full sea, the flood runneth there eastsoutheast, and the ebb westnorthwest.  
On the coast, & within the Caskets, the tide runneth continually against the Sun, so that it is there never still water.  
Betwixt Sept Isles, or the seven Islands, and Garnsey in the fareway, a westsouthwest moon maketh full sea.  
Betwixt Briack and the seven Islands, an east and by north, and west and by south moon maketh full sea. The flood fulleth there east and east and by south.  
Betwixt the seven Islands and the outer rocks of Morlions, the flood falleth in south east within the treacle Pots towards the Green-Island, but in the fareway in the offing, east and east and by north.  
At Morlaix and S. Paul's a west and by south Moon; maketh the highest water, but in the fareway in the offing thwart of it, a south-west and by west, and westsouthwest Moon.  
At the Isle de Bas maketh high water a west and by south Moon.  
In the fareway there in the offing, the flood falleth e. n. e. and the ebb w. s. w. and so likewise from thence all alongst the coast of Bretaigne, unto the Fourne or Ushant.  
At Abberwrack an e. n. e. and w. s. w. moon maketh full sea without Ushant a westsouthwest, and eastnortheast moon, and within the Trade a s. w. & by w. moon maketh full-sea.   

Of the Depths about these places, and in what depths men may see the land.  
Upon Cape de Hague standeth a Castle, with a little turret; a little to the eastwards of it in the land standeth a sharp Tower. Two leagues to the eastwards off it lieth Sherborough with a flat steeple.  
The Island Ornay is upon the west end high with a steep going down point: The east end is hilly, or with hommocks, but lower than the west end, in sailing by it, men may see upon it a Tower or two with some mills. Upon the north side of the Island lieth a white hill like a sand hill.  
To the northwards of the Caskets, two leagues from land it is deep 35 and 40 fathom.  
Betwixt the Caskets and Garnesey it is 35 & 40 fathom deep, most all stony ground.  
Northwest about four leagues from Garnesey is a pit where it is 80 or 90 fathom deep, else it is thereabouts 40 fathom deep.  
Betwixt Ornay and jarsey it is deep 20 and 25 fathom.  
In the fareway of Jarsey, Rockduve and the Island Briack, it is deep 20 and 25 and 30 fathom.  
About the treacle Pots alongst the coast it is 45 & 50 fathom deep, in such depths men may see the land thereabouts. By night it is not good to come nearer that coast and the seven Islands, then in 45 fathom.  
Thwart of S. Paul de Lion, and the Isle of Bas, five leagues from the land it is deep 45 & 50 fathom.  
Thwart of Abberwrack 5 leagues ●rom the land, it is deep 50 and 55 fathom.  
The Backovens, or the land of the Fourne, men may see in 50 fathom.  
Ushant being about south from you, you may see in 50 fathom.   

Courses & Distances.  

From C. de Hague to the outermost of the Caskets west & by north. 9 leagues.  
From the Caskets to Beachy n. e. & by e. 36 leagues.  
From the Caskets to Wight n. e. and by n. 20 leagues.  
From the Caskets to Portland north and by west 13 leagues.  
From the Caskets to the Steart westnorthwest 21 leagues.  
From the Caskets to Silly west somewhat northerly 54 leagues.  
From C. de Hague to C. de Voorha, south & by east 7 leagues.  
From C. de Voorha to Granville s. s. e. 9 leagues.  
From Granville to Mount Sint Michiel southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Granville to the point of Concalle, south-west 5 leagues.  
From the point of Concalle to the easter channel of S. Maloes', west & west & by south 5 leagues.  
From the Island Sisember, before S. Maloes' unto cape de Farrele west 4 or 3 leagues.  
From C. de Farrele to the Island Briack west and by north 9 leagues.  
From the Island Briack to the Pickelles w. & by s. 2 leag.  
From the Pickels to the seven Islands, westsouthwest 5 leagues.  
From the seven Islands to the treacle Pots westsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From the treacle Pots to the Isle de Bas, westsouthwest 9 leagues.  
From Isle de Bas to Ushant westsouthwest 16 leagues.  
From C. de Hague to the west end of Jarsey betwixt Sarck & Jarsey through southsouthwest, and south west and by south. 11 leagues.  
From the Caskets to the west end of Garnesey south-west & by south 5 or 6 leagues.  
From Garnesey to Jarsey s. e. and by e. 7 leagues.  
From Roche Blanch to Caskets north-east and by east 27 leagues.  
From Roche Blanch to Isle de Bas, south and by west 5 leagues.  
From Garnesay to S. Maloes' s. s. e. 16 leagues.  
From the south end of jarsey to S. Maloes', south and by east, 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Garnesay to the rocks Rockduves, southsouthwest 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Rockduves to Manckiers' east and by sou●h, 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Rockduves to C. de Farella s. e. 10 leagues.  
From Rockduves to the rock Camine south and by west 4 leagues.  
From Rockeduves to the Island Briack south & by west and south 6 leagues.  
From Garnesey to the 7 Islands south-west 14 leagues.  
From the Caskets to S. Paul de Lion south-west somewhat westerly 30 leagues.  
From the Caskets to the Fourne or Ushant south-west and by west 46 leagues.  
From the Caskets to the Lizard, west and by west and by north 39 leagues.  
From Garnesey to the Lizard, west and by north 37 leagues.  
From the seven Islands to the Lizard northwest and by west, 32 leagues.  
From the seven Islands to the Steart north and by west westerly, 24 leagues.  
From the seven Islands to Portland northnortheast 32 leagues.  
From S. Paul de Lion to the Lizard northwest and by north 28 leagues.  
From Sint Paul de Lion to the Steart north and by east 28 leagues.  
From Sint Paul de Lion to Portland north east and by north 39 leagues.  
From Isle de Bas to the Fourne w. s. w. 12. leagues.    

Heights.  

The Caskets lie in 49 degrees. 48 min.  
The 7 Islands, or sept Isles in 49 degrees.  
Ushant lieth in 48 degrees. 30 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Thus showeth Ornay when you sail alongst by it four leagues from the land,  
Thus showeth Ornay with the Caskets, when it is south south east from you 3 or 4 leagues.  
Thus showeth Ornay and the Caskets, when you say●e alongst by them, and Ornay is south east from you three or four leagues.  
Garn●ey, being east north east from you showeth thus.  
Thus showeth Garnsey when it is thwart from you about 4 leagues.  
S. Paul de Lion Obbeurack La Four.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt S. Paul de Lion, and the Fourne, when you sail alongst by it 4 leagus from the land.     

The third Demonstration. Wherein Are delineated the Coasts of England, from Beachy to Port-land.  
TO the Westwards of the point of Beachy, thwart of the west end of the 7 Cleeves, right against the Chindle, where men run alongst by into new Haven, men may alsoo anchor in 7. 8 or 9 fathom.  
A league and a half to the eastwards of the point of Beachy, nearest e. n e. from the point lieth a little sand, upon which there is at low Water and spring-tidings scarce two fathom.  
At the west end of the seven Cleeves lieth the River of Cuckmer-Haven, or New-Haven, 
New-haven.  which hath two entries, the westermost entry lieth in by the west land, but is not to be used, but only with very small shipping, it falleth altogether dry, the eastermost is commonly the best, and lieth northwest and by west in, there is at high water with a common tide not more than seven, and with a springtide, 14 or 15 foot water; within, the ships lie every tide dry: But before the village they remain a float, there they moor with four cables fast on 2 green shores. Upon these entries men cannot well make any reckoning, they keep no certain depth, when it bloweth a storm out of the south, they are oftentimes cast too with a chindle, and opened again with a freshut.  

Shorum.  Shorum is a tydehaven, where is at high water and spring-tidings 18 foot water, but at low water there remaineth no more than 3 foot water, so that then it floweth 15 foot up and down. With a common tide at high water there is 12 foot and at low water 3 foot depth. The towin Shorum lieth a little English mile within the haven, ships (that draw but 8 or 9 foot water) can lie a float a little beneath the town at low water, or else they lie dry every where.  
When you come from the eastwards from Beachy or New-haven along by the shore, you may see open into the Haven, before you come thwart of it: But coming from the westward, you shall not see it open before you come right before it, because the west point lieth somewhat further out then the east point. From the west point runneth off a little tail, but at high water you may run in alongst over it, otherwise you must run in by the east shore. Upon the east point stand 2 beacons, which you must bring one in the other, & run in so right with them until you come by the n. shore, and then in alongst by the foresaid north shore.  
At Shorum sometimes there are builded many great ships of 3 or 400 tons.  
About six leagues to the westwards of New-haven lieth Arundel, 
Arundel.  a tydehaven, where a ship may go in at half Flood, you must go in thereby the west land north east in. In the entry it is two, and betwixt the two lands 3 fathom deep at high water: But within the Haven remaineth at low water 4 and 5 fathom: There you must anchor before the village.  
Five leagues west s. w from Arundel, and 13 leagues west and by south somewhat westerly from Beachy, lie the banks or shoals of the Owers 
Owers.  under water, a great league and a half a seaboard the land.  
About 2 leagues e. n. e somewhat easterly from the south side of the Owers, and two little leagues south from Arundel lieth a shoal of rocks and chindles, called East-borough-head, 
Eastborough-head.  as great as an acre of land, which falleth (at low watet and springtide) dry, otherwise it cometh not above water, close to it, it is 15 fat. deep. They that sail off from the haven of Shorum, and are bound to the westwards, must not go more westerly than s. s.w, until they come in 18 fathom, before they set their course more westerly, for fear of this shoal. About an English mile n. w. from this foresaid shoal, lieth alsoo a sunken rock, whereupon at low water it is no more than 5 or 6 foot water.  
About half ways, betwixt Arundel and Selsey, runneth of a ledge of Rocks thwart to the southwards from the shore, obut an English mile and a half into the sea, called the Bogners, whereof some of the rocks fall dry at low water, but the outermost are always under water.  
De Custen van ENGELANDT, tusschen Fierley en Poortlant: ●ock hoese van Ornay gelegen zyn.  
Betwixt the Owers and Portsmouth goeth in a great sound or haven, within lieth the town of Chichester. 
Chichester.   
On both sides of the Island Wight men may sail within it, and there come to anchor either under S. Ellens or before Newport where they will.  
For to sail into the Eastwards of Wight you must bring the eastern castle that lieth to the eastwards of Portsmouth over the Lyme-kilne (that is, a white spot in the land to the northwards of that castle) and keep them so one over the other, until that the Culver cliff come, within or under the north-east point of Wight. Then bring the Lyme-kilne over the east end of Portsmouth, and keep them so until that the castle to the westwards of Portsmouth come to the wood: Thus doing you shall come near neither plate nor sand, to take any hurt of them, and you shall come so by little and little before S. Ellens Church. When the Church cometh two ships lengths within the red point, than you shall not come too near the riffe at the point. Orelse if you cannot see the Lyme-kilne, then keep the Castle to the westwards of the Culver cliff, until that S. Ellens Church cometh a ships length without the point of the Island, go then boldy northwest in, and you shall not come too near the riffe; And then bring the square Tower betwixt the east end of Portsmouth, and the Castle: When the Castle to the westwards of Portsmouth cometh to the east side of the Wood, than you shall not (as here before is said) come too near either the plate or the sand, to take any hurt of them.  
When the eastermost white spot standeth a ships length to the westwards of the Castle, than you are to the eastwards of the riffe, and when the Culver cliff is covered or hidden behind the, n. e. point of the Island, then are you also within the riffe. The marks of the little plate 
Marks of the plate.  are these there standeth a square tower within the land, & a castle on the water side to the eastwards of Portsmouth, thwart from it lieth the foresaid Lime-kilne: when that cometh to the eastwards of the foresaid Castle, so that you may even see through betwixt them both, the are you upon the little plate which at low water is not deeper than 10 foot: then standeth the castle to the westwards of Portsmouth at the west side of the Wood But when the foresaid square tower cometh to the west side to the foot of the Castle & the Castle by west Portsmouth to the west side of the Wood, there it is deep at low water upon the little plat 12 foot.  
When the square Tower standeth betwixt the east end of Portsmouth, and the Castle even betwixt the Limepit and the Tower, and the Castle by west Portsmouth in the west side of the Wood, there it is at high water, ten fathom deep.  
When Saint Ellens Church lieth south-west and by west from you, than lieth the southeast end of the plate north-east and by north from you, and the west end north and by east.  
From the point of the road of Newport eastwards lieth abroad sand alongst the shoal, called No mans-land, 
No mans-land  which falleth almost dry at low water, it is so steep, that half a cables length off from it, it is twelve fathom deep: upon the high land of Wight thereabouts stand two or three mills. If you come near the shore, that the foresaid mills be hidden behind the foresaid high land, you shall not miss to come a ground against that foresaid sand, but so long as you can see these mills you shall go clear of it.  
The Road of the Cows is the best Road in Wight. Over against, betwixt that and Calshot Castle, lieth a hard sand nearest the north shore, lying from thence to the westwards alongst the fareway, almost so fare as thwart of Newton, called the Brambles: 
The Brambles.  at low water and spring-tidings it falleth almost dry, and then the sea breaketh much upon it: to the northwards of it goeth alsoo a channel through, but it is not to be used, but with small shipping.  
For to sail in at the west end of Wight, you must run right in with the Needles, 
For to sail in at the Needles.  (they are high sharp Rocks as Masts lying at the West end of Wight) bring then the innermost point of Wight, or the Castle that standeth upon the chindle over against that point, called Hus castle a little without, or to the northwards of the Needles, sail in there upon, until you come to the Needles, leave them then on the starboard side of you, and run in within a cables length alongst by them for to avoid the banks which lie off from the chindle to the northwards of the Needles, of the west end of Wight almost to the Needles. Betwixt the banks called the Swingels, and the Needles, it is not very broad, and at low water 5 fathom deep. When you sail in here, you must cast your tides well. The foreflood falleth strong upon the banks. When you are then come within the Needles, than edge a little more off from the shore unto Hus Castle that standeth upon the Chindle, for to avoid some Rocks which lie alongst by the Island under water. Being come within the Castle or Chindle, there it is wide & broad, leave two third parts of the channel on the larboard side, and one third part on the starboard side, sail so in until you come before the village Newton, & anchor there in nine or ten fathom, or else sail forth (if you will) about the point of the Cows, and anchor there before the haven of Newport in ten or twelve fathom, there is the best Road, and the best lying of all the Roads in Wight. The Haven or Roade before Newport lieth from the foresaid Hus Castle upon the Chindle north-east and by east, and eastnortheast about two leagues asunder.  
From the Needles of Wight west and by south about three leagues, lieth the point of Saint Albons-land, called Peverell point, 
Peverel point.  from it lie off some little Rocks to the eastwards. A little too the northwards of that point is a Bay, called the Bay of Sandwich, 
Sandwich Bay  there is a good road for them that are bound to the Westwards; If you will go to ride there coming from the westwards, you may take the sounding of Saint Albon's land, and run aboard the point in four or five fathom at a half flood, and you shall take no hurt of those little rocks. Being gotten about the point, edge by it up to the westwards towards Sandwich. A little to the northwards of Sandwich in the Bay, lieth a round Hommock, and thwart of it somewhat within the land standeth a mil; bring that mill to the south side of the round Hommock, and sail so in until you come in four or three fathom, and anchor there so deep or shoal as you will, there it is good lying for south-west winds.  
A little league north and by east from the foresaid point, right west from the Needles of Wight, lieth another point, called Handfast point, 
Handfast point.  to the northwards of it lieth a lit●●e Town, called Studland, before it is alsoo a good road. Upon the outermost part of that point, is a hole through the land, where men may see through, and a little without the point standeth a high steep rock like a Mast, almost like the Needle at the west end of Wight. For to come to ride before Studland: 
Studland.  you must sail about the second point, with the hole or the steep rock, in four or five fathom, and go in westnorthwest towards Studland: a little to the southwards of it lieth a little valley, bring that westsouthwest from you, and go towards the shore, in four or three fathom and a half, there is the best road, & lying there, you may see the foresaid hole in the point.  
A league to the northwards of that foresaid point with the hole, lieth the haven of Pool, 
Poole.  for to fail in there, coming about the foresaid second point with the steep rock, you must go on northwest, or somewhat more northerly, and then you shall see right a head of you, a high flat hill, which standeth higher than any other land thereabouts, keep that betwixt the two shores, and run in so right with it. If you must turn toe and again, then spare not to use your lead, and run not further over to the westwards, then that the flat hill come to the west-land, so soon as it beginneth (as it were) to touch it, you must cast about, or else you should be fast aground: And after you have cast about, run not further over to the eastwards, then that the foresaid high flat hill cometh even to the east sandhill, which is a high, grey, and sharp sandhill, lying at the East side. If you keep these foresaid marks in this manner, you shall have there going in at half flood water enough, there remaineth upon the shoalest at low water, ten and eleven foot, but it floweth there no more than five foot up and down. It floweth there twice in a tide. A southeast and northwest Moon maketh there full sea: Also a south & by east & north and by west Moon once more, that cometh to pass by reason of the sore-ebbe that cometh out of Wight. When you come within the entry, go then northnortheast on, and keep the beacons that stand on the east land on the starboard from you, and run indifferent close alongst by them. The shores are on both sides steep, and the channel is not wide, without the channel it is shoal or flat. This is Pilots water.  
From the west end of Wight to the point of Portland, 
Portland.  the course is westsouthwest, eleven leagues, but from Dunnose, the south-west point of Wight, west and by south thirteen leagues.  

Road under Portland.  If you will go to anchor under Portland (coming from the west, then come within two cables length, or a shot of a cast piece about by the point of Portland, and being come about the second point, edge up to the westwards until you come before the castle, and anchor there in 7. 8. 9 10. or 11. fathom, so that the point of Portland do lie south and by east, and southsoutheast from you, there you shall lie landlockt for a south and south and by east wind. With a south-west and a s. s.w. wind, men must be very mindful of terrible rippeling of the race of Portland, which beginneth a little to the westwards of Portland, and endeth a little to the westwards of S. Albon. The ground in that race is also very uneven, & shoal, sometimes seven, otherwhiles ten, and also fifteen fathom deep.  
About a league to the northwards of the road of Portland lieth a little Town, called Waymouth, 
Waymouth.  with a tydehaven, before it men may anchor in four or five fathom.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the Streams.  
At Beachy by the shore before the seven Cleeves, the flood fa●leth east and by south, & the ebb west and by north.  
From Wight to Beachy e. and by n. and w. and by south, Thwart of Wight, before Dunnose, a south and by east Moon maketh full sea.  
At S. Ellens and the Cows a s. s.e. Moon.  
At Hampton at the key, a s. and n. Moon.  
Within the Needles of Wight a southeast and by south-Moone.  
Before the haven of Poole a southeast and northwest Moon maketh high water: alsoo a south & by east and by west Moon.  
Thwart of Portland in the channel a s. s. e. and n.n. west Moon.  
From Portland to Wight, the flood falleth east and by n. and the ebb west and by south.   

Of the Depths.  
Without Beachy thwart of the seven Cleeves it is deep 28 and 30 fathom.  
In the offing thwart of Wight it is deep 38 fathom, in such depth men may see the land.  
In the channel betwixt Portland and the Caskets it is 40 fathom deep, when it is clear weather, men may see the land on both sides: the nearer England the shoaler towards the Caskets it is deepest.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Beachy to the Owers w. and by s. 13 leagues.  
From thwart of the Owers in 12 fathom unto Dunnose the south point of Wight w. s.w. 5 leagues.  
From Beachy to Blackness east 18 leagues.  
From Beachy to Struysaert south 26 leagues.  
From Beachy to the Caskets s. w. & by w. 36 leagues.  
From Dunnose to the southermost point of Wight, unto the Needles of Wight, west and by north and w. n. w. 4 leagues.  
From the west end, or the Needles of Wight, to the point of S. Albon's land west 4 leagues,  
From the Needles of Wight to Portland west and by south and west south-west 11 leagues.  
From Wight to Diep e. s. e. 36 leagues.  
From the east end of Wight to Struysaert s. east, somewhat southerly 29 leagues.  
From Wight to the Caskets, south-west and by south, 20 leagues.  
From Portland to Seynhead southeast and by east, 39 leagues.  
From Portland to the Caskets south and by east. 13 ½. lea.    

Heights.  

Dunnose the southermost point of Wight lieth in 50 degr. 36 min.  
Portland lieth in 50 degr. 26 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Beachy showeth thus when you come from the west.  
Thus showeth Beachy with the seven Cleeves, when you come from the west, and sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the Island Wight, when you sail alongst by it, being 3 or 4 leagues a seaboard the land.   

Cust van ENGELANT, Van Lezard tot Engelands Eyndt, de Sorlinges, end Canaal van Brestou, als meed ho zy van Yerland gelegen sin.   

Portland.  
Thus showeth S. Albon's land, with Portland, to the westwards of it, when you sail alongst by it, being to the eastwards of Portland.  
Thus showeth Portland when you come from the westwards.  
Thus showeth Portland, when it is north & by west from you six leagues of.  
Thus showeth Portland, when you come from the eastwards.     

The fourth Demonstration. Wherein Are showed the Coasts of England, from Port-land to the Lizard.  
FRom Portland to Exmouth, the course is westnorthwest thirteen leagues; betwixt them both lieth a little Island close by the land called Cob. 
I. Cob.  Befote Exmouth men may ride (at the south end of the Chindle, which lieth before the haven) in seven or eight fathom, so that the rocks of Tomanstones do come to lie south and south and by east from you, there it is good ground, and landlockt for a south wind.  
Five leagues south, and south and by west from Exmouth lieth Torbay, 
Torbay  and lieth from Portland west, and west and by south distant thirteen leagues.  
TORBAY.  
For to go into the road of Torbay, you must bring the West point south and by east, and southsoutheast from you and anchor there in 7 or 8 fathom, you shall lie land-lockt for south and south-west winds. At the north-east side of the bay is alsoo a tydehaven, before it, it is good anchor ground in four or five fathom, according as you will lie near or fare from the shore.  
Three or four leagues southwards, or to the westwards of Torbay, lieth the Haven of Dartmouth, 
Dart●outh.  which hath a narrow entry, lying in betwixt two high lands, upon each side of the Haven standeth a little Castle, in time of wars they were wont to shut it over with a chain, on the Westside standeth a little Church on the high land. For to sail in there coming from the Steart or from the westwards you must run in alongst by the wester-land, so fare to the eastwards until you bring the key of the village (that lieth on the east side of the haven) in the midst of the entry of the Haven, and sail so in, keeping the midst of the Haven betwixt the two lands, and you must be very ready with the boat (if there should come any sore flangs from of the high land) for to row in. Being come in, edge over to the westside, before the Brewhouse, and anchor there in ten or twelve fathom, or before the village on the east-side where you please.  
At the east-side of the Range lieth a sunken Rock, the marks for to avoid it are these. To the eastwards of Dartmouth is a red point, which below by the water is black, and in the red lieth a white stone, when the white stone cometh over the black point, then are you thwart of the sunken rock, but if you see the key of the village and do as before is said, than you shall not come too near that sunken rock to take any hurt of it.  
Betwixt Dartmouth and the Steart, nearest to Dartmouth standeth a spire steeple indifferent high and white, called Tackman, that is a very good mark to know the haven of Dartmouth by.  
The Steart 
Steart.  lieth from Dartmouth south-west distant three leagues. Under the point of the Steart at the east side is a good road for westerly winds, betwixt the little Church that standeth upon the high land, and the point of the Steart in ten or eleven fathom, so that the point lie south-west from you.  
A little to the eastwards of the westermost point of the Steart lieth a haven, called Salkom, 
Salkom  when you come from the west, it showeth itself open, the west side of it is ragged and the east side goeth sloping down, close to the westpoynt lieth a rock, or a rane of rocks, therefore you must give it a good birth, & leave the rocks on the larboard side: Further, you may see all breaks that can do you hurt. Being come within the point, you can take no hurt of either of both shores. Upon the bar or shoals of the entry, remaineth at low water with a springtide, not less than eleven foot water, & again within it is at least three fathom deep.  
Seven leagues to the westwards of the Steart lieth the sound of Plymmouth, at the outermost east point of the sound lieth a high round rock, called Mewstone, 
Plymmouth Mewestone.  the west point is called Ramehead, betwixt them both goeth in the sound Plymmouth north north-east in, it is broad and deep. A little to the northwards of Ramehead is a fair sand-bay, where men may anchor close under the land, in nine and ten fathom. Two leagues south a little easterly from Ramehead, lieth a Rock above water, called Eddystone. 
Eddystone.  The point of Plymmouth lieth from the Eddystone North and by east, and Northnortheast, distant about four leagues. In the sound, by the land of Plymmouth, lieth a little Island, which is fast to the west side with a riffe or rane of Rocks under water, so that men must sail alongst to the eastwards of it, whether they be bound into Catwater, 
Catwater  or into Hamoase the west harbour. If you will go into Catwater, then run in betwixt the Island, and the point on the east side in with the land of Plymmouth, until that you see Catwater open on the starboard side of you, go then into the eastwards betwixt the point of Plymmouth, and the foresaid east point on the starboard side of you, leaving the most part of the channel on the starboard side of you, until you come within the point, and anchor there right against that high steep norther-land, there is at low Water with an ordinary tide four and five Fathom deep.  
When you sail into Catwater, you must take heed, and give a good birth to the souther point of the entry of Catwater, for there lie off to the foresaid point, a ledge of Rocks under water, near about two cables lengths from the Land, and upon the point of the ledge or shoal, lieth a buy, where is at half flood about twelve foot water, which buy you must leave on your starboard side in going into Catwater, and when you have Catwater altogether open, you may run into the eastwards, leaving (in the entry of the harbour) two third parts of the channel on the starboard side, as before is said, because the south shore is somewhat flat off, there lying a sandy bank, which reacheth to the second point of the south shore of Catwater.  
A little to the eastwards of that foresaid little Island, lieth a rock under water, upon which is at low water not deeper than two fathom. For to sail within the Island, you may go into the eastwards, or to the westwards of the rock according as occasion shall serve. If you will sail into Hamoase, to the westwards of the rock, then take the sounding of the Island in four or five fathom at low water, and run in so by it, until that the Fisher Village (lying to the northwards a little within the land) come in the west side of the valley on the north shore, then are you to run through between the Island and the rock, and to the westwards of the rock. Within the Island upon the land of Plymmouth, standeth a wall or hedge, when as you see that onendling, and the chapel of the foresaid Fisher-village cometh to the north-side of the Valley, and Catwater cometh open; then do you run over the Rock. Between the Island and the main, men may anchor in twelve and thirteen fathom.  
If you be bound into Hamoase, 
Hamoase.  you must run in between the Island and the land of Plymmouth, and then in amidst the channel between the two Lands, until that the entry of Hamoase be open, run then into the northwards, as the channel leadeth, until you come in about the west point, and anchor there in sixteen, fifteen, and twelve, or ten fathom. In the narrow it is fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, & also twenty fathom deep, and between the Island and the main, eight, nine, ten, and twelve fathom.  
About half a cables length to the eastwards of the Passage way going into Hamoase, lieth a sunken rock under water, 
The Germane a sunken rock.  called the Germane, about two great ships lengths from the shore, and at low water hath not above four foot water upon it. And when men do come any thing near this foresaid sunken rock going into Hamoase, either with the flood or the ebb, the tide will set them right upon it, if it be calm. Therefore to avoid it, men must (with calm weather) give this foresaid sunken rock a good birth, until they bring the houses of the Fisher-Village, (called the Stone-house) open of the easter-poynt of the Passage way, and then run in over towards the north shore, until they have hidden the Island in the foresaid eastern point of the passage way, for to avoid a sunken Rock 
sunken Rocks.  that lieth off to the eastwards from the North point of the Beach on the Westside of the Passage way, a half cables length off, and then run amids the channel into Hamoase. Upon this foresaid sunken Rock at low water, is not above 3 or 4 foot water.  
In the sound of Plymmouth, not fare to the northwards of the Mewstone, lie two or three sunken rocks, 
sunken Rocks.  upon which remain at low water not more than three or four fathom water, the marks of them are these: To the eastwads of Plymmouth standeth a Tower with a Mill, and to the Westwards of the foresaid little Island standeth a Gentleman's house, when the little tower or turret of that house cometh over the point on the west side of the Island, & the foresaid Tower and Mill to the eastwards of Plymmouth come one over the other, then are you upon the innermost sunken rock or shoal, which it at low Water four fathom deep. But when the point of Hamoase cometh even without the point to the westwards of the Island, and the foresaid Tower and mill alsoo one in the other, Then are you upon the outermost rock, where it is at low water and springtide three fathom and a half deep.  
From Ramehead west & by south five leagues, lieth Foy, and betwixt them on the coast lieth a little Island, a little to the eastwards of a point, called Talland-poynt, thwart of West-Louwe, called Louw-Island, 
Low-Island.  you may anchor there to the easterwards of the Island in 5 or 6 fathom.  
Foy 
Foy.  is a broad haven, where a ship may go in at a half flood, at the east-side of the haven standeth a little church with a little steeple, & on the west side a white church, somewhat greater than that upon the east land with a square steeple at the west end of it.  
For to sail into Foy, you must have at least a half flood, and run in midst the channel betwixt the two points, and being come within, then choose which side you will, but the most water is by the west land, between the stakes and the Tower that standeth upon the west land. Being come within the Stakes (as you come in by the west land) then bear somewhat off presently from the west shore, almost into the middle of the channel, nearest to the west shore, until you come before the Village that lieth on the west side, there is a deep dock, where a ship that draweth sixteen foot water may lie a float at low water. In the said dock may 3 or 4 ships lie.  
If (when you come in by the east land) you desire to be in the foresaid dock or pool, then sail in until you come within the stakes, and then edge over off from the east-land until you come nearest the west land, for to avoid a Flat, which lieth by the east shore alongst the haven, and beginneth against the first house of the West-Village. If it should happen, that you could not lead it in with a sail, then let your anchor fall without the stakes, & warp in with hawsers, until you come into the foresaid pool.  
You may also sail so fare in, that you may see a wall on the west side of the haven, where lieth a village behind it. A ships length to the southwards of that wall, it is good lying by the east land, being moored by four cables, there may alsoo a ship ride a float that draweth sixteen foot water. You may also sail further in alongst by that Swach that lieth on the west side, wherein the mill standeth, but come not too near the north point of the Swach, for there by it, lieth a rock under water, being past that you may moor your ship in the midst of the channel, there is best lying for ships that draw much water.  
Four leagues south-west and by west from Foy, lieth the point of Dodman, 
Dodman.  & two leagues to the westwards of it lieth the Haven of Falmouth. The point of Dodman is double Land with a round hill, which to the westwards goeth sloping down, somewhat towards the west end standeth a mill with a sharp tower, and some little houses upon the land, somewhat to the westwards, men may see the castle of Falmouth upon a round Hommocke against the high Land. This land is very easy to be known when you come from the west, or from the Lizard.  
Upon the west point of the haven of Falmouth 
Falmouth  standeth a Castle upon the high land and in the entry nearest the westside, lieth a great rock above water, you may sail about it on both sides, at the inner side of the east point lie also some rocks off from the shore. For to sail in there to the eastwads, alongst by the foresaid Rock, you must run in within two cables lengths, alongst by the eastland leaving the foresaid rocks on the starboard side, and the great rock on the larboard side, & so sail right in with the high land that lieth on the west side within the haven. Within in the haven standeth on the Land a white Chalkye spot, also a little wood of trees, keep them over the North point of the foresaid high west-land, and sail so right in with them, keeping them so until you come near them, you shall find so at half flood, upon the shoalest, not less Water than five fathom, and that betwixt the foresaid Castle upon the west point, and the easter Castle that standeth on the eastside, within the haven, over against it, or a little within the Castles. When you shall then come by that foresaid high west-land, run alongst by it, unto the north-end of the same, and anchor there in twelve, thirteen, or fourteen fathom. You may also from thence edge over towards the east land, & anchor there under or behind the bank; that lieth off from the eastern Castle alongst the middle of the haven, in six, seven or eight fathom: the bank falleth almost dry at low water, and is soft ground, so that the ships sit in the oase, when they come there a ground.  
For to sail into the westwards of the foresaid great rock, you must take the sounding of the west land, where the Castle standeth upon, in five or six fathom, being somewhat within the rock, run (as before is said) towards the west-land. To the westwards of the rock, it is in that channel six and seven fathom deep at half flood, but in the channel to the eastwards of the rock, seven and eight fathom.  
Four leagues south & by west from Falmouth lieth the east point of the Lizard, betwixt them both lieth a haven, called Helford, 
Helford.  which is little used for ships.  
At the southside of the haven lieth a steep point, and on the north-side a low sharp point. Within the haven on the southside, standeth a Gentleman's house beneath at the strand, & upon the hill standeth a tough of trees, you must keep these one in the other, and run so amidst the channel into the entry of the haven. On the north side stand also 2 or 3 trees, these come a masts length to the westwards of a little house that standeth in a white sandy bay, there upon you may sail in alsoo amidst the channel; it is a short inlet, being come within, you may anchor in six or seven fathom. Upon the south side standeth also a sharp Tower, and upon the north side a little Castle upon the steep land.  
The Lizard hath three points, the northermost is called the Blacke-head, from that to the second the coast lieth south-west and by west, and alongst to the third about westsouthwest, or west and by south: from the second or middelmost point, lie to seawards some rocks a cables length, or a cables length and a half off, called the Staggs.  
To the northwards of the northermost, or eastermost point of the Lizard, betwixt Helford and the foresaid point lie some rocks a great league off from the land, called the Mannackles, 
Mannackles.  south and by east from the harbour of Falmouth, & eastnortheast from the foresaid Blacke-head, where of many of them are above water at low water, and some of them at high water remain uncovered. Betwixt them and the shore it is very fowl and rocky, so that men cannot run through betwixt them without great danger.  
He that cometh out of Falmouth, and is bound to the westwards, must not go more southerly with an ebb then southsoutheast, or southeast and by south according as the wind shall be, for to run clear of these foresaid.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
In Dartmouth and Torbay a west and by south moon maketh full sea.  
Thwart off the Steart in the channel, a westnorthwest & eastsoutheast moon.  
From the Steart to Portland in the midst of the channel, the flood falleth eastnortheast, and the ebb westsouthwest.  
Thwart of Dartmouth by the land, the flood falleth n. e. & by north, & the ebb south-west & by south.  
Thwart of Torbay towards Exmouth in the bay, the flood falleth northnortheast, & the ebb southsouthwest.  
In Plymmouth and Foy a west and by south, and east and by north moon maketh the highest water.  
Thwart of Foy in the channel an eastsoutheast moon.  
A sea-board of Falmouth an east and by south, but in the haven of Falmouth an east and by north moon.  
At Helford & at the Lizard, by the land, an eastsoutheast and westnorthwest moon maketh the highest water.  
From Ramehead to the Steart by the land, within the Eddystone, the flood falleth eastsoutheast, and the ebb westnorthwest.  
From the Dodman to Ramehead, the flood falleth eastnortheast, and the ebb westsouthwest.  
From the Lizard to the Dodman north-east and south-west.  
In the channel betwixt the Lizard and the Steart, thwart off Foy, the flood falleth east and by north, and the ebb west and by south.   

Of the Depths.  
The Steart and the land of Dartmouth men may see them both in five and forty fathom.  
When you have the high land of Plymmouth north from you, you may see it in fifty fathom, it is high double land, and showeth itself first in two hills. That same high double land within the land, you may see it from thwart of Foy until you come thwart of Dartmouth.  
The Dodman you may see in 42 fathom off from the Lizard to the Steart.  
The Lizard you may see in five and fifty fathom, there the ground is white and red shelly sand.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Portland to S. Paul de Lion south-west and by south, 40 leagues.  
From Portland to Ushant south-west 53 leagues.  
From Portland to Exmouth westnorthwest. 13 leagues.  
From Torbay to Dartmouth s. w. 3 a 4 leagues.  
From Dartmouth to the Steart s. w. 3 leagues.  
From Portland to Torbay west, somewhat southerly 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Portland to Dartmouth west & by s. 16 leagues.  
From Portland to the Steart westsouthwest westerly 19 leagues.  
From the Steart to the Caskets eastsoutheast 21 leag.  
From the Steart to the Sept Isles, south & by east somewhat easterly, 24 leagues.  
From the Steart to S. Paul de Lion south and by west, somewhat southerly 27 leagues.  
From the Steart to Ushant south-west and by south 38 leagues.  
From the Steart to Ramehead, the course is westnorthwest 8 leagues.  
From Ramehead to the Island of Low westsouthwest, 3 leagues.  
From the Isle of Low to Foy, west 2 leagues.  
From Foy to the Dodman south-west & south w. and by w. 5 leagues.  
From the Dodman to Falmouth west and by south, and westsouthwest 4 leagues.  
From Falmouth to the Lizard south & by w. 4 leagues.  
From the Steart to the Eddystone west or a little more northerly 7 or 8 leagues.  
From the Eddystone to Ramehead north a little westerly 2. leagues.  
From Ramehead to the Dodman w. s.w. 8 leagues.  
From the Dodman to the Lizard south-west 6 leagues.  
From the Steart to the Lizard west and by south 20. or 21 leagues.  
From the Lizard to Garnsey east and by south 37 leag.  
From the Lizard to the Sept Isles, or seven Islands, the course is southeast and by east 31 leagues.  
From the Lizard to Ushant south 29 leagues.  
From the Lizard to Cape de Finisterre south-west, 153 leagues.  
And that course goeth about 5 leagues without the C.  
From the Lizard to Teneriffe southsouthwest 466 leagues.  
From the Lizard to Tercera south-west and by west 386 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Steart lieth in or as some will hold, more northerly. 50 degr. 12 min.  
Torbay lieth in 50 degr. 28 min.  
The Lizard lieth in 50 degrees.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Thus showeth the land to the westwards of Portland, when you sail alongst by it.  
The land betwixt Torbay and the Steart showeth thus.  
The Steart Dartmouth Torbay.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Torbay and the Steart, when the Steart is south-west and by west from you.  
The Steart Dartmouth Torbay.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Torbay and the Steart, when the Steart is westsouthwest from you.  
Torbay Torbay Torbay Torbay  
The point of Torbay showeth thus in divers forms, according as you are southerly or northerly of from it.  
The Steart Dartmouth.  
These two figures belong one to the other at the two crosses.  
Torbay Apsum  
Thus showeth Dartmouth, as it is portrayed in these two figures, when you are right thwart from it, a league or two from the land, with the land on both sides of it, as well towards the Steart as towards Torbay, and to the northwards of it.  
The Steart  
Thus showeth the Steart, being north from you 2 or 3 leagues.  
The Steart being north from you 7 leagues, showeth thus.  
This open will be shut too when you sail to the westwards. This open will be shut too when you sail to the westwards. The Steart.  
When the Steart is north-east from you, it appeareth in this form, and then the point goeth flat down.  
Salckom The Steart.  
Thus showeth the land to the westwards of the eastermost point of the Steart, towards Salckom, when you sail alongst by it.   

De Custen Van Engelant tusschen de twee pointen van Poortlandt en Lezard.   

Plymmouth n. n. w. The Steart n. n. w.  
Thus showeth the land of the Steart, and alongst to the westwards of Plymmouth, when the Steart is northnortheast about two leagues, and the sound of Plymmouth northnorthwest five or six leagues from you.  
Mewstone The Steart  
The Land betwixt the Steart and the sound of Plymmouth showeth itself in this form, when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the high Land to the eastwards of Plymmouth.  
Maker Church.  
Thus showeth the Land of Ramehead, and to the northwards of it, when you sail into the sound of Plymmouth.  
The Dodman Ramehead.  
When you are thwart of the Dodman 4 leagues without the Land, that, and the land to the eastwards of it, unto Ramehead, showeth itself in this manner.  
The Dodman when you are right before it.  
Thus showeth the Land to the eastwards of Falmouth, when you sail alongst by it a league a seaboard the Land.  
Lizard Falmouth Dodman  
Thus showeth the land between the Dodman and the Lizard  
Lizard Hilford Falmouth.  
The Land betwixt Falmouth and the Lizard showeth thus when you are before Falmouth.  
Thus showeth the Lizard when you sail alongst by it.     

The fifth Demonstration. Where in Are delineated the Coasts of England, from the Lizard, and the Landsend, to the C. of Cornwall, the Sorlings and the channel of Bristol.  

The Lizard.  THE Lizard is a low point, where some rocks lie off from it, upon the south end standeth a Tower, and upon the high land towards the n. end standeth another tower which is sharp.  
About five leagues northwest from the Lizard, lieth a great Bay, called Mounts-Bay, 
Mounts-Bay.  at the west point of that bay lieth a little Island, whereupon stand 2 little short towers like beacons, on the east side in the bay lieth another high little Island, whereupon standeth a Castle, called S. Michael's Mount 
S. michael's Mount.  on the east side of this Bay, lieth a great ran of rocks, which lie off into sea a league from the land, whereof men must take good heed in dark weather, from thence to the southward towards the Lizard the coast is all alongst full of rocks, but these lie not so fare off from the shore.  
For to sail into Mounts-Bay, coming from the Lands end, or from the Lizard, & being to the westwards of the foresaid rane of rocks, you must run in right with the little Island called Saint Michael's Mount, so long until you come within a half league of it, than edge up to the westwards towards the Bay, until that you see that foresaid little Island, with the 2 little short towers at the west point, leave it on the larboard side, & run in close alongst to the northwards of it, for it is very clean, but leave the castle a great ways on the starboard side, being fowl about it. Being come within the little Island at the west point, you shall see within it a great sandy bay, anchor there in seven or eight fathom. Eastsoutheast and southeast winds do blow there right open in, for all other winds you lie there landlockt.  

〈…〉.  Four leagues to the westwards of Mounts-Baye lieth the Landsend of England, and lieth from the Lizard w. n. w. distant nine or ten leagues. About a league s. e. from the Landsend and half a league without the land, lieth a sunken rock, which at low water cometh even above water. Thwart off that rock standeth a Church upon the land, when you can but even see that over the high land, then are you thwart of the foresaid rock, to wit, even as fare from the land as the rock, but when the Church is hidden behind the high Land, that you cannot see it, then are you nearer to the land then the rock, or within the rock towards the Land, and so you shall go through betwixt it and the Land.  
Upon the Landsend of England lie two round hills, when you get sight of them you shall see upon the highest a sp●re tower, coming somewhat nearer, you shall see upon the outtermost end, in the low land, another spire Tower, there by is the Landsend reasonable well to be known. The ground is thereabouts whitish sand, with red sand, and mingled with shells.  
From the Landsend unto the C. of Cornwall, or to the little Island Bresam, lieth the coast most north about 5 leagues.  

Rocks ●n the Lands end  At the Landsend lie some rocks, you may run in within them as well to the northwards as to southwards, & come to anchor in 8 or 9 fathon: to come in there from the southwards it is narrowest, & ten fathom deep: from the northwards it is best and broadest, and eight and nine fathom deep; but on the left side close to the north point of the Landsend lieth a sunken rock, which you must avoid when you sail in there.  

Silly.  Silly lieth from the Landsend westsouthwest distant eig●t leagues, but from the Lizard west, sixteen or seventeen leagues.  
Between the Landsend and Silly lie the Seven-stones 
Seven stones.  west and west and by south four leagues from the Landsend, and north east, and by east and e. n. e. almost 3 leagues from Silly, that is, a rane of rocks which come not above water, but always breaketh upon them.  
Southsouthwest and south-west and by south 3 leagues from the Landsend, and 5 leagues cast from Silly, lieth also a sharp rock, called the Gulf, 
The Gulf  which cometh at half tide above water, and is round about indifferent clean.  

F●r to sail ●nto Silly.  Silly is divided into divers Islands, alongst the west side lieth a great multitude of rocks, men may go in there through divers channels or sounds, but the souther channel is the best. About the midst of the entry of that sound or channel, lieth a sunken rock, men m●y go in on both sides of it, but to the eastwards of it, it is broadest and best. For to sail in there coming from the east, you must run alongst by the east land in eight or nine fathom, and you shall so run alongst to the eastwards of that foresaid sunken rock, which lieth against a sconce a little without the castle. The marks to avoid this Rock, are two rocks which lie on the west side within the haven, the one (to wit the innermost) is somewhat greater than the other. If you bring them one in the other, or the northermost a little to the eastwards of the southermost or the smallest so that you may even see through between them, and sail so right in, keeping them so, you shall so sail fare enough to the eastwards of the Rock. If you come from the southwards or the westwards, and are bound into Silly, then run towards the east-land so long until you bring the two foresaid rocks within the haven, one in the other, or even through one another, sail then so in, and then you shall run (as before is said) clear of the foresaid sunken rock, thwart of the sconce. At the inner point of the Island, at the east side of this southern channel, lieth another sunken rock, whereof men must take heed. For to avoid it, you must run so long to the northwards, upon the marks of the foresaid two rocks, until you may see the little Tower in the sandy Bay, then go to the eastwards, unto the Bay, & anchor there in eight or nine fathom. When you come near Silly upon the south side, you shall see a square Tower in the sandy bay or valley, and to the westwards many little Islands and rocks. The ground of Silly is somewhat stony with some red shells.  

Of the Depths and many sorts of grounds before and in the channel between Silly & Ushant, and thereabouts.  
Southwest and by south from the Seams 
Seams.  seven leagues it is deep 72 fathom, the ground pale, white course sand, like small fretted little stones, with little pieces of queen's shells with grey flat little stones, and white glistering needles, sail from thence north and north and by east, and then you shall fall well to pass with Ushant.  
About two leagues south-west from the Seams it is deep 52 fathom, the ground there is white, yellow rough, and somewhat longish sand, with a little red small shelly sand, with many grey crompeld things, and some small with glistering points of needles. If men did find there 70 or 80 fathom, they would judge it to be good channel ground.  
Westsouthwest from the Seams, 
Seams.  so fare from the land, as men may but even see the Sheets from the poop, with clear sight, it is 54 fathom deep; the ground is red, yellow, white and black pieces, like parings of cheese, and a little course red sand mingled with all.  
West and by south eight or nine leagues from the Seams 
Seams.  is 65 fathom, the ground is white yellow, with a little red small shelly sand, with some pieces of shells & queens, not very great, with much white and yellow some thing long sand, and small white things like points of needles, like as men find in the channel.  
Seven leagues south-west from Ushant, 
Ushant.  or thereabouts, that men may even see it from the poop, having clear sight in 70 fathom, there the ground is white and yellow course sand, with some pieces of queen's shells, and some pieces of white thin shells, with some grey flat ragged stones.  
Southwest and by west from Ushant, 
Ushant.  about 19 or 20 leagues in 78 or 80 fathom, the ground is white and yellow course sand, with small glistering needles, with white pieces of queens shells, and grey and yellow flat stones, and little pieces, like as it were of Oyster shells.  
West and by south from Ushant 
Ushant.  21 leagues, in 68 fathom, the ground is red, yellow, and black, mingled with a little white round small sand, like shelly sand. But in 80 fathom, 21 leagues west and by south off from Ushant, the ground is yellow and shelly, with some grey and crompeld little needles, like ends of small rye.  
In eighty fathom 24 leagues from Ushant 
Ushant.  west & by south, men find rough great sand, with many sorts of shells, red white, yellow, and grey, with pieces of queen shells.  
From Ushant west 16 or 17 leagues, in 75 fathom, the ground is white and yellow course sand, with pieces of thin white shells, and grey pieces of queen's shells like as it were of Oyster shells, white small white glistering things like needles.  
Eight or nine leagues from Ushant 
Ushant.  it is deep 70 fathom, the ground red, white, yellow, and grey shelly sand, with red, yellow &, black pieces of shells, and small red, yellow, black, and grey stones, with some small white things like needles.  
Eight and forty leagues west and by north from Ushant, and 50 fathom westsouthwest from the Lizard, or thereabouts, it is deep 95 fathom, the ground red, yellow, and black sand, with small white round shelly sand, and some little pieces of shells, and queen shells, with some pieces of thin shells.  
Three and thirty leagues west and by north from Ushant and 27 leagues south-west and by south Silly, in 95 fathom, the ground is grey, red and yellow, mingled with small black sands, with dark, red, white, and yellow pieces of shells, to wit, grey and red shelly sand. An eastnortheast course from this ground off, is the best it is in the height of about 49 degrees.  
Four and twenty leagues west, or west and by north from Ushant, 
Ushant.  and s. and by west from Silly 21 leagues in 80 fathom, there the ground is white, grey, red and yellow sine small shelly sand, with little red and white pieces of little shells, like bruised mustard seed in the height of 49 degrees.  
Seven or 8 leagues west and west and by north from Ushant 
Ushant.  in 68 or 70 fathom, there the ground is white and yellow, small shelly sand, mingled with many grey crompeld little things, like needles.  
About 30 leagues somewhat more northerly from Ushant, 
Ushant.  in 90 fathom, the ground is small white rough, and somewhat long sand, mingled with a little red and yellow, & some glistering little things like needles, with two or three pieces of white grey shells. If you go on from thence north-east and by north, until you come in 55 fathom, there the ground is yellowish, white course shelly sand, with white pieces of shells; than you may see Silly lie nine or ten leagues north or somewhat more westerly from you.  
Westnorthwest from Ushant 
Ushant.  21 leagues, and south-west and by south from the Lizard 
Lizard.  27 leagues, in 80 fa. the ground is grey and red shelly sand, there cometh also on the lead a little piece or two of white or grey queen shells, with yellow and red pieces of shells, alsoo pieces of periwinkles.  
Nine leagues northwest and by north from Ushant, 
Ushant.  the ground is white and yellow rough shelly sand, with grey crompled glistering little things like needles, there come alsoo on the lead little things like small straws. If you go on north-east from thence, you shall fall with the Steart.  
Twenty leagues northwest & by north from Ushant, and 16 leagues south-west somewhat southerly from the Lizard in 68 fathom, the ground is white yellow and red small round sand with some white glistering little things like needles, with one or two little grey crompled things like needles, and two or 3 little pieces of little white shells.  
Nineteen leagues n.n.w. from Ushant, 
Ushant.  & 12 or 13 leagues s. s.w. from the Lizard, 
Lizard.  it is 68 fathom deep, the ground is there all manner of ragged stones, grey, red & black with red pieces of shells, & some grey crompled little things like needles.  
Nineteen leagues north and by w. from Ushant, 
Ushant.  the south from the Lizard, it is deep sixty two fathom, the ground is white & course shelly sand, with white & grey crompled little things like needles, with white pieces of shells, and 2 or 3 little stones amongst it.  
Twelve or thirteen leagues west from Silly, 
Silly.  or somewhat more northerly, it is deep 60 fathom, the ground is grey and ossie, mingled with small black sand. In some places of the same depth it is white grey oasie small sand▪ with pieces of thin white shells amongst it, with a little piece or two like parings of cheese: this ground cannot be gotten up with candle tallow, or other hard tallow upon the lead, but with soft tallow, or butter. In these depths you have not where such oasie ground as there, whereby men may well know that they are on the back side of Silly or England, to wit, west from Silly.  
West from Silly 
S●lly.  7 leagues, it is oasie grey sand with 2 or 3 little pieces like parings of cheese.  
Seven or 8 leag. s. s. w. from the Lizard in 16 fathom, the ground is white gross with a little red sand, with little shells, and little glistering white things like needles. Nine or ten leagues south and by west from the Lizard, in 60 fathom, the ground is yellow pieces of shells, and grey pieces of soft flat stones like parings of cheese, with some red pieces of shells, without any sand therein.  
South west and by west from the Lizard 
Lizard.  and southsouthwest from Silly 
Silly.  19 leagues, it is deep 78 fathom, the ground grey, yellow, and red shelly sand, with red, yellow, and blue pieces of shells, with queen shells, and a piece or two like parings of cheese, or like pieces of Oyster shells, with alsoo two or three glistering little things like needles, in the height of about 49 degrees, and 30 minutes.  
Fifteen or sixteen leagues south-west and by south from the Steart, 
Steart.  in 57 or 58. fathom, the ground is full of pieces of all manner of shells, and queen shells, with a little yellow and white shelly sand, with many sorts of little stones, and grey little pieces iike parings of cheese, with some crumpled, and some not crumpled, but little glistering things like needles, and little things like maggots that are in Bacon.  
South south-west from the Steart, 
Steart.  sixteen leagues, in 53 fathom, the ground is white reddish shelly sand, with pieces of queen shells, with red grey little stones.  
South west from the Steart 8 leagues, it is deep 40 fathom the ground grey and red shelly sand.  
South south-west from the Steart, 13. or 14 leagues, it is deep 47 fathom, the ground pale muddy sand, with little long things, and little stones.  
A great kenning south southeast from the Staert, it is deep 40 fathom, the ground red sandy clay with pits in the tallow.  
South-west eleven or thirteen leagues from the Steart, 
Steart.  in fifty fathom, the ground is white and yellow small shelly sand, with some pieces of white shells, with grey and crumpeld, and alsoo glistering little things like needles. In fine, he that soundeth much, getteth many & divers sorts of grounds and sometimes great change in little distance of place. But he that soundeth & findeth white shells, with little things like straws and needles, it is certain that he is nearest to Ushant: but if he find brandy ground, or black little stones mingled with white little things, then is he nearest to Silly.  
He that soundeth thwart of Ushant, 
Marks of Ushant & Silly.  and findeth small white sand, and little shells, and small little things oasie and white. Ushant shall then lie north east from him. If he find long small little things like needles, then shall Ushant lie southeast from him. But if he be not sure of these grounds, than he shall bear to the northwards. And if he find deeper water than he is towards the Seams, but if he find it shoaly, than he is in the entering of the Channel to the northwards of Ushant. If he be between Ushant and the Seams in 70 fathom, he shall find the ground to be small little stones like black sand of the earth: or else if he find the ground to be great red sand, than he must stand to the northwards, until that he find the white sandy ground, and long small things than he may hold himself certain to be in the entering of the channel.  
From the Landsend of England to the C. of Cornwall, the coast lieth north about 5 leagues, but Silly and the foresaid Cape lie south-west and north-east distant about 9 leagues. By the Cape lieth a little Island or Rock, called Bresam, 
I. Bresam.  betwixt it and the Cape men may sail through.  
From the Cape of Cornwall unto the little Town Saint Yves, 
S. Yves.  lieth the coast about east and by north, and east north-east five or six leagues. Saint Yves lieth upon the west point of a great Bay, which is about two leagues broad. At the East point of the Bay lieth a little Island, there lieth off from it a great ledge of rocks, a great half league thwart off into sea, where of many of them come at half ebb above water, therefore he that cometh off from the Cape of Cornwall, and will sail alongst the coast towards Stoupert or Padstow, must keep off (thwart of this ledge) at least a great league from the shore, because of the foresaid rocks. Betwixt that foresaid little Island at the east point of the Bay & the main land, it is also at many places rocky and foul, so that one that is not there very well acquainted, may not sail through there without great danger. In the Bay of Saint Yves is on both sides good sandy ground, where men may anchor all over, and come so near the shores as they will. At the West side of the Bay at the Town, is a head where small ships and Barks do go in within it, and lie there succoured for northerly winds, but great ships may not do so, they must anchor without in six or seven fathom.  
From Saint Yves to Hartland point, the course is north-east seventeen or 18 leagues, betwixt them both about half way lieth the point of Stoupert, to the eastwards of it lieth Padstow 
Stroupert Padstow.  in a Bay, where is a very good road in seven or eight fathom. At the west side of that point lieth a sunken Rock under water, and upon the point a great high rock, to the westwards of that point towards Saint Yves, are many white sandy and chalky bays alongst the shore, whereby the coast there is very easy to beknowne.  

Hartland point.  Hartland point is a point that lieth out, four leagues north from it lieth the Island Londey, which is somewhat a long Island, it lieth most north and by west, and south and by east. At the east side of that Island men may ride for Westerly winds in 14 and 15 fathom, but on the west side the ground is foul.  
Four leagues to the eastwards of Hartland point eastsoutheast from the south end of Londey, lieth the sound of Biddeford, 
Biddeford  being a broad haven, where many ships do sail in and out. A little within the mouth of the haven, it divideth itself into two rivers, upon the westermost on the starboard side lieth Biddeford, and upon the eastermost on the larboard side lieth a town called Barnestable. 
Barnstable   
From the point to the northwards of Biddeford Haven, unto Ilfercombe the course is e. n.e four leagues, that is a haven where remaineth at low water 3 or four fathom deep. Before the haven is also good road, in 8 or 9 fathom at half flood.  
Eleven or 12 leagues to the eastwards of Ilfercombe, 
Ilfercombe.  lie two little Islands, about two leagues north & south one from the other, called the Holmes, the northermost is called the Flatholm, and the southermost the Steepholm, 
Flatholm Steepholm.  betwixt Ilfercomb & the Holms (somewhat nearer the Holms then Ilfercomb, lieth a little town called Mynehead, where many ships do lad.  
In the fareway betwixt Ilfercomb & the Holmes, on the English side; on the one side, and the banks on the Welsh side; on the other side, in the midst of the channel it is deep 30. 25. 20. 18. 16. and 15 fathom, the nearer the Holmes the shoaler water. When men come from the westwards within the Island Londey, than they may see the Land on both sides, to wit, of England and Wales. The English coast even from the C. of Cornwall to the Holmes is altogether clean, but the coast of Wales is most all foul and shoaly, from the Island Caldy unto Bristol, with many banks, sands, and riffs that lie off. The Holmes and the Island Londey lie west south-west, and east north-east, distant 19 leagues.  
He that will sail from Londey to Bristol, must run alongst by the English coast, until that he come within the point of the Naes, for to avoid Naessand, and then forth alongst through between the Holmes, leaving the Steepholme on starboard, and Flatholme on the larboard side. Men may alsoo with little ships, of small draught, sail about to the southwards of the Steepholme, but it is there so shoaly, that there remaineth at low water no more than two fathom water: Under Steepholm 
Ro●d under creephole.  men may anchor where they will, in four or five fathom.  
He that cometh off from the Naes, and is bound to Bristol, must stand over to the Steepholme, and run alongst to the northwards of it. It lieth from the Naes eastsoutheast about seven leagues.  
For to sail through between the Holms, 
For to sail through between the Holms  the right & best fareway, you must sail nearest the side of the Flatholme, there it is deepest, with an open wind men may sail alongst so near by it without any hurt, that they may cast with a stone upon it. Within, or to the eastwards of the Holmes, lieth shooting off from the eastland, a great shoal, lying off with a great tail towards the west which (coming from the west) men might easily sail within. For to avoid it, you must set the Flatholme (when you are passed it) south-west from you, & keep it standing so, until that you shall have sailed about a great league, look out then for a little Island, that shall then at the east shore lie near about thwart from you, upon it stand two mills, and above upon the main land standeth one mill. When the mill that standeth upon the high land cometh to the west end of that foresaid Island, you shall be passed the foresaid tail of the English grounds, and cannot sail within it, go then e.n.e. alongst by the English grounds, which are flat, so that you may sail alongst by them upon your lead in 3 or 4 fathom so near as you will. When then the mill that standeth upon the high land, 
Marks the English ground.  cometh between the foresaid two mills which stand upon the little Island, then shall you be altogether past the English grounds, run then boldly towards the English coast, and so close alongst by it, as you please, towards Passis or Portshut point. From the Flatholm to Passis point in the right fareway, it is deep 14 and 15 fathom. The Welsh side you must shun, and take very good heed of it, because it is very uneven and full of steep banks that are needle to, which at many places do fall dry at low water, you may not come nearer that coast then in 12 fathom, for (sailing towards it) you shall have at one cast ten fathom, and before you can heave the lead again, you shall sit fast, alongst from Flatholm till you come to Bristol. About Passis point men do anchor in King's road 
King's ro●d.  which is between the point & the river of Bristol, nearest the river there is good clay ground in 8, or 9, fathom. They that are bound into the river are brought in by the Pilots. Men may from thence also sail in alongst by the coast to the River of Severne, which is also like the River of Bristol, a fair River to sail into.  
For to sail from Bristol to Londey, you must go away from Passis point w. s. w. until that the Flatholm do come to bear south-west from you, or else until that the three foresaid mills upon the south land do stand a like fare one from the other, to wit, that which standeth upon the high land, do stand in the midst between the other two, sail then right with the Flatholme, & very close alongst to the southwards of it, and being passed it, go then forth westsouthwest unto the Island Londey.  
About 3 leagues to the northwards of Flatholm lieth the Town Cardief 
Cardief.  in Wales, being a tydehaven, before it is a good road, as well for ships that are bound to the westwards as to the eastwards▪ where men may lie land locked almost for all winds, to the eastwards and to the northwards of it lie many sands and banks, which fall dry at low water, and so that they make men landlockt for north-east and by east winds. He that is bound into the road before Cardief coming from the west, must run in betwixt Flatholm and the point of Cardief, lying somewhat to the southwards of Cardief, and being come about the point, then to the northwards up alongst by the shore unto the road.  
Close up to the point of Cardief, to wit, to the westwards of it, lie two little Islands, the one next to the point, is called silly, and the westermost Barrey: 
silly Barrey.  Betwixt silly and Flatholme lieth a rock, southeast and southeast and by east from the point, which must be avoided when you will sail through there unto the road of Cardief. When it is high water you may sail over all that which at half ebb cometh not above water.  
About five leagues west from the point of Cardief lieth the Naes, 
The Naes  to the westwards off it the land falleth away first about northwest, than afterwards south-west, or south-west and by west, and so maketh a great bay betwixt the Naes and Worm's head, where there are very good roads for west, north, north-east, and east winds.  
From the Naes a little from the shore lieth a great bank called Naessand, 
Naessand  which lieth off from thence west and by south, and westsouthwest at least five leagues into sea. From Wormshead likewise lieth off a bank which is very steep, called Helwix, 
Helwix.  about four leagues southsouthwest, and south-west & by south into sea, they that come from the eastwards, and will go to ride in the Bay betwixt the Naes and Wormeshead, run alongst close by the point of the Naes, through betwixt the Naes and Naessand, likewise they that come from the westwards, and are bound in there, may run through close alongst by the point of Wormshead and the Helwix, it is betwixt them both about an English mile broad. He that cometh out of the sea, may come in between the foresaid sands or banks, it is there wide and broad.  

Worm's head.  Wormshead is a point lying fare out, appearing a fare off almost like the Oldhead in Ireland, but it is above or under, and goeth sloping down towards the north, it hath in many placey chalky spots, whereby it is very easy to be known.  
About 4 leagues to the westwards of Wormeshead lieth the little Island Caldy, 
Caldy.  where upon standeth a white Tower, showing off at sea like a white sail, which is set there for to know the land by.  
Betwixt this Island and the point of Wormshead, the land falleth away with a great bay to the northwards, unto Carmarthen and Tinbuy, in this Bay it is all over good anchor ground for to ride. On every side of the Island Caldy men may alsoo anchor, and have shelter for all winds. A little to the northwards of Caldy lieth a rane of sunken rocks, called the Wullox. 
Wullox.  He that will sail about to the eastwards of the Island, to Tinbuy, may run close about by it, up to the westwards, through betwixt the Island and the sunken rocks, leaving them on the starboard side, or else he may run alongst alsoo to the eastwards and to the northwards of the sunken rocks leaving them on the larboard side, and so then also to Tinbuy, and anchor there before the Town in five or six fathom. To the eastwards and to the northwards of the foresaid rocks, it is also good anchorage in six, seven, or eight fathom, it is there all clean ground, and fare of shoal water. Men may alsoo sail through to the westwards of the Island Caldy, (which is between the Island and the point of the main land) to Tinbuy, but it is there narrow, yet clean, and deep enough.  

River of Carmarthen.  The river of Carmarthen lieth from the Island Caldy north-east and by north distant about four leagues, the channel for to fail in there, lieth in eastnortheast, on the east or the south side lieth a great Bank which lieth off fare from the shore, and on the off-side goeth off flat. For to sail in there men may sound it in alongst by the east or north shore, until they be over the shoalest of the bar, there is upon it at half flood about fourteen foot water, and being over the bar, it will be again four fathom deep, or thereabouts, than they may run in forth by their lead alongst by the south shore, until they come within the river.  
Four or five leagues to the westwards of the Island Caldy, lieth Saint Gawens' point, 
S. Gawens' point.  the south point of Wales, by some called the White point. About half an English mile southsouthwest from this point, lieth a sunken rock, called the Crow, 
The Crow  whereof men must take heed.  
Two leagues to the westwards of S. Gawens' point lieth the haven of Milford, 
Milford-haven.  a broad and wide sound, lying in at the entry north-east in, being come in within the points, men may go up to the northwards, eastwards, and southwards, unto divers places and roads. About by the north point, men may sail unto Daleroade, there it is good lying in three fathom and three fathom and a half at low water. When men come a little within the south point in the open of Milford haven, there lieth a little Island or rock like the Newstone by Plymmouth, being past that, a little, they may run to the southwards, into a bay, where they may lie landlockt for all winds.  
A little to the westwards of Milford-Haven lie two little Islands the southermost is the smallest, called Stocholm, 
Stockholm.  & the northermost Scaline. 
Scaline.  About two leagues northnorthwest or northwest & by north from thence, lieth the Island Ramsey, 
Ramsey.  there betwixt them hath the land a great Bay, called the Broad-bay. 
Broad.  Ramsey lieth at the north point, and Scaline, at the south point off the Bay, there in alongst the shore is good riding for north, north-east, east & southeast winds, in 7. 8. & nine fathom. Upon the North point of this Bay lieth a little Town, called Saint david's 
S. david's  to the northwards off lieth the Coast of Wales alongst North-east unto Cardygan.  
About 2 leagues west and by south to seawards from the Island Scaline, and 3 leagues southwards from Ramsey, lieth that little Island Grasholm, 
Grasholm  which is a round clean rock, & about four leagues off from it lie also two little Lands, which are fowl, called the Smalles. 
Smalles.  The lying of them, with the dangers there of, you may read in the description of Ireland.  
On the northwest side of the Island Ramsey lieth the Bishop with his Clerks, 
Bishop with his Clerks.  these are rocks that lie off to the northwards and southwestwards of that Island a good way to sea. About five leagues northwest or somewhat northerly from ramsey lieth another great rock, called Mascus, 
Mascus.  which is all round about foul, with many sunken rocks. He that cometh to sail thereabouts, or to lie by, must take very good heed of them.  
The Island Ramsey, or the north point of Wales, and the southeast point of Ireland, lie about eastsoutheast, and west northwest distant 16 leagues.   

Of the Tides and Courses of the Streams.  
In Mounts Bay, and at the Lands end of England, a westsouthwest and eastnortheast moon maketh high water.  
In Silly a south-west and by west moon maketh full sea.  
A seaboard of Silly in the channel likewise a south-west & by west Moon.  
In the entering of the channel a south-west and north-east Moon.  
From Silly to the Lizard the flood falleth north-east, & the ebb south-west.  
Betwixt Silly and Londey the flood falleth north-east, & the ebb south-west.  
In Silly a south-west and by west Moon maketh high water.  
On the coast of England betwixt the Cape of Cornwall and Hartland point a westsouthwest, and west and by south Moon maketh high water.  
Thwart of the Island Londey a west and by south, but on the Island, an east and west Moon.  
At the Island Londey, and at the Holmes, an east and west Moon maketh high water.  
At Bristol within, a west and by north Moon maketh full sea.  
At Milford haven an east and by north, and west and by south Moon maketh high water.  
In the channel of Bristol betwixt Londey & the Holmes, the flood falleth e. n.e. and the ebb westsouthwest.  
Within the Holms towards Bristol, the flood falleth north-east and by east, and the ebb south-west and by west.  
Betwixt Londey and Mildford, the stream falleth north-east, and north-east and by east.   

Of the Depths.  
Men may see on Silly the south side in 52 fathom, & the ground there is stony, with some red shells.  
The lands end of England, men may see alsoo in 25 fathom.  
Silly may be seen on the north side in 45. 46. and 48. fathom, there the ground is oasy, with some little stones amongst it.  
When men are to the northwards of Silly, it showeth first in two Islands, upon the eastermost they shall see a tower, or little castle, to the eastwards of the 2 Islands, they shall see also two great hilly rocks, and to the westwards three high black rocks.  
Westnorthwest and west and by north ten or eleven leagues from Silly, the ground is oasie and soft that men can scarce get any of it upon the lead, there come some little shells amongst it.  
Betwixt the Lands end of England and Londey in the fareway, it is 45 fathom deep, the land of Cornwall, men may see in 44 fathom.  
Three or four leagues without the land thwart of Saint Yves, Stoupert, or Padstow, the ground is sharp and rocky, but nearer the land it is all sandy ground.  
Betwixt S. Yves and Hartlands' point are many white chalky hills alongst the coast, especially near by Stoupert or Padstow, whereby this coast is to be known.  
In the channel betwixt the Holmes and Bristol, it is deep 12. 13. and 14 fathom, and men may see the land on both sides.  
Upon the coast of Wales about Milford, and to the northwards of it, men may see the land in 42 and 45 fathom.   

Courses & Distances.  

From the Lizard to the Lands end westnorthwest 9 or 10 leagues.  
From the Lands end to Silly w. s.w. 8 leagues.  
From the Lizard to the Gulf, the course is west and by north. 10 leagues.  
From the Lands end to the Gulf, the course is southsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From the Gulf to Silly west 5 leagues.  
From Silly to the Caskets east, somewhat southerly 55 leagues.  
From Silly to Ushant, the course is southeast and by south 35 leagues.  
From Silly to C. de Finisterre, south and by west westerly 150 leagues.  
From Silly to Cape Clear in Ireland northwest and by north 46 leagues.  
From Silly to Waterfoord north, & by west 40 leagues.  
From Silly to the C. of Cornwall north-east 9 leagues.  
From the C. of Cornwall to S. Yves east and by north 5 leagues.  
From S. Yves to Stoupert point, north-east and by east 9 leagues.  
From Stoupert to Hartland point north-east and by north 9 leagues ..  
From S. Yves to Hartland point n.e. 18 leagues.  
From Hartland point to the Island Londey north 4 lea.  
From the C. of Cornwall to Londey north-east and north-east and by north 25 leagues.  
From the C. of Cornwall or Milford in Wales northnortheast 32 or 33 leagues.  
From Silly to Milford northnortheast, somewhat easterly 46 leagues.  
From the Cape of Cornwall to the rock Tuskar north and by west 40 leagues  
From the Cape of Cornwall to Waterford northnorthwest 40 leagues.  
From the west end of Londey, to Biddeford eastsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Biddeford to Ilfercomb e.n.e. 4 leagues.  
From Londey to the Holmes e.n.e. 20 leagues.  
From the Steepholme to the river of Bristol north-east somewhat easterly 12 leagues.  
From the Steepholme too the Naes westnorthwest about 7 leagues.  
From the Naes to S. Gawens' point west, somewhat northerly 13 leagues.  
From S. Gawens' point to Milford haven northwest & by north 3 leagues.  
From the Island Scaline to Ramsey northnorthwest 2 leagues.  
From Londey to Milford north & by west and northnorthwest 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Milford to the Cape of Cornwall southsouthwest 32 leagues.  
From Milford to Silly southsouthwest, and south-west & by south 40 leagues.    

Heights.  

The south side of Silly lieth in 50 degr. or a little more.  
The Cape of Cornwall lieth in 50 degr. 25 min.  
Londey lieth in 51 degr. 13 min.  
The Holmes lie in 51 degr. 30 min.  
Milford in 51 degr. 46 min.  
The Island Ramsey in 51 degr. 50 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Thus showeth the Lizard when it is 5 or 6 leagues east and by north from you.  
Mounts Bay. The Lizard  
Thus showeth the Lizard being east from you 4 or 5 leagues.  
Thus showeth the Land betwixt the Lizard and the Landsend when the Lizard lieth about east and by north, and Mounts-bay north from you.   

Land's end n. n. w. Mounts Bay n. e by n. and n. n. e.  
Thus showeth the Landsend, and the land to the eastwards of it, when it is northnorthwest, and Mounts-bay is north-east and by north, and northnortheast from you, being a league from the land.  
The Landsend showeth itself thus, when you come in right within out of the sea.  
The Landsend being east from you showeth thus.  
East The Landsend of England.  
Thus showeth the Landsend when it lieth southeast and by south seven or eight leagues from you, and the round Hill to the northwards of it east, than you may even see the low land betwixt them both.  
Thus showeth Silly, being east north-east from you.  
When Silly is southeast from you, it showeth thus.  
When Silly is east 5 or 6 leagues from you it showeth thus.  
Silly, being south-west from you, sheweth thus.  
When Silly is southeast and by east from you, it showeth thus.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt the Landsend of England, and the C. of Cornwall, or the Island Bresam, when you are on the Backside of the Landsend.  
Thus showeth the C. of Cornwall, when it is east and by south from you, so fare that you may but even see it from the poop.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt the C. of Cornwall, and S. Yves, when it is about 4 leagues from you.  
Thus showeth the land, when you are before or thwart of S. Yves, about five leagues without the land.  
To the westwards of Stoupert showeth the Land thus, when you sail alongst by it 2 or 3 leagues without the Land.  
The Land to the eastwards of Padstow or Stoupert showeth thus when it is 2 leagues east and south from you.  
The Land of Stoupert or Padstow showeth thus, when you sail alongst by it, 3 or 4 leagues without the land.  
When the Island Londey is north from you, it showeth thus.  
When the Island Londey is n. n. w. from you, it showeth in this form.   

The entrance of Ilfercomb.  
White-house  
Thus showeth Ilfercomb, when you are right before the entry of it close by the Land.  
Axbridge. Ilfercomb.  
Thus showeth the Coast of England betwixt Ilfercomb and the Holmes, when you sail alongst by it.  
The Naes. Cardief. Silly.  
Thus showeth the Land of Wales from Cardief to Wormeshead.  
Thus showeth the coast of Wales betwixt the Island Caldy and Milford-haven, when the northermost is northnortheast, and the southermost is eastsoutheast from you, and that you may but even see it from the poop.  
Tinbuy. Caldy.  
The Land betwixt Tinbuy and Milford showeth itself thus, when you sail alongst by the Land, as is portrayed in the 2 figures, as the AA belongeth one to the other: the spire of the tower of Tinbuy is very white.  
S. Davids-Bay.  
The Land from Milford-poynt unto the point of S. Davids-head, showeth, as is portrayed in these 2 figures.  
From Mil-ford to Tinbuy, men sail alongst by the coast, about 4 or 5 points it is most plain Land, like sand-hils. About two leagues to the westwards of the point of Tinbuy, standeth a Spire tower, with 2 other small flat little towers more, whereby the coast thereabouts is easy to be known.     

The sixth Demonstration, Where in The Southeast and east coast of Ireland is described between Corckbeg and Hedenhoo or Houth.  
FRom the Lands end of England to Waterford, the course is northnorthwest with that course you shall fall right with Waterford. But from Silly to Waterford, the course is north and by west, somewhat northerly forty leagues: betwixt both it is all oasie and soft ground. Nine or ten leagues in the ossing from Ireland lieth a sand bank of forty fathom deep, where commonly fishermen lie to fish, that is a certain mark of the distance of the land, 
The hill of Dongarvan.  when you find it in clear weather, and when there is good sight, than you may see the high mountain of Dongarvan.  
If you sail from the Landsend of England with a north west course 43 leagues so shall you fall before the River of Corckbeg, 
Corckbeg  it is there a good way upwards with a low water 7. 8. & 10. fathom water.  

B●ll●●●tton Isle.  Four leagues to the eastwards of Corck-haven lieth an Island, called Ballecotton, within it men may ride for westerly and southerly winds, in four, five, or six fathom. Corck & jochull lie eastnortheast and westsouthwest, distant seven or eight leagues.  
The haven of jochull 
jochul.  is a broad haven, where men must go in at high water, by the east land it lieth in northwest and northwest and by north. The west side is a sandy strand all alongst to the town.  
De Zuyd Oost zyde Van YERLANDTVan Doubling tot aen t' Eylandt Corkbeg.  
Four leagues to the eastwards of jochull, lieth Dongarven haven, betwixt both lieth an out point; a little to the eastwards of it standeth a high black Tower, called Ardimore, 
Ardimore  which may be seen well four leagues at sea, within it is a bay, which is a good road for westerly winds in seven or eight fathom.  

Dongarvan.  Dongarvan is a narrow tydehaven, the mouth off the haven is full of rocks, and at low water it falleth dry, men must go in there at high water, and run in through betwixt the rocks, it lieth in northnorthwest, within it is deep enough. The town Dongarvan lieth upon the west side of the haven. From Dongarvan to Waterford are eight leagues.  
Within Dongarvan, northnorthwest landwards in, lieth the mountain of Sleges, which men do call the high mountain of Dongarvan, or Cape de Quin, 
C. Quin.  or Caray Quin, it shown itself with three exceeding high hommockes, far above all other lands, thereabouts, men may see it at sea alongst a great part of the south coast of Ireland.  
When you shall have that mountain northnorthwest from you, and sail in right with it, you shall fall right with Dongarvan.  
When you shall have it north from you, and sail in right with it, than you shall fall with jochul; being northnortheast, than you shall fall with Corck, but when it shall be n.w. and so run in, you shall fall with Waterford.  
The haven of Waterford 
Waterford.  lieth about five leagues to the westwards of the s. east point of Ireland, being called Carnaroort, the coast betwixt both lieth eastnortheast and w. s. w. and showeth itself in the ossing, within the land, with high hills two and three double one above the other, but by the sea side it is all low land, where you may see many flat Towers upon it, as you sail alongst by it. The east point of the haven is a low rock point, but it is clean, upon it standeth a high white flat Tower, called the Tower of Waterford, 
Tower of Waterford.  which you may see fare off at sea, and is a perfect mark to know this haven by, there stand many more flat Towers to the westwards alongst the coast, but this is better to be seen then all the rest, because it is white and higher than the other. The west point is a high and fowl point, there lieth a shoal soutsoutheast off into sea, from it the channel is broad and clean, without it, it is eleven and ten fathom deep, & in the haven's mouth seven fathom, and somewhat further in six fathom, it lieth in north and north & by west, within this river within the east point is a good road in four or five fathom, a league within the river's mouth there lieth on the west side a steep point, from thence beginneth a shoal lying to the northwards alongst the shore unto the steep point of Passage, and shooteth over from that point with a tail, towards the east shore. Passage is a village where men pass over, lying on the west side of the river, a little to the northwards of the foresaid steep point.  
Betwixt that village, & that point on the west side is a good road very fit as well for them that are bound out, as for them that are bound up. In sailing up you must take heed of a little shoal that lieth off by castle (standing on the east side of the river) somewhat thwart over, the River downwards, at high water there is no more than two foot water upon it, a man that looketh for it, may see it, it is also flat that a man may sound it. About half a league northwards up the river from Passage, there goeth another river westwards up to Waterford.  
About half ways betwixt the haven of Waterford and the point Carnaroort, lie 2 little Islands about half a league from the shore, called Saltees, 
The Saltees.  the southermost is the greatest and lieth distant from the Tower of Waterford, directly cast almost three leagues. Betwixt these two Islands, you may sail through in five, six and seven fathom, but you must keep nearest the smallest or northermost Island, for to avoid some sunken rocks that lie at the north end of the great Island, and at low water are dry.  
From the northermost or smallest Island of the Saltees towards the main land, lieth off a ledge of rocks where men were wont to go over on foot, but now may sail over. For to sail betwixt the Saltees and the main land, you must leave two thirds of the distance of water from the Islands; and one third part from the main, and you shall have at low water about two fathom deep.  
About a half league without the southermost Island of the Saltees, lieth a rock above water, called Kinbegh, 
Kinbegh,  and s. west about so fare from it, & s. & by west from the south end of the Saltees lieth a sunken rock, called Kimor, 
Kimor.  of the bigness of a ship, it cometh with half ebb even above water, it is so steep that a man may lie with a ships side against it, and have 14 fathom water, so that a man (without any danger) may sail alongst by it, as near as he will. A man may also (if need require) sail through betwixt Kinbegh and the greatest Island of the Saltees, but a seaboard of all is best and securest.  
To the eastwards off the rock Kinbegh, southeast from the greatest Island of the Saltees, lie also some sunken rocks called the Frails, 
The Frails  which may be seen at low water, there men may also sail through within them. North-east from the Saltees lie also rocks, the southermost is called the Tuns, and the northermost the north rock. 
Tuns and northrock   
Northnortheast from the greatest Island of the Saltees, or from Kinbegh, and s. west and by s. from Carnaroort, lieth one rock above water, called Blackrock, 
Blackrock  that is clean and clear round about, so that a man may sail round about it freely, without fear of danger. But a quarter of a league eastwards from it, lieth a sunken rock called the Barrel, 
Barrel.  of that a man must take heed.  
Under the Islands of both the Saltees, a man may ride, under the greatest at the n. west side nearest the north end: the mark or knowledge of the road is, a black rock like a boat turned upside down, 
Road under the Saltees.  right against that you must anchor in seven, eight or nine fathom, there it is good sandground, and landlockt for an eastsoutheast, southeast and a south wind, a south-west wind bloweth alongst the shore. If you anchor nearer the shore in 5 fathom or there about, there it is rough ground.  
Under the smallest Island a man may ride at the east side in 7 or 8 fathom, so that the north point of the Island lie n.n. west from you, there you shall lie near the land-lockt for s. west and n. west winds.  
From the point of Waterford the shore lieth to the eastwards, within the Saltees, eastnortheast, until Carnaroort, with many bays, and all oasie and black sandy. A man being acquainted there, should at a need in many places find good roads, there is nothing that can hurt you except a little fowl place a little to the. w. ward of Carnaroort close by the shore.  
He that cometh out of Waterford, 
For to avoid the fowl grounds of the Saltees.  and will go about to the southwards of the Saltees, must not go more easterly then e. s. east, for to go clear of the fowl grounds, which lie to the southwards of the Saltees, and when the Saltees shall be north of him, then lieth the course from thence to the Tuskar, directly north-east, or a little more easterly. But for to go alongst without the Tuskar, a man must go at least north-east and by east to go clear of him.  
The Tuskar 
Tuskar.  is a great black smooth rock, lying like unto a ship turned up-side down, but is about twice so great, at the north side of it lie also two small rocks under water. The Tuskar lieth from the point of Gr●noore s. e. & by east, and e. s. east, distant one league: from the Saltees n.n. east, four leagues and a half, from Black-rock also east north-east, two leagues and a half, and from the Lands end of England n. and by west.  
Southeast and by south about ten leagues from the Tuskar, lie two little Jslands close one by another, about four leagues from Grasholme, called the Smaels', 
Smaels'.  at high water & spring tides the water floweth over them, the northermost is called Scakum, & the southermost is called Kamey, there lie off in the sea 2 little shoals from them, the one north-northwest and the other southsoutheast. Betwixt the Smals and Grasholme lieth also a ledge of rocks, which at low water may be seen above water. It is not without great danger to go through betwixt them both, especially with calms, by reason of the tide that runneth very strong there through; an eastsoutheast moon maketh high water without the Smaels'.  
From the Tuskar east and by south about eight leagues, lieth also a great rock, with many small rocks round about it, called Mascus. 
Mascus rock.  He that cometh from England and will sail towards Ireland, must take great heed thereof, especially when as through westerly or northerly winds he shall be driven a little to the eastwards of the course.  

Road under Carnaroort.  For to anchor under the point of Carnaroort, coming from the west, you must take heed to come no ne●rer the shore then in six fathom, until that you shall be passed by the high hill that lieth to the westwards of the point, when you shall, have brought out the mill to the eastwards the length of a capstane bar, than you may anchor in 9 fathom. There is very good riding.  
From Carnaroort to S. Marget's bay, the shore lieth along north-east one league, it is betwixt both rocky and fowl, but the fowl ground lieth not fare off at sea. For to keep clear without it, you must keep so far off the shore that you may see the tops of the double land within about the cliff land & you need not fear, but if you come so near the shore that the double land within be covered of the foremost cliff land, or that thereby it get out of your sight, you shall then surely sail upon the foresaid rocks.  
By S. Marget's Bay upon the foresaid land standeth a Gentleman's house in the hills, when you have brought that w●th the mill that standeth within, one in the other, than you may go into the road, and leave the rocks which lie above water half ways over the bay, either on starboard or larboard of you, anchor there in five or six fathom, sandy ground.  
About s. f.e. from S. Marget's Bay off at sea, lieth a sunken rock, that at low water lieth dry, called Caliach, 
Caliach.  for to avoid it, take heed unto these marks: when you come from Carnaroort, and have Black rock with the great Island of Saltees one in the other, and keep them so, and then sail on north-east, you shall go right upon this sunken rock. For to go to the southwards of it then keep black rock with the smallest Island of the Saltees one in the other, 
Marks for Caliach.  or else for to go to the northwards of it, keep Blackrock without or to the eastwards of the great Island, and then you shall not need to fear any danger of this sunken rock.  
From S. Marget's bay to the point of Grenore, lieth the coast north-east half a league.  
The point of Grenore is not very high, but steep and flat on the top, 
Riffe of Grenore.  off from it goeth a shoal about a quarter of a league into sea east and by south, of very rocks and stones, the which at low water falleth dry a good ways off the shore. The ships coming from the southwards that are bound for Dublin or washford, go in commonly betwixt the Tuskar and the foresaid rocks of Grenore, for to come within the bank or sands. Oftentimes they go into Waterford for to hire a pilot to bring them up. For him that will be his own Pilot, we will describe all the marks that are to be taken heed of, as well for to sail into Grenore, as also into the deep or haven of Washford, as they are now at this time, and hereby do advise men that they do not always continue so, because by reason of the floods, the channel doth shift, and stretch itself out more northerly, and also waxeth deeper.  
Coming out of the sea about a league or two near unto Grenore, you shall see the high ragged double land high above the point of Grenore, which (as is aforesaid) is not very high, but flat on the top. By that said high ragged double land within, men do know the entrance of the channel of Washford. When men do come from the southwards and the eastwards. When you have sight of the point of the Grenore, you may boldly go right with it, until that said double land do show it self, by estimation, but a man's length above the point of Grenore, a showeth this figure.  
The high land over the point of Grenore.  
The stat eight land of Grenore.  
Then are you fare enough from the shore, not to be in any danger of the shoal of Grenore: Or else you may fit you self that you come no near the shore then in six or seven fathom: but yet for need a man may borrow of the shoal in five fathom, or four fathom & a half, but you must also take heed that you go not so fare off from it, that you have more the eight or nine fathom depth, otherwise you should come to near the bank that lieth to the northwards of the Tuskar, which on the inner side is very steep and needle too, upon it is no more than twelve foot water, and close by it ten fathom deep. If that you keep the foresaid ragged high land (as is before said) a man's length above the land of Grenore, and so sail to the northwards, so long until you bring that same high land without or to the northwards of the steep point of Grenore, then are you yet right against the shoal & must yet sail to the northwards, keeping the mill that standeth next unto the point of Grenore, so that you may see the top of it even right over the steep point of Grenore. When you keep it so, 
Greenbay  you shall not be in any danger of the shoal or riffe. Then as soon as you see a castle (which standeth a little without the strand) come without the point of Grenore, then may you boldly sail towards it, by your lead, into the Bay of Grenore.  
The said mill stands upon the land of Grenore, a little within the land, that may serve for a mark for not to come too near as well to the shore as also to the shoal or riffe, for if you come not so near the shore that you lose the mill out of your sight, but keep so far off, that you keep sight of it, then do you keep fare enough from the shore, and from that rocky shoal or riffe. Then when the mill shall come to lie south-west & south-west & by south from you, than you are even passed the shoal or riffe, go then n.w. and by west, and northwest, according as the wind and tide shall be into the Bay of Grenore.  
Or else you may observe another mark: Sail on so long north, until that you see a long black house come out to the westwards of Grenore, upon the low land, the which showeth like a black rock upon the land: than you may luff on towards the shore in four or five fathom alongst by the riffe, and run in so until that you get six or seven fathom, and presently afterwards shall be eight or nine fathom deep, but then afterwards is it shoal by little and little, as you come near the shore.  
If you have a large wind: then sail so long to the northwards until you see another little black house come out without the point, sail then unto it, you shall (so doing) have no danger of the riffe.  
In the Bay it is shoal water, you may lie there so near the shore as you please, in six, five, four, and also three fathom, and there you can get a Pilot to bring you to Washford.  

For to sail out off Grenore bay.  For to sail out of the Bay of Grenore, you may run out so close by the shore, that you may see but the wings of the mill over the Foreland, and so go on east southeast into sea alongst by the riffe, or according as the wind and tide shall be, so long until that you may see thee roof of the mill, than you may go larger, and by little and little go more southerly, and then you shall see it ripple upon the riffe.  

For to sail too washford  For to sail out of the Bay of Grenore towards Washford with a ship that draweth little water, you may boldly run alongst by the shore, and sail through betwixt the Haenmans path and the Souder, that is a channel where at high water and ordinary tides is eight foot water; but with a springtide there is ten foot water.  
The Haenmans path is a dry sand, which maketh the south side of the channel of Washford, lying off from the Souder.  
The Souder that is the south point of the main land of Washford haven.  
But if your ship go deeper, than you must (sailing out of Greenbay) go further off from the shore, 
Shoal washford  for to come without the sand that shooteth off from Haenmans path, yet you must also take heed that you go not to fare thereoff, for if you come so far off in ten fathom, you shall come too near unto the bank that lieth without, which is on the inner side very steep and needle too, therefore go no further from the shore then in seven, eight or nine fathom, but coming somewhat more northerly about Haenmans path, than you may well go off into ten and eleven fathom; also you may not come nearer Haenmans path then in seven fathom.  
If you desire to be upon the bar of Washford and to leave the shoal of Haenmans paths, to wit, to go to the northwards, then take heed unto these marks: At the north side of the channel of Washford lieth a high hill with a round hommock, which is to be seen over the Foreland, and a little castle in the low land, a little above the strand, appearing as if it were against the land; bring that round hommock a little to the northwards of the castle, and sail so in, but bring not the hommock within or to the southwards of the Castle, for than you should be in danger of the sand of Haenmans paths, unless it were by need, and with a bare wind, than you might borrow so near to bring them one in another, and so to sail in, but it is best to keep them somewhat out one from another, to wit, the little Castle to the southwards of the hommock.  
If it should happen that you could not see these foresaid marks well, nor discern them, than you may go about the sand of Haenmans paths by your lead in seven fathom without any danger.  
For to know then when you are far enough sailed to the westwards, or are past Haenmans path, and are open before the channel, you shall see in the south-land a little Castle that standeth about four leagues in the land within the strand, in the side of the high land of Washford, about south-west and by west from you, when that shall be upon that point from you, and that it standeth betwixt the two northermost little sand-hills that are upon the foot strand of the Soudre (which is upon the south shore) then are you past Haenmans paths; sail in then upon the marks of that little Castle, and the little sand-hils over the bar of the haven; there it is at high water about sixteen foot deep.  
As soon as you are passed the outermost flat at the point of Haenmans paths, you shall go somewhat nearer too Haenmans paths, although it be very steep, that the tide doth not bring you upon the tail of the north-ground where the mast standeth, that is a foremast of a ship that is there lost, and lieth there sunken into the sand, by the sore-mast the north grounds are very steep and needle to, but without and within very flat going up.  
In this channel & upon the Bar an east and west moon maketh highest water: but the flood runneth yet afterward a half tide strong by the channel to the northwards; so that when it is highest water in the channel and upon the Bar, yet runneth the tide thwart over the channel, therefore a man must keep him so near to Haenmans paths, as is said, that is the cause that tail of Haenmans path is cast up still more and more to the northwards, and that the channel now lieth out more to the northwards then it was w●nt to do: And yet hereafter it is like that it will stretch itself more to the northwards, so that the foresaid marks (by all likelihood) will not continue certain always. Even as the flood after the highest water, runneth yet a half tide or 3 hours strong (in the channel) to the northwards, so also runneth the ebb a half tide to the southwards after the lowest water, but not so strong as the flood.  
Being over the shoalest of the Bar, you shall have three & a half, and four fathom, and in the channel betwixt the north grounds and Haenmans paths against the mast 5, fathom depth, run in by Haenmans paths, all alongst until you come to the foot strand, & then edge over to the north shore, for to avoid the grounds which lie to the westwards above the Soudre, you may borrow of the shoal on the north side by your lead, into ten or eleven foot, according to the draught of your ship. In the right deep of this edging over, you shall have at high water, fifteen foot depth.  
The mark of this edging over is a white little castle that standeth on the north side of the haven in the valley of the Land, when that cometh over the steep point of the innermost Island to the two that lie by the nor●● shore, and seemeth to be about a man's length hig●, than you may boldly run in n.w. with it, until th●t ● little chapel within the Land, and to the southwards of Washford (a little or about a cables length to the northwards of that other forenamed little Castle on the north side of that high ragged land, that hath served ●●r a mark to sail over the Bar) cometh over a b●ack hommock that you may see upon the high land, a little to the southwards of the Castle of Washford, when you shall have brought these marks one in the other, edge then over again to the south land upon the marks for then you shall be above the sands of the Soudre; and with that course also shall not be in danger of the tail of the sand that shooteth off from the point of Passage, which is on the north side, but it is there broad and large, that a man may there turn to & again, it is altogether shoal water, of 10 & 10 foot & a half at high water. Sailing up upon these foresaid marks, you sh●●l come about the distance of the shot of a Cast pee●● without the castle of Washford to the south shore sail then in alongst by it, & keep on the sounding of the shore until you come within the castle, there you may anchor, & shall find there about 3 fathom water; For a man that is there unacquainted, it is best to anchor there, because before the town lie some sunken rocks; he that will lie before the town, must (right against the key, or the head of the market) go a good ways off the shore, because of a sunken rock that lieth thereabouts, & go right against the west end of the town, & anchor there in 3 fathom, or thereabouts.  
To the southwards of the sands, that lie to the westwards or above the Soudre, goeth a dreeke through, there is more water than in the edging over to the northwards of the sands. The mark sor to sail through there, is: That you keep the highest hommock of the hi●● ragged land (behind Washford) right over the castle of Washford▪ but there can be nothing gotten by it, with sailing through there, in regard you must nevertheless go over the shoalest, after that you are passed the sands of Soudre, to wit, over the foresaid depth of ten & 11 foot.  
For to sail out from Washford, with a ship that goeth deep, you may not lad deeper than ten foot, or ten foot and a half for to come over the foresaid shoal; you shall then sail about to the northwards of the shoal that lieth within, or to the westwards of the Soudre, & go in and anchor betwixt the shoal and the Soudre, there you shall be landlockt for all winds, except for the south-west winde you have little shelter, you shall therefore bring out your best anchor, in the south-west, and the other in the north-east, because that the winds that come out of the south w. over the land, do not put you upon the north grounds. There at the Soudre, you may take in the rest of your lading, it is a league from the town.  
If you will anchor before the Bar of Washford for to stay for the tide, you must anchor a little to the northwards of the Bar, & go off somewhat until you have 8 fathom, there it is clean sandy ground.  
In the night there are two fires made upon the Soudre for the Fishermen for to come in by night, by the Haenmans paths, he that will sail in by them, must keep the highest fire a little to the southwards of the other, for to avoid the north grounds.  
Besides the deep alongst by the Haenmans paths, the Fishermen have a little channel that goeth out close by the north shore, it is there about 6 foot deep at high water.  

Channel through the banks b●fore washford  Erom the Bar of Washford a man may sail east and by south, and west and by north out and in through betwixt the banks into sea, or out of the sea, that is a large and broad channel.  
For to sail from the Bar of Washford within the sands through towards Dublin, you must keep the sounding of the shore, & run alongst by it in six, 7 or eight fathom, you shall so sail alongst about a cables length from the shore, which is very clean without any danger, so that any man (having but a little knowledge of the Land) may sail there alongst by night, only you must take heed not to go further from the shore then in 7 or 8 fathom, for not to come foul of the banks, which are on the innerside very steep & needle too.  
When you have sailed to the northwards alongst by the shore, about two leagues from the Bar, you shall see three white spots or rocks in the sandhill, a little to the northwards thereof standeth a piece of a wall, much like a pillar of a Church: Right against this pillar, a great English mile from the shore, beginneth a sand, called the Rusch and Ram, lying from thence alongst the shore to the northwards, you may sail about it on both sides, but it is best to keep the shore, and to run through there within in six or seven fathom, as is said out of fear of the outtermost banks, which are very steep, and therefore cannot be sounded; Therefore men do seldom use to sail there a seaboard of this sand.  
Right against this forenamed Rusch and Ram, the shore maketh a Bay unto the point off Glaskarrick, when you are so fare is this point, than you are passed the foresaid sand.  

Point of Glaskarrick. Channel through the banks before Glaskarrick.  The point of Glaskarrick is a low point, a little to the northwards of it standeth a castle.  
When you are without the banks in the north channel, and desire to come within the banks, then keep that castle (if you can get sight of it) a little to the northwards of the low point, & run boldly right in with it, unto the land, without fear of the grounds, there is a good channel, through the banks; you shall not find less depth than 15 or 16 fathom, until you come to the shoaling up against the shore. This Channel lieth in northwest.  
For to sail from Glaskarrick to Dublin, run all alongst by the shore (which is somewhat full of Bays) and keep you (as before) in eight, seven, or 6 fathom. Two great leagues to the northwards of Glaskarrick lieth a sand, a great half English mile from the shore, called the Glaskarmen, the ground is very uneven betwixt both. But nevertheless run through within that sand & keep the sounding of the shore, but not so far from it, that you come into ten fathom, for than you should sail close alongst by the Glaskarmen, 
Glaskarmen.  which is very steep, and about two English miles, or a half Dutch mile long.  
One English mile to the northwards of Glaskarmen lieth the point of Arkelohead. 
Arkelohead.   
Sailing through between the shore and Glaskarmen, to the northwards, a man may see 2 points, to wit, Mizanhead and to the northwards of it Wicklohead. 
Marks for to avoid the Glaskarmen.  If you keep Wicklohead even within the point of Mizanhead, than you can take no hurt of the Glaskarmen. But if you would sail a seaboard of the Glaskarmen, then keep Wicklohead a good ways without the Mizanhead, and so run alongst a seaboard of it, and you can take no hurt of it: But if you keep the point of Wicklohead but even without the Mizanhead, you shall not fail to sail upon the Glaskarmen.  
At the north point of Arkelohead lieth a little stony ledge very steep and needle to. A man must take good heed of it (coming from the northwards) and bound to the southwards, 
Ledge at Arkelohead.  and then must come no nearer it than in five fathom, towards the shore lie some little rocks above water: when you come from the northwards; & those little rocks are westnorthwest from you, then are you passed it, to wit, to the southwards of that ledge; & than you may again borrow of the shore, upon the lead, commonly men do keep so fare of the shore, that they can take no hurt of the foresaid ledge.  
At the north side of the point of Arkelo is a fair sand-bay, 
Bay Arkelo.  there is a good anchor ground, and all over good riding in 8, 7, or 5 fathom, in this bay are good store of herrings caught.  
Right against Arkelo runneth also a channel through the banks into the sea. 
For to sail into the channel before Arkelo.  For to sail in there out of the sea, look out for a round hill within the land; bring that westnorthwest, or west & by north off you, & sail then in there boldly, keeping it so. But if you bring the round hill west of you, and sail so in, you shall sail upon the point of the north grounds, it is in that channel about seven or eight fathom deep.  
About an English mile to the northwards of the point is the river of Arkelo but very shoal, at high water there cometh no more than six foot water.  
The coast of Washford unto Wickelo lieth most north & by east, a little more easterly: But he that will sail without alongst by the banks or sands, must not go more northerly than northnortheast, for to avoid the grounds which lie about Wickelo, 3 leagues off from the land. And to the southwards the south grounds lie scarce a league from the shore, there not long since a pilot keeping bad reckoning run without the sands alongst north and by east, & sailed thwart of Arkelo, behind a tail of sand that lieth off from the north to the southwards, & he lost his ship. Arkelo lay from them (when they sat upon the sand) west & by south.  
About two leagues to the northwards of Arkelo lieth Mizanhead it is a black head. Betwixt Mizanhead 
Mizanhead.  & Arkelo in the fareway it is eight and 9 fathom deep, it is also between them both alongst the whole coast, good anchoring and clean ground.  
From Mizanhead to Wicklohead 
Wicklohead.  it is also 2 leagues, but this reach is shorter than the other to Arkelo.  
One English mile to the southwards of the point of Wicklo, lieth a little rock close by the shore, called the Wolf, 
Wolf.  it cometh at half tide above water, the Fisher's boats run through within it, but it is not to be done with ships.  
Right to the southwards of Wicklohead, somewhat further out then the point, lieth also a rocky sand, called also the Horse-shoe, 
Horse-shoe.  close unto the point, about south and by east from it a man should for need (when he cannot do better) sail through there within it, but he must be very well acquainted with it, or else not well to be done; without, it is more certain & best going off somewhat to the deep. If you keep the point of Brahead a little without Wicklohead, than you can take no hurt of it, or if you keep the high inner land, so that you may even see it above the land of Wicklo, and go not altogether hidden behind it, than you go there without it in 5 fathom. The point off Wicklo is steep & stony with a double top little hill, within standeth a little chapel, when you can see that through the saddle off the hill, than you are right against it, and have it on your side; the village of Wicklo lieth to the northwards off the point in the Bay, there is a little haven, which at high water hath ten foot water.  
In the Bay the ground is so hard & chindell, that the anchors do not hold there, but without the Bay somewhat fare from the shore, towards the Banks, the ground is somewhat better.  

Channel through the banks thwart off Wicklo.  Thwart of Wicklo alsoo is a channel through the banks for to sail that out or in, keep the Castle of Wicklo, that you may see it open of the point, thereupon you may boldly sail out or in.  
Fourteen English miles from Wicklo lieth the point of Brae, a high steep stony point, & the high land there about on the sea coast.  
Betwixt Wicklo and Brae lieth out a flat point with a little Fisher village, called Nicastell, there (sailing alongst) you have four, five and six fathom deep, but from the flat point unto the steep point of Brae, it is well 14 fathom deep, the land lieth there about north & north & by west.  
Within the land lieth a high hill, off fashion like a sugarloafe, 
Sugarloaf  that is the farthest in the land off the three hills, which they call the Vineyards, when you have them through one another, and are northwest, and so keep them, then may you boldly thereupon run through the banks into sea, or out of the sea, by these marks you may come in within the banks that is a very large and broad channel.  
Thwart from that foresaid Sugarloafe to the southwards of Brae lieth a bank that is not deeper than 4 fathom, very stony and sharp ground.  

Brahead.  Braehead is very steep, likewise also the ground by it, is 10 fathom deep close by the shore, to the northwards of the point lieth a little tydehaven, there stand the houses called Brae on the north side.  
From Braehead to the Island Dalke 
Island Dalke.  (lying at the s. point of the Bay of Dublin) the course is n. and by w. 4 English miles, there betwixt both goeth in a bay.  
At the n. e. side of the Island Dalke lie some rocks, lying alongst the main not far from it. Men sail within the Island through and leave all the rocks and the Island lieth to seawards.  
The Sound betwixt the Island Dalke and the main land, is called the Sound of Dalke, 
the sound of Dalke.  it lieth northnorthwest, and north and by west through, it is 7, 8, and nine fathom deep, men may anchor under the Island, nearest the Land, there is good sandy ground, or somewhat further in, there lieth a round rock, nearest to the main land, there men may make fast a Cable on it, & an anchor thwart of the channel, towards the other rocks, because of the tides, for the tide runneth there very strong through. A s. f. e. & a s. & by east wind bloweth there right in, but in regard it is there very narrow, there can go no great sea, with a south east wind you are landlockt of the Island, and a south wind cometh off the main land.  
From the Island of Dalke, until you are passad the village of Dalke, the shore lieth northwest and by west, before the village you have some succour for a south east wind, the wind being more easterly, you lie in the open sea. You lie there in 8 or 9 fathom, the nearer the Island the deeper, the place is called the Berton road; 
Berton road.  you may not anchor further to the westwards then before the village: to the westwards of the village the ground is foul and sharp.  
The north point of the Bay of Dublin, called Houth 
Houth.  or Hedenho, is a very high point, it seemeth a fare off as if it were an Island, but it is fast to the main land with a small and very low neck: To the northwards of it lie the Islands Yrelands-eye and Lambey, those may be seen (being to the Southwards of the point Houth, & being before the entrance of Dublin) over that foresaid small neck of Land.  
From the Sound of Dalke to the Bar of Dublin, the course in n. n. w. the fareway it is deep 9, 8, 7, 5, and four fathom how nearer the Bar the shoaler water. W●en you sail up, you must keep the westermost Rock that lieth without at the Island of Dalke, a handspikes length open of the Island, or the other rocks, and shall so come before the entrance, without hav●ng ●●y let or hindrance of the sand. Or you may ●ayle more to the eastwads right towards the low la●d of the norther shore, & then by your lead alongst by it to the ●●rre.  
If you come from the northwards, you may run in close about the point of Houth by your lead, and then all alongst by the norther shore, until you come to the mouth of the Bar, there alongst it is the deepest water, but towards Dalck it is shoaler. From the south shore runneth of a great tail of sand, almost unto n. shoa●e. To the northwards of it goeth the deep in. Upon that tail a little within the point stands a beacon of a mast, made by the Englishmen called the Paersing. 
Pae●sing.   
For not to come too near this foresaid sand, coming from the southwards, 
Marke●● 〈◊〉  look out for the Island Yrelands-eye, keep that so, that you may but even see it over the low land close after unto the high land of Houth, so you can take no hurt of that sand. When the Tower of Sa●nt Patrick's in Dublin which standeth on the land side of Dublin, cometh right over that beacon the Paers●●g, then are you yet right against the point of the sand which shooteth out a good way to the northwards o the Paersing. For to go clear of that, you must run so fare to the northwards, until the Paersing cometh ●ight over a little Castle with three turrets, or little towe●s, which standeth to the southwards to the town, or when the Paersing cometh betwixt that foresaid little Castle & the town, then are you above the point of the sand, then go in west and by south until you come over the shoalest of the Bar, there is at spring tied 15 or 18 foot water, but at low water a●d ●eep tied, not more than 6 foot, you may sound it on both sides. When you are over the shoalest of the Bar, than anchor within the sand by the beacon in Poelbergh, 
Road in. Poelberg  there it is at high water 4 fathom deep. The mark of this road is, that you bring that afore written hill like the Sugarloaf that here before is spoken of, and serveth for a mark for to sail by into the Channel of Wicklo) over another lower hill, then are you in the best of the road, bring out your best anchor in the south-west, against the blowing of the s. w. winds, which sometimes come pouring down there very strong out of the s. w. over the high land, and the other in the north-east. At low water the sands lie dry there round about the road. 
Road by plantage   
Men may alsoo anchor somewhat further in, at the north side of the sound, right against a village called Klantarie in a pool, where at low water remaineth 9 or 10 foot water: but round about the ship (as it is in most places of the haven) it doth fall altogether dry, so that there a ship hath but even room to wind up to and again. Men do moor there south southeast and n. n. w. A, s. e. & n. w. Moon maketh there the highest water.  
If the ships that come there be any thing great, they must stay in Poelbegh, close before the Town it is very shoaly, and falleth at low water altogether dry: with an ordinary tied men cannot come before the town with a ship that draweth 5 foot water, but with a spring tied with ships that draw 7 or 8 foot water.  
At the north side of the river, a little further out then the town, right over against Ringsend, lieth a little Island, within it is a fit place to make ships clean.  
The sands or banks that lie alongst this east Coast of Ireland from the Tuskar unto Dalke, are on the outside, or on the east side very steep and needle too, so that men may not come nearer them than in 24 & 25 fathom, in 20 fathom men are close by them, they are not deeper at some places then in one fathom, or one fathom and a half: but at the north end by Dalke, about two fathom and a half, and three fathom deep, all stony ground, & lie on the off side alongst n. n. east, and s. s. west, at the nor●h end they lie about 8 English miles from the land. If you are bound for Dublin, 
Ma●k● for 〈…〉 w●●h●ut the banks  and will go without these sands, run then so far to the northwards, until you can see the little Island (Irelands-eye) without the point of Houth or Hedenhoo, run then right on to Houth or Hedenhoo, and then you shall take no hurt of the north grounds.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
Betwixt Corckbey, alongst the Coast before Waterford into the point of Cornaroort, the Island falleth alongst the Coast e. n. e. and the ebb w. s. w.  
At W●terford an east and by north, and west and by south moon maketh high water.  
Without the land in the fareway betwixt Silly and Ireland, a south-west and by west moon maketh high water.  
In the channel or entrance of Washford, an east and west moon.  
The flood runneth there to the northwards, after high water a half tide, and the ebb contrariwise to the southwards, a half tide after low water, but not so strong as the flood.  
On the east Coasts of Ireland to the southwards of the bay of Dublin, a southsoutheast and northnorthwest moon maketh high water.  
At Dublin a southeast and northwest moon.  
The flood runneth from the Tuskar without the banks alongst betwixt Ireland and England northnortheast, & the ebb southsouthwest.  
On the Coasts a southsoutheast and northnorthwest moon maketh high water.  
The flood cometh here from the southwards, and also from the northwards, about the north part of Ireland, & meet one another about right against Carlingford, where they stop one the other. The ebb contrariwise falleth (to the northwards of Carlingford) to the northwards, and (to the southwards of Carlingford) to the southwards.   

Of the Depths.  
From Corckbey to the eastwards unto Waterford men may see the land in 24 fathom, the most part of the s. Coast of Ireland, men may see it in 35 and 40 fathom. In 35 fathom you shall not be fare from the land, therefore come no nearer Ireland by night then in 40 fathom.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Corck obey to Waterford, the Coast lieth most eastnortheast 10 or 20 leagues.  
From Waterford to the Islands of the Saltees east, but to go about to the southwards of them eastsoutheast, 3 leagues.  
From the south end of Saltees to Black-rock north-east and by east 2 leagues.  
From Blackrock to Carnaroort n. e. 1 league.  
But to Grenore 2 leagues.  
From the Saltees to the Tuskar eastnortheast, but from without the foul ground to the southwards of the Saltees north-east and north-east and by east 5 leagues.  
From Blackrock to the Tuskar eastnortheast. 3 leagues.  
From the Tuskar to Grenore northwest and by west, & westnorthwest 1 league.  
From Grenore into Grenebay first northwest and by north, & then westnorthwest 1 league.  
From Greene-bay to the Bar off Washford, north & north & by west one great league.  
From the Bar of Washford unto Washford about one league and a half  
From Waterford to Grosholm east & by south 21 leag.  
From the Tuskar to the rock Mascus east and by south, 8 leagues.  
From Turkar to the rocks Smales southeast & by south about 10 leagues.  
From Tuskar to the landsend of England south and by east somewhat northerly 43 leagues.  
From Waterford to the landsend of England southsoutheast but to Silly south and by east, somewhat southerly, 43 leagues.  
From the point of Glaskarrick to the point of Arkelo north & by east. 4 great leagues.  
From Arkelo to Mizanhead north and by east, somewhat easterly 2 leagues.  
From Mizanhead to the point of Wicklo north and by east somewhat easterly 2 leagues.  
From Wicklohead to the flat point by Nicastle north, 2 leagues.  
From Nicastle to the point of Brae north, and north & by west 2 leagues & a third part.  
From Wicklohead to Braehead north, and north and by west 5 leagues.  
From Braehead to the Island of Dalke north & by west, 2 leagues.  
From Dalke to the Bar of Dublin northnorthwest, 2 leagues and a half  
From the Sound of Dalke to the point Houth northnortheast 2 leagues and a half.  
The Banks lie from the Tuskar to the north end northnortheast and southsouthwest.  
From the Bar of Dublin to Holy-hill in the Island Anglesey east and by south 19 leagues,  
From the Bar to the Town Dublin westsouthwest two leagues.    

Heights.  
Waterford, or the Tower of Waterford lieth 52 degr. or a little more.   

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

The land a little to the eastwards of Kinsale showeth thus.  
The land to the eastwards of Corck towards Jochull, showeth in this form.   

Old ruined houses  
The Rocks betwixt jochul and Corck.  
When you are to the eastwards of Corck, not far from the land, and that the harbours mouth doth begin to open, then showeth the land as it is described in these two figures, at the AA, belonging one to the other, being near the land it seemeth to be high land, but a far off (when you can see the high inner land, within jochul over the cliff land) it seemeth to be but low.  
Innerland, far within the Land Innerland north and by west.  
Mount of jochul.  
These two figures belong at the BB, one to the other  
Dongarvan  
When you are before jochull, or thereabouts, (two or three leagues from land) so that the high mountain● of cape Quin be north and by west from you, than showeth the land thus, the double innerland is very high blue land, you may see it in clear weather twelve or thirteen leagues off.  
Corck Rock jochull  
The high land of Dongarvan  
These two figures belong at the CC one to the other, and is the form of the land betwixt Corck and jochull.  
Northnorthwest  
The high land of Dongarvan showeth thus, being northnorthwest from you.  
Thus showeth the high land of Dongarvan, when the westermost end of it is northwest from you.  
Sleges Cataquin The haven of Waterfor●.  
The Tower of W●●erford.  
Thus showeth itself the land about Waterford, and to the westwards, with the high land of C. Quin, or Cara Quin, when you come towards the land.  
Thus showeth the Saltees, when they are 3 or 4 leagues west and by north from you.  
Grenore.  
Thus showeth the land between the Saltees and the point of Grenoort when it is about 2 leagues from you.  
Grenore  
The figure following is to bejoyned unto the former, the AA one to the other.   

The land to the northwards of Greenoore showeth thus, when the northermost point, where the cross standeth over, is north and by west about five leagues from you, and Grenoore south-west & by west, so fare that a man may but even see it from below, and then a man may see the Tuskar from the top in the south-west.  
Sugarloafe. Brahead.  
Thus showeth the coast of Ireland when as Sugarloafe is northwest, and the point of Brahead northwest and by north about seven leagues from you. When as Sugarloafe cometh northwest and by west from you, then may you run so in, over the north grounds through a broad channel of nine and ten fathom deep.  
When the Sugarloafe is thwart from you, it showeth with the high land within it, thus.  
Sugarloafe Braehead Island Dalke.  
Sound of Dalke.  
Thus showeth the coast of Ireland betwixt the Sugarloafe and the Island Dalke, lying at the south point of the Bay of Dublin, when a man is about Braehead, one or two leagues from the land.  
Sound point of Dublin. Island Dalke. The point Houth. Island Lambey.  
When a man cometh from the southwards, thus showeth the Bay of Dublin with the point Houth, and the Island Lambey to the northwards of it     

The seventh Demonstration, Wherein is Delineated the north east Coast of Ireland between Hedenhoo or Houth, to Hoornhed.  
THe n. point of the Bay of Dublin called Houth, is round about clean, so that a man may anchor round about it. To the northwards of it lie the Islands of Irelands-eye 
Irelands-eye.  & Lambey Irelands-eye is the smallest, it lieth betwixt the aforesaid point Houth and Lambey: At the west side of it standeth a little Chapel, right against it, you may ride. At the s. end lieth of a stony riffe which must be avoided. Right over against that Island in the main land lieth a haven for small ships, at a little town called Malcheall. 
Malcheall   
Under Lambey 
Lambey  you may ride upon the n. side for a southerly wind, in 12 and 13 fathom, but for a sea wind, you must shift, unto the west side by a Gentleman's house, and anchor there, but it is not very good lying there, because always there cometh in a great sea.  
About 6 leag. n. w. and by n. from Lambey, lieth the haven of Drodagh, betwixt them both (nearest Lambey) close by the land lie rocks, called the Skires. About 2 miles to the northwards of Lambey lieth a great rock called Rock a Bill, you may run round about it on both the sides.  
Drodagh 
Drodagh.  hath a narrow crooked haven, which is not good to come into without a Pilot, or some one that is well acquainted with it.  
Four or 5 leagues to the northwards thereof lieth the haven of Dondalk, which is very shoal, and little used, at low water a man may go over a foot.  
North and by west about 11 leagues from Lambey, seven leagues to the northwards of Drodagh, and two leagues from Dondalk, lieth the haven of Carlingford: 
Carlingford.  the north point of that haven is somewhat foul and rocky, but you may go in about it by your lead: the s. point is very foul with rocks and sunken rocks, which you must shun, and run in by the northern shore: Some say that men may run in through betwixt the rocks and the souther point with small ships, but it is not without danger. When you are within the sunken rocks, you must run over to the souther shore, and in alongst by it, until you come before the town of Carlingford, and anchor there in six, seven, or eight fathom, so shallow as you will; you may sail in upon the oase and save a ship without anchor or Cables. Green-Castle 
Greene-Castle.  lieth at the n. e. side of the haven, 2 miles from Carlingford.  
About 7 leagues n. e. from Calingford, lieth a point called S. john's point: 
S. John's point.  betwixt both about half ways lieth the mount of Carlingford, a high Mountain. From S. john's point lieth of a ledge of rocks, whereof you must take heed. A great league to the northwards of S. john's point, lieth Arglas, 
Arglas.  from thenceforth to the haven of Strangford it is 3 small leagues.  
De Noord-oost zyde van YERLANDT Van Caap de Hoorn tot aen Hedehde en als meed ho t' van Schotlandt gelegen is.  
About a league and a half to the northwards of Strangford lie the Rocks Southrocke and Northrocke, of them read as followeth.  
From Strangford Haven to the Northwards lieth the coast forth n.n.e. one league unto a point which some do call the point of Arglas, others the point or head of Molines; from thence falleth away the coast unto the Bay of Knockfergus northnorthwest.  
By the foresaid point of Arglas or Cape of Molines, 
Point of Arglas. C. de More; lines.  to wit, to the northwards of it, two little miles, lie two great rocks: the southermost is called the Southrocke, 
Southrock.  it lieth about two mile, to the Southwards of the Northermost, called the Northrocke. 
Northrock.  From the south end of the southrocke lieth a ledge of rocks at the least two miles off, also one from the north-east point a great ways north-east off into the sea. The north rock is a great plate of rocks, whereof many at high water are under water. There goeth also from it a foul ledge off unto the land, so that a man may hardly sail through betwixt the rocks and the main land, except a man be extraordinary well acquainted. But betwixt the northrock & the southrock goeth a fair broad Sound through, where men may well turn too and again, and at many places may anchor, it is all over good clean sandy ground, 6, or 7, and 8 fathom deep.  
From the east side of the southrocke unto the Islands at the east point of the bay of Knockfergus, called Koppen, or Kopland Isles, the course is North northwest or somewhat more northerly, about six leagues: for when men sail from the east side of these Islands to the southwards, with a s. s.e. way, they go fare enough without the north and Southrocks. There betwixt them both lie divers more little Islands, rocks, and sunken rocks, & shoals, for the which men must take good heed when they will come near by the shore.  
The Kopland Isles lie about an English mile from the land, they are upon the off side to seawards, clean, but from the inner side there goeth off some ledges and foul ground, in the midway there going through it is 5 & six fathom deep, but it is best to go without, except for them that are well acquainted. The n. point of Knockfergus, lieth distant from the Copland Isles 3 or 4 leagues n.w. or somewhat northerly, for which a s. e. course from the north point towards the fore said Islands, that goeth fare enough without them.  
The bay of Knockfergus 
Bay of Knockfergus.  is a great broad Sound; About 3 leagues inwards in the Bay w. from Copland Isles, is the road before Knockfergus, there is good anchor ground in 3 fathom and a half. Somewhat more further out towards the n. point also on the n. side of the bay standeth a Castle, called Mousehils Castle, by it is a sandy bay, where is good anchorage, as well for great ships as small, for the n. and the n.w. winds, but a south-west wind maketh a bad road in these places.  
A little to the northwards of the North point of the bay of Knockfergus, lieth a little Island called Kow, 
Kow island.  from thence lieth the Coast of Ireland forth northnorthwest, about 9 or 10 leagues unto the Islands of Raghleens. Betwixt them both lie the 9 Maids one great league without the land, 
The Maids  and two great leagues to the northwards of the Bay of Knockfergus, they are great Rocks, that lie but little above water, or low rocky little Islands, and a multitude of rocks under water about them, that lie off so far to the north north east, that men cannot come near them within 5 or six English miles. There go some Creeks through the soul grounds, where men (for need) might sail through, but it is no wisdom to go about it, when there is no need, and that men can do better. Not very long since, there came a man (by night unacquainted) there in, and ran through only upon the sight of the breaches of the water, and got through without any hurt, but not without great fear and danger. He that cometh off from the fair Forland, must (at least) go South east and by east, sor to run alongst clear of these foul grounds. From the west side also lieth off a little tail of a ledge of Rocks towards the land. Further, it is there clean, that men may sail through there within, but men must not come nearer the Maids, then about half channel betwixt them and the main, but the main land so near as they will, which is both clean and clear, with many Bays, where men may every where anchor, yet here and there lie some Rocks, but they are all above water: There is nothing that can hurt you, but men may easily see it.  
A great league to the northwards of the north point of the Bay of Knock fergus, and a half league south south-west from the Maids, lieth a haven called Old-fliet 
Old fliet.  For to know it when men come from the Northwards, they shall see two flat little Towers, the one somewhat higher than the other, like as if men saw a ship with main sail & foresail, without top or toppe-sayles: these stand upon the northside of the Bay.  
At the south point lieth a small round little Island or rock called the Knee, 
Island Knee.  a special mark for to know this Bay; Men run in there amidst the channel. But when you come from the southwards, and get sight of the little Island Knee, then run in close about it.  
From Old-fliet to the northwards unto fair Forland, the coast is very clean, that you may sail close alongst by it, boldly without any fear, except you run fare off from land, without the foresaid Maids towards the Scottish coast.  
Fair Hid, or Fair Forland 
Fair Fotland.  is the outermost north east Point of the main land of Ireland, and lieth a little to the southwards of the Island Rachleens, so that this point and the east point of Rachleens lie near about south and north one from the other.  
At Rachleens, or Fair Forland the north east point of Ireland, come Scotland & Ireland nearest one to the other. The Rachleens is an Island that men may sail round about, either to the Northwards or to the Southwards, as they will according as it happeneth best convenient with wind and tide. At the south-west side is a fair bay, where is good lying almost for all winds. When men come from West it seemeth to the southwards of the Rachleens to be close without any opening, because the eastermost point of Ireland's Fair Forland, lieth somewhat further out, behind the Rachleens, but when they come nearer betwixt them, showeth itself open by little and little. On both sides are the shores flat and clean, so that men may anchor there where you will, either by the coast of the main land of Ireland, in 8 or 9 fathom, or in the bay under the Island in clean sandy ground. Over against the Rachleens, close by the main land, lieth another little high Island, called the Lambs 
Lamb's Island.  or sheep's Island, to the southwards of it betwixt it and the main, men may not sail there about it, but betwixt it & the Island Rachleen it is broad enough.  
From the Rachleens unto the Skires Portrush, the course is w. s. w. distant 7 leag. About 2 leag. to the e. wards off it, in the main land, lieth Porto Belletrie, a bad road for great ships, the ground is there fowl and sharp.  
Betwixt Porto Belletrie and Skires Portrush, nearest unto Skires Portrush, lie the Chickens, 
Chickens.  these are sunken rocks, which may be sailed about on both sides, for to come to anchor under Skires Portrush. 
Skires. Portrush.   
The Skires Portrush is a rocky Island, it hath on the south side a fair bay, where you may lie in six and seven fathom, clean & sandy ground land-lockt for all winds, except for the eastnortheast wind, which bloweth alongst the shore there open in. For to come under this Island from the east, you must go close alongst by the shore off the main land, for to shun these foresaid sunken rocks the Chickens. It is there all over clean and clear: or else if you were minded to go without, or to the southward off the Chickens, for to come under the Island, you must shun the East point of the Island, because of a sunken rock that lieth a little off from the east point of the Island. At the northwest side of this bay is also a small narrow channel, where you may sail through.  
A little to the westwards of Skires Portrush lieth the Bant-haven, 
Bant-haven.  there alongst you may sail up unto the new Town Colran, it is a bad channel to come in, as well by reason of the strong freshoale that cometh out, as also because it is very shoal: with ships that draw 8 foot water, you must have at least 3 quarters of the flood before you can go in.  
Three leagues n. west and by west from Bant-haven, or west and by north from Skires Portrush, lieth the haven of Loughfoile, 
Loughfoyle.  before it, lieth a great plate of sand called the Touns, which lieth from the west point of the haven a great ways to the northwards off from the shore, when the wind is out of the sea, it breaketh very much upon it, with small ships that draw little water, men may sail into Loughfoile haven at high water to the southwards of the Touns, betwixt the Touns and the souther-poynt, called Magillions point; but it is there very uneven, and at full sea there cometh no more than eight foot water, but alongst to the westwards of the Touns, it is very deep, men may sound about the Touns on the off side in four fathom.  
For to find the Channel that lieth into the westwards off the Touns, (coming from the east, or alongst by the Touns) you must look out for a little sandy Bay, that lieth on the westside, even within the north-poynt of the river under the high land; bring it so, that you may see it open of the foresaid north-poynt, and sail in there upon, until you come by the land, and then run in alongst by it south-west until you come right against Greencastle. If you come from the west or the north, you may boldly without fear run alongst the shore, & about the point upon your lead, without coming near the town, you may see any thing that might do you hurt, coming by Greencastle, there may you anchor so that you may see Withcastle without the point of Green-castle, there you may lie within the Towns, sheltered for winds out of the sea.  

Road in Loughfoyle.  For to sail up from Green-Castle, you must run up alongst by the west shore by your lead, and shun the little sands that lie here and there alongst that side, until you come past Withcastle, right against the three trees, there is the ordinary road.  
Betwixt Green-castle and Withcastle nearest unto Green-castle goeth a Creecke or Slencke through the grounds, unto the eastern shore, which is as deep or deeper than the right fareway unto Withcastle. When men come off from Green-castle, they must take good heed not to go fare off from the western shore. lest they fall into that Creek.  
How men shall sail from the foresaid road forth up unto the Town Derry, they may perceive or mark by the card.  
From Lough-foile-haven unto the Island Enesterhul 
Islands Enesterhull.  (by some called Monsterhul) the course is northwest four or five leagues, these are small black Islands or rocks, not very high above water, and lie a little off the northermost point of Ireland, called Enistom, a high plain land, and very good to know for him that hath once seen it. Betwixt the Islands and the point men may sail through, but not-without great danger for them that are not very well acpuainted with it, because off much fowl ground and shoals that lie betwixt them both. Under the foresaid point Eniston, on the west side, men may anchor for easterly winds, or else to stop the tide.  
From the Islands Enesterhull unto Lough-Swilly, 
Lough-Swilly.  of some called Locksillie, the course is south-west 5 leagues, that is a fair haven. For to sail in there: men must shun the west side, and go in alongst by the casterne shore: The land about Lough-Swilly is the highest land of the whole north coast of Ireland, and thereby it is also very good to know, for those that (coming out off the north) do fall with the lands there abouts.  
Four or five leagues westsouthwest, or somewhat westerly lieth a large broad haven, called Sheepeshaven, but it is at some places foul ground, within it men may lie landlockt for all winds. The west point lieth out, called Hornehead, 
Horn-head.  or Cape de Horn, 
Cape de Horn.  upon it is a hill with two hommockes in fashion like two horns and there after the point is named.  
At the west side of this point, men may ride and anchor within the rocks for easterly winds. Betwixt Lough-Swilly & sheepshaven lieth also a Bay, where men may anchor, but the ground is not very clean, and right against it in the offing, half a league from the land, lieth a ledge of rocks, which at high water are under, and at low water lie above water, may (for need) run through betwixt it and the land, but without it is best and surest.  

The Coast of Scotland.  
The haven or sound of Loughrean 
Loughgrean.  or Loockreen in Scotland by the poinr of Galloway, lieth distant from Fair Forland the n.e. point of Ireland, e. s.e. about eleven leagues, but the point called Cantir, lieth distant from Loockreen n.w. & s. e 9 leagu there betwixt them both goeth up a great broad sound north-east in, called Dunbritain Firth, through which men sail up unto Glass kow in Scotland.  
The sound of Lookreen you may sail in, 
Dubritaine Firth.  and a good ways you may turn in to and again for to anchor there within for westerly wind, if you do come no nearer the Gores on either side then in four fathom, you can take no hurt: You may anchor somewhat in, by the second high point on the east shore in ten or 12 fathom.  
About seven leagues to the northwards of the point of Galloway in the foresaid great sound, lieth a high sharp Island, clean round about, of fashion all most like unto a pook of Hay, called Ailza, or Elzee, there you may boldly sail round about, 
Elze Island.  it is there round about it, and close by it 18 fathom deep.  
From Elzee northwards six leagues lieth also another little Island, close by the east side of the great Island Arren, called Lamblash, or Lamb-Isle, 
Lamb-Isle.  clean also round about, there you may sail round about it, and anchor under it for all winds in ten, twelve, or thirteen fathom, to wit, within it, betwixt the Island & the great Island of Arren.  
North and by east and northnortheast two great leagues from Lamb-Isle, lieth an Island by the point of the maineland called Commer-Isle; 
Commer-Jsle.  on the east side of it betwixt the Island and the main land, you may sail through in to a fair bay, 
Bay of Commer-Jsle.  where men are landlockt for all winds. and from thence may sail forth unto Dunbrittaine, or into the river Glaskow. The foresaid Island Commer-Isle lieth from the Island Elzee, about north & by east. For knowledge of this Island, when men come off from Elzee, or from the southwards towards this Island, men shall see a great castle on the east side of the main about a great league to the southwards of Commer-Isle, and also a little castle, a good ways to the northwards, close upon the water side, that standeth right to the southwards of the Island Commers-Isle, or the sound that lieth there into the eastwards of it, upon the same Island standeth alsoo a little castle close to the water side. Run in betwixt the Island and the main land, about northnortheast in, and leave the Island a great cables length on the larboard side, and the main land on the starboard side you must shun more, because of a great ledge that lieth off from it towards the Island, and somewhat more northerly. Having gotten clear of the end of this ledge run then right towards the main land into the bay, or sound, and anchor there in ten fathom, right against a stone house with an over hard thereby, it shall be then a stern your ship about 7 fathom deep, and there moor your ship well.  
For to sail out of the Sound of Commer-Isle, towards Glaskow, 
To sail from Comer Jsle to Glaskow.  go first northwest & by north unto by the point of the Island, that is, to the westwards of you, and then north, alongst by it, then by little and little more easterly, at length north-east, run so all alongst by the easterland, without leaving of it, you shall not sail to come to the sound of Glaskow. Coming by the point run close about by it first eastnortheast, east, and east and by south, at least eastsoutheast, all alongst by the southern shore, you shall then see a castle somewhat a head upon the souther-land, close upon the water side, with two tuffes of trees upon the high land right eastsoutheast from the castle; keep that foresaid castle between the tuffes of trees, and sail in there upon, so shall you run right, alongst the deepest of the Creek, there is at high water five fathom, and at low water three fathom. From the north shore lieth off a great shoal, which lieth over the Sound more than two third parts from the norther shore; towards the south shore it falleth dry at the lowest water, there fore men must shun the norther shore, & run alongst by the souther shore. There standeth a white castle upon the south shore, right against that begin the foresaid sands. In the Creek it is soft ground, but towards the sand the ground is hard, therefore when you feel by your lead that it is somewhat hard, that is a token that you come too near the shoals, sail then so forth upwards to Dunbrittaine, there lieth a little Island on the south shore, which is at low water fast to the Island when you shall be passed it about two Cables length, than anchor there in five at high water.  
A south and by west moon maketh there the highest water.   

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams,  
At Dublin a southeast and northwest moon.  
The flood cometh here from the southwards, and also from the northwards, about the north part of Ireland, and meet one another about right against Carlingford, where they stop one the other. The ebb contrariwise falleth (to the northwards off Carlingford) to the northwards, and (to the southwards of Carlingford) to the southwards.  
On the coast of Ireland from the Southrock and North-rocke unto the Copland Isles, a southsoutheast and northnorthwest moon maketh full sea. But to the northwards of it a southeast moon.  
On the Island off the Ragleens & Skires Portrush an eastsoutheast and westnorthwest moon.  
The 'slud cometh there out of the west, and falleth through betwixt Ireland and Scotland: from the cape Cantir to the mull of Galloway, southsoutheast, unto the Island Man, there floods out of the south and north do mere one to the other. The ebb contrary wise falleth alongst the coast northnorthwest betwixt Ireland and Scotland to the westwards unto the Ocean sea.  
At Englistoun in the Sound of Glaskow, a s. west moon maketh full sea.  
In the haven of Loughfoile an east and by s. and west and by north Moon maketh full sea. The flood cometh there out of the west and northwest.  
At the Island Enesterhull, and in sheep haven an east and west Moon maketh full sea. The flood cometh there out of the west.   

Courses & Distances.  

From the Sound of Dalke to the point Houth northnortheast two leagues and a half.  
That course runneth without the point Houth, Ireland's eye, Lambey, and Rock a Bill.  
From Lambey to Drodagh northwest and by north 6 leagues.  
From Lambey to Carlingford north and by west, 11 leagues.  
From Carlingford to S. john's point north-east, 7 leagues.  
From S. john's point to Strangford north-east and by north 4 leagues.  
From Lambey to the Southrocke northnortheast, 22 leagues.  
From the northrock & Southrock unto the Copland Isles n. n. west. 6 leagues.  
From the Copland Isles to the north-poynt off Knockfergus northwest, somewhat northerly 3 or 4 leagues.  
One league to the northwards lieth the haven of Oldefliet.  
From Oldefliet to the Raghleens within the Maids, through northnorthwest 7 leagues.  
From the Ragleens to Skires Portrush westsouthwest, 6 or 7 leagues.  
From Loughfoyle to the Islands Enesterhull northwest, 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Enesterhull to Lough Swilly south-west, 5 leagues.  
From Lough Swilly to Sheep haven w. s. w. westerly, 4 or 5 leagues.    

Heights.  
The Islands of Enesterhul at the northermost point of Ireland lieth in 55 degrees and 10 or 12 minutes.   

How these Lands do show themselves at Sea.  

Sound point of Dublin Island Dalke. The point Houth. Island Lambey.  
When a man cometh from the southwards, thus showeth the Bay of Dublin, with the point Houth, and the Island Lambey to the northwards of it.  
The Island Lambey showeth itself thus, when it is from you northwest and by north one league off.   

Thus showeth the land a little to the southwards of Carlingford, when this high point is northwest from you about five leagues. He that will go into Carlingford, must go in close by the shore.  
The land to the northwards of Carlingford showeth itself thus, when the northermost point is north and by west from you 5 or 6 leagues.  
S. John's point showeth thus, when it is 4 leagues northwest from you.  
Thus showeth the point of Scotland over against the Bay Knockfergus, called the mull of Galloway, when men sail alongst by it, 1 league without the land, & that the northermost & the low point is n. e. from you, & the southermost s. e. from you. Under the north point it is on both sides good anchoring in 10 or 12 fathom, for southerly and easterly winds.  
The Island Elzee in the great bay of Dunbrittain showeth itself thus.  
The Island Lamblash, or Lamb Isle on the e. side of the Island Arren showeth itself thus, being 2 leag. off from it.  
The Island Comer Isle lying before the sound of Dunbrittaine, or Glaskow showeth itself thus.  
Thus showeth Cape Cantyr, when it is from you northwest and by west about 7 or 8 leagues.  
Isle Man showeth thus, when you are 4 leagues southeast from it.     

The eighth Demonstration, In Which Are showed the northwest Coasts of Ireland, from Hoornhead to Slynehead.  
WEstnorthwest about two leagues from C. de Horn or Hornhead, lieth the Island Tore, to the southwards of it lie three Islands, called the Islands Balenesse, men may sail through to the southwards of Tore Island, 
Tore Isle.  to wit,, betwixt Isle Tore, and the Island of Balenesse, 
Islands Balenesse.  & alsoo within the rocks.  
From the Island Tore to the Isles of Aran, 
Islands of Aran.  the course is s. w. 6 or 7 leagues, betwixt them both, not far from Island Aran, lie some high rocks, called the Staggs of Aran. 
Staggs of Aran.  Alongst all that coast betwixt Horn-head & the Islands of Aran, is good anchor ground all over.  
For to come to anchor under the Islands of Aran, coming out of the North, run alongst by that great Island, leaving it on the starboard side, until you be within it: go then towards the south-west, & anchor on the southeast side, there is the road. Men may also anchor in the Islands over against it towards the main, in divers places, and lie landlockt for all winds.  
Upon the northwest point of Ireland, a good ways landwards in, lieth a high hill, of fashion all most like a Sugarloafe, which is seen in clear weather before any other land, at least nine leagues at sea: When that hill lieth east and by south from you, than sail in in right with it, you shall not miss to fall right with the great Island Aran.  
Erom the Island Aran unto the point Tellinghead, called by the Irish cape de Telling, or Tellin; 
Cape de Telling-Telling-head.  the course is southsouthwest eight or nine leagues. Three or four leagues to the northwards of C. de Telling lieth an Island, called Raigleene borne.  
At the Cape Telling lieth a little Island, half a league from land, men may sail through betwixt the Island and the cape, boldly without any danger.  
To the southward of C. de Telling, to wit, betwixt the Cape and the Stags of Broadhaven, lieth the land with a great bay, where in lie many good Havens, as Tilling-haven, Kilbegh, Dungall, Ballashaven, Slego, Endrigo and Moye.  
From the Cape of Telling unto Kilbeg 
Kilbegh.  lieth the coast e. s.e. about four leagues: betwixt both, about one league and a half from the cape, lieth Telling-haven, a round bay with good sandy ground, there may about 30 ships lie, west and south-west winds do blow there open in, for all other winds men are there landlockt.  
De Noordwest zyde van YERLANDT. Beginnende van Capo de Hoorn tot aen Schynes, oft Slynehead.  
About a little league to the eastwards lieth another Bay within some rocks, called Mackswyns bay; 
Mackswyns bay  but it is not to go in, except men be very well acquainted, they must go betwixt the rocks in until they be gotten in, there they may save a ship without cable or anchor.  
A great league to the southwards of Kilbegh, lieth a long lying out point, called S. John's point 
S. John's point.  right west from that point, a quarter, or a little half league, lieth a great Rock under water, whereupon the sea breaketh with great noise. Betwixt that rock, and the point of S. John's point, men may sail boldly through, it is there clean and clear.  
About 2 great leagues to the eastwards of that foresaid point S. John's point, lieth the Haven of Dungall, 
Dungall-haven.  into the southwards. For to sail in there, you must first shun the easter shore, which is very foul with dry plates and Rocks. When you are come right against a little castle that standeth on the north side, right against it lieth off a little riffe from the shore, that you must avoid also. And when you are come about the point of that riffe, you must go over again to the northside, for the south side is there slat and shoal Betwixt Saint John's point and Dungall-haven alongst the coast is all over good anchor ground.  
The Haven of Moy 
Moy.  hath at the coming in a broad bay, in it lie some rocks. For to sail in there, you must leave them all on the west side, that is, on the starboard side, & run towards little sandy Island, that hath at the north end a little riffe, you must go into the westwards of it, and leave that Island on the larboard side. Even within that foresaid Island lieth another little round green Island, that must be left on the starboard side, so soon as you shall be right against it, you must let fall your anchor, for a little further it is shoal and hard sandy ground, the greatest anchor must be brought towards that foresaid long small Island, & the small anchor towards the little green Island, it falleth there at low water always dry. If you will go from thence before the Town Moy, you must light your ship to 8 foot, for to come through betwixt the long small Island, and the s. grounds, there is at high water with an ordinary tide no more than 9 foot water; being come over the neck, you shall come into a pool before the town Moy, there you may ride a float at a low water. In the road against the Island it is 15 or 16 foot deep.  
The Stags of Broadhaven 
Staggs of Broad haven.  are Rocks that lie to the northwards a league or a league & a half a seaboard of the point, to the northwards of Broadhaven.  
Broadhaven lieth in s. and by west, in the sound lie 3 or 4 rocks, these must be left on the larboard side, & run in there alongst to the westwards, until you come within the haven.  
A great league to the westwards of Broadhaven lieth an out point south-west from the Staggs. From thence lieth the coast alongst to black-rock s. s.w. Black-rock 
Blackrock  is a great high black-rock with more other rocks by it, and lieth from the foresaid point s. s.w. distant about 6 leagues, & about a leag. northwest from the out point Acklehead.  
Acklehead 
Acklehead  is a very high point, and showeth itself a far off like an Island with agreat Saddle, thereby it is good to be known. Within this point lie also 2 exceeding high hills which together with the point men shall see first at sea before any other part of the land, so that the point doth show itself first like three Islands. Men may sail through betwixt Acklehead and Blackrock; coming from the southwards men do leave Acklehead on starboard. and Blackrock (with the rocks thereby a seaboard) on larboard, & the course lieth through betwixt them both n.n.e. & n. & by east unto the point of Broadhaven, it is there large and wide.  
To the n. wards & to the e. wards of Acklehead, lie divers havens, where it is good riding, a little to the n. wards of Aclehead, you may run into the w. wards, betwixt the low land to the n. wards on the larboard side, & the high land of Acklehead on the starboard side a great ways in & anchor in 7 & 8 fathom, landlockt for all winds & from thence may come out again to the n. wards, or else may come out into the sea again to the s. wards round about the land of Acklehead.  
From Acklehead to Slynshead (by the seafaringmen called Twelvepences: 
Slynshead Twelvepences.  because the land doth show itself in 12, round hommocks) the course is southwhat easterly 11. leagues, betwixt them both lie three Islands before a great bay, the northermost or next to Acklehead is called Clear, this hath a high hill on the n. end that is very steep, and at the south end it is slat going down. The second or middlemost is called Boche, wihin it is a road for those that are bound to the southwards, where men may anchor in four fathom: The southermost is called the Horse.  
Betwixt Acklehead & Twelvepences lieth within in the land, a very high hill like a Sugerlorfe, called S. Patricks-hil, 
Patricks-hil.  or by some Don Patrix that may be seen far at sea & shall be seen long, altering itself by the cliff land, as men sail along the coast to the northwards, or to the southwards.  
From Sleynshead, or Twelvepences unto the sound of S. Gregory's, before the bay of Galloway, the course is s. e. nine leagues.  

Of the tides and courses of the streams.  
In all these foresaid Havens and roads an eastnortheast and westsouthwest Moon maketh full sea. In the offing a seaboard a south-west and north-east Moon.   

Courses & Distances.  

From C. de Horn, or Hornhead, to the Island Tore w. n. west 2 leagues.  
From the Island Tore to the Isles of Aron south-west 8 leagues.  
From the Islands of Aran unto Tellinghead southsouthwest, 8 or 9 leagues.  
From C. de Tellin or Tellinghead to Kilbegh eastsoutheast 4 leagues.  
From C. de Tellin to the Stags of Broadhaven south-west, 11 leagues.  
From the point of Broad haven to Black-rocke southsouthwest 6 leagues.  
From Black-rock to Acklehead southeast 1 league.  
From Acklehead to Slynshead s. e. & by e. 10 leagues.  
From Blackrock to Rokoll n. and by w. 60 leagues.    

Heights.  
The River of Galloway lieth in 52 degrees 54 minute.   

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

KilbeghThe Island betwixt Kilbegh and the point of Slego  
The high hommock upon the point of Slego.   

These two figures belong at the A A, one to the other, and show the form or likeness of the land betwixt Kilbegh & Slego.  
White downe-Open before Slego. Very low land. The Old flat Towers. The Staggs  
Thus showeth the Land to the eastwards of the Staggs of Broadhaven towards Moye & Slego.  
Staggs. The entrance of Broadhaven.  
Bleek rock thwart from you Southsouthwest somewhat southerly.  
S. Patrick's  
Low land at the end of the high land.  
The land to the northwards of Blackrock, as fare as the Stags, and then to the southwards alongst past S. Patrick's hill, showeth, as in these two figures is Described, when men are thwart of Blackrock.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Blackrock and Acklehead, when it is east from you, when you come more to the northwards, these high hills do alter also wider one out of the other.  
Blackrock.  
The point of Blackrock showeth thus, when you are to the northwards of it.  
Thus showeth the point of Blackrock, when men are to the southwards of it, than they see a sharp rock over the point  
Don Patrick or Patrick's hill.  
Thus showeth S. Patrick's hill, when it is s. e. and by s. from you, being not fare from Land, at the n. side of it lie some little Islands and rocks.  
S: Patrick's hill.  
S: Patrick's hill.  
Black rock  
Thus showeth the second point to the northwards of Blackrock, lying in the height of 54 degrees and a half.   

De west custen van YERLANDT Beginnende van Corckbeg tot aen Slyn: host.     

The ninth Demonstration. Where in is Contained the Description of the west Coast or point of Ireland from Slynehead to Corck Bey.  
FRom Slynehead until you come before the Bay or great inlett of Galloway the course is southeast nine leagues, where lie three great Islands, called the Islands of Aron, 
islands of Aron.  the southermost is greatest, the channel betwixt the northermost and the middlemost, is called the sound of S. Gregory, 
S. Grego●ies sound  which is on both sides clean without any foul ground, so that men may turn in too & again from the one Island to the other, without fear of taking any hurt. The north side of the middlemost Island is nothing else but fair steep rocks: when you are come within the Islands, you must shun the middlemost, because of a little riffe that lieth off it.  
Men may also sail to the northwards of the northhermost Island, into the great Bay of Galloway, likewise also to the southwards of the southermost, to wit, through betwixt the southermost Island, and the main land, but that Island is foul at the south end of it, and therefore you must run in alongst close by the south shore, or at least leave two third parts of the channel towards the Island, as well in sailing in as sailing out.  
Somewhat within the Islands, on the south side lieth a high black point, called Blackhead, 
Blackhead  you must bear in to it, and alongst by it in, whether you come in at the souther channel, or through S. Gregory's sound, or else in at the norther channel, for the north side of the bay is foul and rocky. About 2. great leagues n.e. from Black-head, lieth an Island, called Motton-Ile, under it on the east side you must anchor in a pool, in 5, or 6, fathom.  
You cannot sail furthet up to the northwards into the River with ships, but only with boats. A north-east and south-west moon maketh there full sea, and it floweth there so strong in the bay, that the rocks which at low water are above water, at high water you may sail over them; at low water of spring-tidings, the grounds fall dry w. s. west from Motton-Isle, 
Motton-Isle.  a great league & a half off, most all rocky and foul ground.  
When you sail from Blackhead towards Motten-Island you must take heed of the north side, and edge over most towards the south side. About half ways betwixt them both, lieth a plate or ledge nearest the north side, you must go in alongst by it to the southwards.  
From the Bay of Galloway to Lupishead 
Lupishead.  at the n. point of the Haven of Limbrick, the course is s. s. west, 11 or 12. leagues. About half ways betwixt them both, lieth a little Island that is foul round about with ledges of Rocks that lie of to seawards a league & a half a seaboard the land.  
To the southwards of the point Lupishead goeth in the Haven of Limbrick. 
Haven of Limbrick  Four leagues eastnortheast within the foresaid point, lieth an Island, called Seatrick, 
Seatrick.  you must sail alongst without it to the southwards, & leave it on the larboard side in sailing up. At the east side of that Island is a good road. About half ways betwixt that Island and Lupishead, lieth a shoal which you must shun, and sail alongst to the southwards of it. From the Island Seatrick unto Limbrick, are more 12, or 13, leagues, first from thence to the Island Quoin 4 or 5 leagues, there are two little Islands, you must sail close alongst to the northwards of them: from thence eastnortheast unto a great rock, called the great Beef, 
The great and little Beefrocks  and then southeast unto another great rock, called the little Beef.  
When you are come before the town in the Haven, you must make fast on the Castle with three or four Cables. For there goeth a very strong tide as well of flood as of ebb. An eastnortheast Moon maketh there full sea.  
From the Haven of Limbrick to the haven of Smerrick 
Smerrick  the course is south-west eight er nine leagues, betwixt them both lieth the coast with a gtear Bay, where in lie some little Islands, called the Hogs.  
A little to the eastwards of Smerrick lieth Sinbrandonhil, 
Sinbrandonhill.  a very high hill, which lieth in height very much above all other lands thereabouts, they that come out of the sea from the westwards, shall see that hill first before any other Land, and thereby easily know it: Men may see it at sea in the offing. 12. 14, and sometimes 16 leag. off, according as the weather is clear.  
Four or 5 leagues westsouthwest from Smerrick, a little off from the land lie 4, or 5, Islands, being high round Hills and rocks called the Blaskeys, 
Blaskeyes  with some other rocks and little Islands about them. The Sound betwixt them and the main land, is called the Sound of Blaskeyes, lieth through nearest n.n.w. and s. s.e. He that is bound to the Northwards, may anchor at the south side before the sound for westerly & northerly winds, and not be in-bayed upon any lee shore: For if the wind shift easterly, he may either go through the sound, or else: go about a Seaboard the Blaskeys. If the wind shift westerly or southerly, he may run through the Sound, & further his voyage. There runneth through a very strong tide, as well of the flood as of the ebb, which must be considered.  
Six leagues to the southwards of the Blaskeyes lie three great Rocks called the Skellocks, 
Skellocks.  the eastermost about a league, and the westermost two great leagues a seabord the land, when you come from the southwards & see them first, they show like sails of ships. Betwixt the Skelloekes & the Blaskeyes goeth in a great broad Bay deep into the land, called Dinglebay, 
Dingle-bay.  with divers havens in it.  
About a league and a half from the Sound of Blaskeyes lieth a haven called Ventrie, a great league to the eastwards of it another called Dingle, or Dingle Couch, it lieth north and by west in at the west point of it lieth a rock called the Crow, 
The Crow  which is clean round about, so that men may sail round about it on both sides, without taking any hurt, at high water with spring tides, it floweth even under water. This haven of Dingle and the Skellockes, lie north east and by north, and south-west and by south distant eight leagues.  
North-east from the Skellockes, southeast from the Sound of Blaskeyes, and south and by east from the Ventrie, lieth a haven at the east end of the Island Valentia, called Begenny, 
Begenny Haven.  which lieth eastsoutheast in, you must give the east point of the Islands a birth off, because it is fowl, and lieth a good ways off: there lieth also a sunken rock on the Island side, which you must take heed of when you are come within the entry of the haven, you must go east and by north unto the road; which is right against a red cliff that lieth on the south side.  
The Skellockes and the Cape Dorsey lie northwest and southeast, Six leagues a sunder, betwixt them both goeth in also a great broad Sound, north-east in, wherein lie many Islands, havens and roads.  

C. Dorsey  C. Dorsey is an Island within, which men sail and ride under. For to go in there from the southwards, you must give the east side a birth, that is, the side of the main land which is soul, & run in alongst by the side of the Island, until you be come within, and anchor there.  

Bull, Cow Calf rocks.  Without the Cape Dorsy lie three great rocks, the outermost or the westermost is called the Bull, the middlemost is called the Cow, and the other the Calf, they are clean round about, so that men may sail there through between them, without fear of any danger, there is nothing that can hurt but men may see it.  
About six leagues eastsoutheast from C. Dorsey lieth the point Mizanhead, 
Mizanhead.  betwixt them both goeth in a great Bay or river deep into the land (with divers havens & roads) called the Bantry.  
A great league to the northwards off Mizanhead, lieth a point, 
Three Castles.  called the three Castlehead, upon it standeth three flat Towers, but you-can hardly see them except they be near the land, also a great league more to the northwards, lieth a small point, called Sheepshead. 
Sheehead.  Betwixt these two points goeth in a great broad Bay, called Dounams' Bay, there is nothing to do nor to fetch, but it is a fit place too save ships, and all over good anchor ground.  
From Sheepshead to beerhaven, 
Beerhaven.  the course is north and by west, or somewhat westerly about two great leagues, it goeth in between an Island on the east side, and the main land towards C. Dorsey on the west side, it is about a great musket shot Broad, the foresaid Island on the east side is called the Island of Beer-haven and is about two leagues long. For to fail in there you must keep the mid way, in the entry of the haven it is clean, without any fowl ground: after you are come in, there standeth on the larboard side a ruined castle, and a little further are two little rivers, 
Road in Beerhaven  close one by the other, between these 2, little rivers stand some Fisherhouses. Men may sail into the foresaid little rivers, they are deep enough, but commonly men do anchor before them, or by that fore said ruined castle, or else somewhat further in, it is all over good anchoring, and clean ground, except right against the foresaid little rivers, lie some rocks, about the middle of the channel, which at high water are under, and at low waterlye above water, these only must be shunned, but men may go on either side of them. Somewhat further in the Bay standeth another castle, called Oldcastle, from thence men may sail alongst to the northwards of the Island Beer-haven, and come out to the eastwards into Bantry. The Sound on the north side of the Island is large, broad clean, 13. 12, and ten fathom deep. The east point of the Island is a sharp point, and very fowl, there lieth of a ledge of rocks, where of some lie under water & some above water, at low water but the side of the main is clear & clean. In this entry lie also 2 great rocks high above water, but clean round about, men may run through between these rocks, or to the southwards, betwixt them and the foresaid ledg of rocks or also to the northwards alongst betwixt them and the main land, as well in coming in as in sailing out, there is no danger more than men may see.  
From Beerhaven to the north point of the Island Whiddy, 
The Whiddy  lieth the Bantry e.n.e. and north-east and by e. 6 or 7 leagues: over against Beer-haven in the midst in the farreway, it is deep 40, 36, and 30 fathom, within the Island, 15 and 16 fathom, but further in towards the Island Whiddy, it is again 20 & 25 fathom deep: men may sail round about the Island Whiddy, (which is about a league long) but to the northwards it is best.  
For to sail in about to the northwards, or to the eastwards, men may go in close by the north or east point, but a little within the point, lieth alittle ledge of rocks, a little musket shot off from the shore, which at high water lies under but at half ebb beginneth to come above water, that only is there to be shunned, being passed that, you may anchor all over. About that foresaid point lie two small Islands, by the greater men may sail alongst on both sides of it, either within it or without it, until you come before a Gentlemans-house which is white, upon the Island Whiddy, and anchor there against it in 3 or 4 or 5 fathom, so deep or so shallow as men will, according as men desire to ride near or far from the shore, it is there all over clean ground.  
He that will sail into the s. point of the Whiddy, 
For to sail in to the southwards of Whiddy.  had need be very well acquainted it is there to the southwards between the Whiddy and the main land, at most places fowl and stony. From the west side of the Whiddy, lie also some fowl ground & rocks, somewhat off the Island to seawards, some above, and some under water.  
To the southwards of the Whiddy upon the main land standeth a Friary or Abbey, 
The Abeby  called by the Irish the Abbey, right against it▪ is the common road, & it is very good ground in 4, 5 or 6 fathom, according as you shall ride fare or near to the shore, to the northwards lieth a little Island so low in the midst, that at a spring tied the sea floweth over, and devideth it in two.  
A little league to the eastwards of the Abbey lieth a little town upon a little river called Balgobben. at high water men may go up there with their boat, but at low water it falleth dry.  
A great league from the east point of the Whiddy, westnorthwest, lieth a haven called Longerf, 
Longerf  when you shall sail from the foresaid point towards it, you shall meet right in the fareway, about half ways over a great rock, which men may sail about on both sides, but it is best on the off-side is clean and clear, but on the innerside lieth some fowl ground. He that will sail through on the innerside, had need to be very well acquainted. The foresaid haven of Longerf lieth n. n. west: Even within it in the entrance on the starboard side, lieth some fowl ground, which at low water (at the Spring tides) may be seen dry, these must beshunned, or else it is there within all over good anchoring and good ground, there is no more danger, but men may see it.  
When a man is near the Island Whiddy, about the midst of the Bay, he cannot see the land without the Island Beerhaven on the west side of the Bay, because it falleth a way so alongst to the westwards.  
From Mizanhead unto C. Clear, the course is east and by south distant seven leagues. About three leagues within or to the eastwards of Mizanhead, northwest from C. Clear, lieth a haven called Croockhaven. 
Grooke-haven.  He that cometh from the east, and is bound in there, must run alongst by C. Clear, up about it to the northwards, so fare until het may see through into sea to the northwards of the Island of C. Clear, as through a hole, and set then his course westnorthwest, keeping that foresaid hole (to the northwards of C. Clear) open, than he shall fall right with Crookhaven, which lieth in w. s. west. And there he may anchor before the little town in three fathom, and two fathom and a half. It was wont heretofore to be deeper there, but it is spoiled most by casting of ballast, men may also anchor further out then before the town, there it is deeper, and all over clean ground.  
Two little leagues west and by south from C. Clear, 
Fastney-rock.  lieth a high steep rock laone in the sea▪ called Fastney, which showeth at first sight iike unto a sail, north 3, or 4, leagues, from this rock lieth a haven, called School-haven. 
School-haven.   
A little to the eastwards of the Island of Cape Clear lieth another Island, called Isle Sherk. 
Isle Sherk.  To the eastwards off it, betwixt that Island & the main land goeth in a haven called Baltemoore haven: It is somewhat narrow at the mouth of the haven, but within the mouth of the haven, but within the mouth of the haven it is large and broad, there may you anchor on both sides where you will, and lie land-lockt for all winds. On the west side within the haven standeth a Friary, close before it you may anchor in five and 6 fathom? in the midst of the haven, it is six and seven fathom deep. A little to the northwards of the foresaid Friary standeth a castle upon a point. In the mouth of the haven lieth a sunken rock, nearest to the east side, and within in the midst of the haven lieth a rock, which at high water lieth under, & at low water lieth above water, there is nothing else that can hurt. A little to the eastwards without the haven, lieth another rock six or 7 ships lengths from the shore.  

For to sail through within the Islands of C. Clear.  To the northwards of the Island of the Isle Skercke, men may go to the westwards through betwixt Isle Shercke, and the Island Spain, and come out again into sea by C. Clear, but it is to be done only with small shipping, and yet not without danger. Betwixt Isle Sherke and Spain, is at half flood not more than 12 or thirteen foot water. At divers other places betwixt these Islands, it is rocky and shoal, so that it is not good to go through within, except men be very well acquainted, and yet at high water and spring tides.  
A little league too the eastwards of Baltemoore lie the Stags, 
Staggs.  an English mile from the shore, they are five or six high steep rocks. When men come from the eastwards alongst by the shore, and get first sight of them, they are like unto some spirie tower's together, men may sail through betwixt them and the main land, it is there large and broad enough.  
North-east about 2 leagues from the foresaid Staggs, lieth Castle-haven, 
Castle-Haven.  without it on the east side lieth a little Island, you must leave it on starboard side in sailing in, and another little flat Island on the larboard side, that lieth so close to the land, that at low water men may go dry foot over from it to the main land. Whithin the haven standeth a little Chapel, when you will sail in there, you must run in right with it, close alongst by the foresaid little Island on the east side: When you are come in, thwart of the Chapel, you shall see a Castle on the west side, over against that Castle you may anchor in 12 fathom.  
From Castle-haven unto the Oldhead, the coast lieth most eastnortheast and w. s. west, but C. Clear and the Oldhead lie north-east and by east, and e. n. east distant 14 leagues.  
About half ways betwixt Castle-haven and the Oldhead lieth a high point, called by the Irish, Kedonetedo, 
Kedonetedo.  there by it on the west side is a good haven, called Clandore: 
Clandore.  For to sail in there, you must run in alongst close aboard by that foresaid high land on the east side; for to shun a rane of rocks that lieth on the w. side, and lieth off somewhat towards the east side, when you are come in, you may anchor before a Castle in 5, or 7 fathom.  
The Oldhead or C. de Velho, is a point that lieth out fare without the other land, the outermost south end of it is very high and steep, when you are come alongst the shore from the east or from the west, and see it first, it seemeth to be an Island, upon the top of it standeth a ruined castle with three Towers, whereof the middlemost is the highest. On both sides of this outlying point men may anchor so deep or shoal as they will.  
About two leagues north and by east from that point lieth the haven of Kinsale, 
Kinsale.  lying in northnortheast, you may sail in there, keeping the middle of the channel, there is no danger, neither without not in the harbours mouth, but one sunken rock close by the east point. When you come in from the Oldhead, or from the southwards, and you keep an old ruined castle (that standeth within the haven on the east side) even without the Innermost east point of the haven, than you shall not come near that rock to take any hurt of it. About a great half league to the eastwards or the haven's mouth, lie two great black rocks, the one somewhat further from the shore than the other. When you come from the eastwards, and you will go in close about the east point, and you keep the southermost (that is the greatest) right on the east point, than you shall go through betwixt the sunken rock and the point: But if you keep the northermost (or the smallest) a little without the foresaid point, so long until you have brought the foresaid old ruined Castle, without the innermost point, than you shall go alongst without it, and then in the midst of the channel alongst by the eastern shore. A little past that foresaid old ruined Castle, standeth a Castle on the west side upon a point, there lieth off a shoal, which must be shunned, & therefore you must keep close alongst by the easter shore, until you be gotten about the shoal of the Castle, & then westwards up unto the Kay of Kinsale, there you may anchor in eight or nine fathom, and lie landlockt for all winds. The town Kinsale lieth a little to the northwards in a bay, where it is oasie soft ground part where of falleth dry at low water.  
Four leagues to the eastwards of Kinsale, lieth the haven Corck, betwixt both about a league to the westwards of Corck, 
Corck.  you shall see (sailing alongst the coast) two steep hommockes like Towers in the land, not fare one from the other: these are notable marks for to know the coast. When you are thwart of the eastermost, you may see the haven's mouth of Corck, that lieth in n. northwest; within it is wide and broad, and goeth up into the land with a broad river. On the east side, somewhat within is a point, where lieth off a ledge of rocks, which must be shunned. There over against on the west side, somewhat fare in, lieth another point with an old ruined castle, there also lieth off a shoal, to the northwards of it, men go about to Corck. Within that Castle lieth a little tide haven in a sandy Bay. Within the haven lieth an Island, where men do sail round about, & at the south side there of may ride. It is in this Haven of Corck at low water, 7, 8 or ten fathom deep.  
A little without the east point standeth an old ruined Castle upon the low land, and somewhat further eastward, a square Tower in a valley. A league to the eastwards of the haven's mouth standeth a Tower upon a high point, close to the water side, with ten or twelve thatched houses by it More over, a league further east, by a smooth point, lieth a long rock grown about with green, upon the east side of that point standeth a flat tower, further, it is to the eastwards all low land, unto the point of Jochul.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
In all these foresaid Havens maketh high water an e. n.e. & w. s.w. Moon or a point later, according as they lie deep within the land.  
But a seaboard the coast in the ossing, a north-east and south west Moon.  
At the Mizanhead, C. Clear, and the coast to the eastwards, a w. south w. and e.n.e. moon maketh high water, within the Havens and indraughts, a point later, to wit, e. and. by n. & w. and by s. But in the channel a seaboard the land, a n.e. and s. w. moon.  
Without C. Clear by the land, the flood falleth away e. & the ebb w. but to the e. wards of C. Clear e.n.e. and w. s.w.  
On the south coast of Ireland an e.n.e. & w. s.w. Moon maketh high water, within the Havens a point later, to wit, an e. and by north, and w. & by south Moon: but in the offing a seaboard a south w. and north e. Moon.  
Betwixt C. Clear, along the Coast before Waterford into the point of Carnaroort, the flood falleth alongst the coast e. n. e. and the ebb w. s. w.   

Of the Depths.  
Betwixt C. Clear and the Dorseyes, men may see the land in 58 and 60 fathom.  
From C. Clear to the e. wards unto Waterford, men may see the land in 54 fathom. The most part of the south coast of Ireland, men may see it in 35 and 40 fathom. In 35 fathom you shall not be fare from the land. Therefore come no nearer Ireland by night then in 40 fathom.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Sleynshead unto the Bay of Galloway, southeast, 9 leagues.  
From the Bay of Galloway to Lupishead the n. point of Limbrick haven s. s. w. 11 or 12. leagues.  
From Lupishead to Smerrick s. w. 8 leagues.  
From Smerrick to the Blaskeys w. s. w. 4 leagues.  
From Sleynshead to Sinbrandonhill south and by west, 22 leagues.  
From the Bay of Galloway to the Blaskeyes, south w. 23 leagues.  
From the Sound of Blaskeyes unto the Skellocke, the course is south 6 leagues.  
From Dinglehaven unto the Skellockes, south w. and by south 7 or 8 leagues.  
From the Skellockes unto the Dorseys, s. e. 6 leagues.  
From the Dorseys to Mizanhead e. s. e. and s. e. & by e. 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Mizanhead to Sheepeshead north, 2 great leag.  
From Sheepeshead to Beerhaven, the couse is n. and by w. somewhat westerly, scarce 2 leagues  
From Mizanhead to Beerhaven n. and by w. 5 leagues.  
From Beerhaven to the Island Whiddy, the course is e. n. e. and n. e. and by e. 7 or 8 leagues.  
From the Dorseys to Silly s. e. and by e. 56 leagues.  
From the Dorseys to Cape de Finisterre is the course s. and by e. and south. 173 leagues.  
From Mizanhead to C. Clear e. and by south distant, 7 leagues.  
From C. Clear to Croockhaven n. w. 5 leagues.  
From C. Clear to C. Veelo or Oldhead e. n. e. and n. e. and by e. 14 leagues.  
From Cape Clear to the Landsend of England e. s. e. 53 leagues.  
From C. Clear to Silly s. e. and by e. 46 leagues.  
From C. Clear to C. de Finisterre south 173 leagues.  
From Oldhead, or C. de Velho, to the haven of Kinsale, is the course n. and by e. 2 leagues.  
From Oldhead, or C. de Velho to Corck e. north e. 5 or 6 leagues.  
From C. de Velho to the Lands end of England s. e. & s. e. and by e. 45 leagues.    

Heights.  

C. Clear lieth in 51 degrees, 12 minutes.  
Cape de Velho, or Oldhead lieth in 51 degrees, 28 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

The Islands, as also the main land by north and by south the Bay of Galloway, show, as you may see in these 5 following Figures, when as you are right before the Island of Aron, which lie before the Bay of Galloway.  
North being 8 leagues from you N. n. e. 10 leagues.  
These 4 following figures belong one to the other, as the marks do show.  
N. n. w. 6 leagues the main Land by n. Gallow. N. 3 leagues.  
Betwixt these two Islands, it is 20 fathom deep.  
The 3 Islands of Aron before Galloway.  
E. and e. and by n. 4 leagues E. and e. s. e.  
S. e. and by s. 7 leagues S. s. e. 8 leagues S. and by e. 9 leagues.  
This belongeth to the 3 figures, going before, the AA, BB, CC, one to the other.  
N. n. e. 4. leagues East 5 leagues East n. e. 6 leagues Being 8 leag. n.e. and by e. from you.  
Thus showeth the land on the Islands between Limbrick and Galloway, when as you come out of the sea.  
Being n. e. and by n. 4 leagues from you N. e. 4 leagues N. e. and by e. 5 leagues.  
When as the midst of the Islands of Aron (which lie before Galloway) is north e. 4 Dutch leagues from you, it showeth itself thus: and that southerly little Island showeth then low and flat.  
C. Kerry, or Sinbrandonhill.  
Blaskeyes.   

The land of C. Kerry, or Sinbrandonhill (by some called Devils hill) unto the Blaskeyes, lying n. e. and by e. 5 or 6 leagues showeth, as is Described out in these two figures, when the foresaid hill of Sinbrandon is e. s. e. from you three or four leagues.  
Islands to the northwards of the Blaskeyes  
A Channel  
Sound of Blaskeyes.  
The Blaskeyes.  
Blasques Blasques.  
S. south east being 2 leagues and a half from you.  
The Blasques being s. e. and by s. 3 leagues from you, sheweth thus.  
Outrock.  
Southeast 3 leagues from you.  
The highest rock of the Blasques, being two leagues e. and by south from you, sheweth thus.  
Northnorthwest  
The Blaskeyes Sound of Blaskeyes.  
The Blaskeyes, and the land to the eastwards of them, do show themselves thus, when you sail from the Skellocks towards them,  
An entrance All double ragged land The Skellockes.  
Thus show the Shellockes with the land to the eastwards, or to the northwards, of them, when you are somewhat to the northwards of them, and sail alongst by them.  
When you are by the Skellocks, than the Islands lying to the northwards and to the eastwards of them, show themselves thus.  
East and by north, 2 leagues Skellockes.  
E. s. e. 2 leagues and a half.  
The Skellockes, being east and by south from you 3 leagues, showeth thus.  
This is an entrance.  
These Islands lie to the southwards and to the eastwards of the Skellockes, the land from thence eastward towards the Dorseyes, is all high broken and very ragged land.  
This Island lieth betwixt the Skellockes, and the Dorseyes close by the land.  
Thus show the Dorseyes, with the Rocks, Bull, Kow, and Kalfe, which lie without them, they are to the southwards of you.  
This and the figure following belong at the AA one to the oath.  
When you are to the eastwards or to the southwards of Dorseyes, they show as is shown out in these 2 figures here before. The east end at B sheweth almost like Cape Clear, being east from you, but it is a higher land.  
The Dorseys Hilly and very ragged Land North-east and by east.  
These two figures belong one to the other at the A A.   

Mizanhead. A broad Channel, but within it is all broken Land. Eastnortheast C. Clear.  
When as Cape Clear is eastnortheast from you, and Mizanhead north-east and by east, then is the land unto the Dorseys in these forms, as is showed in these two figures here before.  
The Dorseys Mizanhead north-east and by east.  
When as Mizanhead is north-east and by east about two leagues from you, than showeth the land to the northwards of it towards the Dorseys. And then may you also see the Island of C. Clear east from you.  
Fastney C. Clear.  
The form of C. Clear with the rock Fastney.  
Rock a little to the eastwards of Baltemore  
This belongeth to the figure going before the AA, one to the other, being the land to the eastwards of Baltemore.  
Thus showeth C. Clear, when it is north from you 5 leagues, and there it is 58 fathom deep.  
C. Clear showeth thus, being north and by west from you.  
C. Clear Sharp hills within  
The Cape Clear, being n. w. 7 or 8 leagues off from you, sheweth thus. If you then bear n. you shall fall right with Oldhead, & when you come near the shore, you shall lose sight of the high land, & it shall seem to be all low land  
Land within Land within Land within  
This followeth the former figure, the eastermost hommockes at A are the high hills about jochull, which you may hardly see when C. Clear is n. w. from you 7 or 8 leagues off, they lie far within the land, and the clouds oftentimes hangover them.  
C. Clear Oldhead Point of Corck within the Island Hil within jochul.  
When you are before Oldhead two leagues, or two leagues and a half a seaboard the land, then showeth the land to the westwards unto C. Clear, and the land to the eastwards of Oldhead, in this form.  
When the point of Rosse is west and by north from you, it showeth thus.  
Thus showeth Oldhead when it is w. s. w. a half league from you, then may you see the Haven of Kinsale open.  
When Oldhead is west 2 leagues from you, it showeth in this form.  
The land a little to the eastwards of Kinsale showeth thus.  
The land to the eastwards of Corck towards jochull, showeth in this form.  
Old ruined houses.  
The Rock betwixt jochul and Corck.  
When you are to the eastwards of Corck, not far from the land, and that the harbours mouth doth begin to open, then showeth the land as it is described in these two figures, at the A, belonging one to the other, being near the land it seemeth to be high land, but a far off (when you can see the high inner land, within jochul over the cliff land) it seemeth to be but low.      

The second part THE THIRD BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN Is contained the Description of the Seacoasts of France, Gallissia, Portugal, and Spain, from Heyssant, to the straits of Gibraltar: and with all the Flemish and Canary Islands.  
Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famous Seamen, and lovers of Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


De Custen van HISPANIA, als Andaluzia, Portugal, Gallissien. Biscajen, en een gedeelt van Vranck: ryck, beginnen van hay: saint tot aen Larache.   

De Cust van Bretaigne van Heysandt tot aent Eylant Boelyn.    

The second part of the LIGHTNING COLUMN, OR SEA MIRROR. THE THIRD BOOK, Of the WESTERN NAVIGATION Containing The description of France, Biscay, Gallissia Portugal, and Algarve, from Heyssant to the straits of Gibraltar.  

The first Demonstration. Where in Are showed the coasts of France, from Ushant to the Island of Bel, Jsle or Boelin.  
THe Four and Ushant 
Ushant.  lie westsouthwest & eastnortheast distant two great leagues. Ushand showeth itself at sea at the south-end low, and at the north-end going up sloping, upon the midst of it standeth a little flat Tower, by which marks it is easy to be known.  
For to sail through within Ushant, the course from the Fourne to S. Matthews point is s. s. e. 4 leag. At the point of the Four lie two rows of little Rocks, and to the southwards of them alongst the Coast lie three other heaps of rocks, each of them about an English mile one from the other: run alongst within two Cables lengths by the foresaid rocks at the point, which is much nearer the east side, or the main land, than Ushant, for to shun the norther Haghels, 
Haghels.  which do lie betwixt Ushant and the foresaid rocks or Ovens, or else if you keep S. Matthewes Abbey in the low valley to the eastwards of Conoort, & sail so right with it, than you run through nearest the east side, and in the midst of the channel, betwixt the foul ground and the Rocks, until you come thwart of Blanck-bay, 
Blankbay.  or near Conquets-oort, there standeth a mill upon the high land alone, when it is east from you, than the souther Haghels' 
souther Hagels.  lie west and by north from you, and the norther Haghels' 
Norther Haghels.  northwest and by west: there is also a high flat piece of land, a little to the Abbey of S. Matthewes, the top if it being even and plain, like unto a long plain house, when that cometh even without the point Conquets-oort, and the foresaid mill be east and by south, and eastsoutheast from you, then lie the north Haghels' west & by south from you, so that when the foresaid mill is east thwart from you, then are also the Haghels' west thwart from you. When Halman 
Halman.  or Hayman hill (that is a high rock lying at the east end of Ushant) cometh over the northwest end of the northermost Mollens, by the French called Cheminees, then are you also thwart of the Haghels.  
He that must turn to windwards from the Fourne towards Conquer, or S. Matthews point, let him make use of these marks: In the point of Conquer haven, or Conquets oort, 
Conquets' oort.  are two valleys, the one is great, that is the westermost, and one little that is the eastermost, in manner as is here portrayed.  
S. Matthews Cloister Conquets oort.  
When you run over to the eastwards towards the land, and that the Abbey of Saint Matthewes cometh a Capstane bars length to the eastwards off the smallest valley, according as is showed in this figure, than it is time to cast about: and when you run over to the westwards towards Ushant, and that the foresaid Abbey off S. Matthewes cometh a little without the point off Conquer Haven, you must also cast about, for when the foresaid Abbey cometh two ships lengths without the foresaid point than are you close by the Haghels. The Norther and the Souther Haghels lie a bout a shot of a cast piece distant one from the other.  
Two or three Cables lengths thwar ttfrom the point off Conquer haven, or Conquets-oort to seawards lieth a sunckenrock, which with a spring tide cometh above water, called the Vintner, 
The Vintner.  by the French le Bell. For to avoid it coming from the northwards, or from the Fourne, & being come from the foresaid marks (of S. Matthews Abbey in the great valley of Conquets-oort) unto close by Conquets-oort, then run close about by it, alongst within a Cables length of the point, or keep the Abbey of S. Matthewes even without the point of Conquet-oort, and so close about it, within a cables length, as before is said, and then you shall leave the Vintner a Cables length or two on the starboard side of you, and can take no hurt of it.  
When the little Church upon the point off Conquets-oort is east from you, than is the Vintner west right thwart from you, or else when that the Souther-houses off Conquer, begin to come without, or to the point off Conquer, than you have also the Vintner upon you side, west and west and by south from you, a little shot off a cast piece.  
If you sail into Conquet-haven, 
Conquet-haven.  then run about the point within a cables length, as is before said, until you see the haven open, than you come against the Fenestiers, 
Fenestiers  which are rocks that lie off about a Cables length from the East land of Conquet-haven under water. For to avoid them, run alongst by the norther shore, until you come within the Hav●●. Betwixt the Fenestiers and the blank Moines 
Blank Moines.  (that are rocks by Saint Matthewes point) is a good Road under the Abbey of S. Matthewes, as well for them that are bound to the northwards as to the southwards. If you will go into this road coming from Conquets-oort, then run right with the blank Moines, until that the Abbey of Saint Matthewes be eastsoutheast from you, sail then towards it until you come before the Abbey, and anchor there in 6 or 7 fathom.  
About a league to the eastwards of S. Matthewes point, towards Breast, lieth a sunken rock, about hal●e a shot of a cast piece from the north shore. If you will sail into Brestwater, then go from S. Matthewes point away east and by south, and eastsoutheast, and keep the north-end of the Southermost Mollens, without S. Matthewes point, so long, until that the mill upon the north-land come to the northwards of the trees, than you sail alongst to the southwards of the foresaid rock, and so doing, you can take no hurt off it, but if you bring the south end of the Mollens near or to S. Matthewes point, you shall not fail to sail upon it.  
For to sail to the northwards of the foresaid Rock, you must run from S. Matthewes point alongst by the North-land, and keep the southermost Mollens' hidden behind the great Rock that lieth off from S. Matthews point, and sail then right with the west point of Bartrams bay, until that the foresaid mill standing upon the North-land, cometh to be northwest and by north from you, and the trees stand northnorthwest from you, then shall you be past the foresaid Rock, but to run alongst to the southwards of it, is best and broadest. For to sail forth alongst to Breast (being past the foresaid rock) you must run forth within two cables lengths alongst by the north shore. A little within the east point off Cordon, or Claesdownes, lieth a rane off Rocks, about the midst of the channel in the mouth of Brest-water, which at low water lie above water, and at high water are under water, called the Baginne, 
Baginne.  you may run alongst on both sides off it, but to the northwards of it, is best, when the south point of Brestwater cometh over the point off Crodan, then are you thwart of the foresaid Bagyne, which lieth about two cables lengths from the north shore, run alongst to the northwards of it: When the Breast cometh without the point, sail then so right to it, you must anchor there with an anchor to seawards in eight or nine fathom, and with a cable a shore fast on a tree: When you come within the Bagyne, you may edge up to the eastwards, or to the southwards before the river of Landerneau or Lefou, 
Lefou.  and anchor there under the south-land, in ten, twelve, or thirteen fathom. Before the little town old Croidan. Brest-watet, or the river of Landerneau, lieth in most eastnortheast, and it is Pilots water, he that is bound in there, may take a Pilot to bring him in where he desireth to be: It floweth there with an ordinary tide, three fathom up and down, a south-west and by west, and north-east and by east moon maketh there full sea.  
If you come to anchor within Breast, you must pay for anchoringe ten soubs, and for it you shall get a ticket off freedom. If it should happen that you should lose your ship upon Britain, you might there with challenge your goods, else they are unfree.  
Bartrams bay 
●artrams-●●y.  lieth about two leagues to the eastwards of S. Matthewes point, a little league past the foresaid sunken rock, there is good anchoring for a north, & north-east wind in 10 and 11 fathom.  
Over against Bartrams bay lieth Croidan 
Croidan.  or Claesdownes from S. Matthewes point, southeast distant about 3 leagues, it is a great bay. For to sail from S. Matthewes point to Croidan, you must keep the southermost Mullens even without the black Moines (that are the Rock without S. Matthewes point) and go away east and by south, and e. s.e. until you come before the bay, and may see open into it, than you shall see a Chapel, or little Church stand upon a chindle, run in right with it, anchor thereabouts, in 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10, fathom, there is the best road.  
The Mullens 
Mullens.  are the rocks which lie there to the southwards of Ushant, and to the westwards from Saint Mathews point. Betwixt them and Ushant lieth a channel north-east and south-west through, which is in different large and broad, and deep enough, there remaineth at low water 6, and 7, fathom water. He that cometh from the northwards, and cannot sail a weather of Ushant and the Mullens, by reason of the flood may run through here, or he that cometh out of the sea, and with northerly winds, cannot sail a weather off Ushant, may with a flood run through here, and so further his voyage, when men run through here, either in or out, and keep the middle of the channel betwixt both lands they can take no hurt.  
From S. Mathews point to the race of Fontenay, or the kaiser and Lavender, the course is south and by e. 6 leagues, betwixt them both lie divers, rocks where of men must take good heed, as the Hen with the Chickens, the Collier, the Falconers, Scheminckelborrowes and other more. The Hen 
Hen  with the Chickens, 
Chickens  and the middlemost Falconer or Foukenisse, lie from S. Mathewes point s. e. & by east distant a league & a half, but the Collier lieth from S. Mathewes point s. s.e. also a league and a half.  
The Falconers, 
Falconers  or Foukenessen lie from the west Point of Croidan about w. s.w. an English mile. The innermost or southermost Falconer 
The southermost Falconers  lieth from the northermost s. s.e. about a half league, or two shots off a cast piece, and from Croidan s. w. & by south, & is covered at high water. North n.e. a cables length from it, lieth another sunken Rock, which at low water may even be seen. To the westwards of the northermost Falconer lieth also a sunken rock which at low water may even be seen.  
The Hen 
The Hen  lieth from the Falconers w. s.w. about 2 cables lengths, or a shot off a cast piece, it is a round sharp rock, it is round about it deep and clean, in 6 and 7 fathom. The Chickens 
Chickens.  are two sharp little rocks, which at low water may even be seen, and lie about the shot off a Base northnorthwest from the Hen, and west from the northermost Falconer.  
The Scheminkel broughs 
Scheminkelboroughs.  lie to the southwards off the Falconers, men may run through betwixt them in ten fathom, to the point of Croidan, there is good road and anchor ground.  
If you will sail from S. Matthewes point to the Race of Fontenay, you must go away south and by east, and bring the mill off Fenestiers, which standeth upon the east point of Conquet-haven, over the point off Saint Matthewes, a little to the westwards off the Abbey, and keep them so standing so long as you can see them, and you shall not come to near the foresaid Rocks, to take any hurt off them. When as then you come to the kaiser and Keyserinne, first give the kaiser 
Keyser  a birth, because off some sunken Rocks which lie off from the East side of it under water. From the south-west side of the Lavender runneth off 
Lavender Race off  a soul ledge of rocks, called the Calf, there the tide falleth very strong over it, with very great rippeling. This Channel off the Race of Fontenay, 
Fonteney  lieth through betwixt the kaiser and Lavender s. s.w. & n. n.east He that will sail through here, must be very careful to cast his tides well, for it runneth most thwart over this Race, so that with a south-west wind, and an outfall or ebb, and also with calms, it is very dangerous to come into this Race.  
A little to the southwards of the kaiser, lieth the east end of the Seams, 
Seams.  and lie from thence at least three or four leagues w.n.w. into sea. A great league northwest from the west point off the Seams, lieth a sunken ●ock, where of men must take heed.  
And westsouthwest about two leagues from the Seams, lieth a row of rocks, like a bank, whereupon it is not deeper than seven fathom, but betwixt the rocks & the Seams, it is 50 fathom deep.  
Betwixt the Seams and Ushant the broad sound 
Broad-sound.  lieth in e.n.e. to S. Matthewes point, and from S. Matthewes point w. s.w. 5 leagues into sea.  
To the eastwards of Fontenay, or the Lavender, lieth the Frieze Bay, 
Friese bay  there men may anchor for a southeast & east wind, in good anchor ground.  
To the eastwards of the Frieze Bay, lieth Boldavids' Bay 
Boldavids' Bay.  a broad deep sound, lying into the land east north-east. At the e. side of that haven lie 2 little Islands or Rocks, where men may anchor round about them, and lie sheltered for all winds.  
From the Race of Fontenay to the Pens, the course is southeast somewhat easterly about 10 or 11 leagues, betwixt them both lieth Oldyarne, 
Oldyarne  a good Haven, about 7 leagues east southeast from Fontenay. Thwart before the entry of it lieth a bank where men may run about it on both sides in 6 fathom.  
The south point of this Haven is flat, therefore run in alongst by the north point, there is at low water not less than 3 fathom depth. From Oldyarne to the Pens it is s. e. and by south.  
If you will anchor before Port Kapstand, you must anchor in 12 or 13 fathom, before the village that standeth upon the high land, about half ways betwixt the point of the Race, and the great sand-bay of Oldyarn, where the little sharp Tower doth stand, the point of the Race shall then lie from you about northnorthwest, and you shall then lie a great half league from the land, further off from the shore it is rocky and foul ground, as some say. There have some nevertheless come to anchor there by night in 3 or 4 leagues from the shore in 25 fathom, but have not received any hurt neither of cables nor anchors.  
The west end of the Seams, and the Pens, lie southeast and by east, and northwest and by west, distant about 13 leagues.  
The knowledge of the land betwixt Fontenay and Oldyarne, are two round hills, which men do call the sheets, 
Sheet.  or Slaeplakens, to the westwards of them stand two Mills. It is a very ragged point, and by these foresaid marks very good to be known. Men may see them without the Seams in 55 fathom.  
From Oldyarne to the Pens lieth the coast southeast and by south 5 leagues.  
The Pens 
The Pens  are very easy to be known, for him that hath seen them once: upon the southeast end standeth a thick flat Tower; a little to the westwards of it standeth a sharp tower, and somewhat more to the east wards against the high land, standeth a village apprearing like a castle, upon the east side there of standeth a flat tower, and there close to the land lie 2 great rocks.  
The pens lie off from the main land, southeast two leagues into the sea. For to sail in there, you must come in there from the eastwards, and run alongst by the strand of the main land, leaving all the rocks on the larboard side, until that you come to a great rock, which you must leave on the starboard side, and run about to the southwards of it (being past it, edge within it up towards the Northwest, and you may anchor there a little within, in three fathom at low water, lying there, you can see no sea, but at high water the sea cometh very much tumbling in through the Rocks: You may go away from thence at high water southeast through the Rocks into sea, but you must take very good heed, because it is there full of Rocks where of some are above water, and some under water. Without the foresaid great Rock in the coming in of this haven, it is at least ten fathom deep, so that for need men might well save a great ship there.  
From the Pens to the Glannons 
Glanons.  or Glenant, 
Glenant.  the course is e. s.e. with that course you shall run alongst to the southwards of them. Within the Glanons lieth a Haven, called Bindeth, 
Bindet.  at the east point of that Haven it is full of rocks. For to sail in there, you must take heed unto these marks: there stand two Mills fare within the land, bring the eastermost of the 2 over a little castle that standeth upon a point within the Haven, and run in, keeping them so n. & n. e. and by east in, and then you cannot take hurt on neither of both shores, and being come within the haven, anchor before the Town.  
A league south-west from Gloylend or Glenant, by the Dutchmen, called the easter-Penmarkes, lieth a great Rock under water, but is good to be espied, in regard the sea always breaketh upon it; as well within as without this Rock it is 40 fathom deep.  
When you come of from the Pens, with an e. s.e. course, you shall run alongst fare enough to the southwards of it. About 2 leagues the eastwards of Glenant, lie the Islands of Muttons, 
Moutons-Jslands.  by the French called Isles aux Moutons, you may sail through betwixt them and the main land, unto Groy or Blavet, also you may anchor within them in 10 or 12 fathom, betwixt the land and the foresaid Islands, which are clean upon the north side.  
Betwixt the Island Mutton and Glenant lieth a rock, for to avoid it (for them which will sail through there betwixt them) they must leave one third part of the channel towards Glenant, and the other two third parts towards Mutton, and then they may boldly run through there without fear.  
From Mutton to the Island Groy 
Groy.  the course is east and by south, upon the outer side of Groy stand 3 or 4 mills, the east end of it goeth steep down, and the west end sloping and flat down, thereby it is good to be known. Under Groy is good anchoring for a s. w. wind in six or seven fathom: Under the n.e. point also is a good road for a w. s.w. & n.w. wind, there is very good anchor-ground. At the s. w. end runneth off a foul ledge, where of men must take good heed.  
Within the Island Groy lieth the Haven of Blavet, 
Blavet.  which lieth in about northwest in 4 and 5 fathom. Upon the west side of this haven standeth a high sharp Tower called Quinperly, from the east point runneth off a great ledge of rocks, called the Baers, within it on the east side of the entry of the Haven lie two sunken Rocks, also on the west side a Rock with a hole, which at half ebb is uncovered, whereof men must take very good heed in the coming in; Men run in alongst by the west land, for to eschew the foresaid sunken rock & foul grounds. The marks for to sail in there are these, there lieth a little Island within in the midst of the haven, which you may see when you are without the Haven. To the eastwards of that little Island upon the main land, standeth an Abbey; bring that Abbey right to the east point of the haven, which lieth within the Baers, and sail in with it, until you come thwart of the east point within the Baers, and run in about by it: being within it, there it is wide and broad, you may anchor there before the foresaid little Island in 5 or 6 fathom, there it is at low water 3 or 4 fathom deep, or else men commonly run in about, by the point, until they come in the oaze.  
From the Pens unto Bell-Isle, the course is eastsoutheast twenty leagues, but from Groy to Bell-Isle it is souhsoutheast five leagues. Bell-Isle hath at the northwest end a steep point, lying out with a great saddle, thereabouts stand also some little houses, and the end goeth very steep down.  
When as Bell-Isle lieth n.n.e. from you, 
Road to know Bell-Isle.  the west end showeth itself in three parts: the westermost where of is a great rock, which floweth at a very high water almost under at the east end there divideth itself off also a great rock: by these foresaid marks it is indifferent well to be known, men may see Bell-Isle out of the sea in 55 fathom. At the s. side lie off many rocks & little Islands.  
If you will seek a road under Bell-Jsle, 
Road un●●r Bell-●●le.  than you must give the Northwest end a good birth, off from it lieth a sunken rock under water, a good ways from the land: being come within it, sail then within two Cables lengths alongst by the land, within a Base shot about by the North point, until you come before the village with the little sharp Tower, called Paul's, there standeth a castle upon the point to the westwards of the foresaid little Tower, anchor within that point in nine or ten fathom, there you shall lie landlockt for a south, south-west and northwest wind. If it blow more northerly, you must shift, and run before the east end (which is about half a league broad) and anchor there in ten or eleven fathom. This Island lieth about southeast and northwest according as the wind bloweth. men do shift there from one road to another, it is there every where good riding.  
Within the Island Bell-Jsle, to wit, betwixt Bell-Isle, and the main land lie many little Islands, where at divers places men may sail through to the Rivers of Vannes, or Morbeam, Roche, Barnard, & the river of Nants, called the Lo●re. Of these Islands are three the principal, the eastermost is called the Cardinal, 
●●●●nal  the east point where of, ●nd the e. point of Bell-Isle lie one from the ●●he● direct east and by north, and w. and by south about 4 leagues. The middlemost is called by some also the Cardinal, or else together with the eastermost the Cardinals. This hath a good Haven on the north side, going in by a great Rock. 
sandbank  From the n.w. point of the northermost, runneth a sandy strand unto the main land, against the point betwixt Blavet & Morbeam, so that men cannot sail there betwixt that and the main, but at high water it is most covered, and at low water it lieth most dry, at low water men may go over there on foot from the Island to the main land.  
He that cometh from the west, and is bound to Morbeam, Roche Barnard, or other places thereabout, must run to the southwards of it, if the will not sail about to the southwards of Bell-Isle, he may sail through betwixt the northermost and the middlemost Island, and also he may sail through betwixt Bell-Isle and the foresaid Islands, about to the eastwards of the Cardinal. The channel there betwixt them both, is about a league broad and clean, it lieth through e. s.e. and by east, men may run alongst by the Cardinals either by night or by day, in 8, 9, and 10 fathom, all clean sandy ground.  
For to sail through betwixt the westermost, which is fast at the north end with the strand to the main land, and the middlemost Island, the course is from the n.w. e d of Bell-Isle e.n.e. A little from the east end of the foresaid westermost Island, lieth a great round rock, w●ich you must leave on the larboard side, & run alongst by it, within two or three Cables lengths, and then you shall leave on the starboard side to seawards of you a g eat many rocks, some above & some under water, which lie towards the other Islands, which you must give a greater birth to, then to the foresaid great rock. From this foresaid channel to the river of Morbeam, or S. Jolms, the course is n.e. or n.e. and by e. or else if you run about to the eastwards of the Cardinal, and are bound to Morbeam, then go away from the east point of the Cardinal first n.w. and n.n.w. and you shall have then in that fareway 8, & 9, fathom depth, go then by little and little more northerly right with the point, which lieth to the westwards of S. Jolms, there runneth off the said point of S. Jolms, a ledge or riffe of rocks almost a half league into the sea, which you must give the west point a birth, to and run in alongst by the east shore, which is flat, and lieth from the Tower of S. Jolm to the River of Vannes n. w. & s. e. but you must be sure to reckon your tide well in this Channel, for it runneth in and out the River of Vannes so strong that you cannot sail in with an ebb, although it blow a storm, likewise doth it to the contrary with the flood, therefore you must sail in there with a still water. At the middle point where the river doth divide itself in two (whereof the one runneth to Vannes, & the other, to Auray) lie many rocks, the most part under water, which you leave on the starboard side when you are bound to Morbeam or Auray, and on the larboard side when you are bound to Vannes when you are come from so far within, that the Tower of Morbeam is w. from you anchor there in the middlest of the haven, in 9 fathom, and then shall Auray the innermost little Tower lie n.n.w. from you, & the other little Tower north and by e. but the point of Mayland e. s.e. The west shore thwart of it is very steep, oasie and soft, you can take no hurt of it, although you sailed right against it.  
The east point of the Cardinal, and the entering off the Haven of Morbeam lie northnorthwest and s. s.e. one from the other.  

Of the Tides and Courses of the streams.  
Without Ushant a westsouthwest and eastnortheast moon, and within the Trade a south-west & by west moon maketh full sea.  
At S. Matthewes point, a south-west and north-east Moon maketh highest water.  
In the broad Sound, betwixt Ushant and the Seams a w. s.w. and e.n.e. moon maketh the highest water: The flood falleth very strong upon Ushant, and to the southwards of it through the Mullens. Thwart over the Trade, towards the Backovens. Likewise in through the Broad Sound unto Breast. Also alongst by S. Mathews point towards the Fourne, or Backovens, with great rippeling. He that cometh sailing about Ushant, must reckon thereupon.  
In the Race of Fontenay a south-west and by south, and north-east and by north moon maketh full sea. The flood falleth very strong through betwixt the kaiser, somewhat thwart over towards the Lavender, with very great rippeling over the Calf, (that is the ledge of Rocks, which lieth off from the Lavender) & from thence forth north, and north and by west inwards to S. Mathews point: With calms men must take very good heed not to be miscarried away with the current. With stormy weather out of the north or south, it is not without danger to come in this channel, especially with an ebb or out-fall.  
On these coasts of Britain, and the Islands there abouts, a south-west and n.e. moon maketh the highest water: but within the havens, rivers, indraughts, & bays, a s. w. and by w. and n.e. and by e. Moon, or a point later, according as the havens or rivers do lie deep in the land. Men do not reckon there any setting or running of the streams, for the flood cometh (through the swelling of the great Ocean) right against the coasts, and so runneth only into the havens, the Ebb contrariwise goeth thwart from the shore to seawards, when it falleth so that men cannot perceive any course off streams except it be a little through, or about some points off Islands.  
On these lands, as on all the coast off Britain, a n. e. and south-west moon maketh high water, and within the havens, rivers and in-draughts, a point or two later according as they lie far within the land.  
On the Coasts and Islands a s. w. and north-east moon maketh high water, within the Havens & Rivers a point or two later, according as they lie fare within the land.   

Of the Depths about these places, and in what. depths men may see the land.  
The Backovens, or the land of the Four men may see in 50 fathom.  
Ushant being about s. from you, you may see in 50 fathom.  
Southwest from Ushant 5 or 6 leagues off it is deep 75 fathom, and then you may see the land from the poop.  
In the Broad Sound it is 45 fathom.  
A little without the Seams, about a league, it is deep 50 fathom.  
Men may see the Seams and the Sheets, or Slaeplakens in 60 or 65 fathom.  
Betwixt Ushant and the Seams in the fareway it is deep 55 fathom.  
Thwart of the Pens and the Glanons' men may see the land in 55 and 60 fathom.  
Bell-Isle men may see from below in 55, but under the top in 60 fathom.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From the Fourne to S. Matthewes point s. s.e. and s. e. and by south 4 or 5 leagues.  
From S. Matthewes point to Croyden, or Claesdowne e. southeast 3 leagues.  
From S. Matthewes point to the Race of Fontenay, or the kaiser, south and by east 6 leagues.  
From Ushant to Portland north-east 53 leagues.  
From Ushant to the Steart north-east and by north 39 or 40 leagues.  
From Ushant to the Lizart north 29 leagues.  
From Ushant to Silly northwest and by north and n.n.w. 34 leagues.  
From Ushant to Cape Clear in Ireland northwest 78 leagues.  
From Ushant to the Island of S. Michael's, s. w. and by w. 360 leagues.  
From Ushant to the Cape Finisterre southsouthwest westerly 121 leagues.  
From Ushant to Cisarga southsouthwest 110 leagues.  
From Ushant to Cape Prior s. s.w. 105 leagues.  
From Ushant to C. de Pinas south 93 leagues.  
From Ushant to Laredo s. s.e. 104 leagues.  
When men sail away s. and by east from Ushant, than they run a little without the Seams,  
From the Race of Fontenay to the Pens southeast, somewhat easterly 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Fontenay to Oldyarne e. s.e. 7 leagues.  
From Oldyarne to the Pens southeast and by south, five leagues.  
From the west end of the Seams to the Pens e. s.e. & by east 13 leagues.  
From the Seams to the Band or Craghe of Oleron s. e. and by east 68 leagues.  
From the Seams to the Bayon in France southeast somewhat southerley 102 leagues.  
From the Seams to S. Sebastian's southeast and by south 102 leagues.  
From the Seams to Bilbaw southsoutheast, easterly 96 leagues.  
From the Seams to Saint Andero southsoutheast, 92 leagues.  
From the Seams to Cape de Pinas, or Tores, south 81 leagues.  
From the Seams to Ribadeus s. & by west, 89. leagues.  
From the Seams to Cape de Ortegall southsouthwest southerly, 84 leagues.  
From the Seams to C. Finisterre south-west & by south, southerly 112 leagues.  
From the Seams to Silly, Northnorthwest, five and forty leagues.  
From the west Pens, to the east Pens or Glannons, eastsoutheast 6 leagues.  
From Glannons or Gloyland to Groy, east and west, nine or 10 leagues.  
From the east end off Groy to the west end of Bell-Isle, the course is southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Glannons, or Gloyland, to Bell-Isle, s. e. and by e. somewhat easterly 13 or 14 leagues.  
From the northwest end of Bell-Isle to the southeast end, the course is southeast and by east 5 leagues.  
From the West Pens, to Bell-Isle eastsoutheast 21 leagues.  
From the east end of Bell-Isle to the east end off the Cardinal east and by north 4 leagues.  
From the east point off the Cardinal, to the entering off Morbeam n.n.w. 4 leagues.  
From the west Pens to Viverus southsouthwest 84 leagues.  
From the west Pens to Sysarga south-west and by south 102 leagues.  
From Groy to Viverus, south-west and by s. 90 leagues.  
From Groy to Cape de Finisterre, s. w. 123 leagues.    

Heights.  

Ushant lieth in 48 degr. 30 min.  
The Seams lie in 47 degr. 58 min.  
The Island Bell-Isle lieth in 47 degr. 5 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

When Ushant is south & by west from you 4 leagues, it showeth itself in this form.  
Ushant, being s. and by e. from you 4 leag. showeth itself thus.  
Thus showeth Ushant, being s. e. from you 4 leag.  
Ushant, being south and by east from you 3 leagues, showeth itself thus.  
Ushant, being east from you 2 or 3 leagues showeth itself thus.  
Fontenay Oldyarne The Pens.  
Thus showeth the Sheets, or Slaeplakens, with the Pens, as you sail alongst by them, and that they are about 4 leagues thwart from you.  
Ushant, being east and by south, and e. s.e. 3 or 4 leagues from you, showeth itself in this form.  
Thus showeth Ushant, when it is east and by south from you four or 5 leagues.  
When Ushant is 4 leagues east from you, it ariseth in this form.  
Ushant being e. n. e. and by e. from you 5 leagues ariseth thus.  
Ushant, being e. n. e. from you 2 or 3 leagues, showeth itself thus.  
Ushant being e. n. e. and by e. from you, so fare as you may even see it from below, ariseth in this form.  
When Ushant is northnortheast from you, it showeth thus.  
Ushant being n. e. & by east 3 or 4 leagues from you, showeth itself, as is here demonstrated.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt the Pens and the Glannons, when it is n. e. and by e. 5 or 6 leagues from you. This hill is very easy to be known, it overtoppeth in height all the land thereabouts. The Pens are then n. n. west from you 4 or 5 leagues.  
Thus showeth the land of Glannons, when you sail alongst by it.  
The land to the eastwards of Gloyland or Glannons showeth thus, when you sail alongst by it.  
Groy, being e. n. e. 5 leagues from you, showeth itself in this form  
Groy, being north e. from you showeth itself in this form.  
Thus showeth the w. point of Groy, when it is three or four leagues north-east from you.  
Thus ariseth Bell-Isle, when the n. w. end is east from you 4 leagues.  
When Bell-Isle is north-east from you 4 leagues, it showeth thus.  
When Groy is northnortheast from you 4 leagues, it showeth thus.  
When the north w. point of Bell-Isle is east and by north from you 4 leagues, and the south e. point is east and by south, and east south e. then is showeth thus: When as you sail towards it, and you come near the land, than the pieces which lie off from the n. w. end, at last come to be fast unto Bell-Isle.   

De Custen van POICTOU, XANTOIGNE En een gedeelt van Bretaigne van Boelyn tot aen de Rivier van Bourdeaux.     

The second Demonstration. Where in is. Contained the Description of the Island of Boelin to the River of Bourdeaux.  
FRom the east point of the Cardinal to the River of Roche Barnard, the course right north-east: there lieth a little Island about half ways betwixt the Cardinal and the foresaid river ot rather nearer the Cardinal than the River (for when men are by the River, they can but even see the foresaid little Island) men run with the foresaid course of north-east close alongst to the westwards, of that little Island, and shall fall a little to the northwards of the river, run then within a Cables length alongst by the shore unto it, until that the river do open itself, and then sail in amids the channel, & give the rocks a birth that lie at the easter shore. Being come within the rocks, you may anchor there, or else sail on against the shore on the starboard side, & so may save ship and goods without anchor or cable, if there should be such need. At low water with an ordinary tide, there is about eleven, and with a spring nine foot water; with an ordinary tide it floweth there about a fathom, but with spring 2 fathom up and down: the entering of the river lieth in east & by south. A little to the eastwards of the rivers mouth, lieth a great rock which at high water is covered.  
He that cometh from the River of Nantes, and is bound to Roche Barnard, & is not well acquainted there betwixt both, let him run so fare to seawards of the Cardinal (when he is to the westwards of the Four) until that he run about a seaboard of that foresaid little Island (lying half ways betwixt the Cardinal & the River of Roche Barnard) then goeth he surely clear of all the foul ground and other dangers, men may sail close alongst by it to the westwards, but to the eastwards, of it lie many Rocks and shoals.  
He that will sail alongst to the eastwards or to the northwards of it, must leave about 2 third parts of the water to the Island, and one third part towards the land, & so run through betwixt them, but must look out well.  
Betwixt the rivers of Roche Bernard and Nantes, lieth Olddownes, Croisill, or Croswyck, and Poelgem. Croswyck 
Croswyck  hath two points, within the northwest Point lieth the great village of Croswyck, which hath a thick tower, & there is a great in draught like a haven, where men may go to anchor in five, six or seven fathom: to the westwards of it standeth also a flat Church upon the high land. The land of Olddownes 
Olddownes.  lieth a little to the northwards of the Church. Poelgem 
Poelgem.  is a village to the eastwards of Croswyck, with a high sharp Tower.  
About two leagues from the land south-west and by south from Croswyck, and west and by southsoutherly from the e. point of Poelgem, lieth a great bank, called the Four, 
The Four  which at some places falleth dry at low water, and lieth from BellIsle near about east & lieth the longest way south-west and north-east.  
If you will sail from Bell-Isle to the river of Nantes, 
For to sail into the River of Nantes.  then go away from the east end of the Cardinal, or from the eastermost rocks that lie of from the Cardinal, directly e.n.e. towards the west point of Croswyck, for to sail a weather of the foresaid Four, so long until it begin to shoal, and that the sharp tower of Poelgem cometh against the highest of the east point of Croswyck, than you run alongst to the northwards of the foresaid bank, go then e. s.e. or according as the wind is east & by south, & e. s.e. unto the Rock with the hole, called Pierre-perce, 
Pierre-Perce.  but so that you come not very near (at low water) the land somewhat to the westwards of Poelgem, for it is not clean alongst by it. Betwixt the Four and the point of Croswyck it is in the fareway 8, 9, and 10 fathom deep.  
From the point of Poelgem eastwards lie some little Islands and Rocks, which are very foul, come not very near them, nor the shore thereabouts. If it should happen that you should turn to windwards, for at low water there falleth many of the rocks dry, when you come near the rock with the hole) then run alongst to the northwards of it, and run in very close by it, leaving it on the starboard side of you for to avoid the foul grounds, which lie off from the point of Poelgem towards this rock. Close alongst by this rock it is four fathom deep. Being past this Rock with the hole, then run all alongst by the north shore, unto S. Nazare 
S. Nazare  in three or four fathom at low water, but you must take heed of a rocky point, somewhat to the westwards of S. Nazare, the marks thereof are these: There standeth a mill upon the high land, somewhat fare within the land, when that cometh over a countryman's house, which standeth below by the river, then are you thwart of the rocks, being past them, keep yet the north shore, and run alongst by it, until you come within the point of S. Nazare, and anchor there in 6 or 7 fathom. In the midst of the river betwixt the foresaid rocks with the hole, and S. Nazare, lieth a row of Rocks, called Les Porceaux, 
Les Porceaux.  these come at half tide above water: Because of them, & also more other shoals, lying in the river, you must run all alongst by the north shore I as is before said.  
Somewhat within S. Nazare upon the north-land standeth a sharp Tower when that cometh without the south land, than you cannot take hurt of the foresand rocks, run alongst to the northwards of them, a little to the eastwards of them lieth another shoal of Rocks, where men may run about the eastwards of it with great ships, it is there very shoal water alongst to the point; being within the point, men may anchor, as is said, in 6 or 7 fathom. To the eastwards of Saint Nazare lie two other villages, and there betwixt the Villages it is very shoal, and stony ground, there men must borrow over the souther shore, but when you are half ways to the eastermost Village than you may well sail right on with the point of the Village, until you be passed it, but against that eastermost Village on the s. side, upon the point, lieth a bank, called Pynbut 
Pynbut.  which, lieth at least half ways over in the River, but men may run through betwixt the point and this bank in 5 or 6 fathom, this is the road for ships that are bound out to sea.  
A league further in, in the midst of the river lie two stony banks in the fareway. At Pelerin 
Pelerin.  is the lading place, 2 leagues from Nantes, where the good are brought off with Lighters from the ships, but from S. Nazare to Nantes, or Pelerin, it is Pilots water, which men do commonly take in, by the above named sharp Tower, called S. Nazare, 
S. Nazare  where men (when they are within it) may anchor in 10, or 12 fathom, and stay for a Pilot.  
For to run into sea from S. Nazaro, alongst to the south wards of the rock with the hole, you must run first alongst by the north shore, as is before said, until that you come without the second point of the River, edge then off from the north land to the midst of the River; and sail a good ways about to the southwards of Pierre-perce, when as you can see the Rock (which lieth to the northwards of Pierre-perce) without the point, there it is deep 4 fathom & a half, and when as Pierre-Perce is n. n.west, and north and by west from you, than you come thwart of the Rock, and there you find deeper water, to wit, 5, 6 and at least 7 fathom, but when you come in the fareway of Pickeliers, than you get 10 or 12 fathom water.  

Banks before the Loiret.  Before the River of Nantes lie many banks, but at half flood men go over them, the south point of the river of Nantes lieth from the North point Northnorthwest and southsoutheast 4 leagues asunder, to the southwards of it, the land lieth in with a great indraught, and there men do run into the Bay. These uneven banks in the river of Nantes, are very unlike, sometimes men sound in 15 fathom, and presently afterwards but 7 or 8 fathom.  
But to sail from Bell-Isle to the bay or Armentiers 
Armentiers.  you must go e. s.e. until that you see the Abbey of Armentiers to the eastwards of the trees, which stand within the land over the same Abbey, then go on e. and by n. so long until that the Abbey come within the castle of Armentiers, then are you within the Monks leg. Go then again e. s.e. until that you be within the rock of Pierremen, 
Pierremen.  you may go about it on both sides, and when that you can see the Grave open, than you may anchor in 7, or 8, fathom, and row a shore to fetch a Pilot, it is Pilots water. From Bell-Isle to Armentiers, the course is eastsoutheast about 12 or 13 leagues asunder.  
From Armentiers to Use, or Heys, it is south and by east 7 leagues, and from Bell-Isle to Use or Heys, southeast 16, leagues. The Island of Pickeliers 
Pickeliers  lieth right before the point of Armentiers. Betwixt Armentiers or Pickeliers and Use, it is an uneven fareway, with many shoals and banks from 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathom Upon Use 
Heys or Use.  standeth a sharp tower and some little houses or mills, whereby it is very easy to be known. It is in the fareway betwixt Use and Bell-Isle 35, and 40 fathom, but when men are within the fareway, it is 25 fathom deep.  
Under Use it is not very good riding, the sea cometh always so rolling in, as if the water came through under the Island, at the northend it is shoal water, the road is, when the Church steeples is south-west from you, in 8, or 9, fathom; but men lie there not sheltered but only for a south west and w. s.w. wind, and it doth ripple there always very much.  
From Use to the Killiats, or to the Island of Saint Martens, the courses is eastsoutheast twelve or thirteen leagues. Betwixt both lieth the Baerges of Olone about half a league off from the land of Poictou, and east and by south seven leagues from Use in the right fareway, and in regard that it is nothing but Rocks and stones, therefore it is not good to come near them in dark weather, men may sail round about them, and at low water they are uncovered. If you will sail from Use, unto the Killiaets, or unto the tail of Aise, through within the Barges, then sail on first east, and being within the Baerges of Olone, sail to the land of Poicton, which lieth from Olone to Saint Martens Island eastsoutheast, and from Olone to the Pickelliers northwest.  
From Olone to the Killiaets the coast lieth most eas●southeast four or five leagues. For to sail into the Killiaets, 
For to sail into the Killiats:  which is in alongst to the northwards of the Island of S. Marten, in betwixt the foresaid Island and the main land of Poictou, you must go in somewhat more northerly than the middle of the channel, or leave two third parts of the channel towards S. Martens Island, & one third part towards the main land. Alongst by the Island of S. Martens it is uneven, and somewhat full of banks; come not too near also the main land, for there lie off also some banks, but you may borrow of them by your lead. Go in alongst, as before is said, 
Marks of the bank before S. Martens.  until that the Church of S. Martin be southsouthwest from you, than you shall be past the bank which lieth north from S. Martens, and lieth off from the shore somewhat to the westwards of Saint Martens, there is, a hard steep stony bank, which shoaleth up suddenly. For to avoid it when as you must turn too and again with an easterly, or a north-east wind, you must not bring the little Tower of Hars in the Village of Loy, but when the little Tower of Hars cometh to the first, or northermost house of Loy, than you must cast about, for than you come against the bank, where remaineth at low water about a fathom depth, and at high water about four fathom. When the foresaid little Tower of Hars cometh against a mill which standeth at the south end of Loy, then are you within the Bank, to wit, betwixt the Bank and S. Martens. When S. Martens cometh to be s. w. and by south, and s. s.w. from you, than you may boldly sail over the end of the bank towards S. Martens, you shall find there at low water and spring tied at least 3 fathom or sixteen or seventeen foot, also one cast or 2 but 12 foot then it is all soft ground, as also before S. Martens, but the banks are hard, & with spring tides there remaineth little water upon them. Before S. martin's you may anchor in 4, 5, or 6 fathom.  
For to anchor before S. Martin's, 
For to anchor before Saint Martens.  you must anchor so, that you may see open into the haven, and that the point of the Abbey, and the Boss do stand the length of two capsta nebars one from the other, there is with spring tides at low water three fathom and a half, but at high water six fathom and a half deep.  
When you sail into the Killiats, as before is said, it is 12, 11, and 10 fathom deep, but being come so fare that the Tower of S. Martin's beginneth to stand s. w. from you, there it will be by little and little shoaler, and then you may well edge towards the Island in five & four fathom, it shoaleth then suddenly up, and will be from ten, quickly five, and four fathom.  
If you will go over the bank that lieth off from the Abbey with a ship that draweth much water, than you must stay so long that it be half flood, for at low water there remaineth no more upon it then three fathom, or a foot or two more: when it is somewhat flowed, than you may well go over with a great ship. When the little tower of Hussou cometh to the north end of the Island Urck, or Tivalenes, then are you upon the shoalest of the bank, but when the little. Tower cometh over the south end of that little Island, than it beginneth to deepen again.  
The marks for to keep the deepest water, when you run over the bank are these keep the great Tower of Rochel a handspikes length to the southward of the wood of trees, which standeth upon the northermost high land, and run so over the bank, it is there all soft ground.  
If you will anchor before the Abbey within the bank, then run in 6 or 7 fathom and anchor there.  
But if you will not anchor under S. Martens, but will sail forth towards  Island, then bring that foresaid little tower of Lussou over the little house that standeth upon the little Island Urck, & keep it so standing, & then you can take no hurt of the Laverdyne.  
The Laverdyne 
Laverdin.  is a rane of rocks together a musket shot long, which lieth off from the east point of S. Martens Island, about an English mile, and with spring tide at low water is uncovered. Betwixt it and the Island of S. Martens men may sail through, there is depth enough. The marks of the Laverdyne are these: When you come in at the Killiats, and sail through betwixt S. Martens Island & the Boss, & you come to see the great Tower of Rochel even without the point of the Boss, then are you right thwart of the Laverdyne; which lieth then s. w. from you, it is there betwixt them both not very wide: or else when the foresaid great Tower of Rochel standeth even without the point of Bosse, and the North point, of the Plom a ships length without the south point (which is the north point of the Boss) then are you right upon the Laverdyne, therefore when Rochel cometh a ships length to the southwards of the Boss (when you come in at the Killiats) then are you past the Laverdyne, & you may boldly go on s. e. and s. e. and by south towards Burnt-Island.  
Porthus 
Portus.  is a broad and wide channel, lying in through betwixt S. Martens Island and Oleron, and lieth from Use s. e. & by e. distant about 15 leagues. If you will sail into Porthus, then run in betwixt both lands e. s.e. but much nearer S. Martens Island, for to avoid the bank of Oleron, which is a foul ledge of rocks, at the n. end of Oleron, come not near it by night then in 12 or 13 fathom.  
When you come then by the east end of S. Martens Island and are bound to Rochel, or else will anchor under the Boss bring the great Tower of Rochel a ship's length without the Boss, so you can take no hurt of the Laverduyn. You may anchor under the Boss in 5 or 6 fathom soft ground, so that the point do lie north from you. Or else if you will anchor under the Abbey of S. Martens Island, then run in upon the foresaid marks, so long until that the foresaid Abbey come without the s. point of the same Island, sail then right with it and then you shall leave the Laverduyn far enough on the larboard side of you. And being come near the Abbey, anchor a little to the aestwards of it in 5, 6, or 7, fathom, there is the road for ships that are bound out.  
When you go into Porthus, and will sail to the  Island, then run in (as before is said) until you come near the east end of S. Martens Island: thence the course is south east, and by east, or from the Boss south or south and by east, or with a westerly wind south and by west unto that Island.  
When you sail so near Burnt-Island 
Burnt-Island.  that the Tower of Voorn, or the Four, cometh over the Burnt-Island, there you may cast your ballast over board, it is there 12 fathom deep.  
If you must turn to and again with a southerly wind from the Boss to the Burnt-Island, or from Burnt-Island to the Boss, then come not to near the land of Rochel, there lie divers stony banks alongst the land, a good ways from the shore, where of you must take heed. When Rochel is hidden behind the south point which lieth over against the Creek, there lieth a stony bank, upon which remaineth not a fathom of water.  
If you will sail into the river of Sherrant, then run about to the southwards of Burnt-Island, you may also sail about to the northwards of it, and sail in by the Tower of Voorn, or Four. At low water this river falleth dry, at least 4 leagues within the land. For to sail from Burnt-Island to Burwage, you must sail away s. s.e. & keep the little Tower of Heers to the westwards of the wood, so long until the tower of Voorn or le Four, come over the little red-tyled house, that stands rpon the s. side of the river of Sherrant sail then in s. e. and by little & little s. e. & by east until that Pront (a village that lieth upon the strand) cometh to the n. wards of Soubise, when as then Soubise cometh within the foresaid village, and the mill above the village, than you shall be against the point of Oysterbanck: 
Oysterbancks.  go then in alongst s. e. & by south, and bring that outermost little Tower of Heers, over the outermost sandy place, where the gallows standeth by, keep them so standing, and sail in s. s.e, when as then the little Tower of Heers cometh to the east side of the valley, whicb is in the wood, then keep that sharp little Tower right over the east side of the valley of the wood, and sail in so into the Creek, or river of Burwage. At Burwage was wont not to stand a house, where now is a strong fair Town, being builded so within 70 or 80 years past.  
The Bannier lieth alongst the land of Oleron, and lieth until within Burnt-Island, at low water it is uncovered, and the tail of it lieth fare to the northwards. If you should turn out from the Creek towards the  Island, then bring the Tower of Rochel not without the Burnt-Isand, before you come thwart of it, because of the Baniard, 
Baniard.  & then you shall take no hurt of it.  
At the south end of Oleron, betwixt Oleron and the land to the southwards of it, is yet another channel, where men may sail in and out, called the Mamme-sound, deep enough for great ships, it lieth in from out of the sea east and by n. being come there within, there runneth up ariver southeast towards Sales, where men do lad salt, being past that, to the other point of the Mamme-sound, 
Mamme sound.  lieth a plate, where of men run to the northwards upon these marks: you must keep the mill that standeth upon the lands of Oleron over the trees and so you shall run to the northward) off the plate, there is the road for them that will lad salt at Oleron or Olderdon.  
But if you will run in through, and out again, than you must fail so fare to the eastwards, until that Sales come over the trees, which stand within Merven, for to avoid the tail or riffe that shooteth of from Oleron: when Sales cometh over the trees, sail then north and by w. on, the Burnt-Island, but bring Duke Charles Tower to the s. wards of the Burnt-Island, for not to sail within the Banniard. When the little Tower of Heers cometh to the wood keep it then so standing until Rochel cometh over the north side of the Burnt-Island sail then out at the Portrush. There shooteth of also a riffe from the west-end of Saint Martens Island, 
Riffe at S. Martens Island.  where of you must take heed.  
About south, or a little more westerly, thirteen leagues from the Island Use, south-west and by west from the Island S. Martens, and w.n.w. or somewhat more northerly from the river of Bordeaux, lie the Rocks of Rockedon, or Rochebon, 
Rocks of Rochebon  of some called Urkamia, in form of a Trevet or Brandize. The southermost of the three is the shoalest, whereupon remaineth at low water about 2 fathom depth: At the southeast side the ground is black little stones, and at the north-east side white sand, but you may not come near them by your lead sound by them.  
A little to the westwards, not fare from the foresaid rocks, lieth yet another rock, where upon is at low water 5 fathom water, nevertheless with a storm the sea breaketh terribly upon it.  

Of the Tides and Courses and streams.  
Upon all these a foresaid places, as kewise over the whole bending of the French Coast as alsoo before the River of Bourdeaux a south-west & north. moon maketh the highest water.   

Of the Depths about these places, and in what depths men may see the land.  
Bell-Isle men may see from below in 55, but under the top in 60 fathom.  
Without Use it is 35 fathom deep, and then men may see the land from below: when it is clear weather men may see it in 60 fathom.  
Westsouthwest from Use about 9 leagues you shall find 45 and 46 fathom, the ground is full of fine small stones as great as course sand and very steep.  
The land of Olone men may see it from below in 25 and 30 fathom.  
S. Martens Island and the north end off Oleron men may see in 28 and 30 fathom. When men get sight off S. Martens Island, they shall see upon it a high Tower, with a high house, and upon the strand a mill with four or five high sand-hills. Upon Oleron men shall see a high spire Tower upon a red point, where men shall see some trees stand over it and to the southwards of it, is at 2 or 3 places ragged sandhills.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Bell-Isle to the river of Bourdeaux, southeast somewhat southerly 47 leagues  
From Bell-Isle to S. Sebastian's, s. s.e. southerly, 75 leg.  
From Bell-Isle to S. Andero, south 71 leagues.  
From Bell-Isle to C. de Pinas, or Tores s. s.w. somewhat westerly 76 leagues.  
From Bell-Isle to Cape de Ortegall, s. w. 88 leagues.  
From Bell-Isle to Cape de Finisterre, s. w. 121 leagues.  
From the east point of the Cardinal to Croswyck, e.n.e. 7 leagues.  
From the point of Croswyck to Pierre-Perce, east s. e. 4 leagues.  
From the Cardinal to Olddownes, e. n. e. 7 leagues.  
From the north point of the River of Nantes to the Picqueliers, n.n.e. 7 leagues.  
From Pierremen to Armentiers westsouthwest 2 leag.  
From Armentiers or Picqueliers to the West end of Use, s. & by e. & s. s.e. at last 7 leagues.  
From the east end of Bell-Isle to Use, southeast easterly 16 leagues.  
From Use to the Barges of Olone, e. & by s. 7 leagues.  
From Use to the Killiates, or S. Martens Island, e. s.e. 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Use to Cape de Pinas, south-west and by south 75 leagues.  
From Use to Cape de Ortegall, south-west and by west, 93 leagues.  
From Use to Portrush, or the Band of Oleron, the course is southeast and by east 15 or 16 leag.  
From the Band or Craghe of Oleron to the Tower of Cordan s. s.e. and s. and by e. 14 or 15 leagues.  
From S. Martin's Island to the tower of Cordan, or the river of Bourdeaux, s. s.e. 16 leagues.  
From S. Martens Islands to Cape de Pinas, south-west, somewhat westerly 80 leagues.  
From S. Martens Island to Ortegall, the course is w. s.w. somewhat southerly 99 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Island Use in 46 degrees. 44 min.  
The north point of Oleron in 46 degrees. 10 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Heys, being southeast & by south from you, that a man may see it from the Compagne, showeth out of the Mass thus.  
Heys, being north-east from you, sheweth thus.  
Thus showeth the Island Use, or Heys, when you sail alongst by it, being two leagues off from it.  
Heys being e. s. e. from you, and that a man may see the tower from the Compagne, showeth thus, & you are then upon 31 fathom depth.  
Olone.  
Thus showeth the Land of Poictou betwixt Heys and the Islands of S. Martens, when you sail alongst by it. four leagues a seaboard the Land.  
This Coast lieth southsoutheast.  
Thus showeth the west end of the Island of S. Martens.  
This belongeth to the former figure from the w. end of S. Martens Island, & showeth itself thus, when the steeple is e. and by south from you 3 or 4 leagues of, the coast lieth here e. s. e. and w. n. w.  
When S. Martens Island is north and by east from you it showeth itself thus.  
La fos de Joys. S. Marten. Abbey. S. john  
When men sail out or in at Porthus, S. Martens Island showeth itself in this form.  
When the Tower of the Island S. Marten is e. s. e. 3 leagues from you, than the land showeth thus.  
S. Martens S. Maria.  
Thus showeth the south side of S. Martens Island, when the Tower or w. end is north, and the e. end n. e. three or four leagues of from you,  
The w. point of Oleron, or Olderdon, showeth itself thus, when it is e. from you two great leagues. Thereabouts it is twenty fathom deep.  
Down Downyland.  
Olderdon or Oleron showeth thus, when as you have the trees north by the Tower, which is then south e. from you.  
When you are before Porthus, about two or 3 leagues from land, then doth Oleron and Olderdon arise in this form.   

Caarte Vande Rivier van Bourdeaux tot aen Bayone en voorts aen Coninx read.   

The land betwixt Olderdon and the river of Bourdeaux showeth (when men sail alongst by it) as it portrayed in these 5 following figures, the letters of one sort belong one to the other, as AA, BB, CC, DD.  
The Island Olderdon  
Sales  
Thus showeth Sales, when it is east and by north from you, being about a league without the land.  
High sandhill.  
Cordan     

The third Demonstration, Which Containeth the Description of the River of Bourdeaux to S. Sebastiaen or Coninx reed.  
FRom the Band or Crage off Oleron to the Tower of Cordan, or the Po●e-head, or the mouth off the River off Bourdeaux, called the Garrone, the land lieth south s. east; and s. and by e. 13 leagues.  
To the northwards of the mouth of the river of Bourdeaux, lie five or six high white Sand-hills, but to the southwards off it, it is somewhat low land, black little Sandhilles, being grown with spiry grass.  
From the Tower of Cordan off to the northwards, towards the high Sand-Hills, which lie upon the north land lieth a sand-bancke, called the Piper, 
Piper.  men may sound alongst by it on the west side in seven fathom, but upon the northend it is very steep, and not fare off it is twenty fathom deep.  
From the north-point off the River runneth off to the southwards, a sand called the norther Asses, and to the southwards of it lieth another sand, called the souther Asses, 
Norther & souther Asses.  through betwixt them both, & also alongst to the southwards of them, men sail into the River.  
If you will sail into the River coming from the northwards, than you may run alongst by the shoal in 12 and 13 fathom, until that the tower of Cordan stand southeast & by east from you, run then right in with it, through betwixt the norther and souther Asses. until that the high white sandhil upon the north point of the river stand northnortheast from you, men may so (coming from the northwards) run in also about by the norther Asses, by your lead, until that the Tower come to be southsoutheast, and southeast and by south from you then go towards the Tower, and when the foresaid high sandhil come to be northnortheast or north-east and by north from you, sail then right in with it until that you have the sounding of the land, run then in alongst by it, towards Messie, that is the point where all the mills stand. When you shall sail thus towards the high sandhill, and that the Tower of Soulack cometh a great fathom to the northwards of the Tower of Cordan and the little mill of Royan 
Royan.  then are you also past the Piper, & may run in right east without fear towards Royan, but you must reckon well your tide, for the flood falleth thwart over the Asses towards the Tower off Cordan, and the ebb in the contrary.  
In this foresaid channel through betwixt the Asses remaineth at low water 3 fathom water upon the shoals.  
For to sail into the river alongst to the southwards of the Asses, coming from the northwards, (that is, the best channel) you must do thus: Bring the Tower of Soulacke east from you, or somewhat more northerly, and sail in so right with it until the tower of Cordan be north and by east, and north north east from you, Royan shall then stand north east from you, or else if you come from the southwards, then bring the tower of Cordan north and by east, and north n.e. from you, and sail in so right with it until Soulack come to be east from you, Royan shall then stand n. e. from you sail then right towards it, & coming near it, sail to the point of Messie.  
When you are now within the River's mouth, and come right against the point of Messie, that is the point where the Mills stand upon, than edge over towards the broken Castle, called chastilion, 
chastilion  south east and by south, that is, eight leagues from Messie, and then forth in alongst by the south land, south east in unto Pouliack, 
Pouliac●  which is two great leagues.  
In the fareway betwixt the Piper and the point with the Mills, or Messie, it is 10, 11, and 12 fathom deep, but out of the fareway, either on the north side, or south side, it is shoaly, to wit, five, six, seven, and eight fathom, you must run alongst close by the point of Messie, there it is 22 fathom deep.  
When as that Royan cometh to the west point, where upon the mills stand keep it so standing, and go away south east and by south towards chastilion, it is in this fareway almost all alongst 5 fathom deep, but coming near the north or south side, it is shoaly, and at the nortst side it is full of sands, where also men may well sail through that are acquainted.  
From chastilion to Pouliack 
Pouliack.  it is 2 great leagues s. east, the course is as before is said, and it is there deep 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathom. Over against Pouliack in the midst of the River lieth a little Island to the eastwards, men must run about it, right in with Bloy, but there men must go over with the tide, for it is there at low water but a little more than one fathom deep.  
When you are before Pouliack, and will sail to Bloye, then let the water first flow an hour, and then you may well go over with a ship that draweth nine or ten foot water. The marks for to sail alongst in the deepest water of this reach, are these: there standeth a Mill half ways betwixt Bloye and Rocktaw, keep that without the new wall of Bloye, and then you shall run in the deepest of the Channel.  
Before Bloye 
Bloye.  it is again three or four fathom deep, run then alongst by the north land in three, four, and five fathom. When you come before the River which lieth up to the eastwards called Dordoigne, than sail first right with the midst of the second Island, and leave it on the starboard side, and go indifferent near alongst by it, until that you be over against or past the Gallows, which standeth upon the east point of the River: and then again alongst by the north land unto the four little houses. From thence you must edge over to the high tower of Dublot or Pigeonhouse, coming thwart of it, you must presently edge over against to the east side, to the height near Lermond; in that edging over, you shall run through betwixt a stone bank on the larboard side, and a shoal sandplate on the starboard side, over a bank called the Pace, 
The pace.  which is the shoaliest of all the river, there remaineth at low water a little less than a fathom. Being come over the Pace to the east side, go then in alongst by the east shore, until you be past Lermond, then sail again over to the west side, right with the houses of Charterhouse, and then in all alongst by the west shore, until you come before the town of Bourdeaux, in that crooked reach betwixt Larmond and Charterhouse it is 5, 6, and 7 fathom deep, and before the town 4 and 5 fathom.  
When men will sail out of the river of Bordeaux, they must stay at Royan until they have good weather, and a sore-ebbe to run out with: in running out, keep the high sandhill north north east from you, so long until that the tower of Cordan be south east and by east from you, than you may sail out through the Ass' northwest and by west into sea.  
From Cordan, or the river of Bourdeaux, unto Arcachon, the coast lieth s. and n. twenty leagues, it is all low sandy land, betwixt them both lieth a tydehaven called Anchises men may go in there well at high water with great ships.  
Before the haven of Arcachon, or Arcason, 
Arcason.  lie three shoals, men may sail into the northwards of them, and also into the southwards of them: the norther entry goeth in betwixt the north point and the northermost shoal, but it is narrow and not deep. The souther entry lieth to the southwards of all the shoals by the souther point, in betwixt two shoaly sand-bankes, where of the one lieth off from the southermost shoal, and the other from the south point of main land, s. west and by w. in to the sea. The land to the n. wards of this haven is altogethet somewhat low sandy land without trees, but to the southwards of it they are all somewhat high sand-hils without trees also, but coming before the haven's mouth, you shall see within in the land many trees. When you come out of the sea either from the northwards or the southwards, near about this haven's mouth, you shall easily aspy the foresaid banks on both sides of the souther entry, by the breaking of the sea, and you may borrow of them by your lead, as near as you please, they are very clean and flat. Upon the sandhils within the haven mouth, stand two great high masts. If you will sail in there, 
For to sail in to the haven of Arcason.  then bring the two Masts one in the other, and then they shall stand north east and by east from you keep them one in the other, and sail in so right with them, and you shall so sail in betwixt the two foresaid banks, and at low water you shall not find less than two fathom water, but at high water you shall have five and a half, and six fathom water, go in so upon the marks, until you come within the shoals, and to the end of the shoal sand on the larboard side. Being gotten in within it, you must luffe up about by it, and go then on north until you come to the point, which you shall see on the starboard side, but give that a birth, because there runneth off a tail, there is in that reach no less than ten, eleven, or twelve fathom deep. Being come about that point, you may then sail in close alongst by the land on the starbord side, which lieth east south east, or you may anchor there in sixteen, fifteen, twelve, and ten fathom, or further in about the second point, in two and three fathom. Over against the first pont, on the north side, it falleth very far dry, a great ways within.  
From Arcason to Bayone, 
Bayone.  the coast lieth south and north sixteen or seventeen leagues. The River's mouth of Bayone lieth in betwixt two plain strands e. s.e. and east and by south, and sometimes more easterly or northerly, by reason of the shifting and altering of the sands before the River's mouth. Upon the land on the south side of the channel, stand two masts, these you must keep one in the other, or the innermost a little to the northwards of the outermost, and run so in over the Bar or shoaliest place, until you come against the south point, and then in alongst by it. Upon the foresaid Bar is at high water and Spring tied, at least three fathom, with an ordinary tide two fathom and a half, but at low water no more than 3 foot water. When you come about the point, you must sail up to the southwards, keeping about the middle of the channel alongst the river, or rather nearest the west side, for to avoid some foul ground and shoal, that lie on the east side, and anchor before the town in four, five, or six fathom. This Bar and this River is Pilots water.  
A little within this Bar on the north side of the river lieth up to the northwards, a great water within, of 7 leagues long, and falleth out into Sea by Cabritton. Alongst that great water the ships were wont to sail up to Bayone, but it is now upon the south end at the river of Bayone, almost altogether paled too, so that there can but small barks go through, for to keep the better the Bar of Bayone deep with scouring through of the water.  
From the Bar of Bayone to S. John de Luz, 
S. john de Luz  the course is south and by west 4 leagues, there is a fair Bay, where men may ride in five, six, seven, or eight fathom, according as they will lie fare in, clean sandy ground, at the end of the Bay is a little tydehaven, where upon lieth the town on the west side. At high water, and with an ordinary tide, there cometh nine foot, but with a spring twelve foot water, at low water it falleth altogether dry, so that men may go over there with dry feet. A little within the west point of the Bay is also a little Dock, where there is a foot water more than in the foresaid tydehaven, but it falleth also dry at low water.  
This Bay is very good to know by these marks that hereafter are written: It lieth right in the Bite, to the eastwards of it lieth the land north and by east towards Bayone, and to the westwards of it the land falleth away south-west nnd by west, and south-west towards Fonteravia. Upon the east point of the Bay standeth a white Firetower, which men may see fare off, especially when the Sun shineth upon it, than it shineth very white more than the other land. Upon the west point standeth a flat white house a little ways upon the high land, to the westwards of the Bay it is upon the sea side grey and bluish land. Alsoo the high hill of S. John de Luz, is a good mark for to know this Bay, which remaineth in sailing in, lying somewhat to the eastwards, or on the larboard side. This foresaid hill of S. John de Luz showeth itself out in height above all other hills thereabouts, & thereby is very good to be known above upon the top it is somewhat flat, as is demonstrated in the rising of the lands. Upon this foresaid hill standeth a Chapel, from whence men may see into four Kingdoms: France, Spain, Navarre, and Arragon.  
About two leagues south-west and south-west and by west from S. John de Luz, lie the rocks called the Pignons of S. Anna, 
Pignons of S. Anna  not fare from land: a league to the westwards of them lieth the Bay of Fonteravia, being a fair Bay.  
At the west point of the Bay lieth the C. Figure, a high point, upon it standeth a castle, & to the southwards of it a little chapel. At the point of this cape lieth a rock a little ways from it, but the sea cannot run through betwixt them, except it be with very high floods, it breaketh a little through. At the east side of this bay lie two high rocks, and thwart of them lie also some low rocks a good ways off from the land. For to avoid them you must sail in by the west point for to come into this Bay, and being within it, you may anchor in eight or nine fathom, but so that the foresaid great rock at the C. Figuer stand northnorthwest from you, there you lie in fair sandy ground, and landlockt for a northwest wind. The Kroonenbrough 
Kroonenberch.  lieth about half ways betwixt S. John de Luz and this foresaid Bay of Fonteravia.  
A little league to the westwards of C. de Figuer, lieth Passage 
Passagie.  also a fair haven At the west side of the haven's mouth, which is very narrow, lieth a round rock, so that it is evil to come in there with an ebb, but with a flood it is better, without it is very clean, without any shoal or fowl grounds, but only the foresaid round rock. The town lieth a little within the haven on the w. side, where men do lie before it in 7 fathom.  
Two great leagues to the westwards of Passage, lieth S. Sebastian's, betwixt both is also a sand-bay in a bite, where there goeth up into the land a shoal little river, where come in many Barks.  
The haven of Saint Sebastian's 
S. Sebastian's.  is good for to come into, men do run in there betwixt two little castles, where of the eastermost is the great, standing upon a high hill. The westermost is a little square Tower, and lieth upon a little Island, or rock. In the haven's mouth being narrow, betwixt the two foresaid little Castles, lieth a rock, which at low water is six fathom deep, and when it is a storm out of the sea, it breaketh always upon it, and lieth nearest the east-land, by the west-land it is deep ten fathom. Now for to avoid the foresaid rock in coming in, there cometh an Abbey to the eastwards of the westermost Island, & a liitle Tower. If you keep them one in the other, than you run into eastwards of it.  
For to anchor without S. Sebastian's in the road, you must keep the high hill which lieth upon the point of Cape Figuer, without the foresaid eastermost castle, there you may anchor, but if the same come to be hidden behind the castle or Island, than you may not anchor in the road of S. Sebastian's. When you are come through the narrow within the rock and the castles, than you may anchor at the east side under the great castle, there is the best road. Within the foresaid castle goeth up a little water, men may go at low water on foot from the easter castle alongst a high strand upon the main land, unto the Town, which lieth behind the foresaid high hill with the Castle, yet the strand at high water is covered; it is a bay, and within before the town it is deep five, six, and seven fathom, at the west side under the little Island, men may not anchor, because it is flat and shoal there.  
He that will go forth from thence into S. Sebastian's. let him run in, keeping the middle channel, betwixt the two Islands, and let him leave the little Island where upon the chapel standeth on the starboard side, running in so right against the first or the second wall of the town, and anchor there, the boats or shallops shall come aboard of him, and help him into the haven betwixt the walls.  
A league to the westwards of S. Sebastian's, lieth a sandbay, where men may anchor so deep and so shallow as they will.  

Of the Tides and Courses and streams.  
Like as on all the coasts of France, so also at the mouth of the River of Bordeaux, maketh high water a s. w. and north-east moon.  
In the Haven of Arcason a south-west and by west & a north-east & by east Moon maketh high water, but the flood draws almost an hour longer in then the water flows.  
On all the places, and before all the havens of these coasts, a south-west and north-east moon maketh the highest water; but within the ha●ens about a point later, according as they lie deep within the land, like as on the coasts off Brittaigne Poictou, and Gascoigny. Men reckon here also no failing or setting of the streams. But the streams fall here thwart off and on.  
Upon the coast of Biscany we find no running of streams, but a southeast & northwest moon maketh over all the coasts the highest water, and within the Rivers a point less.   

Of the Depths.  
The land against the River off Bordeaux men may see from the poop in 30 fathom, and the Tower off Cordan in 27 fathom.  
Betwixt Arcason, & S. John de Luz men may see the land in 30 fathom, when about Bayone, they shall see Cabritton, Bayone. Bedert, and S. John de Luz, almost all flat Towers.  
Being before Passage, men may see also the point C. Figuer, and S. Sebastian's, the land lieth in there with a great Bay.  
About C. de Figuer lieth a high hill, which at the south-west end is very steep, and goeth very long sloping down towards the north.  
When men are before S. Sebastian's 7 or 8 leagues without the land, than it riseth somewhat long, and at the west end steep and hollow, but when men come close by the land, than it is very high and steep.  
When men are 8 leagues without S. Sebastian's, then may they see the eastermost or gratest castle upon the high hill, and alsoo the little Island to the westwards of it.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Cordan to Arcason south 20 leagues.  
From Arcason to Bayone south 16 or 17 leagues.  
From the Tower Cordan to Cape de Pinas w. s.w. some what southerly 75 leagues.  
From Bayone to S. John de Luz s. & by w. 4 leagues.  
From S. John de Luz to the Pignons of S. Anna, s. w. and by west 2 leagues.  
From S. John de Luz to S. Sebastian's west 8 leagues.  
From S. Sebastian's to Gateria 8 leagues.  
From Bayone to the Seams n. w. somewhat westerly 102 leagues.  
From S. Sebastian's to Bell-Isle n.n.w. somewhat northerly, 75 leagues.  
From S. Sebastian's to the Seams northwest and by n. 102 leagues.  
The courses & distances of the places one from the other is declared in the description.    

Heights.  

The Tower of Corda● lieth in 45 degrees, 36 minute.  
Arcason in 44 degrees, 40 minute.  
Bayone lieth in 43 degrees, 46 minute.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Thus showeth the land about Arcason when it is from you eastsoutheast near two miles.  
Thus appeareth Arcason when it is north-east and by east about two miles.  
Cabritton Bayone S. john de Luz Fonteravia Passage S. Sebastiaens  
Thus showeth the land about the bite of S. john de Luz, off from Cabritton until past S. Sebastiaens.  
Thus showeth S. Sebastiaens, when you get first sight of it, being seven leagues off from it.  
White down. Hill of S. john de Luz.  
janni Krooningbergh Bocon Cabritton  
Fonteravia C. Figuer.  
The foresaid Island about the bite of S. john de Luz from the northwards of Cabritton until past Fonteravia, showeth thus, as is demonstrated in these two figures, when you are before the Bar of Bayone.  
Hill of S. john de Luz, south 5 leagues.  
Krooninbergh Fonteravia  
C. Figuer. S. Sebastiaens.  
When the Hill of S. john de Luz is south from you five leagues, than the land to the eastwards of it until past S. Sebastiaens, showeth as is here above portrayed in these two figures, the BB, and CC, belong one to the other.  
S. Sebastiaens.  
Thus showeth the land about S. Sebastiaen when it is five leagues from you.  
C. Figuer Passage S. Sebastiaens.  
Passage and S. Sebastiaens, being southsouthwest from you, sheweth thus.   

Kissed Van Biscayen tusschen Orio end rio de Sella.  
Kissed Van Biscayen tusschen Rio de Sella en t' Eylant van S. Cyprian.     

The fourth Demonstration, In which The Coast of biscay from Coninx reed to the Island S. Cypriaen, are delineated.  
From S. Sebastian's to C. de Martinchaco, the course is w.n.w. 13 leagues. Betwixt them both lie the roads Gateria and Deva.  
Gateria 
Gateria.  lieth from S. Sebastian's west and by north, and w.n.w. distant 7. leagues, being a fair round sand-bay, where is good riding for westerly winds, men lie there within the west point right before the Town in fair sandy ground, a north wind cometh right from the point. This bay is commonly called Kingshaven.  
Alongst the coast of Biscay, betwixt S. John de Luz and Gateria is every where clean ground and good ankoring in 20 fathom.  
From Gateria to Deva it is a league and half to the westwards: which is an off-water that cometh out of the high-land.  
Two leagues to the westwards lieth the point of Cape Martinchaco.  
About thirteen leagues westnorthwest from S. Sebastian's, lieth the Cape de Martinchaco, a little to the westwards of it is a good tydehaven, wherein lieth a little Town about a league within the land, upon a river which cometh out of the high land. A little to the westwards of Cape de Martinchacol, lieth a great rock fast to the land, and a little to the westwards of the same another: upon the point called Punte de Avillanes. Southwest and by west from Martinchaco lieth the haven of Barmea, 
Barmea.  a fair great Bay, the easter point is foul, therefore men must give it a good birth, and run in alongst by the west side, when they are gotten in it is large enough, there they may anchor where they will.  
To the westwards of Barmea, lieth also Placentia 
Placentia.  upon a little River, the town lieth a little within the land. There are all tyde-havens.  
From Cape de Martinchaco to Bilbao, (where betwixt lie the foresaid havens of Barmea and Placentia) it is s. south-west & south-west & by south 6 leagues.  
From Placentia to Bilboa it is two leagues westsouthwest and west and by south. Bilbao lieth upon a great river alongst which there cometh of much Iron, it is a good haven, but it lieth not fare in, by reason of the Bar which lieth thwart over the haven, where men must go in with high water.  
At the east point of Bilbao 
Bilbao.  shooteth of a riffe, which men must avoid, there lie also some rocks under water. It is a high steep point, and is white to see to.  
Within the riffe that runneth off from the point, men may anchor in seven and eight fathom, betwixt the point and the Pier on the east side, there the Pilots come off which bring up the ships; and there men lie land-lockt far a northwest wind. From this foresaid point or road to the Bar or river mouth of Bilbao, it is a league and half s. & by west, which lieth in by the west land, there stand five or six houses upon the w. land, when the two westermost houses come one in the other, or when you may see through the two eastermost houses, which stand within in the land, then are you upon the Bar or shoal, then go in south and s. by east right with the Castle Portugalletto, and alongst close by the Castle, and anchor a little within the Castle for a west wind. But when you are before the Bar, the Pilots come off and bring you to the Town.  
When you lie without in the Bay, than you may see Mount Anthony lie w. and by north from you.  
From the point of Bilboa to Castro, 
Castro.  the course is w. 5 leagues, that is a good haven for 6, 7 and 8 fathom depth. The narrow of the haven lieth in south, in 10 fathom. But further in the river towards the town, it is not deeper than 3 or 4 fathom.  
From Bilbao to the hill of S. Anthony's, 
M. S. Anthony.  it is w. and by north nine or ten leagues. From Castro to Laredo, the course is west distant five leagues, upon the west side lieth the foresaid hill of S. Anthony's, which is a high hill, men may sail in close alongst by it until they come about the east point; within it is wide and broad, and a fit haven for great ships, there men may anchor in seven or eight fathom. To the eastwards over against the hill of S. Anthony's, in the midst of the sound, lieth a rane of rocks under water, 
sunken Rocks.  where men may sail in about it on both sides, men may easily espy them, because it doth always break upon them, within them is the road for ordinary ships, a little before the haven, which is built with a wall. But the great ships, lie a little further off in 6 or 7 fathom depth. On the south side of the haven is a little tydehaven, from the same there cometh a great riffe shooting off from the east side, towards the hill of S. Anthony's; within it is two fathom water right before the village, from the village cometh a tail of sand, lying thwart out, within it at low water it is a fathom deep. In the midst of the sound it is nine fathom, and at the point of Saint Anthony's 20 fathom deep.  
From S. Anthony's hill to Cape de Kesgo 
C. Kesgo.  it is west and w. and by s. 2 leagues, that is a great Cape lying to the eastwards of S. Andero: thwart of it is clean ground.  
From Cape de Kesgo to the west point of S. Andero. it is w. & by s. 5 leagues, a little to the s. wards of the point of S. Andero, 
S. Andero  upon the e. point of Sardinis, is a sand-bay, there is good anchoring in ten fathom.  
From C. de Kesgo to the haven of S. Andero, the course is w. s.w. distant 2 great leagues. S. Andero lieth within a Bay, there lieth an Island before the haven, men may go about it on both sides, it is deep 8 & 9 fa. but to the s. wards of the Island it is deep 5, 6, & 7 fathom, according as men will come near to the strand, the haven lieth in first w.n.w. The Island lieth a great league within the bay: from the east point of the haven, unto the west point of the land, it is south and north about a great league. S. Anthony's and the west point of S. Andero, lie one from the other e. and w. about 5 leagues.  
For to know the land when you fall with the land about Laredo, 
Laredo.  you must know that on the w. side of the haven of Laredo, lieth the hill of S. Anthony's, which is a very high hill, which men may see very fare from the e. and the w. & a little above the town of Laredo, men may see alsoo a sharp hill like the point of a Diamond, or the point of a two hand sword, further it is about Laredo very high double land, two, three, and at some places four double. The hill of S. Anthony's doth arise in two high hommockes, with a valley or saddle in the midst betwixt them both within in the land lie also two high hills with sharp tops. Above and to the w. wards of S. Anthony's, lieth a piece of land judged to be about two leagues long, which lieth in five hills, the eastermost is the lowest, and rise all higher and higher towards the west, so that at the last to the westermost is the highest, which goeth off somewhat flat downward towards the west. Betwixt that eastermost hill and S. Anthony's, lieth a bay about a league long, called the Bay of Port, 
Bay of Port.  men cannot see these foresaid hills when they are close by the land, but they must be a good ways off to seawards.  
To the westwards of these foresaid hills lieth an other piece of land, which at the east end is highest, and goeth sloping off towards the west end, almost like Portland. Betwixt that point and the five foresaid hills, lieth an other sand-Bay, where abouts stand some little houses, but by it lie many rocks & fowl ground. There abouts within the land lieth the foresaid high round sharp hill in form like the point of a sword.  
S. Andero hath but few hills that are easy to be known but when men are before the haven, than they shall see to the eastwards of the town, a Castro upon a high hill, in form like a Sugarloaf, or a haycock, and to the eastwards of it is much double land of two and three heights double. But when men come about the Cape de Kesgo, than they shall see presently the castle upon the west land.  
From S. Andero to Cape de Pinas, the course is w. or a little more northerly 31 or 32 leagues. Betwixt them both lie these havens following.  
First the haven of S. Martin, 
S. Martin.  or Settevilles, 
Settevills.  a tydehaven lying east and west 4 leagues from S. Andero.  
From thence to S. Vincent 
S. Vincent  alsoo a tydehaven is five leagues distant: the haven goeth in on the e●st side; from the west side cometh shooting off a ●●●le riffe, and in the midst of the haven's mouth lieth a little Island, where men may go in on both sides.  
From S. Vincent to Lhanes, 
Lhanes.  a tydehaven, the course is west 2 or 3 leagues. Upon the west side of the haven standeth a little Church: and a little within the haven, lieth a middle plate or sand, men must go in on the w. side of the sand: these are all narrow havens, & but little known.  
From Lhanes to Rio de Sella, the course is w. 5 or 6 leagues: betwixt them both lie alongst the coast many rocks, & within them many sand-bayes, where men for need might save ships.  
He that will go into Rio de Sella 
Rio de Sel●a  must look out for a mast which stands upon the east land close by the same men must go in, the west side is within fowl, within the mast men must anchor before the village: this is also a tydehaven.  
From Rio de Sella to Villa Viciose 
Villa Viciosa.  it is west, 9 leagues, this is also a tydehaven, but is clean, the haven's mouth lieth in s. s.e. and s. e. and by s. close alongst by the west point of the land, the east side is fowl unto the midst of the haven: there lieth a rock with a plate right in the midst of the haven, which at low water fall dry: so soon as men are within that rock, they must anchor within the rock; upon the west side lieth the town, men may alsoo sail up to it, & anchor there in the shoal water.  
S●x leagues to the westwards of Villa Viciosa lieth the out-poynt of Sanson, 
Sanson.  to the eastwards of it lieth a little Island, where upon standeth a little Tower. Betwixt Sanson and the foresaid little Island is a good road in six or seven fathom.  
At the west side of Sanson is alsoo a good road right before the little haven of Sanson in 6 or 7 fathom.  
To the westwards of Sanson lieth Gion 
Gion.  with a Pier or Head that is paled off, under the which the Fishermen which dwell there, lay their barks.  
A great league to the westwards of Gion lieth the Bay of Tores, a good road for a south-west and west wind in 8 and 9 fathom. Upon the point standeth a high tower.  
Three leagues to the westwards of Tores 
Tores.  lieth Cape de Pinas, where many rocks lie off to seawards, at least a half league of, some do say that men may sail through betwixt the point & these rocks.  
From the cape de Pinas 
C. de Pinas.  lieth off a rane of rocks, lying at the least a half league into sea, some say that men may sail through betwixt the point and these rocks. But a little within or to the westwards off the Cape de Pinas, lieth a great rock, betwixt that rock and the land men may sail through.  
When men are within the Cape de Pinas, then lieth Avilles three leagues from thence southsouthwest which is a good tydehaven, where a great ship may well go in at half flood, alsoo there is a good road before this haven in 6 and 7 fathom.  
For to sail in there, men must go in by the e. land, the west-land is fare off shoal, there standeth a little Chapel upon the east-land, men must sail in close by it, and anchor a little ways within two rocks that lie on the east side, a little within the haven's mouth. The town lieth a league further up. From the west point runneth off a riffe, and lieth inwards alongst the haven, towards the town, so that it is there very shoal on both sides. On the west side without the haven in the bite, lie 2 great rocks right before the little Church in the Sand-bay, men sail round about them, but it is not very clean: but without the rocks good anchor ground in 7 or 8 fathom, over against the little Church that standeth against the high land.  
From Avilles 
Avilles.  to Luarca 
Luarca.  is 6 leagues and from Luarca to Ribadeus w. s.w. 6 leagues, & from Aviles to Ribadeus s w. and by w. 12 leagues.  
From the east point off the haven's mouth of Ribadeus, 
Ribadeus.  lieth off a ledge or riffe off rocks towards the w. shore, you may found in about it in four fathom, or four fathom and a half: or else if you keep the little town Castropoll even without the point, so sail right in with it, than you shall not come too near the foresaid ledge, but you shall sail far enough alongst to the westwards off it. The w. point showeth itself when you come in out of the sea, like an Island; upon it at the nor●h end standeth a flat tower, almost like the tower in the Groin, but not so great. About thwart off that Tower lieth a sunken rock a little ways from the land, you must look out for it, and take heed off it, when there cometh in any great sea, you can easily espy it by the breaking of the sea upon it, but not with smooth water: at the very lowest water it cometh even with the water. The w. shore is fowl and rocky: there runneth off to the southwards of the fotesayd Tower also a fowl ledge or riffe off rocks, at least half ways over the haven's mouth, and at the side of it you cannot use the lead. When you are passed the ledge or riffe that lieth off from the east shore, you must run in about it, and edge in somewhat to the e. shore, and sail in alongst by it until that you are past, or come to the end of the foresaid ledge or riffe off rocks, which lieth off from the west shore, as soon as you shall be passed it, you must luffe up about it towards the west shore, for to give the e. shore (within the haven's mouth) a birth, which is a great ways within very flat or shoal, but on the w. side it is deep water. There standeth a little Tower on the w. shore a little within the point, where the riffe lieth off, which you shall see when you are come within the west point, and run alongst by the riffe, when you get that little tower w. or thwart of you, then are you at the end of the riffe, than you must sail towards that little Tower, until that you come to the w. shore, and run in alongst by it, until you come before the Town, there you must lie with an anchor to seawards, and with a cable fast on the rocks.  
A little league to the w. wards of Ribadeus lieth a tydehaven, he that cometh from the w. alongst by the shore thwart of it, should lightly think that to be the haven of Ribadeus, but it is light to discern from it by these marks following. On both sides of this tydehaven are the coasts all high land, but on both sides of the haven's mouth of Ribadeus, it is low land. Also there lieth a high sharp hill & very easy to be known, which ariseth out above all other hills thereabouts, which may be known at least 7 or 8 leagues off, upon it lie some heaps of stones appearing like little houses when that you have that hill s. s.w. from you, sail in so right with it, than you shall be with the land right before the haven's mouth of Ribadeus.  
Northwest from Ribadeus about 8 leagues, lieth the Cabo de Brilo, a little to the westwards of it lieth the little town Viverus. 
Viverus.  To the westwards off the Bay off Cyspriaen (where men may anchor in ten fathom) lie two great high rocks: w. north w. from these rocks about a half league lieth the Island S. Cyprian, right before the haven of Viverus, whereby this haven is easy to beknowne you may sail about on both sides off this Island into the haven off Viverus, in all alongst in the middle of the channel south and south and by w. until you come before the town, being within, you may anchor where you will either on the e. or w. side, it is there shoal water of 5, 6, 7, & 8 fathom, according as you run fare in.  

Of the Tides and Courses and streams.  
Upon the Coasts of Biscay we find no run of streams, but a south e. and north w. moon maketh upon the whole coast the highest water, but within the Rivers a point later.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Saint Sebastiaen to Gateria west and by north 7 leagues.  
From Gateria to C. Martinchaco west and by north 5 leagues.  
From C. Martinchaco to Castro w. s. w. 9 leagues.  
From C. Martinchaco to M. S. Antony, west and by south 13 leagues.  
From M. S. Antony to S. Andero or Lalata west and by south 4 and a half leagues.  
From S. Andero to Rio de Sella west somewhat souherly 16 leagues.  
From Rio de Sella to C. de Pinas. w. & by n. 21 leagues.  
From C. de Pinas to Avilles southsouth w. 3 leagues.  
From Luarca to Ribadeus w. s. w. 5 leagues.  
From Ribadeus to C. de Brilo n. w. 8 leagues.  
From C. de Brilo to Isle de S. Cipriaen n. w. 3 leagues.  
From C. de Pinas to Ribadeus south west and by west 13 leagues.  
From Cape Martinchaco to Arcason north e. easterly, 28 leagues.  
From C Martinchaco to Use, n. easterly 60 leagues.  
From S. Andero to the Seams n. n. w. 92 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to the Tower of Cordan e. n. e. & north e. and by e. 75 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Porthus or S. Martin's Island, the course is n. e. easterly 80 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Bell-Isle, the course is north n. e. 80 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to the Seams n. 81 leagues.  
From Cape Pinas to Cabo de Veilli in Ireland north and by w. westerly 170 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Ortegall w. & by north westerly 29 leagues.    

Heights.  

Bayone lieth in 43 degrees, 46 min.  
The Cape Martinchaco lieth in 43 degr. 46 or 48 min.  
The C. de Pinas lieth in 43 degrees, 52 or 53 min.  
The whole coast of Biskaye betwixt Cape de Pinas and Martinchaco, lieth in about 43 degrees, and 43, 44, or 45 minutes.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

C. Martinchaco Keysers' land  
Thus showeth the C. Martinchaco and the land to the e. wards of it.  
To the w. wards of Bilbao towards Castro, men shall see a high sharp hill and showeth thus towards Castro.  
Thus showeth the land to the e. wards of Bilbao, when men fall there with the land.  
Porto Galetto white point.  
Steep point C. Martinchaco The eastermost point of Bilbao.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt the Cape Martinchaco and Bilbao.  
Porto Galetto S. Antonio C. Kesgo.  
Thus showeth Bilbao and the land to the w. wards of it, when you are thwart of it.  
Outrock, like as if there stand two men upon it Bilbao  
When the sharp hill over against the haven of Bilbao is south and by w. from you, than the land showeth, as in this and the following figure may be seen the AA belong one to the other.  
Castro  
Laredo  
Thus showeth the hill of S. Antonio lying at the w. side of Laredo.  
The hill of S. Antonio showeth thus, when it lieth s. s. e. from you.  
The land to the eastwards of Laredo, being south from you, sheweth thus with a sharp hill.  
S. Antony  
Sand-bay.  
Cape Kesgo.  
The land betwixt the west point of Bilbao, and C. Kesgo to the westwards of Mount S. Antonio, sheweth at sea when you sail alongst by it, as is portrayed in these two figures here above.  
Thus showeth the land of Biskaye betwixt Laredo and Rio de Sella, when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the Land from Rio de Sella of, to Cabo de Pinas, when you sail alongst by it.  
These four figures following belong one to the other, the like letters, as AA, BB, CC, one to the other, and is the coast from the eastwards of C. Vincent to C. de Finas.  
S. Vincent. Rio Sello.  
Thus showeth the land from the e. wards of S. Vincent until past Rio de Sella, when the hill with the three hills is four leagues thwart from you, and Rio de Sella is four leagues south-west from you.  
Cape Kesgo Villa Viciosa Sand-bay Sand-bay  
Thus showeth C. Kesgo, Villa Viciosa, and the land to the westwards of them, when C. Kesgo is w. 4 leagues, and Villa Viciosa four or five leagues southsouthwest from you.  
Sansoen  
Sand-bay  
Thus showeth the land of Biskaye, when you are thwart of Gion.  
This is the remainder of the three former figures, the CC, being joined together.  
Channel to Tores.  
Thus showeth the land when you are by Tores.  
The three figures following one to the other, the like letters one to the other, and show the rising of the land on both sides of the Cape de Pinas, to wit, when the Cape Pinas is about four leagues south, somewhat westerly, and the great hill to the eastwards of it is south e. from you.  
Southeast.  
This hill lieth most commonly covered with snow.  
C. Pinas.  
Thus showeth the land of Avilles, when you are thwart of it.  
These three figures following belong one to the other, at the like letters one to the other, and show the rising of the land betwixt C. de Pinas and Ribadeus, when you sail alongst close by the land.  
This is the eastermost towards C. de Pinas. when the land against Z, is south from you.  
Thus showeth that land against Z, being south from you not fare off.  
Ribadeus.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Luarca and Ribadeus.  
These two figures following belong one to the other at the AA, together.  
Thus showeth Ribadeus, when you are thwart of from it about a half league from the shore.  
Thus showeth the land to the westwards of Ribadeus, when the hill by S, is south from you, and followeth to the former figure.  
These three figures following belong one to the other, at AA, and BB, and show the rising of the land about Ribadeus, and to the westwards of it.  
Thus showeth Ribadeus, when the hill to the westwards of it, marked here with P, is south and by east from you, four leagues.  
This belongeth to the former, the AA, one to the other.  
Thus followeth the two former figures to the westwards of Ribadeus, the BB, one to the other.     

The fifth Demonstration. Which Delineateth the Seacoasts of Gallissia and Portugal, between the Island of S. Cypriaen, and Camina.  
FRom the havens of Viverus or from the Island S. Cyprean to C. de Ortegall, the course is w. and by n. nine leagues.  
Betwixt both, a league to the westwards of Viverus, lieth the little town of S. Marcus with a Bay, there men may anchor in 7 or 8 fathom, and ride for a s. s. w. and w. winds.  
Two great leagues to the westwards of S. Marcus lieth the river of Caryns, there is also good anchoring, and from thence forth unto the Castle of Ortegall; all the coast alongst it is there every where clean. From Caryns to Ortegall, the course is northwest, five leagues. Ortegall is a great point lying out, to the eastwards of it, men may lie land-lockt for a northwest, w. south-west, and south wind, thwart of the castle is the best road, there men may anchor in 8 or 9 fathom: When men come from the e. Ortegall is easy to beknowne, they shall see the castle stand against the high land.  
About a league northnorthwest into sea from the C. de Ortegall, 
C. Ortegall.  lieth a great rane off rocks: betwixt them and the foresaid Cape, men may sail through in ten fathom.  
From the Cape Ortegall to the C. Prior, the course is south-west ten leagues: betwixt them both lieth a Town called Sedaira, by the Dutch Shippers called Siverus, 
Siverus.  which hath a deep haven lying in southeast. The north side off the haven is rocky and fowl, which you must avoid, and run close in by the westland, which is a high land; alongst by it is 12 fathom deep, within the haven's mouth it is ten fathom deep, you may sail in until you come before the town, and anchor there in 6 or 7 fathom.  
Five leagues to the westwards of Sedeira lieth the C de Prior, 
C. Prior.  which is a very ragged hill, to see to a far off, as if it where full of people.  
Three leagues from the Cape de Prior, lieth the haven of Ferroll: betwixt them both lie two little sand-bayes, t●e southermost (where in stand some little white houses) is the greatest, and lieth a little to the northwards of the north point off Ferroll; when you come near the Bay, the haven beginneth to open itself, it lieth e.n.e. and e. & by n. in, amids the channel betwixt two high lands: when you come in, you must presently edge up to the northwards by the north point and anchor there a little to the westwards of the village it is flat and rocky ground,  
When you come from the west, or from the Groin, and will sail into the haven of ferol, 
For to sail into Ferol from the southward.  then go away from the little Island S. Blasius north, and north and by west, and run a good ways about, without the south point of ferol; which is very fowl and rocky until that you see the haven open, go then yet so fare to the northwards of the southwards of the south point, until that the haven do shut again, and run then right in with the foresaid greatest sand-bay, where in stand the two or three little white houses to the northwards off the haven, until that you be within the south point, and the fowl grounds which lie off from it; sail then right to the north point of the haven, & alongst by it towards the south side, until that haven do open itself again, and run then (as before) alongst in the midst of the channel. This haven is so narrow in the coming in, that you may cast a stone upon the land on both sides, and in that narrow it is 20 fathom deep. When you are in the haven's mouth, you may see through betwixt the Island Sisarga, and the main land to the s. wards of it.  
To sail from ferol to the Groin, 
For to sail into the Groin.  the course is south, and south and by west 3 leagues, when you come near the westland, you must give it a birth, at least of four or five Cables lengths, because it is not very clean. When you come by the point where the Castle standeth upon you shall see then also a little Island with a little house upon it, you may sail alongst by it within a half cables length, and run about by it up to the westwards, until you come before the Fisher village, and anchor there in six, seven, or eight fathom.  
From Cape de Prior to the Groin, the course is south and south and by west five leagues.  
Eastnortheast from the foresaid Island where the Castle standeth upon, goeth in a Sound southeast, five or six leagues within the land, to Bitanze, 
Haven of Bitanze.  where you may anchor on the west side under a row of rocks, in 10 or 12 fathon, al●o you may sail so deep in, that you can see no sea.  
To the northwards of that Sound, over against the point of the Groin, lieth also an other haven or Sound, called Ponte de Mas, 
Ponte de Mas.  on the north side lieth a row of rocks, where men run alongst to the southwards of them: men may also sail there so deep in, that they can see no sea. A good ways within lieth a great bridge over the river.  
He that cometh from the west off from the Island Cisarga & is bound into the Groin must give the north point, or the west point of the Groin (where the tower standeth) a birth of 4 or 5 cables lengths, as before is said, which point is rocky and fowl fare from the shore, and run then eastsoutheast, and southeast about by the point, and afterwards s. s.e. unto the little Island with the Castle and about by it, as is before said.  
The little Island Cisarga, 
Island Cisarga.  of the Dutchmen called Cesarie, is fowl round about, & lieth from the point of the Groin, due east and west distant 7 or 8 leagues, from the haven of ferol west and by south, from the C. Prior w. s.w. and south-west and by west, and from the C. de Ortegall south-west, and south-west and by west 18 or 19 leagues.  
From the Island Cisarga south and by west, and s. s. west lieth Queres, 
Queres.  a good haven also for great ships, the west shore is clean, but the east shore is fowl, therefore men must sail alongst by the west shore, when they are betwixt the two lands, than they must go in amids the channel, unto the point, and then run up to the westwards a great half league in, and anchor there in 7, 8, and nine fathom.  
From the Island Cisarga south-west and by west, and w. s.west 12 leagues lieth the east point of Monsie, called Cabo de Bylem, 
C. de Bylem.  which is a high steep point, with many ragged rocks lying of lose from the land, where of the greatest, being like a tower, doth show itself black, and is called the Monk.  
There lieth also a great rane off rocks right before the haven or sound of Monsie, south-west and by south from the Monk, at least two or three cables lengths long, but the innermost end of it lieth from the Monk south and by west. When men fall with the land of Monsie, it is all double land, about the Cape de Finesterre lieth a high white sand, lying in within the land sand-bay.  
Also men may see coming about the C. de Finisterre a ragged hill which runneth alongst so fare to the southwards that men may see it before the Moors.  
Caarte Vande custen van Galissien tusschen it Eylant van S. Cyprian en Camina  
He that is bound in for Monsie, 
M●●s e.  coming from Cisarga, must go in close alongst by the C. de Bylem, or Bellem: this point is altogether a ragged high sharp land of steep rocks, as before is said, and when you are by that point, than you must keep the Cape de Coriane a ships length without the C. de Koto, so long until that the Church of S. Maria come without the point of Monsie; run then in at the easter channel s. s.e. upon these marks, until you be past the Church, than you shall see a row of rocks, run in behind or within them, and anchor there before the village of Monsie in 5, 6, or 7 fathom When you sail thus from the cape de Bylem to Monsie, than the rocks (which lie in the midst before the Haven) remain about an Engelish mile to seawards on the west side of you.  
For to sail in at the wester channel, 
The Wester channel off Monsie.  you must go in e. s. e. indifferent near alongst by the land, and when the foresaid Ladies Church cometh without the point, than you must sail towards the Rocks, which lie before Monsie, as is be foresaid, and anchor within the rocks in 7 or 8 fathom, but run not too fare in, because there shooteth off a shoaly riffe alongst the Haven, where off you must take heed.  
The easter channel 
The easter channel of Monsye  is better to come into, than the wester channel, sail not into Monsie before that you see the foresaid Church without the point, you may also anchor on the n. side off the haven in 5, 6, or ● fathom.  
To the s. wards of the village of Monsie is a ●ay where the foresaid riff or shoal lieth before, lying e. n. e. at least 2 cables lengths alongst the Haven.  
Out Lady's Church & the Monk lie one from the other n. and by e. and s. and by w.  
Southwest from the cape de Bellem 3 leag lieth the Cape de Coriane. 
C. de Coriane.   
From cape de Coriane it is south and n. three leagues to Cape de Finisterre: betwixt the two capes is Sand-bay where men may anchor to the e. wards of a great rock in six or seven fathom. This is a great Bay which goeth in far into the land. At the n. side of this Bay lie rocks under water, where of men must take heed.  
About a league to the eastwards of cape de Finisterre on the south side, lieth the Haven of Seche 
Seche.  or Corcovia, 
Corco.  and is called by the Dutch Schippe-masters, Corck Bayone. 
Bayone.  Betwixt this Haven and the cape lie two sand-bayes, the first, or that which is next unto the cape, is the greatest, and by the second goeth in this Haven north, in eight and nine fathom. On the east side of the Haven lieth a great Rock, and about southsouthwest off from that Rock, almost in the midst of the Haven, lieth a sunken rock under water: but run in north until you espy the town on the west side, and anchor there in six or seven fathom. Within upon the River lieth also a Village, or little town, about n. north-east from you.  
From cape de Finisterre to the Haven off Moors, 
Moors.  the course is s. e. 5 great leagues, when you come about the Cape de Finisterre, you shall see a high ragged hill which runneth so fare to the southwards, that you may see it also before Mores, that is a good mark for to know the land by thereabouts.  
When the foresaid ragged Hill is N. e. from you, then are you thwart of Cape de Finisterre, and then the hill Monte Lauro, which lieth upon the n. e. point off Moors, lieth e. n. e. from you, that is a high cloven hill which is also good to know.  
Southeast three little leagues from the Cape de Finisterre, lieth a rane of rocks under water, and eastsoutheast about two leagues from these rocks, lie also some rocks above water a little to the northwards of Monte Lauro, or the Sound of Moors, and lie from Monte Lauro west and by s. Also there lie a deal of rocks to the s. wards of this Sound of Moors, and right in the midst of the Sound lieth also a sunken rock about s. e. off from Monte Lauro.  
He that will sail into Moors, he must bring Monte Lauro north-east and by north of him, 
For to sail into Moers.  and sail in so right with it, and then he shall not come too near the fowl ground or dangers: when he cometh then by Monte Lauro, he shall see the foresaid rocks lying out to the northwards off Monte Lauro, he must leave them as alsoo the point of Monte Lauro two or three cables lengths on the larboard side of him, and sail in so alongst by them, until that he come passed the second point; leaving the sunken rock (which lieth in the midst of the Sound) on the starboard side of him: and when the fisher village which stands to the northwards off Monte Lauro cometh to stand altogether bare, than he is within the sunken rock which lieth in the midst of the Sound south and by east easterly f●om the e. end of the foresaid Fisher village.  
When you come by the second point, you must run in about it within a cables length, and edge up to the northwards, until you come before the village, or up to the westwards before the town, where you please, and anchor there in 12 or 13 fathom.  
If you will sail into Rio Roxo, 
For to sail into Rio Roxo  then run about without the rocks, which lie to the southwards of the Moors, and go in southeast and by south, until that you come before the Haven of Rio Rosso, or Roxo, than you shall see a great many off rocks, lying off from the north land, almost unto a great rock, or Island, called Salure: betwixt these rocks that lie out there, and the Island Salure, you may well run through about to the northwards of the Island, but it is very narrow, by re●son of the aforesaid rocks, which lie of from the north land, therefore sail about to the southwards of the same Island, indifferent close alongst by it, leaving it on the larboard side, or to seawards of you until that you see the Sound open, and then run in keeping the middle of the channel, unto that Island Roxo, which you shall see lie in the midst of the haven, when you come near it, you may anchor under the s. land, there are two Sand-bayes, where is good anchor ground.  
About two leagues south-west from Rio Roxo lieth a sunken rock, John Claesz. Bors of Sardam, did sail upon it, and there lost his ship the 20 of February 1613. in the night.  
From Rio Roxo, or the Island Salure, unto Ponto Vedra, 
Ponte Vedra.  or the Island Blydones, the course is southsoutheast four leagues, betwixt them both it lieth an Island called Monte Carbela; 
M. ●●rbela Blydones.  within it, is three fathom deep. Right before the haven of Ponte Vedra lieth the Island Blydones, which men may sail round about. On the north side it is not deeper than five or six fathom. There lie also within the Sound, on the north side two rocks called the Boos or Oxen. On the south side of Blydones is the right fareway for to sail into Ponte Vedra, this haven lieth in north-east until within the Island; somewhat further in the midst on the haven lieth also another little Island, which you must also go to the southwards of, therefore go in eastnortheast alongst by south-land, until that you see the flat tower which standeth upon the south-land, and then you must run over a bank, right on with the point of Ponte Vedra, within it lieth the town, twhart off the flat tower men may anchor in 8 or 9 fathom: This haven is at some places four fathom deep.  
Five leagues to the s. wards of the Islands of Blydones lie the Islands of Bayone, 
Islands of Bayone.  when men come in out of the sea, right with them, than these Islands do seem to be all grey and black rocks, and lie to see to, as if they were three Islands, although that the sea do run through them, but at one place, betwixt each is a saddle or valley.  
Within the land alongst over these Islands, men shall see two high hills very easy to be known, the eastermost hath three high hommocks, and the westermost two with valleys betwixt the hommocks; a little to the eastwards off the eastermost hill men shall see a white. Abbey stand against the high land, whereby this land is very easy to be known.  
You may sail within these Islands of Bayone either to the northwards 
For to sail into Bayone. From the northwards.  or to the southwards; but at the north e. point of the Islands lieth a rock under water, about a cables length off from them, where of you must take heed, & anchor in 10, 11, or 12 fathom on the east side of the Islands.  
He that will sail in to the northwards, must run in betwixt the Islands and the main land, keeping near about the middle off the channel, but nearest to the Islands until that the Sound off Vigo, or Cannas be open, and then sail in to the eastwards there is a broad Sound, where men may anchor on both sides, to wit, on the south side before Vigo. 
Vigo  and on the north side before Cannas 
Cannae.  in twelve or thirteen fathom.  
Also men may sail further in about the south point of Rondella, where men may save a ship in the oaze, without anchor or cables.  
At the point of Vigo lieth a little Island, he that cometh in to the northwards of the Islands, and is bound in for Bayone, may sail through betwixt that little Island and the point Vigo, right in with Bayone, to wit, a●●●●st a little to the westwards of the point, until he ●●me before the town, and anchor there in 4, 5, or 6, fathom.  
Betwixt that foresaid little Island, and the point of Vigo, it is at high water 4 fathom and a half, & at low water three fathom and a half deep, men must (sailing through there) give the point off Vigo a birth, because of some sunken rocks that lie off from it. When as men lie in the road before Bayone, in 5 or 6 fathom, they may see the Islands of Blydones through betwixt the foresaid point of Vigo, and that little Island.  
From that same little Island lieth to the westwards another little Island or rock, betwixt them both it is fowl, so that men cannot sail through betwixt them, and from that westermost little Island lieth a fowl riffe ot ledge of rocks, s. w. off towards the point of the land off Bayone, where of men must take very good heed, whether you come from the n. wards & will sail through betwixt that riffe & the Islands off Bayone, or else come in from the s. wards, betwixt the Islands and the main, and will go in for Bayone.  
That riffe lieth at low water in many places dry, the outermost rocks thereof, and the point of Bayone, where the Castle standeth upon, lie southeast and southeast and by east, and northwest and northwest and by west an English mile asunder, therefore he that cometh from the northwards, and will go into Bayone to the westwards off that riffe, that is betwixt the riffe ●nd the Islands let him go so long to the southwards, 〈◊〉 that the Castle of Bayone come to be e. s.e. and 〈…〉 by south from him, and sail then towards it, 〈◊〉 than he shall run fare enough alongst to the southwards of it.  
At the south end of the Island of Bayone, lieth a great rock, with a deal of small rocks round about it, men may sail very close alongst by them, but at high water the outermost rocks lie under water, where of men mus● be mindful, close by the rocks it is 20, and 25, and 26, fathom deep. From the point of the main land over against the south end of the Islands, runneth off a ledge of rocks, whereupon it breaketh very much, when the sea is grown, where of also men must take heed.  
When you come from the southwards, or out of the sea, and will sail in for Bayone, about to the southwards of the Islands with a southerly or south-west wind, then run right with the south point of the outermost land of Bayone, 
Island of Bayone.  until you come near about a half league of the land, and then alongst by the shore, unto the outer point on the south side of the coming into the Bay, where that foresaid riffe runneth of, which lieth off low, give that riffe a birth, and run in betwixt it and the foresaid rocks at the end of the Islands, north-east, or eastnortheast in, according as you shall come in out of the sea; leaving the riffe on starboard, and the rocks with the Islands on the larboard side until that you come to the end, or to the n. wards of the riffe, the north end, or the outtermost point of that riffe at the s. point, and the point Bayone where the Castle standeth upon, lie nearest e. and by north, and w. and by south a little league asunder. When as then you have the foresaid riffe (on the south side) upon your broad side, or else are too the northwards of it; and that the Castle do stand east, or thereabouts from you, go then right in with the Castle leaving that foresaid other riffe (which lieth off south-west from the little Islands at the point of Vigo) on the larboard side of you. If you bring the point of the Castle not to the southwards of e. s. e. then you cannot take any hurt of the northermost riffe.  
The outer rocks of that northermost riffe, (which shooteth off from the two foresaid little Islands) and the riffe which shooteth off from the south point of the land of Bayone, where men must sail through betwixt lie one from the other south-west, and south-west and by south, and north-east and north-east and by north about an English mile asunder. When you come near the Castle, then come not very near the shore, which is not very clean, and when, as than you come thwart of the innermost point of the Castle before that you begin to see the Town of Bayone, from behind the point, you must look well out before you: for from that same innermost point, and from the Castle, there lieth off a sunken rock about half a cables length from the foresaid point, whereupon remaineth at low water no more than nine or ten foot water, keep therefore (thwart off it) somewhat off from the point. When as you begin to see the Town off Bayone, then luffe up suddenly south and sail before the Town, and anchor there in five or six fathom, where you please, or else that the points of the Castle come against the westermost Island of the two which lie off from the north point of the Bay, or point of Vigo, there it is good oasie ground that holdeth well, set your anchors when you moor, northwest and south-west, the best anchor to the southeast; from thence over the high land you shall have commonly the hardest winds.  
If you must turn too & again into the bay, 
For to sail into Vigo or Cannae from the southwards.  then take very good heed, when you run off from the Castle, that you run not to far over s. s.e. right before the Town, s. e. and by east, & e. s.e. from the road about a musketshot, lieth another sunken rock, which at low water is even uncovered, it lieth a small cables length off from a little point in the south point of the Bay, whereupon standeth a little house, appearing a fare of like a great green rock; you must be very careful of it; especially when you run over towards the southsoutheast.  
But he that is bound into Vigo or Cannae to the south wards of the Islands, shall sail in betwixt that southermost Island and the point of the land of Bayone, all alongst in the middle of the channel, north-east, or north-east and by north in, at least two great leagues, keeping the norther haven two ships lengths open, so long until Cannas come to the north-land without the point of Vigo: and then he must leave the point of Vigo on the starboard side of him, & run in (keeping the middle of the channel) betwixt the northland and the Town Vigo, and anchor there either before Cannas or Vigo, where he pleaseth in ten or twelve fathom,  
A little to the northwards of Camina, lieth on the coast a high steep hill, above in the top with a cleft or saddle, being called S. Rego, 
S. Rego.  it is almost of fashion like Monte Lauro, but at least once so high again, this hill is a very good mark for to know the places thereabouts About half ways betwixt this hill and Bayone, lieth an Abbey upon the side of the land, that is also a good mark for to know Bayone for him that cometh from the southwards, but the chiefest marks are the two foresaid high Hills within Bayone, the one with two, the other with-three hommocks, when that with the three valleys or saddles is e. s.e. from you run in then right with it, you shall not fail to fall with the land, right with the Islands.  
Five leagues to the southwards of the Islands of Bayone, lieth the haven of Comina, a broad haven, where you must go in (with great ships) at the highest water. In the haven's mouth, which lieth in north-east and by east, lieth a rock nearest the south side; close to the northwards of this rock, is the deepest water, for to sail in or out. Within in the haven, on the north side, lieth a little Island, and upon it standeth a little Tower, you must keep that over the Tower, which standeth upon the north land, and so must run in right with them.  
In this haven's mouth is at half flood two fathom water.  
At the north side of the haven it is altogether shoal water, and very rocky and fowl: there shooteth off a ledge of rocks or riffe where of men must take good heed.  

Of the tides & courses of the streams.  
On these coasts, as on the former, a south-west & north-east moon maketh high water.  
A south-west and north-east moon maketh full sea at the foresaid places, on the sea-coast, & within the havens a point later.  
A north-east and south-west Moon maketh on these coasts full sea, like as on all the coasts lying on the great sea, there go also no streams alongst the land, because (through the swelling off the Ocean sea) the flood cometh right on against the coasts, and falleth right in and out at the Havens.   

How these lands do lie one from the other, and from other lands.  

From Cape Ortegall to Siverus s. w. 5 leagues.  
From Siverus to Cape de Prior s. w. 5 leagues.  
From Cape de Prior to ferol south and by east 3 leag.  
From ferol to the Groin south, & south and by west, 3 leagues.  
From the Groin to Cisarga 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Cisarga to Queres, south and by west, and south south west 2 leagues  
From Cisarga to cape de Bylem, or the east point off Monsy, south-west and by west, and westsouthwest, 12 leagues.  
From Cape de Bylem to C. de Coriane, or Torrivian south-west 3 leagues.  
From Cape de Coriane to Cape de Finisterre s. 3 leagues.  
From Cape de Ortegall to Cape de Prior south-west, 10 leagues.  
From Cape de Ortegall to Cisarga south-west and south-west and by west 19 leagues.  
From Cape de Prior to Cisarga south-west and by west, 8 leagues.  
From ferol to Cisarga west and by south 8 leagues.  
From Cape de Ortegall to Cape de Coriano south-west & by west 33 leagues.  
From Cape de Ortegall to Waterford in Ireland north, 168 leagues.  
From Cisargo to Cape Veio north 160 leagues.  
From Cisarga to Silly north and by east 137 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Moors, or Monte Lauro southeast 5 leagues.  
From Rio Roxo to Ponto Vedra s. s. e. 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Ponte Vedra, or Blydones, to the Islands off Bayone s. s.e. 5 leagues.  
From Bayone to Camina south and by east 4 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Island of Bayone the course is s. e. and by s. 20 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Port a Port s. s. e. 42 leag.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Avero south & by east and s. s.east 53 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Burlings south 67 leag.  
From C. de Finisterre to the great Canaries s. s.w. southerly 307 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Savages southsouthwest 273 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Isle of Madera south-west & by west southerly 197 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Isle S. Michael west south-west 247 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Isle Tercera w. s.w. and w. & by south 278 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the s. w. point of Ireland n. and by west and n. 173 leag.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Cape de Claro North, 173 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Waterford, or to the Southeast point of Ireland, north and by east 185 or 186 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Lizard northnortheast, 153 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Seams, n.e. and by n. northerly 112 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Bell-Isle n.e. 122 leagues.  
From Bayone to the Burlings s. and by w. 49 leagues.    

Heights.  

Cape de Ortegall lieth in 44 degrees 5 min.  
Cape de Coriane in 43 degr. 8 min.  
The Cape de Finisterre lieth in 43 degrees.  
Bayone lieth in 42 degr. 10 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

These 2 figures following belong at crosses one to the other, & show the rising of the Land, a little to the e. wards off the Cape Ortegall, when the point marked with D, is 5 or 6 leagues e. and by s. or e. s. e. from you, and the hill marked with E, is s. s. w. from you westerly.  
Cape Ortegall.  
When Ortegall is s. e. from you, it showeth itself thus.  
Thus showeth Ortegall, when it lieth s. e. and by s. from you.  
Thus ariseth Ortegall, when the eastermost hill lieth s. s. e. from you, and that you may see the east end with clear sight, being eight, nine, or ten leagues off at sea.  
C. Ortegall.  
These two figures belong at the double cross, one to the other, and show the Cape Ortegall, with the land to the westwards of it, when the foresaid Cape is east and by south five or 6 leagues from you.  
The land to the eastwards of the Groin showeth thus, when it is south and by east from you.  
Cape Prior the east point of the Groin ariseth in this form.  
Cape Prior being south-west from you 6 or 7 leagues showeth itself thus.  
Cape Prior, being south-west & by south from you 4 or 5 leagues, showeth itself thus.  
C. Prior.  
When the Cape de Prior is east and by north, easterly, 3 or 4 leagues from you, it ariseth in this form.  
Thus showeth the Island of Cisarga, when you are one league thwart from it.  
Thus showeth the land of Monsie, betwixt Cisarga & Cape de Finisterre, when you come from the east, and sail alongst by it.  
When Cape de Finisterre is southsoutheast from you, than it showeth thus.  
The Cape de Finisterre, being southeast southerly from you, showeth itself thus.  
Thus showeth Cape de Finisterre when it is southeast easterly from you.  
When Cape de Finisterre is southeast & by east you five or six leagues then it showeth itself thus.  
Thus doth Cape de Finisterre show itself, when it lieth 5 or 6 legaves east and by south from you.  
Moninck.  
These three figures following belong one to the other, at the letter AA, and BB, and show the rising of the Capes de Coriane and Finisterre, as is showed in the description here under following.  
The Cape de Finisterre showeth itself with the land to the southwards of it, as is portrayed in this & the figure following, when the Ragged hill standeth east from you 3 or 4 leagues, & then you shall see the land to the northwards of it, unto Cape Coriane, north-east, unto past Cape Coriane, in form, as in the figure before this.  
This followeth the former, and lieth from the Cape of southeast and by south.  
Thus showeth the Cape de Finisterre, when the ragged hill lieth eastnortheast easterly from you, and then the land of Moors lieth from you eastnortheast, as is here following demonstrated.  
Thus showeth the ragged hill of the Cape de Finisterre, when it lieth east and by north from you.  
When the Cape de Finisterre lieth north-east from you, and the land of Moor's eastnortheast, 6 leagues from you, than lieth the Cape in three parts, and the land of Moors thus.  
When the ragged Hill betwixt the Cape de Finisterre and Moores lieth east and by north from you six leagues off, than it showeth thus.  
When the high land off Moors is north-east & by north from you about 6 leagues, than it riseth in this form.  
Monte Lauro. The high land of Moors.  
When Cape de Finisterre is north-east or northnortheast, and Monte Lauro is eastnortheast 5 leagues from you the high land of Moors showeth itself thus.  
Island of Bayone.  
Thus show themselves the Jslands of Bayone, and the high land to the southwards of them, when the foresaid Islands are eastsoutheast, a league or two from you.  
Bayone Abbey S. Rego.  
When the point of Bayone is eastnortheast, and the high land is east from you, than it riseth thus, to the southwards of it lieth the high Hill of S. Rego.  
Bayone Abbey S. Rego.  
When the high Hill S. Rego is east from you, than the high land of Bayone showeth itself thus. Thus Abbey standeth about half ways betwixt S. Rego & Bayone.     

The sixth Demonstration, Where in Are showed the Coasts of Portugal, from Camina to Passage.  
SEven leagues to the southwards of Camina lieth Viana 
Viana.  upon a river. From the north point lieth off a ledge off rocks thwart over before the mouth of the river, and upon the south shore, stand two Firetowers. If you will sail in to this river off Viana, coming from the northwards, or out of the sea, than ran so long to the southwards until that the two foresaid Firetowers upon the south side of the rivers mouth, come one to the other, and then run in right with them towards the strand, until that the little Tower upon the north-land come over the two houses; keep them one to the other, and run then to the rock with the mast, and sail alongst close to the eastward of it, and then you run in alongst over the Bar or the shoalest of the rivers mouth, there is at low water with an ordinary tide two fathom depth. When you are passed the foresaid rock with the mast than you shall see yet a head another rock with a mast or beacon, which lieth on the north side of the river: run in like wise close alongst to the southwards of it, and afterwards indifferent close alongst by the north-land, until you come before the Town, there runneth of sometimes a little riffe which you must give a birth to, and anchor before the town. When you lie before the town, there lieth a little Island to the southwards of you, where upon standeth a little Chapel: to the westwards of that little Island lieth a great Bank, which at low water is uncovered, behind that bank it is five and six fathom, and before Viana seven, eight, and nine fathom deep; when you come in, they may run in about to the southwards of this foresaid Bank, and come out again before the town, by the little Island, where the little house standeth upon.  
When you come in about a bow shot within the second rock with the mast, there you may well let fall your anchor and bring Cables on the south shore, and moor there by four cables.  
Men may anchor without in the road in 12 fathom, there is the cleanest ground for to take in a Pilot. It is a narrow and dangerous bar for to come into.  
From Viana to Port a Port, the course is south & by east 12 or 13 leagues, betwixt both lieth Villa del Conde, 
Villa del Conde.  seven leagues from Viana and from Metelyn. Villa del Conde is a broad haven, before the haven mouth lie many rocks, where men may sail in about them on both sides, to the northwards or to the southwards of them it is five and six fathom deep; further in lieth a bank thwart over the haven of two fathom at high water: within in the haven it is 3 or 4 fathom deep, on the n. side it is all full of rocks, which lie most under water, but on the south side it is deepest & surest, and good lying in five and six fathom.  
Four leagues to the southwards of Villa del Conde lie out the great rocks, 
Rocks.  called Lesons, 
Lesons.  right before a little Broad haven of two fathom depth, called Metelyn, and south-west from the south point of the foresaid rocks Lesons; about a half league to seawards, lieth a sunken rock under water: betwixt the land & the Lesons it is 6 and seven fathom deep.  
A league to the southwards off the rocks Leson lieth Port a Port. 
Port a Port.  From the north point of the rivers mouth lie off many rocks, almost thwart over the channel. For to sail in there, you must run in close alongst to the southwards of the outermost rock, even so near by it that you may cast with a stone upon it. There standeth a little Chapel upon the north shore right against the rock with the cross, and also a little white house upon the north shore somewhat further up upon the river, bring them one in the other, and run in so right with them until you be passed the Castle. In sailing in so, you shall not find less upon the shoalest of the Bar, than 17 or 18 foot water at half flood, & shall not come too near a sunken rock, which lieth without in the river's mouth, somewhat nearer the south shore then the north, whereupon there remaineth at low water no more than 11 or 12 foot water. Being within the Castle, go then right towards the rock with the cross, and so close alongst to the southwards of it, that you may reach it with a boat hoock, or else you must run in three or 4 ships lengths to the the southwards off it, or alongst by the south-land, until you be passed the rock with the cross, for to avoid a sunken rock, which lieth thwart of it a little to the southwards of it, and at low water is no more than eight foot under water. Being a little past the rock with the cross, go then up alongst in the middle of the channel, until you come thwart of a great white Tower upon the north-land, there you may anchor in 4 or 5 fathom, or sail before the Town, here it is 3 & 4 fathom deep. A little past the rock with the cross is a shoal, whereupon remaineth at low water no more than 11 foot water, so that with ships that draw 12 foot water, men must stay for high water, it floweth there six foot up and down with an ordinary tide.  
On the south side of the river goeth in also a Land-d●ep to the southwards of the foresaid sunken rock, which lieth in the river's mouth, where the Pilots sometimes bring ships in and out, that is a good channel, and oftentimes it is east too again of the sea, so that there is no certainty to be written of it, that men should trust upon.  
From Port a Port to Avero, the course is south, ten leagues: betwixt them both it is all alongst a clean sandstrand, where men may be bold to come near the shore every where in ten or twelve fathom.  
Within the land upon the high land lieth a black hommock in the land, when that lieth eastsoutheast from you, than you are open before Avero: when you cannot see the black hommock Carmole, then lieth there a rough sandhill to the northwards of the Bar, when that is thwart of you, then are you a half league to the northwards of the Bar of Avero.  
If you will sail in over the Bar of Avero, and that you come before it in six or seven fathom, then take heed to three beakons made off mast, which stand upon the south-land, bring them one in the other, and sail in so right with them east and by south, and e. s.e. in over the bar, there is coming in, at half tide, no more than two fathom water, until rhat you come by the beakons, you shall so (being come within the points) sail alongst by a dry sand on the larboard side, edge then up northnortheast, and northwest about by that foresaid dry sand, until you come close to the norther land, and run in by it, and then you shall leave all the other shoals on the starboard side, until that you see the river open, and then you shall see a little house upon the strand on the west side, go then from thence up into the river, east and by south, and eastsoutheast, keeping the middle off the channel betwixt the two lands, until you come before the Saltponds or Avero, where you may lad your ship with salt.  
Cust van PORTUGAL it Noordelyckste deel beginnende van Viana tot aen Pissage.  
Betwixt Viana, Villa del Conde, and Port a Port, men shall see alongst the coast many towers and little houses, Villa del Conde men shall see at sea like a great Town,  
The River of Port a Port men may know by the rocks Lesons, they are very high, and lie a little to the northwards of the River.  
The Cape de Montego is a high point, and within it in the land are high mountains. The Cape is sometimes taken to be the Rock, but is easy to be discerned from it, because of the Burling, which lie here to the s. wards, & to the n. wards of the rock.  
The Cape de Montego lieth from Avero s. s.w. distant 7 leagues: a league to the southwards off it lieth Pissage, or the River of Montego, a broad haven. From the Cape de Montego runneth off a fowl ledge of Rocks, a good ways from the shore, which men must avoid. Under the Cape men may ride for northerly wind● in 7 or 8 fathom a northnorthwest wind cometh right from the point, for southerly winds men may anchor to the southwards off the river of Montego.  
From the south point of the river runneth off a sand riffe when you sail in there, and that you come in out of the sea, it showeth as if you might sail in●o the s. wards of that riffe, but it is not to be done: you must sail into the northwards of it. Upon the north point standeth the little village S. Catharina, & a little to the northwards of it a Fisher village, called Buarcos. Upon the north side within the havensmouth standeth a lime kilne, with a wood of Figtrees, when you bring them one in the other, and then sail so right in with them, you run in right in the channel, there is sometimes no more than twelve or thirteen foot water at a half flood: you may not certainly trust to the description of this haven; for in regard it is there sandground, it doth shift sometimes with the great Freshut that come off the River, and alsoo with storms out of the sea. From Cape de Montego to Peniche, or Nova Lisbona, (at the Cabo del Fisiron, which is the point within the Burling) the course is south-west and by south ten leag. there lieth of a rock from the point, to the southwards of it is a great bay, where men may run in behind it with barks, & lie landlockt. In that bay lieth a little town against the high land called Artogie, a little to the southwards of the Cape del Fisiron lieth a high round hommock, which the Dutchmen call young Roxent.  
From the cape Montego to the Burling; the course is s. w. 12 or 13 leagues. Behind the Burling is a good road & anchor ground, under the great Island before the Hermitage, there you may anchor in ten fathom, you may come in there from the northwards or from the southwards, it is there broad & wide, & very where clean.  

Of the Tides and Courses and streams.  
A south-west & north-east Moon maketh at all these places (on the sea side) high water, and within in the havens a point or two later according as they lie fare within the land.  
As on all the coasts of Portugal, even so here alsoo on these coasts a s. w. & n. e. moon maketh the highest water.  
A s. w. and n.e. Moon maketh on these coasts full sea, within the havens a point or two later, according as they lie far within the land.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Camina to Viana s. s. e. 7 leagues.  
From Viana to Villa del Conde s. & by e. 6 leagues.  
From Villa del Conde to Port a Port south and by east 6 leagues.  
From Port a Port to Avero south 11 leagues.  
From Avero to Cape de Montego s. s. w. 7 leagues.  
From Port a Port to the Burlings s. s. w. and south w. & by south 31 leagues.  
From Avero to the Burlings s. w. 20 leagues.  
From Cape de Montego to Peniche, or Cape del Fisiron s. w. & by s. 12 leagues.  
From Cape de Montego to the Burlings s. w. 13 leagues.    

Heights.  

Port a Port lieth in 41 degrees. 5 min.  
Avero in 40 degrees. 30 min.  
Cape de Montego lieth in 40 degrees. 14 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

S. Rego.  
Thus showeth the coast of Portugal from Bayone to Cape de Montego, when you sail alongst by it, about 4 leagues off, the figure following belongeth hereto, at the crosses one to the other.  
Cape de Montego.  
When that black Hommock where the H standeth by, is eastsoutheast from you, then are you thwart off, or open before Avero.  
The high Land of Viana.  
Thus showeth the Land of Viana, and to the southwards of it the Hommock by B is 2 leagues to the northwards of Villa del Conde.  
The high Land of Viana  
The land by Viana, and to the southwards of it towards Villa del Conde, showeth as is portrayed in this and the figure following, by V, is the River's mouth of Viana.  
Ville del Conde.  
This followeth the former figure, the Hommock at C, is two leagues to the northwards of Villa del Conde.  
The high land of Viana.  
Thus showeth the foresaid land of Viana, & to the southwards of it, when Viana, (being by A) is north-east from you 10 leagues.  
Mettelyne thwart from you.  
Rocks about a league to the north of Mettelyne. Rocks off Mettelyne.  
Thus showeth the land by Mettelyne, when Mettelyne is thwart from you and that you are close by the land.  
Castle on the north side of Port a Port, when you come from the northward by the land The land to the northwards of Port a Port.  
This figure belongeth to the fo●mer, & showeth the form of the land by Port a Port, and to the southwards of it, when you come from the southwards, you shall see a little village, within the castle of Port a Port, called S. john. A league to the northwards of it lieth Mettelyn.  
The Land to the southwards of Port a Port. Avero. Abbey.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Port a Port and Avero, when the high land to the southwards of Port is east and by south from you 4 leagues.  
Thus showeth the land of Port, when you come from the southwards.  
Thus showeth the land of Port a Port, when it is eastsoutheast from you about 4 leagues.  
Viana Villa del Conde. Port a Port  
Thus showeth the land from the northwards of Viana to Port a Port, when you sail alongst by it.  
Port  
When Port a Port is southeast from you seven or eight leagues, than it showeth with the land to the northwards of it in this form.     

The seventh Demonstration, In which The sea Coasts of Portugal, from Pissage to S. Uves or Setubal are deciphered.  
De Cust van PORTUGAEL Het Zuydlyckste deel, Beginnende van Pissage tot aen S. Vues alias Setubal.  
From the C. Montego to the Burling, the course is s. w. twelve or thirteen leagues. Behind the Burling is a good road & anchor ground, under the great Island before the Hermitage, than you may anchor in ten fathom, you may come in there from the northwards or from the southwards, it is there broad & wide, and every where clean.  
From the Burlings to the Rock, or Roxent, the course is south and by east, & southsoutheast sixteen leagues, but from the Cape del Fisiron (behind the Burling) to the Rock, the coast lieth south & north fifteen or sixteen leagues. The Rock or Roxent is a point of land, very easy to be known, although you be a great ways off, yet you shall always see the sharp hommock of the Abbey of Syntra.  
A great league to the eastwards of the point of Roxent, or the Rock, lieth the road of Cascalis, 
Cascalis.  where men may lie land-lockt for a northwest, north, & north-east wind, in 12 or 13 fathom, so deep or shoal as they will. A great league to the eastward of Cascalis, lieth the point of S. Julian, or S. Gillian's 
S. Gillians or S. Gilliens  whereupon standeth a strong castle, that is the north point of the River of Lisbon, the norther channel of the River goeth in within a bowls cast alongst by it.  
For to sail into the norther channel, 
For to sail in at the norther channel.  you must run in, alongst within the length off a mast alongst by the foresaid point, but coming before the castle of S. Gillian's, you must edge somewhat over towards the Carack deep, for to avoid some fowl ground and rocks, which lie on the east side of the Castle. Being past that a little, you may luffe up again towards the northter shore and sail alongst by it to Restiers, & so forth even to Lisbon, men do commonly anchor before the Village of Bolyn in twelve or thirteen fathom. Men must take heed not to come into this channel with calm weather, and with an ebb, which falleth very strong upon the norther Cachops: this channel of S. Gillian's lieth in east and by south; being within, you must sail up e. n. e. and n. e. & by east, and when you come against the Abbey at Restier, than you must edge somewhat over towards the south-land, else you must keep the northland alongst.  
For to sail into the Carack deep, 
For to sail in at the Carack deep  you shall bring Cascalis, over the westpoynt of Roxent, & keep it so, until that the little Tower (which you shall see stand above the Abbey at Restiers) come over the white Abbey which standeth the farthest from Restier, to wit, over S. Katherine's Abbey or Cloister, go then north, & n. e. & by n. in keeping these marks standing thus, until that you come within the point off S. Gillies, and then go in alongst by the north-land to Restiers within the Castle, and anchor there where you think it best. Upon these marks you may sail in and out at the Carack deep. If you come from the westwards and will go in to the Carack deep, then bring Cascalis over the west-end of Roxent, and sail so about the norther Cachops, until that the Town off Lisbon come within two ships lengths near to the southside of the River, & then further in north-east and by north, when as then you shall see the sand-bay within the point of S. Gillian's, then are you in the right fareway.  
But if it should happen, that you could not see the town, or the little Tower, then keep the sand-bay (which lieth within S. Gillian's point north e. land by north from you and sail so n. e. & n. e. & by north in, and take the sounding of the norther Cachops in eight or nine fathom: when you begin to come against S. Gillian's point, sail then indifferent close along by the northland, as is before said.  
He that will turn out or in to the Carack deep, must bring the foresaid little tower that standeth within the land, a ships length to the s. wards, & a ships length to the northwards off the foresaid Abbey or Cloister off S. Katherine's, and then cast about every time, and so turn too and again out and in.  
Also come not with calms in this channel, (neither bound inwards nor outwards) with an ebb, for it falleth very strong over the east end of the Cachops.  
If you will run out at the Carack deep, you must look out for the foresaid little Tower: when it cometh out from under that high land, bring it then a little to the westwards of the second white Abbey or Cloister, and go away south-west and by south, and then the little tower shall come to the Cloister.  
But if you must turn out too and again, than you must be very careful of your tides, for the streams fall strong over the Cachops, so that it is very dangerous with calms to come in or out at those channels, but especially in sailing out with an ebb, for it falleth thwart over the Cachops.  
From Roxent to S. Uves point, the course is southeast & by s. 10 leag. that is also a appoint easy to be known, by a high round hill which lieth on it, also men shall see the top of the castle of Sisembre upon a flat hill like a great top or ridge of a country house.  
S. Uves point is called Cape de Pitcher▪ & by the Dutchmen Cape de Spichel, a little to the southwards about the point, is a rent or cleft in the land, before it is good riding in 9 and 10 fathom. Before Sisember men may also anchor in 15 or 16 fathom.  

Of the Tides and Courses and streams.  
On these Coasts, as on the former, a south-west & north-east moon maketh high water.  
A south-west and north-east moon maketh full sea at the foresaid places, on the sea-coast, & within the havens a point later.  
A north-east and south-west Moon maketh on these coasts full sea, like as on all the coasts lying on the great sea, there go also no streams alongst the land, because (through the swelling off the Ocean sea) the flood cometh right on against the coasts, and falleth right in and out at the Havens.   

Courses and Distances.  

From Cape del Fisiron, or nova Lisbona, to the Rock, or Roxent south 15 or 16 leagues.  
From the Burlings to the Rock, or Roxent, south & by east, and s. s.e. 16 leagues.  
From the Burlings to the Cape S. Vincent s. & by e●st 53 leagues.  
From the Burlings to the great Canaries, southsouthwest 248 leagues  
From the Burlings to the Island Palma south-west & by south 256 leagues.  
From Roxent to the Cape Pitcher, or Saint Uves point southeast and by south 10 leagues.  
From Cape Pitcher to Cape S. Vincent south somewhat easterly 29 leagues.  
From Roxent to Cape Saint Vincent south and by east 37 leagues.  
From Roxent, or the river of Lisbon, to this great Canaries southsouthwest westerly 240 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Burlings in 39 degrees 40 minute.  
Roxent lieth in 38 degr. 55 min. or as some hold in 39 degr.  
Cape Pitcher, or S. Uves point lieth in 38 degr. 30 minute.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

C. Montego The Land to the southwards of Montego.  
The C. de Montego being north-east from you four or five leagues with the land to the southwards of it showeth itself as is portrayed in this and the figure following at the letters AA they belong one to the other.  
This belongeth to the former, and is the land to the southwards of Montego, until thwart of the Burling.  
Thus showeth the Burlings when the northermost are east from you a league.  
The land betwixt Peniche and Roxent, showeth itself as is portrayed in these three figures following when the high land to the southwards of Peniche, being called young Roxent, is east from you, the like letters, as AA and BB belong one to the other.  
Young Roxent.  
Burlings.  
This belongeth to the former figure, and is the land to the northwards of the Rock, or Roxent.  
Roxent  
This followeth the former figure, until Roxent, or the rock, at the B, one to the other.  
Young Roxent north-east and by east. Roxent south and by east.  
Thus showeth the Rock, or Roxent, when it is south and by east, and young Roxent is north-east and by east from you, and that you are close by the land.  
When the Rock or Roxent is north-east from you seven leagues, it ariseth thus.  
When the Rock or Roxent is east and by south, and e. s.e. from you 7 leagues, it showeth itself thus.     

The eight Demonstration, Which Containeth the description of Algarve and Andaluzia, from S. Uves to Palos or Clif.  
FIve leagues to the eastwards of Cape Pitcher, or Saint Uves point, 
Road under Saint Uves point.  lieth Saint Uves, there lieth a great bank before the haven's mouth. Beneath the high land upon the water side, standeth a white Castle, when that is northnortheast from you, then are you right before the haven's mouth.  
Cust van ANDALUZIA, En Algarve, Beginnende van Capo de Spichel tot aen het Clif.  
For to find the deepest water in sailing out over the bank off Saint Uves, with ships that draw much water, do thus: when you sail out from the white Castle, then bring the foresaid white house over the north-side of the Castle, that standeth on the waterside, so that you may see directly through betwixt them, and keep them so standing, until Saint Uves point begin to come without the east-poynt of Sisember, then bring the white house to the southside of the Castle, and run so out, you shall have there the deepest water. But when you can see that Castle of Pelmelo, that is a direct longest mark for to run over the bank: And then that white Castle must be from you n. north-east northerly.  
It is from Saint Uves point to C. de S. Vincent south somewhat easterly 29 leag. betwixt both are no known havens. Salines 
●alines.  a little river lying half ways, is also unknown.  
From S. Uves to Cape. S. Vincent, the coast lieth most south and by west about 32 leagues, betwixt both lie some high steep hills, which men do call the Salines, which are very good marks for to know this coast by, but above all serve for the knowledge of this coast of Algarve, or of the Cape de S. Vincent, the Vighebergen, or Mount Chigo, which lie within Lagos & may be seen fare off at sea. A half league to the northwards of C. S. Vincent lieth a high cliff in the land, that is somewhat whitish, & higher than the other land; when you see that, than you are by the cape de S. Vincent. Upon the point of the cape standeth a broken Abbey or Cloister, and close by the point lieth a high rock, being called by the Dutch sailors Monninck strand.  
A little about the point of the Cape S. Vincent men may anchor in a sand-bay, for a n. & n.w. wind in twenty fathom.  

Road under Cape S. Vincent  About the second point, to the eastwards off the Cape, is another Sand-bay, there is a good road for a northwest & north wind in 14 or 15 fathom. From the Cape de S. Vincent to Cape S. Maries, or Faro, it is east or a little more southerly nineteen or twenty leagues: betwixt them both lie Lagos, or Laves, and Villa Nova. From Cape S. Vincent to Lagos, it is east and by north six leagues, there is a tydehaven through betwixt the rocks, behind a strand of chindle, which falleth dry at low water, men may alsoo ride there for a northwest, westnorthwest, and north wind, in ten or twelve fathom.  
Villa Nova 
Villa Nova.  lieth about four leagues to the eastwards of Lagos; betwixt both, 3 leagues from Lagos, and one from Villa Nova, lieth a sunken rock, whereof men must take heed. Villa Nova, is a good haven, it lieth in north, and north and by west, at half flood you shall have there two fathom water within in the haven on the east side lieth a little Island or rock, and upon it standeth a Tower or little house, also there stands upon the land a great mast with a barrel upon the top off it: when the little Tower, or little house, and the mast come one in the other, than you must sail right in with them into the haven, alongst by the east-land until you be past the little Tower, the west side is flat and shoal, when as you come by the mast, than you must go up to the westwards before the Town of Villa Nova, there you may anchor in four or five fathom.  
From Villa Nova to Faro, 
Faro.  or cape de S. Maria, it is about 9 leagues. Upon the strand standeth a firetower and from the point shooteth of a riffe which men must avoid; into the haven off Faro men must go in from the eastwards, it lieth west, and westnorthwest in, and they must leave the tower on the larboard side, and run in two or three fathom; being within, they may anchor over against the Town off Faro under the Island in three fathom, it is upon the bar at half flood 2 fathom deep.  
The Cape S. Maries showeth itself at sea (when you first see it) in one round hommock, which is a good mark for to know the whole coast of the Condado by.  
Five leagues north-east and by east from Cape S. Maria or Faro lieth Tavila, that is a crooked shoaly Bar, which almost every year doth shift, and is not to trust to for to sail into it, unless it were first beakond, or set with buys, it is at half flood scarce two fathom deep men lie there a little within the sand-hills in four fathom.  
From Tavilla to Ayemont, the course is eastnorth e. 5 leagues.  
Ayemont is a deep Bar, and one of the best havens in the whole Condaet, it lieth in northwest by the eastland, at half flood it is three fathom deep, there lieth some shoals before the havens, the marks thereof are these There standeth a tree upon the east side, of the haven or-rivers mouth when Ayemonte cometh right against over the tree, then are you to the eastwards off the shoals or sands, which lie before the haven, than you must go towards the foot strand, and lead it in alongst by it northwest, and northwest and by west, when you you are within, you must go up to the northwards before the Town, or if you will go before Porte Maria; the northwest course will bring you there; within, it is wide and broad, and six or seven fathom deep.  
There goeth in alsoo a haven by the westland, where men come in, right out of the sea, but that by the e. land is the best.  
From Ayemont to Leepe, 
Leepe.  or S. Michael's, the course is east and by north seven leagues. Leepe hath uncertain bars which oftentimes shift, where men may not trust themselves to sail into without a Pilot, the Bar that goeth into the e. wards of the great Island, is held to be the best. from thence they must go up to the westwards towards Taron, & the River, & so come to Leepe, and there they take their lading in before the deep.  
The Bar of S. Michael's 
Saint michael's.  was wont to run thwart over into sea and to be at half flood three fathom deep, & before S. Michael's five fathom: from thence men may come through within over the shoals at high water into the River at Leepe. Also men were wont to come in by Taron; 
Taron.  but for certainty it is needful to take in a Pilot for these Bars.  
From S. Michael's to Palos, 
Palos.  or Saltees, 
Saltees.  the course is east & east and by south 7 leagues, here men sail into the great Condaet, this haven goeth in at the west end of the Rooduyn; thee standeth a great broad tree to the westwards off that white cliff, that you must keep over a red sandhill, like as if it were red earth: this sandhill goeth sloping down: Run in upon these marks unto the strand, about north & north and by west, then shall the Tower Odier which stands above Wolves, 
Wolves.  come over the east side of the haven's mouth, keep them so standing, and sail alongst by the strand, without 2 cables lengths until you come about the point, and then you run up north to Palos or northwest to Wolves, and anchor there in six or seven fathom.  
It is deep there within, six, seven, and also three & four fathom in sailing up according as men do sail fare up, or else not, this Bar is upon the shoalest at half flood three fathom and a half, but within it is five fathom deep.  
There cometh also a channel running out of the sea betwixt the sands, than Wolves cometh to the east-side of the haven's mouth, and men sail n. n. w. in; when they are within the haven's mouth, than they must do as before is said. This channel is three fathom deep.  
For knowledge of the land hereabouts you shall understand that at the west end of the Roduyn, lieth a white steep land, cliffy, being reddish earth or chalk: he that falleth there with, may think that he is by the haven's mouth of Saltees, upon it stand some little bushes of trees, else the land is all without trees, reddish sand, therefore called Roduyn, or Red sandhill.  

Of the Tides and Courses and streams.  
A south-west & north-east Moon maketh at all these places (on the sea side) high water, and within in the havens a point or 2 later, according as they lie fare within the land.  
As on all the coasts of Portugal, even so here also on these coasts a south-west & north e. moon maketh the highest water.  
A s. w. & n. e. Moon maketh on these coasts full sea, within the havens a point or two later, according as they lie fare within the land.  
A n. e. & s. w. Moon maketh high water at the C. S. Vincent, & at the Cape S. Maria, also on the coasts lying betwixt them both.  
But to the eastwards on the Condaet maketh full sea a s. w. & by s. & s. s. w. moon.   

Courses and Distances.  

From C. Pitcher to the C. S. Vincent s. somewhat easterly 29 leagues.  
From the river of Lisbona to the Isle de Savages south-west and by south 213 leagues.  
From the River of Lisbona to Porto Santo south-west 160 leagues.  
From the River of Lisbona to the Isle Madera south w. 176 leagues.  
From the River of Lisbona to the Island Tercera west 263 leagues.  
From the C. S. Vincent to Lagos, or Laves east & by north 6 leagues.  
From Lagos to Villa Nova e. 3 leagues.  
From Villa Nova to C. Maria, or Faro, east & by south 10 leagues.  
From C. S. Maries, or Faro, to Tavilo, n. east and by e. 5 leagues.  
From Tavila to Ayemonte e. n. e. 5 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to C. S. Maria east 19 leagues.  
From C. S. Maries to Leepe, or S. Michael's e. n. east 17 leagues.  
From C. S. Maries to Saltees e. n. e. 24 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to the C. Cantin s. 90 leagues.  
From C. Vincent to C. de Geer south westerly at least 138 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to the Island Lanzerotte s. s. west 180 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to the great Canaries, south-west and by south 210 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to the Isle de Palma south west 224 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to Porto Santo south-west and by west 144 leagues.  
And to Madero s. w. & by w. 157 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to the Isle de S. Maria w. 236 leag.  
From C. S. Maria to Sipiona e. 29 leagues.  
From C. S. Maria to the Straight e. south e. and southeast and by east 42 leagues.  
From C. S. Maria to C. Cantin s. & by w. 90 leagues.  
From C. S. Maria to the great Canaries south-west and south-west and by south 220 leagues.  
From Cape S. Maria, or Faro, to the Isle de Madera s. w. and by west 174 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Cape de S. Vincent and S. Maria lie in 37 degrees.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Roxent Cascalis.  
The land to the eastwards or to the southwards of Roxent towards Restiers, showeth itself as standeth portrayed in this and the figure following.  
S. Gillis.  
This belongeth to the former.  
Cape Pitcher.  
Thus showeth the Coast betwixt the River of Lisbona, and S. Uves point, called C. Pitcher.  
Thus showeth S. Uves point when you come from the northwards.  
Thus showeth S. Uves point when it lieth east and by north 6 leagues from you.  
Thus showeth S. Uves point when it is north-east and by north four or five leagues from you.  
In this form ariseth S. Uves point, when it is northnortheast five or six leagues from you.   

Cust van HISPANGIENVande Rivier van Sivilien tot aen Malaga en de De cust van Barbarien van Out Mamora tot Penon de Velex.   

Blue hill Salines Mount Chigo C. S. Vincent.  
Thus showeth the land about the C. de S. Vincent, when you come from the northwards, and sail alongst by it.  
Cape S. Vincent. Mount Chigo.  
The Cape de S. Vincent showeth thus, when it is north and by east, and northnortheast from you about 8 leagues. The Vigebergh or Mount Chigo lieth then north-east and by north from you, in form as is here portrayed.  
When the Vigebergen, or Mount Chigo is northnortheast and north-east and by north from you 12 or 13 leagues, it showeth thus, in one long hill, going down flat at both ends, with another piece of land, much lower to the eastwards of it  
Thus showeth the Cape S. Vincent, when it lieth northwest seven leagues from you.  
Thus showeth the Vigebergh, or Mount Chigo, when it is with clear water northnorthwest from you 11 or 12 leagues.  
Vygebergen, or Mount Chigo.  
White point Lagos. Villa nova. Village Albofero.  
Thus showeth itself the land about Lagos and Villa nova, when you are thwart from Villa nova, not fare from land, a little to the westwards of Lagos, lieth a white point, where by men may easily know Lagos. The Cape S. Maria showeth itself then, as in the figure following.  
Alboera This is red land. Cape S. Maria.  
This followeth the former figure from Albofero to the Cape S. Maria.  
Thus showeth Cape S. Maria when it is north-east and by east from you nine or ten leagues.  
When the Cape S. Maria is north-east and by north from you, it showeth itself thus.     

The ninth Demonstration, In Which Are showed the sea Coasts of Andalusia from Palos until you are passed the straits by Madril, and the Coast of Barbary lying over against it, and also the Cape Spartell on the Coast of Barbary to the Old Mamora.  
FRom Saltees to the river of S. Lucas, the course is southeast & southeast and by east betwixt 8 & 9 leagues.  
If you will sail into the river of S. Lucas, 
For to sail into the River of Saint Lucas.  then sail alongst the red sand-hils, so long until that you get the town of S. Lucas in sight about e. s.e. from you, there lieth a white cloister to the eastwards of the town, against the high land, and there standeth a great tree upon the high land, bring the tree even to the northside or the cloister. so that you may almost see through betwixt them but not over the Cloister, keep them so standing, and sail right in with them, and so you shall not come to near the rocks to take hurt of them, & you shall have upon the shoalest at low water & neepe tides, 3 fathom, & at high water 22 foot, or scarce 4 fathom. When the Castle of Chipiona and the Church begin to come one in the other, than you come to the first rocks or shoals, when the Church and Castle are right one over the other, than they stand southsouthwest from you, than you are upon the shoalest of all, but when the Castle with the Church come again one through the other, than you get again deeper water, 3 fathom and a half, and 4 fathom at low water with a neepe tide, sail in alongst upon the foresaid marks of the cloister and the tree, but take good heed that you bring not the tree over the Choir, at the south end off the cloister, for you should then come very close to the rocks, rather bring the tree a little to the northwards of the cloister, for you can not lightly take hurt of the red sand-hils, but you may borrow off them upon your lead in 3, and 4, fathom. There stands also a mill to the eastwards of the town, take heed that you bring not that also over the round Cloister that standeth a little to the eastward beneath at the town, but keep them a handspikes length asunder, and then you sail in the best deep. But if the foresaid mill, and that round Cloister come one in the other when you sail in, than you shall (without sail) come upon the rocks or shoals When you are within over the shoalest, sail then towards the strand of S. Lucas, until that you see altogether open into the river, for to avoid the riffe that shooteth off from the n.w. point of the river, sail on alongst by the shore and anchor before the little Church with the crosses (which stands below in the sand hills) in 5, 6, or 10, or 12, fathom, so near as you please Men may also turn our at this same channel with indifferent ships or barks, but they must take good heed, it is not there very broad.  

For to sail alongst by Sipiona.  There goeth in also a channel by the land of Sipionen or Chipiona, for to find it, you shall sail in within two cables lengths near by the foresaid land, until that you be within the second shoal, than you must edge somewhat off from the land, until you come upon the foresaid marks off the Cloister and the great tree, than you must run in alongst upon them, as is before taught. The river of S. Lucas is easy to know, by the Rooduyn, or red sand-hills which lie to the westwards of it.  
From Sipione to Cales Males, the course is s. e. 9 leag. Cales 
Cales.  is known by the mountain off Granade, when that is eastnortheast and east and by north from you, sail then right in with it, and you shall not sail to fall right before Cales. At the point off Sipona lie many rocks above water, and betwixt the point of Sipiona Cales. Four leagues from Sipiona lieth Rotta, there shooteth off a great ledge of rocks from the point.  
He that will go into the bay of Cales, 
For to sail into the bay off Cales.  let him run in right with the rocks which lie on the westside of the Bay, being called los Puercos, 
Los Puercos.  and within two cables lengths in all alongst by them in 6 or 7 fathom, until he come before the town of Cales, and anchor there so deep as he pleaseth, in 8, 10, 12, or 15 fathom, the faireway lieth in most eastsoutheast and southeast and by east.  
There lieth a rock under water, called the Diamant, 
Diamant.  about n.n.e. and n. e. and by north from the Puercos, a great half league. When S. Katharins' chapel upon the northland is e.n.e. from you, then are you thwart of that rock, there is at half flood 3 fathom water upon it, the marks off this rock are these: 
Marks of the Diamant.  When Marry Church cometh over the north end of Cales, (that is a Cloister which standeth without Cales) there stands also a house upon the hill, where men go alongst by, when they go to Shears, when that house cometh over the chapel which standeth upon the water side: to the westwards of port Marie: when these marks come together one in the other, than you should sail upon the foresaid rock, there is upon the shoalest of it at high water, 3 fathom and a half water upon it. But set the two high hills which are to the southwards of the way of Shears, that they be a little asunder, and that they do not come one in the other, than you cannot sail upon this rock. The Puercos rock lie from the north-poynt off Cales about half a league. He that lies before Cales in the road, hath Puntall south from him, or there abouts, according as he lieth near to Cales. But to the southwards of Cales lieth a rock, come not nearer that then in seven fathom.  
The Bay of Cales is wide and broad, men lie there in 5 & 6 fathom, the northwest wind cometh there open in. If any man therefore would go further in behind Puntall, let him go in southeast betwixt the point of Port Real & Puntall, and run up about the point of Puntall, there men lie land-lockt for all winds: there men may lay their ships dry a ground for to make clean. He that will go into the Creek, must take a Pilot, and run up into the water of Port Real leaving the little Island on the larboard side, and then Herod's Crick shall open itself, and there he must sail up keeping the middle of the channel, till he come before the Saltheaps.  
For to sail from Cales to the Straight, 
To sail from Cales to the Straight.  men must go away south, and south and by east to the C. de Trafalgar and then they shall run far enough without the bank or rocks which lie off s. east from Cales. From the point of S. Sebastian to Cape de Trefalgar, which is the north point of the Straight on the west side it is s. s. east, ten leagues. About two leagues to the northwards of the Cape, lieth Conil, there is a fair sand-bay, where men may anchor in 12, 13, and 14 fathom clean ground.  
He that desireth to sail into the Straight of Gibraltar coming from Cales, let him go from the point of S. Sebastian, which is the westermost point of the Island Cales, south & by east, southsoutheast, towards the Cape de Trafalgar, until he be a good ways without the land for to avoid the Spanish coast which is fowl: there lieth of west & by south from the Island Tariffe, 
Riffe off Tariffe.  a bank of stones 2 leagues, or two leagues and a half into sea, whereupon is eight, nine, or ten foot water, when it bloweth hard, men may see it break. The foresaid point of S. Sebastian's, and the Cape de Trafalgar lie ten leag. asunder.  
When you are then somewhat without the Cape de Trafalgar, and set your course s. s.e. and s. e. and by south than you shall fall with the land off the Barbary coast, within the Cape de Spartell, about thwart off Tanger, 
Tanger.  lying in a great bite and sand-bay. Upon the west point of this bay of Tanger, standeth a Castle somewhat high, and yet somewhat higher upon the high land, standeth a little watchtower: but to the eastwards of Tanger standeth alsoo an old ruinous watchtower, whereby Tanger is very easy to be known. From Tanger to Ape-hill, the coast lieth most e. n.e, and e. & by north, is the right course for to sail through the Straight. If you will sail into the Straight by night, then keep to the Barbary coast, which is very clean, and there you can take no hurt: but the Spanish coast is fowl, as is befote said. They that will sail alongst by the Spanish coast, they must go close alongst by the shore, and run through betwixt the Island Tariffe and the foresaid fowl grounds, close alongst by the Island, or else must keep fare off from the Island, for to run alongst without the shoals; but in the midst, near a like unto both lands it is best.  
Three leagues to the eastwards of the Island Tariffe lieth the point of Cabrita, 
Cape de Cabrita.  being the west point of the great Bay of Gibraltar over against the hill of Gibraltar: a little to the w. wards of it, is a good road for a n. e. wind, in 12, 10 & 8 fathom, not fare from the shore, thwart off a great rock, which lieth close upon the water side, a little to the eastwards of the firetower: A little to the westwards of that fire tower which standeth upon the foresaid point, is a fair sandstrand, betwixt the two towers there you shall lie smooth for the western grown sea.  
At Gibraltar is a fair Bay almost like a haven: if you will anchor in the bay of Gibraltar, then sail so fare into it, until that innermost point of the hill of Gibraltar, do stand east from you, thereabouts it is deep 5 or 6 fathom, and clean ground: towards the mill it is shoal water of 3 fathom. Men lie there in the Bay landlockt for a w. wind, a s. wind cometh from the point of Gibraltar hill, but a south-west wind that bloweth there open in. From thence are brought good wines.  

Bay off Gibraltar.  When you will set sail from the road of Gibraltar with an easterly wind, it is good to bear up somewhat before the wind towards the west shore, & then forth out alongst by the lee shore, for the easterly winds do fall with such whirling & fore-slaughes from over the high land of Gibraltar, that you shall be hardly able to get out of the Bay alongst by the high land. When you come from the eastwards, & will sail out through the Straits, and that you are somewhat near to the Spanish coast, than you must be very careful, for that you bring the hill of Gibraltar, against the high land of Barbary, & in regard the land to the northwards of Gibraltarhil is low, it seemeth (to look to) to be nothing else, then as if there were the opening of the straits. It hath heretofore happened, that some which have so mistaken it, have sailed into the bay, thinking it to be the opening of the Straight, & so have lost their ships there. Therefore it is very needful, that men take great care not to mistake themselves of the hill of Gibraltar, & if men do take heed of it, it is easy to be known.  
Estepona lieth 5 leagues to the eastwards or to the northwards of Gibraltar, betwixt them both stand divers firetowrs upon the coast, there is clean ground for to anchor. If you will anchor to the eastwards of Gibraltar, by the next tower of Gibraltar, then bring Gibraltar southsouthwest from you, and anchor in 25 fathom, there is clean ground, & blacksand but if you will anchor by the second firetower, there is a valley, & there you may fetch water, and anchor in 20 or 22 fathom, there is a valley, and there is also clean ground, and better lying for to set sail with easterly winds, for those that are bound out of the Straight. Before Estepona, men may anchor in 14 fathom, that is a place for to lad fruit and wines; 5 or 6 leagues to the eastwards of it lieth Marveles, betwixt them both stand 5 watch towers upon the coast.  
From Gibraltar to Marveles, 
Marveles.  the course is n.e. and by north distant 12 leagues, if you will anchor at Marveles, than you must look out for two Pack-houses which stand upon the strand and a great square watchtower close to the eastwards off the foresaid Pack-houses: bring the gate of the town so, that you may see through betwixt the Pack-houses and the watchtower, and anchor there in nine or ten fathom. Right before Marveles, the ground is not clean. About a shot of a Cast piece to the westwards of the town, men may fetch fresh water.  
From Marveles to Fangerola 
Fangerola  it is 5 leagues eastnortheast betwixt them both stand also 5 watchtowers. Fangerola is a castle; and hath a fair sand-bay, there is good anchor ground in 7, or 8 fathom, a flat rising ground, men may lie there landlockt for a westsouthwest wind.  
From Fangerola to C. de Moll, 
C. de Mo●  the west point of Mallaga, the course is forth eastnortheast two great leagues: but from the west point of Mallaga to the town of Mallaga, the course is north-east and north-east & by east 4 leagues, it is there betwixt them both a fair strand, where men may anchor all alongst in 10 or 12 fathom.  
Mallaga 
Mallaga.  is known by these marks: There standeth a Castle to the eastwards upon the high land, & there come two walls downwards towards the sea to another Castle which lieth by the waterside. Before that same Castle is now the road, that which was wont to be the right road, is now altogether spoilt by casting of ballast.  
If you will anchor in the road before Mallaga, than anchor in 10, 11, 12, or 14 fathom, thwart off from the head, if that the head come to lie from you north and by east, there is very good ground, the anchors hold there well, also men lie there out of danger for the Moors.  
Velez Mallaga lieth from Mallaga east and by north distant 7 leag. betwixt them both men may anchor all alongst by the shore. About a league to the westwards of Velez Mallaga standeth a little Castle; before it is good anchoring in 10 or 12 fathom. By the next Tower, to wit, the next to the little castle, there is fresh water to be gotten on the land.  
The town off Velez Mallaga 
Velez Malaga.  lieth about a leag. within the land; but upon the strand standeth a great Packhouse appearing like a castle.  
The Coast of Spain from Malaga to Modril.  
From Velez Mallaga to Almunecar, the course is east, 15 or 16 leagues, betwixt them both it is all clean Coast, men may anchor there under all the points which lie betwixt them both.  
Two great leagues to the westwards of Almunecar lieth a point, whereupon standeth a firetower, under is a good road for a west wind.  
If you will anchor at Almunecar, than anchor to the westwards of the rock, where the little chapel standeth upon in twelve fathom, there is good ground, and shall lie there landlockt for an east & westnorthwest wind.  
Salobrena lieth from Almunecar four leagues to the eastwards, that is a little Town with a little Castle, & lieth upon a hill a little about the east point of Almunecar & right before Salobrena lieth a little Island, he that will anchor there must anchor to the westwards of it, there he shall lie landlockt for a north-east wind, and also for a west wind, than he shall have succour of the e. point of Almunecar. Men may also well anchor to the eastwards of that little Island, but too the westwards of it is the best road, there lie also all the ships, they may anchor there in fourteen and fifteen fathom, clean soft ground, in sixteen fathom they shall lie somewhat too fare out. Men may (if need so require) run through betwixt the foresaid little Island, & the main land betwixt them both there is about sixteen or senventeen foot water, and the little Island is round about clean, so that men may run very close alongst by it without fear.  
Two great leagues eastwards from Salobrena in the same bite, a half league from the sea side within the land lieth Modrill, which hath two Churches & some trees, thereabouts upon the water side standeth a square tower.  
If you will anchor at Modrill, than anchor before the foresaid square tower, which standeth upon the water side in twelve or thirteen fathom, so that you may see the little Tower upon the east point even without the other point, there is clean ground, men lie there landlockt for an eastwind, but a south east & a southwind make there (like as at all places on these coasts) a lee shore. A little to the eastwards of Modrill lieth the point, called Cape de Sacrastijf.  

The Coasts of Barbary.  
For to sail out of the Bay of Gibraltar to Tetuan, then run over south & by east, about close by the point of Seuta, especially with a westerly wind, you should otherwise be carried away so with the current, which then commonly runs to the eastwards, that you should fall too fare to the Leewards. Coming then about by the point of Seuta, you shall see out a head a black point called cape Porkes lying south from the point of Seuta. When men lie in the Bay of Gibraltar, they may see the foresaid cape Porkes 
C. Porques.  alongst over Seuta: which is a point very easy to be known, sail towards that point, & with a westwinde luffe up so near as you can. When you come about that point, than you shall begin to see Tetuan, which lieth up against the high land, a great league within the land: run then so far to the s. wards, until that the east end of the town come right over a little round hommock, which is upon the high land within. In the midst off the town standeth a black tower, and in the innermost land of all within, lie three little hills, which do (as it were) look over the outermost inner land, bring the three little hills over the foresaid black tower, & anchor then so fare from the shore that the first little hill of the high land to the southwards of Seuta towards cape Porques, come a little without Cape Porques, there it shall be sixteen fathom deep, & good soft ground. 
Marks of the Road before Tetuan.  If you anchor otherwise then upon these foresaid marks you shall have bad, stony & sharp ground. It hath happened that some ships have anchored there, but their anchors fell so into the rocks, that they could not weigh them again, but must hue of their cables, and leave their anchors behind them. Therefore if you come off from the point of Cape Porques, then be care full that you bring the foresaid first little hommock (which lieth a stern of you in the bite of Seuta to the southwards of Seuta) a little without the Cape Porques, and so keep sailing to the southward, and keep heaving of the lead continually without ceasing until that you get the soft ground, so soon as you shall feel it, let then presently your anchor fall, for the place where the soft ground is, is not two cables length in compass great.  
Tetuan lieth from Seuta about six leagues, and three or four leagues to the southwards of it lieth a point, called Cape Tetuan, 
C. Tetuan  whereupon standeth a tower. He that hath never been at Tetuan, might easily be mistaken by that point, taking it to be cape de Porques, the sooner because that some say that Tetuan at least nine leagues to the southwards of Teutan. It hath happened that ships have sailed unto this point, and have so run past Tetuan, therefore it is best that men go not too fare from the shore either by night or by day for to get the cape Porques certainly in sight.  
The Bay off Tetuan betwixt the Cape Porques and Cape Tetuan, is a sand-bay altogether of sandstrand with low hommocks here and there upon the seaside, which a fare of seem as if they were ships, but the ground thereabouts is altogether foul, except such a place as before is said. Betwixt the Cape Porques and Seuta it is also a fair sandstrand; but thwart of it is all good ground.  
The Coast of Barbary in the Straight of Gibraltar, lieth from Seuta to Cape de Spartell west and by south, and westsouthwest eight or nine leagues. But the Cape de Spartell, and Cape de Trafalgar on the Spanish side, lie north & by west, and south and by east eight leagues asunder.  
From Cape de Spartell to Arzila, 
Arzila.  the coast lieth south and by west seven leagues, betwixt them both alongst the seaside, it is all low land, with some points and high land within, with a white sand-hilly strand. A little to the southwards of the point of Cape de Spartell, men may anchor for easterly winds in twelve or thirteen fathom, clean sandground, but so soon as the wind doth shift to the west they must be ready to get under sail, lest they be inbayed upon a lee shore.  
About a league to the southwards of the Cape lieth a little hommock upon the low land, by the water side, which showeth (in sailing by) like a broken schonce or castle.  
Arzyla is a little walled town, lying upon the water side, and hath a little bard haven, which men do sail into at two places through a row of Rocks, which lieth before it, the northermost channel is the deepest, but both of them are not fit but for small ships. Being come within the rocks, men do anchor betwixt the town and the rocks.  
From Arzyla to Alarache, the coast lieth also south and by west eight leagues, it is altogether a clean coast with some rocks on the shore, the land betwixt them both is somewhat higher them betwixt Arzyla and the Cape with high land within. About an English mile to the southwards of Arzyla standeth a tower, and somewhat further to the southwards, upon the high land, stand some little houses, but men cannot well see them, except they sail close alongst by the coast. Betwixt Arzyla and Alarache, but somewhat nearer Alarache then Arzyla, lieth on the sea side, a high white cliff which is very easy to be known, betwixt that cliff and Alarache standeth upon the high land a very high tree, with some other trees by it, when men come from the northwards alongst by the shore, that great tree seemeth to be a tower, yet somewhat to the southwards standeth an other great tree, but not so great as the other: when men begin to come near to Alarache, or else by the southermost great tree, than the foresaid greatest tree doth hid itself behind the land. These are all very good marks for to know this coast by, betwixt these two places.  
Alarache lieth with a great Castle upon the south point of a river, which is very shoal and crooked, the north point is a low point going flat off, and within it, on the n. side of the river standeth also some buildings. Before the river lieth a bar of quicksand, which lieth off from the north point, where ships may go in over with a spring tide, through a Creek, else it is but for Barks & Friggats: men may anchor before it in the Road in 16, 17, and 18 fathom.  
Alarache 
Alarache.  is under the command of the King of Spain, & is little or nothing used either by English or Dutchmen.  
He that saileth alongst this coast, must not come very close to the shore, unless it were with a hard Levand, or easterly wind, with calm weather there goeth sometimes a very great grown sea out of the west or northwest, so that sometimes men can hardly get off from the shore.  
From Alarache to Old Mamora the caost lieth south and by west and southsouthwest betwixt seven or eight leagues, it is low land with sand-hills with few places that are easy to be known, all alongst even to Mamora.  
He that cometh out of the sea, and falleth with the land, here on this coast, shall perceive little knowledge of the land, unless he fall with some of the enhanced places. This Old Mamora was wont also to be a haven, but is now altogether cast to of the sea.   

Of the tides and courses of the streams.  
Before the Condaet on the coast a southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh high water.  
Before Palos Moguer & Wolves maketh full sea a s. & north moon.  
Before the river of S. Lucas, and at Cales before the bay maketh full sea a south-west and by south and north-east and by north moon.  
At Cales in the Bay maketh high water a southsouthwest moon.  
The ebb falleth without the Puercos to the southwards towards the Straet, and the flood towards the land to the northwards: but for the most part, the flood falleth thwart in to the land, about the havens.  
In the narrow of the Straight maketh high water a south-west and by south moon. The current runneth more to the westwards then to the eastwards; when it is fair weather there goeth commonly 4 hours' flood to the eastwards, and eight hours' ebb to the westwards, but the most part of the time according as the wind is, and at sometimes the current runneth so strong, that it rippleth as if there where shoals.   

Courses & Distances.  

From Ayemont to Leep east and by north 7 leagues.  
From Leep to Saltees or Palos east and east and by south 7 leagues.  
From Saltees to the river of S. Lucas, or Sipiona south. and southeast and by east 8 or 9 leagues.  
From S. Lucas or the point of Sipiona, to the point of Cales, the course is southeast 9 leagues.  
From Cales to the point of the Straight southsoutheast 10 leagues.  
From Cales to the great Canaries south-west 240 leagues.  
From Cales to the Isle de Madera w. s. w. 200 leag.  
From C. Trafalgar to Tariffe, the course is s. e. 4 leagues.  
From Tariffe to the point of Gibraltar east & by north 5 leagues.  
From the point of Gibraltar to Marveles north-east by north 12 leagues.  
From Marveles to Fangerola eastnorheast 5 leagues.  
From Fangerola to the west point of Mallaga eastnortheast 2 leagues.  
From the west point of Mallaga to the town of Mallaga north-east and north-east by north 4 leagues.  
From the point of Gibraltar to Mallaga north-east 23 or 24 leagues.  
From Mallaga to Veles Mallaga east and east by north 7 leagues.  
From Veles Mallaga to Almunecar e. 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Almunecar to Salobrena east 4 leagues.  
From Salobrena to Modrill east & by north 2 leagues.  
From Modrill to C. de Sacrastyf eastnortheast 1 leagues.  
From C. de Sacrastyf to castle de Fierro east and by n. 4 leagues.  
From Castell de Fierro to Adera east 8 leagues.  
From Adera to Almeria north-east 5 leagues.  
From Almeria to Cape de Got southeast and by east 5 or 6 leagues  
From the point of Gibraltar to C. de Got east & by north 66 leagues.  
From C. de Spartell in Barbary to the point of Apehill, the course is eastnortheast. 8 leagues.  
From Apehil to the point of Seuta souheast and by east 2 leagues.  
From the point of Seuta to the road of Tetuan south 5 or 6 leagues.    

Heights.  

The coast of the Condaet lieth in 37 degrees and 15 or 20 min.  
The Island Cales in 36 degr. 30 minute.  
The midst of the Straight of Gibraltar lieth in 36 or 35 degr. and 50 min.  
Cape de Spartell lieth in 35 degrees, 32 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

The land betwixt Wolves & the River of S. Lucas, showeth itself when you sail alongst by it like as is portrayed in these three figures following.  
Black land to the northwards of the Rooduyn or the red sand-hils. Black land to the northwards of Rooduyn or the red sand-hils.  
Rooduyn or red sand-hils.  
Rooduyn or red sanchils. Granado hill.  
This belongeth to the former figure the AA, one to the other.  
This followeth to the two former figures, the BB, one to other.  
When you sail towards Cales, and the mountain of Granado cometh to stand east from you than it showeth itself in this form.  
Cape Spartel east and by north east and by south 6 leagues. This hill lieth fare within the other land, and showeth itself out about the other land.  
The Coast of Barbary from C. de Spartell, the south point of the Straight to the southwards, until past Alarache showeth like as it is portrayed in these 2. figures when the Cape de Spartell is east and by north from you about eight leagues.      

The second part THE FOURTH BOOK OF THE LIGHTNING-COLUMNE, OR SEA MIRROR.  
WHEREIN Is handled the Description of the Coast of Barbary of the straits of Gibraltar as fare as Cape de Verde as also the Canary, Flemish and Salt Islands.  
Furnished with all the needful Seacards, sights of Land, with divers changes as well in the courses & distances, as in the heights, and purged from many faults. Gathered together from the experience of divers Famous Seamen, and lovers of Navigation, never before brought to light.  
By JOHN van LOON, practitioner in the Sciences of Astronomy, Geometry and the Mathematics.  
IN AMSTERDAM, Printed by john johnson, dwelling at the Sign of the Passe-card, 1654.   


De Cust van BARBARIA, Gualata, Arguyn, en Geneheo, van Capo S. Vincente tot Capo Verde.  
de Cust van Barbaryen van out Mamora tot Capo Blanco.  
De Cust van Barbaryen van Capo Blanco Tota Capo de Geer.  
De Reed van Punte del Gada in't Eylandt S. Michiels  
De Reed voor de Stadt Angra in't eylandt Tercera  
De Eylanden van Madera en Porto Santo    

The second part of the New LIGHTNING COLUMN, OR SEA MIRROR. THE FOURTH BOOK, Of the WESTERN NAVIGATION Containing The description of the Seacoasts of Barbary, Gualata, Arguyn, Genehoe, and the Flemish and Canary Islands together, from the Strait of Gibraltar, to Capo Verde.  

The first Demonstration. In Which Are showed the Coasts of Barbary from old Mamora to C. de Geer, together with the Flemish Islands.  
FRom Old Mamora to Mamora, 
Mamora.  the coast lieth alongst south & by west and southsouthwest 7 leag. Before Mamora is a high broad sandstrand, and is not easy to know, when you are somewhat off the land The best knowledge thereof is this: When you come from the northwards alongst the shore, you have all high land within, that you come lose when you come before Mamora, and when you come from the northwards, you cannot see the river of Mamora open before you be passed it, by reason that it lieth into the eastwards, & the n. point is low. When you come somewhat close by the shore, you shall see upon the high land in the Castle of Mamora (which the Spaniards have built there for the defence of the place) a very high mast or stake, which you may see indifferent far off, and when it is clear weather you may see also the high thick Tower of Salley to the southwards stand against the land. Before the river lieth a Bar which with a Spring hath 16 & 17 foot, and sometimes more water, the Bar is oftentimes altered by the sea. In the spring it lieth in commonly e. s.e. & there abouts. In the later part of the year it lieth in more easterly by the casting up of the sea out of the n. In the Summer the winds blow alongst the coast, the most part of the time out of the north, which causeth that the current runneth there to the southwards, & in the winter they blow much & strong out of the south-west and southsouthwest In the winter men must be very careful to get of betimes when the wind beginneth to come to the south, or s. e. than it is time to get of, for then commonly it shifteth to the s. w. and w. s. w. with foul weather, but when it cometh about again to the westnorthwest or northwest, than it is like to be good weather again.  
The road before Mamora 
Road before Mamora.  is about a league from the land in 18 and 20 fathom, there is clean sandy-ground.  
From Mamora to Salley the coast lieth s. w. & by s. & s. s.w. six leagues, betwixt them both it is low plain land, and sandy-strand, with double land within, which is so even and smooth, as if it were planed over. From Mamora not half ways to Sally, the strand ceaseth, and from thence forth to the southwards it is a shore all of black steep ragged rocks with little hills, so that men cannot judge (when they are somewhat off the land) that it is double land within, by the plains of it. When you are a league or two past Mamora, than you may see very plain the high thick Tower of Sally, & when you see the foresaid rocky shore you may be sure that you are past Mamora, that steep ro●●y shore continueth from thence, until past Fedalle, 〈◊〉 betwixt Fedalle and Sally is here and there a place of white strand, betwixt the rocks, but to the northwards of Salley it is not so, but nothing else then perfect rocks.  
The Town of Salley 
Salley.  hath a little Tower, and lieth upon the n. side off the river, which is a low plain point of sand. The Castle hath also a little Tower, and lieth over against upon the s. point of the River, which is a high rocky point. There goeth a wall round about the high thick Tower, and lieth upon a point on the s. side within the River. Before the River is a Bar which oftentimes with storms out of the sea doth alter and shift, and is cast too, sometimes the channel runneth by one of the two points, & sometimes again right in the midst of the rivers mouth. He that will anchor before Salley, let him bring the foresaid high thick Tower (which standeth within on the River) on the point of the castle, to wit, over the south point of the River, which shall then stand from him near about south e. & anchor there in thirty, eight and twenty, 24, 20, 18, or 16 fathom, so near or fare off as he will there is clean black sandy-ground, nevertheless that the shore thereabouts is so full of rocks & stones. Being come to anchor there men must shoot a shot to cause the Moors to come off. From Salley to the Island Fedalle the shore lieth alongst s. w. & by s. about 9 or 10 leagues. betwixt them both lie here & there in the sandstrand, long black rocks (as before is said) so that oftentimes men might take it to be Fedalle. 
Fedalle.  The best marks for to know Fedalle by is a wood of trees about a league to the northwards off Fedalle, which standeth below upon the land, and sheweth like a barn. When you come sailing alongst close by the land, you shall see it above upon the land, but when you are somewhat off from the land, than you shall see the land within above the wood of trees, (or Barn as men do commonly name it for the likeness of it) also there lieth a little round hommock about 4 leag. to the northwards of Fedalle, which you shall see above the rest of the land, when you are somewhat off from the land, but when you come close by the land, it hideth itself also behind the double land. The coast betwixt Salley and Fedalle, is very plain & smooth double land, so that there is not another such hommock more betwixt them both, as that foresaid hommock, and in regard the coast thereabouts is altogether so plain, without any places easy to be known, therefore men must take the more special heed unto such small marks, for not to sail past the place where they are bound unto.  
Betwixt the foresaid Barn or wood of trees and Fedalle standeth also a ruinous little Town fallen down, in a rough wood, called Monsor, 
Monsor.  when you sail alongst close by it, you shall see yet some pieces of walls of it.  

Road under Fedalle.  To the s. wards of Fedalle the land is again higher, and where the high and low cometh together, it doth make a cleft, thereby the Island of Fedalle is easy to be known, when that cleft is s. s. e. from you, than is Fedalle thwart of it also s. s. e. from you. If you will go into Fedalle, then run right with the foresaid Barn, or wood of trees, until you come within a league, or somewhat near to the land, and then alongst by it, and so you shall not miss the Island Fedalle, but run in betwixt it and the main land, when as you come by the north point of Fedalle, than anchor betwixt the strand and the foresaid n. point, but much nearer the Island Fedalle then the strand in 6, 7 or 8 fathom, so that you come to lie with your ship so fare in, that the foresaid point of the Island do lie n. n. w. from you, than lieth the foresaid Barn e. n. e. from you, and Monsor a handspikes length to the n. wards of the Barn or wood of trees; you may also anchor in 12 fathom, so that the point of Fedalle lie w. and by s. from you.  
This bite within the Island Fedalle, is a very bad place to lie in, for although you lie there so, that the point of the Island lie 〈◊〉. and n. and by w. from you, and with a Cable on t●● Island, nevertheless the grown sea cometh so hard rolling in about the point of the Island (when the wind is westerly) that you might rather desire to lie in the open sea, then within the Island. From the n. point of Fedalle shooteth off a ledge or riffe of rocks a Musket shot into sea, the most o● them lie high above water; within the Island it is very flat towards the strand, the Bay on the land is a fair sandy strand, there men may get ballast from the shore, but they must be very careful to stand upon their guard, for there are dangerous people.  

Depths & grounds about Fedalle.  Before Fedalle, to wit, to the northwards off it, thwart of the wood of trees, and alongst to Salley, it is all showld water a league or two from the land, all alongst that distance it is not deeper than 23, 24, and 25 fathom clean sandground, thwart of into sea from Fedalle it is also of the same depth, but foul ground.  
He that will trade at Fedalle must anchor somewhat fare in, for they have there no Boats, men must fetch the Moors aboard with the Boat.  
Upon the n. point of Fedalle lieth a high hommock, which showeth a far off when men come in, as if it were a castle fall'n down, but it is nothing else then rocks. At the s. end of Fedalle men may go over on foot at low water to the main land, but at high water the sea washeth through at 2 places, it floweth there 7 or 8 fo. up & down,  
Three leagues s. w. and by s. and s. w. from Fedalle lieth an old ruinous town fallen down close upon the strand called Anafee, 
●●fee.  it is a long town with many towers. amongst the rest one high thick tower almost like the tower of Salley, but men must be indifferent close by it before you can see it. When you are thwart of Anafee, you may yet see the wood of trees to the northwards of Fedalle, which standeth then to see to from far as a sail in the water, 2 leag. to the southwards, (or rather to the westwards) of Anfee, or Anafee, is a steep point with red cliffs, which seem a far off as if they where houses such spotters' men shall find at divers places on the coast.  
From Anafee to Azamor 
Azamor.  the coast lieth s. w. and by w. westerly 18 leagues betwixt them both lieth another fallen place called Lioness. Azamor hath a point lying out on the east side, when you come sailing alongst the shore from the northwards, Azamor lieth then about or behind that point upon the strand, but standeth high. A little past Azamor lieth a river, and thereabouts are some towers in the lowland.  
Three little leagues to the westwards of Azamor lieth the town of Masagam, 
Masagam.  on a white strand close by the sea side this town is inhabited by the Portugals, or Spanjards, it hath no towers, and showeth to see to off at sea, in white spots against the land. When you are thwart off from it, you shall see to the s. wards the high tower of Tyro 
Tyro.  (which is a town fallen down about 2 leag. to the w. wards of Masagam) almost like the tower of Anafee. A little to the w. wards of Masagam, at the w. point of the Bay, shooteth off a ledge or riffe of rocks, almost a league off into sea, whereof the rocks at high water, lie most under water, and at low water are uncovered. He that will anchor there and is not well acquainted, must take in a Pilot, which may bring him to a place where is good anchor ground, for although that it be a great Bay, yet nevertheless there are few places where the ground is clean; but is at many places foul, so that but few ships should be able to lie there in clean ground, when you lie in the right road, then lieth the e. point of the Bay e. and the w. point about n.w. from you.  
About a leag. to the w. wards of Tiro lieth a steep point when you come from the e. wards alongst by the shore, you shall see no more land without the point, until that you come near it, when you begin to get it upon your broad side, then there cometh out to the westwards a great square cliff, which is very easy to be known, and is whitish with reddish spots, and seemeth a far off as if it were a wall. This point is called after that white point, C. Blanco. 
C. Blanco.  About 3 leag. to the w. wards of this C. Blanco, standeth a little tower upon the highland, near by a valley called Casa Cavalgera, 
Casa Cavalgera.  and 2 leag. more to the w. wards lieth upon the high land another little house called Emindra, 
Emindra.  but you must be close by the land before that you can see it. From the foresaid C. Blanco to the C. Cantin, the coast lieth west s. w. and s. w. and by w. about 9 leag.  
The C. Cantin 
C. Cantin.  is an even plain point, when you are to the n. wards of it, it showeth flat towards the w. & going off towards the sea: there standeth a firetower upon it, but very small, that sometimes you can hardly see it. If you come from the northwards, or from C. Vincent, and are bound to Saffia, then set your course south and s. and by east, and then you shall fall with the land 4 or 5 leag. to the e. wards of C. Cantin, or if you sail a more westerly course you shall run till you come in the height of 32 degr, & a half, and then the C. Cantin shall lie due e. from you, it is better to fall a little to the eastwards of the C. then to the w. wards of it, because the winds blow there most common northerly. If you fall to the eastwards of the C. the coast lieth there s. w. and by w. and w. s. w. and it is even plain land. About 10 leag. to the e. wards of the C. lieth that little town Tyro, with a high white tower upon the sea side, & 5 or 6 leag. more to the westwards (betwixt Casa Cavalgero and C. Cantin) you shall see a little bite or Bay, thereabouts lie upon the strand by the water side, great black rocks, which show as if they were wrakes of ships, and then forth alongst to the C. it is a fair flat sandy strand. From the C. shooteth off a ledge of rocks somewhat off into sea, which men must avoid when they sail about the Cape.  
From C. Cantin to the north point of Saffia, the coast lieth s. or somewhat more westerly, 5 or 6 leag. betwixt them both it is a steep rocky land without sandy strand, but above upon it plain and even. A league to the southwards of the C. lieth a riffe or shoal by the shore, by some called the Gold-banke and lieth about a league off from the land: at sometimes of the year there is much fish to be taken.  
To the southwards of the Bay of Saffia 
Saffia.  is high uneven, and most of all double land, but to the southwards of it, it is even & plain, thereby men may easily perceive or discern whether they be to the northwards of Saffia, or to the southwards of it.  
If you will anchor in the bay 
For to anchor in the Bay.  or road before Saffia, 
Saffia.  then bring the north point (whereupon standeth a tower) a little more westerly then n. from you, & anchor then in 18 fathom. Or if you will anchor further in the Bay, then bring the foresaid north point n.n.w. or a little more northerly from you, and then the northermost of the two north points shall be a ships length without the southermost or the next unto you run then so fare to the southwards until that the tower were men do land with the boats (which is a high square tower standing below even within the wall of the town) come right over a tower which is fast to the wall, which cometh off from the Castle above to the southwards, so that the foresaid thick tower below come right over the Haven, betwixt the point where the castle standeth upon the water side, and the rocks where men go in betwixt. Or else anchor that the high Castle of Saffia stand e. and by s. and e. s.e. from you, there it is 16, 17 and 18 fathom deep, good fine sandy ground. You may also anchor so fare within in the Bay in 15 & 16 fathom, that the north point come to be n. w. & n. w. & by n. from you. These are the Summer road, in the Winter you men must anchor further from the land in 28 or 30 fathom, there the ground is course sand. Men may boldly run in before Saffia into the road by night, there is nothing that they need to fear, which may do them hurt, but the land.  
About two leagues from Saffia, lieth the south point of the bay, which is a low point that lieth out, and two leagues to the southwards of it lieth another steep rocky point without sandy strand. By it goeth in the River Tansit up into the land unto Marrocos.  
From the point of Saffia to the Island Mogodor, the coast lieth southsouthwest 19 or 20 leagues.  
Against the north-east end of the Island Mogodor, 
Island Mogodor  there shooteth off from the main land, a great row off rocks; being hard sharp rocks, whereof the outtermost or those that lie next to the Island Mogodor, lie high above water: He that cometh from the northwards, and will sail in behind the Island Mogodor, must run in betwixt the Island and the foresaid rocks, close in alongst by the Rocks. It is there in coming in, betwixt the Island and the Rocks five fathom deep. Within the foresaid Rocks lie also some other Rocks on the larboard side, which at high water are under water, and at low water are uncovered. When you come to the end of them, you may luffe up about by them towards the main land, and anchor there within them in 3 fathom at low water, there is good sandground. But yet nevertheless it is not there very good lying, for by reason of the breaking of the Sea upon the foresaid rocks, there goeth sometimes a great Sea, so that it is not good lying there with a storm, but further in, under the Island it is good lying in two fathom and a half. From the south-end of the Island lieth off a little riffe towards the main land almost to the foot strand, and to the s. wards off that foresaid little riffe, lieth a bank off from the main land almost a league off into sea. If you will sail out at the south end, then run alongst by the shore of the main land, until that you be about the foresaid riffe, and run out then upon your lead along by the bank, & then you shall presently get deeper water, of 4, 6, 8, & 10 fat. than you may sail there, where you desire to be:  
From the point of Saffia to C. de Geer, 
C. de Geer  the course is southsouthwest about 43 leagues but from Mogodor the same course is about 22 or 23 leag. It is there betwixt them both a fair flat sandstrand, with double land, which at some places is very high.  
About 8 leagues to the northwards of C. de Geer lieth a point called C. de Taffalana, 
C. de Taffalana.  under which men may ride in good sandground for east and north-east winds. The C. de Geer is lower than the land to the northwards of it, and falleth to the southwards flat off into sea, which men shall first perceive when they come within 3 or 4 leagues of it. About 4 leagues to the northwards of the Cape lieth a high Hommocke within the land, & further northwards the land is yet higher; but when you come thus from the northwards near C. de Geer, 
Riffe ●●●●e  you shall see no more land to the southwards of it. When you come to the point you must give the riffe a birth that lieth off from it, and run about by it, and then forth southeast and by east, and southeast 7 or 8 leagues to S. Cruz, 
Roa● fore S. Cruz.  and then you shall see the Moors Castle stand on the high land: thwart of it lie a row of Rocks, about a Calliver shot in length, else it is all a clean and clear coast. For to anchor there in the Bay, run so fare into the Bay, that the foresaid Moors Castle stand north from you, and the Christians packhouses north-east, there it shall be deep (to the southwards or the foresaid row of Rocks) 7 and 8 fathom, the north point or C. de Geer, shall then be from you northwest and by west, there is the best road. In the Summer time you may anchor nearer to the shore, until you come in six and seven fathom. When you sail from C. de Geer towards the play or the Road, you must be careful to keep close aboard of the land of the Cape, and run alongst by it, nutill you come before the Castle. If you run fare off from the shore, you shall with northerly winds (which blow there much) be constrained to come in n. e. & n.n. e. again for to recover the shore, therefore it is best to keep close aboard the high land. He that should come into the road here by night, must not (upon a certain great forfeiture) come nearer the shore then in 12 or 14 fathom.  
In this Road men must be very careful and ready with their anchors, the smallest bower must be always laid out for the wind which bloweth off the land, and the other anchors to Seawards. The shoot anchor must be always ready against a storm (which men may very well perceive before by the swelling or rising of the sea) to bring it out in the south-west. Also it is needful to keep the foresail to the yard, for to help themselves with it the best that they can if it should happen that they should be forced from their anchors.  
In this Bay is much fish to be taken, when men lie there in the road, they take their turns to go out to fish.  
From the C. S. Vincent south-west and by west 140, leagues, & from the Cape de Finisterre southsouthwest and south-west and by south 232 leagues, lieth the Island Porto Santo lying southeast & northwest upon each end of this Island lieth a great rock. The road is on the s. w. side, to the eastwards of the ragged rock, before a little haven where men may lie landlockt with boats.  
The Island Madera lieth from Porto Santo 
Porto Santo.  s. w. 16 leag. s. wards from the east point of Madera, 
Madera.  lie 3 small rocky Islands, being called the Serters, 
Serters.  the northermost is the smallest, and lieth about a league from the land from the foresaid point, the southermost is the greatest, & lieth 4 leag. from the land. He that cometh from the n. wards, or from Porto Santo, may sail through betwixt them & the point of Madera, it is there betwixt them broad & wide, & also clean & clear every where, only at the foresaid e. point of Madera lieth a sunken rock, whereof men must take heed.  
At the s. side of the Island before the town S. Cruz 
C. Cruz.  is a good road in 20 fathom, but before Fonsiall is the chiefest Road for to lad: to the westwards of the Town lieth a great rock with a cross, called the Lion, by it is the best lying in 30 or 40 fathom.  
At the south-west west side before Marasilo is also good anchoring in 16 or 18 fathom. In all these foresaid places is good ground for to anchor in.  
Betwixt Madera and Teneriffe lieth the little Island Savages, 
Savages.  to wit, south from the Serters forty leagues. North from the north-east point off Teneriffe seven and twenty leagues, and northnorthwest from the north-east point off Great Canaries, forty, or two and forty leag. it lieth s. w. and north-east and is about a half league long. The s. w. end of Savages is foul fare off into sea, therefore run rather about to the eastwards of it then to the westwards. Three or 4 leagues s. w. from that point, amongst other Rocks, lieth one great rock which showeth a far of like a sail. Under the s. e. side of the Savages is a good road for a n.w. and west wind.  
Madera and the Island S. Michael's 
Saint michael's.  lie n. w. and s. e. 135 leagues distant. At S. Michael's, the road is at the s. w. side of the Island, when you come about one of the two points, either from the east or west, than you shall see two little towns. Before the westermost, called Punte de Gada, 
Punto de Gada.  or Punt Alagato, is the Road in 20 and 25 fathom.  
Before the eastermost little town lieth a little Island, betwixt that and the land of S. michael's it is 5, 6 and 7 fathom deep. Betwixt these two little towns, the coast lieth w. n. w. and e. s. e.  
From S. Michael's to Tercera, 
Tercera.  the course is n. w. and by w. four and thirty leagues. Under Tercera the road is on the s. side of the Island, to the westwards of the rocks, right before the town Angra, 
Angra.  betwixt two points that lie out, upon each of them standeth a Castle for defence off the ships which lie there in the Road, the westermost of the 2 points lieth a good ways further out to seawards then the eastermost, and hath upon the end of it, two very high, called Brasil, when you come out of the sea, either from the eastwards or the westwards, it seemeth a fare off as if it were asunder from the land. These two foresaid hills upon the point off Brasill, are so high, that in clear weather man may see from thence 16 or 17 leagues far off into sea. Upon it stand 2 pillars, which men may see every where in the town Angra, and a watchman thereby for to keep watch, and to give them of the town warning of the ships that come about the Island. As many ships as he seethe come from the westwards or the southwards, that is, from the West-Indies, Brasill, or the Portugeses Indies so many Flags he setteth up upon the Pillar towards the west, when he seethe more than five ships, than he setteth up a great Flag, which signifieth a whole Fleet. Likewise he doth the same upon the other Pillar towards the east, for the ships which he seethe come from the east, from Portugal or from the northwards, so that there cannot a ship come thereabouts, but men may see it presently by that token in every corner and street of the Town.  
He that cometh from the eastwards, or the northwards and is bound into the Road of Tercera, 
For to sail into the road of Tercera.  let him run fair by the land off the east point, and alongst by it unto the 2 little Islands, called the Ilheos, which lie a little to the eastwards of the road, about a bow shot one from the other. Men may run alongst to the southwards off these Islands, or to the northwards of them, as they will, and also betwixt them both. Betwixt these little Islands and the main land of Tercera, it is a great cannon shot broad, and 15 and 16 fathom deep, through betwixt the little Island it is 5 and 6 fathom deep clean sandground. Somewhat to seawards of these little Islands, lie 3 or 4 rocks above water, called Los frails. 
L●● Fray●es.  Being past these foresaid little Islands, you must sail to the westwards, until that you come near to the foresaid point of Brasill, a little to the eastwards of it you must anchor before the town of Angra in 10 or 12 fathom, or else men lay their sea-anchor commonly in 16, and their smaller anchor towards the land in 8 or 9 fathom. Men lie there landlockt for a s. w. and n.e. and also for an e.n. e. wind, but a s. e. wind bloweth there flat open in. On the w. side of the point of Brazill is also a great sandy Bay for to anchor in. Before a village, called S. Martin.  
Three leagues to the eastwards of the Town Angra, lieth a bite, called Porto Judeo, there the Spaniards landed with their forces, when they took in the Island from the Portugeses.  
He that will sail from Tercera to Fayall, let him set his course w. s.w. to the E. point of S. George's, which is from thence ten leag. asunder. Further, betwixt the Pico & S. George's through to Fayall are 16 leagues, it lieth most w.n.w. through betwixt them & the Island Fayall lieth to the westwards of the Island of the Pico a great league asunder off from it.  
He that will anchor in the Road of Fayall, let him anchor right before the Village of Fayall in 14 or 15 fathom, there is sandground; but there goeth a hard tide of flood and ebb.  
On the s. w. end of the Island Fayall lieth a little haven for to sail in there, you must run in by the s. w. point, so long about by the shore, until that you see the haven open sail alongst about by the s. w. point until that you come in the narrow, betwixt the rocks which lie of from the w. side, so soon as you come within the rocks let presently your anchor fall in 5 fathom, & bring your hawsers on the e. side on land fast to the pales, which are there made for the purpose: the haven is little so that men may lie in it with no more than with 4 or 5 ships. Further in it is shoal water.  

Of the tides & courses of the streams.  
On the foresaid coasts maketh high water a s. s.w. & s. w. and by s. moon.   

Courses & Distances.  

From C. Spartel to C. Cantin it is south-west southerly 85 leagues  
From C. Spartel to Madera west & by south and w. s. w. 200 leagues.  
From C. Cantin to Madera west 130 leagues.  
From C. Cantin to S. Vincent north 90 leagues.  
From C. Cantin to Teneriffe s. w. & by w. 148 leag.  
From C. Cantin to C. de Geer s. s. w. 50 or 52 leagues.  
From C. de Geer to C. de Non s. s. w. and south & by west 27 leagues.  
From C. de Geer to the point of S. Cruz s. e. 5 leagues.  
From C. de Non to Ossin south 13 leagues.  
From C de Non to C. de Bajador s. w. & by w. 69 leag.  
From C. de Geer to C. de Bajador s. w. somewhat westerly, 110 leagues.  
From Saffia to Madera and e. and w. 130 leagues.  
Erom C. de Gear to Madera w.n.w. 123 leagues.  
From S. Michiels to Tercera n.w. & by w. 34 leagues.  
From Tercera to the east end of S. George's westsouthw. 10 leagues.  
From the east end of S. George's to Fayall westnorthwest 16 leagues.  
From Saint Michael's to the C. de Finisterre eastnortheast 247 leagues.  
From Tercera to Roxent, or the River of Lisbon e. at least 267 leagues.  
From Tercera to C. de Finisterre eastnorth e. & e. & by n. 280 leageus.  
From Tercera to the Lizart n. e. & by e. 287 leagues.    

Heights.  

Masagam lieth in 32 degr. 46 min.  
C. de Cantin lieth in 32 degr. 32 min.  
The land Mogodor in 31 degr. 18 min.  
C. de Gear in 30 degr. 10 min.  
C. de Non in 28 degr. 32 min.  
C. de Bajador in 26 degr. 10 min.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Casa Cavalgero.  
Thus showeth the land betwixt Masagam and C. Cantin.  
Thus showeth itself Casa Cavalgero, when it is south from you 6 leagues.  
When the northern Corner of Saffia is southsoutheast from you 4 leagues it showeth in this form.  
When C. Cantin is north-east and by east 6 leagues, and the point of Saffia eastsoutheast four leagues from you, than they show themselves thus.  
Thus showeth the land to the southwards of the south point of the Bay of Saffia, when it is eastsoutheast 3 leagues from you.  
Mogodor.  
When you are westnorthwest or thwart off from Mogodor, 3 leagues, then showeth itself thus. It is a high and double land.  
C. Taffelana.  
When the Cape de Taffelana is northnortheast 3 leagues from you, the land showeth thus unto Cape de Geer.  
C. de Geer.  
When the C. de Geer is northnorthwest 3 leagues from you, it showeth thus, and when the Bay is east and by south from you, the land is with sand-hils.  
Thus showeth the Island Saint michael's on the north side.  
Thus showeth the Island of Tercera, when it lieth e. and by s. about 7 leagues from you.  
When Tercera is 4 or 5 leagues from you, than it ariseth thus, the west end of this Island Tercera is higher than the east end, thereby it is indifferent easy to be known.  
Thus showeth Tercera on the north side.  
Brefil Road before Angera Little Islands.  
Thus showeth the Tercera on the south side when you sail alongst by it.  
Thus showeth the Island S. George when it lieth southsouthwest 7 leagues.  
When the west end of S. George's is south and by east and the east end southeast from you, it showeth itself thus, being eight or nine leagues of from you.  
When the Island Pico is southeast from you, it showeth itself thus, the high Pieck you may see about 40 leagues of from it at sea.  
The Island Fayal showeth itself thus when it is south from you 8 or 9 leagues.  
When the Island Gratios' a lieth westsouthwest 4 leagues from you, than it ariseth in this form.   

Caarte Voor een gedeelte der Canarise Eylanden als Canaria, Tenerifa, Forteventura, etc.  
De tyhavens Porto de Naos en Porto de Cavallos aen de Zuydoostzyde van Lacerota     

The second Demonstration, In Which Are to be seen the Canary Islands.  
THe chiefest Islands of the Canaries are 7 in number, Lancerota, Forteventura, or Porteventura, great Canaries, Teneriffe, Gomera, Palma, and Ferro. The Island Lancerota lieth from Cape S. Vincent southsouthwest distant about 165 leagues. It hath one haven upon the north-east end, betwixt the two Islands Alagranca and Gratiosa, where men may come in from the northwards & lie landlockt for all winds, it is deep there 10, 15, and 20 fathom, and they may sail out again to the southwards along by Lancerota. At the east side of Lancerota is a good road before the Town of Lancerota, there lieth a bank to the northwards of it, which men must avoid, and run about to the southwards of it, there they may anchor in 10, 11, and 12 fathom: on the same southeast side lie also two bad havens a great shot of a cast piece one from the other, the northermost is called Porto de Naos, & the southermost Porto de Cavallos, which we have demonstrated in a large volume in the northwest corner of this card, & shown the depths with number of feet at high water & springtide.  
Porto de Naos, the deepest of these bad-havens, goeth in northwest and by north betwixt two ledges of rocks, there stand two beacons of heaps of stones, in manner as the warders of Norway, which you must bring and keep one in the other, and sail so right in through betwixt the two foresaid ledges of rocks. The shoalest of the Bar betwixt the two ledges of rocks, is but a short space, a great ships length long and is deep at high watet 17 foot, & at low water seven foot, so soon as you shall be over, it will presently be 20, 24, 26, & 28 foot deep, than you must edge up n. and then presently north-east & anchor behind the rocks which lie to the northwards of the Bar, in the Channel the ground is rocky, hard, & uneven. If a ship should come to strike there, it should presently be broken. The ledge is so without as it is within, very steep, so that you may come very close unto it, where the anchors stand marked, it is altogether clean sandy ground, 30 & 34 foot deep at high water with a sea wind there can go here a great sea, but that happeneth seldom, for the winds; do blow most out of the n. & n.e. and therefore it is almost always there smooth water. This haven is very narrow betwixt the rocks; which lie to seawards of you & the shore, it is but a little more than a great cables length broad, and from the haven's mouth to the main land about a Cables length & a half. The Havens mouth also is not broad, but at high water the rocks do flow a good ways on both sides under water, which at low water again are uncovered.  
Betwixt Porto de Naos and Porto de Cavallos lie two little Islands, the northermost is the greatest, at high water men may go through with boats within the Islands, into Porto de Cavallos, but not with ships for at low water it falleth dry there within. Upon the southermost little Island standeth an old Castle fallen down, which heretofore hath been spoilt by Englishmen. From the south side of that little Island shooteth off a riffe, & to the southwards or the w. wards of it lieth in the Bar, which is very narrow, not above ten fathom broad, upon the main land stand also two little beakons, as at Porto de Naos, which you must bring one in the other, and sail so right in. At high water and springtide there is no more than twelve foot water, or an half foot more, the ground in the haven's mouth is also hard, & nothing else then rocks, where you must go in over but within it is clean sandy ground where you may lie a ground without any danger, with a ship that draweth ten or eleven foot water. At the highest water the most part of the rocks on both sides of the Havens mouth, lie under water, so that at many places men may go over them with boats. At low water there remaineth in this Havens mouth no more than a foot, or a foot and a half depth, so that a ships boat cannot go in; within men lie landlockt for all winds, and although it blow very hard, yet the water is always smooth. In both these havens a south and by west and north and by east moon maketh high water. Near the Havens there are no houses where Spaniards or Moors do dwell, then only by Porto de Cavallos a little Church, where they have Mass said on Sundays, when ships lie there. Men go from thence betwixt the Mountains to the town, which lieth 3 leag. from thence. He that will come here must provide himself with fresh water, for there is very seldom fresh water to be gotten. Upon this land there groweth neither fruit nor wine. In some good years it giveth out Wheat, baly, & Orsilly, the Inhabitants are Moor under the command of the King of Spain.  
Betwixt Lancerota and Forteventure lieth a little lIsand called Isle de Lobos, which is on the outer side, to wit, on the n. west side, very foul. Men may anchor on both sides of that Island in 15 or 20 fathom, also in six fathom a shot of a cast piece south-west and by west from the west point off the Island, there men may lie land-lockt for all winds, except for a northnorthwest and southeast winds. The coast of Forteventura is at the north-east end very foul, with many riffs that lie out, whereupon the sea doth break exceedingly.  
The Island of great Canaries lieth from Forteventura west 19 or 20 leagues distant. The road there lieth, at the east side of the Island, behind the n.e. point, thwart off a Castle that standeth upon a Chindle. The foresaid north-east point, is a very high point, with a long small and low sandstrand fast to the other land, so that when it is five or six leagues northwest or southeast from you it seemeth to be an Island asunder off from the other land. If you desire to go in there into the road, then sail about by that north-east point, alongst by the Isolettes, leaving them on the starboard side of you until that the Castle do lie near about northwest and by north from you, anchor there in eight, nine, ten, or twelve fathom, then lieth the north point north-east and by north and the south point southsoutheast from you.  
At the south end of the great Canaries is a fair sand-bay called Maspalomba, there is a good road for southerly winds, & fresh water to be gotten.  
The north point of the great Canaries, and the north-east point of Teneriffe called Punte de Nago, lie westnorthwest, and eastsoutheast distant 21 leagues. In Teneriffe is a road on the southeast side before the town S. Cruz, there is a fair sand-bay, a little to the northwards of the town is the best road in 20, or 24 fathom, and then Punte de Nago, the north-east point of Teneriffe lieth northnortheast from you, and the south point south and by west. When the Pico of Teneriffe is westsouthwest from you, then are you open before this road of S. Cruz, and when you lie in the road of S. Cruz, you may see the Island of great Canaries southeast from you about 13 leagues.  
On the northwest side of Teneriffe lieth the road of Garrichica, from the north-east point Punte de Nago westsouthwest and south-west & by west eight or nine leagues; He that will anchor before Garrichica, let him anchor to the westwards of the rock with the cross called the Lion, so that the foresaid rock do lie southeast and by east and southeast from him, than he shall lie right before the town, and may see right into the street of the town, through the Cloister of S. Dominicus, there is clean ground in 36 or 40 fathom, the Pieck lieth then over the w. side off the town, nearer to the land, or to the rock then in 35 or 36 fathom it is not clean, & westwards towards the riffe Lapania it is also foul ground. This is a dangerous road, therefore every one that cometh here, must be very careful to have their anchors, cables, and sails very preedy and ready for to shift roads as soon as it beginneth to be a storm.  
There is also a little haven before Garrichica, where men may lie with a few ships. For to sail in there, you must have a Pilot. On the west side of the haven's mouth lieth a rock under water, but the sea breaketh always upon it, you may anchor within in the haven in five or six fathom, and must bring two anchors out a head to seawards, with a cable on the rocks, and an anchor out a stern, on the land, so that the ships cannot wend too and again, the ground is there foul, you must buy up your cables with buys and cask for to keep them from the ground. This is a good haven in Summer, than it is commonly good weather, but in the winter it is not good to come in there with a ship, for the grown sea out of the n. west cometh running in there sometimes so forcible and strong, that it is not possible to hold a ship, although she had to anchors out. It hath happened certain years past that there was lost in the same haven a great many ships; and a great many houses of the same town washed away with the great water.  
Betwixt Garrichica and the east end of Teneriffe, are three lading places more for to lad wine at, as Maramela Relecho, and Oratama.  
At the south-west end of Teneriffe lieth also another little haven or Bay where is much wines laden called Adessa, there is also good lying except it be with a s. w. wind, which bloweth there open in.  
From Teneriffe to the Island la Palma, the course is westnorthwest twenty leagues. On the southeast side la Palma, lieth a fair Bay, with a town and lade-place called S. Cruz. He that cometh from the northwards, and desireth to anchor in the road, let him run so far in the Bay until he be to the southwards, or past the head, or the bridge, and anchor there in 25 or 30 fathom. In winter time men must not anchor so near the strand, because of the southeast or southsoutheast winds, for than they should lie too near the strand. Men lie there moored with two anchors for the sea wind, with a small anchor out a stern for to keep the ship right in the road there lieth to the eastwards of the town a high white rock with a cross, there is the best road. A little to the northwards of the town, is a fair sand-bay, there is good anchoring in 20, 30, or 35 fathom, according as men will lie far off, the Road is called the Rammell road. When men lie in the road of Palma, they may see the Pieck of Teneriffe lie eastsoutheast from them. The Island Palma is very high and full of trees, whereby it is easy to be known.  
On the south-west side of la Palma is another place, where men lad wines called Tassa Corda.  
About 5 leagues west from the west end of Teneriffe, lieth the Island Gomera, which hath on the n. e. side a good haven of 10 fathom deep, where is good lying almost for all winds, better than in any of the other Islands, but there is nothing to lad: Men may alsoo anchor without before the haven in 20 fathom, but they must shift roads there as at Garrichica.  
The road of Adessa in Teneriffe lieth right over against it, east off from it about 5 leagues.  
The road of Palma lieth from this haven in Gomera northwest and by north 16 leagues.  
The Island Ferro lieth from the Island Palma south and by west, distant 13 leagues.  

Of the Tides.  
On the Islands of the Canaries maketh at the most places the natural tide, to wit, a south-west and north-east Moon the highest water.   

Of the Courses of the Sun.  

From the west point of Forteventura to the Island of great Canaries east and west 19 or 20 leagues.  
From the north point of the Canaries to Punte de Nago the north-east point of Teneriffe westn. w. 21 leagues.  
From Punte de Nago to Garrichica westsouthwest and south-west and by west 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Teneriffe to Isle de Palma w.n.w. 18 leagues.  
From the west end of Teneriffe to Gomera w. 5 leagues.  
From the Palma to Ferro south and by west 13 leagues.  
From great Canaries to Savages northn. w. 40 leagues.  
From Garrichica to Savages northnortheast and north and by east 30 leagues.  
From Teneriffe to the Isle de Madera north 72 leagues.  
From great Canaries to the east end of Madera north & by west 85 leagues.  
From la Palma to Madera north and by e. 60 leagues.  
From Savages to the Serters of Madera n. 46 leagues.  
The outermost of the Serters lieth from Madera 4 leagues.  
From Madera to S. Michael's n. w. 136 leagues.  
From the west end of Forteventura to the C. de Bajador south and south and by west 20 leagues.  
From Lancerota to the Cape S. Vincent northnortheast 180 leagues.  
From great Canaries to Cales north-east 240 leagues.  
From great Canaries to the C. S. Vincent, north-east and by north 210 leagues.  
From great Canaries to Roxent northnortheast somewhat easterly 240 leagues.  
From great Canaries to C. de Finisterre northnortheast somewhat northerly 307 leagues.  
From Teneriffe to the Lizart northnortheast distant 467 leagues.  
From the Palma to Cape S. Vincent n.e. 224 leagues.  
From Madera to Cape de Geer eastsoutheast 128 leag.  
From Madera to Saffia east 130 leagues.  
From Madera to Cales eastnortheast 200 leagues.  
From Madera to Roxent north-east 178 leagues.  
From Madera to the C. Finisterre north-east & by north somewhat northerly 245 leagues.    

Heights.  

The Island Lancerota lieth in 28 degrees. 35 minutes.  
The north end of the great Canaries lieth in 28 degrees. 14 minutes.  
The north end of the Teneriffe in 28 degrees. 40 minutes.  
Isle de Palma in 28 degrees. 10 minutes.  
Savages in 30 degrees.  
The southermost part of Madera in 32 degrees.  
But the northermost in 32 degrees. 30 minutes.  
Porto Santo in 33 degrees.    

How these Lands do show themselves at sea.  

Hil with the Mizzen.  
Thus showeth the south-coast of Forteventura, when the hill with the white Mizzen is northwest and by north about aleague from you.  
Thus showeth the northwest side of great Canaries.  
Thus showeth Teneriffe, when the Pico is westsouthwest from you, and then you are open before the Road of Saint Cruz.  
Thus showeth Teneriffe when the Pico is southeast from you, and then are you open before the Road of Garrichica.  
When la Palma is about east from you 16 or 17 leagues, than it ariseth thus.  
When Porto Santo is s. and by w. from you about 9 leag. than it showeth itself thus.  
Thus showeth the Island Palma being south and south and by east nine or ten leagues from you.  
Thus showeth the Island Palma being south-west & by south 4 or 5 leagues from you.  
When Savages is eastsoutheast five leagues from you, it showeth itself thus.  
When Savages is eastsoutheast five leagues from you it ariseth thus.  
When Porto Sancto is about south, 5 or 6 leagues from you, than showeth itself thus.  
Thus showeth the Island Madera, when you come from the northwards, & that the midst of the Island is 10 or 12 leagues from you, the southeast end is very ragged when you are near by it, the northwest end is a steep point going sloping down.  
Thus showeth the Island Madera being south-west from you.  
When Madera is westsouthwest from you 13 leagues. it ariseth thus.  
When Madera is south from you 16 leagues, it showeth itself thus.     
FINIS.